FSV30 Spectrum Analyzer Manual

R&S® FSVA/FSV
Signal and Spectrum Analyzer

Operating Manual
(;ÚÙ:2)
1176.7510.02 ─ 10
Operating Manual
This manual describes the following R&S FSVA/FSV models with firmware version 3.30 and higher:
● R&S®FSVA4 (1321.3008K05)
● R&S®FSVA7 (1321.3008K08)
● R&S®FSVA13 (1321.3008K14)
● R&S®FSVA30 (1321.3008K31)
● R&S®FSVA40 (1321.3008K41)
● R&S®FSV4 (1321.3008K04)
● R&S®FSV7 (1321.3008K07)
● R&S®FSV13 (1321.3008K13)
● R&S®FSV30 (1321.3008K30)
● R&S®FSV40 (1321.3008K39/1321.3008K40)
It also applies to the following R&S®FSV models. However, note the differences described in Chapter 1.2,
"Notes for Users of R&S FSV 1307.9002Kxx Models", on page 5.
● R&S®FSV3 (1307.9002K03)
● R&S®FSV7 (1307.9002K07)
● R&S®FSV13 (1307.9002K13)
● R&S®FSV30 (1307.9002K30)
● R&S®FSV40 (1307.9002K39/1307.9002K40)
In addition to the base unit, the following options are described:

● R&S FSV-B9/10 (1310.9545.02/1310.9551.02)
● R&S FSVA-B11 (1321.3714.xx)
● R&S FSV-B17 (1310.9568.02)
● R&S FSV-B21 (1310.9597.02)
● R&S FSV-B22 (1310.9600.02)
● R&S FSV-B24 (1310.9616.13)
● R&S®FSVA-B40 (1329.0214.02) / R&S®FSV-B70 (1310.9645.02)
● R&S FSV-B160 (1311.2015.02/1311.2015.13/1311.2015.40)
● R&S FSV-K9 (1310.8203.02)
● R&S FSV-K14 (1310.8255.02)
© 2017 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164
Email: [email protected]
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of their owners.
Throughout this manual, products from Rohde & Schwarz are indicated without the ® symbol , e.g. R&S®FSV is indicated as R&S
FSV.
R&S® FSVA/FSV Contents
Contents
1 Preface.................................................................................................... 5
1.1 For Your Safety............................................................................................................. 5
1.2 Notes for Users of R&S FSV 1307.9002Kxx Models.................................................. 5
1.3 Conventions Used in the Documentation...................................................................6
1.4 How to Use the Help System........................................................................................7
2 Documentation Overview...................................................................... 9
2.1 Quick Start Guide..........................................................................................................9
2.2 Operating Manuals and Help........................................................................................9
2.3 Service Manual.............................................................................................................. 9
2.4 Instrument Security Procedures................................................................................10
2.5 Basic Safety Instructions........................................................................................... 10
2.6 Data Sheets and Brochures....................................................................................... 10
2.7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment (OSA)..................................... 10
2.8 Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc....................................... 10
3 Quick Start............................................................................................ 11
3.1 Front and Rear Panel View.........................................................................................11
3.2 Preparing for Use........................................................................................................ 23
3.3 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options..........................................47
3.4 Basic Operations.........................................................................................................49
3.5 Basic Measurement Examples...................................................................................77
3.6 Advanced Measurement Examples......................................................................... 105
4 Instrument Functions........................................................................ 135

4.1 General Settings, Printout and Instrument Settings..............................................138
4.2 Measurement Parameters........................................................................................ 182
4.3 Measurement Functions...........................................................................................248
4.4 Measurement Modes.................................................................................................405
4.5 Instrument Functions - I/Q Analyzer....................................................................... 410
4.6 Instrument Functions – Tracking Generator (Options R&S FSV-B9/ R&S FSV-B10)
.................................................................................................................................... 444
4.7 Instrument Functions - R&S Digital I/Q Interface (Option R&S FSV-B17)............469
4.8 Instrument Functions – External Mixer (Option R&S FSV-B21)........................... 487
Operating Manual 1176.7510.02 ─ 10 3

R&S® FSVA/FSV Contents
4.9 Instrument Functions - Power Sensor (R&S FSV-K9)........................................... 508

4.10 Instrument Functions - Spectrogram Measurements............................................521
5 Remote Control.................................................................................. 534

5.1 Remote Control - Basics.......................................................................................... 536
5.2 Controlling the R&S FSVA/FSV Remotely.............................................................. 574
5.3 Remote Control – Commands..................................................................................596
5.4 Remote Control – Programming Examples.......................................................... 1000
6 Maintenance..................................................................................... 1044
6.1 Cleaning................................................................................................................... 1044
6.2 Storing and Packing............................................................................................... 1045
6.3 List of Available Power Cables.............................................................................. 1045
7 Error Messages................................................................................ 1046
List of Commands............................................................................1048
Index..................................................................................................1065

R&S® FSVA/FSV Preface
Notes for Users of R&S FSV 1307.9002Kxx Models
1 Preface
This chapter provides safety-related information, an overview of the user documenta-
tion and the conventions used in the documentation.
1.1 For Your Safety

The R&S FSVA/FSV is designated for use in industrial, administrative, and laboratory
environments. Use the R&S FSVA/FSV only for its designated purpose. Observe the
safety and usage instructions documented in the user manual, as well as operating
conditions and performance limits stated in the data sheet.
The product documentation helps you use the R&S FSVA/FSV safely and efficiently.
Keep the product documentation in a safe place and pass it on to subsequent users.
Safety information is part of the product documentation. It warns you about potential
dangers and gives instructions how to prevent personal injury or damage caused by
dangerous situations. Safety information is provided as follows:
● In the "Basic Safety Instructions", safety issues are grouped according to subjects.
For example, one subject is electrical safety. The "Basic Safety Instructions" are
delivered with the R&S FSVA/FSV in different languages in print.
● Throughout the documentation, safety instructions are provided when you need to
take care during setup or operation. Always read the safety instructions carefully.
Make sure to comply fully with them. Do not take risks and do not underestimate
the potential danger of small details such as a damaged power cable.
1.2 Notes for Users of R&S FSV 1307.9002Kxx Models

Users of R&S FSV 1307.9002Kxx models should consider the following differences to
the description of the newer R&S FSVA/FSV 1321.3008Kxx models:
● Functions that are based on the Windows 10 operating system (e.g. printing or set-
ting up networks) may have a slightly different appearance or require different set-
tings on the Windows XP based models. For such functions, refer to the Windows
documentation or the documentation originally provided with the R&S FSV instru-
ment.
● The R&S FSV 1307.9002K03 model is restricted to a maximum frequency of
3 GHz, whereas the R&S FSVA/FSV1321.3008K04 model has a maximum fre-
quency of 4 GHz.
● The bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 (1311.2015.xx) is not available for
the R&S FSV 1307.9002Kxx models. The maximum usable I/Q analysis bandwidth
for these models is 28 MHz, or with option R&S FSV-B70, 40 MHz.

Conventions Used in the Documentation
1.3 Conventions Used in the Documentation
1.3.1 Typographical Conventions
The following text markers are used throughout this documentation:
Convention Description
"Graphical user interface ele- All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as
ments" dialog boxes, menus, options, buttons, and softkeys are enclosed by
quotation marks.
KEYS Key names are written in capital letters.
File names, commands, File names, commands, coding samples and screen output are distin-
program code guished by their font.
Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.
Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font.
"References" References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota-

tion marks.
1.3.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions
When operating the instrument, several alternative methods may be available to per-
form the same task. In this case, the procedure using the touchscreen is described.
Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an addition-
ally connected mouse. The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or
the on-screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating pro-
cedures.
The term "select" may refer to any of the described methods, i.e. using a finger on the
touchscreen, a mouse pointer in the display, or a key on the instrument or on a key-
board.
1.3.3 Notes on Screenshots
When describing the functions of the product, we use sample screenshots. These
screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and
possible interdependencies between parameters. The shown values may not represent
realistic usage scenarios.
The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product, that is: with all options instal-
led. Thus, some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par-
ticular product configuration.

How to Use the Help System
1.4 How to Use the Help System
Calling context-sensitive and general help
► To display the general help dialog box, press the HELP key on the front panel.
The help dialog box "View" tab is displayed. A topic containing information about
the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed.
For standard Windows dialog boxes (e.g. File Properties, Print dialog etc.), no context-
sensitive help is available.
► If the help is already displayed, press the softkey for which you want to display
help.
A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed.
If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time, the submenu
of the softkey is displayed.
Contents of the help dialog box

The help dialog box contains four tabs:
● "Contents" - contains a table of help contents
● "View" - contains a specific help topic
● "Index" - contains index entries to search for help topics
● "Zoom" - contains zoom functions for the help display
To change between these tabs, press the tab on the touchscreen.
Navigating in the table of contents

● To move through the displayed contents entries, use the UP ARROW and DOWN
ARROW keys. Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign.
● To display a help topic, press the ENTER key. The "View" tab with the correspond-
ing help topic is displayed.
● To change to the next tab, press the tab on the touchscreen.
Navigating in the help topics

● To scroll through a page, use the rotary knob or the UP ARROW and DOWN
ARROW keys.
● To jump to the linked topic, press the link text on the touchscreen.
Searching for a topic
1. Change to the "Index" tab.

How to Use the Help System
2. Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in. The entries starting with
these characters are displayed.
3. Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key.
4. Select the suitable keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or
the rotary knob.
5. Press the ENTER key to display the help topic.

The "View" tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed.
Changing the zoom
1. Change to the "Zoom" tab.
2. Set the zoom using the rotary knob. Four settings are available: 1-4. The smallest
size is selected by number 1, the largest size is selected by number 4.
Closing the help window
► Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel.

R&S® FSVA/FSV Documentation Overview
Service Manual
2 Documentation Overview
This section provides an overview of the R&S FSVA/FSV user documentation. Unless
specified otherwise, you find the documents on the R&S FSVA/FSV product page at:
www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/FSVA
2.1 Quick Start Guide

Introduces the R&S FSVA/FSV and describes how to set up and start working with the
product. Includes basic operations, typical measurement examples, and general infor-
mation, e.g. safety instructions, etc. A printed version is delivered with the instrument.
A PDF version is available for download on the Internet.
2.2 Operating Manuals and Help

Separate operating manuals are provided for the base unit and the software options:
● Base unit manual
Contains the description of all instrument modes and functions. It also provides an
introduction to remote control, a complete description of the remote control com-
mands with programming examples, and information on maintenance, instrument
interfaces and error messages. Includes the contents of the getting started manual.
● Software option manual
Contains the description of the specific functions of an option. Basic information on
operating the R&S FSVA/FSV is not included.
The contents of the operating manuals are available as help in the R&S FSVA/FSV.
The help offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information for the
base unit and the software options.
All operating manuals are also available for download or for immediate display on the
Internet.
2.3 Service Manual

Describes the performance test for checking the rated specifications, module replace-
ment and repair, firmware update, troubleshooting and fault elimination, and contains
mechanical drawings and spare part lists.
The service manual is available for registered users on the global Rohde & Schwarz
information system (GLORIS, https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com).

R&S® FSVA/FSV Documentation Overview
Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc.
2.4 Instrument Security Procedures

Deals with security issues when working with the R&S FSVA/FSV in secure areas. It is
available for download on the Internet.
2.5 Basic Safety Instructions

Contains safety instructions, operating conditions and further important information.
The printed document is delivered with the instrument.
2.6 Data Sheets and Brochures

The data sheet contains the technical specifications of the R&S FSVA/FSV. It also lists
the options and their order numbers as well as optional accessories.
The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific char-
acteristics.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/brochure-datasheet/FSV
2.7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment

(OSA)
The release notes list new features, improvements and known issues of the current
firmware version, and describe the firmware installation.
The open source acknowledgment document provides verbatim license texts of the
used open source software.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/FSV
2.8 Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers,

etc.
These documents deal with special applications or background information on particu-
lar topics.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/appnlication/FSV

R&S® FSVA/FSV Quick Start
Front and Rear Panel View
3 Quick Start
Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S FSVA/FSV Quick
Start Guide.
● Front and Rear Panel View..................................................................................... 11
● Preparing for Use.................................................................................................... 23
● Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options.......................................... 47
● Basic Operations.....................................................................................................49
● Basic Measurement Examples................................................................................77
● Advanced Measurement Examples...................................................................... 105
3.1 Front and Rear Panel View
3.1.1 Front Panel View
This chapter describes the front panel, including all function keys and connectors.
Figure 3-1 shows the front panel view of the R&S FSVA. (The R&S FSV is very simi-
lar.) The individual elements are described in more detail in the subsequent sections.
8 9
10 11
1
4
13
12
14 15
2
16 17 18 19
20 21 22
3
5 6 7
Figure 3-1: Front panel view of an R&S FSVA
No. Description See
1 General device functions e.g. Change Chapter 3.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",
mode, Setup, Default Settings, Help. on page 12
2 USB connector for external devices, e.g. Chapter 3.1.1.3, "Connectors on the Front Panel",
keyboard, mouse on page 16

No. Description See
3 ON/OFF switch Chapter 3.2.1.8, "Switching the Instrument On and Off",

on page 32
4 Touchscreen; display area for measure- Chapter 3.1.1.2, "Touchscreen Display", on page 15
ment results
5 Auxiliary functions to display Windows Chapter 3.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",
Start menu or on-screen keyboard on page 12
6 Display options for screen Chapter 3.4.4, "Changing the Display", on page 70
7 Navigation options for screen menu Chapter 3.4.2.6, "Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys",
on page 61
8 Measurement control settings, e.g. fre- Chapter 3.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",
quency, levels on page 12
9 Marker functions Chapter 3.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",

on page 12
10 Measurement configuration Chapter 3.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",

on page 12
11 Measurement start Chapter 3.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",

on page 12
12 Numeric keyboard, units and data entry Chapter 3.4.2.4, "Keypad", on page 59
keys
13 Rotary knob Chapter 3.4.2.5, "Rotary Knob", on page 61
14 Arrow keys Chapter 3.4.2.6, "Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys",

on page 61
15 Undo/redo functions Chapter 3.4.2.6, "Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys",

on page 61
16 AF output with volume control, optional Chapter 3.1.1.4, "Optional Front Panel Connectors",
on page 17
17 Noise source control Chapter 3.1.1.3, "Connectors on the Front Panel",

on page 16
18 Power sensor, optional Chapter 3.1.1.4, "Optional Front Panel Connectors",

on page 17
19 Probe power connector - supply voltage Chapter 3.1.1.3, "Connectors on the Front Panel",
for measurement accessories on page 16
20 Tracking generator output, optional Chapter 3.1.1.4, "Optional Front Panel Connectors",
on page 17
21 External mixer (LO output, IF input), Chapter 3.1.1.4, "Optional Front Panel Connectors",
optional on page 17
22 RF input Chapter 3.1.1.3, "Connectors on the Front Panel",

on page 16
3.1.1.1 Function Keys on the Front Panel
A detailed description of the corresponding menus and the other function keys is provi-
ded in chapter 6 "Instrument Functions" of the Operating Manual.

Table 3-1: Front panel function keys
Function key Assigned functions
Switches the instrument on and off.
General device functions
PRESET Resets the instrument to the default state.
SAVE/RCL Provides the functions for saving/loading instrument settings and for
managing stored files.
SETUP Provides basic instrument configuration functions, e.g.:

● Reference frequency (external/internal), noise source
● Date, time, display configuration
● LAN interface
● Self-alignment
● Firmware update and enabling of options
● Information about instrument configuration incl. firmware version and
system error messages
● Service support functions (self test etc.)
PRINT Customizes the printout, selects and configures the printer.
HELP Displays the Online Help.
MODE Provides the selection between firmware options.
External functions
Displays Windows Start menu.
Toggles the on-screen keyboard display:

● at the top of the screen
● at the bottom of the screen
● off
Display options
DISPLAY Opens a dialog box to switch screen elements on or off.
Switches between maximized and split display of focus area.
Switches focus area between table and diagram.
Navigation functions
USER Allows you to define and use softkeys to load user-specific settings files.
HOME Jumps to the highest softkey menu level of the current firmware option.
Measurement settings
FREQ Sets the center frequency as well as the start and stop frequencies for
the frequency range under consideration. This key is also used to set the
(CHANNEL)
frequency offset and the signal track function.
(CHANNEL for special applications)
SPAN Sets the frequency span to be analyzed.

AMPT Sets the reference level, the displayed dynamic range, the RF attenua-
tion and the unit for the level display.
(SCALE)
Sets the level offset and the input impedance.
Activates the preamplifier (option RF Preamplifier, R&S FSV-B22).
(SCALE for special applications)
AUTO SET Enables automatic settings for level, frequency or sweep type mode.
BW Sets the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth.
SWEEP Sets the sweep time and the number of measurement points.
Selects continuous measurement or single measurement.
TRACE Configures the measured data acquisition and the analysis of the mea-
surement data.
TRIG Sets the trigger mode, the trigger threshold, the trigger delay, and the
gate configuration in the case of gated sweep.
Marker functions
MKR Sets and positions the absolute and relative measurement markers
(markers and delta markers).
PEAK SEARCH Performs a peak search for active marker. If no marker is active, normal
marker 1 is activated and the peak search is performed for it.
MKR FUNC Provides additional analysis functions of the measurement markers:

● Frequency counter (Sig Count)
● Fixed reference point for relative measurement markers (Ref Fixed)
● Noise marker (Noise Meas)
● Phase noise
● n dB down function
● AM/FM audio demodulation (with option R&S FSV-B3)
● Peak list
MKR-> Used for search functions of the measurement markers (maximum/mini-

mum of the trace).
Assigns the marker frequency to the center frequency, and the marker
level to the reference level.
Restricts the search area (Search Limits) and characterizes the maxi-
mum points and minimum points (Peak Excursion).
Measurement functions
MEAS Provides the measurement functions:

● Measurement of multicarrier adjacent channel power (Ch Power
ACLR)
● Carrier to noise spacing (C/N C/No)
● Occupied bandwidth (OBW)
● Spectrum emission mask measurement (Spectrum Emission Mask)
● Spurious emissions (Spurious Emissions)
● Measurement of time domain power (Time Domain Power)
● Signal statistics: amplitude probability distribution (APD) and cumu-
lative complementary distribution function (CCDF)
● Third-order intercept point (TOI)
● AM modulation depth (AM Mod Depth)
MEAS CONFIG Used to define measurement configuration.
LINES Configures display lines and limit lines.

INPUT/OUTPUT Displays softkeys for input/output functions.
Measurement start functions
RUN SINGLE Starts a single new measurement (Single Sweep Mode).
RUN CONT Starts a continuous measurement (Continuous Sweep Mode).
Function execution
UNDO Reverts last operation.
REDO Repeats previously reverted operation.
3.1.1.2 Touchscreen Display
All measurement results are displayed in the screen on the front panel. Additionally,
the screen display provides status and setting information and allows you to switch
between various measurement tasks. The screen is touch-sensitive, offering an alter-
native means of user interaction for quick and easy handling of the device.
The Figure 3-2 shows the touchscreen display of the R&S FSVA/FSV. The individual
elements are described in more detail in Chapter 3.4, "Basic Operations",
on page 49.
Figure 3-2: Touchscreen elements

1 = Toolbar with standard application functions, e.g. print, save/open file etc.
2 = Tabs for individual measurement tasks
3 = Channel information bar for current measurement settings
4 = Diagram header with diagram-specific (trace) information
5 = Measurement results area
6 = Diagram footer with diagram-specific information, depending on measurement mode
7 = Error indicator
8 = Error message, if available
9 = Device status
10 = Progress bar for measurement
11 = Date and time display
12 = Softkeys for menu access
3.1.1.3 Connectors on the Front Panel
This section describes the front connectors and interfaces of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
Optional connectors and interfaces are indicated by the option name in brackets. Most
connectors on the front panel (except for USB) are located at the bottom right-hand
side.
USB
The front panel provides two female USB connectors to connect devices like a key-
board or mouse. Also a memory stick can be connected to store and reload instrument
settings and measurement data.
NOISE SOURCE CONTROL

The noise source control female connector is used to provide the supply voltage for an
external noise source, e.g., to measure the noise figure and gain of amplifiers and fre-
quency converting DUTs.
Conventional noise sources require a voltage of +28 V in order to be switched on and
0 V to be switched off. The output supports a maximum load of 100 mA.
RF INPUT 50Ω
The RF input is to be connected to the DUT via a cable equipped with an appropriate
connector.
Risk of instrument damage

Do not overload the input. For maximum allowed values, see the data sheet.
For AC-coupling, a DC input voltage of 50 V must never be exceeded. For DC-cou-
pling, DC voltage must not be applied at the input. In both cases, noncompliance will
destroy the input mixers.
PROBE POWER

The R&S FSVA/FSV provides a connector for supply voltages of +15 V to -12 V and
ground for active probes and preamplifiers. A maximum current of 140 mA is available.
This connector is suitable as power supply for high-impedance probes from Agilent.
POWER SENSOR
The LEMOSA female connector is used to connect power sensors of the R&S NRP
family (requires option R&S FSVA/FSV-K9). For details on supported power sensors
see the data sheet.
3.1.1.4 Optional Front Panel Connectors
AF OUTPUT (Audio Demodulator option, R&S FSV-B3)

Headphones equipped with a miniature jack plug can be connected to the AF output
female connector. The internal impedance is 10 Ω. The output voltage can be set by
using the volume control to the right of the female connector. If a plug is connected, the
internal loudspeaker is automatically switched off.
The female connector and volume control are available only with the audio demodula-
tor option (R&S FSV-B3). To use the AF OUTPUT, in the "In-/Output" menu (INPUT/
OUTPUT key), select "Video Output". The output voltage (volume) is 1V.
Risk of hearing damage

Before putting on the headphones, make sure that the volume setting is not too high to
protect your hearing.
Tracking Generator Output (GEN OUTPUT 50Ω, Option R&S FSV-B9)

The R&S FSVA/FSV is equipped with an optional tracking generator and therefore pro-
vides a tracking generator output connector.
The output of the tracking generator is to be connected to the DUT via a cable equip-
ped with a male N connector. The female connector is available only with the tracking
generator option (R&S FSV-B9).
If the output is active, the LED is green.
Risk of damaging the tracking generator

To avoid damaging the tracking generator, make sure that the reverse power (i.e. input
power caused, for example, by reflections in the test setup) never exceeds 1 W RF
power. Do not apply a DC voltage at the output.
For details, refer to the data sheet.

Sensitive DUTs concerning matching

For DUTs with sensitive RF characteristics with regard to matching (VSWR) at the
input, insert a 10 dB attenuator between the DUT and the tracking generator.
Connections for External Mixers (EXT MIXER, Option R&S FSV-B21)

External mixers can be connected at the LO OUT/IF IN and IF IN female connectors
(option R&S FSV-B21 for R&S FSVA/FSV 30 and R&S FSVA/FSV 40 instruments).
Both two-port and three-port mixers can be used. Connect the mixer as follows:
Use the supplied coaxial cable to feed in the LO signal. If no external mixers are con-
nected to the R&S FSVA/FSV, cover the two front connectors LO OUT / IF IN and IF
IN with the SMA caps supplied.
Three-port mixer
1. Connect the LO OUT / IF IN output of the R&S FSVA/FSV to the LO port of the
external mixer.
2. Connect the IF IN input of the R&S FSVA/FSV to the IF port of the external mixer.
3. Feed the signal to be measured to the RF input of the external mixer.

Two-port mixer
1. 1. Connect the LO OUT / IF IN output of the R&S FSVA/FSV to the LO/IF port of
the external mixer. The nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm.
Because of the diplexer contained in the R&S FSVA/FSV, the IF signal can be tap-
ped from the line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer.
2. Feed the signal to be measured to the RF input of the external mixer.
3.1.2 Rear Panel View
Figure 3-3 shows the rear panel view of the R&S FSVA/FSV. The individual elements
are described in more detail in the subsequent sections. Optional connectors and inter-
faces are indicated by the option name in brackets.

15
2 3 4 5
6 7
11 12 13 14
9 10
8 16
Figure 3-3: Rear panel view
1 = LAN
2 = TRIGGER OUTPUT
3 = IF/VIDEO
4 = USB
5 = AUX PORT
6+7 = External generator control (option B10)
8 = EXT TRIGGER / GATE IN
9+10 = DIGITAL BASEBAND INPUT/OUTPUT connectors (option B17)
11 = MONITOR (VGA)
12 = REF IN
13 = REF OUT
14 = GPIB interface
15 = AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch with fuse
16 = EXT REF with OCXO option (-B4)
3.1.2.1 Standard Rear Panel Connectors
AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch

An AC power supply connector and main power switch are located in a unit on the rear
panel of the instrument.
Main power switch function:
Position 1: The instrument is in operation.
Position O: The entire instrument is disconnected from the AC power supply.
For details refer to Chapter 3.2.1.8, "Switching the Instrument On and Off",
on page 32.

Warm-up time for OCXO

When the instrument is switched on, the OCXO requires an extended warm-up time
(see data sheet).
LAN
The LAN interface can be used to connect the R&S FSVA/FSV to a local network for
remote control, printouts and data transfer. The assignment of the RJ-45 connector
supports twisted-pair category 5 UTP/STP cables in a star configuration (UTP stands
for unshielded twisted pair, and STP for shielded twisted pair).
MONITOR (VGA)
The female VGA connector is used to connect an external monitor. Step-by-step
instructions how to connect an external monitor are provided in Chapter 3.2.3, "Con-
necting an External Monitor", on page 35.
EXT TRIGGER / GATE IN

The female connector for external trigger/gate input is used to control the measure-
ment by means of an external signal. The voltage levels can range from 0.5 to 3.5 V.
The default value is 1.4 V. The typical input impedance is 10 kΩ.
REF IN
As a reference signal, you can either use the internal reference, or connect an external
one. The setup menu is used to switch between the internal and an external reference.
The REF IN female connector is used as an input for a 1-20 MHz reference signal. The
required input level is 0-10 dBm.
REF OUT
This connector can be used to provide an external reference signal (e.g. the OCXO or
ultra high precision reference signal) to other devices that are connected to this instru-
ment. The REF OUT female connector can output a 10 MHz reference signal with an
output level of 0 dBm.
GPIB interface
The GPIB interface is in compliance with IEEE488 and SCPI. A computer for remote
control can be connected via this interface. To set up the connection, a shielded cable
is recommended. For more details refer to chapter 7 "Remote Control Basics" in the
Operating Manual.
TRIGGER OUTPUT
The female BNC connector can be used to provide a signal to another device. The sig-
nal is TTL compatible (0 V / 5 V). The "Trigger out" softkey in the "In-/Output" menu
(INPUT/OUTPUT key) is used to control the trigger output.
IF/VIDEO
The female BNC connector can be used for various outputs:

● Intermediate frequency (IF) output of approximately 20 MHz

● Video output (1V)
The "In-/Output" menu (INPUT/OUTPUT key) is used to select between the IF and
video output.
USB
The rear panel provides two additional female USB connectors to connect devices like
keyboard and mouse. Also, a memory stick can be connected to store and reload
instrument settings and measurement data.
EMI impact on measurement results

Electromagnetic interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results. To avoid any
impact, make sure that the following conditions are met:
● Use suitable double-shielded cables.
● Do not use USB connecting cables exceeding 1 m in length.
● Use only USB devices that remain within the permissible EMI limits.
● Always terminate any connected IEC-bus cables with an instrument or controller.
AUX PORT
The 9 pole SUB-D male connector provides control signals for controlling external devi-
ces. The voltage levels are of the TTL type (5 V).
Pin Signal Description
1 +5 V / max. 250 mA Supply voltage for external circuits
2 to 7 I/O Control lines for user ports (see User manual)
8 GND Ground
9 READY FOR TRIGGER Signal indicating that the instrument is ready to

receive a trigger signal (Low active = 0 V)
Short-circuit hazard
Always observe the designated pin assignment. A short-circuit can damage the port.
3.1.2.2 Optional Rear Panel Connectors
OCXO option (R&S FSV-B4)

This option generates a very precise 10 MHz reference signal with an output level of ≥
0 dBm. If installed, and if no external signal or ultra high precision reference is used
(see "Ultra High Precision Reference Option (R&S FSV-B14)" on page 23), this sig-

Preparing for Use
nal is used as an internal reference. It can also be used to synchronize other connec-
ted devices via the REF OUT connector.

(see data sheet).
Ultra High Precision Reference Option (R&S FSV-B14)

Alternatively to the OCXO reference, an ultra high precision reference (option
R&S FSV-B14) is available. This option generates an even more precise 10 MHz refer-
ence signal with an output level of ≥ 0 dBm. If installed, and if no external signal is
used, this signal is used as an internal reference (also if an OCXO reference is instal-
led). It can also be used to synchronize other connected devices via the REF OUT
connector.
External Generator Control Option (R&S FSV-B10)

The external generator control option provides an additional GPIB and an AUX
CONTROL connector.
The GPIB connector can be used to connect the external generator to the R&S FSVA/
FSV.
The female AUX CONTROL connector is required for TTL synchronization, if suppor-
ted by the generator.
For details on connecting an external generator see the "External Generator Control"
section of the R&S FSVA/FSV User Manual.
Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSV-B17)

The R&S FSVA/FSV Digital Baseband Interface option (R&S FSV-B17) provides an
online digital I/Q data interface on the rear panel of the instrument for input and output.
The digital input and output can be enabled in the base unit or in one of the applica-
tions (where available).
3.2 Preparing for Use
3.2.1 Putting into Operation
This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the R&S FSVA/FSV
for the first time.

Preparing for Use
Risk of injury due to disregarding safety information

Observe the information on appropriate operating conditions provided in the data sheet
to prevent personal injury or damage to the instrument. Read and observe the basic
safety instructions provided with the instrument, in addition to the safety instructions in
the following sections. In particular:
● Do not open the instrument casing.
Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions

Specific operating conditions are required to ensure accurate measurements and to
avoid damage to the instrument. Observe the information on appropriate operating
conditions provided in the basic safety instructions and the instrument's data sheet.
Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions

An unsuitable operating site or test setup can damage the instrument and connected
devices. Before switching on the instrument, observe the information on appropriate
operating conditions provided in the data sheet. In particular, ensure the following:
● All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded. The
minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm.
● The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation.
● The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections.
● The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet.
● Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges.
● Signal outputs are connected correctly and are not overloaded.
Instrument damage caused by electrostatic discharge

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage the electronic components of the instrument
and the device under test (DUT). Electrostatic discharge is most likely to occur when
you connect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the instrument's test ports. To pre-
vent electrostatic discharge, use a wrist strap and cord and connect yourself to the
ground, or use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination.

Preparing for Use
EMI impact on measurement results

Electromagnetic interference (EMI) may affect the measurement results.
To suppress generated electromagnetic interference (EMI):
● Use suitable shielded cables of high quality. For example, use double-shielded RF
and LAN cables.
● Always terminate open cable ends.
● Note the EMC classification in the data sheet.
3.2.1.1 Unpacking and Checking the Instrument
To remove the instrument from its packaging and check the equipment for complete-
ness, proceed as follows:
1. Pull off the polyethylene protection pads from the instrument's rear feet.
2. Carefully remove the pads from the instrument handles at the front.
3. Pull off the corrugated cardboard cover that protects the rear of the instrument.
4. Carefully unthread the corrugated cardboard cover at the front that protects the
instrument handles and remove it.
5. Check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory
lists for the various items.
6. Check the instrument for any damage. If there is damage, immediately contact the
carrier who delivered the instrument. Make sure not to discard the box and packing
material.
Packing material
Retain the original packing material. If the instrument needs to be transported or ship-
ped later, you can use the material to protect the control elements and connectors.
3.2.1.2 Accessory List
The instrument comes with the following accessories:

● Power cable
● Quick Start Guide
3.2.1.3 Placing or Mounting the Instrument
The R&S FSVA/FSV is designed for use under laboratory conditions, either on a bench
top or in a rack.

Preparing for Use
Bench Top Operation

If the R&S FSVA/FSV is operated on a bench top, the surface should be flat. The
instrument can be used in horizontal position, standing on its feet, or with the support
feet on the bottom extended.
Risk of injury if feet are folded out

The feet can fold in if they are not folded out completely or if the instrument is shifted.
Collapsing feet can cause injury or damage the instrument.
● Fold the feet completely in or out to ensure stability of the instrument. Never shift
the instrument when the feet are folded out.
● When the feet are folded out, do not work under the instrument or place anything
underneath.
● The feet can break if they are overloaded. The overall load on the folded-out feet
must not exceed 500 N.

Preparing for Use
Risk of injury if stacking heavy instruments

A stack of instruments can tilt over and cause injury if not stacked correctly. Further-
more, the instruments at the bottom of the stack can be damaged due to the load
imposed by the instruments on top.
Observe the following instructions when stacking instruments:
● Never stack more than three instruments. If you need to stack more than three
instruments, install them in a rack.
● The overall load imposed on the lowest instrument must not exceed 500 N.
● It is best if all instruments have the same dimensions (width and length).
If you need to stack smaller instruments on the top, the overall load imposed on the
lowest instrument must not exceed 250 N.
● If the instruments have foldable feet, fold them in completely.
Rackmounting
The R&S FSVA/FSV can be installed in a rack using a rack adapter kit (for the order
no., see data sheet). The installation instructions are part of the adapter kit.
Risk of instrument damage due to insufficient airflow in a rack

If the instrument is run with insufficient airflow for a longer period, the instrument over-
heats, which can disturb the operation and even cause damage.
Make sure that all fan openings are unobstructed, that the airflow perforations are
unimpeded, and that the minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm.
3.2.1.4 Connecting the AC Power
The R&S FSVA/FSV is equipped with an AC power supply connector. The

R&S FSVA/FSV can be used with different AC power voltages and adapts itself auto-

Preparing for Use
matically to it. Refer to the datasheet for the requirements of voltage and frequency.
The AC power connector is located on the rear panel of the instrument.
► Connect the R&S FSVA/FSV to the AC power supply using the supplied power
cable.
Since the instrument is assembled in line with the specifications for safety class
EN61010, it may only be connected to an outlet that has a ground contact.
3.2.1.5 Changing the AC Supply Fuse
Only fuses of the type IEC 60 127-T3.15H/250 V should be used. Those fuses are
used for all of the specified nominal AC supply voltages.
To change the AC supply fuses

1. Disconnect the power cable.
2. Open the flap covering the fuse holder using a small screwdriver (or similar).
3. Remove the fuse holder.
4. Remove both fuses and install the new ones.
5. Reinsert the fuse holder.
6. Close the flap.
3.2.1.6 Using an Optional DC Power Supply
When only DC power is available, for example from a battery or in a vehicle, an

optional DC power supply adapter (R&S FSV-B30) can be connected to the
R&S FSVA/FSV to operate the instrument with a DC voltage of 10 V to 28 V.
For installation instructions see the option's installation guide.
Shock hazard due to power supply

If you use external power supplies to supply the equipment with DC safety extra low
voltage (SELV), make sure the requirements for reinforced or double insulation are
met, according to DIN/EN/IEC 61010 (UL61010, CAN CSA C22.2 No. 61010) or
DIN/EN/IEC 60950 (UL60950, CAN CSA C22.2 No. 60950). Otherwise you may be
injured due to electrical shock.
Before switching on the R&S FSVA/FSV, switch on the DC power supply:

Preparing for Use
Switching the DC power supply on

1. Connect the R&S FSVA/FSV DC power supply device to the DC power source
(e.g. battery pack or vehicle) as described in the option's installation guide.
2. Set the switch on the DC power supply to "I". A green LED indicates that the DC
power supply is ready for operation.
3. In case of overvoltage or undervoltage, the DC power supply switches off automati-

cally. This state is indicated by means of a red LED.
4. Set the power switch on the rear panel to "I".
5. Press the ON/OFF key on the front panel. A green LED above the ON/OFF key
indicates that the instrument is ready for operation.
Switching the DC power supply off

1. Press the ON/OFF key on the front panel of the R&S FSVA/FSV and wait until the
instrument has shut down.
2. Switch off the power switch on the rear panel of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
3. Switch off the DC power supply.
3.2.1.7 Using an Optional Battery Pack and Charger (Options R&S FSV-B32/-B34)
A lithum-ion battery pack with four rechargeable batteries is available for all
R&S FSVA/FSV instruments (R&S FSV-B32). This battery pack also requires the DC
power supply adapter (option R&S FSV-B30, see Chapter 3.2.1.6, "Using an Optional
DC Power Supply", on page 28). To charge these batteries, an additional external bat-
tery charger is available (option R&S FSV-B34).
For installation instructions see the option's installation guide.
Switching on the battery pack

1. Connect the battery pack to the R&S FSVA/FSV as described in the installation
guide.
Note: The batteries must be charged before initial use, see "Charging the Battery
Pack" on page 30.
2. Set the switch on the battery pack to "I".
3. Set the switch on the DC power supply to "I". A green LED indicates that the DC
power supply is ready for operation.
4. In case of undervoltage, the DC power supply switches off automatically. This state
is indicated by means of a red LED.
5. Set the power switch on the rear panel to "I".
6. Press the ON/OFF key on the front panel. A green LED above the ON/OFF key
indicates that the instrument is ready for operation.

Preparing for Use
Switching off the battery pack

1. Press the ON/OFF key on the front panel of the R&S FSVA/FSV and wait until the
instrument has shut down.
2. Switch off the power switch on the rear panel of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
3. Switch off the DC power supply.
4. Switch off the battery pack.
Charging the Battery Pack

The battery pack is not charged in the factory. The rechargeable batteries must be
charged before they are used for the first time.
The R&S FSVA/FSV‑B34 charger is a standalone charging device which can be used
to charge all four rechargeable batteries of the R&S FSVA/FSV‑B32 battery pack
simultaneously. The rechargeable batteries can be charged at ambient temperatures of
0 °C to +45 °C.
1. Undo the knurled screws (10) on the front of the battery pack and open the flap
(11).
2. Pull the rechargeable batteries (12) by the tab out of the housing.
Figure 3-4: Battery compartment
3. Connect the power cable to the charger.
4. Insert the rechargeable batteries into the charging slots of the charger.

Preparing for Use
Figure 3-5: R&S FSVA/FSV‑B34 charger
LEDs indicate the operating state of each charging slot:

● Charging
Green LED flashes
● Charging completed
Green LED remains lit
● Fault
Red LED lights up
5. When charging has been completed, the rechargeable batteries can be removed
from the charger. The LCD on the front of the rechargeable battery indicates the
charge level in increments of 20 %.
6. Insert the rechargeable batteries into the battery pack and close the flap on the
front. Secure the flap using the two knurled screws.

Preparing for Use
3.2.1.8 Switching the Instrument On and Off
Switching the instrument on

If an optional DC power supply (R&S FSV-B30) or an optional battery pack (R&S FSV-
B32) is used, you must switch on these devices first; see Chapter 3.2.1.6, "Using an
Optional DC Power Supply", on page 28 or Chapter 3.2.1.7, "Using an Optional Battery
Pack and Charger (Options R&S FSV-B32/-B34)", on page 29.
1. Press the AC power switch on the rear panel to position "I".
The instrument is supplied with AC power.
2. Press the ON/OFF key on the front panel.

After booting, the instrument is ready for operation. A green LED above the
ON/OFF key indicates this.

(see data sheet).
Switching the instrument off

1. Press the ON/OFF key on the front panel.
2. Change the AC power switch on the rear panel to position "O", or disconnect the
instrument from the AC power supply.
The R&S FSVA/FSV changes into off mode.
Risk of losing data

If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting
the power cord, the instrument loses its current settings. Furthermore, program data
can be lost.
Press the ON/STANDBY key first to shut down the application properly.
3.2.1.9 Performing a Self Alignment and a Self Test
Operating temperature
Before performing this functional test, make sure that the instrument has reached its
operating temperature (for details, refer to the data sheet).
Performing a self alignment

1. Press the SETUP key.

Preparing for Use
2. Press the "Alignment" softkey.
3. Press the "Self Alignment" softkey.

Once the system correction values have been calculated successfully, a message
is displayed.
To display the alignment results again later

● Press the SETUP key.
● Press the "Alignment" softkey.
● Press the "Show Align Results" softkey.
Performing a self test

The self test does not need to be repeated every time the instrument is switched on. It
is only necessary when instrument malfunction is suspected.
2. Press the "More" softkey.
3. Press the "Service" softkey.
4. Press the "Selftest" softkey.

Once the instrument modules have been checked successfully, a message is dis-
played.
3.2.1.10 Checking the Supplied Options
The instrument may be equipped with both hardware and firmware options. In order to
check whether the installed options correspond to the options indicated on the delivery
note, proceed as follows.
2. Press the "System Info" softkey.
3. Press the "Versions + Options" softkey.

A list with hardware and firmware information is displayed.
4. Check the availability of the hardware options as indicated in the delivery note.
For an overview of the available options, refer to the datasheet.
3.2.2 Connecting USB Devices
The USB interfaces of the R&S FSVA/FSV allow you to connect USB devices directly
to the instrument. Increase the number of possible connections using USB hubs. Due
to the large number of available USB devices, there is almost no limit to the expan-
sions that are possible with the R&S FSVA/FSV.

Preparing for Use
The following list shows various USB devices that can be useful:
● Memory stick for easy transfer of data to/from a computer (e.g. firmware updates)
● CD-ROM drives for easy installation of firmware applications
● Keyboard or mouse to simplify the entry of data, comments, filenames, etc.
● Printer for printing measurement results
● Power sensors, e.g. of the NRP Zxy family
Installing USB devices is easy under Windows, because all USB devices are
plug&play. After a device is connected to the USB interface, the operating system
automatically searches for a suitable device driver.
If Windows does not find a suitable driver, it prompts you to specify a directory that
contains the driver software. If the driver software is on a CD, connect a USB CD-ROM
drive to the instrument before proceeding.
When a USB device is then disconnected from the R&S FSVA/FSV, Windows immedi-
ately detects the change in hardware configuration and deactivates the corresponding
driver.
All USB devices can be connected to or disconnected from the instrument during oper-
ation.
Connecting a memory stick or CD-ROM drive

If installation of a memory stick or CD-ROM drive is successful, Windows informs you
that the device is ready to use. The device is made available as a new drive and is dis-
played in Windows Explorer. The name of the drive depends on the manufacturer.
Connecting a keyboard
The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected. The default input lan-
guage is English – US.
Select "Start > Settings > Time & language > Region & language > Add a language" to
configure the keyboard language. To access the Windows operating system, press the
Windows key on the external keyboard.
Connecting a mouse
The mouse is detected automatically when it is connected.
Select "Start > Settings > Devices > Mouse & touchpad" to configure the mouse prop-
erties. To access the Windows operating system, press the Windows key on the exter-
nal keyboard.
Connecting a printer
When printing a file, the instrument checks whether a printer is connected and turned
on and whether the appropriate printer driver is installed. If necessary, printer driver
installation is initiated. You only have to install a printer driver once.
To install a printer, select "Start > Settings > Devices > Add a printer or scanner". To
access the Windows operating system, press the Windows key on the external key-
board.

Preparing for Use
You can load updated and improved driver versions or new drivers from an installation
disk, USB memory stick or another external storage medium. If the instrument is inte-
grated in a network, you can also install driver data stored in a network directory.
Select "Start > Settings > Devices > Device Manager > Update Device drivers" to
install the driver.
3.2.3 Connecting an External Monitor
You can connect an external monitor to the "MONITOR" connector on the instrument's
rear panel.
For details on the connector refer to "MONITOR (VGA)" on page 21.
1. Connect the external monitor to the R&S FSVA/FSV.
3. Press the "General Setup" softkey.
5. Press the "Configure Monitor" softkey.

The configuration of the connected monitor is determined and displayed in the
standard Windows configuration dialog box.
6. In the configuration dialog box, you can switch from the internal monitor (laptop
icon) to the external monitor (monitor icon), or both (double monitor icon).
If the external monitor is selected, the R&S FSVA/FSV display is disabled. The
screen content (measurement screen) formerly displayed on the R&S FSVA/FSV is
displayed on the external screen. If you select both monitors, the R&S FSVA/FSV
screen and the external screen are both active.
3.2.4 R&S FSVA/FSV Setup
This section describes how to setup the instrument.

● Changing the Language of the Instrument Interface...............................................35
● Selecting the Frequency Reference Signal.............................................................36
● Setting the Date and Time...................................................................................... 36
● Aligning the Touchscreen........................................................................................37
● Setting the Screen Colors....................................................................................... 38
● Setting the Display Power Save Function............................................................... 41
● Selecting and Configuring Printers..........................................................................41
3.2.4.1 Changing the Language of the Instrument Interface
You can change the language of the R&S FSVA/FSV graphical user interface (soft-
keys, dialog boxes, input settings etc.) to the any other installed language, if available.

Preparing for Use
If you do not understand the currently used interface language, this may be difficult.
Thus, the position of the required elements in the menu is provided in the following pro-
cedure for convenience.
1. Select the SETUP hardkey.
2. Select the "General Settings" softkey (5th from the top).
3. Select the "Language" softkey (6th from the top).
4. Select an available interface language.

All softkeys, dialog boxes, input settings etc. are displayed in the selected lan-
guage.
To change the default input language of an external keyboard, use the standard Win-
dows operating system function (see "Connecting a keyboard" on page 34).
Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:LANGuage on page 957
3.2.4.2 Selecting the Frequency Reference Signal
You can switch the reference signal for frequency processing of the R&S FSVA/FSV
between the internal reference and an external reference signal at 10 MHz as follows:
2. Press the "Reference Int/Ext" softkey until it is in the desired state.
External reference signal

It is important that the external reference signal is deactivated when switching from
external to internal reference to avoid interactions with the internal reference signal.
Remote commands:
ROSC:SOUR EXT
ROSC:EXT:FREQ 20
3.2.4.3 Setting the Date and Time
You can set the date and time for the internal real time clock as follows:
Opening the Date and Time Properties dialog box


Preparing for Use
3. Press the "Time + Date" softkey to open the "Date and Time Properties" dialog
box.
The "Date & Time" tab is displayed.
Changing the date

1. Press the arrow on the "Month" field to display the list.
2. Select the month from the list.
3. Select the year by clicking on the up and down arrow buttons next to the "Year"
field.
4. Select the day in the calendar display or enter the date via the keyboard.
5. Click "OK".
Remote command
SYST:DATE 2008,10,1
Changing the time

You can change hours, minutes and seconds independently of each other.
1. Select the hour, minute or seconds area of the "Time" field.
2. Enter the required setting via the keyboard or rotary knob.
3. Repeat these steps until the hour, minute and second settings are correct.
4. Click "OK".
Remote command
SYST:TIME 12,30,30
Changing the time zone

1. Select the "Time Zone" tab.
2. Press the arrow on the "Time Zone" field to display the list.
3. Select the required time zone from the list.
4. Optionally, select the "Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes"
check box.
5. Click "OK".
3.2.4.4 Aligning the Touchscreen
When the device is delivered, the touchscreen is initially aligned. However, it may
become necessary to adjust the alignment later, e.g. after an image update or after
exchanging a hard disk. If you notice that touching a specific point on the screen does
not achieve the correct response, try adjusting the alignment.

Preparing for Use
If the touchscreen is so out of order that you cannot navigate properly, connect an
external mouse to the R&S FSVA/FSV and follow the steps described below to start re-
alignment.
2. Press the "Alignment" softkey.
3. Press the "Touchscreen Alignment" softkey.
4. Using a finger or any other pointing device, press the 4 markers on the screen.
The touchscreen is aligned according to the executed pointing operations.
3.2.4.5 Setting the Screen Colors
To change the colors of the displayed objects, two default color settings are provided.
Alternatively, you can change the color of objects individually using predefined colors
or using colors of your own definition.
Some color settings are defined by the selected theme, see Chapter 3.4.4.9, "Selecting
a Theme", on page 76, and cannot be changed individually.
Displaying the Screen Colors Submenu
2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey.
4. Press the "Screen Colors" softkey.

The "Screen Colors" submenu is displayed.
Using the Default Color Settings
To select the default setting for brightness, tint and color saturation of all screen
objects:
1. In the "Screen Colors" submenu (see "Displaying the Screen Colors Submenu"
on page 38), press the "Set to Default" softkey.
The "Set User Colors to Default" dialog box is displayed.
2. Select one of the default color sets. The color schemes are selected in such a
manner that all screen elements are visible optimally regardless whether viewed
from above or below. In the instrument's default setting, "Default Colors 1" is
active.
Remote commands:

Preparing for Use
DISP:CMAP:DEF1
DISP:CMAP:DEF2
Using the Predefined Color Set
1. In the screen colors submenu (see "Displaying the Screen Colors Submenu"
on page 38), press the "Select Screen Color Set" softkey.
The "Select Screen Color Set" dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the "User Defined Colors" option.
3. In the screen colors submenu, press the "Select Object" softkey.

The "Screen Color Setup" dialog box is displayed.
4. Press the arrow on the "Selected Object" list and select the object for which you
want to change the color setting.
5. Select the color you want to use for the object. The defined color is displayed in the
"Preview" box.
6. Repeat the steps for all objects that you want to change in color.
7. To change to user-defined colors, press the "Userdefined Colors" softkey. For

details refer to"Defining and Using a User-Defined Color Set" on page 40.
8. Click "OK" to accept the new settings and to close the dialog box.
Remote command:

Preparing for Use
DISP:CMAP1 ... 41:PDEF <color>
Defining and Using a User-Defined Color Set
1. In the screen colors submenu (see "Displaying the Screen Colors Submenu"
on page 38), press the "Select Screen Color Set" softkey.
The "Select Screen Color Set" dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the "User Defined Colors" option.
3. In the "Screen Colors" submenu, press the "Select Object" softkey.

The "Screen Color Setup" dialog box is displayed.
4. Press the arrow on the "Selected Object" list and select the object for which you
want to change the color setting.
5. In the color palette, select the color you want to use for the object, or enter values
for tint, saturation and brightness.
The defined color is displayed in the "Preview" box.
Note: In the continuous color spectrum ("Tint") red is represented by 0% and blue
by 100%.
6. Repeat the steps for all objects for which you want to change the color.

Preparing for Use
7. To change to predefined colors, press the "Predefined Colors" softkey. For details
refer to "Using the Predefined Color Set" on page 39.
8. Click "OK" to accept the new settings and to close the dialog box.
Remote command:
DISP:CMAP1 ... 41:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
3.2.4.6 Setting the Display Power Save Function
The R&S FSVA/FSV provides a feature for automatically switching off its screen after a
user-defined period of time. The background lighting is disabled if no entries are made
from the front panel after the selected response time (key, softkey and rotary knob).
Activating display power save

4. Press the "Display Pwr Save On/Off" softkey.

The power save mode is activated ("On" is highlighted), and the dialog box to enter
the response time is displayed.
5. Enter the desired response time in minutes and confirm the entry with the ENTER
key.
The screen is disabled (turns dark) after the selected period of time.
Deactivating Display Power Save

► In the "Display Setup" submenu, press the "Display Pwr Save On/Off" softkey
again.
"Off" is highlighted and the power save mode is switched off.
3.2.4.7 Selecting and Configuring Printers
You can printout your measurement results using a local printer or a network printer.
The instrument supports two independent printout settings. This allows you to quickly
switch between output to a file and a printer.
Configuring the Printer and the Printout
1. Press the PRINT key.
2. Press the "Device Setup" softkey.

The "Hardcopy Setup" dialog box is displayed.

Preparing for Use
3. To change the tab in order to define the second print setting, press the tab on the
screen.
4. Define the output by selecting the required options.

● To save the hardcopy in an image file, select one of the image types. Depend-
ing on the image type, the color depth varies (e.g. 4-bit for BMP, 24-bit for PNG
and JPEG).
● To copy the image to the clipboard, select the "Clipboard" option.
● To use a preconfigured network printer, select the "Printer" option.
Note: The "Name", "Print to File" and "Orientation" fields are only available if the
"Printer" option is selected. You can perform the following steps only with the
"Printer" option selected.
5. In the "Name" field, select the desired printer type.
6. To redirect the output to a postscript file rather than a printer, select the "Print to
file" option.
7. In the "Orientation" field, select the desired orientation.
8. Optionally, activate the "Print Date and Time" option to add this information to the
printout.
9. Click "OK" to accept the settings and to close the dialog box.
Selecting the Printout Colors
1. Press the PRINT key.

Preparing for Use
2. Press the "Colors" softkey.
3. To print in color, press the "Select Print Color Set" softkey to select the color set.
The "Select Print Color Set" dialog box is displayed.
4. Select the color set by using the arrow keys and confirm your selection by pressing
the ENTER key.
● "Screen Colors (Print)" option: The current screen colors are used for the print-
out. Independently of the current screen colors, the background is printed in
white and the grid in black.
Remote command: HCOP:CMAP:DEF1
● "Optimized Colors" option: This setting improves the color clarity of the printout.
Trace 1 is printed in blue, trace 2 in black, trace 3 in bright green, trace 4 in
pink, trace 5 in sea green, trace 6 in dark red, and the markers in sky blue. The
background is printed in white and the grid in black. The other colors corre-
spond to the screen colors of the default color setting of the "Setup" menu.
● "User Defined Colors" option: You define and use your own color set for the
printout. For details how to proceed refer to "Defining and Using a User-
Defined Color Set" on page 40.
● "Screen Colors (Hardcopy)" option: The current screen colors without any
changes for a hardcopy. For details on the output format see"Configuring the
Printer and the Printout" on page 41 .
5. If you want a black-and-white printout, press the "Color On/Off" softkey to switch off
the color. In the black-and-white printout, all background colors are printed out in
white and all color lines in black. This allows you to improve contrast on the print-
out.
Remote command: HCOP:DEV:COL ON
3.2.5 Windows Operating System
The instrument contains the Windows 10 operating system which has been configured
according to the instrument's features and needs. Changes in the system setup are
only required when peripherals like keyboard or a printer are installed or if the network
configuration does not comply with the default settings. After the R&S FSVA/FSV is
started, the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automati-
cally.
To ensure that the instrument software functions properly, certain rules must be
adhered to concerning the operating system.

Preparing for Use
Risk of rendering instrument unusable

The instrument is equipped with the Windows 10 operating system. You can install
additional software on the instrument, however, additional software can impair instru-
ment function. Thus, run only programs that Rohde & Schwarz has tested for compati-
bility with the instrument software.
The drivers and programs used on the instrument under Windows 10 are adapted to
the instrument. Only install update software released by Rohde & Schwarz to modify
existing instrument software.
The following program packages have been tested:

● R&S Power Viewer Plus - virtual power meter for displaying results of the power
sensor R&S NRP-Zxx (install only this component!)
● Symantec Endpoint Security – virus-protection software
● FileShredder - for reliable deletion of files on the hard disk
3.2.5.1 Virus Protection
Take appropriate steps to protect your instruments from infection. Use strong firewall
settings and scan any removable storage device used with a Rohde & Schwarz instru-
ment regularly. It is also recommended that you install anti-virus software on the instru-
ment. Rohde & Schwarz does NOT recommend running anti-virus software in the
background ("on- access" mode) on Windows-based instruments, due to potentially
degrading instrument performance. However, Rohde & Schwarz does recommend run-
ning it during non-critical hours.
For details and recommendations, see the following Rohde & Schwarz white paper:
● 1EF96: Malware Protection Windows 10
3.2.5.2 Service Packs and Updates
Microsoft regularly creates security updates and other patches to protect Windows-
based operating systems. These are released through the Microsoft Update website
and associated update server. Instruments using Windows, especially those that con-
nect to a network, should be updated regularly.
For details and recommendations, see the Rohde & Schwarz White Paper 1EF96: Mal-
ware Protection Windows 10
3.2.5.3 Login
Windows 10 requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and pass-
word in a login window. By default, the R&S FSVA/FSV provides two user accounts:
● "Instrument": an administrator account with unrestricted access to the computer/
domain

Preparing for Use
● "NormalUser": a standard user account with limited access
Automatic login
For the administrator account, an automatic login function is active by default. If activa-
ted, login is carried out automatically for the administrator (with full access) in the back-
ground when the R&S FSVA/FSV is started, without having to enter a password. This
function is active until you explicitly deactivate it or change the password.
For information on how to deactivate or reactivate the automatic login, refer to "Auto-
matic Login Function" on page 45.
Passwords
For all default user accounts, the initial password is 894129. Note that this password is
very weak, and it is recommended that you change the password for both users after
initial login.
You can change the password in Windows 10 for any user at any time via "Start > Set-
tings > Account > SignIn Options > Password > Change".
Changing the password and use of auto-login function

Note that when you change the default passwords, the default auto-login function no
longer works! Reactivate it manually as described in "Reactivating the automatic login
function" on page 46.
Automatic Login Function

When shipped, the instrument automatically logs on the default "Instrument" user to
Windows 10 using the default password.
Switching users when using the automatic login function

Which user account is used is defined during login. If automatic login is active, the
login window is not displayed. However, you can also switch the user account to be
used when the automatic login function is active.
1. Press the "Windows" key or the CTRL + ESC key combination on your keyboard to
access the operating system of the R&S FSVA/FSV (see also Chapter 3.2.5.4,
"Accessing the Start Menu", on page 46).
2. Press CTRL + ALT + DEL, then select "Sign out".

The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user
account name and password.
Deactivating the automatic login function

To deactivate the automatic login function, perform the following steps:

Preparing for Use
2. In the "Start" menu, select "All applications > Windows System > Run".
The "Run" dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\NO_AUTOLOGIN.REG.
4. Press the ENTER key to confirm.

This command deactivates the automatic login function. The next time you switch
on the instrument, the operating system prompts you to enter your user name and
password before it starts the firmware.
Adapting the automatic login function to a new password

If you change the "Instrument" user's password, which is used during automatic login,
this function no longer works. Adapt the settings for the command that activates the
auto login function first.
1. Open the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\NO_AUTOLOGIN.REG file in any text editor (e.g.
Notepad).
2. In the line "DefaultPassword"="894129", replace the default password

(894129) by the new password for automatic login.
3. Save the changes to the file.
Reactivating the automatic login function

2. In the "Start" menu, select "All applications > Windows System > Run".
The "Run" dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\AUTOLOGIN.REG.
4. Press the ENTER key to confirm.

This command reactivates automatic login function. It is active the next time the
instrument reboots.
3.2.5.4 Accessing the Start Menu
The Windows "Start" menu provides access to the Windows 10 functionality and instal-
led programs.
To open the "Start" menu:

► In Windows 10:
Press the "Windows" key or the CTRL + ESC key combination on your (external)
keyboard.

Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options
All necessary system settings can be defined in the "Start > Settings" menu (for
required settings refer to the Windows 10 documentation and to the hardware descrip-
tion).
3.3 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware

Options
This chapter describes how to update the firmware and how to activate optional firm-
ware packages.
Updating the firmware or installing optional firmware requires administrator rights (see
Chapter 3.2.5.3, "Login", on page 44).
3.3.1 Firmware Update
You can install a new firmware version using one of the following methods:
● Copying the files to the instrument using USB devices (e.g. a memory stick), GPIB,
or LAN
● Using the "Remote Installation" feature in a LAN network
Copying the files to the instrument

3. Press the "Firmware Update" softkey.

The "Firmware Update" dialog box is displayed.
4. Enter the drive name and directory via the keypad.

Example: The installation files are stored on a memory stick in the Update direc-
tory. After you insert the memory stick, it will be detected as drive D:. Therefore,
the required path specification is D:\UPDATE.
5. If you install via LAN using the Remote Desktop application, enter the drive name
and directory or press the "Browse" button to locate the directory:
a) In the displayed dialog box, select the drive.
b) On the selected drive, select the folder that contains the installation file (*.exe).
c) Press the "Select" button to confirm your selection and go back to the "Firm-
ware Update" dialog box.
6. Press "Execute"
The installation program will guide you through the installation.

Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options
7. After the firmware update, the "UNCAL" status display indicates the necessity of a
self alignment. Perform a self alignment (for details refer to Chapter 3.2.1.9, "Per-
forming a Self Alignment and a Self Test", on page 32).
Remote command: SYST:FIRM:UPD 'D:\FW_UPDATE'
Performing a remote installation from a Windows PC

This method requires a LAN connection from the instrument to a Windows PC (see
Chapter 5.2.5.1, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network", on page 585).
1. Run the Setup.exe file on your PC.
2. Select "Remote Installation" and click the "Next" button.
3. Select the packages you want to install and click the "Next" button.
4. Your LAN subnet is scanned and all found instruments are listed.
Note: The setup procedure communicates with the instrument via LAN, which
means the file must pass the firewall. Therefore, add the Setup.exe file to your
firewall rules, then restart the scan by clicking "Rescan".
5. Select the instruments you want to update. You can select up to 5 instruments to
update at the same time.
Note: All instruments in your LAN structure are included in the list. Make sure you
select the correct instruments!
To display further options, click the "Options" button.
6. Start installation by clicking "Install".
7. Confirm that you want to reboot the instrument in order to activate the firmware
update. The instrument restarts automatically.
3.3.2 Activating Firmware Options
Firmware options are enabled by entering license keys as described here.
To activate firmware options

3. Press the "Option Licenses" softkey.
4. Press the "Install Option" softkey.

An edit dialog box is displayed.
5. Enter the option key number using the keypad.
6. Press the ENTER key.

If validation is successful, the message "option key valid" is displayed. If the valida-
tion fails, the option software is not installed.
7. Reboot the instrument.

Basic Operations
With time-limited licenses, a message box appears if an option is about to expire.

Press the "OK" button to resume using the R&S FSVA/FSV. If an option has already
expired, a message box appears for you to confirm. In this case, all instrument func-
tions are unavailable (including remote control) until the R&S FSVA/FSV is rebooted.
Alternatively, you can activate options using an XML file.
To activate firmware options using an XML file

3. Press the "Option Licenses" softkey.
4. Press the "Install Option by XML" softkey.

5. Enter or browse for the name of an XML file on the instrument that contains the
option key.
6. Press "Select."
If validation is successful, the message "option key valid" is displayed. If the valida-
tion fails, the option software is not installed.
7. Reboot the instrument.
3.4 Basic Operations

This chapter gives an overview on how to work with the R&S FSVA/FSV. It describes
what kind of information is displayed in the diagram area, how to operate the
R&S FSVA/FSV via the front panel keys and other interaction methods, and how to
use the Online Help.
Note the Conventions Used in the Documentation concerning procedure descriptions

and terminology described at the beginning of this manual.
3.4.1 Information in the Diagram Area
The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation. All dif-
ferent information areas are labeled. They are explained in more detail in the following
sections.

Basic Operations
Figure 3-6: Screen layout of the R&S FSVA/FSV during analyzer operation
1 = Toolbar
2 = Channel information bar for firmware and measurement settings
3 = Toolbar toggle icon
4 = Diagram header with diagram-specific (trace) information
5 = Diagram area
6 = Diagram footer with diagram-specific information, depending on measurement mode
7 = Device status bar with error messages, progress bar and date/time display
3.4.1.1 Channel Display
Using the R&S FSVA/FSV you can handle several different measurement tasks (chan-
nels) at the same time (although they can only be performed asynchronously). For
each channel, a separate tab is displayed on the screen. In order to switch from one
channel display to another, simply press the corresponding tab.
The icon on the tab label indicates that the displayed trace no longer matches the
current instrument settings. This may be the case, for example, if a trace is frozen and
the instrument settings are changed. As soon as a new measurement is performed, the
icon disappears.

Basic Operations
To start a new channel

1. Click the icon in the toolbar at the top of the screen (see also Chapter 3.4.2.1,
"Toolbar", on page 57 on how to display the toolbar).
2. Select the softkey for the required measurement mode.

A new tab is displayed for the new channel.
3.4.1.2 Display of Hardware Settings
Information on hardware settings are displayed in the channel bar above the diagram.
Invalid settings
A bullet next to the hardware setting indicates that user-defined settings are used, not
automatic settings. A green bullet indicates this setting is valid and the measurement is
correct. A red bullet indicates an invalid setting that does not provide useful results.
It is the user's responsibility to remedy such a situation.
Editing settings in the channel bar

All settings that are displayed in the channel bar can easily be edited by touching the
setting in the display (with a finger or mouse pointer). The corresponding (edit) dialog
box is displayed where you can edit the setting.
In spectrum mode, the R&S FSVA/FSV shows the following settings:
Ref Level Reference level
m.+el.Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation that has been set.
Ref Offset Reference level offset
SWT Sweep time that has been set.

If the sweep time does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling,
a bullet is displayed in front of the field. The color of the bullet turns red if
the sweep time is set below the value for automatic coupling. In addition,
the UNCAL flag is shown. In this case, the sweep time must be increased.
RBW Resolution bandwidth that has been set.

If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling,
a green bullet appears in front of the field.
VBW Video bandwidth that has been set.

If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling,
a green bullet is displayed in front of the field.
Compatible Compatible device mode (FSP, FSU, default; default not displayed)

Basic Operations
Mode Indicates which sweep mode type is selected:

● "Auto FFT": automatically selected FFT sweep mode
● "Auto sweep": automatically selected swept sweep mode
● "FFT": manually selected FFT sweep mode
● "Sweep": manually selected swept sweep mode
Mod Analog demodulation mode (AM/FM/PM), option R&S FSV-K7 only
AQT Acquisition time; for ACP/CCDF measurements, IQ analyzer and option

R&S FSV-K7
DBW Demodulation bandwidth option R&S FSV-K7 only
Dig Out State of digital output, option R&S FSV-B17 only
3.4.1.3 Measurement Settings Information
In addition to the common hardware settings, the channel bar above the diagram also
displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even
though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values. This
information is displayed in gray font and only when applicable for the current measure-
ment, as opposed to the common hardware settings that are always displayed.
The following types of information may be displayed, if applicable.
Label Description
SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode.
Sweep Count The current signal count for measurement tasks that involve a specific number of subse-
quent sweeps
(see "Sweep Count" setting in "Sweep" menu in the Operating manual)
TRG Trigger source

(for details see trigger settings in the "TRIG" menu in the Operating manual)
● EXT: External
● VID: Video
● RFP: RF power
● IFP: IF power
● BBP: Baseband power
● PSE: Power sensor
● TIM: Time
● SQL: Squelch
6dB/RRC/CHN Filter type for sweep bandwidth

(see BW menu in the Operating manual)
PA The preamplifier is activated.
GAT The frequency sweep is controlled via the EXT TRIG/GATE IN connector.
TDF A transducer factor is activated.
75 Ω The input impedance of the instrument is set to 75 Ω.

Basic Operations
Label Description
FRQ A frequency offset ≠ 0 Hz is set.
DC/AC An external DC or AC calibration signal is in use.
Inp Input source: digital I/Q (option R&S FSV-B17 only)
3.4.1.4 Diagram-specific and Trace Information
Diagram-specific information, e.g. concerning traces, is indicated in the diagram

header and footer.
Trace information in diagram header

The diagram header (above the diagram) contains the following trace information:
The header may contain a user-defined introductory title, see Chapter 3.4.4.7, "Adding
a Title to the Diagram Header", on page 75.
Editing settings in the diagram header

All settings that are displayed in the diagram header can easily be edited by selecting
the setting in the display (by tapping or clicking). The corresponding (edit) dialog box is
displayed in which you can edit the setting.
Norm/NCor
Correction data is not used.
Trace color Color of trace display in diagram
Trace no. Trace number (1 to 6)
Detector Selected detector:
AP AUTOPEAK detector
Pk MAX PEAK detector
Mi MIN PEAK detector
Sa SAMPLE detector
Av AVERAGE detector
Rm RMS detector
QP QUASIPEAK detector
CA CISPR Average detector

Basic Operations
RA RMS Average detector
Trace Mode Sweep mode:
Clrw CLEAR/WRITE
Max MAX HOLD
Min MIN HOLD
Avg AVERAGE (Lin/Log/Pwr)
View VIEW
Marker information in Diagram Grid

The x and y axis positions of the last 2 markers or delta markers that were set, as well
as their index, are displayed within the diagram grid, if available. The value in the
square brackets after the index indicates the trace to which the marker is assigned.
(Example: M1[1] defines marker 1 on trace 1.) For more than 2 markers, a separate
marker table is displayed beneath the diagram.
If applicable, the active measurement function for the marker and its main results are
indicated, as well. The functions are indicated with the following abbreviations:
FXD Reference fixed marker active
PHNoise Phase noise measurement active
CNT Frequency counter active
TRK Signal track active
NOIse Noise measurement active
MDepth Measurement of the AM modulation depth active
TOI TOI measurement active
Marker Information in Marker Table

In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram grid, a separate
marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram. This table provides the following
information for all active markers:
Type Marker type: N (normal), D (delta), T (temporary, internal), PWR (power sensor)
Dgr Diagram number
Trc Trace to which the marker is assigned
Stimulus x-value of the marker
Response y-value of the marker
Func Activated marker or measurement function
Func .Result Result of the active marker or measurement function

Basic Operations
Mode-dependant Information in Diagram Footer

The diagram footer (beneath the diagram) contains the following information, depend-
ing on the current mode:
Mode Label Information
FREQ CF Center frequency (between start and stop)
Span Frequency span
SPAN CF (1.0 ms/) Zero span
For most modes, the number of sweep points shown in the display are indicated in the
diagram footer. In zoom mode, the (rounded) number of currently displayed points are
indicated.
The diagram footer can be removed from the display temporarily, see Chapter 3.4.4.8,
"Removing the Diagram Footer", on page 76.
3.4.1.5 Instrument and Status Information
Global instrument settings, the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in
the status bar beneath the diagram.
Hiding the status bar

You can hide the status bar display, e.g. in order to enlarge the display area for the
measurement results.
1. Press the DISPLAY key.
2. In the "Display Settings" dialog box, select "Status Bar State: Off".
The status bar is no longer displayed.
● To display the status bar again, select "Status Bar State: On".
SCPI command:
DISP:SBAR:STAT OFF
The following information is displayed:
Instrument status
The instrument is configured for operation with an external reference.
The optional Digital Baseband interface (B17) is being used for digital input
(See Chapter 4.7.5, "Interface Status Information", on page 483)
The optional Digital Baseband interface (B17) is being used to provide digital output

Basic Operations
Error information
If errors or irregularities are detected, a keyword and an error message, if available,
are displayed in the status bar.
The following keywords are used:
UNCAL One of the following conditions applies:

● Correction data has been switched off.
● No correction values are available. This occurs, for example, if a firmware
update is performed followed by a cold start of the instrument.
● Record the correction data by performing a self alignment
(for details refer to Chapter 3.2.1.9, "Performing a Self Alignment and a Self
Test", on page 32).
OVLD Overload of the input mixer.

● Increase the RF attenuation (for RF input).
● Reduce the input level (for digital input)
IFOVL Overload of the IF signal path after the input mixer.

● Increase the reference level.
LOUNL Error in the instrument's frequency processing hardware was detected.
NO REF Instrument was set to an external reference but no signal was detected on the refer-
ence input.
OVEN OCXO reference frequency (option R&S FSV-B4) has not yet reached its operating
temperature. The message usually disappears a few minutes after power has beeen
switched on.
FIFO OVL for option R&S FSV-B17 only

Progress
The progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar.
Date and time

The date and time settings of the instrument are displayed in the status bar.
3.4.2 Means of User Interaction
The instrument provides a user interface for operation that does not require an external
keyboard, using the following means of interaction:
● Chapter 3.4.2.1, "Toolbar", on page 57
● Chapter 3.4.2.2, "Touchscreen", on page 58
● Chapter 3.4.2.3, "On-screen Keyboard", on page 59

Basic Operations
● Chapter 3.4.2.5, "Rotary Knob", on page 61

● Chapter 3.4.2.6, "Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys", on page 61
● Chapter 3.4.2.7, "Softkeys", on page 62
● Chapter 3.4.2.9, "Dialog Boxes", on page 64
All tasks necessary to operate the instrument can be performed using this user inter-
face. Apart from instrument specific keys, all other keys that correspond to an external
keyboard (e.g. arrow keys, ENTER key) operate conform to Microsoft.
For most tasks, there are at least 2 alternative methods to perform them:
● Using the touchscreen
● Using other elements provided by the front panel, e.g. the keypad, rotary knob, or
arrow and position keys
3.4.2.1 Toolbar
Standard functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbar at the top of the
screen, if available (see Chapter 3.4, "Basic Operations", on page 49). By default, this
toolbar is not displayed.
Displaying the toolbar
► Press the "Toolbar" icon to the right of the tabs in the display to toggle the toolbar
on or off.
Alternatively:
3. Press the "Tool Bar State On/Off" softkey.

Or:
5. In the "Display Settings" dialog box, select "Tool Bar State: On".
The toolbar is displayed at the top of the screen.
Remote:
DISP:TBAR:STAT ON
The following functions are available:

Basic Operations
Table 3-2: Standard Application Functions in the Toolbar
Icon Description
Opens the "Select Mode" menu (see Chapter 3.4.1.1, "Channel Display", on page 50)
Opens an existing measurement (settings) file
Stores the current measurement file
Prints the current measurement screen
Saves the current measurement screen as a file (screenshot)
Reverts last operation.
Repeats previously reverted operation.
Selection mode: the cursor can be used to select (and move) markers in a zoomed display
Zoom mode: displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the
zoom area. Can be repeated several times.
Zoom off: the diagram is displayed in its original size
3.4.2.2 Touchscreen
A touchscreen is a screen that is touch-sensitive, i.e. it reacts in a specified way when

a particular element on the screen is tapped by a finger or a pointing device, for exam-
ple. Any user interface elements that can be clicked on by a mouse pointer can also be
tapped on the screen to trigger the same behavior, and vice versa. Using the touch-
screen, the following tasks (amoung others) can be performed by the tap of your finger:
● Changing a setting
● Changing the display
● Moving a marker
● Zooming into a diagram
● Saving or printing results and settings
To imitate a right-click by mouse using the touchscreen, for example to open a context-
sensitive menu for a specific item, press the screen for about 1 second.
Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen Function

The touchscreen function can be deactivated, e.g. when the instrument is being used
for demonstration purposes and tapping the screen should not provoke an action.
2. In the dialog box, select one of the following options:

● "Touchscreen ON": touchscreen function is active for the entire screen
● "Touchscreen OFF": touchscreen is deactivated for the entire screen
● "DIAGRAM TOUCH OFF": touchscreen is deactivated for the diagram area of
the screen, but active for the surrounding softkeys, toolbars and menus.

Basic Operations
SCPI command:
DISP:TOUCh:STAT OFF
3.4.2.3 On-screen Keyboard
The on-screen keyboard is an additional means of interacting with the instrument with-
out having to connect an external keyboard.
The on-screen keyboard display can be switched on and off as desired using the "On-
Screen Keyboard" function key beneath the screen.
When you press this key, the display switches between the following options:
● Keyboard displayed at the top of the screen
● Keyboard displayed at the bottom of the screen
● No keyboard displayed
You can use the TAB key on the on-screen keyboard to move the focus from one field
to another in dialog boxes.
3.4.2.4 Keypad
The keypad is used to enter alphanumeric parameters. It contains the

following keys:
● Alphanumeric keys
Enters numbers and (special) characters in edit dialog boxes. For
details refer to Chapter 3.4.3.1, "Entering Numeric Parameters",
on page 65 and Chapter 3.4.3.2, "Entering Alphanumeric
Parameters", on page 65.
● Decimal point
Inserts a decimal point "." at the cursor position.
● Sign key

Basic Operations
Changes the sign of a numeric parameter. In the case of an alphanumeric parame-

ter, inserts a "-" at the cursor position.
● Unit keys (GHz/-dBm MHz/dBm, kHz/dB and Hz/dB)
These keys add the selected unit to the entered numeric value and complete the
entry.
In the case of level entries (e.g. in dB) or dimensionless values, all units have the
value "1" as mulitplying factor. Thus, they have the same function as an ENTER
key. The same is true for an alphanumeric entry.
● ESC key
Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is not active. Quits the edit mode,
if the edit mode is active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Cancel" button it activates
that button.
For "Edit" dialog boxes the following mechanism is used:
– If data entry has been started, it retains the original value and closes the dialog
box.
– If data entry has not been started or has been completed, it closes the dialog
box.
● BACKSPACE key
– If an alphanumeric entry has already been started, this key deletes the charac-
ter to the left of the cursor.
– If no input field is currently active, the most recently entered value is undone,
i.e. the previous value is retrieved. Thus, you can toggle between two values
(e.g. spans).
● ENTER key
– Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries. The new value is accepted.
– With other entries, this key can be used instead of the "Hz/dB" unit key.
– In a dialog box, presses the default or focused button.
– In a dialog box, activates the edit mode for the focused area, if available. For
details on the edit mode refer to Chapter 3.4.3.3, "Navigating in Dialog Boxes",
on page 67.
– In a dialog box, activates or deactivates the selected option of the focused
area, if the edit mode is active.

Basic Operations
3.4.2.5 Rotary Knob
The rotary knob has several functions:

● Increments (clockwise direction) or decrements (counter-clockwise direc-
tion) the instrument parameter at a defined step width in the case of a
numeric entry.
● Shifts the selection bar within focused areas (e.g. lists), if the edit mode is
activated.
● Shifts markers, limit lines, etc on the screen.
● Acts like the ENTER key, when it is pressed. For details refer to Chap-
ter 3.4.3.3, "Navigating in Dialog Boxes", on page 67.
● Moves the scroll bar vertically, if the scroll bar is focused and the edit
mode is activated.
For details on the edit mode refer to Chapter 3.4.3.3, "Navigating in Dialog
Boxes", on page 67.
3.4.2.6 Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys
The arrow keys are used for navigation. The UNDO/REDO keys support you during
input.
UPARROW/DNARROW keys
The UPARROW or DNARROW keys do the following:
● In a numeric edit dialog box, increase or decrease the instrument parameter.
● In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries.
● In a table, move the selection bar vertically.
● In windows or dialog boxes with vertical scroll bar, move the scroll bar.
LEFTARROW/RIGHTARROW keys
The LEFTARROW or RIGHTARROW keys do the following:
● In an alphanumeric edit dialog box, move the cursor.
● In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries.
● In a table, move the selection bar horizontally.
● In windows or dialog boxes with horizontal scroll bar, move the scroll bar.
UNDO/REDO keys
● The UNDO key reverts the previously performed action, i.e. the status before the
previous action is retrieved.

Basic Operations
The undo function is useful, for example, if you are performing a zero span mea-
surement with several markers and a limit line defined and accidentally click the
"ACP" softkey. In this case, very many settings would be lost. However, if you
press UNDO immediately afterwards, the previous status is retrieved, i.e. the zero
span measurement and all settings.
● The REDO key repeats the previously reverted action, i.e. the most recently per-
formed action is repeated.
The UNDO function is not available after a PRESET or "RECALL" operation. When
these functions are used, the history of previous actions is deleted.
3.4.2.7 Softkeys
Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provi-
ded than those that can be accessed directly via the function keys on the device. Soft-
keys are dynamic, i.e. depending on the selected function key, a different list of soft-
keys is displayed on the right side of the screen
A list of softkeys for a certain function key is also called a menu. Each softkey can
either represent a specific function, or a submenu that in turn represents several soft-
keys.
Selecting softkeys
► A particular softkey is selected by pressing the key on the screen with a finger,
mouse pointer or other pointing device.
Softkeys can only be operated via the screen, there are (usually) no corresponding
function keys.
Navigating in softkey menus

● The "More" softkey indicates that the menu contains more softkeys than can be
displayed at once on the screen. When pressed, it displays the next set of soft-
keys.
● If the softkey label contains a ">" symbol, it represents a submenu of further soft-
keys. When you press it, the submenu is displayed.
● The "Up" key switches to the next higher level of the menu.
● The start menu of the current measurement mode is accessed directly by pressing
the HOME key on the front panel.
Softkey actions
A softkey performs one of the following actions when pressed:
● Opens a dialog box to enter data.
● Switches a function on or off.

Basic Operations
● Opens a submenu (only softkeys with a ">" symbol).
Recognizing the softkey status by color

In the factory configuration, a softkey is highlighted orange when a corresponding dia-
log box is open. If it is a toggle softkey, the current state is highlighted blue. If an instru-
ment function is not available temporarily due to a specific setting, the associated soft-
key is deactivated and its text is colored gray.
Some softkeys belong to a certain (firmware) option. If this option is not implemented in
your device, the associated softkeys are not displayed.
Hiding softkeys
You can hide the softkey display, e.g. when using remote control, in order to enlarge
the display area for the measurement results. When you press a function key on the
front panel, the softkeys are displayed temporarily, enabling you to perform a certain
task with the softkeys. They are then automatically hidden again when they have not
been used for a specified time. Any edit dialog boxes required for entry remain in the
display.
2. In the "Display Settings" dialog box, select "Softkey Bar State: Off".
The softkeys are no longer displayed.
► To display the softkeys again, select "Softkey Bar State: On".
Remote:
DISP:SKEY:STAT OFF
3.4.2.8 Context-sensitive Menus
Markers and traces in the display, as well as the information in the channel bar, have
context-sensitive menus. If you right-click on a marker or trace in the display, or infor-
mation in the channel bar (or touch it for about 1 second), a menu is displayed which
contains the same functions as the corresponding softkey. This is useful, for example,
when the softkey display is hidden (see Chapter 3.4.2.7, "Softkeys", on page 62).

Basic Operations
If a menu entry contains an arrow to the right of it, a submenu is available for that
entry.
► To close the menu, press the ESC key or click in the display outside of the menu.
3.4.2.9 Dialog Boxes
In most cases, the R&S FSVA/FSV dialog boxes are designed to enter a numeric
value. In the documentation, these dialog boxes are called "edit dialog boxes". Dialog
boxes that are not only designed for parameter entry have a more complex structure
and, in the documentation, are called "dialog boxes". The navigation in Windows dialog
boxes differs in some aspects from the navigation in R&S FSVA/FSV dialog boxes. For
details, see Chapter 3.4.3.3, "Navigating in Dialog Boxes", on page 67.
The following figure shows an example of a edit dialog box:
Figure 3-7: Edit dialog box for parameter entry

Basic Operations
The title bar shows the name of the parameter that was selected. The entry is per-
formed in the editing line. When the dialog box is displayed, the focus is on the editing
line and it contains the currently used parameter value and its unit. The optional third
line shows status and error messages which always refer to the current entry.
3.4.3 Setting Parameters
This section describes how to perform the following basic tasks in the R&S FSVA/FSV:
● Chapter 3.4.3.1, "Entering Numeric Parameters", on page 65
● Chapter 3.4.3.2, "Entering Alphanumeric Parameters", on page 65
● Chapter 3.4.3.3, "Navigating in Dialog Boxes", on page 67
3.4.3.1 Entering Numeric Parameters
If a field requires numeric input, the keypad provides only numbers.
1. Enter the parameter value using the keypad, or change the currently used parame-
ter value by using the rotary knob (small steps) or the UPARROW or DNARROW
keys (large steps).
2. After entering the numeric value via keypad, press the corresponding unit key.
The unit is added to the entry.
3. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing the
ENTER key or one of the unit keys.
The editing line is highlighted in order to confirm the entry.
3.4.3.2 Entering Alphanumeric Parameters
If a field requires alphanumeric input, you can use the on-screen keyboard to enter
numbers and (special) characters (see also Chapter 3.4.2.3, "On-screen Keyboard",
on page 59).
Figure 3-8: On-screen keyboard
Alternatively, you can use the keypad. Every alphanumeric key provides several char-
acters and one number. The decimal point key (.) provides special characters, and the

Basic Operations
sign key (-) toggles between capital and small letters. For the assignment refer to
Table 3-3.
Entering numbers and (special) characters via the keypad
1. Press the key once to enter the first possible value.
2. All characters available via this key are displayed.
3. To choose another value provided by this key, press the key again, until your
desired value is displayed.
4. With every key stroke the next possible value of this key is displayed. If all possible
values have been displayed, the series starts with the first value again. For infor-
mation on the series refer to Table 3-3.
5. To change from capital to small letters and vice versa, press the sign key (-).
6. When you have chosen the desired value, wait for 2 seconds (to use the same key
again), or start the next entry by pressing another key.
Entering a blank
► Press the "Space" bar, or press the "0" key and wait 2 seconds.
Correcting an entry:
1. Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to the right of the entry you want to delete.
2. Press the BACKSPACE key.
3. The entry to the left of the cursor is deleted.
4. Enter your correction.
Completing the entry
► Press the ENTER key or the rotary knob.
Aborting the entry
► Press the ESC key.

The dialog box is closed without changing the settings.
Table 3-3: Keys for alphanumeric parameters
Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided

(upper inscription)
7 7µΩ°€¥$¢
8 A B C 8 Ä ÆÅ Ç
9 DEF9É

Basic Operations
Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided

(upper inscription)
4 GHI4
5 JKL5
6 MNO6ŇÖ
1 PQRS1
2 TUV2Ü
3 WXYZ3
0 <blank> 0 – @ + / \ < > = % &
. .*:_,;"'?()#
– <toggles between capital and small letters>
3.4.3.3 Navigating in Dialog Boxes
Some of the dialog boxes are not only for parameter entry, and therefore have a more
complex structure. The following figure shows an example.
Changing the focus

The focus on the graphical user interface is moved by pressing an element on the
screen, or via the rotary knob. The focused area is marked with a blue frame (see Fig-
ure 3-9). If this area consists of more than one element, e.g. lists of options or tables,

Basic Operations
you must first switch to the edit mode in order to make changes. A focused area in the
edit mode is marked with a dashed blue frame (see Figure 3-10).
Figure 3-9: Focused area
Figure 3-10: Focused area in edit mode
Edit mode
When using the touchscreen for focus changes, all focused areas are in the edit mode
automatically, if available. Otherwise, you must switch to edit mode manually.
Switching to edit mode
1. Press the ENTER key.
2. To quit the edit mode, press the ESC key.
Working in dialog boxes

● To edit alphanumeric parameters, use the keypad or the on-screen keyboard. For
details see Chapter 3.4.3.1, "Entering Numeric Parameters", on page 65 and
Chapter 3.4.3.2, "Entering Alphanumeric Parameters", on page 65. If you edit
fields, the edit mode is activated automatically when you start typing.
● To move the focus to the next interface element (e.g. field, option, list), press it on
the screen, or turn the rotary knob.

Basic Operations
● To select or deselect an option, press the option on the screen.

Alternatively:
– If the focused area consists of more than one option and the edit mode is not
active, change into the edit mode.
– Scroll through the list of options using the arrow keys or the rotary knob (only
for vertical direction) until the option you want to activate or deactivate is high-
lighted.
– Press the rotary knob or the ENTER key to confirm your selection.
The option is activated or deactivated, depending on its previous setting.
– To leave the edit mode, press the ESC key.
● To open a drop-down list, press the arrow next to the list. Alternatively, press the
ENTER key or the rotary knob. When opened, the list is in edit mode.
● To select an entry without opening a drop-down list, use the arrow keys to browse
through the list entries.
● To select a list entry, press the entry on the screen.
Alternatively:
– If the edit mode is not active, change into the edit mode.
– Scroll through the list using the arrow keys or the rotary knob until the list entry
you want to select is highlighted.
– Confirm your choice by pressing the rotary knob or the ENTER key.
If a drop-down list was opened, it is closed.
● To change from one tab to the next, press the tab on the screen.
● To press a button in a dialog box, press the button on the screen.
Alternatively:
– Place the focus on the desired button using the rotary knob.
– Confirm your choice by pressing the rotary knob or the ENTER key.
● To close the dialog box and accept the changes, press the "OK" button.
● To close the dialog box without accepting the changes, press the ESC key or the
"Cancel" button.
Particularities in Windows dialog boxes

In some cases, e.g. if you want to install a printer, original Windows dialog boxes are
used. In these dialog boxes, the navigation behavior is different to the one you are
used to from R&S FSVA/FSV applications. In the following, the important differences
and useful tips are listed:
● The rotary knob and function keys do not work. Do not use them. Use the touch-
screen instead.

Basic Operations
3.4.4 Changing the Display
3.4.4.1 Changing the Focus
Any selected function is always performed on the currently focussed element in the
display, e.g. a dialog field, diagram, or table row. Which element is focussed is indica-
ted by a blue frame (diagram, window, table) or is otherwise highlighted (softkey,
marker etc.). Moving the focus is most easily done by tapping on the element on the
touchscreen. Alternatively, use the "Tab" key on the on-screen keyboard or the rotary
knob to move the focus from one element to the next on the display.
To move the focus on the screen between any displayed diagrams or tables, press the
"Change focus" function key on the front panel. The focus moves from the diagram to
the first table to the next table etc. and then back to the diagram.
3.4.4.2 Switching between Split and Maximized Display
In some measurement modes, a table with markers or measurement results is dis-

played beneath the diagram. In this case, you may wish to maximize the diagram
or table display in order to see more details.
Press the SPLIT/MAXIMIZE key on the front panel to switch between a split screen
and a full screen (maximized display). In maximized display, the table or diagram cur-
rently focused is maximized. In split display, both the diagram and any available tables
are displayed in one screen.
SCPI command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SIZE on page 737
3.4.4.3 Soft and Mini Soft Front Panel Display
When working with an external monitor or operating via remote control on a computer,
it is useful to be able to interact with the R&S FSVA/FSV without requiring the keypad
and keys located on the front panel of the instrument. Therefore, a "Soft Front Panel"
display is available, which simulates the entire front panel of the instrument (except for
the external connectors) on the screen. You can switch between "normal" screen dis-
play and extended display. In the extended display, the keys and other hardware con-
trols of the instrument are simulated on the screen.
If you require a Soft Front Panel but do not want to lose too much space for results in
the display area, a mini soft Front Panel is available. The mini version displays only the
hardkeys in a separate window in the display area. This window can be closed auto-
matically after pressing a key, or remain open, as desired. Using the Mini Front Panel,
the R&S FSVA/FSV interface is fully operable from a monitor with a resolution of
1024x768 pixels.

Basic Operations
Switching to soft Front Panel display
4. Press the "Soft Front Panel" softkey.

Alternatively:
6. In the "Display Settings" dialog box, select "Front Panel State: On".
The extended display appears on the screen.
Using the F6 key you can toggle the Front Panel display on and off.
Remote: SYST:DISP:FPAN:STAT ON
Working with the Soft Front Panel

Basic operation with the soft Front Panel is identical to normal operation. To activate a
key, either press the key on the touchscreen, or click on it with the mouse pointer. To
simulate the use of the rotary knob, use the additional keys displayed between the key-
pad and the arrow keys:

Basic Operations
Icon Function
Turn left
Enter
Turn right
Switching to Mini Front Panel display
2. In the "Display Settings" dialog box, select "Mini Front Panel State: On".
The "Mini Front Panel" window appears on the screen. It can be moved anywhere
on the screen where it does not interfere with your current task.
Using the key combination ALT + M you can toggle the Mini Front Panel display on and
off.

Basic Operations
Auto close option

By default, the "Auto close" option is activated and the Mini Front Panel window closes
automatically after you select a key. This is useful if you only require the Front Panel
display to press a single function key.
If you want the window to remain open, deactivate the "Auto close" option. You can
close the window manually by clicking "Close Panel" or the key combination ALT + M.
3.4.4.4 Enlarging the Display Area
You can enlarge the screen display area if you are using an external monitor or the
Soft and Mini Soft Frontpanel display (see Chapter 3.4.4.3, "Soft and Mini Soft
Front Panel Display", on page 70). To do so, drag the lower right corner of the win-
dow to the required size. In standard display, a small icon is displayed in the lower
right corner of the screen.
3.4.4.5 Displaying the Toolbar
Standard file functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbar at the top of the
screen (see the Chapter 3.4.2.1, "Toolbar", on page 57). By default, this toolbar is not
displayed.
To display the toolbar:
2. Under "Select Tool Bar State", select "On".
Alternatively:
3. Press the "Tool Bar State On/Off" softkey.

The toolbar is displayed at the top of the screen.
3.4.4.6 Zooming into the Diagram
You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the measurement results in greater detail.
Using the touchscreen or a mouse pointer you can easily define the area to be
enlarged.

Basic Operations
Zoom and the number of sweep points

Note that zooming is merely a visual tool, it does not change any measurement set-
tings, such as the number of sweep points!
You should increase the number of sweep points before zooming, as otherwise the
function has no real effect (see the "Sweep Points" softkey, described in the Operating
Manual and online help).
To zoom into the diagram
1. Display the toolbar as described in Chapter 3.4.4.5, "Displaying the Toolbar",

on page 73.
2.
Click on the "Zoom On" icon in the toolbar.
A dotted rectangle is displayed in the diagram.
3. Drag the lower right corner of the rectangle (either via touchscreen or a mouse
pointer) to define the area in the diagram to be enlarged.
4. Repeat these steps, if necessary, to enlarge the diagram further.
Scrolling in the zoomed display

You can scroll the diagram area to display the entire diagram using the scrollbars at
the right and at the bottom of the diagram.

Basic Operations
To return to selection mode in the diagram

While you are in zoom mode, touching the screen changes the zoom area. In order to
select or move a trace or marker, you must switch back to selection mode:
► Click on the "Selection mode" icon in the toolbar.
To return to original display
► Click on the "Zoom Off" icon in the toolbar.

A dotted rectangle is displayed in the diagram.
Remote commands:
1. Activate the zoom mode:

DISP:ZOOM ON
2. Define the zoom area:

DISP:ZOOM:AREA 5,30,20,100
3. Hide the overview window:

DISP:ZOOM:OVER OFF
3.4.4.7 Adding a Title to the Diagram Header
You can add an introductory title to the trace information in the diagram header.

Basic Operations
3. Press the "Screen Title On/Off" softkey.

4. Enter the title and press "ENTER".

The title is displayed at the beginning of the diagram header.
3.4.4.8 Removing the Diagram Footer
Some additional diagram-specific information is displayed in the diagram footer (see

Chapter 3.4.1.4, "Diagram-specific and Trace Information", on page 53). This footer
can be removed from display if necessary.
3. Press the "Annotation On/Off" softkey.

The footer is displayed beneath the diagram or removed from display.
3.4.4.9 Selecting a Theme
You can select a theme for the screen display. The theme defines the colors used for
keys and screen elements, for example. The default theme is "BlueOcean".
Selecting a theme
4. Press the "Theme Selection" softkey. A list of available themes is displayed.
5. Select the desired theme from the list.

The screen display changes according to the selected theme.
SCPI command:
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect
3.4.4.10 Displaying and Setting the Date and Time
You can switch the date and time display in the diagram footer on or off. By default, it
is displayed. You can also switch between German and US format.
Switching the date and time display off

Basic Measurement Examples
3. Press the "Time+Date" softkey to "Off".
Changing the format
3. Press the "Time+Date Format" softkey until the required format is selected.
Setting the date and time

To set the date and time, click on the date and time display in the diagram footer. The
standard Windows "Date and Time Properties" dialog is displayed and you can set the
correct date and time.
3.4.4.11 Changing the Display Update Rate
When performance is poor due to slow data transfer (for example during remote con-
trol), it may be helpful to decrease the frequency with which the screen display is upda-
ted.
To descrease the display update rate

The "Display Settings" dialog box is opened.
2. Under "Display Update Rate", select "Slow".

The display is updated less frequently, and performance for measurements should
improve. When data transfer is no longer a problem, you can set the update rate
back to "Fast" in the same way.
3.5 Basic Measurement Examples

The following measurement examples are intended as an introduction to operating the
R&S FSVA/FSV. The User Manual contains additional and more advanced examples.
Refer to chapter "Advanced Measurement Examples" to find the following topics:
● High-Sensitivity Harmonics Measurements
● Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth
● Intermodulation Measurements
● Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise
● Measuring Noise Power Density
● Measurement of Noise Power within a Transmission Channel
● Measuring Phase Noise
● Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power

For a more detailed description of the basic operating steps, e.g. selecting menus and
setting parameters, refer to Chapter 3.4, "Basic Operations", on page 49.
3.5.1 Measuring a Sinusoidal Signal
One of the most common measurement tasks that can be handled by using a signal
analyzer is determining the level and frequency of a signal. When measuring an
unknown signal, you can usually start with the presettings.
High input values

If levels higher than +30 dBm (=1 W) are expected or are possible, a power attenuator
must be inserted before the RF input of the analyzer. If this is not done, signal levels
exceeding 30 dBm can damage the RF attenuator or the input mixer. The total power
of all occuring signals must be taken into account.
Test setup
● Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of R&S FSVA/FSV.
Table 3-4: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU)
Frequency 128 MHz
Level -30 dBm
3.5.1.1 Measuring the Level and Frequency Using Markers
The level and frequency of a sinusoidal signal can be measured easily by using the
marker function. The R&S FSVA/FSV always displays its amplitude and frequency at
the marker position. The frequency measurement uncertainty is determined by the fre-
quency reference of the R&S FSVA/FSV, the resolution of the marker frequency dis-
play and the number of sweep points.
1. Reset the instrument by pressing the PRESET key.
2. Connect the signal to be measured to the RF INPUT analyzer input on the instru-
ment front panel.
3. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.

a) Press the FREQ key.
The dialog box for the center frequency is displayed.
b) In the dialog box, enter 128 using the numeric keypad and confirm the entry
with the MHz key.
4. Reduce the frequency span to 1 MHz.

a) Press the SPAN key.

b) In the dialog box, enter 1 using the numeric keypad and confirm the entry by
pressing the MHZ key.
Note: Coupled settings. When the frequency span is defined, the resolution band-
width, the video bandwidth and the sweep time are automatically adjusted,
because these functions are defined as coupled functions in the presettings.
5. Measure the level and frequency using the marker by pressing the MKR key.
The marker is activated and automatically set on the maximum of the trace.
The level and frequency values measured by the marker are displayed in the
marker field at the top edge of the screen. They can be taken as the measurement
result.
M1[1] -30.00 dBm
128.00000 MHz
The field header indicates the number of the marker (Marker 1) and the trace on
which the marker is located ([1] = Trace 1).
Note: Performing a peak search. When a marker is initially activated, it automati-
cally performs the peak search function (as shown in the example).
If a marker was already active, you have to press the PEAK SEARCH key on the
front panel or the "Peak" softkey in the MKR > menu in order to set the currently
active marker to the maximum of the displayed signal.
Increasing the Frequency Resolution

The frequency resolution of the marker is predefined by the pixel resolution of the
trace. A trace uses 691 pixels, i.e. if the frequency span is 1 MHz, each pixel corre-
sponds to a span of approx. 1.4 kHz. This corresponds to a maximum uncertainty of +/-
0.7 kHz.
You can increase the pixel resolution of the trace by reducing the frequency span.
Reducing the frequency span to 10 kHz

1. Press the SPAN key.
2. Using the numeric keypad, enter 10 in the dialog box and confirm the entry with the
KHZ key.
The generator signal is measured using a span of 10 kHz. The pixel resolution of the
trace is now approx. 14 Hz (10 kHz span / 691 pixels) , i.e. the precision of the marker
frequency display increases to approx. ±7 Hz.
Setting the Reference Level

With signal analyzers, the reference level is the level at the upper limit of the diagram.
To achieve the widest dynamic range possible for a spectrum measurement, use the
entire level span of the signal analyzer. In other words, the highest level that occurs in
the signal should be located at the top edge of the diagram (=reference level) or imme-
diately below it.

Low Reference Levels

If the selected reference level is lower than the highest signal that occurs in the spec-
trum, the signal path in the R&S FSVA/FSV is overloaded.
In this case, the message "IFOVL" is displayed in the error message field.
In the presettings, the value of the reference level is -10 dBm. If the input signal is
-30 dBm, the reference level can be reduced by 20 dB without causing the signal path
to be overloaded.
Reducing the reference level by 20 dB

1. Press the AMPT key.
The amplitude menu is displayed. The "Ref Level" softkey is highlighted in red to
indicate that it is activated for data entry. The dialog box for the reference level is
also opened.
2. Using the numeric keypad, enter 30 and confirm the entry with the - DBM key.
The reference level is set to -30 dBm. The maximum of the trace is near the maxi-
mum of the measurement diagram. However, the increase in the displayed noise is
not substantial. Thus, the distance between the signal maximum and the noise dis-
play (=dynamic range) has increased.
Setting the marker level equal to the reference level

The marker can also be used to shift the maximum value of the trace directly to the top
edge of the diagram. If the marker is located at the maximum level of the trace (as in
this example), the reference level can be moved to the marker level as follows:
1. Press the MKR key.
2. Press the "Ref Lvl = Mkr Lvl" softkey.
The reference level is set equal to the measured level where the marker is located.
Thus, setting the reference level is reduced to two keystrokes.
3.5.1.2 Measuring the Signal Frequency Using the Frequency Counter
The built-in frequency counter allows you to measure the frequency more accurately
than measuring it with the marker. The frequency sweep is stopped at the marker, and
the R&S FSVA/FSV measures the frequency of the signal at the marker position.
In the following example, the frequency of the generator at 128 MHz is shown by using
the marker.
Prerequisite
In this example, a precise frequency measurement is to be performed. Therefore, con-
nect the signal generator's "Ref OUT" connector to the analyzer's "Ref IN" connector.
1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the PRESET key.

The R&S FSVA/FSV is set to its default state.
2. Set the center frequency and the span.

a) Press the FREQ key and enter 128 MHz.
The center frequency of the R&S FSVA/FSV is set to 128 MHz.
b) Press the SPAN key and enter 1 MHz.
The frequency span of the R&S FSVA/FSV is set to 1 MHz.
3. In the "Setup" menu, select "Reference Ext".
4. Activate the marker by pressing the MKR key.

The marker is activated and set to the signal maximum. The level and the fre-
quency of the marker are displayed in the marker field (diagram header or marker
table).
5. Activate the frequency counter by pressing the "Sig Count On/Off" softkey in the
"MKR FUNC" menu.
The result of frequency counting is displayed in the selected resolution in the
marker field.
Figure 3-11: Measurement of the frequency with the frequency counter

Prerequisites for using the internal frequency counter

In order to obtain a correct result when measuring the frequency with the internal fre-
quency counter, an RF sinusoidal signal or a spectral line must be available. The
marker must be located more than 25 dB above the noise level to ensure that the
specified measurement accuracy is adhered to.
3.5.2 Measuring Harmonics of Sinusoidal Signals
Measuring the harmonics of a signal is a very common task that can be performed
optimally by using a Signal and Spectrum Analyzer.
In the following example, the generator signal with 128 MHz and -20 dBm is used
again.
Measuring the Suppression of the First and Second Harmonic of an Input Signal
The R&S FSVA/FSV is in the default state.
2. Set the start frequency to 100 MHz and the stop frequency to 400 MHz.
b) Press the "Start" softkey and enter 100 MHz.
c) Press the "Stop" softkey and enter 400 MHz.
The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the fundamental and the first and second har-
monics of the input signal.
3. To average (smooth) the noise, reduce the video bandwidth.

a) Press the BW key.
b) Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey and enter 100 kHz.
4. Set the attenuation to 0 dB.

a) Press the AMPT key.
b) Press the "RF Atten Manual" softkey.
c) Enter 0 dB in the edit dialog box.
5. Activate the marker by pressing the MKR key.

"Marker 1" is activated and positioned to the signal maximum (fundamental at 128
MHz). The level and frequency of the marker is displayed in the marker field.
6. Activate the delta marker and measure the harmonic suppression.

a) In the "MKR" menu, press the "Marker 2" softkey.
"Marker 2" is activated as a delta marker ("D2 [1]"). It is automatically set on
the largest harmonic of the signal. The frequency offset and level offset from
marker 1 are displayed in the channel information bar.

b) In the "MKR" menu, press the "Marker 3" softkey.

"Marker 3" is activated as a delta marker ("D3 [1]"). It is automatically set on
the next largest harmonic of the signal. The frequency offset and level offset
from marker 1 on the fundamental are displayed in the channel information bar
(see Figure 3-12).
Figure 3-12: Measuring the harmonic suppression of the internal reference generator.
Delta markers D2 [1] and D3 [1] show the offset of the first and second harmonics from
the fundamental.
Reducing Noise
The signal analyzer offers three methods to differentiate the harmonics of a signal from
the noise effectively:
● Reducing the video bandwidth
● Averaging the trace
● Reducing the resolution bandwidth
Reducing the video bandwidth and averaging the traces cause the noise from the ana-
lyzer or the DUT to be reduced, depending on which component is larger. Both averag-
ing methods reduce the measurement uncertainty, particularly in the case of small sig-
nal-to-noise ratios, because the measurement signal is also separated from the noise.

Reducing the noise by reducing the video bandwidth

1. Press the BW key.
2. Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey.
3. Reduce the video bandwidth to 1 kHz (for example), by entering 1 kHz.

This smoothes the noise significantly, and the sweep time is increased to 200 ms.
In other words, the measurement will take significantly more time. The video band-
width that is displayed is marked with a bullet to indicate that it is no longer coupled
to the resolution bandwidth (see Figure 3-13).
Figure 3-13: Suppression of noise during harmonics measurement by reducing video bandwidth
4. Recouple the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.

b) Press the "Video BW Auto" softkey.
Reducing the noise by averaging the trace

1. Press the TRACE key.
2. Press the "Trace Wizard" softkey.

3. For "Trace 1", press the button in the "Trace Mode" column and select "Average"
from the list.
The noise component of the trace is smoothed by averaging 10 successive traces.
4. Switch off trace averaging by pressing the button in the "Trace Mode" column and
selecting "Clear Write" from the list.
Reducing the noise by reducing the measurement bandwidth
The noise is reduced in proportion to the bandwidth by reducing the resolution band-
width, i.e. reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10 also reduces the noise by
a factor of 10 (which corresponds to 10 dB). The amplitude of sinusoidal signals is not
affected by reducing the resolution bandwidth.
1. Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz.
b) Press the "Res BW Manual" softkey and enter 10 kHz.
The noise decreases by approx. 25 dB compared to the previous setting. Since
the video bandwidth is coupled to the resolution bandwidth, it is reduced to 30
kHz in proportion to the resolution bandwidth. This causes the sweep time to
increase to 3.0 seconds.
2. Reset the resolution bandwidth (couple it to the span) by pressing the "Res BW
Auto" softkey in the "BW" menu.
3.5.3 Measuring Signal Spectra with Multiple Signals
3.5.3.1 Separating Signals by Selecting the Resolution Bandwidth
A basic feature of a Signal and Spectrum Analyzer is the ability to separate the spec-
tral components of a mixture of signals. The resolution at which the individual compo-
nents can be separated is determined by the resolution bandwidth. Selecting a resolu-
tion bandwidth that is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral
components, i.e. they are displayed as a single component.
An RF sinusoidal signal is displayed using the passband characteristic of the defined
resolution filter (RBW). Its specified bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth of the filter.
Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is
smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal. If the resolution bandwidth
is equal to the frequency spacing, the spectrum display shows a level drop of 3 dB pre-
cisely in the center of the two signals. Decreasing the resolution bandwidth makes the
level drop larger, which thus makes the individual signals clearer.
Higher spectral resolution at a narrower bandwidth is accomplished through longer
sweep times at the same span. Reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 3
increases the sweep time by a factor of 9.

Example:
Separating Two Signals
The two signals have a level of -30 dBm each at a frequency spacing of 30 kHz
Level Frequency
Signal generator 1 -30 dBm 128,00 MHz
Signal generator 2 -30 dBm 128,03 MHz
2. Set the center frequency to 128.015 MHz and the frequency span to 300 kHz.
a) Press the FREQ key and enter 128.015 MHz.
b) Press the SPAN key and enter 300 kHz.
3. Set the resolution bandwidth to 30 kHz and the video bandwidth to 1 kHz.
a) Press the BW key
c) Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey and enter 1 kHz.
Note: Larger video bandwidths. The video bandwidth is set to 1 kHz in order to
make the level drop in the center of the two signals clearly visible. At larger video
bandwidths, the video voltage that results from envelope detection is not suffi-
ciently suppressed. This produces additional voltages, which are visible in the
trace, in the transition area between the two signals.

Figure 3-14: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with the resolution band-
width which corresponds to the frequency spacing of the signals
Matching generator and R&S FSVA/FSV frequencies

The level drop is located exactly in the center of the screen only if the generator
frequencies match the frequency display of the R&S FSVA/FSV exactly. To ach-
ieve exact matching, the frequencies of the generators and the R&S FSVA/FSV
must be synchronized.
4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz. To do so, in the bandwidth menu, press
the "Res BW Manual" softkey and enter 100 kHz.
It is no longer possible to clearly distinguish the two generator signals.

Figure 3-15: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band-
width which is larger than their frequency spacing
Note: Reducing the resolution bandwidth. The resolution bandwidth (RBW) can be
reduced again by turning the rotary knob counterclockwise, thus yielding a higher
frequency resolution.
5. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz. To do so, in the bandwidth menu, press the
"Res BW Manual" softkey and enter 1 kHz.
The two generator signals are shown with high resolution. However, the sweep
time becomes longer. At smaller bandwidths, the noise display decreases simulta-
neously (10 dB decrease in noise floor for a decrease in bandwidth by a factor of
10).

Figure 3-16: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band-
width (1 kHz) which is significantly smaller than their frequency spacing
3.5.3.2 Measuring the Modulation Depth of an AM-Modulated Carrier (Span > 0)
In the frequency range display, the AM side bands can be resolved with a narrow
bandwidth and measured separately. The modulation depth of a carrier modulated with
a sinusoidal signal can then be measured. Since the dynamic range of a signal ana-
lyzer is very large, extremely small modulation depths can also be measured precisely.
For this purpose, the R&S FSVA/FSV provides measurement routines that output the
modulation depth numerically in % directly.
Test setup

Frequency 128 MHz
Level -30 dBm
Modulation 50 % AM, 10 kHz AF
2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz and span to 50 kHz.

3. Activate the marker function for measuring the AM modulation depth.

a) Press the MEAS key.
b) Press the "More" key.
c) Press the "AM Mod Depth" softkey.
The R&S FSVA/FSV automatically sets a marker to the carrier signal in the
center of the diagram and one delta marker each to the upper and lower AM
sidebands. The R&S FSVA/FSV calculates the AM modulation depth from the
level differences of the delta markers to the main marker and outputs the
numeric value in the marker field.
Figure 3-17: Measurement of the AM modulation depth
The modulation depth is displayed as "MDepth". The frequency of the AF signal can be
obtained from the frequency display of the delta marker.
3.5.3.3 Measuring AM-Modulated Signals
The signal analyzer rectifies the RF input signal and displays it as a magnitude spec-
trum. The rectification also demodulates AM-modulated signals. The AF voltage can be
displayed in zero span if the modulation sidebands fall within the resolution bandwidth.
Displaying the AF of an AM-modulated signal (Zero Span)
Test setup

Frequency 128 MHz
Level -30 dBm
Modulation 50 % AM, 1 kHz AF
2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz and the span to 0 Hz.
b) Press the SPAN key and enter 0 Hz or press the "Zero Span" softkey.
3. Set the sweep time to 2.5 ms.

a) Press the SWEEP key.
b) Press the "Sweeptime Manual" softkey.
c) Enter 2.5 ms.
4. Set the reference level to +6 dBm and the display range to linear.
a) Press the AMPT key and enter 6 dBm.
b) Press the "Range" softkey.
c) Press the "Range Linear %" softkey.
5. Set triggering in response to the AF signal by using the video trigger to produce a
static image.
a) Press the TRIG key.
b) Press the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey and select "Video" using the arrow keys.
c) Press the "Trg/Gate Level" softkey and enter 50%.
The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line across the entire measure-
ment diagram. The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the 1 kHz AF signal as a static
image in zero span. Use a headset to listen to the AF.
6. Activate the internal AM demodulator.

a) Press the MKR FUNC key.
b) Press the "Marker Demod" softkey.
The R&S FSVA/FSV automatically switches on the AM audio demodulator. A 1
kHz tone can be heard over headset. If necessary, use the volume control knob
for AF OUTPUT on the front panel to turn up the volume.
3.5.4 Measurements in Zero Span
For radio transmission systems that use the TDMA method (e.g. GSM or IS136), trans-
mission quality is determined not only by spectral characteristics but also by character-
istics in zero span. A timeslot is assigned to each user since several users share the
same frequency. Smooth operation is ensured only if all users adhere exactly to their
assigned timeslots.

Both the power during the send phase as well as the timing and duration of the TDMA
burst, and rise and fall times of the burst, are important.
3.5.4.1 Measuring the Power Characteristic of Burst Signals
To measure power in zero span, the R&S FSVA/FSV offers easy-to-use functions that
measure the power over a predefined time.
Measuring the Power of a GSM Burst During the Activation Phase

Test setup
Frequency 890 MHz
Level 0 dBm
Modulation GSM, one timeslot activated
2. Set the center frequency to 890 MHz, the span to 0 Hz and the resolution band-
width to 1 MHz.
b) Press the SPAN key and enter 0 Hz, or press the "Zero Span" softkey.
3. Set the reference level of the R&S FSVA/FSV to 10 dBm (= level of the signal gen-
erator +10 dB) and set the attenuation to 20 dB.
b) Enter 10 dBm.
c) Press the "Rf Atten Manual" softkey.
d) Enter 20 dB.
4. Set the sweep time to 1 ms.

b) Press the "Sweeptime Manual" softkey and enter 1 ms.
The R&S FSVA/FSV shows the GSM burst continuously across the display.
5. By using the video trigger, set triggering on the rising edge of the burst.


The R&S FSVA/FSV shows a static image with the GSM burst at the start of
the trace. The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line labeled with the
absolute level for the trigger threshold in the measurement diagram.
6. Configure power measurement in zero span.

b) Press the "Time Domain Power" softkey to open the submenu.
c) Switch the "Limits" softkey to "On."
d) Press the "Left Limit" softkey.
e) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line to the start of the
burst.
f) Press the "Right Limit" softkey.
g) By turning the rotary knob counterclockwise, set the second vertical line to the
end of the burst.
The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the average (mean) power during the activation phase of
the burst.
Figure 3-18: Measurement of the average power during the burst of a GSM signal

Measuring the Edges of a GSM Burst with High Time Resolution

Because of the high time resolution of the R&S FSVA/FSV at the 0 Hz display range,
the edges of TDMA bursts can be measured precisely. The edges can be shifted to the
screen area by using the trigger offset.
Test setup
Frequency 890 MHz
Level 0 dBm
Modulation GSM, one timeslot activated
The measurement is based on the setting in the example above for measuring the
power of the GSM during the activation phase.
1. Switch off the power measurement.
b) Press the "All Functions Off" softkey.
2. Increase the time resolution to 100 µs.

b) Press the "Sweeptime Manual" softkey and enter 100 µs.
3. Using the trigger softkey, shift the rising edge of the GSM burst to the center of the
screen.
b) Press the "Trigger Offset" softkey.

c) By turning the rotary knob counterclockwise, move the trigger offset until the
burst edge can be seen in the center of the screen, or enter -50 µs.
The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the rising edge of the GSM burst.
Figure 3-19: Rising edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution
4. Using the trigger offset, move the falling edge of the burst to the center of the
screen. To do so, switch the "Trg/Gate Polarity" softkey to "Neg".
The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the falling edge of the GSM burst.

Figure 3-20: Falling edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution
3.5.4.2 Measuring the Signal-to-Noise Ratio of Burst Signals
When TDMA transmission methods are used, the signal-to-noise ratio or the deactiva-
tion dynamic range can be measured by comparing the power values during the activa-
tion phase and the deactivation phase of the transmission burst. For this purpose, the
R&S FSVA/FSV provides the function for measuring absolute and relative power in
zero span. In the following example, the measurement is performed using a GSM
burst.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio of a GSM Signal
Test setup

Frequency 890 MHz
Level 0 dBm
Modulation GSM, one time slot is switched on
2. Set the center frequency to 890 MHz, the span to 0 Hz and the resolution band-
width to 1 MHz.
b) Press the SPAN key and enter 0 Hz or press the "Zero Span" softkey.
c) Press the BW key.
d) Press the "Res BW Manual" softkey and enter 1 MHz.
3. Set the reference level of the R&S FSVA/FSV to 0 dBm (= level of the signal gen-
erator) by pressing the AMPT key and entering 0 dBm.
4. Set the sweep time to 2 ms.

b) Press the "Sweeptime Manual" softkey and enter 2 ms.
The R&S FSVA/FSV shows the GSM burst continuously across the display.
5. Use the trigger source "Video" and the trigger polarity "Pos" to trigger on the rising
edge of the burst and shift the start of burst to the center of the screen.
The R&S FSVA/FSV shows a static image with the GSM burst at the start of
the trace.
d) Press the "Trigger Offset" softkey and enter -1 ms.
The R&S FSVA/FSV shows the GSM burst in the right half of the measurement
diagram.
6. Configure the power measurement in zero span.

b) Press the "Time Domain Power" softkey to open the submenu.
c) Switch the "Limits" softkey to "On."
d) Press the "Left Limit" softkey.
e) Using the rotary knob, move the vertical line to the start of the burst.
f) Press the "Right Limit" softkey.

g) Using the rotary knob, move the second vertical line to the end of the burst.
The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the power during the activation phase of the
burst.
Figure 3-21: Power measurement during the activation phase of the burst
7. Measure the power during the deactivation phase of the burst.


b) Switch the "Trg/Gate Polarity" softkey to "Neg."

The R&S FSVA/FSV initiates triggering in response to the falling edge of the
burst. This shifts the burst to the left-hand half of the measurement diagram.
The power is measured in the deactivation phase. The start of the burst is shif-
ted to the center of the screen and the power during the deactivation phase is
measured.
Figure 3-22: Measurement of the signal-to-noise ratio of a GSM burst signal in zero span.
3.5.4.3 Measuring FM-Modulated Signals
Since signal analyzers can display only the magnitude of the measurement signal by
using the envelope detector, the modulation of FM-modulated signals cannot be mea-
sured directly as in the case of AM-modulated signals. The voltage at the output of the
envelope detector remains constant for FM-modulated signals as long as the fre-
quency deviation of the signal is located within the flat part of the passband character-
istic of the employed resolution filter. Amplitude variation occurs only if the instantane-
ous frequency extends into a falling edge of the filter curve. This behavior can be used
to demodulate FM-modulated signals. The center frequency of the analyzer is set in
such a manner that the nominal frequency of the measurement signal is located on a
filter edge (below or above the center frequency). The resolution bandwidth and the
frequency offset must be selected in such a manner that the instantaneous frequency
is located in the linear part of the filter edge. As a result, the frequency variation of the
FM-modulated signal is transformed into an amplitude variation that can be displayed
on screen in zero span.
Displaying the AF of an FM-Modulated Carrier

Test setup
Frequency 128 MHz
Level -20 dBm
Modulation FM 0 kHz deviation (i.e. FM modulation is deactiva-

ted), 1 kHz AF
2. Set the center frequency to 127.50 MHz and the span to 300 kHz.
a) Press the FREQ key and enter 127.50 MHz.

c) Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey and enter 30 kHz.
4. Set the display range to 20 dB and shift the filter trace to the center of the screen.
b) Press the "Range" softkey
c) Press the "Range Log Manual" softkey and enter 20 dB.
d) Press the "Up↑" softkey.
e) Press the "More" softkey.
f) Switch the "Grid" softkey to "Rel".
g) Press the "Up↑" softkey.
h) Press the "Ref Level" softkey.

i) Using the rotary knob, set the reference level such that the filter edge at the
center frequency intersects the -10 dB level line.
The filter edge of the 300 kHz filter is displayed. This corresponds to the
demodulator characteristic for FM signals with a steepness of approx. 18
dB/140 kHz. This can be verified using the marker and delta marker.
Figure 3-23: Display of the filter edge of the 300 kHz filter as an FM discriminator character-
istic
5. Set the FM deviation to 50 kHz on the signal generator.
6. Set the span to 0 Hz on the R&S FSVA/FSV.

a) Press the SPAN key.
b) Press the "Zero Span" softkey.
The demodulated FM signal is displayed. The signal crosses the screen contin-
uously.
7. Establish a stable display using video triggering.



A static image for the FM AF signal is produced.
Result: (-10 ( 5) dB; this yields a deviation of 100 kHz when the steepness of
the demodulator characteristic is 5 dB/100 kHz.
Figure 3-24: Demodulated FM signal
8. Determine the deviation.

a) Press the MKR key.
Marker 1 is activated and placed on the peak of the curve.
b) Press the "Marker 2" softkey.
c) Press the MKR key.
d) Press the "More" softkey.
e) Press the "Min" softkey.
Marker 2 (delta marker) is placed on the minimum of the curve. The level differ-
ence is 13.3 dB, which corresponds to the peak-to-peak deviation. With the fil-
ter slope of 18 dB/140 kHz, the deviation can be calculated as follows:
3.5.5 Storing and Loading Instrument Settings
The R&S FSVA/FSV can store complete instrument settings together with instrument
configurations and measurement data in a settings file. The data is stored on the built-

in hard disk or - if selected - on a USB device (e.g. memory stick) or on a network

drive. The hard disk has the drive letter C:.
In the default state, the current settings are stored. This includes the settings of the
measurement functions, the activated limit lines and the active transducer factor.
3.5.5.1 Storing an Instrument Configuration (without Traces)
1. Press the SAVE/RCL key.
2. Press the "Save" softkey.

The dialog box for instrument configurations is displayed. The File Name field is
in edit mode and contains a suggestion for a new name.
3. To change the suggested name, enter a name for the settings file to be stored.
The name may contain letters and digits. For details on alphanumeric entries see
Chapter 3.4.3.2, "Entering Alphanumeric Parameters", on page 65.
4. To store the file in a directory different to the default directory, select the required
path in the Files area.
If the path is not changed, the default path for the instrument configurations
(C:\R_S\Instr\user) is used.
Note: The selected directory is automatically used for any further save and recall
operations.

5. Press the "Save File" softkey.

The settings file is stored and the dialog box is closed.
3.5.5.2 Storing Traces
Before you can store traces, you must first select the corresponding item entry. To do
so, proceed as follows:
2. Press the "Save" softkey.
3. To change the suggested name, enter a file name.
4. Select the "All Traces" option.
5. Press the "SAVE" button.
3.5.5.3 Loading an Instrument Configuration (with Traces)
2. Press the "Recall" softkey.
3. If necessary, select the path under which the file to be loaded is stored.
4. Define the settings file to be loaded. One of the following ways is possible:
● Click in the File Name field and enter the file name via the keyboard or key-
pad.
● Select the file from the selection list using the touchscreen or mouse.
Alternatively:
a) Press the "Select File" softkey.
The focus is set on the files list.
b) Using the rotary knob or arrow keys, focus the settings file to be loaded and
confirm by pressing the rotary knob or the ENTER key.
5. To load traces, select the "All Traces" option.

Note: The "All Traces" option is only available if the selected file contains traces.
6. Press the "Recall" button in the dialog box, or the "Recall File" softkey.
The settings file is loaded. During loading, the R&S FSVA/FSV detects which items
the selected settings file contains and, if applicable, ignores any items that were
selected but are not available.
3.5.5.4 Configuring Automatic Loading
If the R&S FSVA/FSV is switched on in the factory default state, it loads the instrument
settings that it had when switched off (provided that it was switched off using the ON /

Advanced Measurement Examples
OFF key on the front panel; see Chapter 3.2.1.8, "Switching the Instrument On and
Off", on page 32. If the instrument is preset, it loads the presettings.
You can alter these settings and define a settings file to be loaded. This requires per-
forming the following procedure. Be aware that the chosen settings file is loaded both
while booting and presetting.
2. Press the "Startup Recall" softkey.
3. Press the "Startup Recall (On/Off)" softkey to activate the recall function.
4. Press the "Select Dataset" softkey.

The "Startup Recall" dialog box is displayed.
5. If necessary, select the path under which the file to be loaded is stored.
6. Select the settings file to be loaded (DFL file).
7. Press the "Select" button in the dialog box.
3.6 Advanced Measurement Examples

This chapter explains how to operate the R&S FSVA/FSV using typical measurements
as examples. Additional background information on the settings is given. For more
detailed information on all available softkeys and the corresponding instrument func-
tions, see Chapter 4, "Instrument Functions", on page 135.
Examples of more basic character are provided in the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start
Guide, as an introduction. The following topics are included in the R&S FSVA/FSV
Quick Start Guide:
● Measuring a Sinusoidal Signal
– Measuring the Level and Frequency Using Markers
– Measuring the Signal Frequency Using the Frequency Counter
● Measuring Harmonics of Sinusoidal Signals
– Measuring the Suppression of the First and Second Harmonic of an Input Sig-
nal
– Measuring the Modulation Depth of an AM-Modulated Carrier (Span > 0)
– Measuring of AM-Modulated Signals
● Measuring Signal Spectra with Multiple Signals
– Separating Signals by Selecting the Resolution Bandwidth
● Measurements with Zero Span
– Measuring the Power Characteristic of Burst Signals
– Measuring the Signal-to-Noise Ratio of Burst Signals
– Measurement of FM-Modulated Signals
● Storing and Loading Instrument Settings

– Storing an Instrument Configuration (without Traces)

– Storing Traces
– Loading an Instrument Configuration (with Traces)
– Configuring Automatic Loading
● Test Setup.............................................................................................................106
● Measurement of Harmonics.................................................................................. 107
● Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals.......................................................... 109
● Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise............................................................ 113
● Noise Measurements............................................................................................ 118
● Measurements on Modulated Signals...................................................................125
3.6.1 Test Setup
All of the following examples are based on the standard settings of the R&S FSVA/
FSV. These are set with the PRESET key. A complete listing of the standard settings
can be found in chapter "Instrument Functions", section "Initializing the Configuration –
PRESET Key".
In the following examples, a signal generator is used as a signal source. The RF output
of the signal generator is connected to the RF input of R&S FSVA/FSV.
If a 64 MHz signal is required for the test setup, as an alternative to the signal genera-
tor, the internal 64 MHz reference generator can be used:
1. Switch on the internal reference generator.

a) Press the SETUP key.
b) Press the "More" key.
c) Press the "Service" softkey.
d) Press the "Input RF/Cal" softkey, until "Cal" is highlighted.
The internal 64 MHz reference generator is now on. The R&S FSVA/FSV's RF
input is switched off.
2. Switch on the RF input again for normal operation of the R&S FSVA/FSV. Two
ways are possible:
a) Press the PRESET key.
or:
b) Press the SETUP key.
c) Press the "Service" softkey.
d) Press the "Input RF/Cal" softkey, until "RF" is highlighted.
The internal signal path of the R&S FSVA/FSV is switched back to the RF input in
order to resume normal operation.

3.6.2 Measurement of Harmonics
Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW):
Frequency: 128 MHz
Level: - 25 dBm
Procedure on the R&S FSVA/FSV:
1. Set the R&S FSVA/FSV to its default state by pressing the PRESET key.
2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz and the span to 100 kHz.
3. Switch on the marker by pressing the MKR key.

The marker is positioned on the trace maximum.
4. Set the measured signal frequency and the measured level as reference values.
a) Press the MKR FUNC key
b) Press the "Ref Fixed" softkey.
The position of the marker becomes the reference point. The reference point
level is indicated by a horizontal line, the reference point frequency with a verti-
cal line. At the same time, the delta marker 2 is switched on.

Figure 3-25: Fundamental wave and the frequency and level reference point
5. Make the step size for the center frequency equal to the signal frequency
b) Press the "CF-Stepsize" softkey and press the "= Marker" softkey in the sub-
menu.
The step size for the center frequency is now equal to the marker frequency.
6. Set the center frequency to the second harmonic of the signal.

b) Press the UPARROW key once.
The center frequency is set to the second harmonic.
7. Place the delta marker on the second harmonic.

a) Press the MKR -> key.
b) Press the "Peak" softkey.
The delta marker moves to the maximum of the second harmonic. The displayed
level result is relative to the reference point level (= fundamental wave level).

Figure 3-26: Measuring the level difference between the fundamental wave (= reference point level)
and the 2nd harmonic
The other harmonics are measured with steps 5 and 6, the center frequency being
incremented or decremented in steps of 128 MHz using the UPARROW or DNARROW
key.
3.6.3 Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals
3.6.3.1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth
A basic feature of a signal analyzer is being able to separate the spectral components
of a mixture of signals. The resolution at which the individual components can be sepa-
rated is determined by the resolution bandwidth. Selecting a resolution bandwidth that
is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral components, i.e.
they are displayed as a single component.
An RF sinusoidal signal is displayed by means of the passband characteristic of the
resolution filter (RBW) that has been set. Its specified bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth
of the filter.

Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is
smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal. If the resolution bandwidth
is equal to the frequency spacing, the spectrum display screen shows a level drop of 3
dB precisely in the center of the two signals. Decreasing the resolution bandwidth
makes the level drop larger, which thus makes the individual signals clearer.
If there are large level differences between signals, the resolution is determined by
selectivity as well as by the resolution bandwidth that has been selected. The measure
of selectivity used for signal analyzers is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB
bandwidth (= shape factor).
For the R&S FSVA/FSV, the shape factor for bandwidths is < 5, i.e. the 60 dB band-
width of the 30 kHz filter is <150 kHz.
The higher spectral resolution with smaller bandwidths is won by longer sweep times
for the same span. The sweep time has to allow the resolution filters to settle during a
sweep at all signal levels and frequencies to be displayed.
3.6.3.2 Intermodulation Measurements
If several signals are applied to a transmission two-port device with nonlinear charac-
teristic, intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of
the signals. The nonlinear characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals
which intermodulate at the characteristic. The intermodulation products of lower order
have a special effect since their level is largest and they are near the useful signals.
The intermodulation product of third order causes the highest interference. It is the
intermodulation product generated from one of the useful signals and the 2nd harmonic
of the second useful signal in case of two-tone modulation.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.9, "Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point (TOI)",
on page 374.
Measurement Example – Measuring the R&S FSVA/FSV's Intrinsic Intermodula-

tion
Test setup:

Level Frequency
Signal generator 1 -4 dBm 999.7 MHz
Signal generator 2 -4 dBm 1000.3 MHz
Setting up the measurement

1. Set the R&S FSVA/FSV to its default settings by pressing the PRESET key.
The R&S FSVA/FSV is in its default state.
2. Set center frequency to 1 GHz and the frequency span to 3 MHz.
3. Set the reference level to -10 dBm and RF attenuation to 0 dB.

The noise is reduced, the trace is smoothed further and the intermodulation prod-
ucts can be clearly seen.
5. Set the VBW to "1 kHz".
Measuring intermodulation using the 3rd order intercept (TOI)measurement func-

tion
1. Press the MEAS key and then the "TOI" softkey.
The R&S FSVA/FSV activates four markers to measure the intermodulation dis-
tance. Two markers are positioned on the useful signals and two on the intermodu-
lation products. The 3rd order intercept is calculated from the level difference
between the useful signals and the intermodulation products. It is then displayed
on the screen:

Figure 3-27: Result of intrinsic intermodulation measurement on the R&S FSVA/FSV.
The 3rd order intercept (TOI) is displayed at the top right corner of the grid.
2. The level of a signal analyzer's intrinsic intermodulation products depends on the

RF level of the useful signals at the input mixer. When the RF attenuation is added,
the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased. With an
additional RF attenuation of 10 dB, the levels of the intermodulation products are
reduced by 20 dB. The noise level is, however, increased by 10 dB.
Increase the RF attenuation to 20 dB to reduce intermodulation products.
The R&S FSVA/FSV's intrinsic intermodulation products disappear below the noise
floor.

3.6.4 Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise
The minimum signal level a signal analyzer can measure is limited by its intrinsic noise.
Small signals can be swamped by noise and therefore cannot be measured. For sig-
nals that are just above the intrinsic noise, the accuracy of the level measurement is
influenced by the intrinsic noise of the signal analyzer.
The displayed noise level of a signal analyzer depends on its noise figure, the selected
RF attenuation, the selected reference level, the selected resolution and video band-
width and the detector. The effect of the different parameters is explained in the follow-
ing.
Impact of the RF attenuation setting

The sensitivity of a signal analyzer is directly influenced by the selected RF attenua-
tion. The highest sensitivity is obtained at a RF attenuation of 0 dB. The attenuation
can be set in 10 dB steps up to 70 dB. Each additional 10 dB step reduces the sensitiv-
ity by 10 dB, i.e. the displayed noise is increased by 10 dB.

Impact of the resolution bandwidth

The sensitivity of a signal analyzer also directly depends on the selected bandwidth.
The highest sensitivity is obtained at the smallest bandwidth (1 Hz). If the bandwidth is
increased, the reduction in sensitivity is proportional to the change in bandwidth. The
R&S FSVA/FSV has bandwidth settings in 1, 2, 3, 5 sequence. Increasing the band-
width by a factor of 3 increases the displayed noise by approx. 5 dB (4.77 dB pre-
cisely). If the bandwidth is increased by a factor of 10, the displayed noise increases by
a factor of 10, i.e. 10 dB.
Impact of the video bandwidth

The displayed noise of a signal analyzer is also influenced by the selected video band-
width. If the video bandwidth is considerably smaller than the resolution bandwidth,
noise spikes are suppressed, i.e. the trace becomes much smoother. The level of a
sine wave signal is not influenced by the video bandwidth. A sine wave signal can
therefore be freed from noise by using a video bandwidth that is small compared with
the resolution bandwidth, and thus be measured more accurately.
Impact of the detector

Noise is evaluated differently by the different detectors. The noise display is therefore
influenced by the choice of detector. Sine wave signals are weighted in the same way
by all detectors, i.e. the level display for a sine wave RF signal does not depend on the
selected detector, provided that the signal-to-noise ratio is high enough. The measure-
ment accuracy for signals in the vicinity of intrinsic signal analyzer noise is also influ-
enced by the detector which has been selected. For details on the detectors of the
R&S FSVA/FSV refer to chapter "Instrument Functions", section "Detector overview" or
the Online Help.
3.6.4.1 Measurement Example – Measuring Level at Low S/N Ratios
The example shows the different factors influencing the S/N ratio.
Frequency: 128 MHz
Level: - 90 dBm
Procedure:
2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz and the frequency span to 100 MHz:
a) Press the FREQ key and enter "128 MHz".

b) Press the SPAN key and enter "100 MHz".
Figure 3-28: Sine wave signal with low S/N ratio. The signal is measured with the auto peak
detector and is completely hidden in the intrinsic noise of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
3. To suppress noise spikes the trace can be averaged.

a) Press the TRACE key.
b) Press the "Trace Wizard" softkey.
The Trace Wizard dialog box opens.

c) Select "Average" in the "Trace Mode" drop-down menu of the selected trace.
The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged. To perform averaging, the
R&S FSVA/FSV automatically switches on the sample detector. The RF signal,
therefore, can be more clearly distinguished from noise.
Figure 3-29: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio if the trace is averaged.
4. Instead of trace averaging, a video filter that is narrower than the resolution band-
width can be selected:
c) Select "Clear Write" in the "Trace Mode" drop-down menu of the selected
trace.
d) Press the BW key.

e) Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey and enter "10 kHz".

The RF signal can be more clearly distinguished from noise.
Figure 3-30: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio if a smaller video bandwidth is selected.
5. By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10, the noise is reduced by 10

dB:

a) In the "Bandwidth" menu press the "Res BW Manual" softkey and enter "100
kHz".
The displayed noise is reduced by approx. 10 dB. The signal, therefore,
emerges from noise by about 10 dB. Compared to the previous setting, the
video bandwidth has remained the same, i.e. it has increased relative to the
smaller resolution bandwidth. The averaging effect of the video bandwidth is
therefore reduced. The trace will be noisier.
Figure 3-31: Reference signal at a smaller resolution bandwidth
3.6.5 Noise Measurements
Noise measurements play an important role in signal analysis. Noise e.g. affects the
sensitivity of radio communication systems and their components.
Noise power is specified either as the total power in the transmission channel or as the
power referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz. The sources of noise are, for example, amplifier
noise or noise generated by oscillators used for the frequency conversion of useful sig-
nals in receivers or transmitters. The noise at the output of an amplifier is determined
by its noise figure and gain.

The noise of an oscillator is determined by phase noise near the oscillator frequency
and by thermal noise of the active elements far from the oscillator frequency. Phase
noise can mask weak signals near the oscillator frequency and make them impossible
to detect.
3.6.5.1 Measuring Noise Power Density
To measure noise power referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz at a certain frequency, the

R&S FSVA/FSV provides marker function. This marker function calculates the noise
power density from the measured marker level.
Measurement Example – Measuring the Intrinsic Noise Power Density of the

R&S FSVA/FSV at 1 GHz and Calculating the R&S FSVA/FSV's Noise Figure
Test setup:
► Connect no signal to the RF input; terminate RF input with 50 Ω.
Procedure:
2. Set the center frequency to 1.234 GHz and the span to 1 MHz.
a) Press the FREQ key and enter "1.234 GHz".
b) Press the SPAN key and enter "1 MHz".
3. Switch on the marker and set the marker frequency to 1.234 GHz by pressing the
MKR key and entering "1.234 GHz".
4. Switch on the noise marker function by switching on the "Noise Meas" softkey.
b) Switch the "Noise Meas" softkey to "On"
The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the noise power at 1.234 GHz in dBm (1Hz).
Note: Since noise is random, a sufficiently long measurement time has to be
selected to obtain stable measurement results. This can be achieved by averaging
the trace or by selecting a very small video bandwidth relative to the resolution
bandwidth.
5. The measurement result is stabilized by averaging the trace.
c) Select "Average" in the "Trace Mode" drop-down menu of the selected trace.
The R&S FSVA/FSV performs sliding averaging over 10 traces from consecutive
sweeps. The measurement result becomes more stable.

Conversion to other reference bandwidths

The result of the noise measurement can be referred to other bandwidths by simple
conversion. This is done by adding 10 × log (BW) to the measurement result, BW
being the new reference bandwidth.
Example:
A noise power of -150 dBm (1 Hz) is to be referred to a bandwidth of 1 kHz.
P[1kHz] = -150 + 10 × log (1000) = -150 +30 = -120 dBm (1 kHz)
Calculation method for noise power

If the noise marker is switched on, the R&S FSVA/FSV automatically activates the
sample detector. The video bandwidth is set to 1/10 of the selected resolution band-
width (RBW).
To calculate the noise, the R&S FSVA/FSV takes an average over 17 adjacent pixels
(the pixel on which the marker is positioned and 8 pixels to the left, 8 pixels to the right
of the marker). The measurement result is stabilized by video filtering and averaging
over 17 pixels.
Since both video filtering and averaging over 17 trace points is performed in the log
display mode, the result would be 2.51 dB too low (difference between logarithmic
noise average and noise power). The R&S FSVA/FSV, therefore, corrects the noise
figure by 2.51 dB.
To standardize the measurement result to a bandwidth of 1 Hz, the result is also cor-
rected by -10 × log (RBWnoise), with RBWnoise being the power bandwidth of the
selected resolution filter (RBW).
Detector selection
The noise power density is measured in the default setting with the sample detector
and using averaging. Other detectors that can be used to perform a measurement giv-
ing true results are the average detector or the RMS detector. If the average detector is
used, the linear video voltage is averaged and displayed as a pixel. If the RMS detec-
tor is used, the squared video voltage is averaged and displayed as a pixel. The aver-
aging time depends on the selected sweep time (=SWT/501). An increase in the sweep
time gives a longer averaging time per pixel and thus stabilizes the measurement
result. The R&S FSVA/FSV automatically corrects the measurement result of the noise
marker display depending on the selected detector (+1.05 dB for the average detector,
0 dΒ for the RMS detector). It is assumed that the video bandwidth is set to at least
three times the resolution bandwidth. While the average or RMS detector is being
switched on, the R&S FSVA/FSV sets the video bandwidth to a suitable value.
The Pos Peak, Neg Peak, Auto Peak and Quasi Peak detectors are not suitable for
measuring noise power density.
Determining the noise figure

The noise figure of amplifiers or of the R&S FSVA/FSV alone can be obtained from the
noise power display. Based on the known thermal noise power of a 50 Ω resistor at

room temperature (-174 dBm (1Hz)) and the measured noise power Pnoise the noise fig-
ure (NF) is obtained as follows:
NF = Pnoise + 174 – g,
where g = gain of DUT in dB
Example:
The measured internal noise power of the R&S FSVA/FSV at an attenuation of 0 dB is
found to be -143 dBm/1 Hz. The noise figure of the R&S FSVA/FSV is obtained as fol-
lows
NF = -143 + 174 = 31 dB
If noise power is measured at the output of an amplifier, for example, the sum of the
internal noise power and the noise power at the output of the DUT is measured. The
noise power of the DUT can be obtained by subtracting the internal noise power from
the total power (subtraction of linear noise powers). By means of the following diagram,
the noise level of the DUT can be estimated from the level difference between the total
and the internal noise level.
Figure 3-32: Correction factor for measured noise power as a function of the ratio of total power to
the intrinsic noise power of the signal analyzer
3.6.5.2 Measurement of Noise Power within a Transmission Channel
Noise in any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement func-
tions. Thus the noise power in a communication channel can be determined, for exam-
ple. If the noise spectrum within the channel bandwidth is flat, the noise marker from
the previous example can be used to determine the noise power in the channel by con-
sidering the channel bandwidth. If, however, phase noise and noise that normally

increases towards the carrier is dominant in the channel to be measured, or if there are
discrete spurious signals in the channel, the channel power measurement method
must be used to obtain correct measurement results.
Measurement Example – Measuring the Intrinsic Noise of the R&S FSVA/FSV at 1

GHz in a 1.23 MHz Channel Bandwidth with the Channel Power Function
Test setup:
► Leave the RF input of the R&S FSVA/FSV open-circuited or terminate it with 50 Ω.
Procedure:
2. Set the center frequency to 1 GHz and the span to 1 MHz.
3. To obtain maximum sensitivity, set RF attenuation on the R&S FSVA/FSV to 0 dB.
4. Set the "Sweep Type" to "Sweep".
5. Switch on and configure the channel power measurement.

b) Press the "Ch Power/ACLR" softkey.
The R&S FSVA/FSV activates the channel or adjacent channel power mea-
surement according to the currently set configuration.
c) Press the "CP/ACLR Settings" softkey.
d) Press the "Channel Settings" softkey.
e) Press the "Channel Bandwidth" softkey and enter 1.23 MHz.
The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the 1.23 MHz channel as two vertical lines which
are symmetrical to the center frequency.

f) Press the "Adjust Settings" softkey.

The settings for the frequency span, the bandwidth (RBW and VBW) and the
detector are automatically set to the optimum values required for the measure-
ment.
Figure 3-33: Measurement of the R&S FSVA/FSV's intrinsic noise power in a 1.23 MHz chan-
nel bandwidth.
6. Stabilize the measurement result by increasing the sweep time.

In the "Ch Power ACLR" menu, press the "Sweep Time" softkey and enter 1 s.
The trace becomes much smoother because of the RMS detector and the channel
power measurement display is much more stable.
3.6.5.3 Measuring Phase Noise
The R&S FSVA/FSV has an easy-to-use marker function for phase noise measure-
ments. This marker function indicates the phase noise of an RF oscillator at any carrier
in dBc in a bandwidth of 1 Hz.

Measurement Example – Measuring the Phase Noise of a Signal Generator at a

Carrier Offset of 10 kHz
Test setup:
Frequency: 100 MHz
Level: 0 dBm
Procedure:
R&S FSVA/FSV is in its default state.
2. Set the center frequency to 100 MHz and the span to 50 kHz.
a) Press the FREQ key and enter "100 MHz".
b) Press the SPAN key and enter "50 kHz".
3. Set the R&S FSVA/FSV's reference level to 0 dBm (=signal generator level) by
pressing the AMPT key and enter "0 dBm".
4. Enable phase noise measurement.

b) Press the "Phase Noise" softkey.
The R&S FSVA/FSV activates phase noise measurement. Marker 1 (=main
marker) and marker 2 (= delta marker) are positioned on the signal maximum.
The position of the marker is the reference (level and frequency) for the phase
noise measurement. A horizontal line represents the level of the reference
point and a vertical line the frequency of the reference point. The dialog box for
the delta marker is displayed so that the frequency offset at which the phase
noise is to be measured can be entered directly.
5. Set the frequency offset to 10 kHz for determining phase noise by entering "10
kHz".
The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the phase noise at a frequency offset of 10 kHz. The
magnitude of the phase noise in dBc/Hz is displayed in the delta marker output
field at the top right of the screen (Phn2).
6. Stabilize the measurement result by activating trace averaging.

Figure 3-34: Measuring phase noise with the phase-noise marker function
The frequency offset can be varied by moving the marker with the rotary knob or by
entering a new frequency offset as a number.
3.6.6 Measurements on Modulated Signals
For measurements on AM and FM signals refer to the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start
Guide, "Basic Measurements Examples" chapter.
3.6.6.1 Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power
Measuring channel power and adjacent channel power is one of the most important
tasks in the field of digital transmission for a signal analyzer with the necessary test
routines. While, theoretically, channel power could be measured at highest accuracy
with a power meter, its low selectivity means that it is not suitable for measuring adja-
cent channel power as an absolute value or relative to the transmit channel power. The
power in the adjacent channels can only be measured with a selective power meter.
A signal analyzer cannot be classified as a true power meter, because it displays the IF
envelope voltage. However, it is calibrated such as to correctly display the power of a
pure sine wave signal irrespective of the selected detector. This calibration cannot be

applied for non-sinusoidal signals. Assuming that the digitally modulated signal has a
Gaussian amplitude distribution, the signal power within the selected resolution band-
width can be obtained using correction factors. These correction factors are normally
used by the signal analyzer's internal power measurement routines in order to deter-
mine the signal power from IF envelope measurements. These factors apply if and only
if the assumption of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct.
Apart from this common method, the R&S FSVA/FSV also has a true power detector,
i.e. an RMS detector. It correctly displays the power of the test signal within the
selected resolution bandwidth irrespective of the amplitude distribution, without addi-
tional correction factors being required. The absolute measurement uncertainty of the
FSV is < 1.5 dB and a relative measurement uncertainty of < 0.5 dB (each with a confi-
dence level of 95 %).
There are two possible methods for measuring channel and adjacent channel power
with a signal analyzer:
1. IBW method (Integration Bandwidth Method)

The signal analyzer measures with a resolution bandwidth that is less than the
channel bandwidth and integrates the level values of the trace versus the channel
bandwidth. This method is described in "Measurement Example – Measuring the
Intrinsic Noise of the R&S FSVA/FSV at 1 GHz in a 1.23 MHz Channel Bandwidth
with the Channel Power Function" on page 122.
2. Using a channel filter

For a detailed description, refer to the following section.
Measurements using a channel filter

In this case, the signal analyzer makes zero span measurements using an IF filter that
corresponds to the channel bandwidth. The power is measured at the output of the IF
filter. Until now, this method has not been used for signal analyzers, because channel
filters were not available and the resolution bandwidths, optimized for the sweep, did
not have a sufficient selectivity. The method was reserved for special receivers opti-
mized for a particular transmission method.
The R&S FSVA/FSV has test routines for simple channel and adjacent channel power
measurements. These routines give quick results without any complex or tedious set-
ting procedures.
Measurement Example 1 – ACPR Measurement on an CDMA2000 Signal
Test setup:

Frequency: 850 MHz
Level: 0 dBm
Modulation: CDMA2000
Procedure:
2. Press the FREQ key and enter "850 MHz" as the center frequency.
3. Press the SPAN key and enter "4 MHz".
4. Set the reference level to +10 dBm by pressing the AMPT key and enter "10 dBm".
5. Configure the adjacent channel power for the CDMA2000 standard (more pre-
cisely: CDMA2000 1X).
b) Press the "Ch Power ACLR" softkey.
c) Press the "CP/ACLR Standard" softkey.
d) In the standards list, mark CDMA2000.
The R&S FSVA/FSV sets the channel configuration according to the 2000 standard
with 2 adjacent channels above and 2 below the transmit channel. The spectrum is
displayed in the upper part of the screen, the numeric values of the results and the
channel configuration in the lower part of the screen. The various channels are rep-
resented by vertical lines on the graph.
The frequency span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth and detector are
selected automatically to give correct results. To obtain stable results – especially
in the adjacent channels (30 kHz bandwidth) which are narrow in comparison with
the transmission channel bandwidth (1.23 MHz) – the RMS detector is used.
6. Set the optimal reference level and RF attenuation for the applied signal level by
pressing the "Adjust Ref Level" softkey.
7. Activate "Fast ACP" mode to increase the repeatability of results by pressing the
"Fast ACP" softkey (for details see below).
The R&S FSVA/FSV sets the optimal RF attenuation and the reference level based
on the transmission channel power to obtain the maximum dynamic range. The
Figure 3-35 shows the result of the measurement.

Figure 3-35: Adjacent channel power measurement on a CDMA2000 1x signal
Measurement Example 2 – Measuring Adjacent Channel Power of a W-CDMA

Uplink Signal
Test setup:
Frequency: 1950 MHz
Level: 4 dBm
Modulation: 3 GPP W-CDMA Reverse Link
Procedure:

2. Set the center frequency to 1950 MHz by pressing the FREQ key and entering
"1950 MHz".
3. Switch on the ACLR measurement for W-CDMA.

b) Press the "Ch Power ACLR" softkey.
c) Press the "CP/ACLR Standard" softkey.
d) In the standards list, select W-CDMA 3GPP REV.
The R&S FSVA/FSV sets the channel configuration to the 3GPP W-CDMA
standard for mobiles with two adjacent channels above and below the transmit
channel. The frequency span, the resolution and video bandwidth and the
detector are automatically set to the correct values. The spectrum is displayed
in the upper part of the screen and the channel power, the level ratios of the
adjacent channel powers and the channel configuration in the lower part of the
screen. The individual channels are displayed as vertical lines on the graph.
4. Set the optimum reference level and the RF attenuation for the applied signal level.
a) Press the "Adjust Ref Level" softkey.
The R&S FSVA/FSV sets the optimum RF attenuation and the reference level
for the power in the transmission channel to obtain the maximum dynamic
range. The following figure shows the result of the measurement.
Figure 3-36: Measuring the relative adjacent channel power on a W-CDMA uplink signal

5. Set up the adjacent channel power measurement with the fast ACLR mode.
a) Set "Fast ACLR" softkey to "On".
b) Press the "Adjust Ref Level" softkey.
The R&S FSVA/FSV measures the power of the individual channels with zero
span. A root raised cosine filter with the parameters α = 0.22 and chip rate 3.84
Mcps (= receive filter for 3GPP W-CDMA) is used as channel filter.
Figure 3-37: Measuring the adjacent channel power of a W-CDMA signal with the fast ACLR mode
Optimum Level Setting for ACP Measurements on W-CDMA Signals

The dynamic range for ACPR measurements is limited by the thermal noise floor, the
phase noise and the intermodulation (spectral regrowth) of the signal analyzer. The
power values produced by the R&S FSVA/FSV due to these factors accumulate line-
arly. They depend on the applied level at the input mixer. The three factors are shown
in the figure below for the adjacent channel (5 MHz carrier offset).

Figure 3-38: The R&S FSVA/FSV's dynamic range for adjacent channel power measurements on W-
CDMA uplink signals is a function of the mixer level.
The level of the W-CDMA signal at the input mixer is shown on the horizontal axis, i.e.
the measured signal level minus the selected RF attenuation. The individual compo-
nents which contribute to the power in the adjacent channel and the resulting relative
level (total ACPR) in the adjacent channel are displayed on the vertical axis. The opti-
mum mixer level is -18 dBm. The relative adjacent channel power (ACPR) at an opti-
mum mixer level is -77 dBc. Since, at a given signal level, the mixer level is set in 5 dB
steps with the 5 dB RF attenuator, the optimum 10 dB range spreads from -17 dBm to
-22 dBm. In this range, the obtainable dynamic range with noise correction is 77 dB.
To set the attenuation parameter manually, the following method is recommended:
► Set the RF attenuation so that the mixer level (= measured channel power – RF
attenuation) is between -16 dBm and -22 dBm.
This method is automated with the "Adjust Ref Level" function. Especially in remote
control mode, e.g. in production environments, it is best to correctly set the attenuation
parameters prior to the measurement, as the time required for automatic setting can be
saved.
To measure the R&S FSVA/FSV's intrinsic dynamic range for W-CDMA adjacent chan-
nel power measurements, a filter which suppresses the adjacent channel power is
required at the output of the transmitter. A SAW filter with a bandwidth of 4 MHz, for
example, can be used.

3.6.6.2 Amplitude Distribution Measurements
If modulation types are used that do not have a constant zero span envelope, the
transmitter has to handle peak amplitudes that are greater than the average power.
This includes all modulation types that involve amplitude modulation –QPSK for exam-
ple. CDMA transmission modes in particular may have power peaks that are large
compared to the average power.
For signals of this kind, the transmitter must provide large reserves for the peak power
to prevent signal compression and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver.
The peak power or the crest factor of a signal is therefore an important transmitter
design criterion. The crest factor is defined as the peak power/mean power ratio or,
logarithmically, as the peak level minus the average level of the signal.
To reduce power consumption and cut costs, transmitters are not designed for the larg-
est power that could ever occur, but for a power that has a specified probability of
being exceeded (e.g. 0.01 %).
To measure the amplitude distribution, the R&S FSVA/FSV has simple measurement
functions to determine both the APD = Amplitude Probability Distribution and CCDF =
Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function.
In the APD display mode, the probability of occurrence of a certain level is plotted
against the level.
In the CCDF display mode, the probability that the mean signal power will be exceeded
is shown in percent.
Measurement Example – Measuring the APD and CCDF of White Noise Gener-
ated by the R&S FSVA/FSV
2. Configure the R&S FSVA/FSV for APD measurement

a) Press the AMPT key and enter "-60 dBm".
The R&S FSVA/FSV's intrinsic noise is displayed at the top of the screen.
b) Press the MEAS key.
c) Press the "More" softkey.
d) Press the "APD" softkey.
The R&S FSVA/FSV sets the frequency span to 0 Hz and measures the ampli-
tude probability distribution (APD). The number of uncorrelated level measure-
ments used for the measurement is 100000. The mean power and the peak
power are displayed in dBm. The crest factor (peak power – mean power) is
output as well.

Figure 3-39: Amplitude probability distribution of white noise
3. Switch to the CCDF display mode.

a) Press the "UP" key.
b) Press the "CCDF" softkey.
The CCDF display mode is switched on.

Figure 3-40: CCDF of white noise
The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power. The
level above the mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph. The origin of the
axis corresponds to the mean power level. The probability that a level will be exceeded
is plotted along the y-axis.

R&S® FSVA/FSV Instrument Functions
4 Instrument Functions
This chapter describes the analyzer functions and all basic settings functions of the
R&S FSVA/FSV in detail.
For each key the available softkey menus and commands are described. The com-
mands for the optional remote control (if any) are indicated for each softkey. The
description is divided into the following topics:
● Chapter 4.1, "General Settings, Printout and Instrument Settings", on page 138
This section provides information on how to prepare measurements and process
their results: setting the instrument, managing and retrieving data, returning to
manual operation, and printout.
● Chapter 4.2, "Measurement Parameters", on page 182
This section describes how to reset the instrument, to set up specific measure-
ments and to set the measurement parameters. Examples of basic operations are
provided in the Quick Start Guide, chapter 5 "Basic Measurement Examples".
Advanced examples are described in the Operating Manual, chapter "Advanced
Measurement Examples".
● Chapter 4.3, "Measurement Functions", on page 248
This section informs about how to select and configure the measurement functions.
Examples of basic operations are provided in the Quick Start Guide, chapter 5
"Basic Measurement Examples". Advanced examples are described in the Operat-
ing Manual, chapter "Advanced Measurement Examples".
● Chapter 4.4, "Measurement Modes", on page 405
This section describes the provided measurement modes, the change of measure-
ment modes and the access to the menus of all active measurement modes.
● Chapter 4.6, "Instrument Functions – Tracking Generator (Options R&S FSV-B9/
R&S FSV-B10)", on page 444
This section provides information on how to configure and use optional tracking
generators (R&S FSVB9/B10).
● Chapter 4.7, "Instrument Functions - R&S Digital I/Q Interface (Option R&S FSV-
B17)", on page 469
This section provides information on how to configure and use the optional R&S
Digital I/Q Interface for digital input and output (R&S FSVB17).
● Chapter 4.8, "Instrument Functions – External Mixer (Option R&S FSV-B21)",
on page 487
● This section provides information on how to configure and use optional external
mixers (R&S FSVB21).
● Chapter 4.5, "Instrument Functions - I/Q Analyzer", on page 410
This section provides information on using the IQ Analyzer.
● Chapter 4.9, "Instrument Functions - Power Sensor (R&S FSV-K9)", on page 508
This section describes how to configure and use an optional Power Sensor with an
R&S FSVA/FSV (option R&S FSV-K9).
● Chapter 4.10, "Instrument Functions - Spectrogram Measurements", on page 521
This section describes how to perform Spectrogram measurements with an
R&S FSVA/FSV (option R&S FSV-K14).

A brief introduction on handling the instrument is given in "Basic Operations" in the

Quick Start Guide. This also includes the description of the keys for basic operations
like switching the instrument on and off or starting a measurement.
The front and the rear view of the instrument together with a table of all available keys
and a short description are provided in the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide. "Prepar-
ing for Use" informs how to start working with the instrument for the first time.
4.1 General Settings, Printout and Instrument Settings..............................................138
4.1.1 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key..................................... 138
4.1.2 Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key...............................................163
4.1.3 Manual Operation – Local Menu................................................................................. 177
4.1.4 Measurement Documentation – PRINT Key............................................................... 178
4.1.5 User-Defined Menu – USER key................................................................................ 180
4.2 Measurement Parameters........................................................................................ 182
4.2.1 Initializing the Configuration – PRESET Key.............................................................. 183
4.2.2 Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key........................................................185
4.2.3 Setting the Frequency Span – SPAN Key...................................................................191
4.2.4 Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key........................ 192
4.2.5 Defining Automatic Settings – AUTO SET Key...........................................................200
4.2.6 Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key.................................................. 204
4.2.7 Configuring the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key..............................................................213
4.2.8 Setting Traces – TRACE Key......................................................................................219
4.2.9 Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key.............................................................................. 237
4.3 Measurement Functions...........................................................................................248
4.3.1 Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key........................................................... 249
4.3.2 Performing Peak Searches with Markers – PEAK SEARCH Key............................... 256
4.3.3 Performing Marker Functions – MKR FUNC Key........................................................256
4.3.4 Changing Settings via Markers – MKR-> Key.............................................................270
4.3.5 Power Measurements – MEAS Key............................................................................280
4.3.6 Measurement Configuration – MEAS CONFIG Key................................................... 385
4.3.7 Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key......................................................385
4.3.8 Input/Output Configuration – INPUT/OUTPUT Key.................................................... 397
4.3.9 Performing Measurements – RUN SINGLE/RUN CONT Keys...................................405
4.4 Measurement Modes.................................................................................................405
4.4.1 Measurement Mode Selection – MODE Key.............................................................. 405
4.4.2 Measurement Mode Menus – HOME Key.................................................................. 410

4.5 Instrument Functions - I/Q Analyzer....................................................................... 410

4.5.1 Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu................................................... 411
4.5.2 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode...............................................421
4.5.3 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode................................................... 428
4.5.4 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode.............................................. 433
4.5.5 Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode.....................................434
4.5.6 Working with I/Q Data................................................................................................. 438
4.6 Instrument Functions – Tracking Generator (Options R&S FSV-B9/ R&S FSV-
B10)............................................................................................................................ 444
4.6.1 Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu.................................................................. 445
4.6.2 Connecting External Tracking Generators.................................................................. 449
4.6.3 Configuring Tracking Generators................................................................................ 453
4.6.4 Tracking Generator Functions.....................................................................................460
4.6.5 Displayed Information and Errors................................................................................468
4.7 Instrument Functions - R&S Digital I/Q Interface (Option R&S FSV-B17)........... 469
4.7.1 Typical Applications for the R&S Digital I/Q Interface................................................. 470
4.7.2 Digital Input................................................................................................................. 472
4.7.3 Digital Output.............................................................................................................. 478
4.7.4 Softkeys and Parameters of the R&S Digital I/Q Interface..........................................479
4.7.5 Interface Status Information........................................................................................ 483
4.7.6 Description of the LVDS Connector............................................................................ 486
4.8 Instrument Functions – External Mixer (Option R&S FSV-B21)........................... 487
4.8.1 General Information on External Mixers......................................................................488
4.8.2 Softkeys of the External Mixer (Option B21)............................................................... 494
4.8.3 Introductory Example of Operation............................................................................. 505
4.9 Instrument Functions - Power Sensor (R&S FSV-K9)........................................... 508
4.9.1 Using Power Sensors..................................................................................................511
4.9.2 Zeroing the Power Sensor.......................................................................................... 512
4.9.3 Configuring an External Power Trigger....................................................................... 513
4.9.4 Softkeys of the Power Sensor Menu (R&S FSV-K9).................................................. 515
4.9.5 Power Sensor Configuration Dialog............................................................................ 517
4.9.6 Error Messages...........................................................................................................520
4.10 Instrument Functions - Spectrogram Measurements............................................521
4.10.1 General Information.................................................................................................... 522

General Settings, Printout and Instrument Settings
4.10.2 Softkeys of the Spectrogram Menu.............................................................................525

4.10.3 Configuring Color Settings for Spectrograms..............................................................526
4.10.4 ASCII File Export Format for Spectrograms................................................................531
4.1 General Settings, Printout and Instrument Settings

After putting the instrument into operation and becoming familiar with the handling of
the instrument (for details see Quick Start Guide) the preparations for measurements
can start. In this section the general settings of the instrument, the data management
and the processing of measurement results are described. This includes the following
topics and keys:
4.1.1 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key..................................... 138
4.1.1.1 Softkeys of the Setup Menu........................................................................................ 139
4.1.2 Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key...............................................163
4.1.2.1 Softkeys of the SAVE/RCL Menu................................................................................164
4.1.2.2 File Selection Dialog Boxes........................................................................................ 170
4.1.2.3 Importing and Exporting I/Q Data................................................................................172
4.1.3 Manual Operation – Local Menu................................................................................. 177
4.1.4 Measurement Documentation – PRINT Key............................................................... 178
4.1.5 User-Defined Menu – USER key................................................................................ 180
4.1.1 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key
The SETUP key is used to set or display the default settings of the instrument: refer-
ence frequency, noise source, level correction values, date, time, LAN interface, firm-
ware update and enabling of options, information about instrument configuration and
service support functions. For further details refer also to the Quick Start Guide, chap-
ter 2 "Preparing for Use".
To open the Setup menu
► Press the SETUP key.

The "Setup" menu is displayed.
Menu and softkey description

● Chapter 4.1.1.1, "Softkeys of the Setup Menu", on page 139

4.1.1.1 Softkeys of the Setup Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Setup" menu. It is possible that
your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available
with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in
the corresponding softkey description.
Reference Int/Ext........................................................................................................ 141
Handle missing Ext. Ref..............................................................................................141
└ Show Error Flag............................................................................................ 142
└ Auto select Reference...................................................................................142
Transducer.................................................................................................................. 142
└ Active (On/Off).............................................................................................. 142
└ Edit................................................................................................................143
└ Edit Name........................................................................................... 143
└ Edit Unit.............................................................................................. 143
└ Edit Value........................................................................................... 143
└ Insert Value.........................................................................................143
└ Delete Value....................................................................................... 144
└ Interpolation Lin/Log........................................................................... 144
└ Save Factor........................................................................................ 144
└ New...............................................................................................................144
└ Copy to..........................................................................................................144
└ Delete............................................................................................................144
└ Ref Level Adjust (Man/Auto)......................................................................... 145
└ Show Directory..............................................................................................145
Alignment.................................................................................................................... 145
└ Self Alignment...............................................................................................145
└ Show Align Results....................................................................................... 145
└ Touch Screen Alignment...............................................................................146
General Setup............................................................................................................. 146
└ Configure Network........................................................................................ 146
└ Network Address...........................................................................................146
└ Computer Name................................................................................. 146
└ IP Address.......................................................................................... 146
└ Subnet Mask.......................................................................................147
└ DHCP (On/Off)....................................................................................147
└ LXI.................................................................................................................147
└ Info......................................................................................................147
└ Password............................................................................................ 147
└ Description..........................................................................................147
└ LAN Reset.......................................................................................... 148
└ GPIB............................................................................................................. 148
└ GPIB Address..................................................................................... 148
└ ID String Factory.................................................................................148
└ ID String User..................................................................................... 148
└ Compatibility Mode............................................................................. 148
└ Mode Default............................................................................ 149
└ Mode R&S FSP........................................................................ 149
└ Mode R&S FSU........................................................................ 149

└ GPIB Language........................................................................ 149

└ IF Gain (Norm/Puls)..................................................................150
└ Sweep Repeat (On/Off)............................................................ 150
└ Coupling (FSx/HP)....................................................................150
└ REV String Factory...................................................................151
└ REV String User....................................................................... 151
└ Tree Walking............................................................................ 151
└ Wideband............................................................................................151
└ Display Update (On/Off)..................................................................... 152
└ GPIB Terminator LFEOI/EOI.............................................................. 152
└ *IDN Format Leg./New........................................................................152
└ I/O Logging (On/Off)........................................................................... 152
└ Time+Date.................................................................................................... 152
└ Language...................................................................................................... 153
└ Configure Monitor......................................................................................... 153
└ Soft Frontpanel............................................................................................. 153
Display Setup.............................................................................................................. 154
└ Tool Bar State (On/Off)................................................................................. 154
└ Status Bar..................................................................................................... 155
└ Screen Title (On/Off).....................................................................................155
└ Time+Date (On/Off)...................................................................................... 155
└ Time+Date Format (US/DE)......................................................................... 155
└ Print Logo (On/Off)........................................................................................155
└ Annotation (On/Off).......................................................................................155
└ Theme Selection........................................................................................... 155
└ Screen Colors............................................................................................... 156
└ Select Screen Color Set..................................................................... 156
└ Color (On/Off)..................................................................................... 156
└ Select Object...................................................................................... 156
└ Predefined Colors............................................................................... 156
└ User Defined Colors........................................................................... 157
└ Set to Default...................................................................................... 157
└ Print Colors................................................................................................... 157
└ Select Print Color Set......................................................................... 157
└ Color (On/Off)..................................................................................... 158
└ Display Pwr Save (On/Off)............................................................................158
System Info................................................................................................................. 158
└ Hardware Info............................................................................................... 158
└ Versions+Options......................................................................................... 158
└ System Messages.........................................................................................159
└ Clear All Messages....................................................................................... 159
Firmware Update.........................................................................................................160
Option Licenses.......................................................................................................... 160
└ Install Option................................................................................................. 160
└ Install Option by XML....................................................................................160
Application Setup Recovery........................................................................................ 160
Service........................................................................................................................ 161
└ Input Source..................................................................................................161
└ RF....................................................................................................... 161
└ Calibration Frequency RF...................................................................161

└ Calibration Frequency MW................................................................. 161

└ Calibration Frequency WB..................................................................161
└ Calibration Frequency WB2................................................................162
└ Reset Password............................................................................................162
└ Selftest.......................................................................................................... 162
└ Selftest Results............................................................................................. 162
└ Password...................................................................................................... 162
└ Service Function........................................................................................... 162
Reference Int/Ext
Switches between the internal and external reference signal source. The default setting
is internal reference. It is important that the external reference signal is deactivated
when switching from external to internal reference to avoid interactions. When an
external reference is used, "EXT REF" is displayed in the status bar.
If the reference signal is missing after switching to an external reference, the message
"NO REF" is displayed to indicate that no synchronization is performed.
The R&S FSVA/FSV can use the internal reference source or an external reference
source as frequency standard from which all internal oscillators are derived. A 10 MHz
crystal oscillator is used as internal reference source. In the external reference setting,
all internal oscillators of the R&S FSVA/FSV are synchronized to the external reference
frequency. The external frequency can be set from 1 Hz to 20 MHz in 100 kHz steps.
For details on connectors, refer to Chapter 3.1, "Front and Rear Panel View",
on page 11.
Note: Optional internal reference sources.
Alternatively to the standard internal reference source, an optional OCXO reference
(option R&S FSV-B4), or an ultra high precision reference (option R&S FSV-B14) are
available. These options generate a very precise 10 MHz reference signal with an out-
put level of ≥ 0 dBm, which can also be used to synchronize other connected devices
via the REF OUT connector.
If installed, and if no external signal is used, the OCXO signal is used as an internal
reference. If an ultra high precision reference is installed, this reference signal is auto-
matically used as the internal reference.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce on page 947
SOURce:EXTernal<1|2>:ROSCillator: EXTernal:FREQuency on page 946
Handle missing Ext. Ref

If an external reference is selected but none is available, there are different ways the
instrument can react. This command opens a submenu to select the preferred method
of handling a missing external reference. By default, an error flag is displayed in the
status bar of the display.
The submenu contains the following commands:
● "Show Error Flag" on page 142
● "Auto select Reference" on page 142

Show Error Flag ← Handle missing Ext. Ref

If this option is selected, an error flag is displayed in the status bar of the display when
an external reference is selected but none is available.
Remote command:
Auto select Reference ← Handle missing Ext. Ref

If this option is selected, the instrument automatically switches back to the internal ref-
erence if no external reference is available. Note that you must re-activate the external
reference if it becomes available again later.
Remote command:
Transducer
Opens the "Select Transducer" dialog box and a submenu to activate or deactivate
defined transducer factors, to generate new transducer factors or to edit existing ones.
In the "Select Transducer" dialog box, a transducer factor can be edited, deleted or
copied, if selected, using the corresponding softkeys. The default directory in which the
transducer factors are saved is displayed (C:\R_S\INSTR\TRD; the extension of
transducer factor files is *.TDF). Subdirectories can be added or deleted via the file
manager. They are displayed or hidden using the arrow keys or the Show Directory
softkey / "Hide Directory" button.
Two different directory views are possible: If the "Show all" option is activated, all
transducer factors in the directory are displayed. If the "Show compatible" option is
activated, only the compatible transducer factors in the directory are displayed.
● "Active (On/Off)" on page 142
● "Edit" on page 143 >
● "New" on page 144
● "Copy to" on page 144
● "Delete" on page 144
● "Ref Level Adjust (Man/Auto)" on page 145
● "Show Directory" on page 145
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 945
Active (On/Off) ← Transducer

Activates or deactivates the selected transducer factor. A maximum of 8 transducer
factors can be activated at the same time. Each time an additional transducer factor is
activated, its unit compatibility is checked. If one factor has a different unit than dB, all
the other activated factors must have the unit dB.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] on page 945

Edit ← Transducer
Opens the "Edit Transducer" dialog box with the data of the selected factor, as well as
a submenu. During editing, a transducer factor remains stored in the background until
the factor is saved using the Save Factor softkey.
A transducer factor can contain up to 625 values. By defining up to 8 adjacent factors,
a transducer system with up to 5000 values can be implemented.
● "Edit Name" on page 143
● "Edit Unit" on page 143
● "Edit Value" on page 143
● "Insert Value" on page 143
● "Delete Value" on page 144
● "Interpolation Lin/Log" on page 144
● "Save Factor" on page 144
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent on page 943
Edit Name ← Edit ← Transducer

Sets the focus on the "Name" field to enter a filename. The extension is added auto-
matically.
Remote command:
Edit Unit ← Edit ← Transducer

Sets the focus on the "Unit" field to select the unit.
Note: If one factor has a different unit than "dB", all the other activated factors must
have the unit "dB".
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT on page 945
Edit Value ← Edit ← Transducer

Sets the focus to enter positions and values as frequency/level pairs. The entered data
is also displayed graphically. Using the "Shift x" or "Shift y" button, all entered values
can be shifted in x or y direction.
The valid transducer value range is: -200 dB < value < 200 dB
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA on page 944
Insert Value ← Edit ← Transducer

Inserts an empty line above the selected reference value to enter a new reference
value. When you enter a new reference value in the line, make sure that the frequen-
cies are in ascending order.
Each transducer factor can contain a maximum of 625 values. The valid transducer
value range is: -200 dB < value < 200 dB

Delete Value ← Edit ← Transducer

Deletes the selected reference value (complete line). The subsequent reference values
move up one line.
Interpolation Lin/Log ← Edit ← Transducer

Sets the scaling of the x-axis to linear or logarithmic.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing on page 944
Save Factor ← Edit ← Transducer

Saves the changed factor to a file on the internal flash disk. If a transducer factor with
the same name already exists, a confirmation query is displayed. If the new factor is
active, the new values are immediately applied.
In remote control, the save operation is performed automatically after the definition of
the reference values.
New ← Transducer
Opens the "Edit Transducer" dialog box to enter data for a new factor.
This dialog box contains the same contents as the Edit softkey.
Copy to ← Transducer
Opens the "Edit Transducer" dialog box to copy the selected factor.
This dialog box contains the same contents as the "Edit" on page 143 softkey.
Delete ← Transducer
Deletes the selected factor after confirmation.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete on page 944

Ref Level Adjust (Man/Auto) ← Transducer

Activates or deactivates the automatic adjustment of the reference level to the selected
transducer factor.
If a transducer factor is used (active), the trace is moved by a calculated shift. How-
ever, an upward shift reduces the dynamic range for the displayed values.
"Auto" Activates the automatic adjustment. The original dynamic range is
restored by also shifting the reference level by the maximum value of
the transducer factor.
"Man" Deactivates the automatic adjustment. Adjust the reference level via
the "Amplitude" menu.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe] on page 943
Show Directory ← Transducer

Displays the subdirectory of the selected directory.
Alignment
Opens a submenu with the available functions for recording, displaying and activating
the data for self-alignment.
The R&S FSVA/FSV determines the correction data and characteristics required for
the alignment automatically. It compares the results at different settings with the known
characteristics of the high-precision calibration signal source at 65.83 MHz. The cor-
rection data is stored as a file on the instrument. You can display it using the "Show
Align Results" on page 145 softkey.
● "Self Alignment" on page 145
● "Show Align Results" on page 145
● "Touch Screen Alignment" on page 146
Self Alignment ← Alignment

Starts the recording of correction data of the instrument. If the correction data acquisi-
tion has failed or if the correction values are deactivated, a corresponding message is
displayed in the status field.
As long as the self-alignment data is being collected, you can cancel the procedure
using the "Abort" button.
Remote command:
*CAL? on page 600
Show Align Results ← Alignment

Opens a dialog box that displays the correction data of the alignment:
● Date and time of last correction data record
● Overall results of correction data record
● List of found correction values according to function/module
The results are classified as follows:

PASSED calibration successful without any restrictions
CHECK deviation of correction value larger than expected, correction could however be per-
formed
FAILED deviations of correction value too large, no correction was possible. The found cor-
rection data are not applicable.
Remote command:
CALibration:RESult? on page 907
Touch Screen Alignment ← Alignment

Displays a touchscreen alignment dialog.
When the device is delivered, the touchscreen is initially aligned. However, it may
become necessary to adjust the alignment later, e.g. after an image update or after
exchanging a hard disk. If you notice that touching a specific point on the screen does
not achieve the correct response, you may try adjusting the alignment, as well.
Using a finger or any other pointing device, press the 4 markers on the screen.
The touchscreen is aligned according to the executed pointing operations.
General Setup
Opens a submenu for all general settings such as IP address and LAN settings, date
and time, remote control (optional) and measurement display.
Configure Network ← General Setup

Opens the "Network Connections" dialog box to change the LAN settings.
For details, refer to Chapter 5.2.5, "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection",
on page 585.
Network Address ← General Setup

Opens a submenu to configure the Internet protocol properties and the computer
name.
Computer Name ← Network Address ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the computer name via the keypad. The naming con-
ventions of Windows apply. If too many characters and/or numbers are entered, a
message is displayed in the status line. For step-by-step instructions, refer to Chap-
ter 5.2.5.3, "Using Computer Names", on page 589.
IP Address ← Network Address ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the IP address via the keypad. The TCP/IP protocol
is preinstalled with the IP address 10.0.0.10. If the DHCP server is available ("DHCP
On"), the dialog box entry is read-only.
The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block contains
3 numbers in maximum (e.g. 100.100.100.100), but also one or two numbers are
allowed in a block (as an example see the pre-installed address). For step-by-step
instructions, refer to Chapter 5.2.5.2, "Assigning the IP Address", on page 586.

Subnet Mask ← Network Address ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the subnet mask via the keypad. The TCP/IP proto-
col is preinstalled with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0. If the DHCP server is available
("DHCP On"), the dialog box entry is read-only.
The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block con-
tains 3 numbers in maximum (e.g. 100.100.100.100), but also one or two numbers are
allowed in a block (as an example see the preinstalled address). For step-by-step
instructions, refer to Chapter 5.2.5, "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection",
on page 585.
DHCP (On/Off) ← Network Address ← General Setup

Switches between DHCP server available ("On") or not available ("Off"). If a DHCP
server is available in the network, the IP address and subnet mask of the instrument
are obtained automatically from the DHCP server. For further details, refer to Chap-
ter 5.2.5, "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection", on page 585.
LXI ← General Setup

Opens the LXI submenu containing the following softkeys:
● "Info" on page 147
● "Password" on page 147
● "Description" on page 147
● "LAN Reset" on page 148
LXI functionality is available only for user accounts with administrator rights.
Info ← LXI ← General Setup

Shows the current LXI parameters, including the current version, class and various
computer parameters like the computer name or IP address.
While active, the dialog is not updated.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:INFo? on page 961
Password ← LXI ← General Setup

Shows the currently set password. You can also change the current password using
this softkey.
The password is required to change settings via the web browser (e.g. IP parameter).
An empty password is not valid, i.e. you must enter a password.
By default, the password is LxiWebIfc.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword on page 962
Description ← LXI ← General Setup

Opens a dialog box to view or change the LXI instrument description. This description
is used on some of the LXI web sites.
By default, the description is "Signal Analyzer".

Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription on page 961
LAN Reset ← LXI ← General Setup

Resets the LAN configuration to a state required by the LXI standard. For example, the
TCP/IP mode is set to "DHCP" and "Dynamic DNS" and "ICMP Ping" are enabled. In
addition, the R&S FSVA/FSV sets the password and the instrument description to their
initial states (see "Password" on page 147 and "Description" on page 147 softkeys).
Only user accounts with administrator rights can reset the LAN configuration.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:LANReset on page 961
GPIB ← General Setup

Opens a submenu to set the parameters of the remote control interface.
GPIB Address ← GPIB ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the GPIB address. Values from 0 to 30 are allowed.
The default address is 20.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess on page 953
ID String Factory ← GPIB ← General Setup

Selects the default response to the *IDN? query.
Remote command:
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory on page 959
ID String User ← GPIB ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a user-defined response to the *IDN? query. Max.
36 characters are allowed.
Remote command:
SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] on page 959
Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Sets the R&S FSVA/FSV in a state compatible to previous R&S devices, enabling the
usage of existing external control applications. In particular, the number of measure-
ment points and available bandwidths are adjusted to the settings of other devices.
Furthermore, some special GPIB settings are available to emulate HP models (see
Chapter 5.3.5, "GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and
8594E", on page 966):
● "GPIB Language" on page 149
● "IF Gain (Norm/Puls)" on page 150
● "Sweep Repeat (On/Off)" on page 150
● "Coupling (FSx/HP)" on page 150
"Default" Standard R&S FSVA/FSV operation, see "Mode Default"
on page 149

"R&S FSP" Compatible to R&S FSP, see "Mode R&S FSP" on page 149
"R&S FSU" Compatible to R&S FSU, see "Mode R&S FSU" on page 149
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMPatible on page 955
Mode Default ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Resets the number of measurement points and available bandwidths to default
R&S FSVA/FSV values.
Remote command:
SYST:COMP DEF, see SYSTem:COMPatible on page 955
Mode R&S FSP ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Sets the number of measurement points and available bandwidths as in R&S FSP
devices.
Remote command:
SYST:COMP FSP, see SYSTem:COMPatible on page 955
Mode R&S FSU ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Sets the number of measurement points and available bandwidths as in R&S FSU
devices.
Remote command:
SYST:COMP FSU, see SYSTem:COMPatible on page 955
GPIB Language ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Opens a list of selectable remote-control languages:
Language Comment
SCPI
71100C Compatible to 8566A/B
71209A Compatible to 8566A/B
8560E
8561E
8562E
8563E
8564E
8565E
8566A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.
8566B

Language Comment
8568A_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument
8568B Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
8568B_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument
8591E Compatible to 8594E
8594E Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
For details on the GPIB languages, see Chapter 5.3.5, "GPIB Commands of HP Mod-
els 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E", on page 966.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LANGuage on page 960
IF Gain (Norm/Puls) ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application
needs. This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth < 300 kHz.
NORM Optimized for high dynamic range, overload limit is close to reference level.
PULS Optimized for pulsed signals, overload limit up to 10 dB above reference level.
This softkey is only available if an HP language is selected via the "GPIB Language"
softkey (see "GPIB Language" on page 149).
Remote command:
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE on page 960
Sweep Repeat (On/Off) ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI/HL HP model commands (for
details on the commands refer to "GPIB Language" on page 149). If the repeated
sweep is "OFF", the marker is set without sweeping before.
Note: In single sweep mode, switch off this softkey before you set the marker via the
E1 and MKPK HI/HL commands to avoid sweeping again.
Remote command:
SYSTem:RSW on page 964
Coupling (FSx/HP) ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for:
● Span and resolution bandwidth (Span/RBW) and
● Resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth (RBW/VBW)
For FSP(=FSV), the standard parameter coupling of the instrument is used. As a
result, usually a shorter sweeptime is used than for HP.

Remote command:
SYSTem:HPCoupling on page 959
REV String Factory ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Selects the default response to the REV? query for the revision number (HP emulation
only, see Chapter 5.3.5, "GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
and 8594E", on page 966).
Remote command:
SYSTem:REVision:FACTory on page 963
REV String User ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a user-defined revision number in response to the
REV? query (HP emulation only, see Chapter 5.3.5, "GPIB Commands of HP Models
856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E", on page 966). Max. 36 characters are allowed.
Remote command:
SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] on page 964
Tree Walking ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup

Defines how remote control programs are evaluated, in particular multiple commands
in one command line.
Note that this setting is retained after a PRESET or recall operation.
See the SCPI command for an example.
"Normal" (Initial default:) SCPI-conform behavior
The first command is always referenced to the root node. Subsequent
commands, however, are referenced to the same tree level as the
previous command in a message unit.
"Enhanced" If subsequent commands are not found on the same tree level as the
previous command, the SCPI parser searches "backwards up the
tree" of defined SCPI commands. If the command is found at a higher
node, that command is used. Only if the command is not found any-
where, an error message is returned.
Remote command:
SYSTem:TWALking on page 965
Wideband ← GPIB ← General Setup

This setting defines which option is returned when the *OPT? query is executed,
depending on the state of the wideband option.
It is only available for PSA89600 emulation.
"Wideband No wideband is used.
Off" The option is indicated as "B7J".
"Wideband The 40 MHz wideband is used.
40 MHz" The option is indicated as "B7J, 140".
"Wideband The 80 MHz wideband is used.
80 MHz" The option is indicated as "B7J, 122".
Remote command:
SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband on page 963

Display Update (On/Off) ← GPIB ← General Setup

Defines whether the instrument display is switched off when changing from manual
operation to remote control. In remote control mode, this softkey is displayed in the
local menu.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate on page 957
GPIB Terminator LFEOI/EOI ← GPIB ← General Setup

Changes the GPIB receive terminator.
According to the standard, the terminator in ASCII is <LF> and/or <EOI>. For binary
data transfers (e.g. trace data) from the control computer to the instrument, the binary
code used for <LF> might be included in the binary data block. Therefore, it should not
be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case. This can be avoided by changing
the receive terminator to EOI.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator on page 954
*IDN Format Leg./New ← GPIB ← General Setup

Defines the response format to the *IDN? remote command (see *IDN?
on page 601). This function is intended for re-use of existing control programs
together with the R&S FSVA/FSV.
"Leg" Legacy format, compatible to the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ family
e.g. Rohde&Schwarz,FSV-7,100005/007,1.61
"New" R&S FSVA/FSV format
e.g. Rohde&Schwarz,FSV-7,1307.9002K07/100005,1.61
Remote command:
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt on page 958
I/O Logging (On/Off) ← GPIB ← General Setup

Activates or deactivates the SCPI log function. All remote control commands received
by the R&S FSVA/FSV are recorded in the following log file:
C:\R_S\Instr\scpilogging\ScpiLog.txt
Logging the commands can be extremely useful for debug purposes, e.g. to find mis-
spelled keywords in control programs.
Remote command:
SYSTem:CLOGging on page 953
Time+Date ← General Setup

Opens an edit dialog box to enter time and date for the internal real-time clock.
For details, refer to Chapter 3.2.4.3, "Setting the Date and Time", on page 36.
Remote command:
SYSTem:TIME on page 964
SYSTem:DATE on page 956

Language ← General Setup

Changes the language of the graphical user interface (softkeys, dialog boxes, input
settings etc.) to the selected language, if any other than the default language are
installed.
Note: to change the default input language (English) of an external keyboard, use the
standard Windows operating system function. To access the Windows operating sys-
tem, press the Windows key on the external keyboard. Select "Start" > "Control Panel"
> "Clock, Language, and Region" > "Change keyboards or other input methods" to
configure the keyboard properties.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:LANGuage on page 957
Configure Monitor ← General Setup

Determines and displays the configuration of a connected external monitor, if available.
In the configuration dialog box, you can switch from the internal monitor (laptop icon) to
the external monitor (monitor icon), or both (double monitor icon). For external, the
R&S FSVA/FSV display is disabled (turns dark). The screen content formerly displayed
on the R&S FSVA/FSV is displayed on the external screen.
For further details, refer to Chapter 3.2.3, "Connecting an External Monitor",
on page 35.
Soft Frontpanel ← General Setup

Activates or deactivates the display of the instrument emulation.
deactivated Only the measurement screen is displayed. This is the setting for working at the
R&S FSVA/FSV.
activated In addition to the measurement screen, the whole front panel is displayed, i.e. the
hardkeys and other hardware controls of the device are simulated on the screen.
This is the setting for working at a computer with Remote Desktop or at an external
monitor.

Figure 4-1: Soft frontpanel
Alternatively to this softkey, you can use the F6 key.

Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel on page 956
Display Setup
Opens a submenu to define the display settings.
The following display settings are available:
● "Tool Bar State (On/Off)" on page 154
● "Screen Title (On/Off)" on page 155
● "Time+Date (On/Off)" on page 155
● "Time+Date Format (US/DE)" on page 155
● "Print Logo (On/Off)" on page 155
● "Annotation (On/Off)" on page 155
● "Theme Selection" on page 155
● "Screen Colors" on page 156
● "Print Colors" on page 157
● "Display Pwr Save (On/Off)" on page 158
Tool Bar State (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Displays or removes the toolbar above the diagram.
This setting is stored in instrument settings files.
Remote command:
DISPlay:TBAR[STATe] on page 918

Status Bar ← Display Setup

Displays or removes the status bar beneath the diagram.
The status bar indicates the global instrument settings, the instrument status and any
irregularities during measurement or display.
Remote command:
DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe] on page 918
Screen Title (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Activates/deactivates the display of a diagram title (if available) and opens an edit dia-
log box to enter a new title for the active diagram. Max. 20 characters are allowed.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT[:DATA] on page 919
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME on page 919
Time+Date (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Activates/deactivates the display of date and time beneath the diagram.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME on page 919
Time+Date Format (US/DE) ← Display Setup

Switches the time and date display on the screen between US and German (DE).
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat on page 920
Print Logo (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Activates/deactivates the display of the Rohde & Schwarz company logo in the upper
left corner.
Remote command:
DISPlay:LOGO on page 917
Annotation (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Activates/deactivates the display of the frequency information in the diagram footer.
For example, to protect confidential data it can be useful to hide the frequency informa-
tion.
Remote command:
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency on page 915
Theme Selection ← Display Setup

Opens a selection list of available themes for the screen display. The theme defines
the colors used for keys and screen elements, for example. The default theme is "Blue-
Ocean".
Remote command:
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect on page 918

Screen Colors ← Display Setup

Opens a submenu to configure the screen colors.
For details on screen colors, refer to Chapter 3.2.4.5, "Setting the Screen Colors",
on page 38.
● "Select Screen Color Set" on page 156
● "Color (On/Off)" on page 156
● "Select Object" on page 156
● "Predefined Colors" on page 156
● "User Defined Colors" on page 157
● "Set to Default" on page 157
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:HSL on page 916
Select Screen Color Set ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

Opens the "Select Screen Color Set" dialog box to select default or user-defined color
settings.
If one of the default settings is selected ("Default Colors 1"/"2"), the default settings for
brightness, color tint and color saturation for all display screen elements are restored.
The default color schemes provide optimum visibility of all picture elements at an angle
of vision from above or below. Default setting is "Default Colors 1".
If "User Defined Colors" is selected, a user-defined color set can be defined.
For step-by-step instruction, refer to Chapter 3.2.4.5, "Setting the Screen Colors",
on page 38.
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:DEFault on page 915
Color (On/Off) ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

Switches from color display to black-and-white display and back. The default setting is
color display.
Select Object ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

Opens the "Color Setup" dialog box to select the color settings for a selected object.
The "Selected Object" list is displayed to select the object. To set the color, the prede-
fined colors are displayed.
Remote command:
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:HSL on page 923
Predefined Colors ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

In the "Color Setup" dialog box, displays the "Predefined Colors" (alternatively to the
"Predefined Colors" button). This softkey is only available if, in the "Select Color Set"
dialog box, the "User Defined Colors" option is selected or the "Color Setup" dialog box
is displayed.
For further details, refer to Chapter 3.2.4.5, "Setting the Screen Colors", on page 38.

Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:PDEFined on page 916
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:PDEFined on page 924
User Defined Colors ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

In the "Color Setup" dialog box, displays the "User Defined Colors" (alternatively to the
"User Defined Colors" button). This softkey is only available if, in the "Select Color Set"
dialog box, the "User Defined Colors" option is selected or the "Color Setup" dialog box
is displayed.
For further details, refer to Chapter 3.2.4.5, "Setting the Screen Colors", on page 38.
Remote command:
Set to Default ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup

Opens the "Set to Default" dialog box to select one of the factory default color settings.
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:DEFault on page 915
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:DEFault on page 923
Print Colors ← Display Setup

Opens a submenu to select the colors for the printout. To facilitate color selection, the
selected color combination is displayed when the menu is entered. The previous colors
are restored when the menu is exited.
For details on screen colors, refer to Chapter 3.2.4.5, "Setting the Screen Colors",
on page 38.
● "Select Print Color Set" on page 157
Remote command:
Select Print Color Set ← Print Colors ← Display Setup

Opens the "Select Print Color Set" dialog box to select the color settings for printout.
Screen colors (Print) Selects the current screen colors for the printout. The background is
always printed in white and the grid in black.
Screen colors (Hardcopy) Selects the current screen colors without any changes for a hard-
copy. The output format is set via the "Device Setup" on page 179
softkey in the "Print" menu.

Optimized colors Selects an optimized color setting for the printout to improve the visi-
bility of the colors (default setting). Trace 1 is blue, trace 2 black,
trace 3 green, and the markers are turquoise. The background is
always printed in white and the grid in black.
User-Defined colors Enables the softkeys to define colors for the printout.
Remote command:
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:DEFault on page 923
Color (On/Off) ← Print Colors ← Display Setup

Switches from color printout to black-and-white printout and back. All colored areas are
printed in white and all colored lines in black. This improves the contrast. The default
setting is color printout, provided that the selected printer can produce color printouts.
Remote command:
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor on page 925
Display Pwr Save (On/Off) ← Display Setup

Switches the power-save mode for the display (On/Off) and opens an edit dialog box to
enter the time for the power-save function to respond. After this time, the display is
switched off completely, i.e. including backlighting. This mode is recommended when
the instrument is exclusively operated in remote control.
For details on the power-save mode for the display, refer to Chapter 3.2.4.6, "Setting
the Display Power Save Function", on page 41.
Remote command:
DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] on page 917
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff on page 917
System Info
Opens a submenu to display detailed information on module data, device statistics and
system messages.
● "Hardware Info" on page 158
● "Versions+Options" on page 158
● "System Messages" on page 159
● "Clear All Messages" on page 159
Hardware Info ← System Info

Opens a dialog box that displays hardware information, e.g. on the frontend and moth-
erboard. Every listed component is described by its serial number, order number,
model information, hardware code, and hardware revision.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:HWINfo? on page 909
Versions+Options ← System Info

Opens a dialog box that displays a list of hardware and firmware information, including:

Label Description
Device ID Unique ID of the device
Instrument firmware Installed firmware version
BIOS Installed BIOS version
CPLD CPLD version
MB-FPGA Motherboard FPGA version
Data Sheet version Data sheet version of the basic device
<option> Installed hardware and firmware options

Note that B99 indicates the R&S FSVA models (as opposed to the
R&S FSV models).
"Open Source Acknowledgment: Displays a PDF file containing information on open source code
Open" used by the R&S FSVA/FSV firmware.
For details on options, refer to Chapter 3.2.1.10, "Checking the Supplied Options",
on page 33.
Remote command:
*IDN? on page 601
*OPT? on page 602
SYSTem:DEVice:ID? on page 956
SYSTem:DID? on page 956
System Messages ← System Info

Opens the "System Messages" dialog box that displays the generated system mes-
sages in the order of their occurrence. The most recent messages are placed at the
top of the list. Messages that have occurred since the last display of system messages
menu are marked with an asterisk '*'. The following information is available:
No device-specific error code
Message brief description of the message
Component hardware messages: name of the affected module
software messages: name of the affected software
Date/Time date and time of the occurrence of the message
If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, "Message
buffer overflow" is displayed. To delete messages, see "Clear All Messages"
on page 159 softkey.
Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? on page 957
Clear All Messages ← System Info

Deletes all system messages. The softkey is only available if the "System Messages"
dialog box is displayed.

Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL on page 957
Firmware Update
Opens the "Firmware Update" dialog box.
Enter the name of or browse for the firmware installation file and press the "Execute"
button. For details on installation, refer to Chapter 3.3, "Firmware Update and Installa-
tion of Firmware Options", on page 47.
Only user accounts with administrator rights can perform a firmware update.
Remote command:
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate on page 958
Option Licenses
Opens a submenu to install options. For details on options, refer to Chapter 3.3, "Firm-
ware Update and Installation of Firmware Options", on page 47.
● "Install Option" on page 160
● "Install Option by XML" on page 160
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options.
Install Option ← Option Licenses

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the license key for the option that you want to install.
If an option is about to expire, a message box is displayed to inform you. You can then
use this softkey to enter a new license key.
If an option has already expired, a message box appears for you to confirm. In this
case, all instrument functions are unavailable (including remote control) until you
reboot the R&S FSVA/FSV. Then use the "Install Option" softkey to enter the new
license key.
For more information about the option in question, refer to the System Info softkey in
the "Setup" menu.
Install Option by XML ← Option Licenses

Opens an edit dialog to install an additional option to the R&S FSVA/FSV using an
XML file. Enter or browse for the name of an XML file on the instrument that contains
the option key and press "Select".
Application Setup Recovery

Controls instrument behavior when switching between measurement applications, e.g.
from "Spectrum" to "Analog Demod" and back.
If this softkey is activated, the current instrument settings are stored when you switch
to a different application. When you switch back to the previous application, the corre-
sponding instrument settings are restored. Thus, the settings of the individual applica-
tions are independent of each other.

If the softkey is deactivated (default), only a few parameters of the current instrument
setting are passed between applications (e.g. center frequency, level settings).
Note that this setting is not deactivated during a preset operation, i.e. you must deacti-
vate it manually, if necessary.
Remote command:
SYSTem:APPLication:SRECovery[:STATe] on page 953
Service
Opens a submenu that contains additional functions for maintenance and/or trouble-
shooting.
NOTICE! Risk of incorrect operation due to service functions. The service functions are
not necessary for normal measurement operation. However, incorrect use can affect
correct operation and/or data integrity of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
Therefore, many of the functions can only be used after entering a password. They are
described in the instrument service manual.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use service functions.
Input Source ← Service

Opens a submenu to select the input source for measurement.
The submenu contains the following options:
● "RF" on page 161
● "Calibration Frequency RF" on page 161
● "Calibration Frequency MW" on page 161
● "Calibration Frequency MW" on page 161
RF ← Input Source ← Service

Switches the input of the R&S FSVA/FSV to the RF input connector (normal position).
This is the default setting.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 911
Calibration Frequency RF ← Input Source ← Service

Opens an edit dialog box to set the generator frequency for the internal calibration.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency on page 909
Calibration Frequency MW ← Input Source ← Service

Opens an edit dialog box to set the calibration frequency for frequencies greater than
7 GHz.
(For R&S FSVA/FSV 13, 30, and 40 only).
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:MCFRequency on page 910
Calibration Frequency WB ← Input Source ← Service

Defines the frequency of the internal broadband calibration signal to be used for IF fil-
ter calibration.

If you define a frequency that is not available, the R&S FSVA/FSV uses the next avail-
able frequency.
Tip: Use the arrow keys to step through the available frequencies.
This function is only available if the bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 is
installed and no other restrictions for its use apply (see "Restrictions" on page 440).
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:WBFRequency on page 910
Calibration Frequency WB2 ← Input Source ← Service

ter calibration (16 MHz or 32 MHz).
This function is only available for R&S FSVA instruments. It is independent of the
bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:WB2Frequency on page 910
Reset Password ← Service

Deactivates all set passwords.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet on page 962
Selftest ← Service
Initiates the self-test of the instrument modules to identify a defective module if there
was a failure. All modules are checked consecutively and the test result is displayed.
Remote command:
*TST? on page 604
Selftest Results ← Service

Opens the "Selftest Result" dialog box that contains the test results. In case of failure a
short description of the failed test, the defective module, the associated value range
and the corresponding test results are indicated.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:STESt:RESult? on page 913
Password ← Service
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the password. This ensures that the service func-
tions are only used by authorized personnel.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] on page 962
Service Function ← Service

Opens the "Service Function" dialog box to start special service functions. For further
information, refer to the service manual.

Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction on page 912
4.1.2 Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key
The SAVE/RCL key is used to store and recall an instrument configuration.

The "Save/Recall" menu enables the user to save or recall the configuration file from
the instrument’s internal storage, a memory stick or a network drive. The file can also
include various settings used by the options installed on the instrument. Measurement
results can also be stored; however, it is strongly recommended that you use the "Print
Screen" or "Trace Export" functions instead.
When recalling a saved configuration file, the following restrictions apply:

● Configuration files cannot be transferred from an R&S FSVA/FSV with a larger fre-
quency range to one with a smaller frequency range
● Configuration files created on a R&S FSVA/FSV with certain options in use will not
work on an R&S FSVA/FSV without these options
● Files created with newer firmware versions may not work with a previous version
Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings

If a transducer file was in use when the save set was stored (with the save item "Cur-
rent Settings" only) it is anticipated that these transducer values should remain valid
after every recall of that save set. Thus, even if the transducer file is changed and the
original save set file is recalled later, the originally stored transducer values are recal-
led and applied to the measurement. In the "Transducer" dialog box, however, the
changed transducer file values are displayed as no updated transducer file was loa-
ded.
The same applies to limit line settings.
If you want to apply the changed transducer values after recalling the save set you
must force the application to reload the transducer file. To do so, simply open the "Edit
Transducer" dialog box (see "Transducer" on page 142) and toggle the "X-Axis" option
from "lin" to "log" and back. Due to that change, the transducer file is automatically
reloaded, and the changed transducer values are applied to the current measurement.
Now you can create a new save set with the updated transducer values.
Similarly, if you want to apply the changed limit values after recalling the save set you
must force the application to reload the limit file. To do so, simply open the "Edit Limit
Line" dialog box (see "Edit" on page 388) and toggle the "Y-Axis" unit. Due to that
change, the limit line file is automatically reloaded, and the changed limit values are
applied to the current measurement. Now a new save set with the updated limit values
can be created.

To open the Save/Recall menu
► Press the SAVE/RCL key.

The "Save/Recall" menu is displayed.

● Chapter 4.1.2.1, "Softkeys of the SAVE/RCL Menu", on page 164
Further information
● Chapter 4.1.2.2, "File Selection Dialog Boxes", on page 170
● Chapter 4.1.2.3, "Importing and Exporting I/Q Data", on page 172
4.1.2.1 Softkeys of the SAVE/RCL Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Save/Recall" menu.
Save............................................................................................................................ 165
└ Save File / Recall File................................................................................... 165
└ Select Path....................................................................................................165
└ Select File..................................................................................................... 165
└ Edit File Name.............................................................................................. 165
└ Edit Comment............................................................................................... 165
└ Select Items.................................................................................................. 165
└ Select Items........................................................................................ 165
└ Enable all Items.................................................................................. 166
└ Disable all Items................................................................................. 166
└ Delete File.....................................................................................................166
Recall.......................................................................................................................... 166
Startup Recall..............................................................................................................166
└ Startup Recall (On/Off)................................................................................. 167
└ Select Dataset...............................................................................................167
ScreenShot................................................................................................................. 167
Export..........................................................................................................................167
└ ASCII Trace Export....................................................................................... 167
└ Decim Sep.................................................................................................... 168
└ IQ Export.......................................................................................................168
Import.......................................................................................................................... 168
└ IQ Import....................................................................................................... 168
File Manager............................................................................................................... 168
└ Edit Path....................................................................................................... 168
└ New Folder....................................................................................................168
└ Copy..............................................................................................................169
└ Rename........................................................................................................ 169
└ Cut................................................................................................................ 169
└ Paste.............................................................................................................169
└ Delete............................................................................................................169
└ Sort Mode..................................................................................................... 169
└ Name.................................................................................................. 169

└ Date.................................................................................................... 169
└ Extension............................................................................................ 169
└ Size.....................................................................................................169
└ File Lists (1/2)............................................................................................... 169
└ Current File List (1/2).................................................................................... 169
└ Network Drive............................................................................................... 170
└ Map Network Drive............................................................................. 170
└ Disconnect Network Drive.................................................................. 170
Save
Opens the "Save" dialog box to define which measurement settings and results to
store. To navigate in the dialog box and define/enter data, use the corresponding soft-
keys.
For details see also Chapter 4.1.2.2, "File Selection Dialog Boxes", on page 170.
Save File / Recall File ← Save

Saves the settings file with the defined file name ("Save" dialog box), or recalls the
selected settings file ("Recall" dialog box).
You can assign stored settings files to user-definable softkeys in the "User" menu for
easy access, see Chapter 4.1.5, "User-Defined Menu – USER key", on page 180 .
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe on page 940
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe:NEXT on page 941
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 934
Select Path ← Save

Opens the directory list to select the drive and folder for the settings file to be stored or
loaded. The default path is C:\r_s\instr\user.
Select File ← Save

Sets the focus on the "Files" list.
Remote command:
MMEMory:CATalog? on page 929
Edit File Name ← Save

Sets the focus on the "File Name" field.
Edit Comment ← Save

Sets the focus on the "Comment" field to enter a comment for the settings file. Max. 60
characters are allowed.
Select Items ← Save

Displays the submenu for selecting the items to be stored or loaded.
Select Items ← Select Items ← Save

Sets the focus on the items list. Which items are available depends on the installed
options.
In the "Save" dialog box, all items that can be saved are displayed.

In the "Recall" dialog box, the items saved in the selected file are displayed.
Remote command:
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings on page 939
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL on page 939
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] on page 940
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 940
Enable all Items ← Select Items ← Save

Selects all items for saving or loading.
Remote command:
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL on page 938
Disable all Items ← Select Items ← Save

Selects none of the items for saving or loading.
Remote command:
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE on page 939
Delete File ← Save

Deletes the selected settings file.
Remote command:
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1, on page 931
Recall
Opens the "Recall" dialog box to load a settings file. To navigate in the dialog box, use
the corresponding softkeys.
For details see also Chapter 4.1.2.2, "File Selection Dialog Boxes", on page 170.
Path Directory from which the settings file is loaded. The default path for user
settings files is C:\r_s\instr\user
Files List of stored settings files
File Name Name of settings file
Comment Comment of the settings file
[Items] Items saved in the settings file
Note: After you use the "Recall" function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e.
any actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the UNDO/REDO
keys.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 934
Startup Recall
Opens a submenu to activate or deactivate and set up the startup recall function.

Startup Recall (On/Off) ← Startup Recall

Activates or deactivates the startup recall function. If activated, the settings stored in
the file selected via the Select Dataset softkey are loaded when booting or for preset. If
deactivated, the default settings are loaded.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO on page 934
Select Dataset ← Startup Recall

Opens the "Startup Recall" dialog box to select the settings file for the startup recall
function.
ScreenShot
Saves the current measurement screen as a file (screenshot). This function can also
be performed via the "Screenshot" icon in the toolbar, if available.
Remote command:
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] on page 926
Export
Opens a submenu to configure data export.
ASCII Trace Export ← Export

Opens the "ASCII Trace Export Name" dialog box and saves the active trace in ASCII
format to the specified file and directory.
Tip: You can export a single trace ("ASCII Trace Export Trace (x)" softkey) or all traces
at the same time ("ASCII Trace Export All Traces"). When you use single trace export,
the R&S FSVA/FSV exports the currently selected trace (indicated by the softkey
label). Note that the exported ASCII file has a slightly different structure compared to a
single trace export.
The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec-
tion containing the trace data. For details on an ASCII file see Chapter 4.2.8.7, "ASCII
File Export Format", on page 234.
This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs, e.g. MS-Excel. It
is necessary to define ';' as a separator for the data import. Different language versions
of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point. It is there-
fore possible to select between separators '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) using the
"Decim Sep" softkey (see "Decim Sep" on page 168).
If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histo-
gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data corresponding to a particular
frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was
recorded. For large history buffers the export operation may take some time.
For details see Chapter 4.10.4, "ASCII File Export Format for Spectrograms",
on page 531.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes on page 748
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 747
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 763
MMEMory:STORe:SGRam on page 762

Decim Sep ← Export

Selects the decimal separator with floating-point numerals for the ASCII Trace export
to support evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) in different languages. The values '.'
(decimal point) and ',' (comma) can be set.
Remote command:
IQ Export ← Export
Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be
stored. This function is only available in single sweep mode.
For details see Chapter 4.1.2.3, "Importing and Exporting I/Q Data", on page 172.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:STATe on page 761
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:COMM on page 762
Import
Provides functions to import data.
IQ Import ← Import
Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data. This
function is only available in single sweep mode.
For details see Chapter 4.1.2.3, "Importing and Exporting I/Q Data", on page 172.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:IQ:STATe on page 761
File Manager
Opens the "File Manager" dialog box and a submenu to manage mass storage media
and files. In the upper left corner, the current drive is displayed. Below the folders and
subfolders of the current directory are displayed.
For details on navigation see also Chapter 4.1.2.2, "File Selection Dialog Boxes",
on page 170.
The following tasks can be performed:
● copying files from flash disk to other media
● copying files into another directory
● renaming and deleting files
Edit Path ← File Manager

Opens the directory list to select the drive and folder for the file to be stored or loaded.
The default path is C:\r_s\instr\user.
Remote command:
MMEMory:MSIS on page 936
MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 931
New Folder ← File Manager

Creates a new folder and opens an edit dialog box to enter name and path (absolute or
relative to the current directory) of the new folder.

Remote command:
MMEMory:MDIRectory on page 935
Copy ← File Manager

Copies the selected item to the clipboard. The item can be copied later using the Paste
softkey.
Remote command:
MMEMory:COPY on page 932
Rename ← File Manager

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a new file or folder name.
Remote command:
MMEMory:MOVE on page 935
Cut ← File Manager

Copies the selected file to the clipboard. If the file is later copied to a different directory
using the Paste softkey, it is deleted in the current directory.
Paste ← File Manager

Copies a file from the clipboard to the currently selected directory.
Delete ← File Manager

Deletes the selected item after confirmation.
Remote command:
MMEMory:DELete on page 933
MMEMory:RDIRectory on page 938
Sort Mode ← File Manager

Opens a submenu to select the sorting mode for the displayed files. The entry for the
next higher directory level ("..") and the folders are always located at the top of the list.
Name ← Sort Mode ← File Manager

Sorts the displayed files in alphabetical order of the file names.
Date ← Sort Mode ← File Manager

Sorts the displayed files in respect to the date.
Extension ← Sort Mode ← File Manager

Sorts the displayed files in respect to the extension.
Size ← Sort Mode ← File Manager

Sorts the displayed files in respect to the size.
File Lists (1/2) ← File Manager

Splits the screen to copy files from one directory to the other. The focus between the
two panes is switched using the FIELD RIGHT and FIELD LEFT keys.
Current File List (1/2) ← File Manager

Changes the focus to the selected file list.

Network Drive ← File Manager

Opens the "Map Network Drive" dialog box and submenu.
Map Network Drive ← Network Drive ← File Manager

Sets the focus on the "Drive" list.
Remote command:
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP on page 937
MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives? on page 938
MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives? on page 937
Disconnect Network Drive ← Network Drive ← File Manager

Opens the "Disconnect Network Drive" dialog box. In the "Drive" list, select the drive
you want to disconnect and confirm with "OK".
Remote command:
MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect on page 937
4.1.2.2 File Selection Dialog Boxes
The "Save" and "Recall" dialog boxes are used to save and recall settings and data
files. The "File Manager" allows you to copy, delete or rename data files on the
R&S FSVA/FSV. These and other file selection dialog boxes are very similar.

Drive
The data is stored on the internal flash disk or, if selected, on a memory stick or net-
work drive. The mass media are assigned to the volume names as follows:
Drive Designation Comment
C operating system, firmware and stored instrument for customer data

settings
A USB floppy drive if connected
D USB memory stick or USB CD-ROM if connected
E …Z additional USB mass storage devices or mounted if connected

LAN volumes
Path
The current path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected
folder.
To set the focus on the "Path" list, press the Select Path/ Edit Path softkey.
Files
This list contains the files and folders contained in the currently selected path.
To set the focus on the "Files" list, press the Select File softkey.
File Name
The "File Name" field contains the name of the data file without the path or extension.
To set the focus on "File Name" field, press the Edit File Name softkey.
In the "Save" dialog box, the field already contains a suggestion for a new name: the
file name used in the last saving process is used, extended by an index. For example,
if the name last used was test_004, the new name test_005 is suggested, but only
if this name is not in use. You can change the suggested name as you like.
By default, the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under-
score and three numbers, e.g. limit_lines_005. In the example, the base name is
limit_lines. The base name can contain characters, numbers and underscores.
The file extension dfl is added automatically.
Comment
The comment is optional and may contain a description for the data file.
To set the focus on the "Comment" field, press the Edit Comment softkey.
Items
When saving data files you can select which data and settings are stored; when recall-
ing such files, this field indicates which items were included during storage. In the "File
Manager", this field is not available.

Which items are available depends on the installed options. The following items may
be included:
Item Description
Current Settings Current measurement settings
All Transducers All transducer factor files.

(Note: Restoring a saveset overwrites transducer factor files on the hard disk
that have the same name as those in the saveset. For more information, read
"Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 163.)
All Traces All active traces; R&S FSV-K30 only: also calibration data
All Limit Lines All limit line files (Note: information on which limit lines are active is stored with
the "Current Settings")
Spectrograms Spectrogram trace data (only available if spectrogram display is currently

active, R&S FSV-K14 only)
Noise - ENR Data in "ENR Settings" dialog box (R&S FSV-K30 only)
Noise - Loss Settings Data in "Loss Settings" dialog box (R&S FSV-K30 only)
Noise - Calibration data Results from calibration measurement (R&S FSV-K30 only)
K40 Results All current phase noise trace results (R&S FSV-K40 only)
WLAN Results Stores the trace and table results for WLAN measurements(R&S FSV-K91
only)
WLAN IQ Data Stores the measured I/Q data (R&S FSV-K91 only)
WLAN User Limits Stores any limit values modified in the table of results for WLAN measure-
ments (R&S FSV-K91 only)
WiMAX Results Stores the trace and table results for WiMAX measurements(R&S FSV-K93
only)
4.1.2.3 Importing and Exporting I/Q Data
In addition to instrument settings and displayed traces, also captured I/Q data can be
exported to a file on the R&S FSVA/FSV. The stored data can then be imported again
at a later time, also by different applications, for further processing. For example, you
can capture I/Q data using the I/Q Analyzer (see Chapter 4.5, "Instrument Functions -
I/Q Analyzer", on page 410) and then perform vector signal analysis on that data using
the R&S FSV-K70 option, if available.
As opposed to storing trace data, which may be averaged or restricted to peak values,
I/Q data is stored as it was captured, without further processing. The data is stored as
complex values in 32-bit floating-point format. The I/Q data is stored in a packed format
with the file extension .iq.tar.
The IQ Import and IQ Export functions are available from the "Save/Recall" menu,
which is displayed when you press the SAVE/RCL key on the front panel.
They can also be performed remotely using the following commands:
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:STATe on page 761

MMEMory:LOAD:IQ:STATe on page 761
iq-tar File Format Specification

I/Q data is stored in a compressed format with the file extension .iq.tar.
An .iq.tar file contains I/Q data in binary format together with meta information that
describes the nature and the source of data, e.g. the sample rate. The objective of
the .iq.tar file format is to separate I/Q data from the meta information while still
having both inside one file. In addition, the file format allows you to preview the I/Q
data in a web browser, and allows you to include user-specific data.
Contained files
An iq-tar file must contain the following files:
● I/Q parameter XML file, e.g. xyz.xml
Contains meta information about the I/Q data (e.g. sample rate). The filename can
be defined freely, but there must be only one single I/Q parameter XML file inside
an iq-tar file.
● I/Q data binary file, e.g. xyz.complex.float32
Contains the binary I/Q data of all channels. There must be only one single I/Q
data binary file inside an iq-tar file.
Optionally, an iq-tar file can contain the following file:
● I/Q preview XSLT file, e.g. open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt
Contains a stylesheet to display the I/Q parameter XML file and a preview of the
I/Q data in a web browser.
I/Q Parameter XML File Specification
The content of the I/Q parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema
RsIqTar.xsd available at: http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/file/RsIqTar.xsd.
In particular, the order of the XML elements must be respected, i.e. iq-tar uses an
"ordered XML schema". For your own implementation of the iq-tar file format make
sure to validate your XML file against the given schema.
The following example shows an I/Q parameter XML file. The XML elements and attrib-
utes are explained in the following sections.
Sample I/Q parameter XML file: xyz.xml

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<?xml-stylesheet type="text/xsl"
href="open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt"?>
<RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat fileFormatVersion="1"
xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation="RsIqTar.xsd"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
<Name>FSV-K10</Name>
<Comment>Here is a comment</Comment>
<DateTime>2011-01-24T14:02:49</DateTime>

<Samples>68751</Samples>
<Clock unit="Hz">6.5e+006</Clock>
<Format>complex</Format>
<DataType>float32</DataType>
<ScalingFactor unit="V">1</ScalingFactor>
<NumberOfChannels>1</NumberOfChannels>
<DataFilename>xyz.complex.float32</DataFilename>
<UserData>
<UserDefinedElement>Example</UserDefinedElement>
</UserData>
<PreviewData>...</PreviewData>
</RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat>
Element Description
RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat The root element of the XML file. It must contain the attribute
fileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition.
Currently, fileFormatVersion "2" is used.
Name Optional: describes the device or application that created the file.
Comment Optional: contains text that further describes the contents of the file.
DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file. Its type is xs:dateTime
(see RsIqTar.xsd).
Samples Contains the number of samples of the I/Q data. For multi-channel signals all
channels have the same number of samples. One sample can be:
● A complex number represented as a pair of I and Q values
● A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values
● A real number represented as a single real value
See also Format element.
Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz, i.e. the sample rate of the I/Q data. A signal
generator typically outputs the I/Q data at a rate that equals the clock frequency.
If the I/Q data was captured with a signal analyzer, the signal analyzer used the
clock frequency as the sample rate. The attribute unit must be set to "Hz".
Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the I/Q data binary file (see
DataFilename element). Every sample must be in the same format. The for-
mat can be one of the following:
● Complex: Complex number in cartesian format, i.e. I and Q values inter-
leaved. I and Q are unitless
● Real: Real number (unitless)
● Polar: Complex number in polar format, i.e. magnitude (unitless) and phase
(rad) values interleaved. Requires DataType = float32 or float64
DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the I/Q data binary file (see
DataFilename element and "I/Q Data Binary File" on page 176). The follow-
ing data types are allowed:
● int8: 8 bit signed integer data
● float32: 32 bit floating point data (IEEE 754)
● float64: 64 bit floating point data (IEEE 754)

Element Description
ScalingFactor Optional: describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the
unit Volt. The binary I/Q data itself has no unit. To get an I/Q sample in the unit
Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the
ScalingFactor. For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied.
For multi-channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels.
The ScalingFactor must be > 0. If the ScalingFactor element is not
defined, a value of 1 V is assumed.
NumberOfChannels Optional: specifies the number of channels, e.g. of a MIMO signal, contained in
the I/Q data binary file. For multi-channels, the I/Q samples of the channels are
expected to be interleaved within the I/Q data file (see "I/Q Data Binary File"
on page 176). If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined, one channel
is assumed.
DataFilename Contains the filename of the I/Q data binary file that is part of the iq-tar file.
It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention:
<xyz>.<Format>.<Channels>ch.<Type>
● <xyz> = a valid Windows file name
● <Format> = complex, polar or real (see Format element)
● <Channels> = Number of channels (see NumberOfChannels element)
● <Type> = float32, float64, int8, int16, int32 or int64 (see DataType ele-
ment)
Examples:
● xyz.complex.1ch.float32
● xyz.polar.1ch.float64
● xyz.real.1ch.int16
● xyz.complex.16ch.int8
UserData Optional: contains user, application or device-specific XML data which is not
part of the iq-tar specification. This element can be used to store additional
information, e.g. the hardware configuration. It is recommended that you add
user data as XML content.
PreviewData Optional: contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the I/Q data.
The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq-tar file (e.g.
R&S FSVA/FSV). For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar.xsd
schema. Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers
that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet
open_IqTar_xml_file_in_web_browser.xslt is available.
Example: ScalingFactor
Data stored as int16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V
ScalingFactor = 1 V / maximum int16 value = 1 V / 215 = 3.0517578125e-5 V
Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac-

tor
Minimum (negative) int16 value - 215 = - 32768 -1 V
Maximum (positive) int16 value 215-1= 32767 0.999969482421875 V
Example: PreviewData in XML

<PreviewData>
<ArrayOfChannel length="1">
<Channel>
<PowerVsTime>

<Min>
<ArrayOfFloat length="256">
<float>-95</float>
<float>-94</float>
...
<float>-93</float>
</ArrayOfFloat>
</Min>
<Max>
<float>0</float>
<float>-41</float>
...
<float>0</float>
</ArrayOfFloat>
</Max>
</PowerVsTime>
<Spectrum>
<Min>
<float>-107</float>
<float>-96</float>
...
<float>-94</float>
</ArrayOfFloat>
</Min>
<Max>
<float>-25</float>
<float>1</float>
...
<float>1</float>
</ArrayOfFloat>
</Max>
</Spectrum>
</Channel>
</ArrayOfChannel>
</PreviewData>
I/Q Data Binary File

The I/Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified
in the XML file (see Format element and DataType element). To allow reading and
writing of streamed I/Q data all data is interleaved, i.e. complex values are interleaved
pairs of I and Q values and multi-channel signals contain interleaved (complex) sam-
ples for channel 1, channel 2, channel 3 etc.
Example: NumberOfChannels - Element ordering for complex cartesian data

Complex data: I[channel no][time index], Q[channel no][time index]

I[0][0], Q[0][0], // Channel 0, Complex sample 0




...
4.1.3 Manual Operation – Local Menu
When switched on, the instrument is always in the manual measurement mode and
can be operated via the front panel. As soon as the instrument receives a remote com-
mand, it is switched to the remote control mode.
In remote control mode, all keys of the instrument except the PRESET key are dis-
abled, see Chapter 4.1.1, "Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP
Key", on page 138. The "LOCAL" softkey and the Display Update (On/Off) softkey are
displayed. Depending on the setting of the Display Update (On/Off) softkey, the dia-
grams, traces and display fields are displayed or hidden. For further details on the Dis-
play Update (On/Off) softkey refer to Chapter 4.1.1, "Instrument Setup and Interface
Configuration – SETUP Key", on page 138.
For details on remote control refer to Chapter 5.1, "Remote Control - Basics",
on page 536.
If you select the "Local" softkey while a self-alignment or a self-test is still running
(which was started remotely), the instrument only returns to the manual operation state
when the alignment or test is completed.
The change to manual operation consists of:

● Enabling the Front Panel Keys
Returning to manual mode enables all inactive keys. The main softkey menu of the
current mode is displayed.
● Displaying the measurement diagrams again.
The diagrams, traces and display fields are displayed again.
● Generating the "OPERATION COMPLETE" message
If, at the time of pressing the "LOCAL" softkey, the synchronization mechanism via
*OPC, *OPC? or *WAI is active, the currently running measurement procedure is

aborted and synchronization is achieved by setting the corresponding bits in the

registers of the status reporting system.
● Setting Bit 6 (User Request) of the Event Status Register
With a corresponding configuration of the status reporting system, this bit immedi-
ately causes the generation of a service request (SRQ) to inform the control soft-
ware that the user wishes to return to front panel control. For example this can be
used to interrupt the control program and to correct instrument settings manually.
This bit is set each time the "LOCAL" softkey is pressed.
To return to manual operation
► Press the "LOCAL" softkey.

The instrument switches from remote to manual operation, but only if the local lock-
out function has not been activated in the remote control mode.
4.1.4 Measurement Documentation – PRINT Key
The PRINT key is used to select and configure the printer and to customize the screen
printout. For detailed information on printer selection and installation refer to the
R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide.
To open the Print menu
► Press the PRINT key.

The "Print" menu is displayed.
Softkeys of the Print Menu

The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Print" menu. It is possible that
with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in
the corresponding softkey description.
Print Screen................................................................................................................ 179
Device Setup...............................................................................................................179
Device (1/2).................................................................................................................179
Colors..........................................................................................................................179
└ Select Print Color Set....................................................................................180
└ Color (On/Off)............................................................................................... 180
└ Select Object.................................................................................................180
└ Predefined Colors......................................................................................... 180
└ User Defined Colors......................................................................................180
└ Set to Default................................................................................................ 180
Comment.....................................................................................................................180
Install Printer............................................................................................................... 180

Print Screen
Starts to printout all test results displayed on the screen: diagrams, traces, markers,
marker lists, limit lines etc. Comments, title, date, and time are included at the bottom
margin of the printout. All displayed items belonging to the instrument software (soft-
keys, tables, dialog boxes) are not printed out.
The output is defined via the "Device Setup" on page 179 softkey. If the output is
saved in a file, the file name used in the last saving process is counted up to the next
unused name. If you use a file name that already exists, upon saving, a message is
displayed. Selecting "Yes" overwrites the existing file, selecting "No" aborts the saving
process. For further details on the file name and an example, refer to the "Save/
Recall" menu, "Edit File Name" on page 165 softkey.
Path Directory in which the file is stored. The default path is C:\r_s\instr\user
Files List of the existing files in the same format
File Name Name of the file
Remote command:
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] on page 926
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT on page 926
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL on page 927
Device Setup
Opens the "Hardcopy Setup" dialog box to define the output: image file, clipboard, or
the printer. The dialog box consists of two tabs which are selected via the "Device
(1/2)" on page 179 softkey.
For further information refer to the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide.
Remote command:
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> on page 925
HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> on page 924
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> on page 928
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe<1|2> on page 928
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? on page 954
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]? on page 955
Device (1/2)
Selects the tab of the device in the "Device Setup" dialog box. The analyzer is able to
manage two print settings independently of each other. For each device the print set-
ting is displayed on the corresponding tab of the "Device Setup" dialog box ( "Device
Setup" on page 179 softkey).
For further information refer to the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide.
Colors
Opens a submenu to define the colors to be used. For details see "Print Colors"
on page 157 softkey of the "Setup" menu.
● "Select Print Color Set" on page 180


Select Print Color Set ← Colors

For details see "Select Print Color Set" on page 157 softkey of the "Setup" menu.
Color (On/Off) ← Colors

For details see "Color (On/Off)" on page 156 softkey of the "Setup" menu.
Select Object ← Colors

For details see "Select Object" on page 156 softkey of the "Setup" menu.
Predefined Colors ← Colors

For details see "Predefined Colors" on page 156 softkey of the "Setup" menu.
User Defined Colors ← Colors

For details see "User Defined Colors" on page 157 softkey of the "Setup" menu.
Set to Default ← Colors

For details see "Set to Default" on page 157 softkey of the "Setup" menu.
Comment
Opens dialog box to enter a comment. Max. 120 characters are allowed. 60 characters
fit in one line. In the first line, at any point a manual line-feed can be forced by entering
"@".
Date and time are inserted automatically. The comment is printed below the diagram
area, but not displayed on the screen. If a comment should not be printed, it must be
deleted.
For details on the alphanumeric entries refer to the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide,
"Basic Operations".
Remote command:
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT on page 927
Install Printer
Opens the "Printers and Faxes" window to install a new printer. All printers that are
already installed are displayed.
For further information refer to the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide, appendix 1,
"Printer Interface".
Only user accounts with administrator rights can install a printer.
4.1.5 User-Defined Menu – USER key
The USER key displays a user-defined menu. The softkeys displayed here can be
labelled and assigned to user-defined settings files as required.

To open the user-defined menu
► Press the USER key.

The "User" menu is displayed.
Softkeys of the "User" menu

The "User" menu contains 8 user-definable softkeys as well as a "User Preference
Setup" softkey that allows you to define them. Pressing one of the user-definable soft-
keys has the same effect as the Save File / Recall File function for a pre-defined set-
tings file. The definitions for these softkeys remain unchanged even after a reset func-
tion and after updating the firmware.
As opposed to recalling a settings file via the "Save/Recall" menu, when a saved set-
tings file is loaded using one of the user-definable softkeys, the only item to be loaded
is the current (measurement) settings - no trace settings, transducer or limit line config-
urations etc.
"User Preference Setup" softkey

Opens an "ApplicationManager" dialog to set up the user-defined softkeys.
For each user-definable softkey (1–8), you can define a key label and assign a settings
file that is to be loaded when the softkey is selected.
SCPI command:
MMEMory:USER<Softkey> on page 941
To define the key label
1. Click into the table entry for the corresponding softkey.

Measurement Parameters
2. Enter a label for the softkey.
3. Press ENTER.
To assign a settings file
1. Click into the table entry for the corresponding softkey.
2. In the file selection dialog, select a stored settings file to be recalled when the soft-
key is selected.
3. Click "Select".
The selected file is displayed in the "ApplicationManager" dialog.
To store the softkey settings
► Click "Save" to store the user-defined softkey definitions.
4.2 Measurement Parameters

In this section all menus necessary for setting measurement parameters are described.
For details on changing the mode refer to Chapter 4.4.1, "Measurement Mode Selec-
tion – MODE Key", on page 405.
Editing measurement parameters in the information bar

The currently defined main measurement parameters are displayed in the information
bar of the display. They can easily be edited by touching the setting in the display (with
a finger or mouse pointer). The corresponding (edit) dialog box is displayed where you
can edit the setting.
If you touch the setting in the display longer than 1 second or right-click it, a context-
sensitive menu is displayed. The entries correspond to the functions available in the
softkey menu for that setting.
Table 4-1: Sweep range variables
Abbrev Definition R&S FSVA/ R&S FSVA/ R&S FSVA/ R&S FSVA/ R&S FSVA/
. FSV4 value FSV7 value FSV13 value FSV30 value FSV40 value
fmax max. fre- 4 GHz 7 GHz 13.6 GHz 30 GHz 40 GHz

quency
fmin min. fre- 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz

quency
available
spanmin smallest 10 Hz 10 Hz 10 Hz 10 Hz 10 Hz
selectable
span > 0
Hz

● Initializing the Configuration – PRESET Key........................................................ 183

● Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key..................................................185
● Setting the Frequency Span – SPAN Key.............................................................191
● Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key.................. 192
● Defining Automatic Settings – AUTO SET Key.....................................................200
● Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key............................................ 204
● Configuring the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key........................................................213
● Setting Traces – TRACE Key................................................................................219
● Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key........................................................................ 237
4.2.1 Initializing the Configuration – PRESET Key
The PRESET key resets the instrument to the default setting and therefore provides a
defined initial state as a known starting point for measurements.
If the "local lockout" function is active in the remote control mode, the PRESET key is
disabled.
Further information
● Chapter 4.2.1.2, "Initial Configuration", on page 184
Task
● Chapter 4.2.1.1, "Presetting the Instrument", on page 183
4.2.1.1 Presetting the Instrument
1. Define the data set for the presetting:

a) To retrieve the originally provided settings file (see Chapter 4.2.1.2, "Initial
Configuration", on page 184), deactivate the "Startup Recall" softkey in the
"SAVE/RCL" menu.
b) To retrieve a customized settings file, in the "File" menu, activate the "Startup
Recall" softkey, press the "Startup Recall Setup" softkey, and select the corre-
sponding file.
For details refer to Chapter 4.1.2, "Saving and Recalling Settings Files –
SAVE/RCL Key", on page 163.
2. Press the PRESET key to perform a preset.
Remote: *RST or SYSTem:PRESet
After you use the PRESET function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e. any
actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the UNDO/REDO
keys.

4.2.1.2 Initial Configuration
The initial configuration is selected such that the RF input is always protected against
overload, provided that the applied signal levels are in the allowed range for the instru-
ment.
The parameter set of the initial configuration can be customized using the "Startup
Recall" softkey in the "Save/Rcl" menu. For further information refer to Chapter 4.1.2,
"Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key", on page 163.
Table 4-2: Initial configuration
Parameter Setting
mode Spectrum
sweep mode auto
center frequency fmax/2
center frequency step size 0.1 * span
span maximum possible (depends on instrument model)
RF attenuation 0 dB
reference level -10 dBm
level range 100 dB log
level unit dBm
sweep time auto
resolution bandwidth auto (3 MHz)
video bandwidth auto (3 MHz)
FFT filters off
span/RBW 100
RBW/VBW 1
sweep cont
trigger free run
trace 1 clr write
trace 2/3/4/5/6 blank
detector auto peak
frequency offset 0 Hz
reference level offset 0 dB
reference level position 100 %
grid abs
cal correction on

Parameter Setting
noise source off
input RF
4.2.2 Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key
The FREQ key is used to configure the frequency axis, to set the frequency offset and
the signal track function. You can configure the frequency axis either by the start and
stop frequency or the center frequency and the span.
To open the Frequency menu

● Press the FREQ key.
The "Frequency" menu is displayed. The "Frequency Center" edit dialog box is dis-
played.

● Chapter 4.2.2.1, "Softkeys of the Frequency Menu", on page 185
Tasks
● Chapter 4.2.2.2, "Specifying the Frequency Axis by the Start and Stop Frequency",
on page 189
● Chapter 4.2.2.3, "Specifying the Frequency Axis by the Center Frequency and the
Span", on page 189
● Chapter 4.2.2.4, "Specifying the Step Size for the Arrow Keys and the Rotary
Knob", on page 190
● Chapter 4.2.2.5, "Modifying the Frequency Axis by an Offset", on page 190
● Chapter 4.2.2.6, "Tracking Signals (Span > 0)", on page 190
4.2.2.1 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu
The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the "Frequency" menu. It is
possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is
only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is
provided in the corresponding softkey description.
Center......................................................................................................................... 186
CF Stepsize.................................................................................................................186
└ 0.1*Span (span > 0)......................................................................................186
└ 0.1*RBW (span > 0)......................................................................................186
└ 0.5*Span (span > 0)......................................................................................187
└ 0.5*RBW (span > 0)......................................................................................187
└ x*Span (span > 0)......................................................................................... 187
└ x*RBW (span > 0)......................................................................................... 187
└ =Center......................................................................................................... 187
└ =Marker.........................................................................................................188

└ Manual.......................................................................................................... 188
Start.............................................................................................................................188
Stop.............................................................................................................................188
Frequency Offset.........................................................................................................188
Signal Track (span > 0)............................................................................................... 188
└ Track On/Off (span > 0)................................................................................ 189
└ Track BW (span > 0).....................................................................................189
└ Track Threshold (span > 0)...........................................................................189
└ Select Trace (span > 0)................................................................................ 189
External Mixer............................................................................................................. 189
Center
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency. The allowed range of values
for the center frequency depends on the frequency span.
span > 0: spanmin/2 ≤ fcenter ≤ fmax – spanmin/2
span = 0: 0 Hz ≤ fcenter ≤ fmax
fmax and spanmin are specified in the data sheet.
If the bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 is active, center frequencies above
7 GHz are not available.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 797
CF Stepsize
Opens a submenu to set the step size of the center frequency.
The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or
decreased when the arrow keys are pressed. When you use the rotary knob the center
frequency changes in steps of 10% of the "Center Frequency Stepsize".
The step size can be set to a fraction of the span (span > 0) or a fraction of the resolu-
tion bandwidth (span = 0) or it can be set to a fixed value manually.
Apart from the =Center, =Marker and Manual softkeys, the other softkeys are dis-
played depending on the selected frequency span.
0.1*Span (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 % of the span.
Remote command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK
on page 798
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 10PCT, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:
LINK:FACTor on page 799
0.1*RBW (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 % of the resolution bandwidth.
This is the default setting.

Remote command:
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK RBW, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK
on page 798
0.5*Span (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 % of the span.
Remote command:
on page 798
0.5*RBW (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 % of the resolution bandwidth.
Remote command:
on page 798
x*Span (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage
(%) of the span.
Remote command:
on page 798
LINK on page 798
x*RBW (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize

Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage
(%) of the resolution bandwidth. Values between 1 % and 100 % in steps of 1 % are
allowed. The default setting is 10 %.
Remote command:
on page 798
LINK on page 798
=Center ← CF Stepsize
Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the
step size to span or resolution bandwidth.
This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics. In this
case, each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic.

=Marker ← CF Stepsize
Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the
step size to span or resolution bandwidth.
This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics. In this
case, each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic.
Manual ← CF Stepsize
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP on page 798
Start
Opens an edit dialog box to define the start frequency. The following range of values is
allowed:
fmin ≤ fstart ≤ fmax – spanmin
fmin, fmax and spanmin are specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt on page 800
Stop
Opens an edit dialog box to define the stop frequency. The following range of values
for the stop frequency is allowed:
fmin + spanmin ≤ fstop ≤ fmax
f min , f max and spanmin are specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP on page 801
Frequency Offset
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency
range by the specified offset.
The softkey indicates the current frequency offset. The allowed values range from
-100 GHz to 100 GHz. The default setting is 0 Hz.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet on page 800
Signal Track (span > 0)

Opens a submenu to define the signal tracking characteristics:
● search bandwidth
● threshold value
● trace
The search bandwidth and the threshold value are shown in the diagram by two verti-
cal lines and one horizontal line, which are labeled as "TRK". After each sweep the
center frequency is set to the maximum signal found within the searched bandwidth. If
no maximum signal above the set threshold value is found in the searched bandwidth,
the track mechanism stops.

The submenu contains the following softkeys:

● "Track On/Off (span > 0)" on page 189
● "Track BW (span > 0)" on page 189
● "Track Threshold (span > 0)" on page 189
● "Select Trace (span > 0)" on page 189
Track On/Off (span > 0) ← Signal Track (span > 0)

Switches the signal tracking on and off.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] on page 706
Track BW (span > 0) ← Signal Track (span > 0)

Opens an edit dialog box to set the search bandwidth for signal tracking. The fre-
quency range is calculated as a function of the center frequency.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth|BWIDth
on page 704
Track Threshold (span > 0) ← Signal Track (span > 0)

Opens an edit dialog box to set the threshold value for signal tracking.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold on page 705
Select Trace (span > 0) ← Signal Track (span > 0)

Opens an edit dialog box to select the trace on which the signal is tracked.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe on page 705
External Mixer
Opens the "Ext. Mixer" submenu to activate and configure an optional external mixer.
This function is only available for R&S FSVA/FSV30 and 40 instruments with the B21
option installed.
For details on the external mixer functionality, see Chapter 4.8, "Instrument Functions
– External Mixer (Option R&S FSV-B21)", on page 487.
4.2.2.2 Specifying the Frequency Axis by the Start and Stop Frequency
1. Press the Start softkey and enter a start frequency.
2. Press the Stop softkey and enter a stop frequency.
4.2.2.3 Specifying the Frequency Axis by the Center Frequency and the Span
1. Press the FREQ key and enter a center frequency in the "Frequency Center" edit
dialog box.

2. Press the SPAN key and enter the bandwidth you want to analyze.
Entering a value of 0 Hz causes a change to the zero span analysis mode.
4.2.2.4 Specifying the Step Size for the Arrow Keys and the Rotary Knob
1. Press the CF Stepsize softkey.

The available softkeys depend on the selected frequency span (zero span or
span > 0).
2. To define the step size of the center frequency:

a) If span > 0:
Press "0.1*Span", "0.5*Span" or "x*Span" to define the step size for the center
frequency as percentage of the span (see CF Stepsize).
b) If span = 0:
Press "0.1*RBW", "0.5*RBW", or "x*RBW" to define the step size for the center
frequency as percentage of the resolution bandwidth (see CF Stepsize).
c) Press the =Center softkey to set the step size to the value of the center fre-
quency and remove the dependency of the step size to span or resolution
bandwidth.
d) Press the =Marker softkey to set the step size to the value of the marker and
remove the dependency of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth.
e) Press the Manual softkey and enter a fixed step size for the center frequency.
The step size assigned to arrow keys corresponds to the selected value.
The step size of the rotary knob is always 10 % of it.
4.2.2.5 Modifying the Frequency Axis by an Offset
● Press the Frequency Offset softkey and enter the offset to shift the displayed fre-
quency span.
4.2.2.6 Tracking Signals (Span > 0)
Note that signal tracking is available for frequency spans > 0.

● Press the Signal Track (span > 0) softkey to open the submenu and start and stop
signal tracking with specified parameters.
● Press the Track On/Off (span > 0) softkey to switch signal tracking on or off.
● Press the Track BW (span > 0) softkey and enter a bandwidth for signal tracking.
● Press the Track Threshold (span > 0) softkey and enter the threshold for signal
tracking.

● Press the Select Trace (span > 0) softkey and select the trace for signal tracking.
4.2.3 Setting the Frequency Span – SPAN Key
The SPAN key is used to set the frequency span to be analyzed.
To open the Span menu

● Press the SPAN key.
The "Span" menu is displayed. For span > 0 an edit dialog box to enter the fre-
quency is displayed. For zero span, an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time is
displayed.

● Chapter 4.2.3.1, "Softkeys of the Span Menu", on page 191
Task
● Chapter 4.2.3.2, "Specifying the Span (Alternatives)", on page 192
4.2.3.1 Softkeys of the Span Menu
The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the "Span" menu. It is possible
that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only
available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is pro-
vided in the corresponding softkey description.
Span Manual............................................................................................................... 191
Full Span..................................................................................................................... 191
Zero Span................................................................................................................... 192
Last Span.................................................................................................................... 192
Span Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the frequency span. The center frequency remains
the same when you change the span.
The following range is allowed:
span = 0: 0 Hz
span >0: spanmin ≤ f span ≤ f max
fmax and spanmin are specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 800
Full Span
Sets the span to the full frequency range of the R&S FSVA/FSV specified in the data
sheet. This setting is useful for overview measurements.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL on page 800

Zero Span
Sets the span to 0 Hz (zero span). The x-axis becomes the time axis with the grid lines
corresponding to 1/10 of the current sweep time ("SWT").
Remote command:
FREQ:SPAN 0Hz, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 800
Last Span
Sets the span to the previous value. With this function e.g. a fast change between
overview measurement and detailed measurement is possible.
Remote command:
-
4.2.3.2 Specifying the Span (Alternatives)
1. To set the span, use the Span Manual, Full Span, Zero Span and Last Span soft-
keys.
2. To define a frequency range, use the Start and Stop softkeys of the "Frequency"
menu.
3. In zero span, the span corresponds to the sweep time. In that case, press the
Sweeptime Manual softkey and enter a sweep time.
4.2.4 Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key
The AMPT key is used to set the reference level, the level range and unit, the scaling
and the RF attenuation.
To open the amplitude menu

● Press the AMPT key.
The "Amplitude" menu is displayed. The "Reference Level" dialog box is displayed.

● Chapter 4.2.4.1, "Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu", on page 192
Tasks
● Chapter 4.2.4.2, "Specifying the Amplitude", on page 199
● Chapter 4.2.4.3, "Using Electronic Attenuation (Option Electronic Attenuator,
R&S FSV-B25)", on page 200
4.2.4.1 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Amplitude" menu. It is possible

Ref Level..................................................................................................................... 193
Range..........................................................................................................................193
└ Range Log 100 dB........................................................................................ 193
└ Range Log 50 dB.......................................................................................... 194
└ Range Log 10 dB.......................................................................................... 194
└ Range Log 5 dB............................................................................................ 194
└ Range Log 1 dB............................................................................................ 194
└ Range Log Manual........................................................................................194
└ Range Linear %............................................................................................ 195
└ Range Lin. Unit............................................................................................. 195
Unit..............................................................................................................................195
Preamp On/Off............................................................................................................ 195
RF Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual............................................................................. 196
RF Atten Auto/Mech Att Auto...................................................................................... 196
El Atten On/Off............................................................................................................ 196
El Atten Mode (Auto/Man)...........................................................................................197
Ref Level Offset.......................................................................................................... 197
Ref Level Position....................................................................................................... 197
Grid Abs/Rel ...............................................................................................................198
Noise Correction......................................................................................................... 198
Input (AC/DC)..............................................................................................................198
Input 50 Ω/75 Ω ..........................................................................................................198
(Bypassing the )YIG Filter........................................................................................... 199
Ref Level
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit (dBm, dBµV,
etc).
The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor-
tion of the measured value. Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor-
rectly, which is indicated by the "IFOVL" status display.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel on page 742
Range
Opens a submenu to define the display range of the level axis.
Range Log 100 dB ← Range

Sets the level display range to 100 dB.
Remote command:
Logarithmic scaling:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 100DB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]
on page 741


Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741
Range Log Manual ← Range

Opens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis man-
ually.
Remote command:
SPACing on page 741

Display range:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] on page 741
Range Linear % ← Range

Selects linear scaling for the level axis in %.
The grid is divided into decadal sections.
Markers are displayed in the selected unit ("Unit" softkey). Delta markers are displayed
in % referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1. This is the default set-
ting for linear scaling.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing
on page 741
Range Lin. Unit ← Range

Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range, i.e. the horizontal lines are
labeled in dB.
in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LDB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing
on page 741
Unit
Opens the "Unit" submenu to select the unit for the level axis.
The default setting is dBm.
If a transducer is switched on, the softkey is not available.
In general, the signal analyzer measures the signal voltage at the RF input. The level
display is calibrated in RMS values of an unmodulated sine wave signal. In the default
state, the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW (= dBm). Via the known input impe-
dance (50 Ω or 75 Ω), conversion to other units is possible. The following units are
available and directly convertible:
● dBm
● dBmV
● dBμV
● dBμA
● dBpW
● Volt
● Ampere
● Watt
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer on page 735
Preamp On/Off
Switches the preamplifier on and off.
If option R&S FSV-B22 is installed, the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz.
If option R&S FSV-B24 is installed, the preamplifier is active for all frequencies.

When measuring Spurious Emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
"Sweep List" dialog, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 348.
This function is not available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option
R&S FSV-B17).
Remote command:
INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 757
RF Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation, irrespective of the reference level. If
electronic attenuation is activated (option R&S FSV-B25 only; "El Atten Mode Auto"
softkey), this setting defines the mechanical attenuation.
The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps.
The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps (R&S FSV with option R&S FSV-B25 or
R&S FSVA: 1 dB steps). The range is specified in the data sheet. If the current refer-
ence level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation, the reference level is adjusted
accordingly.
R&S FSV-B17).
The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula:
levelmixer = levelinput – RF attenuation
Note: As of firmware version 1.61, the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm. Mixer
levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results, which are indicated
by the "OVLD" status display. The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal,
but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument!
When measuring spurious emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
"Sweep List" dialog box, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 348.
Remote command:
INPut:ATTenuation on page 751
RF Atten Auto/Mech Att Auto

Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level.
This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used. It is the default setting.
R&S FSV-B17).
Remote command:
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 752
El Atten On/Off
This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off. This softkey is only available
with option R&S FSV-B25.
When the electronic attenuator is activated, the mechanical and electronic attenuation
can be defined separately. Note however, that both parts must be defined in the same
mode, i.e. either both manually, or both automatically.

R&S FSV-B17).
● To define the mechanical attenuation, use the RF Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual
or RF Atten Auto/Mech Att Auto softkeys.
● To define the electronic attenuation, use the El Atten Mode (Auto/Man) softkey.
Note: This function is not available for stop frequencies (or center frequencies in zero
span) >7 GHz. In this case, the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized
and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually. As soon as the
stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz, this function is available again.
When the electronic attenuator is switched off, the corresponding RF attenuation mode
(auto/manual) is automatically activated.
Remote command:
INPut:EATT:AUTO on page 756
El Atten Mode (Auto/Man)

This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically
or manually. If manual mode is selected, an edit dialog box is opened to enter the
value. This softkey is only available with option R&S FSV-B25, and only if the elec-
tronic attenuator has been activated via the El Atten On/Off softkey.
stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz, electronic attenuation is available
again. If the electronic attenuation was defined manually, it must be re-defined.
The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB. Other entries are rounded
to the next lower integer value.
To re-open the edit dialog box for manual value definition, select the "Man" mode
again.
If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation, the reference
level is adjusted accordingly and the warning "Limit reached" is output.
Remote command:
INPut:EATT on page 755
Ref Level Offset

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the
measured level irrespective of the selected unit. The scaling of the y-axis is changed
accordingly. The setting range is ±200 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet on page 743
Ref Level Position

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level position, i.e. the position of the
maximum AD converter value on the level axis. The setting range is from -200 to
+200 %, 0 % corresponding to the lower and 100 % to the upper limit of the diagram.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition on page 743

Grid Abs/Rel
Switches between absolute and relative scaling of the level axis (not available with
"Linear" range).
"Abs" Absolute scaling: The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute
value of the reference level. Absolute scaling is the default setting.
"Rel" Relative scaling: The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB. The
scaling is in dB whereas the reference level is always in the set unit
(for details on unit settings see the "Unit" softkey).
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE on page 742
Noise Correction
If activated, the results are corrected by the instrument's inherent noise, which increa-
ses the dynamic range.
"ON" A reference measurement of the instrument's inherent noise is carried
out. The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in
the channel that is being examined.
The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center
frequency, resolution bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the cor-
rection function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is
changed. A disable message is displayed on the screen. Noise cor-
rection must be switched on again manually after the change.
"OFF" No noise correction is performed.
"AUTO" Noise correction is performed. After a parameter change, noise cor-
rection is restarted automatically and a new correction measurement
is performed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 843
Input (AC/DC)
Toggles the RF input of the R&S FSVA/FSV between AC and DC coupling.
R&S FSV-B17).
Remote command:
INPut:COUPling on page 752
Input 50 Ω/75 Ω
Uses 50 Ω or 75 Ω as reference impedance for the measured levels. Default setting is
50 Ω.
The setting 75 Ω should be selected if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a
higher impedance using a 75 Ω adapter of the RAZ type (= 25 Ω in series to the input
impedance of the instrument). The correction value in this case is 1.76 dB = 10 log (75
Ω/50 Ω).
All levels specified in this Operating Manual refer to the default setting of the instru-
ment (50 Ω).

R&S FSV-B17).
Remote command:
INPut:IMPedance on page 757
(Bypassing the )YIG Filter

If the option R&S FSVA-B11 is installed, the YIG preselector can be bypassed.
This function is only available for R&S FSVA instruments.
If the YIG preselector at the input of the R&S FSVA is removed from the signal path,
you can use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis. However, image-frequency
rejection is no longer ensured.
Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 7 GHz. There-
fore, switching the YIG preselector on and off has no effect if the frequency is below
that value.
Note:
For the following measurements, the YIG preselector is off by default (if available).
● I/Q Analyzer
● GSM
● VSA
INPut:FILTer:YIG[:STATe] on page 756
4.2.4.2 Specifying the Amplitude
1. Set the reference level, offset and position using the "Ref Level", "Ref Level Offset"
and "Ref Level Position" softkeys (see "Ref Level" on page 193, "Ref Level Offset"
on page 197 and "Ref Level Position" on page 197).
2. Select the level range and the unit for the level axis using the "Range" and "Unit"
softkeys (see "Range" on page 193 and "Unit" on page 195).
3. Set the scaling using the "Ref Level Position" and/or "Grid Abs/Rel" softkeys (see
"Ref Level Position" on page 197 and "Grid Abs/Rel " on page 198).
4. Set the attenuation using the "RF Atten Manual/Mech Atten Manual" or "RF Atten
Auto/Mech Att Auto", or (for option B25 only) "El Atten Mode" softkeys (see"RF
Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual" on page 196, "RF Atten Auto/Mech Att Auto"
on page 196, "El Atten Mode (Auto/Man)" on page 197).
5. Define the RF input coupling using the "Input (AC/DC)" softkey, or a reference
impedance using the "Input (50Ω/75Ω)" softkey (see "Input (AC/DC)" on page 198,
"Input 50 Ω/75 Ω " on page 198).
6. If available, activate or deactivate the RF Preamplifier (option R&S FSV-B22/B24)

using the "Preamp" softkey (see "Preamp On/Off" on page 195).

4.2.4.3 Using Electronic Attenuation (Option Electronic Attenuator, R&S FSV-B25)
Besides the mechanical attenuator at the RF input, the R&S FSVA/FSV also offers an
electronic attenuation setting (option Electronic Attenuator B25). The electronic attenu-
ator can be set manually or automatically. The default attenuation is preset by the
mechanical attenuator. The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB.
Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value.
In automatic mode, the electronic attenuator is set to 0 dB. If a reference level outside
the allowed 30 dB range is set, the mechanical attenuator performs the setting. From
this new reference level to over 30dB, the electronic attenuator performs the setting
again.
For stop frequencies (or center frequencies in zero span) >7 GHz, electronic attenua-
tion cannot be defined individually. In this case, the electronic and mechanical attenua-
tion are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined manually.
As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz, electronic attenua-
tion is available again. If the electronic attenuation was defined manually, it must be re-
defined.
Setting electronic attenuation
1. Activate the electronic attenuation by pressing the El Atten On/Off softkey.
2. Select the required attenuator mode by pressing the El Atten Mode (Auto/Man)
softkey until the required mode is highlighted.
Two new softkeys are displayed to set the mechanical attenuation. The same
mode is activated for mechanical attenuation as was selected for electronic attenu-
ation.
3. To define the attenuation manually:

a) Press the El Atten Mode (Auto/Man) softkey again, if necessary, to display the
edit dialog box.
b) Enter the value for the electronic attenuator in the edit dialog box.
c) If necessary, press the RF Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual softkey to open the
edit dialog box for mechanical attenuation and enter the required value.
4.2.5 Defining Automatic Settings – AUTO SET Key
The "Auto Set" menu allows you define automatic settings for measurements quickly.
To open the Auto Set menu

● Press the AUTO SET key.
The "Auto Set" menu is displayed.


● Chapter 4.2.5.1, "Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu", on page 201
4.2.5.1 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Auto Set" menu. It is possible
Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements

When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the
optimal settings. If you select an auto adjust funtion for a triggered measurement, you
can select how the R&S FSVA/FSV should behave:
● (default:) The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger
● The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger.
The trigger source is temporarily set to "Free Run". After the measurement is com-
pleted, the original trigger source is restored. The trigger level is adjusted as fol-
lows:
– For IF Power and RF Power triggers:
Trigger Level = Reference Level - 15 dB
– For Video trigger:
Trigger Level = 85 %
SCPI command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIG on page 771
Auto All........................................................................................................................201
Auto Freq.................................................................................................................... 202
Auto Level................................................................................................................... 202
Settings....................................................................................................................... 202
└ Meas Time Manual....................................................................................... 202
└ Meas Time Auto............................................................................................202
└ Upper Level Hysteresis.................................................................................202
└ Lower Level Hysteresis.................................................................................203
Sweep Type................................................................................................................ 203
└ Sweep........................................................................................................... 203
└ FFT............................................................................................................... 203
└ Auto...............................................................................................................203
└ FFT Filter Mode............................................................................................ 203
└ Auto.................................................................................................... 204
└ Narrow................................................................................................ 204
Auto All
Performs all automatic settings.
● "Auto Freq" on page 202
● "Auto Level" on page 202

Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:ALL on page 769
Auto Freq
Defines the center frequency and the reference level automatically by determining the
highest frequency level in the frequency span. This function uses the signal counter;
thus it is intended for use with sinusoidal signals.
R&S FSV-B17).
This function is not available for 1xEV-DO MS Analysis mode (K85).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency on page 769
Auto Level
Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically.
The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the Settings soft-
key.
You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is
adjusted, see "Upper Level Hysteresis" on page 202 and "Lower Level Hysteresis"
on page 203.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel on page 769
Settings
Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling.
Possible settings are:
● "Meas Time Manual" on page 202
● "Meas Time Auto" on page 202
Meas Time Manual ← Settings

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds.
The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically
(see the "Auto Level" softkey, "Auto Level" on page 202). The default value is 1 ms.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation on page 770
Meas Time Auto ← Settings

The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically
(see the Auto Level softkey).
Upper Level Hysteresis ← Settings

Defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto-
matically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer on page 771

Lower Level Hysteresis ← Settings

Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto-
matically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer on page 770
Sweep Type
Opens a submenu to define the sweep type.
This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R&S Digital I/Q
Interface (option R&S FSV-B17).
In frequency sweep mode, the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweep-
ing:
● "Sweep" on page 203
● "FFT" on page 203 (not available with 5-Pole filters, channel filters or RRC filters,
see Chapter 4.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 211)
● "Auto" on page 203
Sweep ← Sweep Type

Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep.
In the standard sweep mode, the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi
analog from the start to the stop frequency.
Remote command:
SWE:TYPE SWE, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE on page 851
FFT ← Sweep Type

Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode.
The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the
spectrum by fast Fourier transformation (FFT).
FFT is not available when using 5-Pole filters, Channel filters or RRC filters. In this
case, sweep mode is used.
Note: The same applies when a tracking generator (internal or external, options
R&S FSV-B9/B10) is active.
Remote command:
SWE:TYPE FFT, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE on page 851
Auto ← Sweep Type

Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement. Auto
mode is set by default.
Remote command:
SWE:TYPE AUTO, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE on page 851
FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size. The
partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis.

Auto ← FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea-
surement results.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT on page 774
Narrow ← FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type

For an RBW ≤ 10kHz, the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used. This allows
you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a
narrower analog prefilter.
Remote command:
4.2.6 Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key
The BW key is used to set the resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth (VBW) and
sweep time (SWT). The values available for resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth
depend on the selected filter type. For details on channel filters see also Chap-
ter 4.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters", on page 211 .
To open the bandwidth menu

● Press the BW key.
The "Bandwidth" menu is displayed.

● Chapter 4.2.6.1, "Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu", on page 204
Further information
● Chapter 4.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters", on page 211
● Table 4-3
Tasks
● Chapter 4.2.6.2, "Specifying the Bandwidth", on page 210
● Chapter 4.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 211
4.2.6.1 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Bandwidth" menu. It is possible

For Spurious Emission Measurements, the settings are defined in the "Sweep List" dia-
log, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 348.
Bandwidth settings are only available for RF measurements.
Res BW Manual.......................................................................................................... 205

Res BW Auto...............................................................................................................205
Video BW Manual....................................................................................................... 206
Video BW Auto............................................................................................................206
Sweeptime Manual......................................................................................................206
Sweeptime Auto.......................................................................................................... 207
Sweep Type................................................................................................................ 207
└ Sweep........................................................................................................... 207
└ FFT............................................................................................................... 207
└ Auto...............................................................................................................208
└ FFT Filter Mode............................................................................................ 208
└ Auto.................................................................................................... 208
└ Narrow................................................................................................ 208
Coupling Ratio.............................................................................................................208
└ RBW/VBW Sine [1/1].................................................................................... 208
└ RBW/VBW Pulse [.1].................................................................................... 209
└ RBW/VBW Noise [10]................................................................................... 209
└ RBW/VBW Manual........................................................................................209
└ Span/RBW Auto [100]...................................................................................209
└ Span/RBW Manual....................................................................................... 209
└ Default Coupling........................................................................................... 210
Filter Type................................................................................................................... 210
Res BW Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth. The available
resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet.
For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to
Chapter 4.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 211.
Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth. For rotary knob or
UP/DNARROW key inputs, the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down-
wards.
The manual input mode of the resolution bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next
to the "RBW" display in the channel bar.
"Sweep List" dialog (see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 348).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 774
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] on page 774
Res BW Auto
Couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected span (for span > 0). If you change the
span, the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted.

This setting is recommended if you need the ideal resolution bandwidth in relation to a
particular span.
Remote command:
Video BW Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the video bandwidth. The available video bandwidths
are specified in the data sheet.
UP/DOWN key inputs, the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down-
wards.
The manual input mode of the video bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to
the "VBW" display in the channel bar.
Note: RMS detector and VBW.
If an RMS detector is used, the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed. Thus,
duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs. How-
ever, the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time. This leads to a lon-
ger sweep time for small VBW values. Thus, you can reduce the VBW value to achieve
more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector. Normally, if the RMS
detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves.
For details on detectors see Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Overview", on page 233.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO on page 776
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo on page 776
Video BW Auto
Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth. If you change the resolution
bandwidth, the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted.
This setting is recommended if a minimum sweep time is required for a selected reso-
lution bandwidth. Narrow video bandwidths result in longer sweep times due to the lon-
ger settling time. Wide bandwidths reduce the signal/noise ratio.
Remote command:
Sweeptime Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time.
Sweep time
absolute max. sweep time value: 16000 s
absolute min. sweep time value: zero span: 1 μs
span > 0: depends on device model (refer to data sheet)
Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW. For details
refer to the data sheet.

Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time. For rotary knob
or UPARROW/DNARROW key inputs, the sweep time is adjusted in steps either
downwards or upwards.
The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the
"SWT" display in the channel bar. If the selected sweep time is too short for the
selected bandwidth and span, level measurement errors will occur due to a too short
settling time for the resolution or video filters. In this case, the R&S FSVA/FSV displays
the error message "UNCAL" and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet.
Remote command:
SWE:TIME:AUTO OFF, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 851
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 851
Sweeptime Auto
Couples the sweep time to the span, video bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth
(RBW) (not available for zero span). If you change the span, resolution bandwidth or
video bandwidth, the sweep time is automatically adjusted.
The R&S FSVA/FSV always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without
falsifying the signal. The maximum level error is < 0.1 dB, compared to using a longer
sweep time.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 851
Sweep Type
ing:

Remote command:
FFT ← Sweep Type


Remote command:
Auto ← Sweep Type

Remote command:


surement results.
Remote command:

Remote command:
Coupling Ratio
Opens a submenu to select the coupling ratios for functions coupled to the bandwidth.
RBW/VBW Sine [1/1] ← Coupling Ratio

Sets the following coupling ratio:
"video bandwidth = resolution bandwidth"
This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth/video bandwidth.
This is the coupling ratio recommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured.
This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically (Video BW
Auto).
Remote command:
BAND:VID:RAT 1, see [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio
on page 776

RBW/VBW Pulse [.1] ← Coupling Ratio

"video bandwidth = 10 × resolution bandwidth or"
"video bandwidth = 10 MHz (= max. VBW)."
This coupling ratio is recommended whenever the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to
be measured correctly. The IF filter is exclusively responsible for pulse shaping. No
additional evaluation is performed by the video filter.
Auto).
Remote command:
on page 776
RBW/VBW Noise [10] ← Coupling Ratio

"video bandwidth = resolution bandwidth/10"
At this coupling ratio, noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video domain.
For noise signals, the average value is displayed.
Auto).
Remote command:
BAND:VID:RAT 0.1, see [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio
on page 776
RBW/VBW Manual ← Coupling Ratio

Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio.
The resolution bandwidth/video bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 0.001 to 1000.
Auto).
Remote command:
on page 776
Span/RBW Auto [100] ← Coupling Ratio

"resolution bandwidth = span/100"
This coupling ratio is the default setting of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically (Res BW
Auto).
Remote command:
BAND:VID:RAT 0.001, see [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio
on page 776
Span/RBW Manual ← Coupling Ratio

Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio.

This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically (Res BW
Auto).
The span/resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 1 to 10000.
Remote command:
BAND:RAT 0.1, see [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio
on page 775
Default Coupling ← Coupling Ratio

Sets all coupled functions to the default state ("AUTO").
In addition, the ratio "RBW/VBW" is set to "SINE [1/1]" and the ratio "SPAN/RBW" to
100.
Remote command:
Filter Type
Opens a submenu to select the filter type.
The submenu contains the following softkeys:
● Normal (3 dB)
● CISPR (6 dB)
● MIL Std (6 dB)
Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R&S FSV-K54.
● Channel
● RRC
● 5-Pole (not available for sweep type "FFT")
For detailed information on filters see Chapter 4.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter
Type", on page 211 and Chapter 4.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters",
on page 211.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 775
4.2.6.2 Specifying the Bandwidth
1. Set the resolution bandwidth using the Res BW Manual or Res BW Auto softkey.
2. Set the video bandwidth using the Video BW Manual or Video BW Auto softkey.
3. Set the sweep time using the Sweeptime Manual or Sweeptime Auto softkey.
4. Press the Filter Type softkey and select the appropriate filters.

4.2.6.3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type
All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters.

The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace. Using video band-
widths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth, only the signal average is
displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed. If pulsed signals are to
be measured, it is advisable to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the
resolution bandwidth (VBW * 10 x RBW) for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured
correctly.
The following filter types are available:
● Normal (3dB) (Gaussian) filters
The Gaussian filters are set by default. The available bandwidths are specified in
the data sheet.
● CISPR (6 dB) filters
● MIL Std (6 dB) filters
Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R&S FSV-K54.
● Channel filters
For details see Chapter 4.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters",
on page 211 .
Channel filters do not support FFT mode.
● RRC filters
For details see Chapter 4.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters",
on page 211 .
RRC filters do not support FFT mode.
● 5-Pole filters
The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet.
5-Pole filters do not support FFT mode.
4.2.6.4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters
For power measurement a number of especially steep-edged channel filters are availa-
ble (see the following table). The indicated filter bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth. For
RRC filters, the fixed roll-off factor (a) is also indicated.
Table 4-3: Filter types
Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application
100 Hz CFILter
200 Hz CFILter
300 Hz CFILter
500 Hz CFILter
1 kHz CFILter
1.5 kHz CFILter

2 kHz CFILter
2.4 kHz CFILter SSB
2.7 kHz CFILter
3 kHz CFILter
3.4 kHz CFILter
4 kHz CFILter DAB, Satellite
4.5 kHz CFILter
5 kHz CFILter
6 kHz CFILter
6 kHz, a=0.2 RRC APCO
7.5 kHz CFILter
8.5 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 (12.5 kHz channels)
9 kHz CFILter AM Radio
10 kHz CFILter
12.5 kHz CFILter CDMAone
14 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 (20 kHz channels)
15 kHz CFILter
16 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 (25 kHz channels)
18 kHz, a=0.35 RRC TETRA
20 kHz CFILter
21 kHz CFILter PDC
24.3 kHz, a=0.35 RRC IS 136
25 kHz CFILter APCO 25-P2
30 kHz CFILter CDPD, CDMAone
50 kHz CFILter
100 kHz CFILter
150 kHz CFILter FM Radio
192 kHz CFILter PHS
200 kHz CFILter GSM
300 kHz CFILter
500 kHz CFILter J.83 (8-VSB DVB, USA); RF ID 14333

1 MHz CFILter CDMAone
1.228 MHz CFILter CDMAone
1.28 MHz, a=0.22 RRC TD-SCDMA
1.5 MHz CFILter DAB
2 MHz CFILter
3 MHz CFILter
3.75 MHz CFILter
3.84 MHz, a=0.22 RRC W-CDMA 3GPP
4.096 MHz, a=0.22 RRC W-CDMA NTT DOCoMo
5 MHz CFILter
20 MHz CFILter
28 MHz CFILter
40 MHz CFILter
4.2.7 Configuring the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key
The SWEEP key is used to configure the sweep mode. Continuous sweep or single
sweep is possible. The sweep time and the number of measured values are set.
To open the Sweep menu

● Press the SWEEP key.
The "Sweep" menu is displayed.

● Chapter 4.2.7.1, "Softkeys of the Sweep Menu", on page 213
Task
● Chapter 4.2.7.2, "Specifying the Sweep Settings", on page 218
4.2.7.1 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Sweep" menu. It is possible that
with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is provided in the
corresponding softkey description.

Continuous Sweep...................................................................................................... 214

Single Sweep.............................................................................................................. 214
Continue Single Sweep...............................................................................................214
Sweeptime Manual......................................................................................................214
Sweeptime Auto.......................................................................................................... 215
Sweep Type................................................................................................................ 215
└ Sweep........................................................................................................... 216
└ FFT............................................................................................................... 216
└ Auto...............................................................................................................216
└ FFT Filter Mode............................................................................................ 216
└ Auto.................................................................................................... 216
└ Narrow................................................................................................ 216
Sweep Count...............................................................................................................216
Sweep Points.............................................................................................................. 217
Select Frame...............................................................................................................217
Continue Frame (On Off)............................................................................................ 217
Frame Count............................................................................................................... 218
Spectrogram Clear...................................................................................................... 218
Continuous Sweep
Sets the continuous sweep mode: the sweep takes place continuously according to the
trigger settings. This is the default setting.
The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value (see the "Sweep Count"
softkey, "Sweep Count" on page 216).
Remote command:
INIT:CONT ON, see INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 749
Single Sweep
Sets the single sweep mode: after triggering, starts the number of sweeps that are
defined by using the Sweep Count softkey. The measurement stops after the defined
number of sweeps has been performed.
Remote command:
INIT:CONT OFF, see INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 749
Continue Single Sweep

Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey, without deleting
the trace of the last measurement.
This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations "Average" or "Max
Hold" to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging/maximum
search.
For details on trace configuration refer to Chapter 4.2.8, "Setting Traces – TRACE
Key", on page 219.
Remote command:
INITiate<n>:CONMeas on page 749
Sweeptime Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time.

Sweep time
absolute max. sweep time value: 16000 s
absolute min. sweep time value: zero span: 1 μs
span > 0: depends on device model (refer to data sheet)
Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW. For details
refer to the data sheet.
Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time. For rotary knob
or UPARROW/DNARROW key inputs, the sweep time is adjusted in steps either
downwards or upwards.
The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the
"SWT" display in the channel bar. If the selected sweep time is too short for the
selected bandwidth and span, level measurement errors will occur due to a too short
settling time for the resolution or video filters. In this case, the R&S FSVA/FSV displays
the error message "UNCAL" and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet.
Remote command:
SWE:TIME:AUTO OFF, see [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 851
Sweeptime Auto
Couples the sweep time to the span, video bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth
(RBW) (not available for zero span). If you change the span, resolution bandwidth or
video bandwidth, the sweep time is automatically adjusted.
The R&S FSVA/FSV always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without
falsifying the signal. The maximum level error is < 0.1 dB, compared to using a longer
sweep time.
Remote command:
Sweep Type
ing:


Remote command:
FFT ← Sweep Type

Remote command:
Auto ← Sweep Type

Remote command:


surement results.
Remote command:

Remote command:
Sweep Count
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single
sweep mode. Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed. If the values 0 or 1 are set, one
sweep is performed. The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram.

If the trace configurations "Average", "Max Hold" or "Min Hold" are set, the sweep
count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures.
In continuous sweep mode, if sweep count = 0 (default), averaging is performed over
10 sweeps. For sweep count =1, no averaging, maxhold or minhold operations are per-
formed.
For details on trace configuration see Chapter 4.2.8, "Setting Traces – TRACE Key",
on page 219.
Example:
● Press the TRACE key > Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6 softkey
> "Max Hold" on page 221 softkey.
● Press the SWEEP key > "Sweep Count" softkey.
● In the "Average Sweep Count" dialog box, enter 10.
● Press the "Single Sweep" on page 214 softkey:
R&S FSVA/FSV performs the "Max Hold" function over 10 sweeps.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt on page 845
Sweep Points
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values to be collected dur-
ing one sweep.
● Entry via rotary knob:
– In the range from 101 to 1001, the sweep points are increased or decreased in
steps of 100 points.
– In the range from 1001 to 32001, the sweep points are increased or decreased
in steps of 1000 points.
● Entry via keypad:
All values in the defined range can be set.
The default value is 691 sweep points.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts on page 850
Select Frame
For spectrogram measurements only.
Opens a dialog box to select a specific frame and loads the corresponding trace from
the memory.
Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati-
cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker.
This softkey is available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect on page 726
Continue Frame (On Off)


Determines whether the results of the last measurement are deleted before starting a
new measurement.
● On
Repeats the single sweep measurement without deleting the spectrogram results
of the last measurement. One of the following trace modes is to be used: Max
Hold, Min Hold, Average.
● Off
Deletes the last measurement results before performing a single sweep measure-
ment.
This softkey is available in single sweep mode.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CONT on page 725
Frame Count
Opens a dialog box to set the number of frames to be captured in a single sweep.
Therefore, the frame count defines the number of traces the R&S FSVA/FSV plots in
the Spectrogram result display in a single sweep. The maximum number of possible
frames depends on the history depth (see CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth
on page 726).
The sweep count, on the other hand, determines how many sweeps are combined in
one frame in the Spectrogram, i.e. how many sweeps the R&S FSVA/FSV performs to
plot one trace in the Spectrogram result display (see "Sweep Count" on page 216).
This softkey is available in single sweep mode.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:COUNt on page 725
Spectrogram Clear
Resets the Spectrogram result display and clears its history buffer.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate] on page 724
4.2.7.2 Specifying the Sweep Settings
1. Press the Sweep Count softkey and enter the sweep count.
2. Press the Sweeptime Manual or Sweeptime Auto softkey to set the sweep time.
3. Press the Sweep Type softkey to select the sweep type.
4. Press the Sweep Points softkey and enter the number of sweep points.
5. Press the Continuous Sweep or Single Sweep softkey to select the sweep mode.
6. Press the Continue Single Sweep softkey to repeat the single sweep.

4.2.8 Setting Traces – TRACE Key
The TRACE key is used to configure the data acquisition for measurement and the
analysis of the measurement data.
The R&S FSVA/FSV is capable of displaying up to six different traces at a time in a
diagram. A trace consists of a maximum of 691 displayed measurement points on the
horizontal axis (frequency or time). If more measured values than measurement points
are available, several measured values are combined in one displayed measurement
point.
The trace functions include the following:
● Display mode of the trace
For details on trace modes see Chapter 4.2.8.4, "Trace Mode Overview",
on page 231.
● Evaluation of the trace as a whole
For details on averaging see Chapter 4.2.8.5, "Description of the Averaging
Method", on page 232.
● Evaluation of individual measurement points of a trace. For details on detectors
see Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Overview", on page 233.
To open the Trace menu

● Press the TRACE key.
The "Trace" menu is displayed. The "Trace Configuration" dialog box is displayed.

● Chapter 4.2.8.1, "Softkeys of the Trace Menu", on page 219
Further information
● Chapter 4.2.8.4, "Trace Mode Overview", on page 231
● Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Overview", on page 233
● Chapter 4.2.8.7, "ASCII File Export Format", on page 234
Tasks
● Chapter 4.2.8.2, "Configuring Traces", on page 228
● Chapter 4.2.8.3, "Specifying the Trace Settings", on page 230
4.2.8.1 Softkeys of the Trace Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Trace" menu. It is possible that
Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6...................................................... 220
└ Clear Write.................................................................................................... 220
└ Max Hold.......................................................................................................221

└
Min Hold........................................................................................................221
└
Average.........................................................................................................221
└
View.............................................................................................................. 221
└
Blank............................................................................................................. 222
└
Hold/Cont...................................................................................................... 222
└
Detector........................................................................................................ 222
└ Auto Select......................................................................................... 222
└ Auto Peak........................................................................................... 223
└ Positive Peak...................................................................................... 223
└ Negative Peak.................................................................................... 223
└ Sample................................................................................................223
└ RMS....................................................................................................223
└ Average.............................................................................................. 224
└ Quasipeak...........................................................................................224
└ CISPR Average.................................................................................. 224
└ RMS Average..................................................................................... 224
More Traces................................................................................................................ 224
Copy Trace..................................................................................................................224
Trace Wizard...............................................................................................................224
Spectrogram................................................................................................................224
Average Mode.............................................................................................................225
└ Lin................................................................................................................. 225
└ Log................................................................................................................ 225
└ Power............................................................................................................226
ASCII Trace Export..................................................................................................... 226
Decim Sep...................................................................................................................226
Trace Math.................................................................................................................. 227
Trace Math Mode........................................................................................................ 227
└ Lin................................................................................................................. 227
└ Log................................................................................................................ 227
└ Power............................................................................................................227
Trace Math Position.................................................................................................... 228
Trace Math Off............................................................................................................ 228
Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the active trace (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) and opens the "Trace Mode" submenu for the
selected trace.
The default setting is trace 1 in the overwrite mode (see "Clear Write" on page 220),
the other traces are switched off (see "Blank" on page 222). For details see Chap-
ter 4.2.8.4, "Trace Mode Overview", on page 231.
Tip: To configure several traces in one step, press the Trace Wizard softkey to open a
trace configuration dialog. See also Chapter 4.2.8.2, "Configuring Traces",
on page 228.
Remote command:
Selected via numeric suffix of:TRACe<1...6> commands
Clear Write ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each sweep. This is the default setting.
All available detectors can be selected.

Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE WRIT, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 739
Max Hold ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed. The
R&S FSVA/FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is
greater than the previous one.
The detector is automatically set to "Positive Peak".
This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals. The signal spectrum
is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve-
lope.
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MAXH, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 739
Min Hold ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The
R&S FSVA/FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored/currently measured values
in the trace memory.
The detector is automatically set to "Negative Peak".
This mode is useful e.g. for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi-
ble. Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW
signal is recognized by its constant level.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MINH, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 739
Average ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

The average is formed over several sweeps. The Sweep Count determines the number
of averaging procedures.
All available detectors can be selected. If the detector is automatically selected, the
sample detector is used (see Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Overview", on page 233).
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE AVER, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 739
View ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.
Note: If a trace is frozen, the instrument settings, apart from level range and reference
level (see below), can be changed without impact on the displayed trace. The fact that
the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the
icon on the tab label.

If the level range or reference level is changed, the R&S FSVA/FSV automatically
adapts the measured data to the changed display range. This allows an amplitude
zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE VIEW, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 739
Blank ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Hides the selected trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC OFF, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] on page 738
Hold/Cont ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Switches the reset of the traces in Min Hold, Max Hold and Average mode after some
specific parameter changes have been made on and off. The default setting is off.
Normally, the measurement is started anew after parameter changes, before the mea-
surement results are evaluated (e.g. using a marker). In all cases that require a new
measurement after parameter changes, the trace is reset automatically to avoid false
results (e.g. with span changes). For applications that require no reset after parameter
changes, the automatic reset can be switched off.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous on page 740
Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Opens a submenu to select the detector manually, or activate automatic selection.
Note: When measuring spurious emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the
Sweep List dialog, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 348.
If a detector was selected manually, the "MAN" indicator is highlighted.
If "AUTO" is selected, the detector is defined automatically, depending on the selected
trace mode:
Trace mode Detector
Clear Write Auto Peak
Max Hold Positive Peak
Min Hold Negative Peak
Average Sample Peak
View –
Blank –
For details see Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Overview", on page 233.
Auto Select ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the best detector for the selected trace and filter mode. This is the default set-
ting.
For details see also Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Overview", on page 233.

Trace mode Detector
Clear/Write Auto Peak
Average Sample
Max Hold Max Peak
Min Hold Min Peak
Remote command:
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO on page 853
Auto Peak ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Auto Peak" detector.
Remote command:
DET APE, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 852
Positive Peak ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Positive Peak" detector.
Remote command:
DET POS, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 852
Negative Peak ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Negative Peak" detector.
Remote command:
DET NEG, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 852
Sample ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Sample" detector.
Remote command:
DET SAMP, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 852
RMS ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "RMS" detector.
Remote command:
DET RMS, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 852

Average ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Average" detector.
Remote command:
DET AVER, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 852
Quasipeak ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "Quasipeak" detector.
The quasipeak detector is available with option R&S FSV-K54.
Remote command:
DET QPE, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 852
CISPR Average ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "CISPR Average" detector.
The CISPR Average detector is available with option R&S FSV-K54.
Remote command:
DET CAV, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 852
RMS Average ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the "RMS Average" detector.
The quasipeak detector is available with option R&S FSV-K54.
Remote command:
DET CRMS, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]
on page 852
More Traces
Opens a submenu to select one of the traces not currently displayed in the main menu.
Copy Trace
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace memory in which the cur-
rently selected trace will be copied.
Remote command:
TRACe<n>:COPY on page 879
Trace Wizard
Opens the "Trace Wizard" dialog. See Chapter 4.2.8.2, "Configuring Traces",
on page 228.
Spectrogram
Opens the submenu for the spectrogram view (firmware option R&S FSV-K14).

For details on this application refer to Chapter 4.10, "Instrument Functions - Spectro-
gram Measurements", on page 521.
Average Mode
Opens a submenu to select the averaging method for the average trace mode. The fol-
lowing methods are available:
● Lin
● Log
● Power
Logarithmic averaging is recommended to display signals with a low signal to noise
ratio. While positive peak values are decreased in logarithmic averaging due to the
characteristics involved, it is also true that negative peaks are increased relative to the
average value. If the distorted amplitude distribution is averaged, a value is obtained
that is smaller than the actual average value. The difference is -2.5 dB.
This low average value is usually corrected in noise power measurements by a 2.5 dB
factor. Therefore the R&S FSVA/FSV offers the selection of linear averaging. The trace
data is converted to linear values prior to averaging, then averaged and reconverted to
logarithmic values. After these conversions the data is displayed on the screen. The
average value is always correctly displayed irrespective of the signal characteristic.
In case of stationary sinusoidal signals both logarithmic and linear averaging has the
same results.
Lin ← Average Mode

Activates linear averaging. Linear averaging means that the power level values are
converted into linear units prior to averaging. After the averaging, the data is converted
back into its original unit.
This softkey takes effect if the grid is set to a linear scale (see "Range Linear" softkey,
"Range Linear %" on page 195). In this case, the averaging is done in two ways
(depending on the set unit – see "Unit" softkey):
● The unit is set to either W or dBm: the data is converted into W prior to averaging,
i.e. averaging is done in W.
● The unit is set to either V, A, dBmV, dBµV, dBµA or dBpW: the data is converted
into V prior to averaging, i.e. averaging is done in V.
Remote command:
SENS:AVER1:TYPE LIN, see [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 773
Log ← Average Mode

Activates logarithmic averaging.
This averaging method only takes effect if the grid is set to a logarithmic scale
("Range" softkey), i.e. the unit of the data is dBm. In this case the values are averaged
in dBm. Otherwise (i.e. with linear scaling), the behavior is the same as with linear
averaging (see Lin softkey). For further information on logarithmic scaling refer to the
"Average Mode" softkey.
Remote command:
SENS:AVER1:TYPE VID, see [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 773

Power ← Average Mode

Activates linear power averaging.
The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging. After the aver-
aging, the data is converted back into its original unit.
Unlike the linear mode, the averaging is always done in W.
Remote command:
SENS:AVER1:TYPE POW, see [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 773
ASCII Trace Export

Opens the "ASCII Trace Export Name" dialog box and saves the active trace in ASCII
Tip: You can export a single trace ("ASCII Trace Export Trace (x)" softkey) or all traces
at the same time ("ASCII Trace Export All Traces"). When you use single trace export,
the R&S FSVA/FSV exports the currently selected trace (indicated by the softkey
label). Note that the exported ASCII file has a slightly different structure compared to a
single trace export.
tion containing the trace data. For details on an ASCII file see Chapter 4.2.8.7, "ASCII
File Export Format", on page 234.
If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histo-
gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data corresponding to a particular
frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was
recorded. For large history buffers the export operation may take some time.
For details see Chapter 4.10.4, "ASCII File Export Format for Spectrograms",
on page 531.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes on page 748
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 763
MMEMory:STORe:SGRam on page 762
Decim Sep
Remote command:

Trace Math
Opens the "Trace Mathematics" dialog box to define which trace is subtracted from
trace 1. The result is displayed in trace 1 and refers to the zero point defined with the
Trace Math Position softkey. The following subtractions can be performed:
"T1"->"T1"-"T2" Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1.
"T1"->"T1"-"T3" Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1
To switch off the trace math, use the Trace Math Off softkey.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine] on page 719
CALCulate<n>:MATH:STATe on page 720
Trace Math Mode

Opens a submenu to select the mode for the trace math calculations.
Lin ← Trace Math Mode

Activates linear subtraction, which means that the power level values are converted
into linear units prior to subtraction. After the subtraction, the data is converted back
into its original unit.
This softkey takes effect if the grid is set to a linear scale (see Range softkey). In this
case, subtraction is done in two ways (depending on the set unit – see Unit softkey):
● The unit is set to either W or dBm: the data is converted into W prior to subtraction,
i.e. averaging is done in W.
● The unit is set to either V, A, dBmV, dBµV, dBµA or dBpW: the data is converted
into V prior to subtraction, i.e. subtraction is done in V.
Remote command:
CALC:MATH:MODE LIN, see CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE on page 720
Log ← Trace Math Mode

Activates logarithmic subtraction.
This subtraction method only takes effect if the grid is set to a logarithmic scale (see
Range softkey), i.e. the unit of the data is dBm. In this case the values are subtracted
in dBm. Otherwise (i.e. with linear scaling) the behavior is the same as with linear sub-
traction (see Lin softkey). For further information on logarithmic scaling refer to the
Average Mode softkey.
Remote command:
CALC:MATH:MODE LOG, see CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE on page 720
Power ← Trace Math Mode

Activates linear power subtraction.
The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to subtraction. After the sub-
traction, the data is converted back into its original unit.

Unlike the linear mode, the subtraction is always done in W.

Remote command:
CALC:MATH:MODE POW, see CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE on page 720
Trace Math Position

Opens an edit dialog box to define the zero point in % of the diagram height. The range
of values extends from -100 % to +200 %.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MATH:POSition on page 720
Trace Math Off

Deactivates any previously selected trace math functions.
Remote command:
CALC:MATH:STAT OFF, see CALCulate<n>:MATH:STATe on page 720
4.2.8.2 Configuring Traces
1. To open the trace wizard, press the TRACE key and then the "Trace Wizard" soft-
key (see "Trace Wizard" on page 224).
Tip: Context-sensitive menus for traces. Traces have context-sensitive menus. If
you right-click on a trace in the display or a trace setting in the information channel
bar (or touch it for about 1 second), a menu is displayed which corresponds to the
softkey functions available for traces. This is useful, for example, when the softkey
display is hidden.
If a menu entry contains an arrow to the right of it, a submenu is available for that
entry.
To close the menu, press the ESC key or click in the display outside of the menu.

2. For each trace you can define the following settings:
Display Mode ● Clear Write

● Max Hold
● Min Hold
● Average
● View
● Blank
For details see Chapter 4.2.8.4, "Trace Mode Overview",
on page 231.
Detector Auto Select Activates automatic detector selection (see Auto Select softkey). If
activated, the "Trace Detector" setting is ignored.
Trace Detector Defines a specific trace detector. If one of the following settings is
defined, the "Detector Auto Select" option is deactivated.
● "Auto Select" on page 222
● "Auto Peak" on page 223
● "Positive Peak" on page 223
● "Negative Peak" on page 223
● "Sample" on page 223
● "RMS" on page 223
● "Average" on page 224
● "Quasipeak" on page 224
3. To configure several traces to predefined display modes in one step, press the but-
ton for the required function:

Preset All Traces Trace 1: Clear Write

Trace 2-6: Blank
Select Max | Avg | Min Trace 1: Max Hold

Trace 2: Average
Trace 3: Min Hold
Trace 4-6: Blank
Select Max | ClrWrite | Min Trace 1: Max Hold

Trace 2: Clear Write
Trace 3: Min Hold
Trace 4-6: Blank
For details see Chapter 4.2.8.4, "Trace Mode Overview", on page 231.
4.2.8.3 Specifying the Trace Settings
1. To configure one or more traces, see Chapter 4.2.8.2, "Configuring Traces",

on page 228.
2. To select the trace mode for the selected trace, press the softkey for the corre-
sponding trace (for details see Chapter 4.2.8.4, "Trace Mode Overview",
on page 231).
3. To select a detector, press the Auto Select softkey for automatic detector selection,
or press the Detector softkey (for details see Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Overview",
on page 233).
4. To change the sweep count setting, which also determines trace averaging, press
the Sweep Count softkey.
5. To deactivate the reset of the traces in "Min Hold" and "Max Hold" mode after
some specific parameter changes, press the Trace Math softkey.
6. To copy a trace into another trace memory, press the Copy Trace softkey.
Upon copying, the contents of the selected memory are overwritten and the new
contents are displayed in the View mode.
7. To export the active trace in ASCII format:

a) Press the "More" softkey.
b) If necessary, press the Decim Sep softkey to change the decimal separator
with floating-point numerals.
c) Press the ASCII File Export softkey to enter the ASCII file export name.
The active trace is saved in ASCII format on the harddisk on or an external
storage device.

4.2.8.4 Trace Mode Overview
The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after completion
of a measurement. Traces that are not activate are hidden. Each time the trace mode
is changed, the selected trace memory is cleared.
The R&S FSVA/FSV offers 6 different trace modes:
Clear Write
Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each sweep. This is the default setting.
All available detectors can be selected.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE WRIT, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 739
Max Hold
The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed. The
R&S FSVA/FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is
greater than the previous one.
The detector is automatically set to "Positive Peak".
This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals. The signal spectrum
is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve-
lope.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MAXH, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 739
Min Hold
The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The
R&S FSVA/FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored/currently measured values
The detector is automatically set to "Negative Peak".
This mode is useful e.g. for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi-
ble. Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW
signal is recognized by its constant level.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MINH, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 739
Average
The average is formed over several sweeps. The Sweep Count determines the number
of averaging procedures.
All available detectors can be selected. If the detector is automatically selected, the
sample detector is used (see Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Overview", on page 233).


Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE AVER, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 739
View
The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.
Note: If a trace is frozen, the instrument settings, apart from level range and reference
level (see below), can be changed without impact on the displayed trace. The fact that
the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the
icon on the tab label.
If the level range or reference level is changed, the R&S FSVA/FSV automatically
adapts the measured data to the changed display range. This allows an amplitude
zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE VIEW, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
on page 739
Blank
Hides the selected trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC OFF, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] on page 738
4.2.8.5 Description of the Averaging Method
Averaging is carried out over the measurement points derived from the measurement
samples. Several measured values may be combined in a measurement point. This
means that with linear level display the average is formed over linear amplitude values.
The sweep mode (continuous or single sweep, for details see Chapter 4.2.7, "Configur-
ing the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key", on page 213) and running averaging apply to the
average display analogously. In principle, two methods for calculating the average are
used: continuous averaging and averaging over the selected number of sweeps.
● sweep count > 1
Depending on the relation of the following two parameters, two different situations
exist:
n = number of sweeps performed since measurement start
c = sweep count (number of sweeps forming one statistics cycle)
– n≤c
In single sweep or continuous sweep mode during the first statistics cycle,
averaging over the selected number of sweeps is performed. The average
trace "n" is calculated at each measurement point according to:
Figure 4-2: Equation 1

with Avg = average trace; Curr = current trace

Until the first statistics cycle is completed (n < c), a preliminary average is dis-
played which represents the arithmetic mean value over all measured sweeps.
With n increasing, the displayed trace is increasingly smoothed since there are
more single sweeps for averaging.
When the first statistics cycle is completed (n = c), the average trace is saved
– n>c
In continuous sweep mode after the first statistics cycle, continuous averaging
is performed. The average trace "n" is calculated at each measurement point
according to:

In single sweep mode, the same formula is valid if the Continue Single Sweep
softkey is pressed.
● sweep count = 0
In continuous sweep mode, a continuous average is calculated according to Fig-
ure 4-3 with c = 10:

Due to the weighting between the current trace and the average trace, past values
have practically no influence on the displayed trace after about ten sweeps. With
this setting, signal noise is effectively reduced without need for restarting the aver-
aging process after a change of the signal.
● sweep count = 1
The current trace is displayed. No averaging is performed. This is a special case of
Figure 4-2 with n = 0.
4.2.8.6 Detector Overview
The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by
the user or set automatically by the R&S FSVA/FSV. The detector activated for the
specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace display field by an abbreviation.
The detectors of the R&S FSVA/FSV are implemented as pure digital devices. They
collect signal power data within each measured point during a sweep. The default
number of sweep points is 691. The following detectors are available:

Table 4-4: Detector types
Detector Indicator Function
Auto Peak Ap Determines the maximum and the minimum value

within a measurement point (not available for SEM)
Positive Peak Pk Determines the maximum value within a measure-

ment point
Negative Peak (min peak) Mi Determines the minimum value within a measure-
ment point
RMS Rm Determines the root mean square power within a

measurement point
Average Av Determines the linear average power within a mea-

surement point
Sample Sa Selects the last value within a measurement point
The result obtained from the selected detector within a measurement point is displayed
as the power value at this measurement point.
All detectors work in parallel in the background, which means that the measurement
speed is independent of the detector combination used for different traces.
Number of measured values

During a frequency sweep, the R&S FSVA/FSV increments the first local oscillator in
steps that are smaller than approximately 1/10 of the bandwidth. This ensures that the
oscillator step speed is conform to the hardware settling times and does not affect the
precision of the measured power.
The number of measured values taken during a sweep is independent of the number of
oscillator steps. It is always selected as a multiple or a fraction of 691 (= default num-
ber of trace points displayed on the screen). Choosing less then 691 measured values
(e.g. 125 or 251) will lead to an interpolated measurement curve, choosing more than
691 points (e.g. 1001, 2001 …) will result in several measured values being overlaid at
the same frequency position.
RMS detector and VBW

If the RMS detector is selected, the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed.
Thus, duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs.
However, the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time. This leads to a
longer sweep time for small VBW values. Thus, you can reduce the VBW value to ach-
ieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector. Normally, if the RMS
detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves.
4.2.8.7 ASCII File Export Format
The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a semicolon:
parameter name; numeric value; basic unit. The data section starts with the keyword
"Trace <n>" (<n> = number of stored trace), followed by the measured data in one or

several columns (depending on measurement) which are also separated by a semico-

lon.
Exporting a single trace vs exporting all traces

Note that the file containing the trace data has a slightly different structure when you
export all traces compared to exporting a single trace only. The differences are indica-
ted in the tables below.
Blue font: Information provided when you export a single trace

Green font: Information provided when you export all traces
Black font: Information provided regardless of the export mode
Header
Type; <instrument_model>; Instrument model
Version;1.00; Firmware version
Date;01. Jan 3000; Date of data set storage
Mode;Receiver; Application
Start;150000.000000;Hz Start frequency of the scan
Stop;100000000.000000;Hz; Stop frequency of the scan
X-Axis;LIN; Scale of the x-axis
Detector;Average; Detector type
X-Unit;Hz; Unit of the x-axis
Y-Unit;dBµV; Unit of the y-axis
Scan Count;1; Scan count
Transducer;;;;;;;; Transducer information
Data section (scan ranges)

Scan 1:
Start;150000.000000;Hz; Start frequency of the scan range
Stop;29998500.000000;Hz; Stop frequency of the scan range
Step;4500.000000;Hz; Frequency stepsize applied in the scan range
RBW;9000.000000;Hz; Measurement bandwidth applied in the scan range
Meas Time;0.001000;s; Measurement time in the scan range
Auto Ranging;OFF; State of the auto ranging feature
RF Att;10.000000;dB; Attenuation applied in the scan range
Auto Preamp;OFF;
Preamplifier information for the scan range
Preamp;0.000000;dB;
RF Input;1; RF input used in the scan range

Scan 2:
(…)

Data section (traces)

Trace 1:
Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; Trace mode
Detector;MAX PEAK; Detector type
Y-Unit;Hz; Unit of the y-axis
Values;1343; Number of measurement points
150000.000000;3.541122;
String of results
154500.000000;5.776306;[...]
Trace 2:
(…)
Blue font: Information provided when you export a single trace

Green font: Information provided when you export all traces
Black font: Information provided regardless of the export mode
Header
Type; <instrument_model>; Instrument model
Date;01. Jan 3000; Date of data set storage
Mode;Analyzer; Application
Center Freq;100000000.000000; Center frequency
Freq Offset;0.000000;Hz; Frequency offset
Span;10000000000.000000;Hz; Frequency span
X-Axis;LIN; Scale of the x-axis
Start;150000.000000:Hz; Start frequency
Stop;2500000.000000;Hz; Stop frequency
Ref Level;97.000000;dBµV; Reference level
Level Offset;0.000000;Hz; Reference level offset
Ref Position;100.000000;%; Reference position
Y-Axis;LOG; Scale of the y-axis
Level Range;100.000000;dB; Range of the y-axis
Rf Att;10.000000;dB; RF attenuation
RBW;3000000.000000;Hz; Resolution bandwidth
VBW;300000.000000;Hz; Video bandwidth
SWT;0.002000;s; Sweep time
Trace mode;CLR/WRITE; Trace mode
Detector;AUTOPEAK; Detector type
Preamplifier;OFF; State of the preamplifier
Transducer;OFF; Transducer information
Sweep Count;0; Sweep / average count

Data section (traces)

Trace 1:
Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; Trace mode
Detector;MAX PEAK; Detector type
Preamplifier;OFF; State of the preamplifier
Transducer;OFF; Transducer information
Values;691; Number of measurement points
150000.000000;3.541122;
String of results
154500.000000;5.776306;[...]
Trace 2:
(…)
4.2.9 Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key
The TRIG key is used to select trigger mode, trigger threshold, trigger delay, trigger
polarity and for gated sweep the gate configuration.
To open the Trigger menu

● Press the TRIG key.
The "Trigger" menu is displayed.

● Chapter 4.2.9.1, "Softkeys of the Trigger Menu", on page 237
Tasks
● Chapter 4.2.9.2, "Specifying the Trigger Settings", on page 245
● Chapter 4.2.9.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 245
4.2.9.1 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Trigger" menu. It is possible
Trg/Gate Source..........................................................................................................238
└ Free Run....................................................................................................... 238
└ External.........................................................................................................238
└ Video.............................................................................................................239
└ RF Power...................................................................................................... 239
└ IF Power/BB Power.......................................................................................239
└ Power Sensor............................................................................................... 240
└ Time.............................................................................................................. 241

└ Digital IQ....................................................................................................... 241

Trg/Gate Level............................................................................................................ 241
Trg/Gate Polarity......................................................................................................... 242
Trigger Offset.............................................................................................................. 242
Repetition Interval....................................................................................................... 242
Trigger Hysteresis....................................................................................................... 243
Trigger Holdoff............................................................................................................ 243
Gated Trigger.............................................................................................................. 243
Gate Settings.............................................................................................................. 243
└ Gate Mode (Lvl/Edge)...................................................................................244
└ Gate Delay.................................................................................................... 244
└ Gate Length (Gate Mode Edge)....................................................................244
└ Trg/Gate Source........................................................................................... 244
└ Trg/Gate Level.............................................................................................. 244
└ Trg/Gate Polarity...........................................................................................244
└ Sweep Time.................................................................................................. 245
└ Res BW Manual............................................................................................ 245
Trg/Gate Source
Opens the "Trigger/Gate Source" dialog box to select the trigger/gate mode.
As gate modes, all modes except "Power Sensor" are available. For details see also
Chapter 4.2.9.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 245.
The default setting is "Free Run". If a trigger mode other than "Free Run" has been set,
the enhancement label "TRG" is displayed and the trigger source is indicated.
Note: When triggering or gating is activated, the squelch funciton is automatically dis-
abled (see "Squelch" on page 261).
IF power and RF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth exten-
sion option R&S FSV-B160.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 847
Free Run ← Trg/Gate Source

The start of a sweep is not triggered. Once a measurement is completed, another is
started immediately.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IMM, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
External ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the "EXT TRIG/GATE IN" input connector on the
rear panel.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR EXT, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 847

Video ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering by the displayed voltage.
A horizontal trigger line is shown in the diagram. It is used to set the trigger threshold
from 0 % to 100 % of the diagram height.
Video mode is only available in the time domain.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR VID, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
SWE:EGAT:SOUR VID for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 847
RF Power ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the measurement
channel.
This trigger mode is available with detector board 1307.9554.02 Rev 05.00 or higher. It
is not available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S FSVA/FSV-
B17). If RF Power trigger mode is selected and digital baseband input is activated, the
trigger mode is automatically switched to "Free Run".
RF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth extension option
R&S FSV-B160.
In RF Power trigger mode the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate
frequency. The detector threshold can be selected in a range between - 50 dBm and
-10 dBm at the input mixer. The resulting trigger level at the RF input lies within the
following range:
(-24dBm + RF Att ) ≤ Triggerlevel ≤ (+5dBm + RF Att), max. 30 dBm, for Preamp =
OFF
(-40dBm + RF Att ) ≤ Triggerlevel ≤ (-11dBm + RF Att), max. 30 dBm, for Preamp =
ON
with
500 MHz ≤ InputSignal ≤ 7 GHz
Note: If input values outside of this range occur (e.g. for fullspan measurements), the
sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input values is displayed
in the status bar.
A Trigger Offset, Trg/Gate Polarity and Trigger Holdoff can be defined for the RF trig-
ger to improve the trigger stability, but no hysteresis.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR RFP, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
SWE:EGAT:SOUR RFP for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 847
IF Power/BB Power ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering of the measurement using the second intermediate frequency.
For this purpose, the R&S FSVA/FSV uses a level detector at the second intermediate
frequency.
The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification. A refer-
ence level offset, if defined, is also considered.

For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet.
The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type:
Sweep mode:
● RBW > 500 kHz: 40 MHz, nominal
● RBW ≤ 500 kHz: 6 MHz, nominal
FFT mode:
Note: Be aware that in auto sweep type mode, due to a possible change in sweep
types, the bandwidth may vary considerably for the same RBW setting.
The R&S FSVA/FSV is triggered as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the
selected frequency (= start frequency in the frequency sweep).
Thus, the measurement of spurious emissions, e.g. for pulsed carriers, is possible
even if the carrier lies outside the selected frequency span.
For digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17), the baseband power
("BB Power") is used as the trigger source.
IF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth extension option
R&S FSV-B160.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IFP, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
TRIG:SOUR BBP for digital input
SWE:EGAT:SOUR IFP for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 847
Power Sensor ← Trg/Gate Source

Uses an external power sensor as a trigger function. This option is only available if the
R&S FSV-K9 Power Sensor option is installed and a power sensor is connected and
configured.
(See Chapter 4.9, "Instrument Functions - Power Sensor (R&S FSV-K9)",
on page 508.)
Power sensors are configured in the "Input/Output" menu, see Chapter 4.9.3, "Config-
uring an External Power Trigger", on page 513.
If a power sensor is selected as the trigger mode, the following softkeys are not availa-
ble; these settings are configured in the "Power Sensor Configuration" dialog box (see
Chapter 4.9.5, "Power Sensor Configuration Dialog", on page 517).
● Trg/Gate Level
● Trg/Gate Polarity
● Trigger Hysteresis
● Trigger Holdoff
Note: For R&S power sensors, the "Gate Mode" Lvl is not supported. The signal sent
by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded, rather than a
time period. However, only time periods can be used for gating in level mode. Thus,
the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement;
the measurement cannot be completed.

Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR PSE, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
SWE:EGAT:SOUR PSE for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 847
TRACe<n>:IQ:SET on page 893
Time ← Trg/Gate Source

Opens an edit dialog box to define a repetition interval in which the measurement is
triggered. The shortest interval is 2 ms.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR TIMETRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
Digital IQ ← Trg/Gate Source

For I/Q Analyzer or AnalogDemod mode only:
Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector. In the sub-
menu you must specify which general purpose bit (GP0 to GP5) will provide the trigger
data.
This trigger mode is available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option
R&S FSV-B17) only.
A Trigger Offset, and Trg/Gate Polarity can be defined for the Digital IQ trigger to
improve the trigger stability, but no hysteresis or holdoff value.
The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS
connector pins.
(See Table 4-20)
Table 4-5: Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins
Bit LVDS pin
GP0 SDATA4_P - Trigger1
GP2 SDATA0_P - Reserve1
GP4 SDATA0_P - Marker1
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR GP0, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
on page 847
Trg/Gate Level
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the trigger/gate level.
For details see also Chapter 4.2.9.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 245.
In the trigger modes "Time" and "Power Sensor", this softkey is not available.

Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower on page 900
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo on page 900
Trg/Gate Polarity
Sets the polarity of the trigger/gate source.
The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal. The default set-
ting is "Pos". The setting applies to all trigger modes with the exception of the "Free
Run", "Power Sensor" and "Time" mode.
For details also see Chapter 4.2.9.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 245.
"Pos" Level triggering: the sweep is stopped by the logic "0" signal and
restarted by the logical "1" signal after the gate delay time has
elapsed.
"Neg" Edge triggering: the sweep is continued on a "0" to "1" transition for
the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe on page 901
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity on page 847
Trigger Offset
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the
start of the sweep.
offset > 0: Start of the sweep is delayed
offset < 0: Sweep starts earlier (pre-trigger)

Only possible for span = 0 (e.g. I/Q Analyzer mode) and gated trigger
switched off
Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time:
pretriggermax = sweep time
When using the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17) with I/Q Ana-
lyzer mode, the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger
samples.
See Table 4-14.
In the "External" or "IF Power" trigger mode, a common input signal is used for both
trigger and gate. Therefore, changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay (trig-
ger offset) as well.
Tip: To determine the trigger point in the sample (for "External" or "IF Power" trigger
mode), use the TRACe<n>:IQ:TPISample? command.
In the "Time" trigger mode, this softkey is not available.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] on page 898
Repetition Interval
triggered. The shortest interval is 2 ms. This softkey is only available if the trigger
source "Time" is selected (see "Time" on page 241).

Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval on page 903
Trigger Hysteresis
Defines the value for the trigger hysteresis for "IF power" or "RF Power" trigger sour-
ces. The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the power trig-
ger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement. The range of the value is
between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis on page 899
Trigger Holdoff
Defines the value for the trigger holdoff. The holdoff value in s is the time which must
pass before triggering, in case another trigger event happens.
This softkey is only available if "IFPower", "RF Power" or "BBPower" is the selected
trigger source.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff on page 898
For digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface, R&S FSV-B17:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:BBPower:HOLDoff on page 898
Gated Trigger
Switches the sweep mode with gate on or off.
This softkey requires the following "Trigger Mode" (see "Trg/Gate Source"
on page 238):
span > 0 External or IF Power/BB PowerIF Power
span = 0 External or IF Power/BB PowerIF Power or Video
If a different mode is active, the IF Power/BB Power trigger mode is automatically

selected.
Note: When triggering or gating is activated, the squelch function is automatically dis-
If the gate is switched on, a gate signal applied to the rear panel connector "EXT TRIG-
GER/GATE" or the internal IF power detector controls the sweep of the analyzer.
In the trigger mode Time, this softkey is not available.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe on page 846
Gate Settings
Opens a submenu to make all the settings required for gated sweep operation.

Gate Mode (Lvl/Edge) ← Gate Settings

Sets the gate mode. As settings level-triggered or edge-triggered gate mode can be
selected.
"Edge" Edge-triggered gate mode
"Lvl" Level-triggered gate mode
This mode is not supported when using R&S Power Sensors as
power triggers ("Trg/Gate Source" = Power Sensor or External).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE on page 849
Gate Delay ← Gate Settings

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the gate delay time between the gate signal and the
continuation of the sweep. The delay position on the time axis in relation to the sweep
is indicated by a line labeled "GD".
This is useful for e.g. taking into account a delay between the gate signal and the stabi-
lization of an RF carrier.
As a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate when selecting the "Exter-
nal" or "IF Power" trigger mode, changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay
(trigger offset) as well.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff on page 846
Gate Length (Gate Mode Edge) ← Gate Settings

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the gate length. The gate length in relation to the
sweep is indicated by a line labeled "GL".
The length of the gate signal defines if the sweep is to be interrupted. Only in the edge-
triggered mode the gate length can be set, while in the level-triggered the gate length
depends on the length of the gate signal.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth on page 847
Trg/Gate Source ← Gate Settings

See "Trg/Gate Source" on page 238.
Trg/Gate Level ← Gate Settings

See "Trg/Gate Level" on page 241.
Trg/Gate Polarity ← Gate Settings

See "Trg/Gate Polarity" on page 242.

Sweep Time ← Gate Settings

Opens an edit dialog box to change the sweep time in order to obtain a higher resolu-
tion for positioning gate delay and gate length. When leaving the "Gate Settings" sub-
menu, the original sweep time is retrieved.
Res BW Manual ← Gate Settings

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth. The available
resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet.
For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to
Chapter 4.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 211.
UP/DNARROW key inputs, the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down-
wards.
The manual input mode of the resolution bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next
to the "RBW" display in the channel bar.
Remote command:
4.2.9.2 Specifying the Trigger Settings
1. Press the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey to select the trigger mode (for details see
"Trg/Gate Source" on page 238.
2. Press the Trg/Gate Level softkey to set the trigger level.
3. Press the Trigger Offset softkey to set the trigger offset. In addition, a Trigger Hys-
teresis and Trigger Holdoff can be defined via the corresponding softkeys.
For details on gated sweep operation, see Chapter 4.2.9.3, "Using Gated Sweep Oper-
ation", on page 245.
4.2.9.3 Using Gated Sweep Operation
By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is
inactive, the spectrum for pulsed RF carriers can be displayed without the superposi-
tion of frequency components generated during switching. Similarly, the spectrum can
also be examined for an inactive carrier. The sweep can be controlled by an external
gate or by the internal power trigger.
Gated sweep operation is also possible for span = 0. This enables – e.g. in burst sig-
nals – level variations of individual slots to be displayed versus time.
1. Press the Gate Settings softkey to define the settings of the gate mode.

At the center frequency a transition to zero span is made and the time parameters
gate delay and gate length are displayed as vertical lines to adjust them easily.
When quitting the Gate Settings submenu, the original span is retrieved so the
desired measurement can be performed with the accurately set gate.
2. Setting the parameters gate delay and gate length highly accurate, press the
Sweep Time softkey to alter the x-axis in a way that the signal range concerned
(e.g. one full burst) is displayed.
3. Press the Gate Delay softkey to set the sampling time in a way that the desired
portion of the signal is shown.
4. Press the Gate Mode (Lvl/Edge) softkey to set the gate mode.
5. If the "Edge" gate mode has been selected, press the Gate Length (Gate Mode
Edge) softkey to set the sampling duration in a way that the desired portion of the
signal is shown.
6. Press the Trg/Gate Polarity softkey to set the polarity of the trigger source.
7. Press the Gated Trigger softkey to activate the gated sweep mode.
To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep, the enhancement label "GAT" is dis-
played on the screen. This label appears to the right of the window for which the
gate is configured.

Figure 4-5: TDMA signal with GATE OFF
Figure 4-6: Timing diagram for GATE, GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH

Measurement Functions
Figure 4-7: TDMA signal with GATE ON
4.3 Measurement Functions

In this section all menus necessary for setting measurement functions are described.
This includes the following topics and keys:
● Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key..................................................... 249
● Performing Peak Searches with Markers – PEAK SEARCH Key......................... 256
● Performing Marker Functions – MKR FUNC Key..................................................256
● Changing Settings via Markers – MKR-> Key.......................................................270
● Power Measurements – MEAS Key......................................................................280
● Measurement Configuration – MEAS CONFIG Key............................................. 385
● Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key................................................385
● Input/Output Configuration – INPUT/OUTPUT Key.............................................. 397
● Performing Measurements – RUN SINGLE/RUN CONT Keys.............................405

4.3.1 Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key
The markers are used for marking points on traces, reading out measurement results
and for selecting a display section quickly. The R&S FSVA/FSV provides 16 markers
per trace.
Figure 4-8: Marker types
All markers can be used either as markers or delta markers. The marker that can be
moved by the user is defined in the following as the active marker. Temporary markers
are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to evaluate the measurement
results. They disappear when the associated function is deactivated.
The measurement results of the active marker (also called marker values) are dis-
played in the marker field, which is located at the upper right corner of the diagram, or
in a separate table beneath the diagram. The marker information includes the follow-
ing:
● marker type (M1 in the example)
● trace in square brackets ([1] in the example)
● level (-33.09 dBm in the example)
● marker location (3 GHz in the example)
Figure 4-9: Marker values
The MKR key is used to select and position the absolute and relative measurement
markers (markers and delta markers). In addition, the functions for the frequency coun-
ter, a fixed reference point for relative measurement markers, and for enlargement of
the measurement area are assigned to this key.
To open the Marker menu

● Press the MKR key.
The "Marker" menu is displayed. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated and a
peak search on the trace is carried out. Otherwise, the edit dialog box for the last
activated marker is opened and the current frequency/time value is displayed.
Further information
● Chapter 4.3.1.3, "Displayed Marker Information", on page 255
● Chapter 4.3.4, "Changing Settings via Markers – MKR-> Key", on page 270.


● Chapter 4.3.1.1, "Softkeys of the Marker Menu", on page 250
Tasks
● Chapter 4.3.1.2, "Basic Marker Functions", on page 253
4.3.1.1 Softkeys of the Marker Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Marker" menu. It is possible that
Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta.......................... 250
More Markers.............................................................................................................. 251
Marker to Trace...........................................................................................................251
Marker Wizard.............................................................................................................251
└ All Marker Off................................................................................................ 252
All Marker Off.............................................................................................................. 252
Marker Table............................................................................................................... 252
Marker Stepsize.......................................................................................................... 252
└ Stepsize Standard.........................................................................................252
└ Stepsize Sweep Points................................................................................. 253
Marker Zoom (span > 0)..............................................................................................253
Link Mkr1 and Delta1.................................................................................................. 253
Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta

The "Marker X" softkey activates the corresponding marker and opens an edit dialog
box to enter a value for the marker to be set to. Pressing the softkey again deactivates
the selected marker.
If a marker value is changed using the rotary knob, the step size is defined via the
Stepsize Standard or Stepsize Sweep Points softkeys.
Marker 1 is always the reference marker for relative measurements. If activated, mark-
ers 2 to 16 are delta markers that refer to marker 1. These markers can be converted
into markers with absolute value display using the "Marker Norm/Delta" softkey. If
marker 1 is the active marker, pressing the "Marker Norm/Delta" softkey switches on
an additional delta marker.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 656
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 665
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? on page 668
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 607
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 617
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 618
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y? on page 618

More Markers
Opens a sub-menu to select one of up to 16 available markers. See "Marker 1 / Marker
2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 250.
Marker to Trace
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace on which the marker is to be
placed.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 665
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe on page 617
Marker Wizard
Opens a configuration dialog for markers. The marker wizard allows you to configure
and activate up to 16 different markers in one dialog. The first 8 markers are displayed
on one tab, the last 8 markers on a second tab. For each marker, the following settings
are available:
"Selected/ When you press the "Selected" or "State" field the corresponding
State" marker is activated and the marker row is highlighted.
"Normal/Delta" Defines whether it is a normal marker or delta marker. For delta
markers you can define a reference marker.
"Ref. Marker" Reference marker for delta markers. The marker values for the delta
marker are indicated relative to the specified reference marker.
The reference marker can either be another active marker, or a fixed
reference marker ("FXD", see "Ref Fixed" on page 260).
"Trace" Trace for which the marker is to be set.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREF on page 617
All Marker Off ← Marker Wizard

Switches all markers off. It also switches off all functions and displays that are associ-
ated with the markers/delta markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF on page 656
All Marker Off

Switches all markers off. It also switches off all functions and displays that are associ-
ated with the markers/delta markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF on page 656
Marker Table
Defines how the marker information is displayed.
For more information, see Displayed Marker Information.
"On" Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath
the diagram.
"Off" Displays the marker information within the diagram area.
"Aut" (Default) The marker table is displayed automatically if more than 2
markers are active, and removed if only 1 or 2 markers are active.
This helps keep the information in the display clear.
Remote command:
DISPlay:MTABle on page 737
Marker Stepsize
Opens a submenu to set the step size of all markers and delta markers.
Default value for the marker step size is Stepsize Sweep Points.
Stepsize Standard ← Marker Stepsize

Moves the marker or delta marker from one measurement point to the next, if the
marker or delta marker value is changed via the rotary knob ( "Marker 1 / Marker 2 /
Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" softkeys, see "Marker 1 / Marker 2 /
Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 250). If more measured values
than measurement points exist, it is not possible to read out all measured values. In
this case, use the Stepsize Sweep Points softkey.
Remote command:
CALC:MARK:X:SSIZ STAN (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe
on page 668)

Stepsize Sweep Points ← Marker Stepsize

Moves the marker or delta marker from one measured value to the next, if the marker
or delta marker value is changed via the rotary knob ( "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 /
… Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" softkeys, see "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / …
Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 250). If more measured values than mea-
surement points exist, every single measured value is accessible and its value is dis-
played in the marker field.
The number of measured values is defined in the ""Sweep"" menu via the Sweep
Points softkey.
This functionality is available for all base unit measurements with the exception of sta-
tistics ( "APD" and "CCDF" softkeys in the "Measurement" menu).
Remote command:
CALC:MARK:X:SSIZ POIN (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe
on page 668)
Marker Zoom (span > 0)

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a display range for the zoom. The area around
marker 1 is expanded accordingly and more details of the result can be seen. If no
marker is activated, marker 1 is switched on and set on the largest signal.
The following sweep is stopped at the position of the reference marker. The frequency
of the signal is counted and the measured frequency becomes the new center fre-
quency. The zoomed display range is then configured and the new settings are used
by the R&S FSVA/FSV for further measurements.
If the display has not yet been switched to the new frequency display range and you
press the softkey, the procedure is aborted. If an instrument setting is changed during
this operation, the procedure is also aborted.
This function is not available in I/Q Analyzer mode.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:ZOOM on page 686
Link Mkr1 and Delta1

The delta marker 1 is linked to marker 1, so if the x-axis value of the marker 1 is
changed, the delta marker 1 will follow on the same x-position. The link is off by
default.
You can set the two markers on different traces to measure the difference (e.g.
between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a ref-
erence trace).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK on page 612
4.3.1.2 Basic Marker Functions
● To open the "Marker" menu, press the MKR key.

Marker 1 is activated and positioned on the maximum value of the trace as a nor-
mal marker. If several traces are displayed, the marker is set to the maximum value
(peak) of the trace which has the lowest number (1 to 3) and is not frozen (View

mode). In case a marker is already located there, the new marker is set to the fre-
quency of the next lowest level (next peak).
● To change marker settings quickly, right-click on the marker in the display (or touch
it for about 1 second). A context-sensitive menu is displayed which corresponds to
the softkey functions available for markers.
● To configure and activate several markers at once, select the "Marker Wizard" to
open a configuration dialog for all markers.
● To change to another trace, press the "Marker to Trace" softkey ("Marker to Trace"
on page 251) and enter the number of the trace on which the marker is to be
placed.
The marker changes to the selected trace, but remains on the previous frequency
or time. If a trace is turned off, the corresponding markers and marker functions are
also deactivated.
● To switch to another marker, click on the marker label in the diagram. Alternatively,
select the corresponding softkey. If necessary, select the More Markers softkey
first to open a submenu that contains all marker numbers.
● To move the marker to a different position, click the marker label in the diagram
and then drag it to the new position. When a marker label is selected, a vertical line
is displayed which indicates the marker's current x-value.
● To switch on a delta marker, select the softkey for the corresponding marker, then
press the "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta"
("Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 250)
until "Delta" is highlighted.
The selected marker is switched on as a delta marker. The frequency and level of
the marker are displayed in relation to marker 1 in the marker field.

● To change the marker type of a marker, select the softkey for the corresponding
marker, then press the "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" softkey ("Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" on page 250).
For a normal marker, the frequency and level are displayed as absolute values in
the marker field. For a delta marker, the frequency and level of the marker are dis-
played in relation to marker 1 in the marker field.
● To switch off a marker, press the corresponding softkey again.
The marker is deactivated. Marker 1 becomes the active marker for entry. The fre-
quency and level of marker 1 are displayed in the marker field.
● To switch off all markers, press the All Marker Off softkey.
● To change the stepsize between one measured value and the next when the
marker or delta marker value is changed via the rotary knob, press either the
Stepsize Standard softkey or the Stepsize Sweep Points softkey.
● To zoom into the display around a marker, press the "Marker Zoom (span > 0)"
on page 253 softkey and enter a span.
● To link the delta marker1 to marker1, so if the x-axis value of the marker 1 is
changed, the delta marker 1 follows on the same x-position, press the Link Mkr1
and Delta1 softkey.
4.3.1.3 Displayed Marker Information
The following additional information is displayed within the diagram grid or in a marker
table beneath the diagram. The marker table is displayed automatically if more than 2
markers are active. You can hide or show the table using the Marker Table softkey.
Marker information in Diagram Grid

The x and y axis positions of the last 2 markers or delta markers that were set, as well
as their index, are displayed within the diagram grid, if available. The value in the
square brackets after the index indicates the trace to which the marker is assigned.
(Example: M1[1) defines marker 1 on trace 1.) For more than 2 markers, a separate
marker table is displayed beneath the diagram.
If applicable, the active measurement function for the marker and its main results are
indicated, as well. The functions are indicated with the following abbreviations:
FXD Reference fixed marker active
PHNoise Phase noise measurement active
CNT Frequency counter active
TRK Signal track active
NOIse Noise measurement active
MDepth Measurement of the AM modulation depth active
TOI TOI measurement active
Occ BW Occupied bandwidth

Marker Information in Marker Table

In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram grid, a separate
marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram. This table provides the following
information for all active markers:
As of firmware version 1.50, the marker table also provides information from connected
power sensors (requires option R&S FSV-K9).
See also Chapter 4.9, "Instrument Functions - Power Sensor (R&S FSV-K9)",
on page 508.
No. Serial number
Type Marker type: N (normal), D (delta), T (temporary, internal)
Dgr Diagram number
Trc Trace to which the marker is assigned
Stimulus x-value of the marker
Response y-value of the marker
Func Activated marker or measurement function
Func.Result Result of the active marker or measurement function
4.3.2 Performing Peak Searches with Markers – PEAK SEARCH Key
The PEAK SEARCH key is used to perform a peak search with the currently active
marker. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated in normal mode and set as the
peak.
If the selected diagram does not support markers, this key is ignored.
4.3.3 Performing Marker Functions – MKR FUNC Key
The MKR FUNC key provides various functions for markers, e.g.
● Phase Noise measurements
● Setting reference points
● Marker demodulation
● Defining Marker peak lists
● Signal counts
● Measuring the power for a band around the marker
To open the marker function menu

● Press the MKR FUNC key.
The "Mkr Func" (marker function) menu is displayed.


● Chapter 4.3.3.1, "Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu", on page 257
Further information
● Chapter 4.3.3.4, "AF Demodulation", on page 266
● Chapter 4.3.3.5, "Frequency Measurement with the Frequency Counter",
on page 267
● Chapter 4.3.3.6, "Measurement of Noise Density", on page 267
● Chapter 4.3.3.7, "Measurement example for Phase Noise Auto Peak Search",
on page 268
Tasks
● Chapter 4.3.3.2, "Setting a Fixed Reference Point (Phase Noise Measurement)",
on page 266
● Chapter 4.3.3.3, "Setting the Demodulation Mode and Duration", on page 266
● Chapter 4.3.3.8, "Performing Band Power Measurements", on page 269
4.3.3.1 Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the marker function menu. It is pos-
sible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is
Select Marker (No)...................................................................................................... 258
Signal Count................................................................................................................258
Noise Meas On/Off......................................................................................................258
Phase Noise................................................................................................................259
└ Phase Noise On/Off...................................................................................... 259
└ Ref Point Level..............................................................................................259
└ Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span)........................259
└ Peak Search................................................................................................. 259
└ Ph. Noise Auto Peak Search........................................................................ 259
└ Select Marker (No)........................................................................................260
Ref Fixed.....................................................................................................................260
└ Ref. Fixed On/Off.......................................................................................... 260
└ Ref Point Level..............................................................................................260
└ Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span)........................260
└ Peak Search................................................................................................. 260
Marker Demod............................................................................................................ 260
└ Mkr Demod On/Off........................................................................................261
└ AM.................................................................................................................261
└ FM.................................................................................................................261
└ Mkr Stop Time...............................................................................................261
└ Continuous Demod (span > 0)......................................................................261
└ Squelch......................................................................................................... 261
└ Squelch Level............................................................................................... 262

n dB down................................................................................................................... 262
Marker Peak List......................................................................................................... 263
└ Peak List On/Off............................................................................................263
└ Sort Mode Freq/Lvl....................................................................................... 263
└ Max Peak Count........................................................................................... 263
└ Peak Excursion............................................................................................. 263
└ Left Limit....................................................................................................... 263
└ Right Limit..................................................................................................... 264
└ Threshold...................................................................................................... 264
└ ASCII File Export.......................................................................................... 264
└ Decim Sep.................................................................................................... 264
└ Marker Number............................................................................................. 264
Band Power.................................................................................................................265
└ Select Marker (No)........................................................................................265
└ Band Power On/Off.......................................................................................265
└ Span..............................................................................................................265
└ Power............................................................................................................265
└ Density.......................................................................................................... 265
Select Marker (No)

Opens a submenu to select one of 16 markers and define whether the marker is a nor-
mal or a delta marker (see "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" on page 250). "(No)" indicates the number of the currently active marker.
See "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 250.
Signal Count
Switches the frequency counter on or off, and opens an edit dialog box to define the
resolution of the frequency counter, if enabled. The frequency is counted at the posi-
tion of the reference marker (marker 1). If no marker is activate, marker 1 is switched
on and positioned on the largest signal.
The sweep stops at the reference marker until the frequency counter has delivered a
result. The result is displayed in the marker field (see Figure 4-9), labeled with [Tx
CNT].
For more information see Chapter 4.3.3.5, "Frequency Measurement with the Fre-
quency Counter", on page 267.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt on page 656
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency? on page 657
Noise Meas On/Off

Switches the noise measurement for the active marker on or off. The corresponding
marker becomes the normal marker.
For more information on noise measurement see Chapter 4.3.3.6, "Measurement of
Noise Density", on page 267.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] on page 683
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult on page 684

Phase Noise
This softkey opens a submenu that contains functionality to configure and perform
phase noise measurements.
Phase Noise On/Off ← Phase Noise

Switches the phase noise measurement with all active delta markers on and off. The
correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the
measurement.
Marker 1 is activated, if necessary, and a peak search is performed. If marker 1 is acti-
vated, its position becomes the reference point for the measurement.
Deltamarker 2 is activated and can be used to read out the phase noise value at a
given frequency offset.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] on page 611
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? on page 612
Ref Point Level ← Phase Noise

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a reference level value. All relative level values of the
delta markers refer to this reference level.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y on page 610
Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span) ← Phase Noise
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency reference or time value. All relative fre-
quency or time values of the delta markers refer to this frequency reference. For phase
noise measurement, input of reference time is not possible.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X on page 610
Peak Search ← Phase Noise

Sets the maximum value of the selected trace as the reference point.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK]
on page 609
Ph. Noise Auto Peak Search ← Phase Noise

Activates an automatic peak search for the reference fixed marker 1 at the end of each
particular sweep.
This function can be used to track a drifting source during a phase noise measure-
ment. The delta marker 2, which shows the phase noise measurement result, keeps
the delta frequency value. Therefore the phase noise measurement leads to reliable
results in a certain offset although the source is drifting. Only if the marker 2 reaches
the border of the span, the delta marker value is adjusted to be within the span. In
these cases, select a larger span.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO on page 612

Select Marker (No) ← Phase Noise

Ref Fixed
Opens a submenu to set all values of a reference point. Instead of using the current
values of the reference marker (marker 1) as reference point for the delta markers,
level and frequency or time are set to fixed values and used as reference point.
Ref. Fixed On/Off ← Ref Fixed

Switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off. The level and
frequency or time values of marker 1 immediately become the reference point, but can
be altered using the corresponding softkeys ("Ref Point Level" on page 259, "Ref Point
Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span)" on page 259 and "Peak Search"
on page 259).
When set to ON, all delta markers which previously referenced marker 1 are automati-
cally set to reference the fixed marker.
The reference marker assignment can be changed using the "Marker Wizard" (see
"Marker Wizard" on page 251).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] on page 609
Ref Point Level ← Ref Fixed

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a reference level value. All relative level values of the
delta markers refer to this reference level.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y on page 610
Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span) ← Ref Fixed
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency reference or time value. All relative fre-
quency or time values of the delta markers refer to this frequency reference. For phase
noise measurement, input of reference time is not possible.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X on page 610
Peak Search ← Ref Fixed

Sets the maximum value of the selected trace as the reference point.
Remote command:
on page 609
Marker Demod
The marker demodulation function sends the AM data at the current marker frequency
(in a bandwidth corresponding to the RBW) to the audio output. The "Marker Demod"
softkey opens a submenu to set the demodulation output settings.

For more information see Chapter 4.3.3.4, "AF Demodulation", on page 266.
Marker demodulation is only available with option R&S FSV-B3 and is not available for
Spectrum Emission Mask measurements.
Mkr Demod On/Off ← Marker Demod

Switches the demodulation output on or off.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] on page 674
AM ← Marker Demod
Sets AM as the output demodulation mode. This is the default setting.
Remote command:
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:DEM:SEL AM, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
DEModulation:SELect on page 673
FM ← Marker Demod
Sets FM as the output demodulation mode. Default setting is AM.
Remote command:
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
DEModulation:SELect on page 673
Mkr Stop Time ← Marker Demod

Opens an edit dialog box to define how long demodulation should be output for span >
0.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff on page 673
Continuous Demod (span > 0) ← Marker Demod

Switches the continuous demodulation on or off. If the sweep time is long enough, the
set frequency range can be monitored acoustically.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous
on page 672
Squelch ← Marker Demod

Activates the squelch function, i.e. the audible AF is cut off below a defined threshold
level. Thus, you avoid hearing noise at the audio output when no signal is available.
The squelch function activates the video trigger function (see "Video" on page 239)
and deactivates any other trigger or gating settings. The squelch level and trigger level
are set to the same value.

The trigger source in the channel information bar is indicated as "SQL" for squelch.
The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] on page 785
Squelch Level ← Marker Demod

Defines the level threshold below which the audible AF is cut off if squelching is
enabled. The video trigger level is set to the same value.
The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel on page 784
n dB down
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value to define the level spacing of the two tempo-
rary markers to the right and left of marker 1 (default setting: 3 dB). Activates the tem-
porary markers T1 and T2. The values of the temporary markers (T1, T2) and the
entered value (ndB) are displayed in the marker field.
If a positive value is entered, the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active refer-
ence marker. If a negative value (e.g. for notch filter measurements) is entered, the
markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active reference marker. Marker T1 is placed
to the left and marker T2 to the right of the reference marker.
In the marker table, the following results are displayed:
Span setting Parameter name Description
span > 0 Bw frequency spacing of the two temporary markers
Q factor quality of the displayed bandwidth value (Bw)
span = 0 PWid pulse width between the two temporary markers
If it is not possible to form the frequency spacing for the n dB value (e.g. because of
noise display), dashes instead of a measured value are displayed.
Remote command:
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:STATe on page 682
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD 3dB, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown on page 680
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:RES? , see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:RESult? on page 682
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:QFAC?, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:QFACtor on page 681
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ? (span > 0), see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? on page 681
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:TIME? (span = 0), see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME? on page 683

Marker Peak List

Opens the "Peak List" submenu to define criteria for the sort order and the contents of
the peak list. For each listed peak the frequency ("Stimulus") and level ("Response")
values are given. In addition, the peaks are indicated in the trace display. A maximum
of 50 entries are listed.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt? on page 675
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X on page 677
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y? on page 678
Peak List On/Off ← Marker Peak List

Activates/deactivates the marker peak list. If activated, the peak list is displayed and
the peaks are indicated in the trace display.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STAT on page 677
Sort Mode Freq/Lvl ← Marker Peak List

Defines the criteria for sorting:
"Freq" sorting in ascending order of frequency values (span > 0) or time val-
ues (span = 0)
"Lvl" sorting in ascending order of the level
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT on page 676
Max Peak Count ← Marker Peak List

Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE on page 676
Peak Excursion ← Marker Peak List

Opens an edit dialog box for level measurements to enter the minimum level value by
which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum
by the search functions. Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed; the resolution is 0.1
dB. The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB.
For more information see "Specifying the suitable peak excursion" and "Effect of differ-
ent peak excursion settings".
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 664
Left Limit ← Marker Peak List

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the lower limit (left vertical line: S1 for
span > 0; T1 for zero span). The search is performed between the lines of the left and
right limit (see also Right Limit softkey).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 666

Right Limit ← Marker Peak List

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the upper limit (left vertical line: S2 for
right limit (see also Left Limit softkey). If no value is set, the upper limit corresponds to
the stop frequency.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT on page 667
Threshold ← Marker Peak List

Opens an edit dialog box to define the threshold line. The threshold line represents the
lower level limit for a "Peak" search and the upper level limit for a "Min" search.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 734
CALCulate<n>:THReshold on page 733
ASCII File Export ← Marker Peak List

Opens the "ASCII File Export Name" dialog box and saves the active peak list in ASCII
tion containing the marker data. For details on an ASCII file see Chapter 4.2.8.7,
"ASCII File Export Format", on page 234.
An example of an output file for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements is given in
"ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)" on page 339.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 762
Decim Sep ← Marker Peak List

Remote command:
Marker Number ← Marker Peak List

If enabled, the determined peaks are indicated by their corresponding marker number
in the trace display.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel:STATe
on page 675

Band Power
Opens a submenu to activate and configure a band power marker. Band power mark-
ers allow you to measure the integrated power for a defined span (band) around a
marker. The result can be displayed either as a power (dBm) or density (dBm/Hz). The
span is indicated by lines in the diagram.
Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements in Spec-
trum mode.
Note: As of firmware version 2.0, Band Power markers are also available in the I/Q
Analyzer, but only for Spectrum displays (see "Display Config" on page 417).
For more information see Chapter 4.3.3.8, "Performing Band Power Measurements",
on page 269.
Select Marker (No) ← Band Power

Band Power On/Off ← Band Power

Activates or deactivates the band power marker. When switched to on, if no marker is
active yet, marker 1 is activated. Otherwise, the currently active marker is used as a
band power marker (all other marker functions for this marker are deactivated). All
markers can be defined as band power markers, each with a different span.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 671
Span ← Band Power

Defines the span (band) around the marker for which the power is measured. The span
is indicated by lines in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN on page 671
Power ← Band Power

Selects the power mode for the band power marker, i.e. the result is displayed in dBm.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE on page 670
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult? on page 670
Density ← Band Power

Selects the density mode for the band power marker, i.e. the result is displayed in
dBm/Hz.
Remote command:

4.3.3.2 Setting a Fixed Reference Point (Phase Noise Measurement)
1. Press the Phase Noise softkey.

The submenu with the Phase Noise On/Off softkey switched on is displayed. The
level and frequency or time values of marker 1 immediately become the reference
point.
2. Setting the maximum of the selected trace as reference point, press the Peak
Search softkey.
3. To define the values for the reference point, proceed as follows:

a) Press the Ref Fixed softkey.
b) Press the Ref Point Level softkey and enter a reference level value.
c) If span > 0, press the Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero
span) softkey and enter a frequency reference value.
d) If span = 0, press the "Ref Point Time" softkey and enter a reference time value
(see "Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span)"
on page 259).
4.3.3.3 Setting the Demodulation Mode and Duration
1. Press the Marker Demod softkey.

The submenu with the Mkr Demod On/Off softkey switched on is displayed.
2. To change the demodulation mode, press the AM or FM softkey.
3. For details see Chapter 4.3.3.4, "AF Demodulation", on page 266.
4. To modify the demodulation time for span > 0, press the Mkr Stop Time softkey.
5. To change to continuous demodulation for span > 0, press the Continuous Demod
(span > 0) softkey.
4.3.3.4 AF Demodulation
The R&S FSVA/FSV provides demodulators for AM and FM signals. With these
demodulators, a displayed signal can be identified acoustically by using headphones.
Risk of hearing damage

To protect your hearing, make sure that the volume setting is not too high before put-
ting on the headphones.
The volume for the headphones is controlled using the rotary knob next to the "AF Out-
put" interface on the front panel of the instrument.

For span > 0, the demodulation is not continuous. The frequency at which the demodu-
lation takes place is determined by the active marker. The demodulation bandwidth
corresponds to the RBW. If the level of the selected frequency is above the threshold
line, the sweep stops for the selected time (stop time) and the RF signal is demodula-
ted. For span = 0, the demodulation is continuously active irrespective of the stop time
set.
4.3.3.5 Frequency Measurement with the Frequency Counter
In order to accurately determine the frequency of a signal, the R&S FSVA/FSV is

equipped with a frequency counter which measures the frequency of the RF signal at
the intermediate frequency. Using the measured IF, the R&S FSVA/FSV calculates the
frequency of the RF input signal by applying the known frequency conversion factors.
The frequency measurement uncertainty depends only upon the accuracy of the fre-
quency reference used (external or internal reference). Although the R&S FSVA/FSV
always operates synchronously irrespective of the set span, the frequency counter
delivers a more exact result than a measurement performed with a marker. This is due
to the following:
● The marker measures only the position of the point on the trace and infers from
this value the signal frequency. The trace, however, contains only a limited number
of points. Depending upon the selected span, each point may contain many mea-
surement values, which therefore limits the frequency resolution.
● The resolution with which the frequency can be measured with a marker is depend-
ant on the selected resolution bandwidth, which in return affects the necessary
measurement time. For this reason, the bandwidth is normally defined as wide as
possible and the sweep time as short as possible. This results in a loss of fre-
quency resolution. For the measurement with the frequency counter, the sweep is
stopped at the reference marker, the frequency is counted with the desired resolu-
tion and then the sweep is allowed to continue.
In IQ Analyzer mode (see Chapter 4.5, "Instrument Functions - I/Q Analyzer",
on page 410), the resolution with which the frequency can be measured with a
marker is always the filter bandwidth, which is derived from the defined sample
rate.
4.3.3.6 Measurement of Noise Density
During noise measurement, the noise power density is measured at the position of the
marker. For span = 0, all points of the trace are used to determine the noise power
density. For span > 0, two points to the right and left of the marker are used for the
measurement to obtain a stable result.
The noise power density is indicated in the marker field. With logarithmic amplitude
units (dBm, dBmV, dBmµV, dBµA), the noise power density is output in dBm/Hz, i.e. as
level in 1 Hz bandwidth with reference to 1 mW. With linear amplitude units (V, A, W),
the noise voltage density is evaluated in µV/Hz, the noise current density in µA/Hz or
the noise power density in µW/Hz.
In the default setting, the R&S FSVA/FSV uses the sample detector for the noise func-
tion.

With the sample detector, the trace can additionally be set to AVERAGE to stabilize
the measured values. With RMS detector used, trace averaging must not be used
since in this case it produces too low noise levels which cannot be corrected. Instead,
the sweep time can be increased to obtain stable measurement results.
Prerequisite settings
The following settings have to be made to ensure that the power density measurement
yields correct values:
● Detector: Sample or RMS
● Video bandwidth:
≤ 0.1 resolution bandwidth with sample detector
≥ 3 x resolution bandwidth with RMS detector
● Trace averaging:
With the sample detector, the trace can additionally be set to average to stabilize
the measured values. With RMS detector used, trace averaging must not be used
since in this case it produces too low noise levels which cannot be corrected.
Instead, the sweep time can be increased to obtain stable measurement results.
Correction factors
The R&S FSVA/FSV uses the following correction factors to evaluate the noise density
from the marker level:
● Since the noise power is indicated with reference to 1 Hz bandwidth, the bandwidth
correction value is deducted from the marker level. It is 10 x lg (1 Hz/BWNoise),
where BWNoise is the noise or power bandwidth of the set resolution filter (RBW).
● RMS detector: With the exception of bandwidth correction, no further corrections
are required since this detector already indicates the power with every point of the
trace.
● Sample detector: As a result of video filter averaging and trace averaging, 1.05 dB
is added to the marker level. This is the difference between the average value and
the RMS value of white noise. With a logarithmic level axis, 1.45 dB is added addi-
tionally. Logarithmic averaging is thus fully taken into account which yields a value
that is 1.45 dB lower than that of linear averaging.
● To allow a more stable noise display the adjacent (symmetric to the measurement
frequency) points of the trace are averaged.
● For span > 0, the measured values are averaged versus time (after a sweep).
The R&S FSVA/FSV noise figure can be calculated from the measured power density
level. It is calculated by deducting the set RF attenuation (RF Att) from the displayed
noise level and adding 174 to the result.
4.3.3.7 Measurement example for Phase Noise Auto Peak Search
The phase noise of a CW signal at 100 MHz with 0 dBm level is to be measured at 800
kHz from the carrier.

1. PRESET
The R&S FSP is set to the default setting.
2. FREQ > "CENTER": 100 MHz

The center frequency is set to 100 MHz.
3. SPAN: 2 MHz
The span is set to 2 MHz.
4. AMPT: 0 dBm
The reference level is set to 0 dBm.
5. MKR FCTN > "MARKER 1"

Marker 1 is switched on and positioned at the maximum of the displayed trace.
6. "PHASE NOISE": 800 kHz

The phase noise measurement is switched on. The delta marker is positioned on
the main marker and the measured phase noise value is displayed in the marker
info field. The sample detector is used and the video bandwidth is set to 3 × RBW.
When the phase noise measurement function is enabled, the entry of the delta
marker frequency is activated. It can be entered directly.
4.3.3.8 Performing Band Power Measurements
Band power markers allow you to measure the integrated power (similar to ACP mea-
surements) for a defined span (band) around a marker. By default, 5 % of the current
span is used. The span is indicated by colored lines in the diagram. The result can be
displayed either as a power (dBm) or density (dBm/Hz).
trum mode (not zero span, I/Q Analyzer etc.).

All markers can be defined as band power markers, each with a different span. When a
band power marker is activated, if no marker is active yet, marker 1 is activated. Other-
wise, the currently active marker is used as a band power marker (all other marker
functions for this marker are deactivated).
If the detector mode for the marker trace is set to "AutoSelect", the RMS detector is
used.
1. In the MKR FUNC menu, press "Band Power".
2. In the "Band Power" menu, press "Span" and enter the width of the band around
the marker for which the power is to be measured.
3. To display the measurement result in dBm/Hz, press "Density". By default, the

result is displayed as a power in dBm.
4. Press "Band Power On" to activate the band power marker.

The measurement results are displayed as usual in the marker table or in the dia-
gram.
4.3.4 Changing Settings via Markers – MKR-> Key
The MKR -> key is used for search functions of measurement markers, assignment of
the marker frequency as center frequency, restriction of the search area and character-

ization of maxima and minima. For details on markers in general, see Chapter 4.3.1,
"Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key", on page 249.
To open the Marker To menu

● Press the MKR -> key.
The "Marker To" menu is displayed. If no marker is active, marker 1 will be activa-
ted and a peak search on the trace carried out. Otherwise, the edit dialog box for
the last activated marker is opened and the current frequency/time value is dis-
played.

● Chapter 4.3.4.1, "Softkeys of the Marker To Menu", on page 271 Menu"
Further information
● Chapter 4.3.4.8, "Effect of Different Peak Excursion Settings (Example)",
on page 278
Tasks
● Chapter 4.3.4.2, "Searching for a Maximum", on page 277
● Chapter 4.3.4.3, "Searching for a Minimum", on page 277
● Chapter 4.3.4.4, "Specifying the Search Limits", on page 277
● Chapter 4.3.4.5, "Specifying the Search Range", on page 277
● Chapter 4.3.4.6, "Examining a Signal at the Center in Detail", on page 277
● Chapter 4.3.4.7, "Specifying the Suitable Peak Excursion", on page 278
4.3.4.1 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Marker To" menu. It is possible
Select Marker (No)...................................................................................................... 272
Peak............................................................................................................................ 272
Next Peak....................................................................................................................272
Center =Mkr Freq (span > 0).......................................................................................272
Ref Lvl =Mkr Lvl.......................................................................................................... 272
Marker to Trace...........................................................................................................272
Min.............................................................................................................................. 272
Next Min...................................................................................................................... 273
Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak................................................................................... 273
Search Limits.............................................................................................................. 273
└ Left Limit....................................................................................................... 273
└ Right Limit..................................................................................................... 273
└ Threshold...................................................................................................... 273
└ Use Zoom Limits........................................................................................... 274

└ Search Lim Off.............................................................................................. 274

Next Mode...................................................................................................................274
Exclude LO..................................................................................................................274
Search Mode (Spectrograms)..................................................................................... 275
└ Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction................................................... 275
└ Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction................................................... 275
└ Marker Search Type..................................................................................... 276
└ Marker Search Area......................................................................................276
Peak Excursion........................................................................................................... 276
Select Marker (No)

Peak
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the highest maximum of the trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 659
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 613
Next Peak
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next maximum of the selected trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 660
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 614
Center =Mkr Freq (span > 0)

Sets the center frequency to the current marker or delta marker frequency. A signal
can thus be set to as center frequency, for example to examine it in detail with a
smaller span.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer on page 672
Ref Lvl =Mkr Lvl

Sets the reference level to the current marker level.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence on page 684
Marker to Trace
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace on which the marker is to be
placed.
Remote command:
Min
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the minimum of the selected trace.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 661
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 615
Next Min
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next minimum of the selected trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 663
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 616
Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak

Adds an automatic peak search action for marker 1 at the end of each particular
sweep. This function may be used during adjustments of a device under test to keep
track of the current peak marker position and level.
The current marker search limit settings (Left Limit, Right Limit, Threshold softkeys) are
taken into account.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO on page 659
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO on page 662
Search Limits
Opens a submenu to set the limits for maximum or minimum search in the x and y
direction.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 666
Left Limit ← Search Limits

Remote command:
Right Limit ← Search Limits

the stop frequency.
Remote command:
Threshold ← Search Limits

Remote command:

Use Zoom Limits ← Search Limits

Restricts the marker search to the zoomed area.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM on page 667
Search Lim Off ← Search Limits

Deactivates all limits of the search range.
Remote command:
Next Mode
Selects the mode of the Next Peak or Next Min softkey.
Three settings are available:
"<" Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next maximum/minimum
left to the marker of the selected trace.
"abs" Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next lower maximum/
higher minimum of the selected trace.
">" Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next maximum/minimum
right to the marker of the selected trace.
Remote command:
Next Peak:
CALC:MARK:MAX:LEFT (<): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
on page 660
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 614
CALC:MARK:MAX:RIGH (>): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
on page 661
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 614
CALC:DELT:MAX:NEXT (abs): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
on page 660
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 614
Next Min:
CALC:MARK:MIN:LEFT (>): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT
on page 662
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 615
CALC:MARK:MIN:RIGH (>): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
on page 663
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 616
CALC:MARK:MIN:NEXT (abs): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT
on page 663
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 616
Exclude LO
Switches the frequency range limit for the marker search functions on or off.

"ON" The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is ≥ 5 ×

resolution bandwidth (RBW).
Due to the interference by the first local oscillator to the first inter-
mediate frequency at the input mixer, the LO is represented as a sig-
nal at 0 Hz. To avoid the peak marker jumping to the LO signal at 0
Hz, this frequency is excluded from the peak search.
"OFF" No restriction to the search range. The frequency 0 Hz is included in
the marker search functions.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude on page 658
Search Mode (Spectrograms)

Spectrograms show not only the current sweep results, but also the sweep history.
Thus, when searching for peaks, you must define the search settings within a single
time frame (x-direction) and within several time frames (y-direction).
This setting is only available for spectrogram displays.
Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction ← Search Mode (Spectrograms)

Selects the search mode for the next peak search within the currently selected frame.
"Left" Determines the next maximum/minimum to the left of the current
peak.
"Absolute" Determines the next maximum/minimum to either side of the current
peak.
"Right" Determines the next maximum/minimum to the right of the current
peak.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 660
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 660
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 661
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 662
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 663
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 663
Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction ← Search Mode (Spectrograms)

Selects the search mode for the next peak search within all frames at the current
marker position.
"Up" Determines the next maximum/minimum above the current peak (in
more recent frames).
"Absolute" Determines the next maximum/minimum above or below the current
peak (in all frames).
"Down" Determines the next maximum/minimum below the current peak (in
older frames).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe on page 700
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe on page 622
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow on page 700

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow on page 622

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT on page 701
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT on page 623
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe on page 701
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe on page 623
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow on page 702
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow on page 624
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT on page 702
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT on page 624
Marker Search Type ← Search Mode (Spectrograms)

Defines the type of search to be performed in the spectrogram.
"X-Search" Searches only within the currently selected frame.
"Y-Search" Searches within all frames but only at the current marker position.
"XY-Search" Searches in all frames at all positions.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 699
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 621
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 699
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 621
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 701
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 623
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 703
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 625
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 659
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 613
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 661
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 615
Marker Search Area ← Search Mode (Spectrograms)

Defines which frames the search is performed in.
"Visible" Only the visible frames are searched.
"Memory" All frames stored in the memory are searched.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea on page 698
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea on page 620
Peak Excursion
Remote command:

4.3.4.2 Searching for a Maximum
● To search for the highest maximum, press the Peak softkey.

● To define the search mode for the next maximum, use the Next Mode softkey.
● To start the search, press the Next Peak softkey.
You can define an automatic peak search action for marker 1 at the end of each partic-
ular sweep using the Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak softkey.
4.3.4.3 Searching for a Minimum
● To search for the minimum, press the Min softkey.

● To define the search mode for the next minimum, use the Next Mode softkey.
● To start the search, press the Next Min softkey.
You can define an automatic peak search action for marker 1 at the end of each partic-
ular sweep using the Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak softkey.
4.3.4.4 Specifying the Search Limits
● To define the lower limit, press the Left Limit softkey.

● To define the upper limit, press the Right Limit softkey.
● To define the threshold, press the Threshold softkey.
● To switch the search limits off, press the Search Lim Off softkey.
4.3.4.5 Specifying the Search Range
● Press the Exclude LO softkey to deactivate the "Exclude LO" mode in order to
include the frequency down to 0 Hz in the marker search functions.
4.3.4.6 Examining a Signal at the Center in Detail
1. Press the PRESET key to set the R&S FSVA/FSV to the default setting.
2. Press the MKR -> key to open the "Marker To" menu.
3. Marker 1 is activated and set to the largest signal of the trace.
4. Press the Center =Mkr Freq (span > 0) softkey to set to the marker frequency.
5. The span is adapted in such a way that the minimum frequency (= 0 Hz) or the
maximum frequency is not exceeded.
6. Press the Ref Lvl =Mkr Lvl softkey to set the reference level to the measured
marker level.

7. Press the SPAN key.
8. The edit dialog box to enter a frequency span is displayed.
9. Reduce the span, e.g. using the rotary knob.
4.3.4.7 Specifying the Suitable Peak Excursion
1. If the Peak Excursion softkey is used, the default value is sufficient, since, in this
mode, the next lower maximum or next higher minimum will always be detected.
2. If the < or > of the softkey Next Mode is used, the 6 dB level change set as a
default value may already be attained by the inherent noise of the instrument. To
avoid identifying noise peaks as maxima or minima, enter a peak excursion value
that is higher than the difference between the highest and the lowest value mea-
sured for the displayed inherent noise.
4.3.4.8 Effect of Different Peak Excursion Settings (Example)
The following figure shows a trace to be examined.
Figure 4-10: Trace example
The following table lists the signals as indicated by the marker numbers in the diagram
above, as well as the minimum of the amplitude decrease to both sides of the signal:

Signal # Min. amplitude decrease to both sides of the signal
1 30 dB
2 29.85 dB
3 7 dB
4 7 dB
The detected signals and their order are different depending on the peak excursion
setting and the peak search method (whether the next lower maximum or the next rela-
tive maximum is searched). The following results are obtained. All tests start with the
marker set to signal 1 by pressing the Peak softkey.
● 40 dB peak excursion
Result: With both methods apart from signal 1 no signal is detected, as the signal
level does not decrease by more than 30 dB to either side of any signal.
Next lower maximum Next relative maximum
Next Mode abs: signal 1 Next Mode <: signal 1

(no further signal detected) (no further signal detected)
Next Mode >: signal 1

(no further signal detected)
Result: With both methods apart from signal 1 signal 2 is detected, as the signal
level decreases at least by 29.85 dB to either side of this signal, which is now
greater than the peak excursion.

Next Mode abs: signal 2 Next Mode >: signal 2


Result: With both methods all signals are detected.

4.3.5 Power Measurements – MEAS Key
With its power measurement functions, the R&S FSVA/FSV is able to measure all the
necessary parameters with high accuracy in a wide dynamic range.
A modulated carrier is almost always used (except e.g. SSB-AM) for high-frequency
transmission of information. Due to the information modulated upon the carrier, the lat-
ter covers a spectrum which is defined by the modulation, the transmission data rate
and the signal filtering. Within a transmission band each carrier is assigned a channel
taking into account these parameters. In order to ensure error-free transmission, each
transmitter must be conforming to the specified parameters. These include among oth-
ers:
● the output power
● the occupied bandwidth, i.e. the bandwidth which must contain a defined percent-
age of the power
● the power dissipation allowed in the adjacent channels
The MEAS key is used for complex measurement functions as power measurements,
occupied bandwidth, signal statistic, carrier to noise spacing, AM modulation depth,
third-order intercept point, harmonics and spurious emissions. For measurement
examples refer to the Quick Start Guide, "Basic Measurement Examples".
Further examples are described in Chapter 3.6, "Advanced Measurement Examples",
on page 105 and Chapter 5.4, "Remote Control – Programming Examples",
on page 1000
The following measurements can be performed:

● Channel power and adjacent-channel power with span > 0 and with a single or sev-
eral carriers ("CH Power ACLR" softkey, for details see Chapter 4.3.5.2, "Measur-
ing Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power", on page 283)
● Carrier-to-noise ratio ("C/N C/NO" softkey, for details see Chapter 4.3.5.3, "Mea-
suring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio", on page 307)
● Occupied bandwidth ("OBW" softkey, for details see Chapter 4.3.5.4, "Measuring
the Occupied Bandwidth", on page 310)
● Spectrum Emission Mask measurements ("Spectrum Emission Mask" softkey, for
details see Chapter 4.3.5.5, "Measuring with Spectrum Emission Masks",
on page 314)
● Spurious Emissions measurements ("Spurious Emissions" softkey, for details see
Chapter 4.3.5.6, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 342)
● Power in zero span ("Time Domain Power" softkey, for details see Chapter 4.3.5.7,
"Measuring the Power in Zero Span", on page 353).
● Amplitude probability distribution ("APD" and "CCDF" softkeys, for details see
Chapter 4.3.5.8, "Calculating Signal Amplitude Statistics", on page 356)
● 3rd order intercept ("TOI" softkey, for details see Chapter 4.3.5.9, "Measuring the
Third Order Intercept Point (TOI)", on page 374)
● Modulation depth ("AM Mod Depth" softkey, for details see Chapter 4.3.5.10, "Mea-
suring the AM Modulation Depth", on page 380)

● Harmonic Distortion measurements ("Harmonic Distortion" softkey, for details see

Chapter 4.3.5.11, "Measuring Harmonic Distortion", on page 381)
To open the power measurement menu

● Press the MEAS key.
The measurement menu for spectrum analysis is displayed (see Chapter 4.3.5.1,
"Softkeys of the Power Measurement Menu", on page 281).
4.3.5.1 Softkeys of the Power Measurement Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the power measurement menu. It is
Ch Power ACLR..........................................................................................................281
C/N, C/No (span > 0)...................................................................................................281
OBW (span > 0).......................................................................................................... 282
Spectrum Emission Mask............................................................................................282
Spurious Emissions.....................................................................................................282
Time Domain Power (zero span)................................................................................ 282
All Functions Off..........................................................................................................282
APD.............................................................................................................................282
CCDF.......................................................................................................................... 283
TOI.............................................................................................................................. 283
AM Mod Depth............................................................................................................ 283
Harmonic Distortion.....................................................................................................283
All Functions Off..........................................................................................................283
Ch Power ACLR
Activates the active channel or adjacent-channel power measurement either for a sin-
gle carrier signal or for several carrier signals, depending on the current measurement
configuration, and opens a submenu to configure the channel power measurement.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.2, "Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel
Power", on page 283.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect on page 695
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? on page 692
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] on page 696
C/N, C/No (span > 0)

Opens a submenu to configure the carrier/noise ratio measurement. Measurements
without (C/N) and measurements with reference to the bandwidth (C/No) are possible.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.3, "Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio", on page 307.

OBW (span > 0)

Activates measurement of the occupied bandwidth according to the current configura-
tion and opens a submenu to configure the measurement. For details see Chap-
ter 4.3.5.4, "Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth", on page 310.
Remote command:
Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a submenu to configure the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement.
The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement defines a measurement that moni-
tors compliance with a spectral mask.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.5, "Measuring with Spectrum Emission Masks",
on page 314.
Remote command:
SENS:SWE:MODE ESP, see [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 850
Spurious Emissions
Opens a submenu to configure the Spurious Emissions measurement.
The Spurious Emissions measurement defines a measurement that monitors unwan-
ted RF products outside the assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.6, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 342.
Remote command:
SENS:SWE:MODE LIST, see [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 850
Time Domain Power (zero span)

Activates the power measurement in zero span and opens a submenu to configure the
power measurement. For details see Chapter 4.3.5.7, "Measuring the Power in Zero
Span", on page 353.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] on page 719
All Functions Off

Switches off all power measurement functions.
APD
Activates the function to measure the amplitude probability density (APD) and opens a
submenu.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.8, "Calculating Signal Amplitude Statistics",
on page 356.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe] on page 729

CCDF
Activates the function to measure the complementary cumulative distribution function
(CCDF) and opens a submenu.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.8, "Calculating Signal Amplitude Statistics",
on page 356.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] on page 729
TOI
Opens a submenu and activates the measurement of the 3rd order intercept point.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.9, "Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point (TOI)",
on page 374.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe] on page 685
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? on page 685
AM Mod Depth
Opens a submenu and activates the measurement of the AM modulation depth. An
AM-modulated carrier is required on the screen to ensure correct operation.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.10, "Measuring the AM Modulation Depth", on page 380.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] on page 679
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult? on page 678
Harmonic Distortion
Opens a submenu to determine the settings for harmonics measurement and activates
the harmonic distortion measurement.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.11, "Measuring Harmonic Distortion", on page 381.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] on page 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion? on page 687
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST? on page 688
All Functions Off

Switches off all power measurement functions.
4.3.5.2 Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power
Measuring the power in channels adjacent to the carrier or transmission channel is

useful to detect interference. The results are displayed as a bar chart for the individual
channels.
● About Channel Power Measurements.................................................................. 284
● Channel Power Measurement Results..................................................................288
● Configuring and Performing Channel Power Measurements................................289

● Softkeys for Channel and Adjacent-Channel Power Measurements.................... 294

● Predefined CP/ACLR Standards...........................................................................304
● Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters...............................................306
About Channel Power Measurements

Measuring channel power and adjacent channel power is one of the most important
tasks in the field of digital transmission for a signal analyzer with the necessary test
routines. While, theoretically, channel power could be measured at highest accuracy
with a power meter, its low selectivity means that it is not suitable for measuring adja-
cent channel power as an absolute value or relative to the transmit channel power. The
power in the adjacent channels can only be measured with a selective power meter.
A signal analyzer cannot be classified as a true power meter, because it displays the IF
envelope voltage. However, it is calibrated such as to correctly display the power of a
pure sine wave signal irrespective of the selected detector. This calibration cannot be
applied for non-sinusoidal signals. Assuming that the digitally modulated signal has a
Gaussian amplitude distribution, the signal power within the selected resolution band-
width can be obtained using correction factors. These correction factors are normally
used by the signal analyzer's internal power measurement routines in order to deter-
mine the signal power from IF envelope measurements. These factors apply if and only
if the assumption of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct.
Apart from this common method, the R&S FSVA/FSV also has a true power detector,
i.e. an RMS detector. It correctly displays the power of the test signal within the
selected resolution bandwidth irrespective of the amplitude distribution, without addi-
tional correction factors being required. The absolute measurement uncertainty of the
R&S FSVA/FSV is < 1.5 dB and a relative measurement uncertainty of < 0.5 dB (each
with a confidence level of 95 %).
A detailed measurement example is described in Chapter 3.6.6.1, "Measuring Channel

Power and Adjacent Channel Power", on page 125 and Chapter 5.4, "Remote Control
– Programming Examples", on page 1000.
Measurement Methods
The channel power is defined as the integration of the power across the channel band-
width.
The Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR), also known as the Adjacent Channel
Leakage Power Ratio (ACLR), is defined as the ratio between the total power of the
adjacent channel to the carrier channel's power. An ACLR measurement with several
carrier (transmission) channels (TX channels) is also possible and is referred to as a
"multi-carrier ACLR measurement".
There are two possible methods for measuring channel and adjacent channel power
with a signal analyzer:
● IBW method (Integration Bandwidth Method)
● Zero-span method (Fast ACLR), i.e. using a channel filter
● IBW method.......................................................................................................... 285
● Fast ACLR.............................................................................................................285

IBW method
When measuring the channel power, the R&S FSVA/FSV integrates the linear power
which corresponds to the levels of the pixels within the selected channel. The signal
analyzer uses a resolution bandwidth which is far smaller than the channel bandwidth.
When sweeping over the channel, the channel filter is formed by the passband charac-
teristics of the resolution bandwidth (see Figure 4-11).
Figure 4-11: Approximating the channel filter by sweeping with a small resolution bandwidth
The following steps are performed:
1. The linear power of all the trace pixels within the channel is calculated.
Pi = 10(Li/10)
where Pi = power of the trace pixel i
Li = displayed level of trace point i
2. The powers of all trace pixels within the channel are summed up and the sum is
divided by the number of trace pixels in the channel.
3. The result is multiplied by the quotient of the selected channel bandwidth and the
noise bandwidth of the resolution filter (RBW).
Since the power calculation is performed by integrating the trace within the channel
bandwidth, this method is called the IBW method (Integration Bandwidth method).
Fast ACLR
Using Fast ACLR, the R&S FSVA/FSV sets the center frequency to the different chan-
nel center frequencies consecutively and measures the power with the selected mea-
surement time (= sweep time/number of channels).
The RBW filters suitable for the selected standard and frequency offset are automati-
cally used (e.g. root raised cos with IS 136).
The RMS detector is used for obtaining correct power measurement results. Therefore
no software correction factors are required.
Measurement Repeatability
The repeatability of the results, especially in the narrow adjacent channels, strongly
depends on the measurement time for a given resolution bandwidth. A longer sweep

time may increase the probability that the measured value converges to the true value
of the adjacent channel power, but obviously increases measurement time.
The integrated bandwidth method (IBW) calculates channel power and ACLR from the
trace data obtained during a continuous sweep over the selected span. Most parts of
this sweep are neither part of the channel itself nor the defined adjacent channels.
Therefore, most of the samples taken during the sweeptime cannot be used for chan-
nel power or ACLR calculation.
To obtain a high repeatability with short measurement times, the R&S FSVA/FSV
offers a "Fast ACLR" mode. In the Fast ACLR mode, the R&S FSVA/FSV measures
the power of each channel at the defined channel bandwidth, while being tuned to the
center frequency of the channel in question. The digital implementation of the resolu-
tion bandwidths makes it possible to select filter characteristics that are precisely tail-
ored to the signal. In case of CDMA2000, the power in the useful channel is measured
with a bandwidth of 1.23 MHz and that of the adjacent channels with a bandwidth of 30
kHz. Therefore the R&S FSVA/FSV changes from one channel to the other and meas-
ures the power at a bandwidth of 1.23 MHz or 30 kHz using the RMS detector. The
power of the frequency range between the channels of interest is not measured in Fast
ACLR mode, because it is not required for channel power or ACLR calculation. The
measurement time per channel is set with the sweep time. It is equal to the selected
measurement time divided by the selected number of channels.
Figure 4-12: Measuring the channel power and adjacent channel power ratio for CDMA2000 1X sig-
nals with zero span (Fast ACP)

Assuming a measurement with five channels (1 channel plus 2 lower and 2 upper adja-
cent channels) and a sweep time of 100 ms, a measurement time per channel of 20
ms is required. The number of effective samples taken into account for power calcula-
tion in one channel is the product of sweeptime in channel times the selected resolu-
tion bandwidth.
Assuming a sweeptime of 100 ms, there are (30 kHz / 4.19 MHz) * 100 ms * 10 kHz ≈
7 samples. Whereas in Fast ACLR mode, there are (100 ms / 5) * 30 kHz ≈ 600 sam-
ples. Comparing these numbers explains the increase of repeatability with a 95% confi-
dence level (2δ) from ± 2.8 dB to ± 0.34 dB for a sweeptime of 100 ms (as shown in
Figure 4-13 and ).
For the same repeatability, the sweep time would have to be set to 8.5 s with the inte-
gration method. The Figure 4-14 shows the standard deviation of the results as a func-
tion of the sweep time.
Figure 4-13: Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurement on CDMA2000 standard signals if
the integration bandwidth method is used
The Figure 4-14 shows the repeatability of power measurements in the transmit chan-
nel and of relative power measurements in the adjacent channels as a function of
sweep time. The standard deviation of measurement results is calculated from 100
consecutive measurements. Take scaling into account if comparing power values.

Figure 4-14: Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurements on CDMA2000 signals in the fast
ACP mode
Channel Power Measurement Results

For channel or adjacent-channel power measurements, the individual channels are
indicated by different colored bars in the diagram. The height of each bar corresponds
to the measured power of that channel. In addition, the name of the channel ("Adj",
"Alt1", "TX1", etc. or a user-defined name) is indicated above the bar (separated by a
line which has no further meaning).

Results are provided for the TX channel and the number of defined adjacent channels
above and below the TX channel. If more than one TX channel is defined, the carrier
channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values should be referenced
must be defined.
The measured power values for the TX and adjacent channels are also output as a
table in the second screen. Which powers are measured depends on the number of
configured channels, see "# of Adj Chan" on page 295.
For each channel, the following values are displayed:
Label Description
Channel Channel name as specified in the "Channel Settings" (see "Names" on page 299).
Bandwidth Configured channel bandwidth (see "Bandwidth" on page 297)
Offset Offset of the channel to the TX channel (Configured channel spacing, see "Spacing"
on page 298)
Power The measured power values for the TX and lower and upper adjacent channels. The
powers of the transmission channels are output in dBm or dBm/Hz, or in dBc, relative
(Lower/Upper)
to the specified reference TX channel.
Retrieving Results via Remote Control

All or specific channel power measurement results can be retrieved using the
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? command from a remote
computer.
Alternatively, the results can be output as channel power density, i.e. in reference to
the measurement bandwidth (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:
RESult:PHZ on page 695).
Furthermore, the measured power values of the displayed trace can be retrieved as
usual using the TRAC:DATA? commands (see TRACe<n>[:DATA]? on page 880). In
this case, the measured power value for each sweep point (max. 691) is returned.
Configuring and Performing Channel Power Measurements

Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measure-
ments. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel settings are automati-
cally set on the R&S FSVA/FSV. However, the settings can be changed, and measure-
ments with user-defined configurations are also possible.
Once the channels have been set up, other instrument settings such as the used filter
bandwidths, frequency span and detector and trace settings can be optimized automat-
ically (see "Adjust Settings" on page 301).
For an overview of the softkeys and menus see "Softkeys for Channel and Adjacent-
Channel Power Measurements" on page 294.
Selecting a Predefined Standard

Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measure-
ments. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel settings are automati-
cally set on the R&S FSVA/FSV.

The selected standard defines the following settings:

● "Bandwidth" on page 297
● "Spacing" on page 298
● Detector, see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 306
● Trace averaging, see "Average Mode" on page 225
● RBW, see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 306
● "Weighting Filter" on page 299
► Select a predefined standard via the CP/ACLR Standard softkey.
Setting up the Channels

Channel definition is the basis for measuring power levels in certain frequency ranges.
Usually, the power levels in one or more carrier (TX) channels and possibly the adja-
cent channels are of interest. Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels
can be defined.
In the R&S FSVA/FSV's display, only the first neighboring channel of the carrier (TX)
channel is labelled "Adj" (adjacent) channel; all others are labelled "Alt" (alternate)
channels. In this manual, "adjacent" refers to both adjacent and alternate channels.
When an ACLR measurement is started by pressing the "Ch Power ACLR" softkey, all
settings including the channel bandwidths and channel spacings are set according to
the selected standard and can be adjusted afterwards.
Channel setup consists of the following settings:
● The number of transmission (TX) and adjacent channels
● The bandwidth of each channel
● For multi-carrier ACLR measurements: which TX channel is used as a reference
("ACLR Reference")
● The spacing between the individual channels
● Optionally: the names of the channels displayed in the diagram and result table
● Optionally: the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result
("Weighting Filter")
● Optionally: limits for a limit check on the measured power levels
Changes to an existing standard can be stored as a user-defined standard, see "User-

Defined Configurations" on page 293.
► In the "Ch Power" menu, press Channel Setup, then press the Channel Setup soft-
key to configure the channels in the "Channel Setup" dialog box.

In the "Channel Setup" dialog box you define the channel settings for all channels,
independent of the defined number of used TX or adjacent channels.
● Defining Channel Bandwidths............................................................................... 291

● Defining Channel Spacings...................................................................................291
● Configuring a Limit Check..................................................................................... 292
Defining Channel Bandwidths

The transmission-channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard.
The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard (see "Optimized
Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 306).
For measurements that require channel bandwidths which deviate from those defined
in the selected standard, use the IBW method (see Fast ACLR (On/Off) softkey). With
the IBW method, the channel bandwidth borders are right and left of the channel center
frequency. Thus, you can visually check whether the entire power of the signal under
test is within the selected channel bandwidth.
► In the "Channel Setup" dialog box, select the "Bandwidth" tab to define the channel
bandwidths.
The value entered for any TX channel is automatically also defined for all subse-
quent TX channels. Thus, only one value needs to be entered if all TX channels
have the same bandwidth.
The value entered for any ADJ or ALT channel is automatically also defined for all
alternate (ALT) channels. Thus, only one value needs to be entered if all adjacent
channels have the same bandwidth.
Defining Channel Spacings

Channel spacings are normally defined by the selected standard but can be changed.
If the spacings are not equal, the channel distribution according to the center frequency
is as follows:
Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency.
Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the fre-
quency between those two channels. This frequency is aligned to
the center frequency.
► In the "Channel Setup" dialog box, select the "Spacing" tab to define the channel
spacings.
The value entered for any TX channel is automatically also defined for all subse-
quent TX channels. Thus, only one value needs to be entered if all TX channels
have the same spacing.
If the channel spacing for the adjacent or an alternate channel is changed, all
higher alternate channel spacings are multiplied by the same factor (new spacing
value/old spacing value). The lower adjacent-channel spacings remain unchanged.
Only one value needs to be entered for equal channel spacing.

Example: Defining channel spacing

In the default setting, the adjacent channels have the following spacing: 20 kHz
("ADJ"), 40 kHz ("ALT1"), 60 kHz ("ALT2"), 80 kHz ("ALT3"), 100 kHz ("ALT4"), …
If the spacing of the first adjacent channel ("ADJ") is set to 40 kHz, the spacing of all
other adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 2 to result in 80 kHz ("ALT1"), 120 kHz
("ALT2"), 160 kHz ("ALT3"), …
If, starting from the default setting, the spacing of the 5th adjacent channel ("ALT4") is
set to 150 kHz, the spacing of all higher adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 1.5 to
result in 180 kHz ("ALT5"), 210 kHz ("ALT6"), 240 kHz ("ALT7"), …
For the R&S FSVA/FSV, the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the
center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission
channel. The definition of the adjacent-channel spacing in standards IS95C and CDMA
2000 is different. These standards define the adjacent-channel spacing from the center
of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel. This defini-
tion is also used for the R&S FSVA/FSV if the standards marked with an asterisk *) are
selected.
Configuring a Limit Check

During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they
exceed user-defined limits. A relative or absolute limit can be defined, or both. Both
limit types are considered, regardless whether the measured levels are absolute or rel-
ative values. The check of both limit values can be activated independently. If any
active limit value is exceeded, the measured value is displayed in red and marked by a
preceding asterisk in the result table.
To configure a limit check

1. In the "Channel Setup" dialog box, select the "Limits" tab to define a limit check.
2. For each channel, define a relative or absolute value that should not be exceeded.
3. Select the channels to be included in the limit check by activating the "Check"
option.
4. Activate limit checking for the selected channels by setting "Limit Checking" to On.
Performing a Channel Power Measurement

A channel power measurement is started automatically according to the currently
selected standard when you press the "Ch Power ACLR" softkey in the MEAS menu.

► To start a new measurement after changing the settings, press the RUN SINGLE
or RUN CONT hardkeys.
Alternatively, you can save your settings as a user standard (see "User-Defined
Configurations" on page 293), then select that standard and start the measure-
ment as usual by pressing the "Ch Power ACLR" softkey.
The configured measurement is performed (depending on the number of defined chan-

nels, see "# of Adj Chan" on page 295) and the results are displayed in the graphic
and the result table.
User-Defined Configurations
You can define measurement configurations independently of a predefinded standard
and save the current ACLR configuration as a "user standard" in an xml file. You can
then load the file and thus the settings again at a later time.
User-defined standards are not supported for "Fast ACLR" and Multi-Carrier ACLR
measurements.
Compatibility to R&S FSP

User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S FSP family are compatible to the
R&S FSVA/FSV. User standards created on an R&S FSVA/FSV, however, are not
necessarily compatible to the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and may not work
there.
To store a user-defined configuration

1. Select the "User Standard" softkey in the "Ch Power" menu.
2. Press "Save".
3. Define a file name for the user standard and select its storage location.
By default, the xml file is stored in C:\R_S\Instr\acp_std\. However, you can
define any other storage location.
4. Press "Save".
The following parameter definitions are saved:
● "# of Adj Chan" on page 295
● Channel spacing and adjacent-channel spacing, see "Spacing" on page 298
● Channel bandwidth of transmission (Tx), adjacent (Adj) and alternate (Alt)
channels, see "Bandwidth" on page 297
● Resolution bandwidth, see "Res BW Auto" on page 205
● Video bandwidth, see "Video BW Auto" on page 206
● Detector, see "Detector" on page 222
● ACLR limits and their state, see "Limits" on page 299
● Sweep time and sweep time coupling, see "Sweep Time" on page 302
● Trace and power mode, see "Select Trace" on page 301 and "Power Mode"
on page 301

To load a user-defined configuration

► Press "User Standard > Load" and select the user standard file.
Softkeys for Channel and Adjacent-Channel Power Measurements

Ch Power ACLR..........................................................................................................294
└ CP/ACLR Standard.......................................................................................295
└ CP/ACLR Settings........................................................................................ 295
└ # of TX Chan.......................................................................................295
└ # of Adj Chan...................................................................................... 295
└ Channel Setup.................................................................................... 296
└ Bandwidth.................................................................................297
└ ACLR Reference............................................................ 297
└ Spacing.....................................................................................298
└ Names...................................................................................... 299
└ Weighting Filter.........................................................................299
└ Limits........................................................................................ 299
└ Limit Checking................................................................299
└ Relative Limit..................................................................300
└ Absolute Limit.................................................................300
└ Check............................................................................. 300
└ Chan Pwr/Hz.......................................................................................300
└ Power Mode........................................................................................301
└ Clear/Write................................................................................301
└ Max Hold.................................................................................. 301
└ Select Trace........................................................................................301
└ ACLR (Abs/Rel).................................................................................. 301
└ Adjust Settings....................................................................................301
└ Sweep Time.................................................................................................. 302
└ Fast ACLR (On/Off)...................................................................................... 302
└ Set CP Reference......................................................................................... 302
└ User Standard...............................................................................................303
└ Load....................................................................................................303
└ Save....................................................................................................303
└ Delete................................................................................................. 303
└ Noise Correction........................................................................................... 304
└ Adjust Ref Lvl................................................................................................304
Ch Power ACLR
Activates the active channel or adjacent-channel power measurement either for a sin-
gle carrier signal or for several carrier signals, depending on the current measurement
configuration, and opens a submenu to configure the channel power measurement.
With default settings the measurement is performed by integrating the powers at the
display points within the specified channels (IBW method).
If several TX cahnnels (carriers) are activated, the number of measured values is
increased to ensure that adjacent-channel powers are measured with adequate accu-
racy.

For general information on performing channel or adjacent-channel power measure-

ments, see Chapter 4.3.5.2, "Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel
Power", on page 283.
Remote command:
CP/ACLR Standard ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens an edit dialog box to select the settings according to predefined standards. For
details on the available standards see "Predefined CP/ACLR Standards" on page 304.
By default no standard is set.
The selection of the standard influences the following parameters (see "Optimized Set-
tings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 306):
● channel spacing and adjacent-channel spacing
● channel bandwidth, adjacent-channel bandwidth, and type of filtering
● resolution bandwidth
● video bandwidth
● detector
● # of adjacent channels
● trace averaging (switched off)
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet on page 691
CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens a submenu to configure the channel power and adjacent channel power mea-
surement independently of the predefined standards (for details see also "Predefined
CP/ACLR Standards" on page 304 and "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Param-
eters" on page 306).
# of TX Chan ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of carrier signals to be taken into
account in channel and adjacent-channel power measurements. Values from 1 to 18
are allowed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt on page 843
# of Adj Chan ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of adjacent channels to be considered in
the adjacent-channel power measurement. Values from 0 to 12 are allowed.
The following measurements are performed depending on the number of the channels:
0 Only the channel powers are measured.
1 The channel powers and the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel are measured.
2 The channel powers, the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel, and of the next higher
and lower channel (alternate channel 1) are measured.

3 The channel power, the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel, the power of the next
higher and lower channel (alternate channel 1), and of the next but one higher and lower adja-
cent channel (alternate channel 2) are measured.
… …
12 The channel power, the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel, and the power of the all
higher and lower channels (alternate channel 1 to 11) are measured.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs on page 834
Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens a dialog to define the channel settings for all channels, independant of the
defined number of used TX or adjacent channels.
The dialog contains the following tabs:

● "Bandwidth" on page 297
● "Spacing" on page 298
● "Names" on page 299
● "Weighting Filter" on page 299
● "Limits" on page 299

Bandwidth ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Define the channel bandwidths for the transmission channels and the adjacent chan-
nels. "TX" is only available for the multi-carrier ACLR measurement. When you change
the bandwidth for one channel, the value is automatically also defined for all subse-
quent channels of the same type.
The transmission-channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard.
The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard (see "Optimized
Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 306).
● Measurements in zero span (see Fast ACLR (On/Off) softkey) are performed in the
zero span mode. The channel limits are indicated by vertical lines. For measure-
ments requiring channel bandwidths deviating from those defined in the selected
standard the IBW method is to be used.
● With the IBW method (see Fast ACLR (On/Off) softkey), the channel bandwidth
limits are marked by two vertical lines right and left of the channel center fre-
quency. Thus you can visually check whether the entire power of the signal under
test is within the selected channel bandwidth.
If measuring according to the IBW method ("Fast ACLR Off"), the bandwidths of
the different adjacent channels are to be entered numerically. Since all adjacent
channels often have the same bandwidth, the other alternate channels are set to
the bandwidth of the adjacent channel when it is changed. Thus, only one value
needs to be entered in case of equal adjacent channel bandwidths.
For details on available channel filters see Chapter 4.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate
Filter Type", on page 211.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel<channel>]
on page 835
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel on page 835
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<channel>
on page 835
ACLR Reference ← Bandwidth ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch

Power ACLR
Select the transmission channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values
should be referenced.
TX Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used.
Min Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a refer-
ence channel.
Max Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a refer-
ence channel.
Lowest & Highest Channel The outer left-hand transmission channel is the reference channel
for the lower adjacent channels, the outer right-hand transmission
channel that for the upper adjacent channels.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual on page 841
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO on page 840

Spacing ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Define the channel spacings for the TX channels and for the adjacent channels.
● TX channels (left column)
TX1-2 spacing between the first and the second carrier
TX2-3 spacing between the second and the third carrier
… …
The spacings between all adjacent TX channels can be defined separately. When you
change the spacing for one channel, the value is automatically also defined for all sub-
sequent TX channels in order to set up a system with equal TX channel spacing
quickly. For different spacings, a setup from top to bottom is necessary.
If the spacings are not equal, the channel distribution according to the center frequency
is as follows:
Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency.
Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the fre-
quency between those two channels. This frequency is aligned to
the center frequency.
● Adjacent channels (right column)

Since all the adjacent channels often have the same distance to each other, the
modification of the adjacent-channel spacing (ADJ) causes a change in all higher
adjacent-channel spacings (ALT1, ALT2, …): they are all multiplied by the same
factor (new spacing value/old spacing value). Thus only one value needs to be
entered in case of equal channel spacing. A modification of a higher adjacent-
channel spacing (ALT1, ALT2, …) causes a change by the same factor in all higher
adjacent-channel spacings, while the lower adjacent-channel spacings remain
unchanged.
Example:
In the default setting, the adjacent channels have the following spacing: 20 kHz
("ADJ"), 40 kHz ("ALT1"), 60 kHz ("ALT2"), 80 kHz ("ALT3"), 100 kHz ("ALT4"), …
If the spacing of the first adjacent channel ("ADJ") is set to 40 kHz, the spacing of
all other adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 2 to result in 80 kHz ("ALT1"),
120 kHz ("ALT2"), 160 kHz ("ALT3"), …
If, starting from the default setting, the spacing of the 5th adjacent channel ("ALT4")
is set to 150 kHz, the spacing of all higher adjacent channels is multiplied by factor
1.5 to result in 180 kHz ("ALT5"), 210 kHz ("ALT6"), 240 kHz ("ALT7"), …
If a ACLR or MC-ACLR measurement is started, all settings according to the stan-
dard including the channel bandwidths and channel spacings are set and can be
adjusted afterwards.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<channel> on page 842
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] on page 841
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<channel> on page 842

Names ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Define user-specific channel names for each channel. The names defined here are dis-
played in the result diagram and result table.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel on page 838
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<channel> on page 839
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<channel> on page 839
Weighting Filter ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Define weighting filters for all channels. Weighting filters are not available for all sup-
ported standards and cannot always be defined manually where they are available.
The dialog contains the following fields:
Field Description
Channel ● TX 1-18: TX channels

● ADJ: Adjacent channel
● ALT1-11: Alternate channels
Active Activates/Deactivates the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent channels of
the same type
Alpha Defines the alpha value for the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent chan-
nels of the same type
Remote command:
POW:ACH:FILT:CHAN1 ON, see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:
CHANnel<channel> on page 838
Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 1.
POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:CHAN1 0,35 see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:
ALPHa:CHANnel<channel> on page 837
Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for TX channel 1 to 0,35.
POW:ACH:FILT:ACH ON see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:
ACHannel on page 837
Activates the weighting filter for the adjacent channel.
POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ACH 0,35 see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:
ALPHa:ACHannel on page 836
Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the adjacent channel to 0,35.
POW:ACH:FILT:ALT1 ON see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:
ALTernate<channel> on page 837
Activates the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1.
POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ALT1 0,35 see [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:
ALPHa:ALTernate<channel> on page 836
Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1 to 0,35.
Limits ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Activate and define the limits for the ACLR measurement.
Limit Checking ← Limits ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power

ACLR
Activate or deactivate limit checking for the ACLR measurement.

The following rules apply for the limits:

● A separate limit can be defined for each adjacent channel. The limit applies to both
the upper and the lower adjacent channel.
● A relative and/or absolute limit can be defined. The check of both limit values can
be activated independently.
● The R&S FSVA/FSV checks adherence to the limits irrespective of whether the lim-
its are absolute or relative or whether the measurement is carried out with absolute
or relative levels. If both limits are active and if the higher of both limit values is
exceeded, the measured value is marked by a preceding asterisk.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] on page 633
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult on page 636
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<channel>[:RELative]
on page 637
Relative Limit ← Limits ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power

ACLR
Defines a limit relative to the carrier signal.
Remote command:
CALC:LIM:ACP ON, see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe]
on page 633
CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent-channel> 0dBc,0dBc
CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent-channel>:STAT ON
Absolute Limit ← Limits ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power

ACLR
Defines an absolute limit.
Remote command:
CALC:LIM:ACP ON, see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe]
on page 633
CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent-channel>:ABS -10dBm,-10dBm
CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent-channel>:ABS:STAT ON, see CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe on page 635
Check ← Limits ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Activate or deactivate the limit to be considered during a limit check. The check of both
limit values can be activated independently.
Chan Pwr/Hz ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

If deactivated, the channel power is displayed in dBm. If activated, the channel power
density is displayed instead. Thus, the absolute unit of the channel power is switched
from dBm to dBm/Hz. The channel power density in dBm/Hz corresponds to the power
inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows:
"channel power density = channel power – log10(channel bandwidth)"
By means of this function it is possible e.g. to measure the signal/noise power density
or use the additional functions "ACLR (Abs/Rel)" on page 301 and "ACLR Reference"
on page 297 to obtain the signal to noise ratio.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ on page 695
Power Mode ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens a submenu to select the power mode.
Clear/Write ← Power Mode ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

If this mode is activated, the channel power and the adjacent channel powers are cal-
culated directly from the current trace (default mode).
Remote command:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:MODE WRIT, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
POWer:MODE on page 690
Max Hold ← Power Mode ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

If this mode is activated, the power values are calculated from the current trace and
compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm. The higher value
is retained. If activated, the enhancement label "Pwr Max" is displayed.
Remote command:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:MODE MAXH, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
POWer:MODE on page 690
Select Trace ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the trace number on which the CP/ACLR measure-
ment is to be performed. Only activated traces can be selected.
For details on trace modes see Chapter 4.2.8.4, "Trace Mode Overview", on page 231.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe on page 844
ACLR (Abs/Rel) ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Switches between absolute and relative power measurement in the adjacent channels.
Abs The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y-axis, e.g. in dBm,
dBµV.
Rel The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel
in dBc.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE on page 838
Adjust Settings ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR

Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration
(channel bandwidth, channel spacing) within a specific frequency range (channel band-
width). The adjustment is carried out only once. If necessary, the instrument settings
can be changed later.
For details on the settings of span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, detector
and trace averaging see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters"
on page 306.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 839
Sweep Time ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time. With the RMS detector, a longer
sweep time increases the stability of the measurement results.
The function of this softkey is identical to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the "Band-
width" menu.
Remote command:
Fast ACLR (On/Off) ← Ch Power ACLR

Switches between the IBW method ("Fast ACLR Off") and the zero span method ("Fast
ACLR On").
When switched on, the R&S FSVA/FSV sets the center frequency consecutively to the
different channel center frequencies and measures the power with the selected mea-
surement time (= sweep time/number of channels). The RBW filters suitable for the
selected standard and frequency offset are automatically used (e.g. root raised cos
with IS 136). For details on available channel filters see Chapter 4.2.6.3, "Selecting the
Appropriate Filter Type", on page 211.
The RMS detector is used for obtaining correct power measurement results. Therefore
this requires no software correction factors.
Measured values are output as a list. The powers of the transmission channels are out-
put in dBm, the powers of the adjacent channels in dBm.
The sweep time is selected depending on the desired reproducibility of results. Repro-
ducibility increases with sweep time since power measurement is then performed over
a longer time period. As a general approach, it can be assumed that approx. 500 non-
correlated measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0.5 dB (99 % of the
measurements are within 0.5 dB of the true measured value). This holds true for white
noise. The measured values are considered as non-correlated if their time interval cor-
responds to the reciprocal of the measured bandwidth.
With IS 136 the measurement bandwidth is approx. 25 kHz, i.e. measured values at an
interval of 40 µs are considered as non-correlated. A measurement time of 40 ms is
thus required per channel for 1000 measured values. This is the default sweep time
which the R&S FSVA/FSV sets in coupled mode. Approx. 5000 measured values are
required for a reproducibility of 0.1 dB (99 %), i.e. the measurement time is to be
increased to 200 ms.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed on page 843
Set CP Reference ← Ch Power ACLR

Defines the currently measured channel power as the reference value if channel power
measurement is activated. The reference value is displayed in the "Tx1 (Ref) Power"
field; the default value is 0 dBm.
The softkey is available only for multi carrier ACLR measurements.

In adjacent-channel power measurement with one or several carrier signals, the power
is always referenced to a transmission channel, i.e. no value is displayed for "Tx1 (Ref)
Power".
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE on page 840
User Standard ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens a submenu to configure customized standards.
Load ← User Standard ← Ch Power ACLR

Opens a dialog to select and load a user defined ACLR standard.
Note: Compatibility to R&S FSP. User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S
FSP family are compatible to the R&S FSV. User standards created on an R&S FSV,
however, are not necessarily compatible to the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and
may not work there.
Remote command:
Querying available standards:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:CATalog?
on page 697
Loading a standard:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet on page 691
Save ← User Standard ← Ch Power ACLR

Saves the current ACLR configuration in an xml file in order for you to use it again at a
later time. You can define the drive, path and file name in the corresponding dialog.
The default location is C:\R_S\Instr\acp_std\.
Note that the ACLR user standard is not supported by Fast ACLR and Multi Carrier
ACLR measurements.
If you create your own standard, you can customize the following parameters:
● number of adjacent channels
● channel bandwidth of transmission (Tx), adjacent (Adj) and alternate (Alt) channels
● channel spacings
● resolution and video bandwidth
● ACLR limits and their state
● sweep time and sweep time coupling
● detector
● trace mode
Remote command:
Configuring channels:
see "SENSe:POWer Subsystem" on page 833
Saving custom channel configurations:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:SAVE on page 697
Delete ← User Standard ← Ch Power ACLR

Deletes the user standard that you select in the corresponding dialog box. Note that
the R&S FSVA/FSV deletes the file without further notice.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:DELete on page 697
Noise Correction ← Ch Power ACLR

is performed.
Remote command:
Adjust Ref Lvl ← Ch Power ACLR

Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power. This ensures that the set-
tings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal
level without overloading the R&S FSVA/FSV or limiting the dynamic range by a too
small S/N ratio.
For details on manual settings see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters"
on page 306.
The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard. To achieve an opti-
mum dynamic range, the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal
maximum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message. Since the
measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than
the signal bandwidth, the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still sig-
nificantly below the reference level.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel on page 840
Predefined CP/ACLR Standards

When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement, the test parameters for the
channel and adjacent-channel measurements are configured automatically. The availa-
ble standards are listed below.
Predefined standards are selected using the "CP/ACLR Standard" softkey or the
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES command.

Standard GUI-Parameter SCPI-Parameter
EUTRA/LTE Square EUTRA/LTE Square EUTRa
EUTRA/LTE Square/RRC EUTRA/LTE Square/RRC REUTRa
W-CDMA 3.84 MHz forward W-CDMA 3GPP FWD FW3G
W-CDMA 3.84 MHz reverse W-CDMA 3GPP REV RW3G
CDMA IS95A forward CDMA IS95A FWD F8CD | FIS95a
CDMA IS95A reverse CDMA IS95A REV R8CD | RIS95a
CDMA IS95C Class 0 forward*) CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD FIS95c0
CDMA IS95C Class 0 reverse*) CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV RIS95c0
CDMA J-STD008 forward CDMA J-STD008 FWD F19C | FJ008
CDMA J-STD008 reverse CDMA J-STD008 REV R19C | RJ008
CDMA IS95C Class 1 forward*) CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD FIS95c1
CDMA IS95C Class 1 reverse*) CDMA IS95C Class 1 REV RIS95c1
CDMA 2000 CDMA 2000 S2CD
TD-SCDMA forward TD SCDMA FWD FTCD | TCDMa
TD-SCDMA reverse TD SCDMA REV RTCD
WLAN 802.11A WLAN 802.11A AWLan
WLAN 802.11B WLAN 802.11B BWLan
WiMAX WiMAX WiMAX
WIBRO WIBRO WIBRO
GSM GSM GSM
RFID 14443 RFID 14443 RFID14443
TETRA TETRA TETRA
PDC PDC PDC
PHS PHS PHS
CDPD CDPD CDPD
APCO-25 Phase 2 APCO-25 P2 PAPCo25
For the R&S FSVA/FSV, the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the
center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission
channel. The definition of the adjacent-channel spacing in standards IS95C and CDMA
2000 is different. These standards define the adjacent-channel spacing from the center
of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel. This defini-
tion is also used for the R&S FSVA/FSV if the standards marked with an asterisk *) are
selected.

Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters

The "Adjust Settings" softkey (see "Adjust Settings" on page 301) automatically optimi-
zes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration, as described in the
following:
● Frequency span
The frequency span must at least cover the channels to be measured plus a mea-
surement margin of approx. 10 %.
If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth (or the adja-
cent-channel bandwidths) being examined, only a few points on the trace are avail-
able per channel. This reduces the accuracy of the waveform calculation for the
channel filter used, which has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy. It is
therefore strongly recommended that the formulas mentioned be taken into consid-
eration when selecting the frequency span.
For channel power measurements the Adjust Settings softkey sets the frequency
span as follows:
"(No. of transmission channels – 1) x transmission channel spacing + 2 x transmis-
sion channel bandwidth + measurement margin"
For adjacent-channel power measurements, the Adjust Settings softkey sets the
frequency span as a function of the number of transmission channels, the trans-
mission channel spacing, the adjacent-channel spacing, and the bandwidth of one
of adjacent-channels ADJ, ALT1 or ALT2, whichever is furthest away from the
transmission channels:
"(No. of transmission channels – 1) x transmission channel spacing + 2 x (adja-
cent-channel spacing + adjacent-channel bandwidth) + measurement margin"
The measurement margin is approx. 10 % of the value obtained by adding the
channel spacing and the channel bandwidth.
● Resolution bandwidth (RBW)
To ensure both, acceptable measurement speed and required selection (to sup-
press spectral components outside the channel to be measured, especially of the
adjacent channels), the resolution bandwidth must not be selected too small or too
large. As a general approach, the resolution bandwidth is to be set to values
between 1% and 4% of the channel bandwidth.
A larger resolution bandwidth can be selected if the spectrum within the channel to
be measured and around it has a flat characteristic. In the standard setting, e.g. for
standard IS95A REV at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz, a resolution
bandwidth of 30 kHz is used. This yields correct results since the spectrum in the
neighborhood of the adjacent channels normally has a constant level.
With the exception of the IS95 CDMA standards, the Adjust Settings softkey sets
the resolution bandwidth (RBW) as a function of the channel bandwidth:
"RBW ≤ 1/40 of channel bandwidth"
The maximum possible resolution bandwidth (with respect to the requirement RBW
≤ 1/40) resulting from the available RBW steps (1, 3) is selected.
● Video bandwidth (VBW)
For a correct power measurement, the video signal must not be limited in band-
width. A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause signal
averaging and thus result in a too low indication of the power (-2.51 dB at very low
video bandwidths). The video bandwidth should therefore be selected at least three
times the resolution bandwidth:

"VBW ≥ 3 x RBW"
The Adjust Settings softkey sets the video bandwidth (VBW) as a function of the
channel bandwidth (see formula above) and the smallest possible VBW with regard
to the available step size will be selected.
● Detector
The Adjust Settings softkey selects the RMS detector. This detector is selected
since it correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal
to be measured. The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each
measurement point. The IF envelope is digitized using a sampling frequency which
is at least five times the resolution bandwidth which has been selected. Based on
the sample values, the power is calculated for each measurement point using the
following formula:
where:
"si = linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A/D converter"
"N = number of A/D converter values per measurement point"
"PRMS = power represented by a measurement point"
When the power has been calculated, the power units are converted into decibels
and the value is displayed as a measurement point.
In principle, the sample detector would be possible as well. Due to the limited num-
ber of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel, the sample
detector would yield less stable results.
● Trace averaging
The Adjust Settings softkey switches off this function. Averaging, which is often
performed to stabilize the measurement results, leads to a too low level indication
and should therefore be avoided. The reduction in the displayed power depends on
the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be mea-
sured.
● Reference level
The Adjust Settings softkey does not influence the reference level. It can be adjus-
ted separately using the "Adjust Ref Lvl" softkey (see "Adjust Ref Lvl"
on page 304).
4.3.5.3 Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio
The R&S FSVA/FSV can easily determine the carrier-to-noise ratio, also normalized to
a 1 Hz bandwidth.
The largest signal in the frequency span is the carrier. It is searched when the C/N or
C/NO function is activated (see "C/N, C/No" on page 309) and is marked using a fixed
reference marker ("FXD").
To determine the noise power, a channel at the defined center frequency is examined.
The bandwidth of the channel is defined by the "Channel Bandwidth" setting. The
power within this channel is integrated to obtain the noise power level. (If the carrier is
within this channel, an extra step is required to determine the correct noise power
level, see below.)

The noise power of the channel is subtracted from the maximum carrier signal level,
and in the case of a C/NO measurement, it is referred to a 1 Hz bandwidth.
For this measurement, the RMS detector is activated.

The carrier-to-noise measurements are only available in the frequency domain (span
>0).
There are two methods to measure the carrier-to-noise ratio:

● The carrier is outside the examined channel: In this case, it is sufficient to switch
on the desired measurement function and to set the channel bandwidth. The car-
rier/noise ratio is displayed on the screen.
● The carrier is inside the examined channel: In this case, the measurement must be
performed in two steps:
– First, perform the reference measurement by switching on either the C/N or the
C/NO measurement and waiting for the end of the next measurement run. The
fixed reference marker is set to the maximum of the measured carrier signal.
– Then, switch off the carrier so that only the noise of the test setup is active in
the channel. The carrier-to-noise ratio is displayed after the subsequent mea-
surement has been completed.
The frequency span should be set to approximately 4 times the channel bandwidth in
order to measure the carrier-to-noise ratio correctly. This setting is defined automati-
cally by the "Adjust Settings" function.
To determine the carrier-to-noise ratio

1. Press the "C/N, C/NO" softkey to configure the carrier-to-noise ratio measurement.
2. To change the channel bandwidth to be examined, press the "Channel Bandwidth"

softkey.
3. To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration, press the "Adjust
Settings" softkey.
4. To activate the measurements without reference to the bandwidth, press the "C/N"
softkey.
To activate the measurements with reference to the bandwidth, press the "C/NO"
softkey .
5. If the carrier signal is located within the examined channel bandwidth, switch off
the carrier signal so that only the noise is displayed in the channel and perform a
second measurement.
The carrier-to-noise ratio is displayed after the measurement has been completed.
Measurement results
As a result of the carrier-to-noise measurement the evaluated bandwidth and the cal-
culated C/N ratio are indicated beneath the diagram.

You can also query the determined carrier-to-noise ratio via the remote command
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN or CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN0, see
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? on page 692.
Softkeys for Carrier-to-Noise Ratio Measurements

C/N, C/No....................................................................................................................309
└ C/N................................................................................................................309
└ C/No..............................................................................................................309
└ Channel Bandwidth ......................................................................................309
└ Adjust Settings ............................................................................................. 310
C/N, C/No
Carrier-to-noise measurements are not available in zero span mode.
Note: As of firmware version 2.0, carrier-to-noise measurements are also available in
the I/Q Analyzer, but only for Spectrum displays (see "Display Config" on page 417).
For general information on performing carrier-to-noise ratio measurements see Chap-
ter 4.3.5.3, "Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio", on page 307.
C/N ← C/N, C/No

Switches the measurement of the carrier/noise ratio on or off. If no marker is active,
marker 1 is activated.
The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to. To shift
marker 1 and measure another trace, use the Marker to Trace softkey in the "Marker
To" menu.
Remote command:
C/No ← C/N, C/No

Switches the measurement of the carrier/noise ratio with reference to a 1 Hz bandwidth
on or off. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
To" menu.
Remote command:
Channel Bandwidth ← C/N, C/No

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the measurement channel bandwidth for each chan-
nel.
The default setting is 14 kHz.

Note that in the I/Q Analyzer the channel bandwidth does not change the measure-
ment span or sampling rate; it merely defines the range for the carrier-to-noise analy-
sis.
Remote command:
Adjust Settings ← C/N, C/No

Enables the RMS detector (see also Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Overview",
on page 233) and adjusts the span to the selected channel bandwidth according to:
"4 x channel bandwidth + measurement margin"
The adjustment is performed once; if necessary, the setting can be changed later on.
Note: in the I/Q Analyzer, this function is not available. The channel bandwidth defines
the range for the carrier-to-noise analysis.
Remote command:
4.3.5.4 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth
An important characteristic of a modulated signal is its occupied bandwidth. In a radio

communications system for instance the occupied bandwidth must be limited to enable
distortion-free transmission in adjacent channels. The occupied bandwidth is defined
as the bandwidth containing a defined percentage of the total transmitted power. A per-
centage between 10 % and 99.9 % can be set.
The measurement principle is the following: The bandwidth containing 99% of the sig-
nal power is to be determined, for example. The routine first calculates the total power
of all displayed points of the trace. In the next step, the points from the right edge of
the trace are summed up until 0.5 % of the total power is reached. Auxiliary marker 1 is
positioned at the corresponding frequency. Then the points from the left edge of the
trace are summed up until 0.5 % of the power is reached. Auxiliary marker 2 is posi-
tioned at this point. 99 % of the power is now between the two markers. The distance
between the two frequency markers is the occupied bandwidth which is displayed in
the marker field.

New: OBW now also possible within defined search limits - multi-carrier OBW
measurement in one sweep
As of R&S FSVA/FSV firmware version 1.71, the occupied bandwidth of the signal can
be determined within defined search limits instead of for the entire signal. Thus, only a
single sweep is required to determine the OBW for a multi-carrier signal. To do so,
search limits are defined for an individual carrier and the OBW measurement is restric-
ted to the frequency range contained within those limits. Then the search limits are
adapted for the next carrier and the OBW is automatically re-calculated for the new
range.
The OBW measurement uses the same search limits as defined for marker search
(see "Search Limits" on page 273). However, only the left and right limits are consid-
ered.
To ensure correct power measurement, especially for noise signals, and to obtain the
correct occupied bandwidth, the following prerequisites and settings are necessary:
● Only the signal to be measured is displayed on the screen. An additional signal
would falsify the measurement.
● RBW << occupied bandwidth
(approx. 1/20 of occupied bandwidth, for voice communication type 300 Hz or 1
kHz)
● VBW ≥ 3 x RBW
● RMS detector
● Span ≥ 2 to 3 x occupied bandwidth

Some of the measurement specifications (e.g. PDC, RCR STD-27B) require measure-
ment of the occupied bandwidth using a peak detector. The detector setting of the
R&S FSVA/FSV has to be changed accordingly then.
A remote control programming example is described in Chapter 5.4.5, "Occupied

Bandwidth Measurement", on page 1017.
To determine the occupied bandwidth
1. Press the OBW softkey to activate the measurement of the occupied bandwidth.
The corresponding submenu is displayed.
2. Press the "% Power Bandwidth" softkey to enter the percentage of power (see "%
Power Bandwidth (span > 0)" on page 313).
3. To change the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel, press the "Channel
Bandwidth" softkey (see "Channel Bandwidth (span > 0)" on page 313).
4. To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration, press the Adjust
Settings softkey. For details see also "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test
Parameters" on page 306.
5. To adjust the reference level to the measured total power after the first sweep,
press the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey.
Measurement results
As a result of the OBW measurement the occupied bandwidth ("Occ BW") is indicated
in the marker results. Furthermore, the marker at the center frequency and the tempo-
rary markers are indicated.
The OBW calculation is repeated if the Search Limits are changed, without performing
a new sweep. Thus, the OBW for a multi-carrier signal can be determined using only
one sweep.
The determined occupied bandwidth can also be queried using the remote command
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW or CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? AOBW. While
the OBW parameter returns only the occupied bandwidth, the AOBW parameter also
returns the position and level of the temporary markers T1 and T2 used to calculate the
occupied bandwidth.
Softkeys for Occupied Bandwidth (OBW) Measurements

OBW............................................................................................................................313
└ % Power Bandwidth (span > 0).................................................................... 313
└ Channel Bandwidth (span > 0)..................................................................... 313
└ Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0).............................................................................. 313
└ Adjust Settings.............................................................................................. 314

OBW
Activates measurement of the occupied bandwidth according to the current configura-
tion and opens a submenu to configure the measurement. The occupied bandwidth is
displayed in the marker display field and marked on the trace by temporary markers.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.4, "Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth", on page 310.
This measurement is not available in zero span.
The measurement is performed on the trace with marker 1. In order to evaluate
another trace, marker 1 must be placed on another trace (see the Marker to Trace soft-
key in the "Marker" menu).
Remote command:
% Power Bandwidth (span > 0) ← OBW

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the percentage of total power in the displayed fre-
quency range which defines the occupied bandwidth. Values from 10% to 99.9% are
allowed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth on page 843
Channel Bandwidth (span > 0) ← OBW

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel.
The specified channel bandwidth is used for optimization of the test parameters (for
details see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 306). The
default setting is 14 kHz.
For measurements in line with a specific transmission standard, the bandwidth speci-
fied by the standard for the transmission channel must be entered.
Remote command:
on page 835
Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0) ← OBW

Adjusts the reference level to the measured total power of the signal. the softkey is
activated after the first sweep with active measurement of the occupied bandwidth has
been completed and the total power of the signal is thus known.
Adjusting the reference level ensures that the signal path will not be overloaded and
the dynamic range not limited by too low a reference level. Since the measurement
bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal band-
width, the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is distinctly below the ref-
erence level. If the measured channel power is equal to the reference level, the signal
path cannot be overloaded.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel on page 840

Adjust Settings ← OBW

Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration
(channel bandwidth, channel spacing) within a specific frequency range (channel band-
width). The adjustment is carried out only once. If necessary, the instrument settings
can be changed later.
For details on the settings of span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, detector
and trace averaging see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters"
on page 306.
Remote command:
4.3.5.5 Measuring with Spectrum Emission Masks
tors compliance with a spectral mask. The SEM measurement is used to measure the
excess emissions of a TX channel that would interfere to other channels or to other
systems.
The SEM measurement of the base unit allows a flexible definition of all parameters in
the SEM measurement. It is performed using the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey in
the "Measurement" menu. Most parameters are defined in the "Sweep List" dialog box
(see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 317). After a preset, the sweep list contains a
set of default ranges and parameters. For each range, you can change the parame-
ters. For information on other SEM settings, see the description of the corresponding
softkeys ("Spectrum Emission Mask" on page 316).
If you want a parameter set to be available permanently, you can create an XML file for
this configuration and, if necessary, export this file to another application (for details
refer to "Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files" on page 334 and
"ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)" on page 339).
Some predefined XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according
to the selected standard (see "Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask
Measurement" on page 331).
In order to improve the performance of the R&S FSVA/FSV for spectrum emission
mask measurements, a "Fast SEM" mode is available. For details see "Fast Spectrum
Emission Mask Measurements" on page 340.
Monitoring compliance of the spectrum is supported by a special limit check for SEM
measurements, see "Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements" on page 329.
A remote control programming example is described in Chapter 5.4.12, "Spectrum

Emission Mask Measurement", on page 1028.
Softkeys for Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurements....................................315

Result Evaluation........................................................................................................ 326
Ranges and Range Settings....................................................................................... 328
Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements........................................................ 329

Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement......................... 331
Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files....................................... 334
ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)................................................ 339
Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements...........................................................340
Softkeys for Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurements

Spectrum Emission Mask............................................................................................316
└ Sweep List.................................................................................................... 316
└ Sweep List dialog box.........................................................................317
└ Range Start / Range Stop........................................................ 317
└ Fast SEM..................................................................................317
└ Filter Type.................................................................................317
└ RBW......................................................................................... 318
└ VBW......................................................................................... 318
└ Sweep Time Mode....................................................................318
└ Sweep Time..............................................................................318
└ Ref. Level................................................................................. 318
└ RF Att. Mode............................................................................ 318
└ RF Attenuator........................................................................... 318
└ Preamp..................................................................................... 318
└ Transd. Factor.......................................................................... 319
└ Limit Check 1-4.........................................................................319
└ Abs Limit Start.......................................................................... 319
└ Abs Limit Stop.......................................................................... 319
└ Rel Limit Start........................................................................... 320
└ Rel Limit Stop........................................................................... 320
└ Close Sweep List................................................................................ 320
└ Insert before Range............................................................................ 320
└ Insert after Range............................................................................... 320
└ Delete Range......................................................................................320
└ Symmetric Setup................................................................................ 321
└ Edit Reference Range........................................................................ 321
└ List Evaluation...............................................................................................322
└ List Evaluation (On/Off)...................................................................... 322
└ Margin.................................................................................................322
└ Show Peaks........................................................................................322
└ Save Evaluation List........................................................................... 322
└ ASCII File Export...................................................................... 322
└ Decim Sep................................................................................ 323
└ Edit Reference Range...................................................................................323
└ Edit Power Classes.......................................................................................324
└ Used Power Classes.......................................................................... 324
└ PMin/PMax......................................................................................... 325
└ Sweep List.......................................................................................... 325
└ Add/Remove....................................................................................... 325
└ Load Standard.............................................................................................. 325

└ Save As Standard......................................................................................... 325

└ Meas Start/Stop............................................................................................ 325
└ Restore Standard Files................................................................................. 326
Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a submenu to configure the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement.
tors compliance with a spectral mask. The SEM measurement of the base unit allows a
flexible definition of all parameters in the SEM measurement.
For general information on performing SEM measurements, see Chapter 4.3.5.5,
"Measuring with Spectrum Emission Masks", on page 314.
Remote command:
SENS:SWE:MODE ESP, see [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 850
Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a submenu to edit the sweep list and displays the "Sweep List" dialog box.

Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

After a preset, the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters. For
each range, you can change the parameters listed below. To insert or delete ranges,
use the "Insert Before Range", "Insert After Range", "Delete Range" softkeys. The
measurement results are not updated during editing but on closing the dialog box ("Edit
Sweep List/ Close Sweep List" softkey, see "Close Sweep List" on page 320).
The changes of the sweep list are only kept until you load another parameter set (by
pressing PRESET or by loading an XML file). If you want a parameter set to be availa-
ble permanently, create an XML file for this configuration (for details refer to "Format
Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files" on page 334).
If you load one of the provided XML files ("Load Standard" softkey, see "Load Stan-
dard" on page 325), the sweep list contains ranges and parameters according to the
selected standard. For further details refer also to "Provided XML Files for the Spec-
trum Emission Mask Measurement" on page 331.
Note: If you edit the sweep list, always follow the rules and consider the limitations
described in "Ranges and Range Settings" on page 328.
Range Start / Range Stop ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum
Emission Mask
Sets the start frequency/stop frequency of the selected range. Follow the rules descri-
bed in "Ranges and Range Settings" on page 328.
In order to change the start/stop frequency of the first/last range, select the appropriate
span with the SPAN key. If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the
ranges, the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and
have a minimum span of 20 Hz. The first and last ranges are adapted to the given
span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.
Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency.
The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency. The minimum span
of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt on page 790
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP on page 791
Fast SEM ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Activates "Fast SEM" mode for all ranges in the sweep list. For details see "Fast Spec-
trum Emission Mask Measurements" on page 340.
Note: If "Fast SEM" mode is deactivated while Symmetric Setup mode is on, "Symmet-
rical Setup" mode is automatically also deactivated.
If "Fast SEM" mode is activated while "Symmetrical Setup" mode is on, not all range
settings can be set automatically.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 787
Filter Type ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Sets the filter type for this range. For details on filters see also Chapter 4.2.6.3,
"Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 211.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE on page 790
RBW ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Sets the RBW value for this range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 788
VBW ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Sets the VBW value for this range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo on page 789
Sweep Time Mode ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 796
Sweep Time ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Sets the sweep time value for the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME on page 795
Ref. Level ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Sets the reference level for the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:RLEVel on page 795
RF Att. Mode ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 792
RF Attenuator ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission

Mask
Sets the attenuation value for that range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation on page 791
Preamp ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask
Switches the preamplifier on or off.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 792

Transd. Factor ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a transducer that fulfills
the following conditions:
● The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range.
● The x-axis is linear.
● The unit is dB.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer on page 796
Limit Check 1-4 ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets the type of limit check for all ranges.
For details on limit checks see "Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements"
on page 329.
For details on limit checks see the base unit description "Working with Lines in SEM".
The limit state affects the availability of all limit settings ("Abs Limit Start" on page 319,
"Abs Limit Stop" on page 319, "Rel Limit Start" on page 320, "Rel Limit Stop"
on page 320).
Depending on the number of active power classes (see "Power Class" dialog box), the
number of limits that can be set varies. Up to four limits are possible. The sweep list is
extended accordingly.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:STATe on page 794
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL? on page 630
Abs Limit Start ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the range [dBm].
This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly (see "Limit Check
1-4" on page 319).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STARt
on page 793
Abs Limit Stop ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the range [dBm].
1-4" on page 319).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STOP
on page 793

Rel Limit Start ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the range [dBc].
1-4" on page 319).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STARt
on page 794
Rel Limit Stop ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission
Mask
Sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the range [dBc].
This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly (see "Sweep List
dialog box" on page 317).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STOP
on page 794
Close Sweep List ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Closes the "Sweep List" dialog box and updates the measurement results.
Insert before Range ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range. The range numbers of
the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly. The maxi-
mum number of ranges is 20.
For further details refer to "Ranges and Range Settings" on page 328.
Remote command:
ESP:RANG3:INS BEF, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INSert
on page 792
Insert after Range ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Inserts a new range to the right of the currently focused range. The range numbers of
all higher ranges are increased accordingly. The maximum number of ranges is 20.
Remote command:
ESP:RANG1:INS AFT, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INSert
on page 792
Delete Range ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Deletes the currently focused range, if possible. The range numbers are updated
accordingly. For further details refer to "Ranges and Range Settings" on page 328.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:DELete on page 789

Symmetric Setup ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

If activated, the current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical
setup regarding the reference range. The number of ranges to the left of the reference
range is reflected to the right, i.e. any missing ranges on the right are inserted, while
superfluous ranges are removed. The values in the ranges to the right of the reference
range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges.
Any changes to the range settings in active "Symmetric Setup" mode lead to symmetri-
cal changes in the other ranges (where possible). In particular, this means:
● Inserting ranges: a symmetrical range is inserted on the other side of the reference
range
● Deleting ranges: the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is
also deleted
● Editing range settings: the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accord-
ingly
Note: If "Fast SEM" mode is deactivated while "Symmetric Setup" mode is on, "Sym
Setup" mode is automatically also deactivated.
If "Fast SEM" mode is activated while "Symmetric Setup" mode is on, not all range set-
tings can be set automatically.
Edit Reference Range ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens the "Reference Range" dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM
measurements.
Two different power reference types are supported:

● "Peak Power"
Measures the highest peak within the reference range.
● "Channel Power"
Measures the channel power within the reference range (integral bandwidth
method).
If the "Channel Power" reference power type is activated, the dialog box is exten-
ded to define additional settings:
● "Tx Bandwidth"
Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power:
minimum span ≤ value ≤ span of reference range

● "RRC Filter State"

Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter.
● "RRC Filter Settings"
Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter. This window is only available if the RRC fil-
ter is activated.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe on page 797
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:BWID on page 786
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe] on page 786
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa on page 787
List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a submenu to edit the list evaluation settings.
List Evaluation (On/Off) ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Activates or deactivates the list evaluation.
Remote command:
Turning list evaluation on and off:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:AUTO on page 723
Querying list evaluation results:
TRACe<n>[:DATA]? on page 880
Margin ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the margin used for the limit check/peak search.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin on page 723
Show Peaks ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask

In the diagram, marks all peaks with blue squares that have been listed during an
active list evaluation.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:PSHow on page 627
Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens the "ASCII File Export Name" dialog box to save the result in ASCII format to a
specified file and directory. For further details refer also to the "ASCII File Export" soft-
key ("ASCII File Export" on page 264).
Remote command:
ASCII File Export ← Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emis-
sion Mask

Remote command:
Decim Sep ← Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission

Mask
Remote command:
Edit Reference Range ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens the "Reference Range" dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM
measurements.
Two different power reference types are supported:

● "Peak Power"
● "Channel Power"
Measures the channel power within the reference range (integral bandwidth
method).
If the "Channel Power" reference power type is activated, the dialog box is exten-
ded to define additional settings:

● "Tx Bandwidth"
Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power:
minimum span ≤ value ≤ span of reference range
● "RRC Filter State"
Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter.
● "RRC Filter Settings"
Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter. This window is only available if the RRC fil-
ter is activated.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe on page 797
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:BWID on page 786
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe] on page 786
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa on page 787
Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a dialog box to modify the power class settings.
Used Power Classes ← Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Choose the power classes to be used from this dropdown menu. It is only possible to
select either one of the defined power classes or all of the defined power classes
together.
Only power classes for which limits are defined are available for selection.
If "All" is selected, the power class that corresponds to the currently measured power
in the reference range is used. The limits assigned to that power class are applied (see
"PMin/PMax" on page 325).

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>[:EXCLusive]
on page 645
To define all limits in one step:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:LIMit[:STATe]
on page 646
PMin/PMax ← Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Defines the level limits for each power class. The range always starts at -200 dBm (-
INF) and always stops at 200 dBm (+INF). These fields cannot be modified. If more
than one Power Class is defined, the value of "PMin" must be equal to the value of
"PMax" of the last Power Class and vice versa.
Note that the power level may be equal to the lower limit, but must be lower than the
upper limit:
Pmin≦P<Pmax
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MINimum on page 647
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MAXimum on page 646
Sweep List ← Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask

See "Sweep List" on page 316
Add/Remove ← Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Activates or deactivates power classes to be defined. Up to four power classes can be
defined. The number of active power classes affects the availability of the items of the
Used Power Classes dropdown menu.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>[:EXCLusive]
on page 645
Load Standard ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens a dialog box to select an XML file which includes the desired standard specifi-
cation. For details on the provided XML files refer to "Provided XML Files for the Spec-
trum Emission Mask Measurement" on page 331.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard] on page 788
Save As Standard ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Opens the "Save As Standard" dialog box, in which the currently used SEM settings
and parameters can be saved and exported into an *.xml file. Enter the name of the file
in the "File name" field. For details on the structure and contents of the XML file refer to
"Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files" on page 334.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:STORe on page 788
Meas Start/Stop ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Aborts/restarts the current measurement and displays the status:

"Start" The measurement is currently running.

"Stop" The measurement has been stopped, or, in single sweep mode, the
end of the sweep has been reached.
Remote command:
ABORt on page 605
INITiate<n>:ESPectrum on page 750
Restore Standard Files ← Spectrum Emission Mask

Copies the XML files from the C:\R_S\instr\sem_backup folder to the C:
\R_S\instr\sem_std folder. Files of the same name are overwritten.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:RESTore on page 788
Result Evaluation
As a result of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, the measured signal levels,
the result of the limit check (mask monitoring) and the defined limit line are displayed in
a diagram (see also "Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements" on page 329).
Furthermore, the TX channel power "P" is indicated in relation to the defined power
class ranges.
Example:
For example, "P<31" is indicated if the lowest power class is defined from infinity to 31
and the power is currently 17 dBm.
In addition to the graphical results of the SEM measurement displayed in the diagram,
a result table is displayed to evaluate the limit check results (see also "Working with
Limit Lines in SEM Measurements" on page 329).

The following information is provided in the result table:
Label Description
General Information
Standard Loaded standard settings
Tx Power Tx channel power
Tx Bandwidth Tx channel bandwidth
RBW RBW for the Tx channel
Range results
Range Low Frequency range start for range the peak value belongs to
Range Up Frequency range stop for range the peak value belongs to
RBW RBW of the range
Frequency Frequency
Power Abs Absolute power level
Power Rel Power level relative to the TX channel power
ΔLimit Deviation of the power level from the defined limit
In which detail the data is displayed in the result table can be defined in the List Evalu-
ation menu. By default, one peak per range is displayed. However, you can change the
settings to display only peaks that exceed a threshold ("Margin").
In addition to listing the peaks in the list evaluation, detected peaks can be indicated by
blue squares in the diagram ("Show Peaks").
Furthermore, you can save the evaluation list to a file ("Save Evaluation List").

The measurement results of the spectrum emission mask test can be retrieved using
the CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL? command from a remote computer.

The power result for the reference range can be queried using
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CPOW, the peak power for the reference range using
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? PPOW.
For details see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?
on page 692.
Ranges and Range Settings

In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements, a range defines a segment for which
you can define the following parameters separately:
● Start and stop frequency
● RBW
● VBW
● Sweep time
● Sweep points
● Reference level
● Attenuator settings
● Limit values
Via the sweep list, you define the ranges and their settings. For details on settings refer
to "Sweep List dialog box" on page 317.
For details on defining the limits (masks) see "Working with Limit Lines in SEM Mea-
surements" on page 329.
For details on defining the limits (masks) see the base unit description "Working with
Lines in SEM".
The following rules apply to ranges:
● The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz.
● The individual ranges must not overlap (but need not directly follow one another).
● The maximum number of ranges is 20.
● A minimum of three ranges is mandatory.
● The reference range cannot be deleted (it is marked in blue color).
● The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency.
● The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth.
● Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center fre-
quency.
In order to change the start frequency of the first range or the stop frequency of the last
range, select the appropriate span with the SPAN key. If you set a span that is smaller
than the overall span of the ranges, the measurement includes only the ranges that lie
within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz. The first and last ranges
are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.

Symmetrical ranges
You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings, i.e. the ranges to
the left and right of the center range are defined symmectrically. In the "Sweep List"
menu, select the "Symmetrical Setup" softkey to activate symmetrical setup mode. The
current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the
reference range. The number of ranges to the left of the reference range is reflected to
the right, i.e. any missing ranges on the right are inserted, while superfluous ranges
are removed. The values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted
symmetrically to those in the left ranges.
For details see "Symmetric Setup" on page 321.
Symmetrical ranges fulfull the conditions required for "Fast SEM" mode (see "Fast
Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements" on page 340).
Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements

Using the R&S FSVA/FSV, the spectrum emission mask is defined using limit lines.
Limit lines allow you to check the measured data against specified limit values. Gener-
ally, it is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in Spectrum mode using the
LINES key. For SEM measurements, however, special limit lines are available via the
"Sweep List", and it is strongly recommended that you use only these limit line defini-
tions.
In the "Sweep List" you can define a limit line for each power class that varies its level
according to the specified frequency ranges. Distinguished limit lines
("_SEM_LINE_ABS<0...3>"/"_SEM_LINE_REL<0...3>") are automatically defined for
each power class according to the current "Sweep List" settings every time the settings
change.
The limit line defined for the current power class is indicated by a red line in the dis-
play, and the result of the limit check is indicated at the top of the diagram. Note that
only "Pass" or "Fail" is indicated; a "margin" function as for general limit lines is not
available.

The indicated limit line depends on the settings in the "Sweep List". Several types of
limit checks are possible:
Limit check type Pass/fail criteria Indicated limit line
Absolute Absolute power levels may not Defined by the "Abs Limit Start"/ "Abs Limit
exceed limit line Stop" values for each range
Relative Power deviations relative to the TX Defined by the "Rel Limit Start"/ "Rel Limit
channel power may not exceed limit Stop" values (relative to the center frequency)
line for each range
Abs and Rel Only if the power exceeds both the The less strict (higher) limit line is displayed
absolute and the relative limits, the for each range.
check fails.
Abs or Rel If the power exceeds either the The stricter (lower) limit line is displayed for
absolute or the relative limits, the each range.
check fails.
The largest deviations of the power from the limit line for each range are displayed in
the evaluation list. Furthermore, the absolute powers for those values, as well as the
relative deviation from the TX channel power are displayed. Values that exceed the
limit are indicated in red and by an asterisk (*).

Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, a margin (threshold)
for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list can be defined in the list eval-
uation settings. For details see "Result Evaluation" on page 326.
Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement

You can change the settings manually or via XML files. The XML files offer a quick way
to change the configuration. A set of ready-made XML files for different standards is
already provided. For details see Table 4-6. You can also create and use your own
XML files (for details see "Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files"
on page 334). All XML files are stored under "C:\r_s\instr\sem_std". Use the
"Load Standard" softkey for quick access to the available XML files (see "Load Stan-
dard" on page 325).
Table 4-6: Provided XML files
Path XML file name Displayed standard character-

istics*
cdma2000\DL default0.xml CDMA2000 BC0 DL
default1.xml CDMA2000 BC1 DL
cdma2000\UL default0.xml CDMA2000 BC0 UL
default1.xml CDMA2000 BC1 UL
WCDMA\3GPP\DL PowerClass_31_39.xml W-CDMA 3GPP (31,39)dBm DL
PowerClass_39_43.xml W-CDMA 3GPP (39,43)dBm DL
PowerClass_43_INF.xml W-CDMA 3GPP (43,INF)dBm

DL


istics*
PowerClass_negINF_31.xml W-CDMA 3GPP (-INF,31)dBm

DL
WIBRO\DL PowerClass_29_40.xml WiBro TTA (29,40)dBm DL
PowerClass_40_INF.xml WiBro TTA (40,INF)dBm DL
PowerClass_negINF_29.xml WiBro TTA (-INF,29)dBm DL
WIBRO\UL PowerClass_23_INF.xml WiBro TTA (23,INF)dBm UL
PowerClass_negINF_23.xml WiBro TTA (23,INF)dBm UL
WIMAX\DL\ETSI\…MHz (1.75 System_Type_E.xml WIMAX System Type E DL

MHz, 2.00 MHz, 3.5 MHz, 7.00
MHz, 14.00 MHz, 28 MHz)
System_Type_F.xml WIMAX System Type F DL
System_Type_G.xml WIMAX System Type G DL
WIMAX\DL\IEEE 10MHz.xml WIMAX 10MHz DL
20MHz.xml WIMAX 20MHz DL
WIMAX\UL\ETSI…MHz (1.75 System_Type_E.xml WIMAX System Type E UL

MHz, 2.00 MHz, 3.5 MHz, 7.00
MHz, 14.00 MHz, 28 MHz)
System_Type_F.xml WIMAX System Type F UL
System_Type_G.xml WIMAX System Type G UL
WIMAX\UL\IEEE 10MHz.xml WIMAX 10MHz UL
20MHz.xml WIMAX 20MHz UL
WLAN\802_11_TURBO ETSI.xml IEEE 802.11
IEEE.xml IEEE 802.11
WLAN\802_11a ETSI.xml IEEE 802.11a
IEEE.xml IEEE 802.11a
WLAN\802_11b IEEE.xml IEEE 802.11b
WLAN\802_11j_10MHz ETSI.xml IEEE.802.11j
IEEE.xml IEEE.802.11j
WLAN\802_11j_20MHz ETSI.xml IEEE 802.11j
IEEE.xml IEEE 802.11j
EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_01_4_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL

l
EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_01_4_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. A <1GHz DL

l


istics*

l
EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_10_0_MHz__Cfhigher1GHz.xml LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL
EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_10_0_MHz__Cflower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL

l

l
EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_01_4_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. B >1GHz DL

l
EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_01_4_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. B <1GHz DL

l

l
EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_10_0_MHz__Cfhigher1GHz.xml LTE Cat. B >1GHz DL
EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryB\ BW_10_0_MHz__Cflower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. B >1GHz DL

l

l
EUTRA-LTE\UL\Standard\ BW_05_0_MHz.xml LTE UL
*Used abbreviations:
BC: band class
UL: uplink
DL: downlink

TTA: Telecommunications Technology Association
Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files

The files for importing range settings are in XML format and therefore obey the rules of
the XML standard. Below, the child nodes, attributes, and structure defined for the data
import is described. Build your own XML files according to these conventions because
the R&S FSVA/FSV can only interpret XML files of a known structure. For example
files look in the C:\r_s\instr\sem_std directory.
Figure 4-15: Example Spectrum emission mask standard file (PowerClass_39_43.xml)
Be sure to follow the structure exactly as shown below or else the R&S FSVA/FSV is
not able to interpret the XML file and error messages are shown on the screen. There-
fore, we recommend you make a copy of an existing file (see Save As Standard soft-
key) and edit the copy of the file.
Alternatively, edit the settings using the "Spectrum Emission Mask" softkey and the
Sweep List dialog box and save the XML file with the Save As Standard softkey after-
wards. This way, no modifications have to be done in the XML file itself.
Basically, the file consists of three elements that can be defined:

● The "BaseFormat" element
● The "PowerClass" element
● The "Range" element
The "BaseFormat" element

It carries information about basic settings. In this element only the "ReferencePower"
child node has any effects on the measurement itself. The other attributes and child
nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask Standard on
the measurement screen. The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in
Table 4-7.
In the example above (PowerClass_39_43.xml under
C:\r_s\instr\sem_std\WCDMA\3GPP, see Figure 4-15), these attributes are
defined as follows:
● Standard="W-CDMA 3GPP"
● LinkDirection="DL"

● PowerClass="(39,43)dBm"
The "PowerClass" element

It is embedded in the "BaseFormat" element and contains settings information about
the power classes. Up to four different power classes can be defined. For details refer
to the "Sweep List" softkey ("Sweep List" on page 316) and the corresponding parame-
ter description. The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in Table 4-8.
The "Range" element

This element is embedded in the "PowerClass" element. It contains the settings infor-
mation of the range. There have to be at least three defined ranges: one reference
range and at least one range to either side of the reference range. The maximum num-
ber of ranges is 20. Note that the R&S FSVA/FSV uses the same ranges in each
power class. Therefore, the contents of the ranges of each defined power class have to
be identical to the first power class. An exception are the Start and Stop values of the
two Limit nodes that are used to determine the power class. Note also, that there are
two Limit nodes to be defined: one that gives the limit in absolute values and one in
relative values. Make sure units for the Start and Stop nodes are identical for each
Limit node.
For details refer to the "Sweep List" softkey ("Sweep List" on page 316) and the corre-
sponding parameter description. The child nodes and attributes of this element are
shown in Table 4-9.
The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a
child node or attribute is mandatory for the R&S FSVA/FSV to interpret the file or not.
Since the hierarchy of the XML can not be seen in the tables, either view one of the
default files already stored on the R&S FSVA/FSV in the "C:\r_s\instr\sem_std"
directory or check the structure as shown below.
Below, a basic example of the structure of the file is shown, containing all mandatory
attributes and child nodes. Note that the "PowerClass" element and the range element
are themselves elements of the "BaseFormat" element and are to be inserted where
noted. The separation is done here simply for reasons of a better overview. Also, no
example values are given here to allow a quick reference to the tables above. Italic font
shows the placeholders for the values.
● The "BaseFormat" element is structured as follows:
– <RS_SEM_ACP_FileFormat Version=""1.0.0.0"">
<Name>"Standard"</Name>
<Instrument>
<Type>"Instrument Type"</Type>
<Application>"Application"</Application>
</Instrument>
<LinkDirection Name=""Name"">
<ReferencePower>
<Method>"Method"</Method>
</ReferencePower>
<PowerClass Index=""n"">



</PowerClass>
</LinkDirection>
</RS_SEM_ACP_File>
● The "PowerClass" element is structured as follows:
– <PowerClass Index=""n"">
<StartPower Unit=""dBm"" InclusiveFlag=""true"" Value=""StartPowerValue""/>
<StopPower Unit=""dBm"" InclusiveFlag=""false"" Value=""StopPowerValue""/>
<DefaultLimitFailMode>"Limit Fail Mode"</DefaultLimitFailMode>
<Range Index=""n"">


</Range>
…
</PowerClass>
● The "Range" element is structured as follows:
– <Range Index=""n"">
<Name=""Name"">
<ChannelType>"Channel Type"</Channel Type>
<WeightingFilter>
<Type>"FilterType"</Type>
<RollOffFactor>"Factor"</RollOffFactor>
<Bandwith>"Bandwidth"</Bandwidth>
</WeightingFilter>
<FrequencyRange>
<Start>"RangeStart"</Start>
<Stop>"RangeStop"</Stop>
</FrequencyRange>
<Limit>
<Start Unit=""Unit"" Value=""Value""/>
<Stop Unit=""Unit"" Value=""Value""/>
</Limit>
<Limit>
<Start Unit=""Unit"" Value=""Value""/>
<Stop Unit=""Unit"" Value=""Value""/>
</Limit>
<RBW Bandwidth=""Bandwidth"" Type=""FilterType""/>
<VBW Bandwidth=""Bandwidth""/>
<Detector>"Detector"</Detector>
<Sweep Mode=""SweepMode"" Time=""SweepTime""/>
<Amplitude>
<ReferenceLevel Unit=""dBm"" Value=""Value""/>
<RFAttenuation Mode=""Auto"" Unit=""dB"" Value=""Value""/>
<Preamplifier State=""State""/>
</Amplitude>
</Range>

Table 4-7: Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element
Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand.
FileFormatVersion 1.0.0.0 Yes
Date YYYY-MM-DD Date in ISO 8601 format No

HH:MM:SS
Name <string> Name of the standard Yes
Instrument Type FSL Name of the instrument No
Application SA | K72 | K82 Name of the application No
LinkDirection Name Downlink | Uplink | Yes

None
ShortName DL | UL No
Reference- Yes
Power
Method TX Channel Power | Yes

TX Channel Peak
Power
Reference- <string> No
Channel
Table 4-8: Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element
StartPower Value <power in dBm> The start power must be equal Yes
to the stop power of the previ-
ous power class. The Start-
Power value of the first range
is -200
Unit dBm Yes
InclusiveFlag true Yes
StopPower Value <power in dBm> The stop power must be equal Yes
to the start power of the next
power class. The StopPower
value of the last range is 200
Unit dBm
InclusiveFlag false Yes
DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute | Relative Yes

| Absolute and Rel-
ative | Absolute or
Relative

Table 4-9: Attributes and child nodes of the Range element (normal ranges)
Index 0…19 Inde XE s are continuous Yes

and have to start with 0
Name <string> Name of the range Only if Referen-

ceChannel con-
tains a name and
the range is the
reference range
Short- <string> Short name of the range No

Name
ChannelType TX | Adjacent Yes
WeightingFilter Only if Referen-

cePower method
is TX Channel
Power and the
range is the ref-
erence range
Type RRC | CFilter Type of the weighting filter Yes
Roll Off Factor 0…1 Excess bandwidth of the fil- Only if the filter
ter type is RRC
Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz> Filter bandwidth Only if the filter

type is RRC
FrequencyRange Yes
Start <frequency in Hz> Start value of the range Yes
Stop <frequency in Hz> Stop value of the range Yes
Limit dBm/Hz | dBm | A Range must contain Yes

dBc | dBr | dB exactly two limit nodes; one
of the limit nodes has to
have a relative unit (e.g.
dBc), the other one must
have an absolute unit (e.g.
dBm)
Start Value <numeric_value> Power limit at start fre- Yes

quency
Unit dBm/Hz | dBm | Sets the unit of the start

dBc | dBr | dB value
Stop Value <numeric_value> Power limit at stop fre-

quency
Unit dBm/Hz | dBm | Sets the unit of the stop

dBc | dBr | dB value
LimitFailMode Absolute | Relative If used, it has to be identical No

| Absolute and Rel- to DefaultLimitFailMode
ative | Absolute or
Relative
RBW Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz> "RBW" on page 318 Yes

Type NORM | PULS | No

CFIL | RRC
VBW Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz> "VBW" on page 318 Yes
Detector NEG | POS | If used, it has to be identical No

SAMP | RMS | in all ranges.
AVER | QUAS
Sweep Mode Manual | Auto "Sweep Time Mode" Yes

on page 318
Time <time in sec> "Sweep Time" on page 318 No
Amplitude No
ReferenceLevel Value <power in dBm> "Ref. Level" on page 318 Yes, if the Refer-
enceLevel child
node is used
Unit dBm Defines dBm as unit Yes, if the Refer-

enceLevel node
is used
RFAttenuation Mode Manual | Auto "RF Att. Mode" on page 318 Yes, if the Refer-
enceLevel child
node is used
Preamplifier ON | OFF "Preamp" on page 318 Yes
ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)

The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general
setup. For a detailed description refer to Chapter 4.2.8.7, "ASCII File Export Format",
on page 234.

File contents Description
RefType; CPOWER; reference range setup, for details see "Edit

Reference Range" on page 321
TxBandwidth;9540000;Hz
Filter State; ON;
Alpha;0.22;
PeaksPerRange;1; evaluation list information

Values;4;
0;-22500000;-9270000;1000000;2986455000;-74.762840 information about each peak:

270996094; <range number>;
-10.576210021972656;-45.762840270996094;PASS; <start frequency>;
1;-9270000;-4770000;100000;2991405000;-100.1769561 <stop frequency>;
7675781;
<resolution bandwidth of range>;
-35.990325927734375;-1.490325927734375;PASS
<frequency of peak>;
3;4770000;9270000;100000;3005445000;-100.17695617
675781; <absolute power in dBm of peak>;
-35.990325927734375;-1.490325927734375;PASS; <relative power in dBc of peak
4;9270000;22500000;1000000;3018225000;-74.7628402 (related to the channel power)>;

70996094; <distance to the limit line in dB
-10.576210021972656;-45.762840270996094;PASS; (positive value means above the limit)>;
<limit fail (pass = 0, fail =1)>;
Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements

In order to improve the performance of the R&S FSVA/FSV for spectrum emission
mask measurements, a "Fast SEM" mode is available. If this mode is activated, sev-
eral consecutive ranges with identical sweep settings are combined to one sweep
internally, which makes the measurement considerably more efficient. The displayed
results remain unchanged and still consist of several ranges. Thus, measurement set-
tings that apply only to the results, such as limits or transducer factors, can neverthe-
less be defined individually for each range.
Prerequisites
"Fast SEM" mode is available if the following criteria apply:
● The frequency ranges are consecutive, without frequency gaps
● The following sweep settings are identical:
– "Filter Type", see "Filter Type" on page 317
– "RBW", see "RBW" on page 318
– "VBW", see "VBW" on page 318
– "Sweep Time Mode", see "Sweep Time Mode" on page 318
– "Ref Level", see "Ref. Level" on page 318
– "Rf Att. Mode", see "RF Att. Mode" on page 318
– "RF Attenuator", see "RF Att. Mode" on page 318
– "Preamp", see "Preamp" on page 318

Activating Fast SEM mode

"Fast SEM" mode is activated in the sweep list (see "Fast SEM" on page 317) or using
a remote command. Activating the mode for one range automatically activates it for all
ranges in the sweep list.
In the provided XML files for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, "Fast SEM"
mode is activated by default.
SCPI command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 787
Consequences
When the "Fast SEM" mode is activated, the ranges for which these criteria apply are
displayed as one single range. The sweep time is defined as the sum of the individual
sweep times, initially, but can be changed. When the "Fast SEM" mode is deactivated,
the originally defined individual sweep times are reset.
If "Symmetrical Setup" mode is active when "Fast SEM" mode is activated, not all
sweep list settings can be configured symmetrically automatically (see also "Symmetric
Setup" on page 321).
Any other changes to the sweep settings of the combined range are applied to each
included range and remain changed even after deactivating "Fast SEM" mode.

Example
Figure 4-16: Sweep list using Fast SEM mode
In Figure 4-16, a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated. The formerly 5
separately defined ranges are combined to 2 sweep ranges internally.
4.3.5.6 Measuring Spurious Emissions
The Spurious Emissions measurement defines a measurement that monitors unwan-

ted RF products outside the assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier. The
spurious emissions are usually measured across a wide frequency range. The Spuri-
ous Emissions measurement allows a flexible definition of all parameters. A result table
indicates the largest deviations of the absolute power from the limit line for each range,
and the results can be checked against defined limits automatically.

Spurious Emissions measurements are performed using the "Spurious Emissions"

softkey in the "Measurement" menu (see "Spurious Emissions" on page 348).
Most parameters are defined in the "Sweep List" dialog box (see "Sweep List dialog
box" on page 348). For information on other parameters, see the corresponding soft-
keys ("Spurious Emissions" on page 348).
Conditions for ranges

The following rules apply to ranges:
● The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz.
● The individual ranges must not overlap (but need not directly follow one another).
● The maximum number of ranges is 20.
● The maximum number of sweep points in all ranges is limited to 100001.

Defining ranges by remote control

In Spurious Emissions measurements, there are no remote commands to insert new
ranges between existing ranges directly. However, you can delete or re-define the
existing ranges to create the required order.
A remote command example for defining parameters and ranges in spurious emissions
measurements can be found in chapter 7 "Remote Control – Programming Examples"
of the Operating manual.
Result Evaluation
In addition to the graphical results of the spurious measurement displayed in the dia-
gram, a result table can be displayed to evaluate the limit check results (see also
"Working with Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements" on page 345). Which data is
displayed in the evaluation list can be defined in the "List Evaluation" menu (see "List
Evaluation" on page 351).
The following information is provided in the evaluation list:
Column Description
Range Low Frequency range start for range the peak value
belongs to
Range Up Frequency range stop for range the peak value

belongs to
RBW RBW of the range
Frequency Frequency at the peak value
Power Abs Absolute power level at the peak value
ΔLimit Deviation of the absolute power level from the

defined limit for the peak value
By default, one peak per range is displayed. However, you can change the settings to:
● Display all peaks ("Details ON")
● Display a certain number of peaks per range ("Details ON" + "Peaks per Range")
● Display only peaks that exceed a threshold ("Margin")
In addition to listing the peaks in the list evaluation, detected peaks can be indicated by
blue squares in the diagram ("Show Peaks").

Furthermore, you can save the evaluation list to a file ("Save Evaluation List").

The spurious measurement results can be retrieved using the CALC:PSE? command
from a remote computer (see CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:
IMMediate] for a detailed description).
Alternatively, the measured spurious values of the displayed trace can be retrieved
using the TRAC:DATA? SPUR command (see TRACe<n>[:DATA]? on page 880).
Working with Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements

Limit lines allow you to check the measured data against specified limit values. Gener-
ally, it is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in Spectrum mode using the
LINES key. For Spurious measurements, however, a special limit line is available via
the "Sweep List", and it is strongly recommended that you use only this limit line defini-
tion.
In the "Sweep List" you can define a limit line that varies its level according to the
specified frequency ranges. A distinguished limit line ("_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS") is
automatically defined according to the current "Sweep List" settings every time the set-
tings change.
If a limit check is activated in the "Sweep List", the "_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS" limit line
is indicated by a red line in the display, and the result of the limit check is indicated at
the top of the diagram. Note that only "Pass" or "Fail" is indicated; a "margin" function
as for general limit lines is not available. Also, only absolute limits can be checked, not
relative ones.

As for general limit lines, the results of each limit line check are displayed (here:
"_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS"), as well as the combined result for all defined limit lines
("Limit Check").
In addition to the limit line itself, the largest deviations of the absolute power from the
limit line for each range are displayed in the evaluation list if the limit check is activa-
ted. Values that exceed the limit are indicated in red and by an asterisk (*).
Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, a margin (threshold)
for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list can be defined in the list eval-
uation settings. Furthermore, you can define how many peaks per range are listed. For
details see "Result Evaluation" on page 344.
To define a limit check for spurious measurements

The limit check is defined in the "Sweep List" dialog box, see "Sweep List dialog box"
on page 348 for details.
1. Press the MEAS CONFIG key to open the main "Spurious" menu.
2. Press the "Sweep List" softkey to open the "Sweep List" dialog box.

3. In the "Sweep List" dialog box, define the limit line for each range using the "Abs
Limit Start" and "Abs Limit Stop" settings.
The limit values are absolute values for the absolute power level.
4. Set the "Limit Check" setting to "Absolute" to activate the limit check.
5. Close the "Sweep List" dialog box.

The limit line and the result of the limit check are displayed in the diagram and the
result table displays the largest deviations from the limit for each range.
6. To reduce the number of displayed delta values, change the margin (threshold) for
peak detection in the list evaluation. By default, this value is very high (200 dB), so
that initially all peaks are detected.
In the "Spurious" menu, press "List Evaluation > Margin" and enter a value in dB.
Only delta values that exceed this margin are displayed in the result table.
Softkeys for Spurious Emissions Measurement

Spurious Emissions.....................................................................................................348
└ Sweep List.................................................................................................... 348
└ Sweep List dialog box.........................................................................348
└ Range Start / Range Stop........................................................ 348
└ Filter Type.................................................................................348
└ RBW......................................................................................... 349
└ VBW......................................................................................... 349
└ Sweep Time Mode....................................................................349
└ Sweep Time..............................................................................349
└ Detector.................................................................................... 349
└ Ref. Level................................................................................. 349
└ RF Att. Mode............................................................................ 349
└ RF Attenuator........................................................................... 349
└ Preamp..................................................................................... 349
└ Sweep Points............................................................................350
└ Stop After Sweep......................................................................350
└ Transd. Factor.......................................................................... 350
└ Limit Check 1-4.........................................................................350
└ Abs Limit Start.......................................................................... 350
└ Abs Limit Stop.......................................................................... 350
└ Close Sweep List................................................................................ 351
└ Insert before Range............................................................................ 351
└ Insert after Range............................................................................... 351
└ Delete Range......................................................................................351
└ Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0).................................................................... 351
└ Adjust X-Axis...................................................................................... 351
└ List Evaluation...............................................................................................351
└ List Evaluation (On/Off)...................................................................... 352
└ Details On/Off..................................................................................... 352
└ Margin.................................................................................................352
└ Peaks per Range................................................................................ 352
└ Show Peaks........................................................................................352
└ Save Evaluation List........................................................................... 352

└ ASCII File Export...................................................................... 352

└ Decim Sep................................................................................ 353
└ Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0).............................................................................. 353
└ Adjust X-Axis.................................................................................................353
└ Meas Start/Stop............................................................................................ 353
Spurious Emissions
Opens a submenu to configure the Spurious Emissions measurement and immediately
starts a measurement.
For general information on performing Spurious Emissions measurements see Chap-
ter 4.3.5.6, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 342.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 850
Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Opens a submenu to edit the sweep list and displays the "Sweep List" dialog box.
Note: If you edit the sweep list, always follow the rules described in Chapter 4.3.5.6,
"Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 342.
Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

After a preset, the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters. For
each range, you can change the parameters listed below. To insert or delete ranges,
use the "Insert Before Range", "Insert After Range", "Delete Range" softkeys. The
measurement results are not updated during editing but on closing the dialog box.
For details and limitations regarding spurious emissions configuration, see Chap-
ter 4.3.5.6, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 342.
Range Start / Range Stop ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious
Emissions
Sets the start frequency/stop frequency of the selected range. Follow the rules descri-
bed in Chapter 4.3.5.6, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 342.
Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency.
The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency. The minimum span
of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt on page 809
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP on page 810
Filter Type ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets the filter type for this range. For details on filters see also Chapter 4.2.6.3,

Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE on page 810
RBW ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Sets the RBW value for this range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 807
VBW ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Sets the VBW value for this range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo on page 808
Sweep Time Mode ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emis-
sions
Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 814
Sweep Time ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets the sweep time value for the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME on page 814
Detector ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Sets the detector for the range. For details refer to Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Over-
view", on page 233.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DETector on page 809
Ref. Level ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets the reference level for the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:RLEVel on page 813
RF Att. Mode ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 811
RF Attenuator ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Sets the attenuation value for that range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation on page 811
Preamp ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Switches the preamplifier on or off.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 812
Sweep Points ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets the number of sweep points for the specified range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:POINts on page 813
Stop After Sweep ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
This command configures the sweep behavior.
"ON" The R&S FSVA/FSV stops after one range is swept and continues
only if you confirm (a message box is displayed).
"OFF" The R&S FSVA/FSV sweeps all ranges in one go.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BREak on page 808
Transd. Factor ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a transducer that fulfills
the following conditions:
● The unit is dB.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer on page 814
Limit Check 1-4 ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets the type of limit check for all ranges. Possible states are:
Absolute Checks the absolute limits defined.
None No limit check performed.
The limit settings are only available if limit check is activated ("Absolute"). If activated,
the limit line and the results of the check are indicated in the diagram.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STATe on page 812
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL? on page 630
Abs Limit Start ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the range [dBm].
This parameter is only available if the limit check is set to "Absolute" (see "Limit Check
1-4" on page 350).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STARt on page 812
Abs Limit Stop ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions
Sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the range [dBm].

This parameter is only available if the limit check is set to "Absolute" (see "Limit Check
1-4" on page 350).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STOP on page 813
Close Sweep List ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Closes the "Sweep List" dialog box and updates the measurement results.
Insert before Range ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range. The range numbers of
the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly. The maxi-
mum number of ranges is 20.
Insert after Range ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Inserts a new range to the right of the currently focused range. The range numbers of
all higher ranges are increased accordingly. The maximum number of ranges is 20.
Delete Range ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Deletes the currently focused range, if possible. The range numbers are updated
accordingly. For further details refer to "Ranges and Range Settings" on page 328.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DELete on page 809
Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0) ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Adjusts the reference level to the measured total power of the signal. The softkey is
Remote command:
Adjust X-Axis ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions

Adjusts the frequency axis of measurement diagram automatically so that the start fre-
quency matches the start frequency of the first sweep range, and the stop frequency of
the last sweep range.
List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Opens a submenu to edit the list evaluation settings.
For more information on list evaluation see "Result Evaluation" on page 344.

List Evaluation (On/Off) ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Activates or deactivates the list evaluation.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:AUTO on page 723
TRACe<n>[:DATA]? on page 880
Details On/Off ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Configures the list contents.
On Displays the whole list contents.
Off Displays only the highest peaks (one peak per range).
Margin ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the margin used for the limit check/peak search.
Only peaks that exceed the limit and are larger than the specified margin are indicated
in the evaluation list.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin on page 723
Peaks per Range ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of peaks per range that are stored in the
list. Once the selected number of peaks has been reached, the peak search is stopped
in the current range and continued in the next range. The maximum value is 50.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges on page 724
Show Peaks ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

In the diagram, marks all peaks with blue squares that have been listed during an
active list evaluation.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:PSHow on page 723
Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Opens the "ASCII File Export Name" dialog box and a submenu to save the result in
ASCII format to a specified file and directory.
Remote command:
ASCII File Export ← Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emis-
sions
Saves the evaluation list in ASCII format to a specified file and directory.
Remote command:

Decim Sep ← Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions

Remote command:
Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0) ← Spurious Emissions

Adjusts the reference level to the measured total power of the signal. The softkey is
Remote command:
Adjust X-Axis ← Spurious Emissions

Adjusts the frequency axis of measurement diagram automatically so that the start fre-
quency matches the start frequency of the first sweep range, and the stop frequency of
the last sweep range.
Meas Start/Stop ← Spurious Emissions

Aborts/restarts the current measurement and displays the status:
"Start" The measurement is currently running.
"Stop" The measurement has been stopped, or, in single sweep mode, the
end of the sweep has been reached.
4.3.5.7 Measuring the Power in Zero Span
Using the power measurement function, the R&S FSVA/FSV determines the power of
the signal in zero span by summing up the power at the individual measurement points
and dividing the result by the number of measurement points. Thus it is possible to
measure the power of TDMA signals during transmission, for example, or during the
muting phase. Both the mean power and the RMS power can be measured.
For this measurement, the sample detector is activated.
Measurement results
Several different power results can be determined simultaneously:

Mode Description
Peak Peak value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment
thereof.
RMS RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment
thereof.
Mean Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment
thereof. The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calcula-
ted.
For example to measure the mean power during a GSM burst
Std Dev The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean
value.
The result is displayed in the marker results, indicated by "Power" and the selected
power mode, e.g. "RMS". The measured values are updated after each sweep or aver-
aged over a user-defined number of sweeps (trace averaging).
The results can also be queried using the remote commands described in "CALCu-
late:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary Subsystem" on page 706.
Restricting the measurement range using limit lines

The range of the measured signal to be evaluated for the power measurement can be
restricted using limit lines. The left and right limit lines (S1, S2) define the evaluation
range and are indicated by vertical red lines in the diagram. If activated, the power
results are only calculated from the levels within the limit lines.
For example, if both the on and off phase of a burst signal are displayed, the measure-
ment range can be limited to the transmission or to the muting phase. The ratio
between signal and noise power of a TDMA signal for instance can be measured using
a measurement as a reference value and then varying the measurement range.
To measure the power in the time domain

1. Press the "Time Domain Power" softkey to activate the power measurement.
2. Select the type of power measurement using the "Peak","Mean","RMS" or "Std

Dev" softkeys.
3. To limit the power evaluation range, switch on the limits ("Limits (On/Off)" softkey)
and enter the limits using the "Left Limit" and "Right Limit" softkeys.
Softkeys for Time Domain Power Measurements

Time Domain Power....................................................................................................355
└ Peak..............................................................................................................355
└ RMS.............................................................................................................. 355
└ Mean............................................................................................................. 355
└ Std Dev......................................................................................................... 355
└ Limits (On/Off)...............................................................................................355
└ Left Limit....................................................................................................... 356
└ Right Limit..................................................................................................... 356

Time Domain Power

Activates the power measurement in zero span and opens a submenu to configure the
power measurement. For more details see also Chapter 4.3.5.7, "Measuring the Power
in Zero Span", on page 353.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] on page 719
Peak ← Time Domain Power

Activates the calculation of the peak value from the points of the displayed trace or a
segment thereof.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] on page 713
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult? on page 713
RMS ← Time Domain Power

Activates the calculation of the RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a
segment thereof.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] on page 716
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult? on page 715
Mean ← Time Domain Power

Activates the calculation of the mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a
segment thereof. The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calculated.
This can be used for instance to measure the mean power during a GSM burst.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] on page 711
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult? on page 710
Std Dev ← Time Domain Power

Activates the calculation of the standard deviation of measurement points from the
mean value and displays them as measured value. The measurement of the mean
power is automatically switched on at the same time.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe]
on page 718
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult?
on page 718
Limits (On/Off) ← Time Domain Power

Switches the limitation of the evaluation range on or off. Default setting is off.
If switched off, the evaluation range is not limited. If switched on, the evaluation range
is defined by the left and right limit. If only one limit is set, it corresponds to the left limit
and the right limit is defined by the stop frequency. If the second limit is also set, it
defines the right limit.
Remote command:

Left Limit ← Time Domain Power

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for line 1.
Remote command:
Right Limit ← Time Domain Power

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for line 2.
Remote command:
4.3.5.8 Calculating Signal Amplitude Statistics
To measure the amplitude distribution, the R&S FSVA/FSV has simple measurement
functions to determine both the APD = Amplitude Probability Distribution and CCDF =
Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function.
To determine the amplitude distribution

► To activate and configure the measurement of the amplitude probability distribution
(APD), press the "APD" softkey (see "APD" on page 282).
To activate and configure the measurement of the complementary cumulative dis-
tribution (CCDF), press the "CCDF" softkey (see "CCDF" on page 283).
Only one of the signal statistic functions can be switched on at a time. When a statistic
function is switched on, the R&S FSVA/FSV is set into zero span mode automatically.
The R&S FSVA/FSV measures the statistics of the signal applied to the RF input with
the defined resolution bandwidth. To avoid affecting the peak amplitudes the video
bandwidth is automatically set to 10 times the resolution bandwidth. The sample detec-
tor is used for detecting the video voltage.
About the Statistical Measurements............................................................................356
Result Evaluation........................................................................................................ 358
Softkeys for APD Measurements................................................................................ 360
Softkeys for CCDF Measurements............................................................................. 365
Defining Gated Triggering for APD and CCDF........................................................... 371
About the Statistical Measurements

Digital modulated signals are similar to white noise within the transmit channel, but are
different in their amplitude distribution. In order to transmit the modulated signal without
distortion all amplitudes of the signal have to be transmitted linearly, e.g. from the out-
put power amplifier. Most critical are the peak amplitude values. Degradation in trans-
mit quality caused by a transmitter two port network is dependent on the amplitude of
the peak values as well as on their probability.
If modulation types are used that do not have a constant zero span envelope, the
transmitter has to handle peak amplitudes that are greater than the average power.
This includes all modulation types that involve amplitude modulation, QPSK for exam-

ple. CDMA transmission modes in particular may have power peaks that are large
compared to the average power.
For signals of this kind, the transmitter must provide large reserves for the peak power
to prevent signal compression and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver.
The peak power or the crest factor of a signal is therefore an important transmitter
design criterion. The crest factor is defined as the peak power/mean power ratio or,
logarithmically, as the peak level minus the average level of the signal. To reduce
power consumption and cut costs, transmitters are not designed for the largest power
that could ever occur, but for a power that has a specified probability of being excee-
ded (e.g. 0.01 %).
The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the APD function (Amplitude
Probability Distribution). During a selectable measurement time all occurring amplitude
values are assigned to an amplitude range. The number of amplitude values in the
specific ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a histogram.
Alternatively, the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) can be dis-
played. It shows the probability that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded
in percent.
Bandwidth selection
When the amplitude distribution is measured, the resolution bandwidth must be set so
that the complete spectrum of the signal to be measured falls within the bandwidth.
This is the only way of ensuring that all the amplitudes will pass through the IF filter
without being distorted. If the selected resolution bandwidth is too small for a digitally
modulated signal, the amplitude distribution at the output of the IF filter becomes a
Gaussian distribution according to the central limit theorem and thus corresponds to a
white noise signal. The true amplitude distribution of the signal therefore cannot be
determined.
Selecting the number of samples

For statistics measurements with the R&S FSVA/FSV, the number of samples to be
measured is defined instead of the sweep time. Since only statistically independent
samples contribute to statistics, the acquisition or sweep time is calculated automati-
cally and displayed in the channel bar (AQT). The samples are statistically independ-
ent if the time difference is at least 1/RBW. The acquisition time AQT is, therefore,
expressed as follows:
AQT = NSamples/RBW
Statistic measurements on pulsed signals

Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using a gated trigger. An
external frame trigger is required as a time (frame) reference. For details see "Defining
Gated Triggering for APD and CCDF" on page 371.
Measurement examples are described in Chapter 3.6.6.2, "Amplitude Distribution Mea-

surements", on page 132.

Result Evaluation
Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD)

As a result of the APD function (Amplitude Probability Distribution), the probability of
measured amplitude values is displayed. During a selectable measurement time all
occurring amplitude values are assigned to an amplitude range. The number of ampli-
tude values in the specific ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a histo-
gram. Each bar of the histogram represents the percentage of measured amplitudes
within the specific amplitude range. The x-axis is scaled in absolute values in dBm.
Figure 4-17: Amplitude probability distribution of white noise
In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa-
tion:
● Number of samples used for calculation
● For each displayed trace:
– Mean amplitude
– Peak amplitude
– Crest factor

Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF)

The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) shows the probability
that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded in percent. The level above the
mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph. The origin of the axis corresponds
to the mean power level. The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along
the y-axis.
Figure 4-18: CCDF of white noise
A red line indicates the ideal Gaussian distribution for the measured amplitude range
(white noise).
The displayed amplitude range is indicated as "Mean Pwr + <x dB>"

In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa-
tion:
● Number of samples used for calculation
● For each displayed trace:
Mean Mean power
Peak Peak power

Crest Crest factor (peak power – mean power)
0,01 % Level values over 0,01 % above mean power
1% Level values over 1 % above mean power
10 % Level values over 10 % above mean power
Softkeys for APD Measurements

APD.............................................................................................................................360
└ Res BW.........................................................................................................360
└ # of Samples................................................................................................. 361
└ Scaling.......................................................................................................... 361
└ x-Axis Ref Level..................................................................................361
└ x-Axis Range...................................................................................... 361
└ Range Log 100 dB....................................................................361
└ Range Log 50 dB......................................................................361
└ Range Log 10 dB......................................................................362
└ Range Log 5 dB........................................................................362
└ Range Log 1 dB........................................................................362
└ Range Log Manual................................................................... 362
└ Range Linear %........................................................................363
└ Range Lin. Unit.........................................................................363
└ y-Axis Max Value................................................................................ 363
└ y-Axis Min Value................................................................................. 363
└ y-Unit % / Abs..................................................................................... 363
└ Default Settings.................................................................................. 363
└ Adjust Settings....................................................................................364
└ Gated Trigger (On/Off)..................................................................................364
└ Gate Ranges.................................................................................................364
└ Adjust Settings.............................................................................................. 365
APD
Activates the function to measure the amplitude probability density (APD) and opens a
submenu.
For general information on calculating signal statistics see Chapter 4.3.5.8, "Calculat-
ing Signal Amplitude Statistics", on page 356.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe] on page 729
Res BW ← APD
Opens an edit dialog box to set the resolution bandwidth directly.
For correct measurement of the signal statistics the resolution bandwidth has to be
wider than the signal bandwidth in order to measure the actual peaks of the signal
amplitude correctly. In order not to influence the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth
is automatically set to 10 MHz. The sample detector is used for detecting the video
voltage.

Remote command:
# of Samples ← APD
Opens an edit dialog box to set the number of power measurements that are taken into
account for the statistics.
Apart from the number of measurements the overall measurement time depends also
on the set resolution bandwidth as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the
sampling rate.
For details see "Selecting the number of samples" on page 357.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples on page 730
Scaling ← APD
Opens a submenu to change the scaling parameters of x- and y-axis.
x-Axis Ref Level ← Scaling ← APD

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the currently active unit (dBm,
dBµV, etc). The function of this softkey is identical to the "Ref Level" softkey in the
"Amplitude" menu (see "Ref Level" on page 193).
For the APD function this value is mapped to the right diagram border. For the CCDF
function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x-axis is
scaled relatively to the measured mean power.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel on page 732
x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Opens the "Range" submenu to select a value for the level range to be covered by the
statistics measurement selected.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe on page 732
Range Log 100 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741


Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741
Range Log Manual ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

ually.
Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:

Range Linear % ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

Remote command:
on page 741
Range Lin. Unit ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD

labeled in dB.
Remote command:
on page 741
y-Axis Max Value ← Scaling ← APD

Opens an edit dialog box to define the upper limit of the displayed probability range.
Values on the y-axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1.0. The
y-axis scaling is defined via the y-Unit % / Abs softkey. The distance between max and
min value must be at least one decade.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer on page 733
y-Axis Min Value ← Scaling ← APD

Opens an edit dialog box to define the lower limit of the displayed probability range.
Values in the range 1e-9 < value < 0.1 are allowed. The y-axis scaling is defined via the
y-Unit % / Abs softkey. The distance between max and min value must be at least one
decade.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer on page 732
y-Unit % / Abs ← Scaling ← APD

Defines the scaling type of the y-axis. The default value is absolute scaling.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT on page 733
Default Settings ← Scaling ← APD

Resets the x- and y-axis scalings to their preset values.
x-axis ref level: -10 dBm
x-axis range APD: 100 dB
x-axis range CCDF: 20 dB

y-axis upper limit: 1.0
y-axis lower limit: 1E-6
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet on page 730
Adjust Settings ← Scaling ← APD

Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min-
imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement
in order to obtain maximum power resolution. Adjusts the reference level to the current
input signal. For details see also the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE on page 731
Gated Trigger (On/Off) ← APD

Activates and deactivates the gating for statistics functions for the ACP and the CCDF
channel. The trigger source is changed to "EXTERN" if this function is switched on.
The gate ranges are defined using the "Gate Ranges" on page 364 softkey.
Remote command:
Gate Ranges ← APD

Opens a dialog to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace.
For details on configuration, see "Defining Gated Triggering for APD and CCDF"
on page 371.
Remote command:
SWE:EGAT ON (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe on page 846)
Switches on the external gate mode.
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:COMM "SlotA" (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:
COMMent on page 848)
Adds a comment to trace 1.

SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAT1 ON (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>[:

STATe<range>] on page 848)
Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1.
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAR1 3ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:
STARt<range> on page 848)
Sets the starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms.
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STop1 5ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:
STOP<range> on page 849)
Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms.
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:PER 5ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: PERiod
on page 849)
Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms.
Adjust Settings ← APD

Remote command:
Softkeys for CCDF Measurements

CCDF.......................................................................................................................... 365
└ Percent Marker............................................................................................. 366
└ Res BW.........................................................................................................366
└ # of Samples................................................................................................. 366
└ Scaling.......................................................................................................... 367
└ x-Axis Ref Level..................................................................................367
└ x-Axis Range...................................................................................... 367
└ Range Log 100 dB....................................................................367
└ Range Log 50 dB......................................................................367
└ Range Log 10 dB......................................................................367
└ Range Log 5 dB........................................................................368
└ Range Log 1 dB........................................................................368
└ Range Log Manual................................................................... 368
└ Range Linear %........................................................................368
└ Range Lin. Unit.........................................................................369
└ y-Axis Max Value................................................................................ 369
└ y-Axis Min Value................................................................................. 369
└ y-Unit % / Abs..................................................................................... 369
└ Default Settings.................................................................................. 369
└ Adjust Settings....................................................................................370
└ Gated Trigger (On/Off)..................................................................................370
└ Gate Ranges.................................................................................................370
└ Adjust Settings.............................................................................................. 371
CCDF
Activates the function to measure the complementary cumulative distribution function
(CCDF) and opens a submenu.

After a CCDF measurement, the results are displayed in a table beneath the diagram.
Mean Mean power
Peak Peak power
Crest Crest factor (peak power – mean power)
1% Level values over 1 % above mean power
10 % Level values over 10 % above mean power
In addition, a red reference line indicating the calculated Gauss distribution is dis-
played.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] on page 729
Activates the CCDF measurement.
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<Trace> on page 729
Reads out the level values for 1 % probability.
Percent Marker ← CCDF

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a probability value and to position marker 1. Thus,
the power which is exceeded with a given probability can be determined very easily. If
marker 1 is deactivated, it will be switched on automatically.
As all markers, the percent marker can be moved simply by touching it with a finger or
mouse cursor and dragging it to the desired position.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent on page 669
Res BW ← CCDF
Opens an edit dialog box to set the resolution bandwidth directly.
For correct measurement of the signal statistics the resolution bandwidth has to be
wider than the signal bandwidth in order to measure the actual peaks of the signal
amplitude correctly. In order not to influence the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth
is automatically set to 10 MHz. The sample detector is used for detecting the video
voltage.
Remote command:
# of Samples ← CCDF
Opens an edit dialog box to set the number of power measurements that are taken into
account for the statistics.
Apart from the number of measurements the overall measurement time depends also
on the set resolution bandwidth as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the
sampling rate.
For details see "Selecting the number of samples" on page 357.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples on page 730
Scaling ← CCDF
Opens a submenu to change the scaling parameters of x- and y-axis.
x-Axis Ref Level ← Scaling ← CCDF

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the currently active unit (dBm,
dBµV, etc). The function of this softkey is identical to the "Ref Level" softkey in the
"Amplitude" menu (see "Ref Level" on page 193).
For the APD function this value is mapped to the right diagram border. For the CCDF
function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x-axis is
scaled relatively to the measured mean power.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel on page 732
x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

Opens the "Range" submenu to select a value for the level range to be covered by the
statistics measurement selected.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe on page 732
Range Log 100 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741


Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741
Range Log Manual ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

ually.
Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
Range Linear % ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

Remote command:
on page 741

Range Lin. Unit ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF

labeled in dB.
Remote command:
on page 741
y-Axis Max Value ← Scaling ← CCDF

Opens an edit dialog box to define the upper limit of the displayed probability range.
Values on the y-axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1.0. The
y-axis scaling is defined via the y-Unit % / Abs softkey. The distance between max and
min value must be at least one decade.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer on page 733
y-Axis Min Value ← Scaling ← CCDF

Opens an edit dialog box to define the lower limit of the displayed probability range.
Values in the range 1e-9 < value < 0.1 are allowed. The y-axis scaling is defined via the
y-Unit % / Abs softkey. The distance between max and min value must be at least one
decade.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer on page 732
y-Unit % / Abs ← Scaling ← CCDF

Defines the scaling type of the y-axis. The default value is absolute scaling.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT on page 733
Default Settings ← Scaling ← CCDF

Resets the x- and y-axis scalings to their preset values.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet on page 730

Adjust Settings ← Scaling ← CCDF

Remote command:
Gated Trigger (On/Off) ← CCDF

Activates and deactivates the gating for statistics functions for the ACP and the CCDF
channel. The trigger source is changed to "EXTERN" if this function is switched on.
The gate ranges are defined using the "Gate Ranges" on page 364 softkey.
Remote command:
Gate Ranges ← CCDF

Opens a dialog to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace.
For details on configuration, see "Defining Gated Triggering for APD and CCDF"
on page 371.
Remote command:
SWE:EGAT ON (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe on page 846)
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:COMM "SlotA" (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:
COMMent on page 848)
Adds a comment to trace 1.
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAT1 ON (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>[:
STATe<range>] on page 848)
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAR1 3ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:
STARt<range> on page 848)
Sets the starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms.
SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STop1 5ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:
STOP<range> on page 849)


SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:PER 5ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: PERiod
on page 849)
Adjust Settings ← CCDF

Remote command:
Defining Gated Triggering for APD and CCDF

Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using GATED TRIGGER.
An external frame trigger is required as a time (frame) reference.
The gate ranges define the part of the I/Q capture data taken into account for the sta-
tistics calculation. These ranges are defined relative to a reference point T=0. The gate
interval is repeated for each period until the end of the I/Q capture buffer.
The reference point T=0 is defined by the external trigger event and the instrument's
trigger offset.
For each trace you can define up to 3 separate ranges of a single period to be traced.

Defining gated triggering
1. Press the "Gated Trigger" softkey to activate gated triggering (see "Gated Trigger
(On/Off)" on page 364).
2. Press the "Gate Ranges" softkey to open the "Gate Ranges" dialog (see "Gate
Ranges" on page 364).
3. Define the length of the period to be analyzed in the "Period" field.

Note: The period is the same for all traces. If you change the period for one trace,
it is automatically changed for all traces.

Make sure the defined period is not longer than the acquisition time of the current
measurement. Keep in mind that the acquisition time depends on the bandwidth
and the number of samples settings (see "Selecting the number of samples"
on page 357). The current acquisition time is indicated as "AQT" in the channel
bar.
4. Optionally, define a description of the trace in the "Comment" field.
5. Activate tracing for the range by selecting "On" in the "Range <number> Use" field
for the corresponding range and trace.
The start and stop time edit fields are ready for input.
Note: The time values have full numerical resolution and are only rounded for dis-
play.
6. Define the starting point of the range within the period.
7. Define the stopping point for the range within the period. Make sure the value for
the stopping time is smaller than the length of the period.
8. To define further ranges for the same period in the same trace, repeat steps 5- 7
for the same trace.
To define further ranges for the same period in a different trace, repeat steps 4- 7
for a different trace.
9. If necessary, activate the configured traces in the "Trace" menu.
Gated statistics configuration example

A statistics evaluation has to be done over the useful part of the signal between t3 and
t4. The period of the GSM signal is 4.61536 ms
t1: External positive trigger slope

t2: Begin of burst (after 25 µs)
t3: Begin of useful part, to be used for statistics (after 40 µs)

t4: End of useful part, to be used for statistics (after 578 µs)
t5: End of burst (after 602 µs)
The instrument has to be configured as follows:
Trigger Offset t2 – t1 = 25 µs now the gate ranges are relative to t2
Range1 Start t3 – t2 = 15 µs start of range 1 relative to t2
Range1 End t4 – t2 = 553 µs end of range 1 relative to t2
4.3.5.9 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point (TOI)
In order to measure the third order intercept point (TOI), a two-tone signal with equal
carrier levels is expected at the R&S FSVA/FSV input. Marker 1 and marker 2 (both
normal markers) are set to the maximum of the two signals. Marker 3 and marker 4 are
placed on the intermodulation products.
The R&S FSVA/FSV calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference
between the first 2 markers and the markers 3 and 4 and displays it in the marker field.
The third order intercept point is measured using the "TOI" softkey, see "TOI"
on page 283.
A measurement example is described in "Measurement Example – Measuring the

R&S FSVA/FSV's Intrinsic Intermodulation" on page 110.
About TOI Measurement

If several signals are applied to a transmission two-port device with nonlinear charac-
teristic, intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of
the signals. The nonlinear characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals
which intermodulate at the characteristic. The intermodulation products of lower order
have a special effect since their level is largest and they are near the useful signals.
The intermodulation product of third order causes the highest interference. It is the
intermodulation product generated from one of the useful signals and the 2nd harmonic
of the second useful signal in case of two-tone modulation.
The frequencies of the intermodulation products are above and below the useful sig-
nals. The Figure 4-19 shows intermodulation products PI1 and PI2 generated by the two
useful signals PU1 and PU2.

Figure 4-19: Intermodulation products PU1 and PU2
The intermodulation product at fI2 is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful
signal PU2 and signal PU1, the intermodulation product at fI1 by mixing the 2nd harmonic
of useful signal PU1 and signal PU2.
fi1 = 2 × fu1 – fu2 (6)
fi2 = 2 × fu2 – fu1 (7)
Dependency on level of useful signals

The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals. If
the two useful signals are increased by 1 dB, the level of the intermodulation products
increases by 3 dB, which means that spacing aD3 between intermodulation signals and
useful signals are reduced by 2 dB. This is illustrated in Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20: Dependency of intermodulation level on useful signal level
The useful signals at the two-port output increase proportionally with the input level as
long as the two-port is in the linear range. A level change of 1 dB at the input causes a
level change of 1 dB at the output. Beyond a certain input level, the two-port goes into
compression and the output level stops increasing. The intermodulation products of the
third order increase three times as much as the useful signals. The intercept point is
the fictitious level where the two lines intersect. It cannot be measured directly since
the useful level is previously limited by the maximum two-port output power.
Calculation method
It can be calculated from the known line slopes and the measured spacing aD3 at a
given level according to the following formula:
aD 3
IP3   PN
2
The 3rd order intercept point (TOI), for example, is calculated for an intermodulation of
60 dB and an input level PU of -20 dBm according to the following formula:
60
IP3   (20dBm)  10dBm
2

Intermodulation-free dynamic range

The "Intermodulation-free dynamic range", i.e. the level range in which no internal
intermodulation products are generated if two-tone signals are measured, is deter-
mined by the 3rd order intercept point, the phase noise and the thermal noise of the sig-
nal analyzer. At high signal levels, the range is determined by intermodulation prod-
ucts. At low signal levels, intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor, i.e.
the noise floor and the phase noise of the signal analyzer determine the range. The
noise floor and the phase noise depend on the resolution bandwidth that has been
selected. At the smallest resolution bandwidth, the noise floor and phase noise are at a
minimum and so the maximum range is obtained. However, a large increase in sweep
time is required for small resolution bandwidths. It is, therefore, best to select the larg-
est resolution bandwidth possible to obtain the range that is required. Since phase
noise decreases as the carrier-offset increases, its influence decreases with increasing
frequency offset from the useful signals.
The following diagrams illustrate the intermodulation-free dynamic range as a function
of the selected bandwidth and of the level at the input mixer (= signal level – set RF
attenuation) at different useful signal offsets.
Figure 4-21: Intermodulation-free range of the R&S FSVA/FSV as a function of level at the input mixer
and the set resolution bandwidth
(Useful signal offset = 1 MHz, DANL = -145 dBm/Hz, TOI = 15 dBm; typical values at 2
GHz)
The optimum mixer level, i.e. the level at which the intermodulation distance is at its
maximum, depends on the bandwidth. At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz, it is approx.
-35 dBm and at 1 kHz increases to approx. -30 dBm.
Phase noise has a considerable influence on the intermodulation-free range at carrier
offsets between 10 and 100 kHz ( Figure 4-21). At greater bandwidths, the influence of
the phase noise is greater than it would be with small bandwidths. The optimum mixer
level at the bandwidths under consideration becomes almost independent of bandwidth
and is approx. -40 dBm.

Figure 4-22: Intermodulation-free dynamic range of the R&S FSVA/FSV as a function of level at the
input mixer and of the selected resolution bandwidth
(Useful signal offset = 10 to 100 kHz, DANL = -145 dBm/Hz, TOI = 15 dBm; typical val-
ues at 2 GHz).
If the intermodulation products of a DUT with a very high dynamic range are to be
measured and the resolution bandwidth to be used is therefore very small, it is best to
measure the levels of the useful signals and those of the intermodulation products sep-
arately using a small span. The measurement time will be reduced- in particular if the
offset of the useful signals is large. To find signals reliably when frequency span is
small, it is best to synchronize the signal sources and the R&S FSVA/FSV.
Measurement Results
As a result of the TOI measurement, the following values are displayed in the marker
area of the diagram:
Label Description
TOI Third-order intercept point
M1 Maximum of first useful signal
M2 Maximum of second useful signal
M3 First intermodulation product
M4 Second intermodulation product
Remote command
The TOI can also be queried using the remote command CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? on page 685.

Softkeys for TOI Measurements

TOI.............................................................................................................................. 379
└ Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta............ 379
└ Search Signals..............................................................................................379
TOI
Opens a submenu and activates the measurement of the 3rd order intercept point.
A two-tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the R&S FSVA/FSV input.
Marker 1 and marker 2 (both normal markers) are set to the maximum of the two sig-
nals. Marker 3 and marker 4 are placed on the intermodulation products.
The R&S FSVA/FSV calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference
between the first 2 markers and the markers 3 and 4 and displays it in the marker field.
For general information on measuring the TOI see Chapter 4.3.5.9, "Measuring the
Third Order Intercept Point (TOI)", on page 374.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe] on page 685
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? on page 685
Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta ← TOI

Remote command:
Search Signals ← TOI

Activates all markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE on page 685

4.3.5.10 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth
The AM modulation depth, also known as a modulation index, indicates by how much
the modulated signal varies around the carrier amplitude. It is defined as:
MDepth = peak signal amplitude / unmodulated carrier amplitude
So for MDepth = 0.5, for example, the carrier amplitude varies by 50% above and
below its unmodulated level, and for h = 1.0 it varies by 100%.
You can measure the modulation depth of a modulated signal using the AM Mod Depth
function.
When this function is activated, marker 1 is set to the peak level, which is considered
to be the carrier level. Deltamarkers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the
carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace. The markers can be adjusted man-
ually, if necessary.
The R&S FSVA/FSV calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured
levels. The AM modulation depth is calculated as the ratio between the power values
at the reference marker and at the delta markers. If the powers of the two AM side
bands are unequal, the mean value of the two power values is used for AM modulation
depth calculation.
A remote control programming example is described in Chapter 5.4.2.3, "Measuring

the AM Modulation Depth", on page 1012 and a example of how to perform the mea-
surement manually in the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide in chapter "Measurement
Examples".
Measurement results
The AM modulation depth in percent is displayed as a result of the measurement, indi-
cated in the marker results as "MDepth".
It can also be queried using the remote command CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult? on page 678.
Softkeys for AM Modulation Depth Measurements

AM Mod Depth............................................................................................................ 380
└ Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta............ 381
└ Search Signals..............................................................................................381
AM Mod Depth
Activates the measurement of the AM modulation depth. An AM-modulated carrier is
required on the screen to ensure correct operation.
When this function is activated, marker 1 is set to the peak level, which is considered
to be the carrier level. Deltamarkers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the
carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace. An edit dialog box is displayed for del-
tamarker 2 in order to adjust the position manually.
When the position of deltamarker 2 is changed, deltamarker 3 is moved symmetrically
with respect to the reference marker 1.

Deltamarker 3, on the other hand, can be moved for fine adjustment irrespective of
marker 2.
Marker 1 can also be moved manually for re-adjustment without affecting the position
of the deltamarkers.
For general information on measuring the AM modulation depth see Chapter 4.3.5.10,
"Measuring the AM Modulation Depth", on page 380.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] on page 679
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult? on page 678
Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta ← AM Mod

Depth
Remote command:
Search Signals ← AM Mod Depth

Activates all markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE
on page 679
4.3.5.11 Measuring Harmonic Distortion
The harmonics and their distortion can be measured using the "Harmonic Distortion"
on page 283 function.
With this measurement it is possible to measure the harmonics e.g. from a VCO easily.
In addition the THD (total harmonic distortion) is calculated in % and dB.
With span > 0 Hz, an automatic search for the first harmonic is carried out within the
set frequency range. Also the level is adjusted. In zero span, the center frequency is
unchanged.

As a result, the zero span sweeps on all harmonics are shown, as well as the RMS
values and the THD (total harmonic distortion).
A measurement example is described in Chapter 3.6.2, "Measurement of Harmonics",

on page 107
About Harmonics Distortion Measurement

Measuring the harmonics of a signal is a frequent problem which can be solved best
using a signal analyzer. In general, every signal contains harmonics which are larger
than others. Harmonics are particularly critical regarding high-power transmitters such
as transceivers because large harmonics can interfere with other radio services.
Harmonics are generated by nonlinear characteristics. They can often be reduced by
low pass filters. Since the signal analyzer has a nonlinear characteristic, e.g. in its first
mixer, measures must be taken to ensure that harmonics produced in the signal ana-
lyzer do not cause spurious results. If necessary, the fundamental wave must be selec-
tively attenuated with respect to the other harmonics with a high pass filter.
Obtainable dynamic range

When harmonics are being measured, the obtainable dynamic range depends on the
second harmonic intercept of the signal analyzer. The second harmonic intercept is the
virtual input level at the RF input mixer at which the level of the 2nd harmonic becomes
equal to the level of the fundamental wave. In practice, however, applying a level of
this magnitude would damage the mixer. Nevertheless, the available dynamic range for
measuring the harmonic distance of a DUT can be calculated relatively easily using the
second harmonic intercept.
As shown in Figure 4-23, the level of the 2nd harmonic drops by 20 dB if the level of the
fundamental wave is reduced by 10 dB.
Figure 4-23: Extrapolation of the 1st and 2nd harmonics to the 2nd harmonic intercept at 40 dBm

The following formula for the obtainable harmonic distortion d2 in dB is derived from the
straight-line equations and the given intercept point:
d2 = S.H.I – PI (1)
where:
d2 = harmonic distortion
PI = mixer level/dBm
S.H.I. = second harmonic intercept
The mixer level is the RF level applied to the RF input minus the set RF attenuation.
The formula for the internally generated level P1 at the 2nd harmonic in dBm is:
P1 = 2 * PI – S.H.I. (2)
The lower measurement limit for the harmonic is the noise floor of the signal analyzer.
The harmonic of the measured DUT should – if sufficiently averaged by means of a
video filter – be at least 4 dB above the noise floor so that the measurement error due
to the input noise is less than 1 dB.
The following rules for measuring high harmonic ratios can be derived:
● Select the smallest possible IF bandwidth for a minimal noise floor.
● Select an RF attenuation which is high enough to just measure the harmonic ratio.
The maximum harmonic distortion is obtained if the level of the harmonic equals the
intrinsic noise level of the receiver. The level applied to the mixer, according to (2), is:
At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz (noise level -143 dBm, S.H.I. = 40 dBm), the opti-
mum mixer level is – 51.5 dBm. According to (1) a maximum measurable harmonic dis-
tortion of 91.5 dB minus a minimum S/N ratio of 4 dB is obtained.
If the harmonic emerges from noise sufficiently (approx. >15 dB), it is easy to check (by
changing the RF attenuation) whether the harmonics originate from the DUT or are
generated internally by the signal analyzer. If a harmonic originates from the DUT, its
level remains constant if the RF attenuation is increased by 10 dB. Only the displayed
noise is increased by 10 dB due to the additional attenuation. If the harmonic is exclu-
sively generated by the signal analyzer, the level of the harmonic is reduced by 20 dB
or is lost in noise. If both – the DUT and the signal analyzer – contribute to the har-
monic, the reduction in the harmonic level is correspondingly smaller.

High-Sensitivity Harmonics Measurements

If harmonics have very small levels, the resolution bandwidth required to measure
them must be reduced considerably. The sweep time is, therefore, also increased con-
siderably. In this case, the measurement of individual harmonics is carried out with the
R&S FSVA/FSV set to a small span. Only the frequency range around the harmonics
will then be measured with a small resolution bandwidth.
Measurement Results
As a result of the harmonics distortion measurement, the zero span sweeps on all
detected harmonics are shown in the diagram, separated by red display lines. This pro-
vides a very good overview of the measurement.
In addition, a result table is displayed providing the following information:
● 1st harmonic frequency
● THD (total harmonic distortion), relative and absolute values
● For each detected harmonic:
– Frequency
– RBW
– Power
The results can also be queried using the remote commands:
THD: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion?
on page 687
List of harmonics: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST?
on page 688
Softkeys for Harmonic Distortion Measurements

Harmonic Distortion.....................................................................................................384
└ No. of Harmonics.......................................................................................... 385
└ Harmonic Sweep Time..................................................................................385
└ Harmonic RBW Auto.....................................................................................385
└ Adjust Settings.............................................................................................. 385
Harmonic Distortion
Opens a submenu to determine the settings for harmonics measurement and activates
the harmonic distortion measurement.
With this measurement you can measure the harmonics of a signal. In addition the
THD (total harmonic distortion) is calculated in % and dB.
With span > 0 Hz, an automatic search for the first harmonic is carried out within the
set frequency range. Also the level is adjusted. In zero span, the center frequency is
unchanged.
In the upper window, the zero span sweeps on all harmonics are shown, separated by
display lines. In the lower window, the mean RMS results are displayed in numerical
values. The THD values are displayed in the marker field.
For details see Chapter 4.3.5.11, "Measuring Harmonic Distortion", on page 381.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] on page 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion? on page 687
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST? on page 688
No. of Harmonics ← Harmonic Distortion

Sets the number of harmonics that shall be measured. The range is from 1 to 26.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics on page 689
Harmonic Sweep Time ← Harmonic Distortion

For details refer to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the "Bandwidth" menu.
Harmonic RBW Auto ← Harmonic Distortion

Enables/disables the automatic adjustment of the resolution bandwidth for filter types
Normal (3dB) (Gaussian) and 5-Pole filters. The automatic adjustment is carried out
according to:
"RBWn = RBW1 * n"
If RBWn is not available, the next higher value is used.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO
on page 687
Adjust Settings ← Harmonic Distortion

Activates the frequency search in the frequency range that was set before starting the
harmonic measurement (if harmonic measurement was with span > 0) and adjusts the
level.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet on page 689
4.3.6 Measurement Configuration – MEAS CONFIG Key
The MEAS CONFIG key displays the submenu of the currently activated and running
measurement function, e.g. the submenu of "TOI" or "Harmonic Distortion" (see Chap-
ter 4.3.5, "Power Measurements – MEAS Key", on page 280, for quick access to the
measurement configuration. If no measurement function is activated, this key has no
effect.
4.3.7 Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key
The LINES key is used to configure limit and display lines.
To open the Lines menu

● Press the LINES key.

The "Lines" menu and the "Select Limit Line" dialog box are displayed. For details on
the "Select Limit Line" dialog box refer to Chapter 4.3.7.5, "Selecting a Limit Line",
on page 392.

● Chapter 4.3.7.1, "Softkeys of the Lines Menu", on page 386
Further information
● Chapter 4.3.7.2, "Display Lines", on page 390
● Chapter 4.3.7.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 391
Tasks
● Chapter 4.3.7.4, "Working with Lines", on page 391
● Chapter 4.3.7.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 392
● Chapter 4.3.7.6, "Creating a New Limit Line", on page 393
● Chapter 4.3.7.7, "Editing an Existing Limit Line", on page 396
● Chapter 4.3.7.8, "Creating a New Limit Line Based upon an Existing Limit Line",
on page 396
● Chapter 4.3.7.9, "Activating/Deactivating a Limit Line", on page 397
4.3.7.1 Softkeys of the Lines Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Lines" menu.
(Lines are only available for RF measurements.)
Further information
● Chapter 4.3.7.2, "Display Lines", on page 390
● Chapter 4.3.7.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 391
Tasks
● Chapter 4.3.7.4, "Working with Lines", on page 391
● Chapter 4.3.7.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 392
● Chapter 4.3.7.6, "Creating a New Limit Line", on page 393
● Chapter 4.3.7.7, "Editing an Existing Limit Line", on page 396
● Chapter 4.3.7.8, "Creating a New Limit Line Based upon an Existing Limit Line",
on page 396
● Chapter 4.3.7.9, "Activating/Deactivating a Limit Line", on page 397
Select Traces to check................................................................................................387
Deselect All................................................................................................................. 387
New............................................................................................................................. 387
└ Edit Name..................................................................................................... 387
└ Edit Comment............................................................................................... 387

└ Edit Margin....................................................................................................388
└ Edit Value......................................................................................................388
└ Insert Value...................................................................................................388
└ Delete Value................................................................................................. 388
└ Save Limit Line............................................................................................. 388
Edit.............................................................................................................................. 388
Copy to........................................................................................................................388
Delete..........................................................................................................................389
X Offset....................................................................................................................... 389
Y Offset....................................................................................................................... 389
Display Lines...............................................................................................................389
└ Display Line 1 / Display Line 2......................................................................389
└ Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 .......................................................... 390
└ Time Line 1 / Time Line 2............................................................................. 390
Select Traces to check

Opens a dialog box to activate the selected limit line for a trace. One limit line can be
activated for several traces simultaneously. For details see also Chapter 4.3.7.9, "Acti-
vating/Deactivating a Limit Line", on page 397.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:TRACe on page 632
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe on page 632
Deselect All
Deactivates the selected limit line for all assigned traces. For details see also Chap-
ter 4.3.7.9, "Activating/Deactivating a Limit Line", on page 397.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe on page 632
New
Opens the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box and a submenu to define a new limit line. For
details see also Chapter 4.3.7.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 391
and Chapter 4.3.7.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 392.
Edit Name ← New

Sets the focus on the "Name" field to enter or change the limit line name. All names
must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. The limit line data
are stored under this name. The instrument stores all limit lines with LIM as extension.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MODE on page 649
Edit Comment ← New

Sets the focus on the "Comment" field to enter or change a comment for the limit line.
The text must not exceed 40 characters.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COMMent on page 629

Edit Margin ← New

Sets the focus on the "Margin" field to enter or change a margin for the limit line. The
default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no margin).
Edit Value ← New

Opens an edit dialog box to change an existing x or y value, depending on the selected
column. The softkey is only available if an existing value is selected.
The desired data points are entered in ascending order (two repeated frequencies/time
values are permitted).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA] on page 641
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer[:DATA] on page 652
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer[:DATA] on page 648
Insert Value ← New

Creates an empty line above the selected data point to enter a new data point.
It is also possible to add a data point at the end of the list, if the focus is set below the
last entry line of the list.
The data points are entered in ascending order (two repeated frequencies/time values
are permitted). If the entered values are not in accordance with the ascending order
rule, an error message is displayed and the values are discarded.
Delete Value ← New

Deletes the selected data point (x and y value). All succeeding data points are shifted
up accordingly. This softkey is only available if an existing value is selected.
Save Limit Line ← New

Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the "Name" field.
Edit
Opens a submenu to edit limit lines. For details see also Chapter 4.3.7.3, "Limit Lines
(Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 391 and Chapter 4.3.7.7, "Editing an Existing Limit
Line", on page 396.
The submenu contains the same commands as the "New" menu, see "New"
on page 387.
Remote command:
see Chapter 5.4.3, "Limit Lines and Limit Test", on page 1012
Copy to
Copies the data of the selected limit line and displays it in the "Edit Limit Line" dialog
box. If the limit line is edited and saved under a new name, a new limit line can be
easily generated by parallel translation or editing of an existing limit line.
For details see also Chapter 4.3.7.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)",
on page 391 and Chapter 4.3.7.8, "Creating a New Limit Line Based upon an Existing
Limit Line", on page 396.
The submenu contains the same commands as the "New" menu, see "New"
on page 387.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COPY on page 629
Delete
Deletes the selected limit line.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete on page 630
X Offset
Horizontally shifts a limit line that has been specified for relative frequencies or times
(x-axis). The softkey opens an edit dialog box in which the value for shifting can be
entered numerically or via the rotary knob.
Note: This softkey does not have any effect on limit lines that represent absolute val-
ues for the x-axis.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:OFFSet on page 642
Y Offset
Vertically shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y-axis (levels or linear units
such as volt). The softkey opens an edit dialog box in which the value for shifting can
be entered numerically or via the rotary knob.
Note: This softkey does not have any effect on limit lines that represent absolute val-
ues for the y-axis.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:OFFSet on page 649
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:OFFSet on page 653
Display Lines
Opens a submenu to enable, disable and set display lines. Which softkeys are availa-
ble depends on the display mode (frequency or time range).
For details see also Chapter 4.3.7.2, "Display Lines", on page 390 and Chap-
ter 4.3.7.4, "Working with Lines", on page 391.
The submenu contains the following functions:
● "Display Line 1 / Display Line 2" on page 389
● "Display Line 1 / Display Line 2" on page 389
● "Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 " on page 390
● "Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 " on page 390
● "Time Line 1 / Time Line 2" on page 390
● "Time Line 1 / Time Line 2" on page 390
Display Line 1 / Display Line 2 ← Display Lines

Enables or disables the level lines 1/2 and opens an edit dialog box to enter the posi-
tion of the lines.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k> on page 625
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k>:STATe on page 626
Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 ← Display Lines

Enables or disables the frequency lines 1/2 (span > 0) and opens an edit dialog box to
enter the position of the lines.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k> on page 627
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k>:STATe on page 628
Time Line 1 / Time Line 2 ← Display Lines

Enables or disables the time lines 1/2 (zero span) and opens an edit dialog box to
enter the position of the lines.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line> on page 734
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line>:STATe on page 734
4.3.7.2 Display Lines
Display lines help to evaluate a trace – as do markers. The function of a display line is
comparable to that of a ruler that can be shifted on the trace in order to mark absolute
values. They are used exclusively to visually mark relevant frequencies or points in
time (span = 0), as well as constant level values. It is not possible to check automati-
cally whether the points are below or above the marked level values.
For details on setting and switching the display lines on/off see Chapter 4.3.7.4, "Work-
ing with Lines", on page 391.
Two different types of display lines are provided:
● Two horizontal level lines for marking levels – Display Line 1 and 2
The level lines are continuous horizontal lines across the entire width of a diagram
and can be shifted in y direction.
● Two vertical frequency or time lines for marking frequencies or points in time – Fre-
quency/Time Line 1 and 2
The frequency or time lines are continuous vertical lines across the entire height of
the diagram and can be shifted in x direction.
Lables
Each line is identified by one of the following abbreviations in the display:
● D1: Display Line 1
● D2: Display Line 2

● F1: Frequency Line 1

● F2: Frequency Line 2
● T1: Time Line 1
● T2: Time Line 2
4.3.7.3 Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)
Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or spectral distribution boundaries on
the display screen which are not to be exceeded. They indicate, for example, the upper
limits for interference radiation or spurious waves which are allowed from a device
under test (DUT). For transmission of information in TDMA systems (e.g. GSM), the
amplitude of the bursts in a timeslot must adhere to a curve that falls within a specified
tolerance band. The lower and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line. Then,
the amplitude curve can be controlled either visually or automatically for any violations
of the upper or lower limits (GO/NOGO test).
The instrument supports limit lines with a maximum of 50 data points. 8 of the limit
lines stored in the instrument can be activated simultaneously. The number of limit
lines stored in the instrument is only limited by the capacity of the flash disk used.
Which softkeys are available depends on the display mode (frequency or time range).
For details see also Chapter 4.3.7.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 392.
Limit lines are compatible with the current measurement settings, if the following
applies:
● The x unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting.
● The y unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting with the excep-
tion of dB based units; all dB based units are compatible with each other.
At the time of entry, the R&S FSVA/FSV immediately checks that all limit lines are in
accordance with the following guidelines:
● The frequencies/times for each data point must be entered in ascending order,
however, for any single frequency/time, two data points may be entered (vertical
segment of a limit line).
● The data points are allocated in order of ascending frequency/time. Gaps are not
allowed. If gaps are desired, two separate limit lines must be defined and then both
enabled.
● The entered frequencies/times need not necessarily be selectable in R&S FSVA/
FSV. A limit line may also exceed the specified frequency or time range. The mini-
mum frequency for a data point is -200 GHz, the maximum frequency is 200 GHz.
For the time range representation, negative times may also be entered. The
allowed range is -1000 s to +1000 s.
4.3.7.4 Working with Lines
If a line is switched on, the softkey is highlighted.

Switching a line on or off

1. Press the Display Lines softkey.
2. Press the softkey for the required line, e.g. Display Line 1 / Display Line 2.
An edit dialog box is opened to enter the position of the line. If the line was
switched off, it is switched on. If it was switched on, it remains switched on.
3. If another softkey is pressed, the edit dialog box for the line is closed, but the line
remains switched on (softkey with highlighted background).
4. When you press the Display Line 1 / Display Line 2 softkey for the second time, the
edit dialog box for the line is opened again.
5. When you press the Display Line 1 / Display Line 2 softkey the third time, the line
is switched off (softkey without highlighted background).
4.3.7.5 Selecting a Limit Line
● To display the "Select Limit Line" dialog box, press the LINES key.
All limit lines saved in the default directory and all subdirectories are displayed. For
each limit line, the following information is given:
"Unit" unit of the y-axis
"Traces" selected traces to check
"Show" limit line displayed in the measurement diagram or hidden
"Compatible" compatibility of the limit line to the current measurement settings
"Offset" user-definable X- and Y-offset for the limit line

● To display only the limit lines that are compatible, activate the "Show compatible"
option. For details on compatibility refer to Chapter 4.3.7.3, "Limit Lines (Fre-
quency/Time Lines)", on page 391.
4.3.7.6 Creating a New Limit Line
Press the New softkey to define a new limit line.

The "Edit Limit Line" dialog box is displayed. For more details on limit lines refer also to
Chapter 4.3.7.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 391. The following set-
tings can be defined:
Setting Description
Name The name under which the limit line is to be stored in the main directory.
To save the limit line in an existing subdirectory, enter the relative path. A new
subdirectory can only be created using the FILE key (for details refer to "Save
File / Recall File" on page 165.
Comment Optional description
Threshold Absolute threshold value that works as a lower limit for the relative limit values
(only for relative scaling of the y-axis).
Margin A fixed distance to the limit line.

Margins are not as strict as limits and belong to the valid value range, but viola-
tion is also indicated in the display.

Setting Description
Position Position of data point
Value Value of data point
X-Axis:
Span setting ● "Hz" for span > 0 Hz

● "s" for zero span
Scale mode ● Absolute: The frequencies or times are interpreted as absolute physical
units.
● Relative: In the data point table, the frequencies are referred to the cur-
rently set center frequency. In the zero span mode, the left boundary of the
diagram constitutes the reference.
Relative scaling is always suitable if masks for bursts are to be defined in
zero span or if masks for modulated signals are required for span > 0 Hz.
Scale ● Linear
● Logarithmic
Y-Axis:
Scale unit Unit of the y-axis
Scale mode ● Absolute: The limit values refer to absolute levels or voltages.
● Relative: The limit values refer to the reference level (Ref Level). Limit val-
ues with the unit dB are always relative values.
Limit type ● Upper limit

● Lower limit
In addition, the following functions are available for the limit line:
Defining a threshold
If the scaling of the y-axis is relative, you can define an absolute threshold value that
works as a lower limit for the relative limit values (see figure below).
► Enter a value in the "Threshold" field of the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box.
The function is especially useful for mobile radio applications provided the limit values
are defined in relation to the carrier power as long as they are above an absolute limit
value.

Defining a margin
A margin is similar to a limit, but less strict and it still belongs to the valid data range. It
can be used as a warning that the limit is almost reached. The margin is not indicated
by a separate line in the display.
► Enter a value in the "Margin" field of the "Edit limit Line" dialog box.
If the limit line is defined as an upper limit, the margin is below the limit line. If the
limit line is defined as a lower limit, the margin is above the limit line.
Entering a new data point

1. Press the "Insert value" button in the dialog, or select an existing data point in the
table and press the Insert Value softkey.
2. Enter the new position (x) and value (y) in the edit dialog box.
Changing a data point

1. Press on the data point to be changed in the table.
2. Enter the new position (x) and value (y) in the edit dialog box.
Deleting a data point

1. Press on the data point to be deleted in the table.
2. Press the "Delete" button in the dialog.
Shifting a limit line horizontally

► Select the "Shift x" button and enter a shift width for the x value in the edit dialog
box.

Shifting a limit line vertically

► Select the "Shift y" button and enter a shift width for the y value in the edit dialog
box.
Saving the limit line settings

► Press the "Save" button in the dialog.
If an existing name is used, a message box is displayed. You have to confirm
before the limit line is overwritten.
4.3.7.7 Editing an Existing Limit Line
In the "Select Limit Line" dialog box, select the limit line you want to change. For
details see also Chapter 4.3.7.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 392.
Note that any changes to the special limit lines for spurious and SEM measurements
are automatically overwritten when the sweep list settings are changed.
1. Press the "Edit" on page 388 softkey.
2. Edit the data as described in Chapter 4.3.7.6, "Creating a New Limit Line",
on page 393.
3. Save the limit line ( "Save Limit Line" on page 388 softkey).
4.3.7.8 Creating a New Limit Line Based upon an Existing Limit Line
1. In the "Select Limit Line" dialog box, select the limit line you want to use as a basis
for a new limit line. For details see also Chapter 4.3.7.5, "Selecting a Limit Line",
on page 392.
2. Press the Copy to softkey to transfer the data of the limit line into the "Edit Limit
Line" dialog box.
3. Press the Edit Name softkey and enter a new name.
4. To shift the complete limit line parallel in the horizontal direction, select the "Shift x"
button and enter an x shift value. In this manner, a new limit line can be easily gen-
erated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally.
5. To shift the complete limit line parallel in the vertical direction, select the "Shift y"
button and enter a y shift value. In this manner, a new limit line can be easily gen-
erated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted vertically.
6. If required, edit the data as described in Chapter 4.3.7.5, "Selecting a Limit Line",
on page 392.
7. Save the limit line ( Save Limit Line softkey).

4.3.7.9 Activating/Deactivating a Limit Line
Prerequisites:
The x- and y-units of limit line and current measurement setting have to be compatible.
For details refer to Chapter 4.3.7.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)",
on page 391.
The limit line has to consist of 2 or more data points.
1. In the "Select Limit Line" dialog box, select the limit line you want to activate/deacti-
vate. For details see also Chapter 4.3.7.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 392.
2. To activate or deactivate a limit line for a trace, press the "Select Traces to check"
on page 387 softkey and select or deselect the trace(s) to which this limit line
applies.
3. To deactivate the limit line for all traces, press the "Deselect All" on page 387 soft-
key.
4.3.8 Input/Output Configuration – INPUT/OUTPUT Key
The INPUT/OUTPUT key is used to configure input and output sources for measure-
ment functions.
4.3.8.1 Softkeys of the Input/Output Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Input/Output" menu. It is possi-
ble that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only
Input (AC/DC)..............................................................................................................398
Noise Source...............................................................................................................398
Video Output............................................................................................................... 398
Tracking Generator..................................................................................................... 398
Power Sensor..............................................................................................................398
Trigger Out.................................................................................................................. 399
External Mixer............................................................................................................. 399
Probe Config............................................................................................................... 399
Signal Source..............................................................................................................399
└ Input Path......................................................................................................399
└ Connected Device.........................................................................................399
└ Input Sample Rate........................................................................................ 399
└ Full Scale Level.............................................................................................400
└ Level Unit...................................................................................................... 400
└ Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level.................................................. 400
EXIQ............................................................................................................................400
└ TX Settings................................................................................................... 400

└ RX Settings................................................................................................... 400
└ Send To........................................................................................................ 400
└ Firmware Update.......................................................................................... 401
└ R&S Support................................................................................................. 401
└ DigIConf........................................................................................................ 401
Digital Output.............................................................................................................. 401
Digital IQ Info.............................................................................................................. 402
Input (AC/DC)
R&S FSV-B17).
Remote command:
Noise Source
Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off. For details on con-
nectors refer to the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide, "Front and Rear Panel" chap-
ter.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:NSOurce on page 912
Video Output
Sends a video output signal according to the measured level to the connector on the
rear panel of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
Note: Video output does not return valid values in IQ or FFT mode.
Remote command:
OUTP:IF VID , see OUTPut:IF[:SOURce] on page 942
Tracking Generator
This softkey is only available if the R&S FSV option Tracking Generator (R&S FSV-B9)
or External Tracking Generator (R&S FSV-B10) or both are installed. It is not available
in I/Q Analyzer mode.
For details see the base unit description.
Power Sensor
For precise power measurement a power sensor can be connected to the instrument
via the front panel (USB connector) or the rear panel (power sensor, option R&S FSV-
B5). The Power Sensor Support firmware option (R&S FSV-K9) provides the power
measurement functions for this test setup.
This softkey is only available if the R&S FSVA/FSV option Power Sensor (R&S FSV-
K9) is installed.
For details see Chapter 4.9, "Instrument Functions - Power Sensor (R&S FSV-K9)",
on page 508.

Trigger Out
Sets the Trigger Out port in the Additional Interfaces (option R&S FSV-B5 only) to low
or high. Thus, you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port, for
example.
Remote command:
OUTPut:TRIGger on page 942
External Mixer
Opens the submenu for the external mixer.
For details see the base unit description.
Probe Config
With firmware R&S FSVA/FSV 1.61SP2 or newer, active probes are supported (via an
adapter). This softkey opens an edit dialog box to activate and configure a connected
probe which is to provide an input signal. It is only available if a probe is connected to
the instrument's RF INPUT and USB connectors.
For details see Chapter 4.3.8.2, "Using Active Probes for Input", on page 402.
Remote command:
PROBe[:STATe] on page 767
PROBe:SETup:MODE on page 767
Signal Source
Opens a dialog box to select the signal source.
For "Digital Baseband (I/Q)", the source can also be configured here.
Input Path ← Signal Source

Defines whether the "RF Radio Frequency" or the "Digital IQ" input path is used for
measurements. "Digital IQ" is only available if option R&S FSV-B17 (R&S Digital I/Q
Interface) is installed.
Note: Note that the input path defines the characteristics of the signal, which differ sig-
nificantly between the RF input and digital input.
Remote command:
INPut:SELect on page 757
Connected Device ← Signal Source

Displays the name of the device connected to the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface
(R&S FSV-B17) to provide Digital IQ input. The device name cannot be changed here.
The device name is unknown.
Remote command:
INPut:DIQ:CDEVice on page 752
Input Sample Rate ← Signal Source

Defines the sample rate of the digital I/Q signal source. This sample rate must corre-
spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device, e.g. a generator.
Remote command:
INPut:DIQ:SRATe on page 755

Full Scale Level ← Signal Source

The "Full Scale Level" defines the level that should correspond to an I/Q sample with
the magnitude "1".
The level can be defined either in dBm or Volt.
Remote command:
INPut:DIQ:RANGe[:UPPer] on page 754
Level Unit ← Signal Source

Defines the unit used for the full scale level.
Remote command:
INPut:DIQ:RANGe[:UPPer]:UNIT on page 754
Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level ← Signal Source

If enabled, the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any
change occurs.
(See the Auto Level softkey).
Remote command:
INPut:DIQ:RANGe:COUPling on page 754
EXIQ
Opens a configuration dialog box for an optionally connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX and a
submenu to access the main settings quickly.
Note: The EX-IQ-Box functionality is not supported for R&S FSV models
1307.9002Kxx.
If the optional R&S DigIConf software is installed, the submenu consists only of one
key to access the software. Note that R&S DigIConf requires a USB connection
(not LAN!) from the R&S FSVA/FSV to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in addition to the R&S
Digital I/Q Interface connection. R&S DigIConf version 2.10 or higher is required.
For typical applications of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX see also the description of the R&S
Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17) in the base unit manual.
For details on configuration see the "R&S®Ex I/Q Box - External Signal Interface Mod-
ule Manual".
For details on installation and operation of the R&S DigIConf software, see the
"R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Digital Interface Module R&S®DigIConf Software Operating Man-
ual".
TX Settings ← EXIQ
Opens the "EX-IQ-BOX Settings" dialog box to configure the R&S FSVA/FSV for digital
output to a connected device ("Transmitter" Type).
RX Settings ← EXIQ
input from a connected device ("Receiver" Type).
Send To ← EXIQ
The configuration settings defined in the dialog box are transferred to the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX.

Firmware Update ← EXIQ

If a firmware update for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is delivered with the R&S FSVA/FSV firm-
ware, this function is available. In this case, when you select the softkey, the firmware
update is performed.
R&S Support ← EXIQ

Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors.
This data is stored in the C:\R_S\Instr\user\Support directory on the instru-
ment.
If you contact the Rohde&Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem, send
these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster.
DigIConf ← EXIQ
Starts the optional R&S DigIConf application. This softkey is only available if the
optional software is installed.
To return to the R&S FSVA/FSV application, press any key on the front panel. The
application is displayed with the "EXIQ" menu, regardless of which key was pressed.
For details on the R&S DigIConf application, see the "R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Digital Inter-
face Module R&S®DigIConf Software Operating Manual".
Note: If you close the R&S DigIConf window using the "Close" icon, the window is
minimized, not closed.
If you select the "File > Exit" menu item in the R&S DigIConf window, the application is
closed. Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX-IQ-BOX functionality is
no longer available until you restart the application using the "DigIConf" softkey in the
R&S FSVA/FSV once again.
Remote command:
Remote commands for the R&S DigIConf software always begin with SOURce:EBOX.
Such commands are passed on from the R&S FSVA/FSV to the R&S DigIConf auto-
matically which then configures the R&S EX-IQ-BOX via the USB connection.
All remote commands available for configuration via the R&S DigIConf software are
described in the "R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Digital Interface Module R&S®DigIConf Software
Operating Manual".
Example 1:
SOURce:EBOX:*RST
SOURce:EBOX:*IDN?
Result:
"Rohde&Schwarz,DigIConf,02.05.436 Build 47"
Example 2:
SOURce:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:REFerence:FREQuency 5MHZ
Defines the frequency value of the reference clock.
Digital Output
Opens a dialog box to enable a digital output stream to the optional R&S Digital I/Q
Interface (R&S FSV-B17), if available.
The displayed sample rate is identical to the sample rate defined under Data Acquisi-
tion (I/Q Analyzer) and is not editable here.

For details see "Digital Output" in the description of the R&S Digital I/Q Interface for the
base unit.
Remote command:
OUTPut:DIQ on page 764
Digital IQ Info
Displays a dialog box with information on the digital I/Q input and output connection via
the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17), if available. The information
includes:
● Device identification
● Used port
● (Maximum) digital input/output sample rates and maximum digital input/output
transfer rates
● Status of the connection protocol
● Status of the PRBS descewing test
For details see "Interface Status Information" in "Instrument Functions - R&S Digital I/Q
Interface (Option R&S FSV-B17)" in the description of the base unit.
Remote command:
4.3.8.2 Using Active Probes for Input
When the input from the device under test requires high impedance, an active probe
can be connected between the device and the R&S FSVA/FSV.
With firmware R&S FSVA/FSV 1.61SP2 or newer, active probes from the R&S RT-ZS
series are supported when using the new probe adapter RT-ZA9.
When the probe has been connected to and recognized by the R&S FSVA/FSV, a pre-
defined "Generic Probe" transducer factor with 20 dB is automatically activated and the
unit of the spectrum analyzer is changed to dBμV. (The same applies after presetting
the instrument.) Then the system is ready to analyze circuit points that cannot be loa-
ded with the 50 Ω of the analyzer input, but require a higher impedance.
Optionally, the probe can be deactivated while remaining connected to the R&S FSVA/
FSV, for instance to analyze the digital input from the probe without considering the
transducer factor.
All RT probes (except for ZS10E) have a micro button. The action for the micro button
can be defined. Currently, either a single sweep or no action can be performed when
the button is pressed. By default, when you press the probe's micro button, the
R&S FSVA/FSV is set to single sweep mode and a single sweep is performed. This
allows you to start a measurement whilst applying the probe to a certain pin on the
board under test.
When using RT probes, consider the following:
● Active probes require operating power from the instrument and have a proprietary
interface to the instrument.
● The probe is automatically recognized by the instrument, no adjustment is
required.

● Connections should be as short as possible to keep the usable bandwidth high.

● Observe the operating voltage range.
For more information on RT probes, refer to the probe's documentation.
Connecting Active Probes

In order to use active probes with an R&S FSVA/FSV, an RT-ZA9 adapter is required.
The RT-ZA9 provides an interface between the probe's BNC socket and and the ana-
lyzer's N-socket and provides the necessary supply voltages for the probe via the USB
connection. Using this adapter, the following probes are currently supported:
● R&S RT-ZS10
● RT-ZS10E
● RT-ZS20
● RT-ZS30
To connect an active probe, proceed as follows:
1. Connect the adapter to the RF Input connector on the R&S FSVA/FSV.
2. Connect the adapter's USB cable to a USB connector on the R&S FSVA/FSV.
3. Connect the probe to the adapter.
Once the probe and adapter have been connected to the R&S FSVA/FSV correctly
and the analyzer has recognized the probe, the "Generic Probe" transducer is activa-
ted and you can start a measurement.
To determine whether the probe has been connected properly and recognized by the
R&S FSVA/FSV, use the remote control command PROB:SET:STAT? (see PROBe:
SETup:STATe? on page 767).

To perform a measurement with the probe

► Place the probe on the required position on the test equipment, then press the
micro button on the probe to perform a single sweep measurement.
Probe Configuration
Principally, the probe is automatically recognized by the instrument and no further
adjustment is required. However, you can switch off the probe while leaving it connec-
ted, and you can configure which action is to be performed when the probe's micro but-
ton is pressed.
To display the "Probe Configuration" dialog box, select the INPUT/OUTPUT key and
then the "Probe Config" softkey.
The following settings are available:
State............................................................................................................................404
Name...........................................................................................................................404
Serial Number............................................................................................................. 404
Part number................................................................................................................ 404
Micro Button Action..................................................................................................... 404
State
Activates a connected probe. Use this command to switch off the probe and measure
the digital input without considering the transducer factor of the probe.
Remote command:
PROBe[:STATe] on page 767
Name
Indicates the name of the connected probe.
Remote command:
PROBe:SETup:NAME? on page 767
Serial Number
Indicates the serial number of the connected probe.
Remote command:
PROBe:ID:SRNumber? on page 767
Part number
Indicates the material part number of the connected probe.
Remote command:
PROBe:ID:PARTnumber? on page 766
Micro Button Action

Defines which action is taken when the probe's micro button is pressed.
"RunSingle" A single sweep is performed.
"No Action" No action is taken.
Remote command:
PROBe:SETup:MODE on page 767

Measurement Modes
4.3.9 Performing Measurements – RUN SINGLE/RUN CONT Keys
The RUN SINGLE and RUN CONT keys are used to start measurement tasks.
● RUN SINGLE switches to single sweep mode and performs a single sweep, just as
the Single Sweep softkey in the "Sweep" menu does.
● RUN CONT switches to continuous sweep mode and starts sweeping, just as the
Continuous Sweep softkey in the "Sweep" menu does.
4.4 Measurement Modes

This section describes the provided measurement modes, the change of measurement
modes and the access to the menus of all active measurement modes. For details
refer to the following sections:
● Chapter 4.4.1, "Measurement Mode Selection – MODE Key", on page 405
● Chapter 4.4.2, "Measurement Mode Menus – HOME Key", on page 410
4.4.1 Measurement Mode Selection – MODE Key
The MODE key provides a quick access to the menu of the current measurement
mode and a fast change of the measurement mode.
The "Power Sensor" mode can be accessed via the INPUT/OUTPUT key. This mode
provides measurement functions for Power Sensors. The "Power Sensor" mode
requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding optional software.
Spectrogram mode
Equipped with the firmware option R&S FSV-K14, the R&S FSVA/FSV provides a
graphical overview of changes in frequency and amplitude over a specified period of
time. Spectrogram mode can be accessed viat the TRACE key.
For details see the description of R&S FSV-K14 in the base unit document.
To change the measurement mode
1. Press the MODE key.

A menu with the currently available measurement modes is displayed.
2. To activate a different mode, press the corresponding softkey.

Measurement Modes
Storing application-specific settings when switching modes

To store application-specific settings when you switch modes, activate the "Application
Setup Recovery" softkey in the "Setup" menu before starting a new mode (see "Appli-
cation Setup Recovery" on page 160).
● Spectrum Mode.....................................................................................................406
● I/Q Analyzer Mode................................................................................................ 407
● Analog Demodulation Mode (Analog Demodulation Option, R&S FSV-K7)......... 407
● FM Stereo Mode (Option R&S FSV-K7S)............................................................. 407
● Bluetooth Mode (Option R&S FSV-K8)................................................................. 407
● GSM/EDGE Analyzer Mode (GSM/EDGE Option, R&S FSV-K10)...................... 407
● Noise Figure Mode (Noise Figure Measurements Option, R&S FSV-K30)...........407
● Phase Noise Mode (Phase Noise Measurements Option, R&S FSV-K40)...........408
● Vector Signal Analysis mode (VSA Option, R&S FSV-K70)................................. 408
● 3G FDD BTS Mode (3GPP Base Station Measurements Option, R&S FSV-K72)
.............................................................................................................................. 408
● 3G FDD UE Mode (3GPP User Equipment Measurements Option, R&S FSV-K73)
.............................................................................................................................. 408
● TDS BTS and TDS UE Mode (Option R&S FSV-K76/-K77)................................. 408
● CDMA2000 BTS and MS Mode (Options R&S FSV-K82/-K83)............................408
● 1xEV-DO BTS and MS Mode (Options R&S FSV-K84/-K85)............................... 409
● WLAN Mode (WLAN TX Measurements Option, R&S FSV-K91)......................... 409
● WiMAX Mode (WiMAX IEEE 802.16 OFDM, OFDMA Measurements Option,
R&S FSV-K93)...................................................................................................... 409
● LTE Mode..............................................................................................................409
4.4.1.1 Spectrum Mode
In the "Spectrum" mode the provided functions correspond to those of a conventional

spectrum analyzer. The analyzer measures the frequency spectrum of the test signal
over the selected frequency range with the selected resolution and sweep time, or, for
a fixed frequency, displays the waveform of the video signal. This mode is set in the
initial configuration.
You can use up to four spectrum displays simultaneously. The additional spectrum dis-
plays are independent of each other. You can set up each display as you like without
affecting measurement configurations in another one. Each additional spectrum display
opens in an extra tab labelled "Spectrum 1" to "Spectrum 4".
► To add a new spectrum display, press the "New Spectrum" softkey.

The R&S FSVA/FSV opens an additional "Spectrum" tab each time you press the
softkey up to a maximum of four.
SCPI Command:
INSTrument[:SELect] on page 758
INSTrument:NSELect on page 760

Measurement Modes
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 760
4.4.1.2 I/Q Analyzer Mode
The "I/Q Analyzer" mode provides measurement and display functions for digital I/Q
signals. For details refer to Chapter 4.5, "Instrument Functions - I/Q Analyzer",
on page 410.
4.4.1.3 Analog Demodulation Mode (Analog Demodulation Option, R&S FSV-K7)
The "Analog Demodulation" mode requires an instrument equipped with the corre-
sponding optional software. This mode provides measurement functions for demodu-
lating AM, FM, or PM signals.
For details see the R&S FSV-K7 document.
4.4.1.4 FM Stereo Mode (Option R&S FSV-K7S)
The "FM Stereo" mode provides measurement functions for demodulating FM Stereo
signals. This mode requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding optional
software, as well as the Analog Demodulation option (R&S FSV-K7).
4.4.1.5 Bluetooth Mode (Option R&S FSV-K8)
The "Bluetooth" mode requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding optional
software. This mode provides measurement functions for performing Bluetooth mea-
surements.
4.4.1.6 GSM/EDGE Analyzer Mode (GSM/EDGE Option, R&S FSV-K10)
The "GSM/EDGE Analyzer" mode requires an instrument equipped with the corre-
sponding optional software. This mode provides measurement functions for downlink
or uplink signals according to the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) stand-
ards for GSM/EDGE in different domains (Time, Frequency, I/Q).
4.4.1.7 Noise Figure Mode (Noise Figure Measurements Option, R&S FSV-K30)
The "Noise Figure" mode requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding
optional software. This mode provides noise figure measurements.

Measurement Modes
4.4.1.8 Phase Noise Mode (Phase Noise Measurements Option, R&S FSV-K40)
The "Phase Noise" mode requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding
optional software. This mode provides measurements for phase noise tests.
4.4.1.9 Vector Signal Analysis mode (VSA Option, R&S FSV-K70)
The "Vector Signal Analysis" (VSA) mode requires an instrument equipped with the
corresponding optional software. This mode provides measurement functions for vec-
tor signal analysis.
For details refer to the R&S FSV-K70 document.
4.4.1.10 3G FDD BTS Mode (3GPP Base Station Measurements Option, R&S FSV-K72)
The "3G FDD BTS" mode requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding
optional software. This mode provides test measurements for WCDMA downlink sig-
nals (base station signals) according to the test specification.
4.4.1.11 3G FDD UE Mode (3GPP User Equipment Measurements Option, R&S FSV-K73)
The "3G FDD UE" mode requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding
optional software. This mode provides test measurements for WCDMA uplink signals
(mobile signals) according to the test specification.
4.4.1.12 TDS BTS and TDS UE Mode (Option R&S FSV-K76/-K77)
Equipped with the firmware application R&S FSV-K76, the R&S FSVA/FSV performs
code domain measurements on forward link signals according to the 3GPP standard
(Third Generation Partnership Project). TD-SCDMA BTS Analysis is performed in "TDS
BTS" mode.
Equipped with the firmware application R&S FSV-K77, the R&S FSV performs code
domain measurements on downlink signals according to the 3GPP standard. TD-
SCDMA ue Analysis is performed in "TDS ue" mode.
For details see the R&S FSV-K76/-K77 document.
4.4.1.13 CDMA2000 BTS and MS Mode (Options R&S FSV-K82/-K83)
The "CDMA2000 BTS" mode requires an instrument equipped with the optional soft-
wareR&S FSV-K82. This mode provides test measurements for basic CDMA2000
base station tests.

Measurement Modes
The "CDMA2000 MS" mode requires an instrument equipped with the optional soft-
wareR&S FSV-K83. This mode provides test measurements for basic CDMA2000
mobile station tests.
FSVNeu_k82_k83, 2, en_USFor details see the R&S FSV-K82/-K83 document.
4.4.1.14 1xEV-DO BTS and MS Mode (Options R&S FSV-K84/-K85)
The "1xEV-DO BTS" mode requires an instrument equipped with the optional software
R&S FSV-K84. This mode provides Code Domain measurements on forward link sig-
nals according to the 3GPP2 Standard (Third Generation Partnership Project 2) High
Rate Packet Data, generally referred to as "1xEV-DO".
The "1xEV-DO MS" mode requires an instrument equipped with the optional software
R&S FSV-K85. This mode provides Code Domain measurements on reverse link sig-
nals according to the 3GPP2 Standard (Third Generation Partnership Project 2) High
Rate Packet Data, generally referred to as "1xEV-DO".
For details see the R&S FSV-K84/-K85 document.
4.4.1.15 WLAN Mode (WLAN TX Measurements Option, R&S FSV-K91)
The "WLAN" mode requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding optional
software. This mode provides Wireless LAN TX measurement functions according to
IEEE 802.11 a, b, g and j standards.
This option is not available for R&S FSVA/FSV 40 model 1307.9002K39.
4.4.1.16 WiMAX Mode (WiMAX IEEE 802.16 OFDM, OFDMA Measurements Option,
R&S FSV-K93)
The "WiMAX" mode requires an instrument equipped with the WiMAX IEEE 802.16
OFDM, OFDMA Measurements option (R&S FSV-K93). This mode provides WiMAX
and WiBro measurement functions according to IEEE standards 802.16-2004 OFDM
and 802.16e-2005 OFDMA/WiBro. It includes the WiMAX 802.16 OFDM Measure-
ments option.
4.4.1.17 LTE Mode
The LTE mode requires an instrument equipped with one of the EUTRA/LTE DL mea-
surement applications that are available for the R&S FSVA/FSV.
● R&S FSV-K100 LTE FDD DL
● R&S FSV-K101 LTE FDD UL
● R&S FSV-K104 LTE TDD DL

Instrument Functions - I/Q Analyzer
● R&S FSV-K105 LTE TDD UL

The application provides EUTRA/LTE measurement functions according to the 3GPP
standard.
For details see the corresponding manuals.
4.4.2 Measurement Mode Menus – HOME Key
The HOME key provides a quick access to the root menu of the current measurement
mode.
For the basic "Spectrum" mode (except for tracking generator measurements, see
Chapter 4.6, "Instrument Functions – Tracking Generator (Options R&S FSV-B9/
R&S FSV-B10)", on page 444), the softkeys of this menu are identical to the Chap-
ter 4.2.2.1, "Softkeys of the Frequency Menu", on page 185.
For details on changing the mode refer to Chapter 4.4.1, "Measurement Mode Selec-
tion – MODE Key", on page 405.
4.5 Instrument Functions - I/Q Analyzer

The I/Q Analyzer provides functions to capture, visualize and evaluate I/Q data. These
functions include:
● capturing data from the RF input or an R&S Digital I/Q Interface (with R&S FSV-
B17 option)
● displaying I/Q data in various result types, e.g. separate Real/Imag diagrams or as
an I/Q-vector
● providing I/Q data to a digital output for further processing in other devices (with
R&S FSV-B17 option)

The "I/Q Analyzer" menu is displayed when you select the "I/Q Analyzer" softkey in the
MODE menu. The same menu is displayed when you press the MEAS or MEAS
CONFIG keys in "I/Q Analyzer" mode. For details see Chapter 4.5.1, "Softkeys and
Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu", on page 411.
The "Amplitude" menu, which is displayed when you select the AMPT key, is described
in Chapter 4.5.2, "Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode",
on page 421.
The "Input/Output" menu, which is displayed when you select the INPUT/OUTPUT key,
as well as the "Save/Recall" menu (SAVE/RCL key) contain the same functions in I/Q
Analyzer mode as in "Spectrum" mode (see Chapter 4.3.8.1, "Softkeys of the Input/
Output Menu", on page 397).

The "Marker" menu is identical to the one in Spectrum mode for display modes "Magni-
tude","Real/Imag" and "Spectrum" (except for "Marker Zoom"), see "Display Config"
on page 417. For the other display modes this menu is not available.
The "Marker To" menu is identical to the one in Spectrum mode. For the "Real / Imag
(I/Q)" display mode, an additional function is available, see Chapter 4.5.4, "Softkeys of
the Marker To Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode", on page 433.
The "Marker Function" menu, which is displayed when you select the MKR FUNC key,
is described in Chapter 4.5.5, "Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu in I/Q Analyzer
Mode", on page 434.
The "Trace" menu is identical to the one in Spectrum mode, except in "I/Q Vector" dis-
play mode. In this case, only 1 trace is available and no detector can be selected (see
Chapter 4.2.8.1, "Softkeys of the Trace Menu", on page 219).
The "Trigger" menu, which is displayed when you select the TRIG key, is described in
see Chapter 4.5.3, "Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode", on page 428.
The "Span", "BW", and "Lines" menus are not available in this mode. For digital input,
the "Frequency" menu is also not available. All other menus are identical to those
described for "Spectrum" mode (see Chapter 4.2, "Measurement Parameters",
on page 182 and Chapter 4.3, "Measurement Functions", on page 248.
Remote Control
Measurements with the I/Q Analyzer can also be performed via remote control.
The required commands are contained in the following subsystems:
● Chapter 5.3.3.9, "INPut Subsystem", on page 751
● "TRACe:IQ Subsystem" on page 883
● Chapter 5.3.3.12, "OUTPut Subsystem", on page 764
Further information
● Some general information on working with I/Q data can be found in Chapter 4.5.6,
"Working with I/Q Data", on page 438.
● When measuring I/Q data, you may make use of the optional R&S Digital I/Q Inter-
face (R&S FSV-B17); for details see Chapter 4.7, "Instrument Functions - R&S Dig-
ital I/Q Interface (Option R&S FSV-B17)", on page 469.
4.5.1 Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu
This section describes the softkeys and parameters of the "I/Q Analyzer" submenu
which is displayed when you select the "I/Q Analyzer" softkey in the MODE menu. The
same menu is displayed when you press the MEAS or MEAS CONFIG keys in "I/Q
Analyzer" mode.
I/Q Analyzer................................................................................................................ 412
└ Signal Source................................................................................................412
└ Input Path........................................................................................... 413
└ Connected Device.............................................................................. 413

└ Input Sample Rate.............................................................................. 413

└ Full Scale Level.................................................................................. 413
└ Level Unit............................................................................................413
└ Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level........................................ 413
└ EXIQ............................................................................................................. 413
└ TX Settings......................................................................................... 414
└ RX Settings.........................................................................................414
└ Send To.............................................................................................. 414
└ Firmware Update................................................................................ 414
└ R&S Support.......................................................................................414
└ DigIConf..............................................................................................414
└ Level............................................................................................................. 415
└ Reference Level..................................................................................415
└ Auto Level...........................................................................................415
└ Preamp On/Off....................................................................................415
└ Data Acquisition............................................................................................ 415
└ Sample Rate....................................................................................... 416
└ Filter BW............................................................................................. 416
└ No Filter.............................................................................................. 416
└ Maximum Bandwidth.......................................................................... 416
└ Meas Time.......................................................................................... 417
└ Record Length.................................................................................... 417
└ Display Config...............................................................................................417
└ Digital Output................................................................................................ 419
└ Digital IQ Info................................................................................................ 420
└ C/N, C/No......................................................................................................420
└ C/N......................................................................................................420
└ C/No....................................................................................................420
└ Channel Bandwidth ............................................................................421
└ Adjust Settings ...................................................................................421
I/Q Analyzer
Starts the I/Q Analyzer evaluation mode and opens the submenu for the I/Q analyzer,
which allows you to configure and display measurements of I/Q data, e.g. digital base-
band signals.
Remote command:
Starting I/Q Analyzer:
TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe] on page 884
Selecting evaluation mode:
TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL on page 891
Selecting the I/Q Analyzer display configuration
CALCulate<n>:FORMat on page 735
Signal Source ← I/Q Analyzer


Input Path ← Signal Source ← I/Q Analyzer

Remote command:
Connected Device ← Signal Source ← I/Q Analyzer

Remote command:
Input Sample Rate ← Signal Source ← I/Q Analyzer

Remote command:
Full Scale Level ← Signal Source ← I/Q Analyzer

the magnitude "1".
Remote command:
Level Unit ← Signal Source ← I/Q Analyzer

Remote command:
Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level ← Signal Source ← I/Q Analyzer
change occurs.
Remote command:
EXIQ ← I/Q Analyzer

1307.9002Kxx.

ule Manual".
ual".
TX Settings ← EXIQ ← I/Q Analyzer

RX Settings ← EXIQ ← I/Q Analyzer

Send To ← EXIQ ← I/Q Analyzer

BOX.
Firmware Update ← EXIQ ← I/Q Analyzer

R&S Support ← EXIQ ← I/Q Analyzer

ment.
DigIConf ← EXIQ ← I/Q Analyzer


Remote command:
Operating Manual".
Example 1:
SOURce:EBOX:*RST
SOURce:EBOX:*IDN?
Result:
Example 2:
Level ← I/Q Analyzer

Opens a dialog box to define the level settings.
Reference Level ← Level ← I/Q Analyzer

Specifies the reference level for the I/Q measurement.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue on page 744
Auto Level ← Level ← I/Q Analyzer

If enabled, the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if the full
scale level changes.
Remote command:
Preamp On/Off ← Level ← I/Q Analyzer

R&S FSV-B17).
Remote command:
Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

Opens a dialog box to configure data acquisition in I/Q Analyzer mode.

Sample Rate ← Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

Defines the I/Q data sample rate of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
This rate may differ from the sample rate of the connected device (see "Input Sample
Rate" on page 399).
If the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17) is active, restrictions to the sample rate
apply, see Table 4-13.
For R&S FSVA/FSV 40 model 1307.9002K39, the maximum sample rate is 12.5 MHz.
Remote command:
TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe on page 895
Filter BW ← Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

Displays the flat, usable bandwidth of the final I/Q data.
This value is dependent on the defined Data Acquisition and the defined Signal Source
and cannot be edited manually.
To avoid using a filter and use the Input Sample Rate instead, select the "No Filter"
option.
Remote command:
TRACe<n>:IQ:BWIDth on page 886
No Filter ← Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

This setting is only available when using the Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSV-
B17).
If enabled, no digital decimation filter is used during data acquisition. Thus, the Sample
Rate is identical to the input sample rate configured for the Digital I/Q input source (see
"Input Sample Rate" on page 399).
Note, however, that in this case noise, artifacts, and the second IF side band may not
be suppressed in the captured I/Q data.
Remote command:
TRACe<n>:IQ:DIQFilter on page 889
Maximum Bandwidth ← Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

Defines the maximum bandwidth to be used by the R&S FSVA/FSV for I/Q data acqui-
sition
This function is only available if the bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 is
installed and no other restrictions for its use apply (see "Restrictions" on page 440).
For details on the maximum bandwidth see Chapter 4.5.6.2, "Sample Rate and Maxi-
mum Usable Bandwidth (RF Input)", on page 440.

"Auto" (Default) The maximum available bandwidth is used for all sample
rates.
If the bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 is installed, it is
activated for bandwidths as of 64 MHz (if no other restrictions for its
use apply, see "Restrictions" on page 440).
Thus, sample rates up to 400 MHz and an I/Q bandwidth up to 160
MHz are possible.
Note that using the bandwidth extension may cause more spurious
effects.
"40 MHz" Deactivates use of the bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160,
thus reducing possible spurious effects, while restricting the analysis
bandwidth to 40 MHz.
Sample rates higher than 128 MHz can only be achieved using the
bandwidth extension.
"160 MHz" The bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 is always used (if no
other restrictions for its use apply, see "Restrictions" on page 440),
thus raising the minimum possible sample rate to 32 MHz.
Remote command:
TRACe:IQ:WBANd[:STATe] on page 895
To query the currently used bandwidth:
TRACe<n>:IQ:BWIDth on page 886
Meas Time ← Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

Defines the I/Q acquisition time. By default, the measurement time is calculated as the
number of I/Q samples ("Record Length") divided by the sample rate. If you change the
measurement time, the Record Length is automatically changed, as well.
For details on the maximum number of samples see also Chapter 4.5.6, "Working with
I/Q Data", on page 438.
Remote command:
Record Length ← Data Acquisition ← I/Q Analyzer

Defines the number of I/Q samples to record. By default, the number of sweep points is
used. The record length is calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sam-
ple rate. If you change the record length, the Meas Time is automatically changed, as
well.
Remote command:
TRACe<n>:IQ:RLENgth on page 892
Display Config ← I/Q Analyzer

Opens a selection list to specify the result display configuration. The following displays
are available:

"Magnitude" Shows the values in time domain
"Spectrum" Displays the frequency spectrum of the captured I/Q samples.

"I/Q-Vector" Displays the captured samples in an I/Q-plot. The samples are con-
nected by a line.
"Real/Imag Displays the I and Q values in separate diagrams.

(I/Q)"
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:FORMat on page 735
Digital Output ← I/Q Analyzer


base unit.
Remote command:
Digital IQ Info ← I/Q Analyzer

includes:
● Used port
transfer rates
Remote command:
C/N, C/No ← I/Q Analyzer

Carrier-to-noise measurements are not available in zero span mode.
Note: As of firmware version 2.0, carrier-to-noise measurements are also available in
the I/Q Analyzer, but only for Spectrum displays (see "Display Config" on page 417).
For general information on performing carrier-to-noise ratio measurements see Chap-
ter 4.3.5.3, "Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio", on page 307.
C/N ← C/N, C/No ← I/Q Analyzer

Switches the measurement of the carrier/noise ratio on or off. If no marker is active,
marker 1 is activated.
To" menu.
Remote command:
C/No ← C/N, C/No ← I/Q Analyzer

Switches the measurement of the carrier/noise ratio with reference to a 1 Hz bandwidth
on or off. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.

To" menu.
Remote command:
Channel Bandwidth ← C/N, C/No ← I/Q Analyzer

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the measurement channel bandwidth for each chan-
nel.
The default setting is 14 kHz.
Note that in the I/Q Analyzer the channel bandwidth does not change the measure-
ment span or sampling rate; it merely defines the range for the carrier-to-noise analy-
sis.
Remote command:
Adjust Settings ← C/N, C/No ← I/Q Analyzer

Enables the RMS detector (see also Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Overview",
on page 233) and adjusts the span to the selected channel bandwidth according to:
"4 x channel bandwidth + measurement margin"
The adjustment is performed once; if necessary, the setting can be changed later on.
Note: in the I/Q Analyzer, this function is not available. The channel bandwidth defines
the range for the carrier-to-noise analysis.
Remote command:
4.5.2 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode
In I/Q Analyzer mode, the "Amplitude" menu, which is displayed when you select the
AMPT key, contains the following functions.
If the display configuration for the I/Q Analyzer is set to "I/Q Vector" or "Real/Imag (I/
Q)", the Range and Unit functions are not available.
Ref Level..................................................................................................................... 422

Y-Axis Max.................................................................................................................. 422
Range..........................................................................................................................422
└ Range Log 100 dB........................................................................................ 422
└ Range Log 50 dB.......................................................................................... 422
└ Range Log 10 dB.......................................................................................... 423
└ Range Log 5 dB............................................................................................ 423
└ Range Log 1 dB............................................................................................ 423
└ Range Log Manual........................................................................................423

└ Range Linear %............................................................................................ 424

└ Range Lin. Unit............................................................................................. 424
Unit..............................................................................................................................424
Preamp On/Off............................................................................................................ 424
RF Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual............................................................................. 425
RF Atten Auto/Mech Att Auto...................................................................................... 425
El Atten On/Off............................................................................................................ 425
El Atten Mode (Auto/Man)...........................................................................................426
Ref Level Offset.......................................................................................................... 426
Ref Level Position....................................................................................................... 426
Grid Abs/Rel ...............................................................................................................427
Noise Correction......................................................................................................... 427
Input (AC/DC)..............................................................................................................427
Input 50 Ω/75 Ω ..........................................................................................................427
Ref Level
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit (dBm, dBµV,
etc).
The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor-
tion of the measured value. Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor-
rectly, which is indicated by the "IFOVL" status display.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel on page 742
Y-Axis Max
Opens an edit dialog box to specify the maximum value of the y-axis in either direction
(in Volts). Thus, the y-axis scale starts at -<Y-AxisMax> and ends at +<Y-AxisMax>.
This command is only available if the display configuration for the I/Q Analyzer is set to
"I/Q Vector" or "Real/Imag (I/Q)", see "Display Config" on page 417.
Range
Opens a submenu to define the display range of the level axis.

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741


Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741

Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:
on page 741
Range Log Manual ← Range

ually.
Remote command:
SPACing on page 741
Display range:

Range Linear % ← Range

Remote command:
on page 741
Range Lin. Unit ← Range

labeled in dB.
Remote command:
on page 741
Unit
Opens the "Unit" submenu to select the unit for the level axis.
The default setting is dBm.
If a transducer is switched on, the softkey is not available.
In general, the signal analyzer measures the signal voltage at the RF input. The level
display is calibrated in RMS values of an unmodulated sine wave signal. In the default
state, the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW (= dBm). Via the known input impe-
dance (50 Ω or 75 Ω), conversion to other units is possible. The following units are
available and directly convertible:
● dBm
● dBmV
● dBμV
● dBμA
● dBpW
● Volt
● Ampere
● Watt
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer on page 735
Preamp On/Off

R&S FSV-B17).
Remote command:
RF Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation, irrespective of the reference level. If
electronic attenuation is activated (option R&S FSV-B25 only; "El Atten Mode Auto"
softkey), this setting defines the mechanical attenuation.
The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps.
accordingly.
R&S FSV-B17).
The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula:
levelmixer = levelinput – RF attenuation
Note: As of firmware version 1.61, the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm. Mixer
levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results, which are indicated
by the "OVLD" status display. The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal,
but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument!
"Sweep List" dialog box, see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 348.
Remote command:
INPut:ATTenuation on page 751
RF Atten Auto/Mech Att Auto

Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level.
This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used. It is the default setting.
R&S FSV-B17).
Remote command:
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 752
El Atten On/Off
This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off. This softkey is only available
with option R&S FSV-B25.
When the electronic attenuator is activated, the mechanical and electronic attenuation
can be defined separately. Note however, that both parts must be defined in the same
mode, i.e. either both manually, or both automatically.
R&S FSV-B17).

● To define the mechanical attenuation, use the RF Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual
or RF Atten Auto/Mech Att Auto softkeys.
● To define the electronic attenuation, use the El Atten Mode (Auto/Man) softkey.
stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz, this function is available again.
When the electronic attenuator is switched off, the corresponding RF attenuation mode
(auto/manual) is automatically activated.
Remote command:
El Atten Mode (Auto/Man)

This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically
or manually. If manual mode is selected, an edit dialog box is opened to enter the
value. This softkey is only available with option R&S FSV-B25, and only if the elec-
tronic attenuator has been activated via the El Atten On/Off softkey.
stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz, electronic attenuation is available
again. If the electronic attenuation was defined manually, it must be re-defined.
To re-open the edit dialog box for manual value definition, select the "Man" mode
again.
Remote command:
INPut:EATT on page 755
Ref Level Offset

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the
measured level irrespective of the selected unit. The scaling of the y-axis is changed
accordingly. The setting range is ±200 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet on page 743
Ref Level Position

Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level position, i.e. the position of the
maximum AD converter value on the level axis. The setting range is from -200 to
+200 %, 0 % corresponding to the lower and 100 % to the upper limit of the diagram.
Remote command:

Grid Abs/Rel
Switches between absolute and relative scaling of the level axis (not available with
"Linear" range).
"Abs" Absolute scaling: The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute
value of the reference level. Absolute scaling is the default setting.
"Rel" Relative scaling: The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB. The
scaling is in dB whereas the reference level is always in the set unit
(for details on unit settings see the "Unit" softkey).
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE on page 742
Noise Correction
is performed.
Remote command:
Input (AC/DC)
R&S FSV-B17).
Remote command:
Input 50 Ω/75 Ω
Uses 50 Ω or 75 Ω as reference impedance for the measured levels. Default setting is
50 Ω.
The setting 75 Ω should be selected if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a
higher impedance using a 75 Ω adapter of the RAZ type (= 25 Ω in series to the input
impedance of the instrument). The correction value in this case is 1.76 dB = 10 log (75
Ω/50 Ω).
All levels specified in this Operating Manual refer to the default setting of the instru-
ment (50 Ω).

R&S FSV-B17).
Remote command:
INPut:IMPedance on page 757
4.5.3 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode
In I/Q Analyzer mode, the "Trigger" menu, which is displayed when you select the
TRIG key, contains the following functions:
Trg/Gate Source..........................................................................................................428
└ Free Run....................................................................................................... 428
└ External.........................................................................................................429
└ Video.............................................................................................................429
└ RF Power...................................................................................................... 429
└ IF Power/BB Power.......................................................................................430
└ Power Sensor............................................................................................... 430
└ Time.............................................................................................................. 431
└ Digital IQ....................................................................................................... 431
Trigger Level............................................................................................................... 432
Trigger Polarity............................................................................................................432
Trigger Offset.............................................................................................................. 432
Repetition Interval....................................................................................................... 433
Trigger Hysteresis....................................................................................................... 433
Trigger Holdoff............................................................................................................ 433
Trg/Gate Source
Opens the "Trigger/Gate Source" dialog box to select the trigger/gate mode.
As gate modes, all modes except "Power Sensor" are available. For details see also
Chapter 4.2.9.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 245.
The default setting is "Free Run". If a trigger mode other than "Free Run" has been set,
the enhancement label "TRG" is displayed and the trigger source is indicated.
Note: When triggering or gating is activated, the squelch funciton is automatically dis-
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
Free Run ← Trg/Gate Source

The start of a sweep is not triggered. Once a measurement is completed, another is
started immediately.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IMM, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901

External ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the "EXT TRIG/GATE IN" input connector on the
rear panel.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR EXT, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 847
Video ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering by the displayed voltage.
A horizontal trigger line is shown in the diagram. It is used to set the trigger threshold
from 0 % to 100 % of the diagram height.
Video mode is only available in the time domain.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR VID, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
SWE:EGAT:SOUR VID for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 847
RF Power ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the measurement
channel.
This trigger mode is available with detector board 1307.9554.02 Rev 05.00 or higher. It
is not available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S FSVA/FSV-
B17). If RF Power trigger mode is selected and digital baseband input is activated, the
trigger mode is automatically switched to "Free Run".
RF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth extension option
R&S FSV-B160.
In RF Power trigger mode the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate
frequency. The detector threshold can be selected in a range between - 50 dBm and
-10 dBm at the input mixer. The resulting trigger level at the RF input lies within the
following range:
(-24dBm + RF Att ) ≤ Triggerlevel ≤ (+5dBm + RF Att), max. 30 dBm, for Preamp =
OFF
(-40dBm + RF Att ) ≤ Triggerlevel ≤ (-11dBm + RF Att), max. 30 dBm, for Preamp =
ON
with
500 MHz ≤ InputSignal ≤ 7 GHz
Note: If input values outside of this range occur (e.g. for fullspan measurements), the
sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input values is displayed
in the status bar.
A Trigger Offset, Trg/Gate Polarity and Trigger Holdoff can be defined for the RF trig-
ger to improve the trigger stability, but no hysteresis.

Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR RFP, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
on page 847
IF Power/BB Power ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering of the measurement using the second intermediate frequency.
For this purpose, the R&S FSVA/FSV uses a level detector at the second intermediate
frequency.
The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification. A refer-
ence level offset, if defined, is also considered.
For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet.
The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type:
Sweep mode:
FFT mode:
Note: Be aware that in auto sweep type mode, due to a possible change in sweep
types, the bandwidth may vary considerably for the same RBW setting.
The R&S FSVA/FSV is triggered as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the
selected frequency (= start frequency in the frequency sweep).
Thus, the measurement of spurious emissions, e.g. for pulsed carriers, is possible
even if the carrier lies outside the selected frequency span.
For digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17), the baseband power
("BB Power") is used as the trigger source.
IF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth extension option
R&S FSV-B160.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IFP, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
TRIG:SOUR BBP for digital input
SWE:EGAT:SOUR IFP for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 847
Power Sensor ← Trg/Gate Source

Uses an external power sensor as a trigger function. This option is only available if the
R&S FSV-K9 Power Sensor option is installed and a power sensor is connected and
configured.
(See Chapter 4.9, "Instrument Functions - Power Sensor (R&S FSV-K9)",
on page 508.)
Power sensors are configured in the "Input/Output" menu, see Chapter 4.9.3, "Config-
uring an External Power Trigger", on page 513.

If a power sensor is selected as the trigger mode, the following softkeys are not availa-
ble; these settings are configured in the "Power Sensor Configuration" dialog box (see
Chapter 4.9.5, "Power Sensor Configuration Dialog", on page 517).
● Trg/Gate Level
● Trg/Gate Polarity
● Trigger Hysteresis
● Trigger Holdoff
Note: For R&S power sensors, the "Gate Mode" Lvl is not supported. The signal sent
by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded, rather than a
time period. However, only time periods can be used for gating in level mode. Thus,
the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement;
the measurement cannot be completed.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR PSE, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
SWE:EGAT:SOUR PSE for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 847
Time ← Trg/Gate Source

triggered. The shortest interval is 2 ms.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR TIMETRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
Digital IQ ← Trg/Gate Source

Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector. In the sub-
menu you must specify which general purpose bit (GP0 to GP5) will provide the trigger
data.
This trigger mode is available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option
R&S FSV-B17) only.
A Trigger Offset, and Trg/Gate Polarity can be defined for the Digital IQ trigger to
improve the trigger stability, but no hysteresis or holdoff value.
The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS
connector pins.
(See Table 4-20)
Bit LVDS pin

Bit LVDS pin
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR GP0, see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901
on page 847
Trigger Level
Defines the trigger level as a numeric value.
In the trigger mode "Time", this softkey is not available.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower on page 900
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo on page 900
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:BBPower on page 899
Trigger Polarity
Sets the polarity of the trigger source.
The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal. The default set-
ting is "Pos". The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the "Free Run" and
"Time" mode.
"Pos" Level triggering: the sweep is stopped by the logic "0" signal and
restarted by the logical "1" signal after the gate delay time has
elapsed.
"Neg" Edge triggering: the sweep is continued on a "0" to "1" transition for
the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe on page 901
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity on page 847
Trigger Offset
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the
start of the sweep.
offset > 0: Start of the sweep is delayed
offset < 0: Sweep starts earlier (pre-trigger)

Only possible for span = 0 (e.g. I/Q Analyzer mode) and gated trigger
switched off
Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time:
pretriggermax = sweep time
When using the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17) with I/Q Ana-
lyzer mode, the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger
samples.
See Table 4-14.

In the "External" or "IF Power" trigger mode, a common input signal is used for both
trigger and gate. Therefore, changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay (trig-
ger offset) as well.
mode), use the TRACe<n>:IQ:TPISample? command.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] on page 898
Repetition Interval
triggered. The shortest interval is 2 ms. This softkey is only available if the trigger
source "Time" is selected (see "Time" on page 241).
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval on page 903
Trigger Hysteresis
Defines the value for the trigger hysteresis for "IF power" or "RF Power" trigger sour-
ces. The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the power trig-
ger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement. The range of the value is
between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis on page 899
Trigger Holdoff
Defines the value for the trigger holdoff. The holdoff value in s is the time which must
pass before triggering, in case another trigger event happens.
This softkey is only available if "IFPower", "RF Power" or "BBPower" is the selected
trigger source.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff on page 898
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:BBPower:HOLDoff on page 898
4.5.4 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode
In I/Q Analyzer mode, The "Marker To" menu is identical to the one in Spectrum mode
(see Chapter 4.3.4.1, "Softkeys of the Marker To Menu", on page 271). For the "Real/
Imag (I/Q)" display mode, however, an additional function is available.
Search Settings
Opens a dialog box to define which data is used for marker search functions.
Note: The search settings apply to all markers, not only the currently selected one.
"Search Real" Marker search functions are performed on the real trace of the I/Q
measurement.

"Search Imag" Marker search functions are performed on the imaginary trace of the
I/Q measurement.
"Search Mag- Marker search functions are performed on the magnitude of the I and
nitude" Q data.
Remote command:
"CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion Subsystem" on page 669
4.5.5 Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode
In I/Q Analyzer mode, the "Marker Function" menu is similar to the one in Spectrum
mode (see Chapter 4.3.3.1, "Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu", on page 257).
For the "I/Q Vector" display mode, however, this menu is not available.
Select Marker (No)...................................................................................................... 434
Signal Count................................................................................................................434
n dB down................................................................................................................... 435
Marker Peak List......................................................................................................... 435
└ Peak List On/Off............................................................................................436
└ Sort Mode Freq/Lvl....................................................................................... 436
└ Max Peak Count........................................................................................... 436
└ Peak Excursion............................................................................................. 436
└ Left Limit....................................................................................................... 436
└ Right Limit..................................................................................................... 436
└ Threshold...................................................................................................... 437
└ ASCII File Export.......................................................................................... 437
└ Decim Sep.................................................................................................... 437
└ Marker Number............................................................................................. 437
Band Power.................................................................................................................437
└ Select Marker (No)........................................................................................438
└ Band Power On/Off.......................................................................................438
└ Span..............................................................................................................438
└ Power............................................................................................................438
└ Density.......................................................................................................... 438
Select Marker (No)

Signal Count
Switches the frequency counter on or off, and opens an edit dialog box to define the
resolution of the frequency counter, if enabled. The frequency is counted at the posi-
tion of the reference marker (marker 1). If no marker is activate, marker 1 is switched
on and positioned on the largest signal.
The sweep stops at the reference marker until the frequency counter has delivered a
result. The result is displayed in the marker field (see Figure 4-9), labeled with [Tx
CNT].

For more information see Chapter 4.3.3.5, "Frequency Measurement with the Fre-
quency Counter", on page 267.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt on page 656
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency? on page 657
n dB down
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value to define the level spacing of the two tempo-
rary markers to the right and left of marker 1 (default setting: 3 dB). Activates the tem-
porary markers T1 and T2. The values of the temporary markers (T1, T2) and the
entered value (ndB) are displayed in the marker field.
If a positive value is entered, the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active refer-
ence marker. If a negative value (e.g. for notch filter measurements) is entered, the
markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active reference marker. Marker T1 is placed
to the left and marker T2 to the right of the reference marker.
In the marker table, the following results are displayed:
Span setting Parameter name Description
span > 0 Bw frequency spacing of the two temporary markers
Q factor quality of the displayed bandwidth value (Bw)
span = 0 PWid pulse width between the two temporary markers
If it is not possible to form the frequency spacing for the n dB value (e.g. because of
noise display), dashes instead of a measured value are displayed.
Remote command:
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:STATe on page 682
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD 3dB, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown on page 680
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:RES? , see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:RESult? on page 682
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:QFAC?, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:QFACtor on page 681
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ? (span > 0), see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? on page 681
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:TIME? (span = 0), see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME? on page 683
Marker Peak List

Opens the "Peak List" submenu to define criteria for the sort order and the contents of
the peak list. For each listed peak the frequency ("Stimulus") and level ("Response")
values are given. In addition, the peaks are indicated in the trace display. A maximum
of 50 entries are listed.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt? on page 675
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X on page 677
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y? on page 678
Peak List On/Off ← Marker Peak List

Activates/deactivates the marker peak list. If activated, the peak list is displayed and
the peaks are indicated in the trace display.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STAT on page 677
Sort Mode Freq/Lvl ← Marker Peak List

Defines the criteria for sorting:
"Freq" sorting in ascending order of frequency values (span > 0) or time val-
ues (span = 0)
"Lvl" sorting in ascending order of the level
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT on page 676
Max Peak Count ← Marker Peak List

Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE on page 676
Peak Excursion ← Marker Peak List

Remote command:
Left Limit ← Marker Peak List

Remote command:
Right Limit ← Marker Peak List

the stop frequency.

Remote command:
Threshold ← Marker Peak List

Remote command:
ASCII File Export ← Marker Peak List

Remote command:
Decim Sep ← Marker Peak List

Remote command:
Marker Number ← Marker Peak List

If enabled, the determined peaks are indicated by their corresponding marker number
in the trace display.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel:STATe
on page 675
Band Power
Opens a submenu to activate and configure a band power marker. Band power mark-
ers allow you to measure the integrated power for a defined span (band) around a
marker. The result can be displayed either as a power (dBm) or density (dBm/Hz). The
span is indicated by lines in the diagram.

trum mode.
Note: As of firmware version 2.0, Band Power markers are also available in the I/Q
Analyzer, but only for Spectrum displays (see "Display Config" on page 417).
For more information see Chapter 4.3.3.8, "Performing Band Power Measurements",
on page 269.
Select Marker (No) ← Band Power

Band Power On/Off ← Band Power

Activates or deactivates the band power marker. When switched to on, if no marker is
active yet, marker 1 is activated. Otherwise, the currently active marker is used as a
band power marker (all other marker functions for this marker are deactivated). All
markers can be defined as band power markers, each with a different span.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 671
Span ← Band Power

Defines the span (band) around the marker for which the power is measured. The span
is indicated by lines in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN on page 671
Power ← Band Power

Selects the power mode for the band power marker, i.e. the result is displayed in dBm.
Remote command:
Density ← Band Power

Selects the density mode for the band power marker, i.e. the result is displayed in
dBm/Hz.
Remote command:
4.5.6 Working with I/Q Data
I/Q data can be captured either from RF input, or via the optional R&S Digital I/Q Inter-
face (R&S FSV-B17), or it can be imported from a file (see Chapter 4.1.2.3, "Importing
and Exporting I/Q Data", on page 172). The captured I/Q data can then be processed
further, e.g. using the I/Q Analyzer, or in the applications that support the R&S Digital

I/Q Interface. Additionally, the captured I/Q data can be exported to a file in order to
process it in another application, e.g. Vector Signal Analysis, if available.
Working with digital input is described in Chapter 4.7, "Instrument Functions - R&S Dig-
ital I/Q Interface (Option R&S FSV-B17)", on page 469 and in the applications that
support that interface.
This section describes I/Q data processing of RF input, e.g. in the I/Q Analyzer.
The block diagram in Figure 4-24 shows the analyzer hardware for active RF input
from the IF section to the processor.
The A/D converter samples the IF signal at a rate of 128 MHz. The digital signal is
down-converted to the complex baseband, lowpass-filtered, and the sample rate is
reduced. The continuously adjustable sample rates are realized using an optimal deci-
mation filter and subsequent resampling on the set sample rate.
The I/Q data is written to a single memory, the data acquisition is hardware-triggered.
Figure 4-24: Block diagram illustrating the R&S FSVA/FSV signal processing
Maximum number of samples

The maximum number of samples for RF input is 200 MS.
For digital input using the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17), see Table 4-14.
4.5.6.1 Bandwidth Extension Option R&S FSV-B160
The bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 provides additional hardware, which
makes a maximum I/Q bandwidth of 160 MHz and sample rates up to 400 MHz possi-
ble. If this option is installed and active, signals are processed with the new hardware
for sample rates as of 64 MHz (or 32 MHz, depending on the Maximum Bandwidth
setting):

Figure 4-25: Block diagram illustrating the R&S FSVA/FSV signal processing (with option B160)
Usage of the optional hardware can be deactivated manually for sample rates between
64 MHz and 128 MHz, if necessary, for example to reduce possible spurious effects. In
this case, the signal is processed as described in Figure 4-24.
Restrictions
The optional bandwidth extension R&S FSV-B160 can not be activated if any of the fol-
lowing conditions apply:
● R&S FSV firmware versions previous to 2.0
● R&S FSV models 1307.9002Kx
● For R&S FSV models 1321.3008K13/30/39/40: For center frequencies larger than
7 GHz
● For sample rates < 32 MHz
● With active internal or external tracking generators (B9/B10)
● With any trigger except for an external trigger
Maximum record length

When using the bandwidth extension R&S FSV-B160, the maximum record length is
restricted; see "R&S FSVA/FSV with activated option B160 (I/Q Bandwidth Extension)"
on page 442.
4.5.6.2 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth (RF Input)
Information on sample rates and maximum usable bandwidths for Digital I/Q input is
described in Table 4-13.
Definitions
● Input sample rate (ISR): the sample rate of the useful data provided by the con-
nected instrument to the R&S FSVA/FSV input

● (User, Output) Sample rate (SR): the sample rate that is defined by the user (e.g.
in the "Data Aquisition" dialog box in the "I/Q Analyzer" application) and which is
used as the basis for analysis or output
● Usable I/Q (Analysis) bandwidth: the bandwidth range in which the signal
remains undistorted in regard to amplitude characteristic and group delay; this
range can be used for accurate analysis by the R&S FSVA/FSV
For the I/Q data acquisition, digital decimation filters are used internally. The passband
of these digital filters determines the maximum usable I/Q bandwidth. In consequence,
signals within the usable I/Q bandwidth (passband) remain unchanged, while signals
outside the usable I/Q bandwidth (passband) are suppressed. Usually, the suppressed
signals are noise, artifacts, and the second IF side band. If frequencies of interest to
you are also suppressed, you should try to increase the output sample rate, since this
increases the maximum usable I/Q bandwidth.
Relationship between sample rate and usable bandwidth

The diagram Figure 4-26 shows the maximum usable I/Q bandwidths depending on
the user sample rates.
As a rule, the usable bandwidth is proportional to the output sample. Yet, when the I/Q
bandwidth reaches the bandwidth of the analog IF filter (at very high sample rates), the
curve breaks.
Figure 4-26: Relation between maximum usable bandwidth and sample rate (RF input)

R&S FSVA/FSV without additional bandwidth extension options
Sample rate: 100 Hz - 45 MHz

Maximum I/Q bandwidth: 28 MHz
Sample rate Maximum I/Q bandwidth
100 Hz to 32 MHz proportional up to 25.6 MHz

Usable I/Q bandwidth = 0.8 * Output sample rate
32 MHz to 45 MHz proportional up to 28 MHz

R&S FSVA/FSV40 models 1307.9002K37 / 1307.9002K39

For the R&S FSVA/FSV40 models 1307.9002K37 / 1307.9002K39, the following val-
ues apply. No bandwidth extension options are available for these models.
Sample rate: 100 Hz to 12.5 MHz
Maximum I/Q bandwidth: proportional up to 12.5 MHz
R&S FSV with option B70 or R&S FSVA with option B40 (I/Q Bandwidth Exten-
sion)
Sample rate: 100 Hz - 128 MHz
100 Hz to 32 MHz proportional up to 25.6 MHz

32 MHz to 64 MHz proportional up to 40 MHz

64 MHz to 128 MHz 40 MHz
R&S FSVA/FSV with activated option B160 (I/Q Bandwidth Extension)
If the bandwidth extension option B160 is installed, but not active, the sample rates
and I/Q bandwidths described in Figure 4-26 apply.

Sample rate: 100 Hz - 400 MHz (B160 hardware used only for 32 MHz / 64 MHz -
400 MHz, depending on the Maximum Bandwidth setting)
100 Hz to 400 MHz proportional up to maximum 160 MHz
Maximum record length (=number of samples to be captured):

(100 MS * sample rate / 400 MHz) - group delay in samples
for a sample rate of 32 MHz / 64 MHz - 400 MHz
200 MS record length for non-triggered measurements

As of firmware version 2.30, for non-triggered measurements (trigger source = "Free
Run"), with a sample rate of 400 MHz, the maximum record length is now 200 MS.
Note, however, that for very large data amounts data processing may become very
slow and the TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:MEMory? command may fail.
For triggered measurements with the R&S FSV-B160 option, the restriction above still
applies.

Instrument Functions – Tracking Generator (Options R&S FSV-B9/ R&S FSV-B10)
4.6 Instrument Functions – Tracking Generator (Options

R&S FSV-B9/ R&S FSV-B10)
If the R&S FSVA/FSV Tracking Generator option (R&S FSV-B9) is installed, an internal
tracking generator emits a signal at the exact input frequency of the analyzer during
operation. The generated signal is sent to the DUT, thus allowing the analyzer to con-
trol the input frequency of the device directly.
Using the R&S FSVA/FSV External Tracking Generator option (B10), you can operate
various commercially available generators as a tracking generator on the R&S FSVA/
FSV. Thus, scalar network analysis with the R&S FSVA/FSV is also possible outside
the frequency range of the internal tracking generator, when the appropriate genera-
tors are used.
The R&S FSVA/FSV also allows you to set a frequency offset for frequency-converting
measurements. For harmonics measurements or frequency-converting measurements,
when external generators are used you can also enter a factor by which the generator
frequency is increased or reduced, compared to the receive frequency of the
R&S FSVA/FSV. Make sure, however, that the resulting generator frequencies do not
exceed the allowed setting range of the generator.
Both the internal and external tracking generator options can be installed simultane-
ously. However, only one tracking generator (internal or one of two possible external
generators) can be used at any time. Which tracking generator is currently active, if
any, is indicated by the "Source RF Internal (On/ Off)" on page 445 softkey. It can be
changed using the "Source Config" on page 449 softkey. For details see Chap-
ter 4.6.3, "Configuring Tracking Generators", on page 453.
Tracking generator control (both internal and external) is only available in the "Spec-
trum" mode for frequency, time (zero span) or I/Q measurements, as well as in "Analog
Demodulation" mode. If you switch to a mode other than "Spectrum" or "Analog
Demodulation", any currently active tracking generator is deactivated.
Tracking generator control is not available together with the bandwidth extension
option R&S FSV-B160.
Special measurement functions are not available with tracking generator control. The
corresponding softkeys in the "Measurement" menu are deactivated in this case.

● Chapter 4.6.1, "Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu", on page 445
Further information
● Chapter 4.6.2, "Connecting External Tracking Generators", on page 449
● Chapter 4.6.3, "Configuring Tracking Generators", on page 453
● Chapter 4.6.4, "Tracking Generator Functions", on page 460
● Chapter 4.6.5, "Displayed Information and Errors", on page 468

4.6.1 Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu
The "Tracking Generator" menu is displayed when you press the INPUT/OUPUT key
and then "Tracking Generator".
This softkey is only available if the R&S FSV option Tracking Generator (B9) or Exter-
nal Tracking Generator (B10) or both are installed. The following table shows all soft-
keys available in the "Tracking Generator" menu.
As long as a tracking generator is active, the HOME key also displays the "Tracking
Generator" menu.
Source RF Internal (On/ Off)....................................................................................... 445

Source Power..............................................................................................................445
Source Cal.................................................................................................................. 446
└ Calibrate Transmission................................................................................. 446
└ Calibrate Reflection Short............................................................................. 446
└ Calibrate Reflection Open.............................................................................446
└ Normalize......................................................................................................446
└ Reference Value Position............................................................................. 447
└ Reference Value........................................................................................... 447
└ Recall............................................................................................................ 447
└ Save As Trd Factor....................................................................................... 447
Modulation...................................................................................................................447
└ External AM.................................................................................................. 448
└ External FM...................................................................................................448
└ External I/Q................................................................................................... 448
└ Modulation OFF............................................................................................ 448
Power Sweep.............................................................................................................. 448
└ Power Sweep (On /Off).................................................................................448
└ Power Sweep Start....................................................................................... 449
└ Power Sweep Stop....................................................................................... 449
Source Config............................................................................................................. 449
Source RF Internal (On/ Off)

Switches the selected tracking generator on or off. Default setting is off. The currently
selected generator is indicated on the softkey.
Tracking generator control is not available together with the bandwidth extension
option R&S FSV-B160.
Remote command:
OUTPut[:STATe] on page 765
Activates the internal tracking generator (B9).
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>[:STATe] on page 855
Activates the external tracking generator 1 (B10).
Source Power
Opens an edit dialog box to quickly change the output power of the currently selected
tracking generator, alternatively to the "Tracking Generator configuration" dialog box
(see "Source Config" on page 449 softkey).

The default output power is -20 dBm. The range is specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] on page 861
Source Cal
Opens a submenu to configure calibration for transmission and reflection measurement
for tracking generators. For details on the test setups see Chapter 4.6.4.2, "Calibrating
for transmission and reflection measurement", on page 461.
Calibrate Transmission ← Source Cal

Starts a sweep that records a reference trace. This trace is used to calculate the differ-
ence for the normalized values.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod on page 783
Selects the transmission method and starts the sweep to record a reference trace.
Calibrate Reflection Short ← Source Cal

Starts a sweep as a reference trace for short-circuit calibration.
If both calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the calibration curve is
calculated by averaging the two measurements and stored in the memory. The order of
the two calibration measurements is irrelevant.
Remote command:
Selects the reflection method.
[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] on page 778
Starts the sweep for short-circuit calibration.
Calibrate Reflection Open ← Source Cal

Starts a sweep as a reference trace for the open-circuit calibration.
If both calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the calibration curve is
calculated by averaging the two measurements and stored in the memory. The order of
the two calibration measurements is irrelevant.
Remote command:
Selects the reflection method.
[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] on page 778
Starts the sweep for open-circuit calibration.
Normalize ← Source Cal

Switches the normalization on or off. The softkey is only available if the memory con-
tains a reference trace. For details on normalization see Chapter 4.6.4.5, "Normaliza-
tion", on page 462.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] on page 783

Reference Value Position ← Source Cal

Switches the reference line on or off. The reference line marks the reference position
at which the normalization result (calculated difference to a reference trace) is dis-
played. For details on the reference line see Chapter 4.6.4.5, "Normalization",
on page 462.
Remote command:
Reference Value ← Source Cal

Opens an edit dialog box to enter a position value that shifts the reference line verti-
cally. By default, the reference line corresponds to a difference of 0 dB between the
currently measured trace and the reference trace.
If a 10 dB attenuation is inserted into the signal path between DUT and
R&S FSVA/FSV input, for example after a source calibration, the measurement trace is
moved down by 10 dB. Entering a reference value of -10 dB will also shift the refer-
ence line down by 10 dB and place the measurement trace on the reference line. The
deviation from the nominal power level can be displayed with higher resolution (e.g. 1
dB/div). The power is still displayed in absolute values.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue on page 744
Recall ← Source Cal

Restores the settings that were used during source calibration. This can be useful if
instrument settings were changed after calibration (e.g. center frequency, frequency
deviation, reference level, etc).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall on page 783
Save As Trd Factor ← Source Cal

Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 625
points. The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with
the specified name and the suffix.trd under "c:\r_s\instr\trd". The frequency
points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency. The gener-
ated transducer factor can be further adapted using the "Transducer" softkey in the
"SETUP" menu.
The "Save As Trd Factor" softkey is only available if normalization is switched on.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerator on page 784
Modulation
Opens a submenu to define modulation settings. This submenu contains the following
commands:
● "External AM" on page 448
● "External FM" on page 448
● "External I/Q" on page 448
● "Modulation OFF" on page 448

External AM ← Modulation
Activates an AM modulation of the tracking generator output signal.
The modulation signal is applied to the TG IN I/AM connector. An input voltage of 1 V
corresponds to 100 % amplitude modulation.
Switching on an external AM disables the active I/Q modulation.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:AM:STATe on page 854
External FM ← Modulation
Activates the FM modulation of the tracking generator output signal. The modulation
signal is applied to the TG IN Q/FM connector. Switching on an external FM disables
the active I/Q modulation.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:FM:STATe on page 860
SOURce<n>:FM:DEViation on page 860
External I/Q ← Modulation

Activates the external I/Q modulation of the tracking generator output signal. The sig-
nals for modulation are applied to the two input connectors TG IN I and TG IN Q at the
rear panel of the unit. The input voltage range is ±1 V into 50 Ω. Switching on an exter-
nal I/Q modulation disables the active AM or FM modulation.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:DM:STATe on page 854
Modulation OFF ← Modulation

Deactivates external modulation of the tracking generator output signal.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:AM:STATe on page 854
SOURce<n>:FM:STATe on page 860
Power Sweep
Opens a submenu to define power sweep settings.
This softkey is only available if the (internal) Tracking Generator option (B9) is instal-
led.
This submenu contains the following commands:
● "Power Sweep (On /Off)" on page 448
● "Power Sweep Start" on page 449
● "Power Sweep Stop" on page 449
Power Sweep (On /Off) ← Power Sweep

Activates or deactivates the power sweep. If the power sweep is on, the analyzer is set
to zero span mode (span = 0Hz). During the sweep time of the zero span, the power at
the internal tracking generator is changed linearly from start power to stop power. The
start and stop power for the power sweep are displayed in the diagram header ("INT
TG <start power>… <stop power>", see also Chapter 4.6.5, "Displayed Information
and Errors", on page 468.

The start power can be set between -30 dBm and +0 dBm.
The stop value can also be be set between -30 dBm and +0 dBm and may be smaller
than the start value.
The difference between the start and stop values may not exceed 10 dB.
led.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer:MODE on page 862
Power Sweep Start ← Power Sweep

Defines the start power of the power sweep.
The start power can be set between -30 dBm and +0 dBm. If the start power is set
above 7 GHz, it is automatically limited to 7 GHz.
led.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer:STARt on page 862
Power Sweep Stop ← Power Sweep

Defines the stop power of the power sweep.
The stop power can be set between -30 dBm and +0 dBm. It can be smaller than the
start value. If the stop power is set above 7 GHz, it is automatically limited to 7 GHz.
led.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer:STOP on page 863
Source Config
Opens the "Tracking Generator Configuration" dialog, see Chapter 4.6.3, "Configuring
Tracking Generators", on page 453.
4.6.2 Connecting External Tracking Generators
The external tracking generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the –
optional – second GPIB interface of the R&S FSVA/FSV (= IEC2, supplied with the
option).
Using GPIB, with some Rohde & Schwarz generators, additionally the TTL synchroni-
zation interface included in the AUX interface of the R&S FSVA/FSV can be used.
Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure
GPIB control, because the frequency stepping of the R&S FSVA/FSV is directly cou-
pled with the frequency stepping of the generator.

Therefore, the frequency sweep differs according to the capabilities of the employed
generator:
● For generators without a TTL interface, the generator frequency is set for each fre-
quency point via GPIB first, then the setting procedure has to be completed before
recording of measured values is possible.
● For generators with a TTL interface, a list of the frequencies to be set is entered
into the generator before the beginning of the first sweep. Then the sweep is star-
ted and the next frequency point is selected using the TTL handshake line TRIG-
GER. Recording measured values is only enabled when the generator signals the
end of the setting procedure via the BLANK signal. This method is considerably
faster than pure GPIB control.
The "Tracking Generator Configuration" dialog provides a list of the supported genera-
tors with the frequency and level range, as well as the capabilities used. The interface
settings are defined using the "Source Config" on page 449 softkey. For details see
Chapter 4.6.3.2, "External Tracking Generator", on page 455.
In order to use the functions of the external tracking generator, an appropriate genera-
tor must be connected and configured correctly. If no external generator is selected, if
the GPIB or TCP/IP address is not correct, or the generator is not ready for operation,
an error message is displayed ("Ext. Generator GPIB Handshake Error!" or "Ext. Gen-
erator TCPIP Handshake Error!".
Figure 4-27 illustrates the TTL connection using an SMU generator, for example.
Figure 4-27: TTL connection for an SMU generator
In order to enhance measurement accuracy, a common reference frequency should be

used for both the R&S FSVA/FSV and the generator. If no independent 10 MHz refer-
ence frequency is available, it is recommended that you connect the reference output
of the generator with the reference input of the R&S FSVA/FSV and that you enable
usage of the external reference on the R&S FSVA/FSV via "SETUP" >"Reference
EXT".

4.6.2.1 Overview of Generators Supported by the R&S FSVA/FSV
The R&S SMA and R&S SMU require the following firmware versions:
R&S SMA: V2.10.x or higher
R&S SMU: V1.10 or higher
Generator Interface Type Generator Min Generator Max Generator Min Generator Max
Freq Freq Power Power
dBm dBm
SMA01A TTL 9 kHz 3.0 GHz -145 +30
SMBV100A3 TTL 9 kHz 3.2 GHz -145 +30
SMBV100A6 TTL 9 kHz 6.0 GHz -145 +30
SMC100A1 TTL 9 kHz 1.1 GHz -120 +30
SMC100A3 TTL 9 kHz 3.2 GHz -145 +30
SME02 TTL 5 kHz 1.5 GHz -144 +16
SME03 TTL 5 kHz 3.0 GHz -144 +16
SME06 TTL 5 kHz 6.0 GHz -144 +16
SMG GPIB 100 kHz 1.0 GHz -137 +13
SMGL GPIB 9 kHz 1.0 GHz -118 +30
SMGU GPIB 100 kHz 2.16 GHz -140 +13
SMH GPIB 100 kHz 2.0 GHz -140 +13
SMHU GPIB 100 kHz 4.32 GHz -140 +13
SMIQ02B TTL 300 kHz 2.2 GHz -144 +13
SMIQ02E GPIB 300 kHz 2.2 GHz -144 +13
SMIQ03B TTL 300 kHz 3.3 GHz -144 +13
SMIQ03E GPIB 300 kHz 3.3 GHz -144 +13
SMIQ04B TTL 300 kHz 4.4 GHz -144 +10
SMIQ06B TTL 300 kHz 6.4 GHz -144 +10
SML01 GPIB 9 kHz 1.1 GHz -140 +13
SML02 GPIB 9 kHz 2.2 GHz -140 +13
SML03 GPIB 9 kHz 3.3 GHz -140 +13
1) Requires the option SMR-B11 to be fitted.

2) Maximum/minimum power depends on presence of Option SMR-B15/-B17 and set frequency range. For
more details see SMR data sheet.
3) Maximum/minimum power depends on presence of Option SMP-B15/-B17 and set frequency range. For
more details see SMP data sheet.
4) Requires firmware version V3.20.200 or higher on the signal generator

dBm dBm
SMR20 TTL 1 GHz 20 GHz -130 2) +11 2)
SMR20B111) TTL 10 MHz 20 GHz -130 2) +13 2)
SMR27 TTL 1 GHz 27 GHz -130 2) +11 2)
SMR27B11 1) TTL 10 MHz 27 GHz -130 2) +12 2)
SMR30 TTL 1 GHz 30 GHz -130 2) +11 2)
SMR30B11 1) TTL 10 MHz 30 GHz -130 2) +12 2)
SMR40 TTL 1 GHz 40 GHz -130 2) +9 2)
SMR40B11 1) TTL 10 MHz 40 GHz -130 2) +12 2)
SMR50 TTL 1 GHz 50 GHz -130 2) +9 2)
SMR50B11 1) TTL 10 MHz 50 GHz -130 2) +12 2)
SMR60 TTL 1 GHz 60 GHz -130 2) +9 2)
SMR60B11 1) TTL 10 MHz 60 GHz -130 2) +12 2)
SMP02 TTL 10 MHz 20 GHz -130 3) +17 3)
SMP03 TTL 10 MHz 27 GHz -130 3) +13 3)
SMP04 TTL 10 MHz 40 GHz -130 3) +12 3)
SMP22 TTL 10 MHz 20 GHz -130 3) +20 3)
SMT02 GPIB 5.0 kHz 1.5 GHz -144 +13
SMT03 GPIB 5.0 kHz 3.0 GHz -144 +13
SMT06 GPIB 5.0 kHz 6.0 GHz -144 +13
SMV03 GPIB 9 kHz 3.3 GHz -140 +13
SMU200A TTL 100 kHz 2.2 GHz -145 +13
SMU02B31 TTL 100 kHz 2.2 GHz -145 +19
SMU03 TTL 100 kHz 3 GHz -145 +13
SMU03B31 TTL 100 kHz 3 GHz -145 +19
SMU04 TTL 100 kHz 4 GHz -145 +13
SMU04B31 TTL 100 kHz 4 GHz -145 +19
SMU06 TTL 100 kHz 6 GHz -145 +13


dBm dBm
SMU06B31 TTL 100 kHz 6 GHz -145 +19
SMW20 TTL4) 100 kHz 20 GHz -145 +30
SMW40 TTL4) 100 kHz 40 GHz -145 +30
SMX GPIB 100 kHz 1.0 GHz -137 +13
SMY01 GPIB 9 kHz 1.04 GHz -140 +13
SMY02 GPIB 9 kHz 2.08 GHz -140 +13
HP8340A GPIB 10 MHz 26.5 GHz -110 10
HP8648 GPIB 9 kHz 4 GHz -136 10
HP ESG-A Ser- GPIB 250 kHz 4 GHz -136 20

ies 1000A,
2000A, 3000A,
4000A
HP ESG-D GPIB 250 kHz 3 GHz -136 +10

SERIES
E4432B

4.6.3 Configuring Tracking Generators
The "Tracking Generator Configuration" dialog box is opened via the "Source Config"
softkey in the "Tracking Generator" menu.
This dialox box allows you to define measurement settings, as well as connection set-
tings for the optional external generators (option B10 only). Depending on which
options are installed, the corresponding tabs for internal or external generators, or
both, are displayed.
● Chapter 4.6.3.1, "Internal Tracking Generator", on page 453
● Chapter 4.6.3.2, "External Tracking Generator", on page 455
4.6.3.1 Internal Tracking Generator
The internal tracking generator is configured in the "Internal" tab of the "tracking Gen-
erator Configuration" dialog box.
In the top half of the dialog box, the measurement configurations can be defined. In the
lower half of the dialog box, the capabilities of the internal tracking generator are dis-
played for reference only.

The configuration dialog box contains the following fields:
Select
Selects the internal tracking generator as the current tracking generator source. "Inter-
nal" is displayed as the source on the "Source RF" softkey. All tracking generator func-
tions are performed with the currently selected source.
Note: Note that the generator is not automatically activated when it is selected. To acti-
vate the currently selected generator, click the "Source RF On" softkey.
Source Power
The tracking generator output power. The default output power is -20 dBm. The range
is specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] on page 861
Power Offset
Constant level offset for the tracking generator. Values from -200 dB to +200 dB in 1
dB steps are allowed. The default setting is 0 dB. Offsets are indicated by the
enhancement label "LVL" in the diagram header (see also Chapter 4.6.5, "Displayed
Information and Errors", on page 468).
With this offset, attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the tracking gener-
ator can be taken into account for the displayed output power values on screen or dur-
ing data entry, for example. Positive offsets apply to an amplifier and negative offsets
to an attenuator subsequent to the tracking generator.

Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet on page 861
Frequency Offset
Constant frequency offset between the output signal of the tracking generator and the
input frequency of the R&S FSVA/FSV. Possible offsets are in a range of ±1 GHz in
0.1 Hz steps.
The default setting is 0 Hz. Offsets <> 0 Hz are marked with the enhancement label
"FRQ" in the diagram header (see also Chapter 4.6.5, "Displayed Information and
Errors", on page 468).
If a positive frequency offset is entered, the tracking generator generates an output sig-
nal above the receive frequency of the R&S FSVA/FSV. In case of a negative fre-
quency offset it generates a signal below the receive frequency of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
The output frequency of the tracking generator is calculated as follows:
Tracking generator frequency = receive frequency + frequency offset.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 860
Result Frequency Start

For reference only: The start frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the start value defined for the analyzer.
Result Frequency Stop

For reference only: The stop frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the analyzer.
Frequency Min.
For reference only: Lower frequency limit for the generator.
Frequency Max.
For reference only: Upper frequency limit for the generator.
Power Min.
For reference only: Lower power limit for the generator.
Power Max.
For reference only: Upper power limit for the generator.
4.6.3.2 External Tracking Generator
The external tracking generators are configured in the "External" tabs of the "Tracking
Generator Configuration" dialog box.
In the top section of the dialog box, the measurement configurations can be defined. In
the middle section, interface settings for the connection to the external generator are
defined. In the lower section of the dialog box, the capabilities of the external tracking
generator are displayed for reference only.

The configuration dialog box contains the following fields:
Select
Selects the specified external tracking generator as the current tracking generator
source. "External 1" or "External 2" is displayed as the source on the "Source RF" soft-
key. All tracking generator functions are performed with the currently selected source.
Note: Note that the generator is not automatically activated when it is selected. To acti-
vate the currently selected generator, click the "Source RF On" softkey.
Source Frequency Coupling

Enables or disables frequency coupling between the analyzer and the generator.
"Auto" Default setting: the frequencies are coupled (see "Generator Fre-
quency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)" on page 457).
"Manual" The generator uses a fixed frequency, defined in the (Fixed) Genera-
tor Frequency field which is displayed when you select "Manual" cou-
pling.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe]
on page 856
(Fixed) Generator Frequency

Defines the fixed frequency to be used by the generator.

Remote command:
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency on page 855
Source Power
The output power of the external tracking generator. The default output power is -20
dBm. The range is specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:POWer[:LEVel] on page 858
Power Offset
Constant level offset for the tracking generator. Values from -200 dB to +200 dB in 1
dB steps are allowed. The default setting is 0 dB. Offsets are indicated by the
enhancement label "LVL" in the diagram header (see also Chapter 4.6.5, "Displayed
Information and Errors", on page 468).
With this offset, attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the tracking gener-
ator can be taken into account for the displayed output power values on screen or dur-
ing data entry, for example. Positive offsets apply to an amplifier and negative offsets
to an attenuator subsequent to the tracking generator.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet on page 861
Generator Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)

The frequency used by the generator may differ from the input from the analyzer. The
RF frequency may be multiplied by a specified factor, or a frequency offset can be
added, or both.
Note: The input for the generator frequency is not validated, i.e. you can enter any val-
ues. However, if the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded, an error
message is displayed on the analyzer screen and the values for Start and Stop are
corrected to comply with the range limits.
The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator. The default setting
is 0 Hz. Offsets <> 0 Hz are marked with the enhancement label "FRQ" in the diagram
header (see also Chapter 4.6.5, "Displayed Information and Errors", on page 468).
If a positive frequency offset is entered, the tracking generator generates an output sig-
nal above the receive frequency of the analyzer. For a negative frequency offset it gen-
erates a signal below the receive frequency of the analyzer.
The output frequency of the generator is calculated as follows:
Figure 4-28: Output frequency of the generator
Note: Make sure that the frequencies resulting from the start and stop frequency of the
R&S FSVA/FSV do not exceed the allowed generator range:
● If the start frequency lies below F MIN, the generator is only switched on when F
MIN is reached.

● If the stop frequency lies above F MAX, the generator is switched off. When the
generator is subsequently switched on using the "Source RF Internal (On/ Off)"
on page 445 softkey, the stop frequency is limited to F MAX.
● If the stop frequency lies below F MIN, the generator is switched off and an error
message is displayed.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator
on page 857
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator
on page 856
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:OFFSet<m> on page 857
Reverse sweep
The "Offset" setting can be used to sweep in the reverse direction. You can do this by
setting a "negative" offset in the tracking generator configuration.
Example for reverse sweep:
FAnalyzerStart= 100 MHz
FAnalyzerStop = 200 MHz
FOffset = -300 MHz
Numerator = Denominator = 1
→FGeneratorStart = 200 MHz
→FGeneratorStop = 100 MHz
If the offset is adjusted so that the sweep of the generator crosses the minimum gener-
ator frequency, a message is displayed in the status bar ("Reverse Sweep via min. Ext.
Generator Frequency!").
Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency:
FAnalyzerStart= 100 MHz
FAnalyzerStop = 200 MHz
FOffset = -150 MHz
Fmin = 20 MHz
Numerator = Denominator = 1
→FGeneratorStart = 50 MHz
→FGeneratorStop = 50 MHz via Fmin
Result Frequency Start

For reference only: The start frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the start value defined for the analyzer.
Result Frequency Stop

For reference only: The stop frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the analyzer.
Type
Generator type. See also Chapter 4.6.2.1, "Overview of Generators Supported by the
R&S FSVA/FSV", on page 451.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:TYPE on page 876

Interface
Type of interface connection used. The following interfaces are currently supported:
● TCP/IP
● GPIB
For details on interfaces see the "Interfaces and Protocols" section in the
R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:INTerface
on page 875
TTL Synchronization
If available for the specified generator type, this option activates TTL synchronization
for GPIB connections.
See also Chapter 4.6.2, "Connecting External Tracking Generators", on page 449.
For Noise Figure measurements (K30) this setting currently has no effect.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:LINK on page 875
Address
For LAN connections: TCP/IP address.
For GPIB connections: GPIB address.
For more information on configuring interfaces see the "Interfaces and Protocols" sec-
tion in the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:LINK on page 875
Reference
Selects internal or external reference for the generator (default: internal).
Note: Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than
pure GPIB control, because the frequency stepping of the R&S FSVA/FSV is directly
coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator.
Remote command:
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] on page 859
Edit Generator Setup File

Displays the setup file for the currently selected generator (see Type field) in read-only
mode in an editor.
Adding new generator types
Although the existing setup files are displayed in read-only mode in the editor, they can
be saved under a different name (using "File > SaveAs"). To add a new generator type
to the selection list in the Type field, edit the setup file for an existing generator as
required, then save the file with the extension ".gen" (select "Save as type: All Files
(*.*)"). After you close the configuration dialog and re-open it, a new generator is avail-
able in the Type list with the name of the saved setup file.

Be careful, however, to adhere to the required syntax and commands. Errors will only
be detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator (see also Chap-
ter 4.6.5, "Displayed Information and Errors", on page 468).
Frequency Min.
For reference only: Lower frequency limit for the generator.
Frequency Max.
For reference only: Upper frequency limit for the generator.
Power Min.
For reference only: Lower power limit for the generator.
Power Max.
For reference only: Upper power limit for the generator.
4.6.4 Tracking Generator Functions
The following functions are available if the optional Tracking Generator or the optional
External Tracking Generator is installed.
● Calibration mechanism..........................................................................................460
● Calibrating for transmission and reflection measurement..................................... 461
● Transmission measurement..................................................................................462
● Reflection measurement....................................................................................... 462
● Normalization........................................................................................................ 462
● Modulation (internal Tracking Generator only)......................................................466
4.6.4.1 Calibration mechanism
Calibration means calculating the difference between the currently measured power
and a reference curve, independent of the selected type of measurement (transmis-
sion/reflection). The hardware settings used for measuring the reference curve are
included in the reference dataset.
Even with normalization switched on, the instrument settings can be changed in a wide
area without stopping the normalization. This reduces the necessity to carry out a new
normalization to a minimum.
Therefore, the reference dataset (trace with n measured values, where n is the number
of Sweep Points) is stored internally as a table of n points (frequency/level).
Differences in level settings between the reference curve and the current instrument
settings are taken into account automatically. If the span is reduced, a linear interpola-
tion of the intermediate values is applied. If the span increases, the values at the left or
right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop fre-
quency, i.e. the reference dataset is extended by constant values.
An enhancement label is used to mark the different levels of measurement accuracy.
This enhancement label is displayed at the right diagram border if normalization is

switched on and a deviation from the reference setting occurs. Three accuracy levels
are defined:
Table 4-11: Measurement accuracy levels
Accuracy Enhancement label Reason/Limitation
high NOR No difference between reference setting and measurement
medium APX (approximation) Change of the following settings:

● coupling (RBW, VBW, SWT)
● reference level, RF attenuation
● start or stop frequency
● output level of tracking generator
● detector (max. peak, min. peak, sample, etc.)
● change of frequency:
max. 691 points within the set sweep limits (corresponds to a
doubling of the span)
– Aborted normalization More than 500 extrapolated points within the current sweep
limits (in case of span doubling)
At a reference level of -10 dBm and at a tracking generator output level of the same
value, the R&S FSVA/FSV operates without overrange reserve. That means the
R&S FSVA/FSV is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude
is higher than the reference line. In this case, either the message "OVLD" for overload
or "IFOVL" for exceeded display range (clipping of the trace at the upper diagram bor-
der = overrange) is displayed in the status line.
Overloading can be avoided as follows:

● Reducing the output level of the tracking generator ( "Source Config" on page 449
softkey in the Tracking Generator menu)
● Increasing the reference level (Ref Level softkey in the "Amplitude" menu)
4.6.4.2 Calibrating for transmission and reflection measurement
Prerequisite: The instrument is in tracking generator measurement mode.
1. To enter the generator output level, press the "Source Power" on page 445 softkey.
2. To enter a constant level offset for the tracking generator, press the "Source Con-
fig" on page 449 softkey and enter a "Power Offset".
3. To open the submenu for calibration, press the "Source Cal" on page 446 softkey.
4. To record a reference trace for transmission measurement, press the "Calibrate

Transmission" on page 446 softkey.
The recording of the reference trace and the completion of the calibration sweep
are indicated by message bo XE s.
5. To record a reference trace for reflection measurement, press the "Calibrate

Reflection Short" on page 446 or "Calibrate Reflection Open" on page 446 softkey.

The recording of the reference trace and the completion of the calibration sweep
are indicated by message bo XE s.
6. To switch on the normalization, press the "Normalize" on page 446 softkey.
7. To display the reference line, press the "Reference Value Position" on page 447
softkey.
8. To enter a value to shift the reference line, press the "Reference Value"
on page 447 softkey.
9. To restore the settings used for source calibration, press the "Recall" on page 447
softkey.
4.6.4.3 Transmission measurement
This measurement yields the transmission characteristics of a two-port network. The

internal or external tracking generator serves as a signal source. It is connected to the
input connector of the DUT. The input of the R&S FSVA/FSV is fed from the output of
the DUT. A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test
setup (e.g. frequency response of connecting cables).
Figure 4-29: Test setup for transmission measurement
4.6.4.4 Reflection measurement
Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out by means of a reflection-coefficient

measurement bridge.
Figure 4-30: Test setup for reflection measurement
4.6.4.5 Normalization
The "NORMALIZE" softkey switches normalization on or off. The softkey is only availa-
ble if the memory contains a correction trace.

You can shift the relative reference point within the grid using the "Reference Value
Position" on page 447 softkey. Thus, the trace can be shifted from the top grid margin
to the middle of the grid:
Figure 4-31: Normalized display
CORR ON, see [SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] on page 783

Figure 4-32: Normalized measurement, shifted with Reference Value Position= 50%
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RPOS 10PCT, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:

SCALe]:RPOSition on page 743

Figure 4-33: Measurement with Reference Value: +10dB and Reference Value Position = 50%
After the reference line has been shifted by entering +10 dB as the "Reference Value"
on page 447, deviations from the nominal value can be displayed with high resolution
(e.g. 2 dB/Div.). The absolute measured values are still displayed; in the above exam-
ple, 2 dB below nominal value (reference line) = 8 dB attenuation.

Figure 4-34: Measurement of a 10-dB attenuator pad with 2dB/Div
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RVAL +10dB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:

SCALe]:RVALue on page 744
4.6.4.6 Modulation (internal Tracking Generator only)
The time characteristics of the tracking generator output signal can be influenced by
means of external signals (input voltage range -1 V to +1 V).
Two BNC connectors at the rear panel are available as signal inputs. Their function
changes depending on the selected modulation:
● TG IN I/AMand
● TG IN Q/FM
The modulation modes can be combined with each other and with the frequency offset
function up to a certain degree. The following table shows which modulation modes are
possible at the same time and which ones can be combined with the frequency offset
function.

Table 4-12: Simultaneous modes of modulation (tracking generator)
Modulation Frequency offset EXT AM EXT FM EXT I/Q
Frequency offset ● ● ●
EXT AM ● ●
EXT FM ● ●
EXT I/Q ●
● = can be combined
External AM
The "External AM" on page 448 softkey activates an AM modulation of the tracking
generator output signal.
The modulation signal is applied to the TG IN I/AM connector. An input voltage of 1 V
corresponds to 100% amplitude modulation.
Switching on an external AM disables the active I/Q modulation.
External FM
The "External FM" on page 448 softkey activates the FM modulation of the tracking
generator output signal.
The modulation frequency range is 1 kHz to 100 kHz, the deviation can be set in 1-
decade steps in the range of 100 Hz to 10 MHz at an input voltage of 1 V. The phase
deviation h should not exceed the value 100.
Phase deviation h = deviation/modulation frequency
The modulation signal is applied to the TG IN Q/FM connector.
Switching on an external FM disables the active I/Q modulation.
External IQ
The "External I/Q" on page 448 softkey activates the external I/Q modulation of the
tracking generator.
The signals for modulation are applied to the two input connectors TG IN I and TG IN
Q at the rear panel of the unit. The input voltage range is ±1 V into 50 Ω.
Switching on an external I/Q modulation disables the active external AM or FM.
Functional description of the quadrature modulator:

Figure 4-35: I/Q modulation
I/Q modulation is performed by means of the built-in quadrature modulator. The RF

signal is divided into two orthogonal I and Q components (in phase and quadrature
phase). Amplitude and phase are controlled in each path by the I and Q modulation
signal. By adding the two components an RF output signal is generated that can be
controlled in amplitude and phase.
Remote command:
4.6.5 Displayed Information and Errors
Diagram header
In Tracking Generator measurement mode, some additional information is displayed in
the diagram header.
Label Description
INT TG: <source power> Internal tracking generator active
INT TG: <start power>… <stop power> Internal tracking generator with power sweep active
EXT TG <1|2>: <source power> External tracking generator (1 or 2) active
LVL Power Offset (see Chapter 4.6.3, "Configuring Tracking Gener-

ators", on page 453
FRQ Frequency Offset (see Chapter 4.6.3, "Configuring Tracking

Generators", on page 453
Measurement accuracy levels
NOR Normalization on;

No difference between reference setting and measurement

Instrument Functions - R&S Digital I/Q Interface (Option R&S FSV-B17)
Label Description
APX (approximation) Normalization on;

Deviation from the reference setting occurs
- Aborted normalization
For details on measurement accuracy levels, see Chapter 4.6.4.5, "Normalization",

on page 462.
Error and status messages
Message Description
"Ext. Generator GPIB Handshake Error!" / Connection to the generator is not possible,
e.g. due to a cable damage or loose connec-
"Ext. Generator TCPIP Handshake Error!" /
tion or wrong address.
"Ext. Generator TTL Handshake Error!"
"Ext. Generator Limits Exceeded!" The allowed frequency or power ranges for the
generator were exceeded.
"Reverse Sweep via min. Ext. Generator Frequency!" Reverse sweep is performed; frequencies are
reduced to the minimum frequency, then
increased again; see Figure 4-28
"Ext. Generator File Syntax Error!" Syntax error in the generator setup file (see
"Edit Generator Setup File" on page 459
"Ext. Generator Command Error!" Missing or wrong command in the generator

setup file (see "Edit Generator Setup File"
on page 459
"Ext. Generator Visa Error!!" Error with Visa driver provided with installation
(very unlikely)
4.7 Instrument Functions - R&S Digital I/Q Interface

(Option R&S FSV-B17)
In the standard configuration, the R&S FSVA/FSV provides an internal I/Q memory in
order to capture and evaluate I/Q data, which can be output via GPIB or the LAN inter-
face. If the R&S FSVA/FSV R&S Digital I/Q Interface option (R&S FSV-B17) is instal-
led, an online digital I/Q data interface is provided on the rear panel of the instrument
for input and output.
This option is not available for R&S FSV 40 model 1307.9002K39.
Using the R&S Digital I/Q Interface for input, the digital baseband signal from the digital
interface is used for measurement, rather than the digitalized IF signal. If the digital
output is enabled, the I/Q data is continuously output at the connector at the rear of the
instrument.

Alternatively, the I/Q data can be exported to a file (see Chapter 4.1.2.3, "Importing
and Exporting I/Q Data", on page 172).
In the base unit, the input and output I/Q data can be evaluated using the I/Q Analyzer,
for example (see Chapter 4.5, "Instrument Functions - I/Q Analyzer", on page 410).
Other applications (e.g. VSA, R&S FSV-K70) also support digital input, see the
descriptions of the individual firmware options for details.
The digital input and output can be enabled in the base unit or in one of the applica-
tions (where available). Alternatively, I/Q data can also be captured via remote control.
The required commands are contained in the following subsystems:
● Chapter 5.3.3.9, "INPut Subsystem", on page 751
● Chapter 5.3.3.12, "OUTPut Subsystem", on page 764
Information on the STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register can be found in "STA-
Tus:QUEStionable:DIQ Register" on page 565.
4.7.1 Typical Applications for the R&S Digital I/Q Interface................................................. 470
4.7.2 Digital Input................................................................................................................. 472
4.7.3 Digital Output.............................................................................................................. 478
4.7.4 Softkeys and Parameters of the R&S Digital I/Q Interface..........................................479
4.7.5 Interface Status Information........................................................................................ 483
4.7.6 Description of the LVDS Connector............................................................................ 486
4.7.1 Typical Applications for the R&S Digital I/Q Interface
The following typical applications use the R&S Digital I/Q Interface:
● Capturing and evaluating digital I/Q data in the I/Q Analyzer mode of the
R&S FSVA/FSV base unit or other (optional) applications, e.g. R&S FSV-K70
(VSA). See Chapter 4.5, "Instrument Functions - I/Q Analyzer", on page 410 or the
description of the individual firmware options.
● Output of digital I/Q data to a selected receiver, e.g. to implement fading (simulat-
ing mobile radio communication participants) using a generator.

● Output of digital I/Q data to a device with a user-specific interface using an R&S
EX-IQ-BOX (see the "R&S®EX-IQ-BOX - External Signal Interface Module Man-
ual". The EX-IQ-Box functionality is not supported for R&S FSVA/FSV models
1321.3008Kxx.)
● Capturing and evaluating digital I/Q data from a device with a user-specific inter-
face using an R&S EX-IQ-BOX (see the "R&S®EX-IQ-BOX - External Signal Inter-
face Module Manual". The EX-IQ-Box functionality is not supported for
R&S FSVA/FSV models 1321.3008Kxx.).

R&S EX-IQ-BOX and R&S DigIConf

The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is a configurable interface module that converts signal properties
and the transmission protocol of the R&S instruments into user-defined or standardized
signal formats and vice versa.
The EX-IQ-Box functionality is not supported for R&S FSVA/FSV models
1321.3008Kxx.
The latest R&S EX-IQ-BOX (model 1409.5505K04) provides the configuration software
R&S DigIConf which can be installed directly on the R&S FSVA/FSV. The software
R&S DigIConf (Digital Interface Configurator for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, version 2.10 or
higher) controls the protocol, data and clock settings of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX independ-
ently from the connected R&S instrument. Besides basic functions of the user-defined
protocols, this software utility supports the settings for standardized protocols, as e.g.
CPRI, OBSAI or DigRF. Note that R&S DigIConf requires a USB connection (not
LAN!) to the R&S FSVA/FSV in addition to the R&S Digital I/Q Interface connec-
tion.
Remote control is possible and very simple. Remote commands for the R&S DigIConf
software always begin with SOURce:EBOX. Such commands are passed on from the
R&S FSVA/FSV to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX automatically via the USB connection.
A setup file, included in delivery, consists of an installation wizard, the executable pro-
gram and all necessary program and data files. The latest software versions can be
downloaded free of charge from the R&S website: www.rohde-schwarz.com/en/prod-
ucts/test_and_measurement/signal_generation/EX-IQ-Box. Simply execute the Setup
file and follow the instructions in the installation wizard.
ual".
4.7.2 Digital Input
Digital input is enabled by selecting the "Digital Baseband (I/Q)" input path in the "Sig-
nal Source" dialog box (available either in the "Measurement" menu of the "I/Q Ana-
lyzer" mode, or in the "Input/Output" menu of the base unit and some applications, see
"Signal Source" on page 399).
The digital input and output cannot be used simultaneously.
Signal Source
The device that provides digital input must be connected to the R&S Digital I/Q Inter-
face at the rear of the R&S FSVA/FSV. The signal source is then configured in the
"Signal Source" dialog box.
In the "Signal Source" dialog box the detected input device is indicated. For "Digital
Baseband (I/Q)" sources, you can configure the basic connection settings, e.g. the
input sample rate. Each time the device is disconnected or the configuration is

changed, a connection protocol is executed, and before the first measurement, a

PRBS descewing test is performed. Information on the connection status and the
results of the connection tests are provided in the "Digital IQ Info" dialog box, see
Chapter 4.7.5, "Interface Status Information", on page 483.
Measurement Settings
the magnitude "1" and can be defined either in dBm or Volt (see "Full Scale Level"
on page 400). When converting the measured power into dBm, an impedance of 50 Ω
is assumed.
Processing digital input

The digital input signal is brought to the desired sample rate using a downsampling fil-
ter and fractional resampling. The word length of the data is 18 bits fixed point for each
I and Q. The resulting data can be processed by the selected application (see Chap-
ter 4.7.1, "Typical Applications for the R&S Digital I/Q Interface", on page 470). As
illustrated in Figure 4-36, the sample rate is dependant on the input sample rate.
Figure 4-36: Signal path using digital input
Sample rates, bandwidths and other limitations

The calculation of the usable I/Q bandwidth for active digital input is described in
Table 4-13.
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in this section:
● SR: sample rate: the sample rate that is defined by the user (e.g. in the "Data Aqui-
sition" dialog box in the "I/Q Analyzer" mode, see "Sample Rate" on page 416)
● ISR: Input sample rate: the sample rate of the data provided by the connected
device to the digital input
● Ms: 1 Ms = 1024 * 1024 samples

Table 4-13: Calculation of the usable I/Q bandwidth for active digital input
Precondition Bandwith
0.8 * SR
SR
 0.95
ISR
0.76 * ISR
SR
0.95 
ISR
Unfiltered I/Q data input

The values in Table 4-13 apply for the default data processing using the decimation fil-
ter and resampler. If the filter is deactivated (see "No Filter" on page 416, the sample
rate is identical to the input sample rate. In this case, the usable I/Q bandwidth is not
restricted by the R&S FSVA/FSV.
The following table describes the dependencies for digital in- and output:
Table 4-14: Dependencies for digital in- and output
Type of Limit Precondition Range / Value
Input sample rate (ISR) 100 Hz … 10 GHz (*)
Minimum sample rate 100 Hz (*)

(SR)
Maximum sample rate Digital input 45 MHz (without R&S FSV-B70/R&S FSVA-B40) (*)
(SR) active
254 * ISR, max. 10 GHz (with R&S FSV-B70/R&S FSVA-B40)
(*)
Digital output 45 MHz (without R&S FSV-B70/R&S FSVA-B40)

active
100 MHz (with R&S FSV-B70/R&S FSVA-B40)
(*) Note the relationship between the sample rate and the input sample rate, which may restrict the value
ranges further:
ISRmin= SR/254
ISRmax= SR*2*1048576

Type of Limit Precondition Range / Value
Maximum number of
 SR 
samples Min100 Ms,100 Ms    group delay in samples
 ISR 
Note: the internal filter settling time depends on the relation:
Some R&S FSVA/FSV applications limit the maximum number

of samples to reasonable values.
In I/Q Analyzer mode (Eval mode, see TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL
on page 891), the maximum number of samples is restricted
to:
 SR 
Min10 Mio,100 Ms    group delay in samples
 ISR 
Maximum number of I/Q -(MaxNoOfSamples-1) to + (MaxNoOfSamples-1)

pretrigger samples
(*) Note the relationship between the sample rate and the input sample rate, which may restrict the value
ranges further:
ISRmin= SR/254
ISRmax= SR*2*1048576
Table 4-15: Typical values for the maximum number of samples depending on the SR/ISR relation
SR/ISR Max number of samples
100 104857600
10 104857600
1 104857600
1/10 10485686
1/100 1048508
SlowIQ measurements
"SlowIQ" measurements are measurements where the sample rate exceeds the rate
used to transfer valid samples. In the R&S FSVA/FSV, the sample rate may exceed
100 MHz for "SlowIQ" measurements. This happens, for example, when an analog sig-
nal is sampled by external hardware, e.g. an oscilloscope, with a sample rate > 100
MHz, is stored there in a memory temporarily and then read from the memory and
transmitted to the R&S FSVA/FSV. In this case, make sure the source sample rate is
defined corrrespondingly for the connected device (see "Input Sample Rate"
on page 399).
Bandwidths
Depending on the sample rate, the following bandwidths are available:

Figure 4-37: Bandwidths depending on sample rate for active digital input
Table 4-16: Bandwidths depending on sample rate for active digital input (with R&S FSV-B70/
R&S FSVA-B40)
Examplary digital Possible output sample rates and the corresponding IQ bandwidths
input sample
rates Linear increase from the minimum Constant IQ bandwidth from break
possible output sample rate up to point up to the maximum possible
break point output sample rate
minimum break point break point maximum
Minimum: Not allowed SR = 100 Hz 1) SR = 254 * ISR

ISR =100 Hz BW = 0.76 * ISR = 25.64 kHz
= 76 Hz BW = 0.76 * ISR
= 76 Hz
Example SR = 100 Hz 1) SR = 0.95*ISR SR = 0.95*ISR SR = 254 * ISR

ISR = 30 MHz BW = 0.8 * SR = 28.5 MHz = 28.5 MHz = 7.62 GHz
= 80 Hz BW = 0.8 * SR BW = 0.76 * ISR BW = 0.76 * ISR
= 22.8 MHz = 22.8 MHz = 22.8 Hz
1) max(ISR/(2*1048576), 100 Hz)

2) min(254*ISR, 10GHz)

input sample
Example SR = 100 Hz 1) SR = 0.95*ISR SR = 0.95*ISR SR = 10 GHz 2)

ISR = 50 MHz BW = 0.8 * SR = 47.5 MHz = 47.5 MHz BW = 0.76 * ISR
= 80 Hz BW = 0.8 * SR BW = 0.76 * ISR = 38 MHz
= 38 MHz = 38 MHz
Example SR =ISR/ SR = 0.95*ISR SR = 0.95*ISR SR = 10 GHz 2)

(2*1048576)
ISR = 500 MHz = 475 MHz = 475 MHz BW = 0.76 * ISR
= 239 Hz BW = 0.8 * SR BW = 0.76 * ISR = 380 MHz
BW = 0.8 * SR = 380 MHz = 380 MHz
= 191.2 Hz
Maximum: SR =ISR/ SR = 0.95*ISR SR = 0.95*ISR SR = 10 GHz 2)

(2*1048576)
ISR = 10 GHz = 9.5 GHz = 9.5 GHz BW = 0.76 * ISR
= 4.769 kHz BW = 0.8 * SR BW = 0.76 * ISR = 7.6 GHz
BW = 0.8 * SR = 7.6 GHz = 7.6 GHz
= 3.8152 kHz
1) max(ISR/(2*1048576), 100 Hz)

2) min(254*ISR, 10GHz)
Table 4-17: Bandwidths depending on sample rate for active digital input (without R&S FSV-B70/
R&S FSVA-B40)
input sample
Minimum: Not allowed SR = 100 Hz 1) SR = 254 * ISR

ISR =100 Hz BW = 0.76 * ISR = 25.64 kHz
= 76 Hz BW = 0.76 * ISR
= 76 Hz
Example SR = 100 Hz 1) SR = 0.95*ISR SR = 0.95*ISR SR = 45 MHz 2)

ISR = 30 MHz BW = 0.8 * SR = 28.5 MHz = 28.5 MHz BW = 0.76 * ISR
= 80 Hz BW = 0.8 * SR BW = 0.76 * ISR = 22.8 Hz
= 22.8 MHz = 22.8 MHz
Example SR = 100 Hz 1) SR = 45 MHz 2) Not allowed

ISR = 50 MHz BW = 0.8 * SR BW = 0.8 * SR
= 80 Hz = 36 MHz
1) max(ISR/(2*1048576), 100 Hz)

2) min(254*ISR, 45 MHz)

input sample
Example SR =ISR/ SR = 45 MHz 2) Not allowed

(2*1048576)
ISR = 500 MHz BW = 0.8 * SR
= 239 Hz
= 36 MHz
BW = 0.8 * SR
= 191.2 Hz
Maximum: SR =ISR/ SR = 45 MHz 2) Not allowed

(2*1048576)
ISR = 10 GHz BW = 0.8 * SR
= 4.769 kHz
= 36 MHz
BW = 0.8 * SR
= 3.8152 kHz
1) max(ISR/(2*1048576), 100 Hz)

2) min(254*ISR, 45 MHz)
Triggering
The following trigger modes are supported:
● External (see "External" on page 238)
● BB Power (see "IF Power/BB Power" on page 239)
● Time (see "Time" on page 241)
If external triggering is used, the external trigger must be applied via the connector on
the rear panel of the instrument (as for analog input).
Gating
Gating is not supported for digital input.
4.7.3 Digital Output
Digital output is enabled in the I/Q Analyzer mode (see Chapter 4.5, "Instrument Func-
tions - I/Q Analyzer", on page 410).
The digital input and output cannot be used simultaneously.
Processing digital output

Digital output is processed almost identically to RF input in I/Q mode (see Chap-
ter 4.5.6, "Working with I/Q Data", on page 438). I/Q data is sampled blockwise,
according to the defined sample rate, and stored in the I/Q memory. From the memory,

the I/Q data is processed in the I/Q Analyzer mode. Simultaneously, the data is written
to the R&S Digital I/Q Interface continuously. Using this interface, the I/Q data can be
processed in an external device as an alternative to internal processing in the
R&S FSVA/FSV.
The sample rate at the digital output corresponds to the user-defined sample rate
(maximum 100 MHz, see "Sample Rate" on page 416). The current sample rate is dis-
played in the "Digital Output" dialog box (read-only) when the digital output is enabled
(see "Digital Output" on page 401).
For digital output, the full scale level corresponds to the defined reference level (with-
out the reference level offset and transducer; see also "Full Scale Level" on page 400
and "Reference Level" on page 415).
The data rate for digital output via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface is 100 MHz, i.e. any
connected device must be capable of processing digital input at a data rate of 100
MHz.
Figure 4-38: Signal path using the digital output
4.7.4 Softkeys and Parameters of the R&S Digital I/Q Interface
The following softkeys and parameters are available for the R&S Digital I/Q Interface in
the applications that support it.
Signal Source..............................................................................................................480
└ Input Path......................................................................................................480
└ Connected Device.........................................................................................480
└ Input Sample Rate........................................................................................ 480
└ Full Scale Level.............................................................................................480
└ Level Unit...................................................................................................... 480
└ Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level.................................................. 481
Digital Output.............................................................................................................. 481
Digital IQ Info.............................................................................................................. 481
EXIQ............................................................................................................................481

└ TX Settings................................................................................................... 482
└ RX Settings................................................................................................... 482
└ Send To........................................................................................................ 482
└ Firmware Update.......................................................................................... 482
└ R&S Support................................................................................................. 482
└ DigIConf........................................................................................................ 482
Signal Source
Input Path ← Signal Source

Remote command:
Connected Device ← Signal Source

Remote command:
Input Sample Rate ← Signal Source

Remote command:
Full Scale Level ← Signal Source

the magnitude "1".
Remote command:
Level Unit ← Signal Source

Remote command:

Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level ← Signal Source

change occurs.
Remote command:
Digital Output
base unit.
Remote command:
Digital IQ Info
includes:
● Used port
transfer rates
Remote command:
EXIQ
1307.9002Kxx.
ule Manual".

ual".
TX Settings ← EXIQ
RX Settings ← EXIQ
Send To ← EXIQ
BOX.
Firmware Update ← EXIQ

R&S Support ← EXIQ

ment.
DigIConf ← EXIQ
Remote command:
Operating Manual".

Example 1:
SOURce:EBOX:*RST
SOURce:EBOX:*IDN?
Result:
Example 2:
4.7.5 Interface Status Information
When a digitial input or output device is connected to the R&S Digital I/Q Interface, a
dialog box and status icons in the status bar provide information on the status of the
connection. To display the dialog box, select the "Digital IQ Info" softkey in the "Input/
Output" menu (see "Digital IQ Info" on page 402).
The following information is displayed:

Table 4-18: Displayed Information for Digital Baseband Connections
Label Description
Digital I/Q input connection
Digital-I/Q Input Device connected to R&S FSVA/FSV input interface
Serial Number Serial number of the connected device
Port Port name used by the connected device
(Max.) Digital Output Sample Maximum possible or currently used sample rate of the connected device;
Rate depends on the used connection protocol version (see "<SampleRate-
Type>" parameter described in INPut:DIQ:CDEVice on page 752)

Label Description
Max. Digital Output Transfer Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz
Rate
Connection Protocol State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected
device
PRBS Test Descewing State of the PRBS test
Digital I/Q output connection
Digital-I/Q Output Device connected to R&S FSVA/FSV output interface
Serial Number Serial number of the connected device
Port Port name used by the connected device
Max. Digital Input Transfer Maximum input data transfer rate that can be processed by the connected
Rate device
Connection Protocol State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected
device
PRBS Test Descewing State of the PRBS test
You can query the information in this dialog box using remote commands, see INPut:
DIQ:CDEVice on page 752.
Connection tests
Each time a device is (re-)connected to the R&S FSVA/FSV, a connection protocol is
executed. This test identifies the connected device. This test may take 2 seconds to
complete. If a connection cannot be established within 30 seconds, the test is aborted
and an error is indicated in the dialog box and the status bar.
Before the first measurement is started after a device has been (re-)connected to the
R&S FSVA/FSV, a PRBS Descewing test is performed to identify the properties of the
used cable. The state of this test is also indicated in the dialog box and the status bar.
If either of the tests fail, check the cable to the connected device as a first step. Also
make sure the data rate of the R&S FSVA/FSV and the connected device comply with
the specification.
Status icons
The status of the connection tests are indicated in the "Digital IQ Info" dialog box and
as icons in the status bar. The status icons have the following meaning:
Table 4-19: Status information for digital baseband connections
Icon Status
Digital input
Connection established, protocol not yet started

Icon Status
Connection protocol in progress
Connection protocol passed
PRBS test in progress
PRBS test passed
Connection protocol failed
PRBS test failed
No cable connected although "Signal Source" = "DigIQ"
Digital output
Connection established, protocol not yet started
Connection protocol in progress
Connection protocol passed
Connection protocol failed
No cable connected although "Digital Output" enabled.
Error messages
If errors occur, a message is displayed in the status bar. The following table describes
the most common errors and possible solutions.
Message Possible solutions
"Dig. Input Sample Rate too high!" ● Increase the sample rate
● Reduce the input sample rate
"Dig. Input Sample Rate too low!" ● Reduce the sample rate
● Increase the input sample rate
"Output Sample Rate too high!" ● Reduce the sample rate

● Increase the input sample rate

Message Possible solutions
"Number of I/Q Capture Samples too high!" ● Reduce the number of I/Q samples
● Reduce the ratio
input sample rate / sample rate
by increasing the sample rate or descreasing the
input sample rate
Keyword: "FIFO OVL" Reduce the input sample rate
4.7.6 Description of the LVDS Connector
The R&S Digital I/Q Interface is a proprietary LVDS serial interface. For adaption to
industrial standard interfaces use the R&S EX-IQ-BOX (see the "R&S®EX-IQ-BOX -
External Signal Interface Module Manual". The EX-IQ-Box functionality is not suppor-
ted for R&S FSVA/FSV models 1321.3008Kxx.).
The LVDS Connector is a 26 pin female 0.050" Mini D Ribbon connector (e.g.: 3M
102XX-1210VE series).
For the connection, use the cables provided with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX or an
R&S®SMU-Z6 cable (order no.: 1415.0201.02).
Figure 4-39: LVDS connector on the R&S FSVA/FSV rear panel, connector front view
The Table 4-20 shows the multiplexed data at the output of the LVDS transmitter.
Table 4-20: LVDS connector pin description
Pin Signal Level
1 reserved for future use
2 GND 0V Ground, shield of pair 1-14, for future use
3 SDAT0_P LVDS Serial data channel 0 positive pin; carries the bits VALID, ENABLE,
MARKER_1 (GP4), Reserve_1 (GP2), RE_0, RE_1
4 SDAT1_P LVDS Serial data channel 1 positive pin; carries the bits RE_2, RE_3, RE_4,
RE_5, RE_6, RE_7
RE_11, RE_12, RE_13
6 CLK1_P LVDS Clock 1 positive pin; clock for transmission on LVDS link
7 S_CLK TTL (for future use)
8 +5VD +5.0V Supply voltage (for future use)

Instrument Functions – External Mixer (Option R&S FSV-B21)
Pin Signal Level
RE_17, RE_18, RE_19
10 SDAT4_P LVDS Serial data channel 4 positive pin; carries the bits TRIGGER_1 (GP0),
TRIGGER_2 (GP1), MARKER_2 (GP5), Reserve_2 (GP3), IM_0, IM_1
11 SDAT5_P LVDS Serial data channel 5 positive pin; carries the bits IM_2, IM_3, IM_4, IM_5,
IM_6, IM_7
12 SDAT6_P LVDS Serial data channel 6 positive pin; carries the bits IM_8, IM_9, IM_10,
IM_11, IM_12, IM_13
13 SDAT7_P LVDS Serial data channel 7 positive pin; carries the bits IM_14, IM_15, IM_16,
IM_17, IM_18, IM_19
14 reserved for future use
15 SDAT0_M LVDS Serial data channel 0 negative pin
18 CLK1_M LVDS Clock 1 negative pin
19 DGND 0V Power ground; ground return for 5V supply voltage (for future use)
20 S_DATA TTL (for future use)
26 GND 0V LVDS ground; shielding of transmission lines and shielding of cable
4.8 Instrument Functions – External Mixer (Option

R&S FSV-B21)
If the R&S FSVA/FSV External Mixer option (R&S FSV-B21) is installed, an external
mixer can be connected to the R&S FSVA/FSV to increase the available frequency
range.
External mixers - once activated - are available for all instrument applications.
(De-)Activation is only possible in the base unit, i.e. in "Spectrum" mode.
Connecting External Mixers

How to connect external mixers is described in the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide,
"Optional Front Panel Connectors".

General information
Some general information on working with external mixers can be found in Chap-
ter 4.8.1, "General Information on External Mixers", on page 488.

The "External Mixer" menu is displayed when you select the "External Mixer" softkey in
the "Home" menu of the "Spectrum" mode.
For details see Chapter 4.8.2, "Softkeys of the External Mixer (Option B21)",
on page 494.
Measurement Example
An introductory example of operating an external mixer is provided in Chapter 4.8.3,
"Introductory Example of Operation", on page 505.
● General Information on External Mixers................................................................488
● Softkeys of the External Mixer (Option B21)......................................................... 494
● Introductory Example of Operation....................................................................... 505
4.8.1 General Information on External Mixers
This section contains some general information on external mixers and their applica-
tion.
4.8.1.1 Frequency Range........................................................................................................488
4.8.1.2 Bias Current................................................................................................................ 489
4.8.1.3 Conversion Loss Tables..............................................................................................490
4.8.1.4 Full Screen Level........................................................................................................ 491
4.8.1.5 Remarks on Signal Identification with Auto ID............................................................ 491
4.8.1.1 Frequency Range
The frequency of the input signal can be expressed as a function of the LO frequency
and the selected harmonic of the first LO as follows:
fin = n * fLO + fIF
where:
fin: frequency of input signal
n: order of harmonic used for conversion

fLO: frequency of first LO: 7.73 GHz to 15.23 GHz
fIF: intermediate frequency 729.9 MHz
For pre-defined bands, the resulting frequency ranges are as follows:

Table 4-21: Frequency ranges for pre-defined bands
Band Frequency start [GHz] Frequency stop [GHz]
K 18.0 26.5
KA (A) *) 26.5 40.0
Q 33.0 50.0
U 40.0 60.0
V 50.0 75.0
E 60.0 90.0
W 75.0 110.0
F 90.0 140.0
D 110.0 170.0
G 140.0 220.0
J 220.0 325.0
Y 325.0 500.0
USER 31.65 60.1901

(default) (default)
*) The band formerly referred to as "A" is now named "KA".
4.8.1.2 Bias Current
Single-diode mixers generally require a DC voltage which is applied via the LO line.
This DC voltage is to be tuned to the minimum conversion loss versus frequency. Such
a DC voltage can be set via the "BIAS" function using the D/A converter of the
R&S FSVA/FSV. The value to be entered is not the voltage but the short-circuit cur-
rent. The current is defined in the "Bias Settings" or set to the value of the conversion
loss table (see "Bias Settings" on page 502 and "Bias" on page 500.
Figure 4-40: Bias circuit of the R&S FSVA/FSV

The voltage U0 at the output of the operational amplifier can be set in the range –2.0 to
+2.0 V An open-circuit voltage Vbias of –0.5 to +0.5 V is obtained accordingly at the
output of the voltage divider. A short-circuit current of Ishort = V0 / 200 Ω = 10 mA to +
10 mA is obtained for a short circuit at the output of the voltage divider. For using bias-
ing it is not important to know exactly the current flowing through the diode since the
conversion loss must be set to minimum with the frequency. It therefore makes no dif-
ference whether the setting is performed by an open-circuit voltage or by a short-circuit
current. A DC return path is ensured via the 66 Ω resistor, which is an advantage in
some mixers.
4.8.1.3 Conversion Loss Tables
Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for
conversion loss at certain frequencies. Correction values for frequencies between the
reference values are obtained by interpolation. Linear interpolation is performed if the
table contains only two values. If it contains more than two reference values, spline
interpolation is carried out. Outside the frequency range covered by the table the con-
version loss is assumed to be the same (see Figure 4-41) as that for the first and last
reference value.
Figure 4-41: Conversion loss outside the band's frequency range
Predefined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can
be imported to the R&S FSVA/FSV. Alternatively, you can define your own conversion
loss tables. Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the "Conversion
Loss Table Setup" tab of the "External Mixer Configuration" dialog box (see "Conver-
sion Loss Table Setup" on page 498).
The conversion loss table to be used for a particular range is defined in the "External
Mixer Configuration" dialog box. All tables stored on the instrument in the
C:\r_s\instr\user\cvl\ directory are offered for selection. A validation check is
then performed on the selected table to ensure that it complies with the settings. In
particular, the following is checked:

● the assigned band name

● the harmonic order
● the mixer type
● the table must contain at least one frequency that lies within the frequency range
for the band
4.8.1.4 Full Screen Level
The maximum possible reference level depends on the maximum used conversion loss
value. Thus, the reference level can be adjusted for each range according to the used
conversion loss table or average conversion loss value. If a conversion loss value is
used which exceeds the maximum reference level, the reference level is adjusted to
the maximum value permitted by the firmware.
4.8.1.5 Remarks on Signal Identification with Auto ID
Test sweep and reference sweep

Depending on which of the automatic signal identification functions are used, the
traces are used to display either the test sweep (the upper side-band sweep) or the ref-
erence sweep (lower side-band sweep).
Function Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3
Signal ID Signal ID upper side-band Signal ID lower side-band -
Auto ID Auto ID - -
Signal ID + Auto ID Signal ID upper side-band Signal ID lower side-band Auto ID
Type of signal
The automatic comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep with the "Auto ID"
function can only be usefully applied for signals with time-constant spectrum since the
two sweeps are always required to determine the actual spectrum.
Tolerance for the comparison of test sweep and reference

Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep, the conver-
sion loss of the mixer may differ from that of the test sweep. The reasons for this are
the LO output power of the R&S FSV varying with the frequency and the non-ideal
characteristics of the mixer. A certain tolerance should therefore be permitted for the
comparison of the signal levels in the test sweep and reference sweep. The user can
set this tolerance using the "AUTO ID THRESHOLD" function. If the tolerance is
defined too narrow, the signal collected with the reference sweep may be displayed
even for the identification of real signals.

Mixer products with low S/N ratio

If the S/N ratio of a mixer product is less than the tolerance set with "AUTO ID
THRESHOLD", the level difference between the test sweep and reference sweep at
the frequency of this mixer product is always within limits, even if the signal occurs in
one of the sweeps only. Such mixer products cannot be identified by "AUTO ID". It is
therefore recommended to perform a visual comparison of the test sweep and refer-
ence sweep using the function "SIGNAL ID".
An unwanted signal with a S/N ratio that corresponds approximately to the tolerance
set with "AUTO ID THRESHOLD" may not be blanked out permanently. Due to the fact
that the noise display varies from one sweep to another, the S/N ratio changes and
thus the level difference between the test sweep and reference sweep measured at a
frequency changes as well. As a result, the criterion for detecting unwanted signals is
not fulfilled. To blank out unwanted signals permanently, an almost constant noise indi-
cation is therefore required. This can be achieved by reducing the video bandwidth.
Since the average noise indication lies well below the generated noise peak values,
the minimum level diminishes. For identification using "AUTO ID" signals should have
this minimum level.
Examining unwanted mixer products with small span

With large spans in which non-modulated sinewave signals are represented as single
lines, unwanted mixer products are generally completely blanked out. However, if you
examine the frequency range containing a blanked signal in detail using a small span,
e.g. an image-frequency response, part of the signal may nevertheless be displayed.
This happens when the displayed components of a blanked signal have a level differ-
ence which is smaller than the tolerance predefined with "AUTO ID THRESHOLD"
when compared with the noise floor. These components are therefore not blanked out.
Display of mixer products at the same frequency

If the input signal consists of a very large number of spectral components, it will
become more and more probable that two different unwanted mixer products will be
displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and reference sweep.

Figure 4-42: Different mixer products displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and refer-
ence sweep
The external mixer has been working using 2nd order harmonic. The signal recorded in
the test sweep is displayed by trace 1. The IF filter of the R&S FSVA/FSV is represen-
ted at a 3 dB bandwidth of 20 kHz, the real IF bandwidth being 30 kHz. If, however, the
3 dB bandwidth (trace 2) of the signal recorded in the reference sweep is examined, it
will be found to be larger exactly by a factor of 2. This shows that the two products
were generated by mixing with LO harmonics of different orders The signal recorded in
the test sweep was generated by mixing with 3rd order harmonic. Since the frequency
axis scaling is based on the 2nd order, the mixer product or the resulting diagram of
the IF filter is compressed by a factor of 2/3. The signal recorded in the reference
sweep was generated by mixing with the fundamental of the LO signal. Since the fre-
quency axis scaling is based on the 2nd order, the mixer product or the resulting dia-
gram of the IF filter is expanded by a factor of 2.
Automatic identification with a large span is not possible since the two mixer products
are displayed at the same frequency. The diagram shown in Figure 4-43 is obtained
when examining products with a narrow span using "AUTO ID". You can easily recog-
nize unwanted mixer products from the clear diagram obtained using "AUTO ID" or
"SIGNAL ID".

Figure 4-43: Signal as in Screen A: Unwanted mixer product with the use of AUTO ID
4.8.2 Softkeys of the External Mixer (Option B21)
External Mixer............................................................................................................. 495

└ External Mixer (On/Off)................................................................................. 495
└ External Mixer Config....................................................................................495
└ External Mixer Setup.......................................................................... 496
└ RF Start.................................................................................... 496
└ RF Stop.................................................................................... 496
└ Handover Freq..........................................................................496
└ Band......................................................................................... 496
└ RF Overrange...........................................................................496
└ Preset Band..............................................................................496
└ Mixer Type................................................................................497
└ Harmonic Type......................................................................... 497
└ Range 1/2................................................................................. 497
└ Harmonic Order..............................................................497
└ Conversion Loss.............................................................497
└ Conversion Loss Table Setup.............................................................498
└ New Table................................................................................ 499
└ File Name....................................................................... 499
└ Comment........................................................................499

└ Band............................................................................... 499
└ Harmonic Order..............................................................500
└ Bias................................................................................ 500
└ Mixer Name.................................................................... 500
└ Mixer S/N........................................................................500
└ Mixer Type......................................................................500
└ Position/Value................................................................ 500
└ Insert.............................................................................. 501
└ Delete............................................................................. 501
└ Shift x............................................................................. 501
└ Shift y............................................................................. 502
└ Save............................................................................... 502
└ Edit Table................................................................................. 502
└ Delete Table............................................................................. 502
└ Import Table............................................................................. 502
└ Bias Settings................................................................................................. 502
└ Write to <CVL table name>................................................................ 502
└ LO Level........................................................................................................503
└ Signal ID (On/Off)......................................................................................... 503
└ Auto ID (On/Off)............................................................................................ 504
└ Auto ID Threshold......................................................................................... 505
External Mixer
Opens the submenu for the external mixer.
External Mixer (On/Off) ← External Mixer

Switches the external mixer on or off. Once activated, the external mixer is available
for all applications on the instrument.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer[:STATe] on page 815
External Mixer Config ← External Mixer

Opens the "External Mixer Configuration" dialog box that contains two tabs:
● "External Mixer Setup" on page 496
● "Conversion Loss Table Setup" on page 498

External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External Mixer

In this tab you configure the band and mixer settings.
RF Start ← External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External Mixer

Displays the start frequency of the selected band. For pre-defined bands, the fre-
quency range is set automatically (see Table 4-21).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:STARt? on page 817
RF Stop ← External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External Mixer

Displays the stop frequency of the selected band. For pre-defined bands, the fre-
quency range is set automatically (see Table 4-21).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:STOP? on page 817
Handover Freq. ← External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External

Mixer
Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next (if two
different ranges are selected). The handover frequency can be selected freely within
the overlapping frequency range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:HANDover on page 817
Band ← External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External Mixer

Defines the waveguide band or user-defined band to be used by the mixer.
The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the "RF Start" and
"RF Stop" fields.
For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands, see Table 4-21).
The mixer settings for the user-defined band can be selected freely. The frequency
range for the user band is defined via the harmonics configuration (see "Range 1/2"
on page 497).
Note: The band formerly referred to as "A" is now named "KA".
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND on page 817
RF Overrange ← External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External Mixer

Specifies whether the band limits are extended beyond "RF Start" and "RF Stop" due
to the capabilities of the used harmonics.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:RFOVerrange[:STATe] on page 816
Preset Band ← External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External Mixer
Restores the presettings for the selected band.
Note: changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the
PRESET function. This function allows you to restore the original band settings.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet on page 818
Mixer Type ← External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External Mixer
The R&S FSVA/FSV option B21 allows for the following external mixer types:
"2 Port" LO and IF data uses the same port
"3 Port" LO and IF data uses separate ports
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:PORTs on page 821
Harmonic Type ← External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External

Mixer
Defines if only even, only odd, or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion.
Depending on this selection, the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes
(see "Harmonic Order" on page 497).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE on page 819
Range 1/2 ← External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External Mixer
Enables the use of a second harmonic to cover the band's frequency range.
For each range you can define which harmonic to use and how the Conversion Loss is
handled.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe on page 818
Harmonic Order ← Range 1/2 ← External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config ←
External Mixer
Defines which of the available harmonic orders are used to cover the frequency range.
By default, the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con-
version of input signals in the whole band. If due to the LO frequency the conversion is
not possible using one harmonic, the band is splitted.
For the band "USER", the order of harmonic is defined by the user. The order of har-
monic can be between 2 and 100, the lowest usable frequency being 26,5 GHz.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic[:LOW] on page 819
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue] on page 818
Conversion Loss ← Range 1/2 ← External Mixer Setup ← External Mixer Config
← External Mixer
Defines how the conversion loss is handled. The following possibilities are available:
"Average" Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB.

"Table" Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list. Pre-
defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external
mixer and can be imported to the R&S FSVA/FSV. Alternatively, you
can define your own conversion loss tables. Conversion loss tables
are configured and managed in the Conversion Loss Table Setup tab.
For details on conversion loss tables, see Chapter 4.8.1.3, "Conver-
sion Loss Tables", on page 490. For details on importing tables, see
"Import Table" on page 502.
All tables stored on the instrument in the
C:\r_s\instr\user\cvl\ directory are offered for selection. A
validation check is then performed on the selected table to ensure
that it complies with the settings. In particular, the following is
checked:
● the assigned band name
● the harmonic order
● the mixer type
● the table must contain at least one frequency that lies within the
frequency range for the band
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW] on page 820
Average for range 1
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW] on page 820
Table for range 1
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:HIGH on page 820
Average for range 2
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH on page 820
Table for range 2
Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External Mixer

In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables. Conversion loss tables
consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain
frequencies. The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are
obtained via interpolation.
The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box.

New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External
Mixer
Opens the "Edit Conversion Loss Table" dialog box to configure a new conversion loss
table.
A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as
described by the Position/Value entries.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 779
File Name ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Con-
fig ← External Mixer
Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C:\r_s\instr\user\cvl\
directory on the instrument. The name of the table is identical with the name of the file
(without extension) in which the table is stored. The entry in this field is mandatory.
The .ACL extension is automatically appended during storage.
Remote command:
Comment ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Con-
An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table. The comment can be
freely defined by the user.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent on page 781
Band ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ←
External Mixer
The waveguide or user-defined band for which the table is to be applied.
For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands, see Table 4-21).

Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND on page 778
Harmonic Order ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer
Config ← External Mixer
The harmonic order for which the table is to be applied.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic on page 780
Bias ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ←
External Mixer
The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point. It
corresponds to the short-circuit current. The bias current can range from -10 mA to 10
mA. The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer
diode(s).
Tip: You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the
changed setting is displayed, see "Bias Settings" on page 502.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS on page 781
Mixer Name ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer
Specifies the name of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer on page 780
Mixer S/N ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config
← External Mixer
Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber on page 780
Mixer Type ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Con-
Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two-port or
three-port type.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs on page 781
Position/Value ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer

Each position/value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific
frequency. The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies. A
maximum of 50 reference values can be entered.

Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by inter-
polation. Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values. If it con-
tains more than two reference values, spline interpolation is carried out. Outside the
frequency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same
(see Figure 4-41) as that for the first and last reference value.
Figure 4-44: Conversion loss outside the band's frequency range
The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the Position/
Value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table.
The following functions are available to define the table:
● Insert an entry
● Delete an entry
● Shift all positions by a specific value (shift x)
● Shift all conversion loss values by a specific value (shift y)
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA on page 782
Insert ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ←
External Mixer
Inserts a new position/value entry in the table.
If the table is empty, a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted.
If entries already exist, a new entry is inserted above the selected entry. The position
of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half.
Delete ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ←
External Mixer
Deletes the currently selected position/value entry.
Shift x ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ←
External Mixer
Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value. The value can be entered in the edit
dialog box. The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x-axis.

Shift y ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ←
External Mixer
Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value. The value can be entered in the
edit dialog box. The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y-
axis.
Save ← New Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ←
External Mixer
The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the
C:\r_s\instr\user\cvl\ directory of the instrument.
Edit Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ← External
Mixer
Opens the "Edit Conversion Loss Table" dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss
table. For details on table configuration see "New Table" on page 499.
Remote command:
Delete Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ← Exter-
nal Mixer
Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar on page 782
Import Table ← Conversion Loss Table Setup ← External Mixer Config ← Exter-
nal Mixer
Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory to the instrument's
C:\r_s\instr\user\cvl\ directory.
Bias Settings ← External Mixer

Opens a dialog box to define the bias current for each range, which is required to set
the mixer to its optimum operating point. It corresponds to the short-circuit current. The
bias current can range from -10 mA to 10 mA. The actual bias current is lower because
of the forward voltage of the mixer diode(s).
The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results. To store
the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table, select the Write to <CVL
table name> button.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:BIAS:LOW on page 816
[SENSe:]MIXer:BIAS:HIGH on page 815
Write to <CVL table name> ← Bias Settings ← External Mixer

Stores the bias setting in the currently selected "Conversion Loss Table" for the range
(see "Conversion Loss Table Setup" on page 498).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS on page 781

LO Level ← External Mixer

Opens an edit dialog box to change the LO level of the external mixer's LO port from
13.0 dBm to 17.0 dBm in 0.1 dB steps. Default value is 15.5 dB.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOPower on page 819
Signal ID (On/Off) ← External Mixer

The SIGNAL ID softkey activates or deactivates visual signal identification. Two
sweeps are performed alternately. Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper
side band (USB) of the LO (the test sweep), trace 2 shows the trace measured on the
lower side band (LSB), i.e. the reference sweep. (See also Chapter 4.8.1.5, "Remarks
on Signal Identification with Auto ID", on page 491).
The reference sweep is performed using a LO setting shifted downwards by 2*IF/<Har-

monic order>. Input signals in the wanted sideband that are converted using the speci-
fied harmonic are displayed in both traces at the same position on the frequency axis.
Image signals and mixer products caused by other harmonics are displayed in both
traces at different positions. The user identifies the signals visually by comparing the
two traces.
Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep, the conver-
sion loss of the mixer may differ from the test sweep. Therefore the level should only
be measured in the test sweep (trace 1).
Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID
function.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:SIGNal on page 821
Auto ID (On/Off) ← External Mixer

Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification.
Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID (On/Off). However, the test and reference
sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of
each sweep point. The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if "Signal ID" is
active at the same time. If "Signal ID" is not active, the result can be displayed in any of
the traces 1 to 3. Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace.
(See also Chapter 4.8.1.5, "Remarks on Signal Identification with Auto ID",
on page 491).
Real input signals are displayed at the same frequency in the test and reference
sweeps, i.e. theoretically identical signal levels are expected in the two sweeps at the
frequency of the real mixer product. If the level difference is lower than the tolerance
set with Auto ID Threshold, the signal obtained in the test sweep is displayed. If a sig-
nal occurs only in the test sweep or reference sweep, it is an unwanted mixer product.
The level of this signal is compared to the noise floor in the other sweep. If the S/N
ratio is sufficiently large, the tolerance limit for the maximum permissible level differ-
ence is exceeded. This means that the signal with the lower level, i.e. noise in this
case, is displayed.
Note that "Auto ID" functions according to the fail-safe principle, i.e. unwanted mixer
products may not be detected as such but signals which are in fact real input signals
are not blanked out. See also Chapter 4.8.1.5, "Remarks on Signal Identification with
Auto ID", on page 491.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:SIGNal on page 821

Auto ID Threshold ← External Mixer

Allows the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference
sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison (Auto ID function). The input
range is between 0.1 dB and 100 dB. Values of about 10 dB (i.e. default setting) gener-
ally yield satisfactory results. See also Chapter 4.8.1.5, "Remarks on Signal Identifica-
tion with Auto ID", on page 491.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer:THReshold on page 822
4.8.3 Introductory Example of Operation
The following example gives an example of the operation of external mixers as well as
the required settings: A sine wave signal with f = 14.5 GHz is applied to the input of a
multiplier. The spectrum at the multiplier output is to be recorded in the range of 52 to
60 GHz using a 2-port mixer for the V band. The mixer used is a double-diode mixer.
The example of operation is described in the following steps:
● Test Setup
● Activating the External Mixer and Selecting the Mode
● Default Settings
● Level Correction
● Frequency-dependant Level Correction
● Level Correction with an Average Value
● Taking into Account the Cable Loss in the IF Path
● Functions for Signal Identification

Test Setup
Figure 4-45: External mixer test setup
1. 1. Connect the "LO OUT / IF IN" output of the R&S FSVA/FSV to the LO/IF port of
the external mixer.
2. Connect the multiplier to the external mixer.
3. Apply a sine wave signal with f = 14.5 GHz to the input of the multiplier.
Activating the External Mixer and Selecting the Mode

► Activate the external mixing for all applications by selecting "FREQ > External
Mixer > External Mixer ON" in Spectrum mode.
Default Settings
Prior to the measurement select the required band (in this case the V band).
1. Select "FREQ > External Mixer > External Mixer Config".
2. From the "Band" selection list, select the "V" band.

Level Correction
The conversion loss of the mixer can be taken into account either as a function of fre-
quency (table with reference values) or using an average value. The frequency-
dependent level correction is used in this example in order to obtain a higher precision.
As an alternative, level correction based on average value can be used (see below).
1. Select "FREQ > External Mixer > External Mixer Config".
2. For Range 1, select "Table".
3. From the selection list, select a conversion loss table stored on the instrument.
If the selected table is not valid for the selected band, an error message is dis-
played.
4.8.3.1 Frequency-dependent Level Correction
1. Open the external mixer configuration settings by selecting "FREQ > External
Mixer > External Mixer Config".
2. Select the required "Band".
3. For "Range 1", select "Table".
4. From the selection list, select a conversion loss table stored on the instrument. No
further settings are necessary since the selected file contains all required parame-
ters. If the selected table is not valid for the selected band, an error message is dis-
played.
If no conversion loss table is available yet, create a new table first (in the "Conver-
sion Loss Table Setup" tab, see "New Table" on page 499).
5. A span is automatically set which covers the whole V band (50 to 75 GHz).
6. Set the frequency range to be examined by selecting "FREQ > Frequency

Start"=52 GHz and "FREQ > Frequency Stop"=60 GHz.
7. Reduce the video bandwidth by selecting "BW > Video Bandwidth Manual"=1 MHz.
This allows for correct signal identification using "AUTO ID" (see also Chap-
ter 4.8.1.5, "Remarks on Signal Identification with Auto ID", on page 491).
4.8.3.2 Level Correction with an Average Value
To take an average value into account instead of the frequency-dependent level cor-
rection, enter the following parameters for the selected band in the external mixer con-
figuration settings:
1. Open the external mixer configuration settings by selecting "FREQ > External
Mixer > External Mixer Config".
2. Select the required "Band".
3. For "Range 1", select "Average".

Instrument Functions - Power Sensor (R&S FSV-K9)
4. Enter the average of the conversion loss.

The entered average value is taken into account for the spectrum display irrespec-
tive of the frequency. The precision that can be obtained depends on the frequency
response of the mixer. With this type of level correction, measurements can be
easily performed at single frequencies.
4.8.3.3 Taking into Account the Cable Loss in the IF Path
On performing level correction, the conversion loss of the mixer and also the insertion
loss a0 of the cable used to tap off the IF signal are to be taken into account. This addi-
tional loss is frequency-dependent.
1. Determine the insertion of the cable at the intermediate frequency fIF = 729.9 MHz.
2. For level correction with average value, add the cable insertion loss to the average
conversion loss.
For frequency-dependent level correction, increase each reference value by the
insertion loss to the same extent. To do so, you can enter the cable loss using a
transducer table. Such a table should only contain two reference values (band start
and end) for which a0 is specified.
4.9 Instrument Functions - Power Sensor (R&S FSV-K9)

For precise power measurement up to 4 power sensors can be connected to the instru-
ment via the power sensor interface (option R&S FSV-B5, front panel) or the USB con-
nector (front or rear panel). The Power Sensor Support firmware option provides the
power measurement functions for this test setup. Both manual operation and remote
control are supported. The power sensor results are displayed in the marker table.

For details on the connectors and compatible power sensors refer to the Quick Start
Guide, chapter 1, "Front and Rear Panel".
For details on compatible power sensors refer to the data sheet.
Power Sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level,
e.g. from a signal generator.
Figure 4-46: Power sensor support – standard test setup
Using the power sensor with several applications

The power sensor cannot be used from the R&S FSVA/FSV firmware and the R&S
Power Viewer (virtual power meter for displaying results of the R&S NRP power sen-
sors) simultaneously. After using the Power Viewer, close the application, then unplug
and replug the sensor. Afterwards the power sensor can be used by the
R&S FSVA/FSV again.

To open the Power Sensor menu

The power sensor option R&S FSV–K9 is integrated within the "Input/Output" menu.
● Press the INPUT/OUTPUT key.
● Press the "Power Sensor" softkey.The "Power Sensor" menu is displayed.

● Chapter 4.9.4, "Softkeys of the Power Sensor Menu (R&S FSV-K9)",
on page 515
● Chapter 4.9.5, "Power Sensor Configuration Dialog", on page 517
Remote operation
Power sensors can be operated using the following remote command subsystems:
● "CALCulate:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9)" on page 721
● Chapter 5.3.3.3, "CALibration:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9)",
on page 736
● Chapter 5.3.3.6, "FETCh:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9)",
on page 747
● Chapter 5.3.3.14, "READ:PMETer Subsystem", on page 768
● "SENSe:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9)" on page 826
● Chapter 5.3.3.21, "UNIT Subsystem", on page 903
Results display
The results of the power sensor measurements are displayed in the marker table. For
each power sensor, a row is inserted. The sensor index is indicated in the "Function"
column.
Alternatively, you can query the results using the remote command FETCh<n>:
PMETer? on page 747.
Tasks
The following tasks with Power Sensors are described in this chapter:
● Chapter 4.9.2, "Zeroing the Power Sensor", on page 512
● Chapter 4.9.1, "Using Power Sensors", on page 511
● Chapter 4.9.3, "Configuring an External Power Trigger", on page 513

Further information
Information on possible error messages when using the Power Sensor is provided in
Chapter 4.9.6, "Error Messages", on page 520.
4.9.1 Using Power Sensors..................................................................................................511
4.9.2 Zeroing the Power Sensor.......................................................................................... 512
4.9.3 Configuring an External Power Trigger....................................................................... 513
4.9.4 Softkeys of the Power Sensor Menu (R&S FSV-K9).................................................. 515
4.9.5 Power Sensor Configuration Dialog............................................................................ 517
4.9.6 Error Messages...........................................................................................................520
4.9.1 Using Power Sensors
Up to 4 external power sensors can be configured separately and used for precise
power measurement, as a trigger, or both. All power sensors can be activated and
deactivated individually.
The following procedure describes in detail how to configure and activate power sen-
sors.
For details on the settings in the "Power Sensor Configuration" dialog box, see Chap-
ter 4.9.5, "Power Sensor Configuration Dialog", on page 517.
1. Press INPUT/OUTPUT > "Power Sensor" to display the "Power Sensor" menu.
2. Press "Power Sensor Config" to display the configuration dialog box.
3. Select the tab for the power sensor index you want to configure, e.g. "Sensor 1".
Note: if automatic assignment is active (default) and a power sensor is already
connected to the R&S FSVA/FSV, the serial number of the sensor is indicated in
one of the tabs. In this case, you configure that particular sensor in the correspond-
ing tab. If no serial number is indicated, you can set up a configuration and assign
a sensor manually later.
4. Press "Select" to evaluate the power sensor when power measurement is activa-
ted.
5. Define the frequency of the signal whose power you want to measure.
a) To define the frequency manually, select "Frequency Manual" and enter a fre-
quency.
b) To determine the frequency automatically, select "Frequency Coupling" and
then either "Center", to use the center frequency, or "Marker", to use the fre-
quency defined by marker 1.
6. Select the "Unit" for the power result display.

7. Select the measurement time for which the average is calculated. To define the
number of readings to be taken into account manually, select "Manual" and enter
the number in the "Number of Readings" field.
8. To activate the duty cycle correction, select "DutyCycle" and enter a percentage as
the correction value.
9. If you selected "dB" or "%" as units (relative display), define a reference value:
a) To set the currently measured power as a reference value, press the "Meas ->
Ref" button.
b) Alternatively, enter a value manually in the "Reference Value" field.
c) Optionally, select the "Use Ref Level Offset" option to take the reference level
offset set for the analyzer (Ref Level Offset softkey) into account for the mea-
sured power.
10. Optionally, define the usage of an external power trigger (see Chapter 4.9.3, "Con-
figuring an External Power Trigger", on page 513).
11. If necessary, repeat steps 3-10 for another power sensor.
12. By default, automatic assignment is active. If a power sensor is already connected

to the R&S FSVA/FSV, it is automatically assigned to an index and the serial num-
ber of the sensor is indicated on the corresponding tab. In this case, you already
configured the settings for the assigned power sensor.
Otherwise, assign the connected power sensors to the power sensor configura-
tions manually:
a) Press the "Power Sensor Assignment" softkey in the "Power Sensor" menu to
display the assignment dialog box.
b) For each configuration, define whether it is to be assigned automatically or
manually by activating or deactivating the "Auto Assignment" option for the cor-
responding power sensor index.
c) For manual assignment, select the serial number of one of the connected
power sensors from the list.
13. Press the "Power Sensor On" softkey in the "Power Sensor" menu to activate
power measurement for the selected power sensors.
The results of the power measurement are displayed in the marker table (Function:
"Sensor<1...4>") and can be queried via the remote command FETC:PMET?
(see FETCh<n>:PMETer? on page 747).
4.9.2 Zeroing the Power Sensor
You can reset each power sensor to zero. This can be done using the remote com-
mand CALibration:PMETer:ZERO:AUTO ONCE on page 736 or manually, as
desribed here.
1. In the "Power Sensor" menu (INPUT/OUTPUT > "Power Sensor"), press "Power
Sensor Config" to display the configuration dialog box.

2. Select the tab that is assigned to the power sensor you want to zero.
3. Press the "Zeroing Power Sensor" button.

A dialog box is displayed that prompts you to disconnect all signals from the input
of the power sensor.
4. Disconnect all signals from the input of the power sensor and press ENTER to con-
tinue.
5. Wait until zeroing is complete.

A corresponding message is displayed.
4.9.3 Configuring an External Power Trigger
Power Sensors can be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level, e.g.
from a signal generator.
Currently, the following power sensors are supported:

● R&S NRP-Z81/85/86
● all NRPxxS/SN
● all NRPxxT/TN
As of firmware version 1.60 (with an appropriate detector board as of version 5.00), the
power sensors can be connected to the "Power Sensor" interface directly, and no fur-
ther cables are required. They can then be configured as an external trigger or a power
sensor trigger. The measured power results are displayed as usual.
The previous connection and configuration of a power sensor as an external trigger is

still supported. It is not necessary to change an existing trigger setup unless you want
to evaluate the measured power results further.

Power Trigger Parameters

With the new implementation of the power sensor triggers some additional trigger
parameters were introduced. The following figure illustrates the trigger parameters for
an external power trigger.
Figure 4-47: Power Sensor Trigger Parameters
● Level: Power that triggers the measurement

● Hysteresis: Distance the input signal must stay below the trigger level before trig-
gering again
● Holdoff time: Time which must pass before triggering again
● Dropout time: Time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before trig-
gering again
● Slope: Direction of edge on which the trigger occurs (positive = rising, negative =
falling)
Example:
In Power Sensor Trigger Parameters, the events A and C are valid trigger events for
triggering on a positive slope. The trigger level is exceeded and the dropout time and
holdoff time have elapsed. For triggering on a negative slope, E and G are valid trigger
events. B and F, however, are not valid trigger events: For B, the dropout time has not
elapsed; for F, the holdoff time has not yet elapsed.
To configure a power sensor as an external power sensor (PSE) trigger

This is the way to configure a power sensor as an explicite power sensor trigger.
1. Connect the power sensor to the "Power Sensor" interface on the front panel of the
R&S FSVA/FSV.
2. Configure the power sensor for use as described in Chapter 4.9.1, "Using Power
Sensors", on page 511.

3. Select the "External Power Trigger" option.
4. Enter the power level at which the measurement is to be triggered ("External Trig-
ger Level").
5. Enter the minimum power difference that should occur between two trigger events
("Hysteresis").
6. Enter the minimum time that should pass between two trigger events ("Holdoff").
7. Enter the minimum time the signal should remain beneath the trigger level before
the next trigger event occurs ("Dropout").
8. Select whether the measurement is triggered on a rising (positive) or falling (nega-

tive) edge ("Slope").
9. Press the TRIG key on the front panel of the instrument to display the "Trigger"
menu.
10. Press the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey.
11. Select the "Power Sensor" softkey.
12. If necessary, configure the "Gate Settings" to define a gated sweep (see Chap-
ter 4.2.9.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 245).
The "Gate Mode" Lvl is not supported for R&S power sensors. The trigger impulse sent
by these sensors is not long enough to be used as a level for the gated sweep.
The R&S FSVA/FSV is configured to trigger when the defined conditions for the power
sensor occur. Power measurement results are provided as usual.
4.9.4 Softkeys of the Power Sensor Menu (R&S FSV-K9)
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Power Sensor" menu. It is pos-
sible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is
delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
For details on how to configure and activate power sensors, see Chapter 4.9.1, "Using
Power Sensors", on page 511.
Power Sensor On/Off.................................................................................................. 515
Power Sensor Config.................................................................................................. 516
Power Sensor Assignment..........................................................................................516
Continuous Value Update........................................................................................... 516
Power Sensor On/Off

Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off. Note that in addition
to this general setting, each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually
in the "Power Sensor Configuration" dialog box (see "Power Sensor Config"
on page 516). However, the general setting overrides the individual settings.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer[:STATe] on page 827
Power Sensor Config

Opens the "Power Sensor Configuration" dialog box to configure up to 4 different
power sensors. Each sensor configuration is displayed on a separate tab. The serial
number of the power sensor connected to the instrument and currently assigned to the
displayed configuration is indicated on the tab.
Power Sensor Assignment

Opens the "Power Sensor Assignment" dialog box to assign the connected power sen-
sors to the configuration sets.
The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are
provided in a selection list. For each of the four available power sensor indexes
("Power Sensor 1"..."Power Sensor 4"), which correspond to the tabs in the configura-
tion dialog, one of the detected serial numbers can be assigned. The physical sensor is
thus assigned to the configuration setting for the selected power sensor index.
By default, serial numbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned to the next free
power sensor index for which "Auto Assignment" is selected.
Alternatively, you can assign the sensors manually by deactivating the "Auto Assign-
ment" option and selecting a serial number from the list.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:DEFine on page 876
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:CONFigure:AUTO[:STATe]
on page 877
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:COUNt? on page 878
Continuous Value Update

If activated, the power sensor data is updated continuously even after a single sweep
has completed. For continuous sweeps this setting is irrelevant.
This function cannot be activated for individual sensors; if you change the setting for
one sensor, it is automatically applied to all sensors.
If the power sensor is being used as a trigger (see "Power Sensor" on page 240), con-
tinuous update is not possible; this setting is ignored.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:UPDate[:STATe] on page 833

4.9.5 Power Sensor Configuration Dialog
Power sensors are configured in the "Power Sensor Configuration" dialog box, which is
displayed when you select the "Power Sensor Config" softkey in the "Power Sensor"
menu.
Up to 4 different power sensors can be configured. Each sensor configuration is dis-
played on a separate tab. The serial number of the power sensor connected to the
instrument and currently assigned to the displayed configuration is indicated on the
tab.
For details on how to configure and activate power sensors, see Chapter 4.9.1, "Using
Power Sensors", on page 511.
Select
If enabled, the power sensor is evaluated when power measurement is activated.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer[:STATe] on page 827
Zeroing Power Sensor

Starts zeroing of the power sensor. For details on the zeroing process refer to Chap-
ter 4.9.2, "Zeroing the Power Sensor", on page 512 .
Remote command:
CALibration:PMETer:ZERO:AUTO ONCE on page 736
Frequency Manual
The frequency of the signal to be measured. The power sensor has a memory with fre-
quency-dependent correction factors. This allows extreme accuracy for signals of a
known frequency.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:FREQuency on page 828
Frequency Coupling
If enabled, the frequency is coupled to the center frequency of the instrument or to the
frequency of marker 1 automatically.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:FREQuency:LINK on page 828
Unit / Scale
Select the unit with which the measured power is to be displayed. Available units are
dBm, dB, W and %.
If dB or % is selected, the display is relative to a reference value that is defined either
by the measurement (Meas -> Ref) or the value in the Reference Value field.
Remote command:
UNIT<n>:PMETer:POWer on page 903
UNIT<n>:PMETer:POWer:RATio on page 904
Meas Time / Average

Selects the measurement time or switches to manual averaging mode. In general,
results are more precise with longer measurement times. The following settings are
recommended for different signal types to obtain stable and precise results:
Short Stationary signals with high power (> -40dBm), because they require only a short mea-
surement time and short measurement time provides the highest repetition rates.
Normal Signals with lower power or of modulated signals
Long Signals at the lower end of the measurement range (<-50 dBm) or
signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise.
Manual Switches to manual averaging mode. The average count is defined by the "Number of
Readings" on page 519 value.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe on page 829
[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe:AVERage[:STATe] on page 829
Duty Cycle
Sets the duty cycle to a percentage for the correction of pulse-modulated signals and
activates the duty cycle correction. If enabled, the sensor calculates the signal pulse
power from this value and the mean power.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:DCYCle:STATe on page 827
[SENSe:]PMETer:DCYCle:VALue on page 828
Meas -> Ref

Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display. The
reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO ONCE on page 721
Reference Value
Defines the reference value for relative measurements in the unit dBm.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude] on page 721
Use Ref Level Offset

If activated, takes the reference level offset set for the analyzer (Ref Level Offset soft-
key) into account for the measured power.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:ROFFset[:STATe] on page 830
Number of Readings
Defines the number of readings (averagings) to be performed after a single sweep has
been started. This setting is only available if manual averaging is selected (Meas
Time / Average setting).
The values for the average count range from 0 to 256 in binary steps (1, 2, 4, 8, …).
For average count = 0 or 1, one reading is performed. The averaging and sweep count
of the "Trace" menu are independent from this setting.
Results become more stable with extended averaging, particularly if signals with low
power are measured. This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the
power sensor measurement.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe:AVERage:COUNt on page 830
External Power Trigger

Activates the creation of a trigger signal in the power sensor.
For details see Figure 4-47.
For supported power sensors see the data sheet or Chapter 4.9.3, "Configuring an
External Power Trigger", on page 513.
When you select this option, the following settings in the configuration dialog become
unavailable:
● Unit/Scale
● Reference Value
● Use Ref Lev Offset
● Number of Readings
The following trigger settings become available.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger[:STATe] on page 831
Selecting this option causes the transmission of the following remote commands to the
power sensor:
*RST
SENS:AVER:STAT OFF
TRIG:MAST:STAT ON

TRIG:SOUR INT
TRIG:SLOP POS
TRIG:DTIM 100e-6
INIT:CONT ON
External Trigger Level ← External Power Trigger

Defines the trigger level for the external power trigger.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:LEVel on page 832
Hysteresis ← External Power Trigger

Defines the value for the trigger hysteresis. The hysteresis in dB is the value the input
signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the
measurement. The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1
dB.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:HYSTeresis on page 832
Holdoff ← External Power Trigger

Defines the holdoff value in s, which is the time which must pass before triggering, in
case another trigger event happens.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:HOLDoff on page 831
Dropout ← External Power Trigger

Defines the time the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to
allow a trigger to start the measurement. The range of the value is between 0 s and 1 s
with a step width of 100 ns.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:DTIMe on page 831
Slope ← External Power Trigger

Defines whether the sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal.
The default setting is "Pos".
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:SLOPe on page 833
4.9.6 Error Messages
Error messages are entered in the error/event queue of the status reporting system in
the remote control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem:ERRor?.
A short explanation of the device-specific error messages for R&S FSV-K9 is given
below.

Instrument Functions - Spectrogram Measurements
Status bar message Description
Zeroing could not be per- Zeroing could not be performed because the RF power applied is too
formed high.
Power sensor zero failed
4.10 Instrument Functions - Spectrogram Measurements

Equipped with the firmware option R&S FSV-K14, the R&S FSVA/FSV provides a
graphical overview of changes in frequency and amplitude over a specified period of
time.
Not all measurement types available in spectrum mode can be displayed in the "Spec-
trogram" result display. If the "Spectrogram Measurement" option is active and a mea-
surement cannot be displayed in form of a spectrogram, the softkey of the correspond-
ing measurement is disabled.
All settings of the base unit are also valid for the spectrogram view and vice versa.
The following chapter describes the instrument functions specific to "Spectrogram"
measurements.
To open the Spectrogram view

The "Spectrogram" result display and its softkey menu is part of the "Trace" menu of
the base unit.
1. Press the TRACE key.
2. Press the "Spectrogram" softkey.

The menu for the "Spectrogram" result display opens.
Menus and Softkeys

The main menu for the "Spectrogram" result display is part of the "Trace" menu of the
base unit and is described in Chapter 4.10.2, "Softkeys of the Spectrogram Menu",
on page 525.
Furthermore, some special "Spectrogram" functions are included in the "Sweep" menu,
see Chapter 4.2.7.1, "Softkeys of the Sweep Menu", on page 213.
The "ASCII Trace Export" softkey stores the data for all frames in the history buffer of
the spectrogram to a file. See Chapter 4.10.4, "ASCII File Export Format for Spectro-
grams", on page 531 for details.
Marker functions
The functions in the "Marker" menu (MKR key) are the same as for the base unit (see
Chapter 4.3.1.1, "Softkeys of the Marker Menu", on page 250). However, note the
slightly different behavior as described in Chapter 4.10.1, "General Information",
on page 522.

Tasks
● Chapter 4.10.3, "Configuring Color Settings for Spectrograms", on page 526
Remote Operation
Remote commands for "Spectrogram" measurements are included in the following
subsystems:
● "CALCulate:DELTamarker:SGRam subsystem" on page 619
● "CALCulate:MARKer:SGRam subsystem" on page 697
● "CALCulate:SGRam Subsystem" on page 724
● Chapter 5.3.4.7, "MMEMory Subsystem", on page 928
4.10.1 General Information.................................................................................................... 522
4.10.2 Softkeys of the Spectrogram Menu.............................................................................525
4.10.3 Configuring Color Settings for Spectrograms..............................................................526
4.10.3.1 Selecting the Color Scheme........................................................................................526
4.10.3.2 Defining the Value Range of the Color Map................................................................527
4.10.3.3 Defining the Shape and Focus of the Color Curve......................................................528
4.10.3.4 Color Mapping Dialog..................................................................................................530
4.10.4 ASCII File Export Format for Spectrograms................................................................531
4.10.1 General Information
This section provides some basic information about using the firmware application and
about performing measurements with the firmware application.
Screen Layout
The Spectrogram view is divided into two screens: the spectrum analyzer result display
(upper screen) and the spectrogram result display (lower screen).

Figure 4-48: Screen layout of the spectrogram result display
1 = Spectrum result display

2 = Spectrogram result display
3 = Frame indicator
4 = Time stamp / frame number
5 = Color map
6 = Marker
7 = Deltamarker
8 = Marker list
● Spectrum Analyzer result display (1 in Figure 4-48)

This result display is the same as the Spectrum Analyzer with the x-axis represent-
ing the frequency span or time (span = 0) and the y-axis the power level. Configure
and use this display in the same way as you would in Spectrum Analyzer mode.
All traces are available and you can view those traces just like in the base unit (see
Chapter 4.2.8.4, "Trace Mode Overview", on page 231). The trace modes View and
Blank are not available for trace 1.
While performing a measurement the trace is updated continuously. You can also
restore the trace to a point that has already been recorded by selecting a specific
frame (see "Select Frame" on page 217). This is possible in Single Sweep mode or
if the sweep has been stopped.
● Spectrogram result display (2)
The data displayed in the Spectrogram is always based on the data of trace 1 in
the Spectrum Analyzer result display. The Spectrogram can handle measurements
in the frequency domain (span > 0) as well as measurements in the time domain
(span = 0)
The Spectrogram is a cartesian diagram. The x-axis shows the power distribution
of a measured signal over a specified frequency or time range. Different power lev-
els are displayed in different colors. The y-axis represents the time with the top of
the diagram being the current timeframe (the measurement runs from top to bot-
tom). Each line (or trace) of the y-axis represents one captured frame. The frames
are sorted in chronological order. One frame is equal to a certain number of sweep
points, depending on the dimension of the x-axis. If there are more measurement

values than measurement points, several measured values are combined in one
measurement point using the selected detector (see Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector
Overview", on page 233). Frames are sorted in chronological order, beginning with
the most recently recorded frame or frame number 0 at the top of the diagram.
After that and below frame 0 is the frame recorded before the current frame (frame
-1) and so on until the maximum number of captured frames is reached. The maxi-
mum number of frames that you can capture is summarized in the table below (see
Table 4-22. A marker in the form of an arrow (3) on the left and right border of the
Spectrogram indicates the currently selected frame.
The actual number of the currently selected frame is shown below the diagram (4).
If the time stamp is active, the R&S FSVA/FSV shows the time stamp instead of
the frame number (see Time Stamp (On Off).
Below the diagram there is also a color map (5) that shows the power levels corre-
sponding to the displayed colors. The minimum value of the y-axis is on the left of
the color map. The maximum value is on the right of the map. You can also change
the color scheme in use (see Color Mapping. The colors corresponding to the
power levels, however, are always assigned automatically.
Markers and deltamarkers (6) (7) take the form of diamonds in the Spectrogram.
They are only displayed in the Spectrogram, if the marker position is inside the visi-
ble area of the spectrogram. If more than two markers are active, it is possible to
display a Marker Table at the bottom of the display (8).
Table 4-22: Correlation between number of sweep points and number of frames stored in the history
buffer
Sweep Points Max. History Depth
≤1250 20000
2001 12488
4001 6247
8.001 3124
16.001 1562
32.001 781
Markers and Marker Values

In the Spectrum Analyzer result display, the markers and their frequency and level val-
ues (1) are displayed in the marker field just like in the base unit (see Chapter 4.3.1,
"Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key", on page 249). In addition to the base
unit functionality, the frame number is displayed to indicate the position of the marker
in time (2).
In the Spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or deltamarkers at

the same time. Any marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in addition
to the frequency (1) you can set the frame number (2) when activating a new marker. If
no frame number is specified, the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame.

In the Spectrogram result display all markers are visible that are positioned on a visible
frame.
In the Spectrum Analyzer result display, only the markers positioned on the currently
selected frame are visible. In Continuous Sweep mode this means that only markers
positioned on frame 0 are visible. To view markers that are positioned on a frame other
than frame 0 in the Spectrum Analyzer result display, it is necessary to stop the mea-
surement and select the corresponding frame.
4.10.2 Softkeys of the Spectrogram Menu
The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the "Spectrogram" menu. It is
delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
To display the "Spectrogram" menu, press the TRACE key and then select the "Spec-
togram" softkey.
Spectrogram................................................................................................................525
└ Spectrogram (On Off)................................................................................... 525
└ History Depth................................................................................................ 525
└ Color Mapping...............................................................................................526
└ Time Stamp (On Off).....................................................................................526
└ Clear Spectrogram........................................................................................526
Spectrogram
Opens the submenu for the spectrogram view.
Spectrogram (On Off) ← Spectrogram

Activates and deactivates the Spectrogram result display
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe] on page 727
History Depth ← Spectrogram

Sets the number of frames that the R&S FSVA/FSV stores in its memory. The maxi-
mum number of frames depends on the Sweep Points (see Chapter 4.10.1, "General
Information", on page 522).
If the memory is full, the R&S FSVA/FSV deletes the oldest frames stored in the mem-
ory and replaces them with the new data.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth on page 726

Color Mapping ← Spectrogram

Displays the "Color Mapping" dialog box to configure the display of the spectrogram
(assignment of colors to power levels).
For details see Chapter 4.10.3, "Configuring Color Settings for Spectrograms",
on page 526.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:COLor on page 724
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:LOWer on page 745
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:UPPer on page 746
Time Stamp (On Off) ← Spectrogram

Activates and deactivates the time stamp. The time stamp shows the system time
while the measurement is running. In single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped,
the time stamp shows the time and date of the end of the sweep.
When active, the time stamp replaces the display of the frame number.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe] on page 727
Clear Spectrogram ← Spectrogram

Resets the Spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate] on page 724
4.10.3 Configuring Color Settings for Spectrograms
Spectrograms assign power levels to different colors in order to visualize them. The
color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs. You can
define:
● Which colors to use (Color scheme, see "Hot/Cold/Radar/Grayscale"
on page 531)
● Which value range to apply the color scheme to (see Chapter 4.10.3.2, "Defining
the Value Range of the Color Map", on page 527)
● How the colors are distributed within the value range, i.e where the focus of the vis-
ualization lies (shape of the color curve, see Chapter 4.10.3.3, "Defining the Shape
and Focus of the Color Curve", on page 528)
4.10.3.1 Selecting the Color Scheme........................................................................................526
4.10.3.2 Defining the Value Range of the Color Map................................................................527
4.10.3.3 Defining the Shape and Focus of the Color Curve......................................................528
4.10.3.4 Color Mapping Dialog..................................................................................................530
4.10.3.1 Selecting the Color Scheme
You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values. Four different color
ranges or "schemes" are available:

● Hot
Uses a color range from blue to red. Blue colors indicate low levels, red colors indi-
cate high ones.
● Cold
Uses a color range from red to blue. Red colors indicate low levels, blue colors
indicate high ones.
The "Cold" color scheme is the inverse "Hot" color scheme.
● Radar
Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in
between. Dark colors indicate low levels, light colors indicate high ones.
● Grayscale
Shows the results in shades of gray. Dark gray indicates low levels, light gray indi-
cates high ones.
To select a color scheme

1. Tap the color map in the spectrogram display, or select the "Color Mapping" Soft-
key in the "Spectrogram" menu.
2. In the "Color Mapping" dialog box, select the option for the color scheme to be
used.
4.10.3.2 Defining the Value Range of the Color Map
If the measured values only cover a small area in the spectrogram, you can optimize
the displayed value range so it becomes easier to distinguish between values that are
close together, and only parts of interest are displayed at all.
The distribution of the measured values is displayed as a histogram in the "Color Map-
ping" dialog box (see Figure 4-51). To cover the entire measurement value range,
make sure the first and last bar of the histogram are included. To remove noise from
the display, exclude the bottom 10 or 20 dB of the histogram.
The value range of the color map must cover at least 10% of the value range on the
horizontal axis of the diagram.
The value range can be set numerically or graphically.

To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders
key in the "Spectrogram" menu to display the "Color Mapping" dialog box.
2. Select and drag the bottom color curve slider (indicated by a gray box at the left of
the color curve pane) to the lowest value you want to include in the color mapping.
3. Select and drag the top color curve slider (indicated by a gray box at the right of
the color curve pane) to the highest value you want to include in the color mapping.
To set the value range numerically

2. In the "Start" field, enter the percentage from the left border of the histogram that
marks the beginning of the value range.
3. In the "Stop" field, enter the percentage from the right border of the histogram that
marks the end of the value range.
Example:
The color map starts at -100 dBm and ends at 0 dBm (i.e. a range of 100 dB). In order
to suppress the noise, you only want the color map to start at -90 dBm. Thus, you enter
10% in the "Start" field. The R&S FSVA/FSV shifts the start point 10% to the right, to
-90 dBm.
Adjusting the reference level and level range

Note that changing the reference level and level range of the measurement also affects
the color mapping in the spectrogram.
4.10.3.3 Defining the Shape and Focus of the Color Curve
The color mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the
spectrogram display. By default, colors on the color map are distributed evenly, i.e. the
color range is applied to the value range linearly. However, if a certain area of the

value range is to be visualized in greater detail than the rest, you can set the focus of
the color mapping to that area. Changing the focus is performed by changing the
shape of the color curve.
The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map. By
default, the color curve is linear, i.e. the colors on the color map are distributed evenly.
If you shift the curve to the left or right, the distribution becomes non-linear. The slope
of the color curve increases or decreases. One end of the color palette then covers a
large amount of results, while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively
small result range.
You can use this feature to put the focus on a particular region in the diagram and to
be able to detect small variations of the signal.
Example:
Figure 4-49: Linear color curve shape = 0; colors are distributed evenly over the complete result
range
In the color map based on the linear color curve, the range from -105.5 dBm to -60
dBm is covered by blue and a few shades of green only. The range from -60 dBm to
-20 dBm is covered by red, yellow and a few shades of green.
Figure 4-50: Non-linear color curve shape = -0.5
After shifting the color curve to the left (negative value), more colors cover the range
from -105.5 dBm to -60 dBm (blue, green and yellow). The range from -60 dBm to -20
dBm on the other hand is dominated by various shades of red, but no other colors.
The color curve shape can be set numerically or graphically.
To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider

2. Select and drag the color curve shape slider (indicated by a gray box in the middle
of the color curve) to the left or right. The area beneath the slider is focussed, i.e.
more colors are distributed there.
To set the color curve shape numerically

2. In the "Shape" field, enter a value to change the shape of the curve:
● A negative value (-1 to <0) focusses the lower values
● 0 defines a linear distribution

● A positive value (>0 to 1) focusses the higher values
4.10.3.4 Color Mapping Dialog
The Color Mapping dialog box is displayed when you press the "Color Mapping" soft-
key in the "Spectrogram" menu, or tap the color map in the Spectrogram display.
In addition to the available color settings, the dialog box displays the current color map
and provides a preview of the display with the current settings.
Figure 4-51: Color Mapping dialog box
1 = Color map: shows the current color distribution

2 = Preview pane: shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color scheme
3 = Color curve pane: graphical representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme
4 = Color curve in its linear form
5 = Color range start and stop sliders: define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram
6 = Color curve slider: adjusts the focus of the color curve
7 = Histogram: shows the distribution of measured values
8 = Scale of the horizontal axis (value range)
Start
Defines the lower boundary of the value range of the spectrogram.
For details on defining the value range see Chapter 4.10.3.2, "Defining the Value
Range of the Color Map", on page 527.
Remote command:
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:LOWer on page 745

Shape
Defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display.
For details see Chapter 4.10.3.3, "Defining the Shape and Focus of the Color Curve",
on page 528.
"-1 to <0" More colors are distributed amoung the lower values
"0" Colors are distributed linearly amoung the values
">0 to 1" More colors are distributed amoung the higher values
Remote command:
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe on page 746
Stop
Defines the upper boundary of the value range of the spectrogram.
For details on defining the value range see Chapter 4.10.3.2, "Defining the Value
Range of the Color Map", on page 527.
Remote command:
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:UPPer on page 746
Hot/Cold/Radar/Grayscale
Sets the color scheme for the spectrogram. For details see Chapter 4.10.3.1, "Select-
ing the Color Scheme", on page 526
Remote command:
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe] on page 746
Auto
Defines the color range automatically according to the existing measured values for
optimized display.
Set to Default
Sets the color mapping to the default settings.
Remote command:
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:DEFault on page 745
Close
Closes the dialog box and adapts the display to the defined color settings.
4.10.4 ASCII File Export Format for Spectrograms
If the spectrogram display is selected when you select the "ASCII Trace Export" soft-
key, the entire histogram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data corre-
sponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the
time that frame was recorded.
The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a semicolon:
parameter name; numeric value; basic unit. The data section starts with the keyword
"Trace <n>" (<n> = number of stored trace), followed by the measured data in one or

several columns (depending on measurement) which are also separated by a semico-

lon.
File contents: header Description
Type;R&S FSVA/FSV; Instrument model
Date;01.Oct 2006; Date of data set storage
Mode;ANALYZER;SPECTROGRAM Instrument mode
Center Freq;55000;Hz Center frequency
Freq Offset;0;Hz Frequency offset
Span;90000;Hz Frequency range (0 Hz in zero span and statistics measure-

ments)
x-Axis;LIN; Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
Start;10000;Hz Start/stop of the display range.

Stop;100000;Hz Unit: Hz for span > 0, s for span = 0, dBm/dB for statistics mea-
surements
Ref Level;-30;dBm Reference level
Level Offset;0;dB Level offset
Ref Position;75; % Position of reference level referred to diagram limits (0 % =

lower edge)
y-Axis;LOG; Scaling of y-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
Level Range;100;dB Display range in y direction. Unit: dB with x-axis LOG, % with x-
axis LIN
Rf Att;20;dB Input attenuation
RBW;100000;Hz Resolution bandwidth
VBW;30000;Hz Video bandwidth
SWT;0.005;s Sweep time
Trace Mode;AVERAGE; Display mode of trace: CLR/WRITE,AVER-

AGE,MAXHOLD,MINHOLD
Detector;AUTOPEAK; Detector set: AUTOPEAK,MAXPEAK,MINPEAK,AVER-

AGE,RMS,SAMPLE,QUASIPEAK
Sweep Count;20; Number of sweeps set
File contents: Description

data section of the file
Trace 1:;; Selected trace
x-Unit;Hz; Unit of x values: Hz with span > 0; s with span = 0; dBm/dB

with statistics measurements
y-Unit;dBm; Unit of y values: dB*/V/A/W depending on the selected unit

with y-axis LOG or % with y-axis LIN

File contents: Description

data section of the file
Values; 691; Number of measurement points
Frames;2; Number of exported frames
Frame;0; Most recent frame number
Timestamp;17.Mar 11;11:27:05.990 Timestamp of this frame
10000;-10.3;-15.7 Measured values, identical to spectrum data:

10130;-11.5;-16.9 <x value>, <y1>, <y2>; <y2> being available only with detector
AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two
10360;-12.0;-17.4
measured values for a measurement point.
...;...;
Frame;-1; Next frame
Timestamp;17.Mar 11;11:27:05.342 Timestamp of this frame
...

R&S® FSVA/FSV Remote Control
5 Remote Control
This chapter describes how to control the R&S FSVA/FSV via a remote computer.
After an introduction to the basic principles of remote control, the individual commands
are described in detail. At the end of this chapter, some helpful programming examples
are provided.
Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions

Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions:
● Command usage
If not specified otherwise, commands can be used both for setting and for querying
parameters.
If a command can be used for setting or querying only, or if it initiates an event, the
usage is stated explicitly.
● Parameter usage
If not specified otherwise, a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the
result of a query.
Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters.
Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters.
Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return
values.
● Conformity
Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con-
firmed. All commands used by the R&S FSVA/FSV follow the SCPI syntax rules.
● Asynchronous commands
A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com-
mand starts executing (overlapping command) is indicated as an Asynchronous
command.
● Reset values (*RST)
Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument (*RST
command) are indicated as *RST values, if available.
● Default unit
This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame-
ter.
● Manual operation
If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation, a link
to the description is inserted.
5.1 Remote Control - Basics.......................................................................................... 536
5.1.1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols................................................................... 536
5.1.2 Starting a Remote Control Session.............................................................................546
5.1.3 Returning to Manual Operation................................................................................... 547
5.1.4 SCPI Command Structure...........................................................................................547
5.1.5 Command Sequence and Synchronization.................................................................555

5.1.6 Status Reporting System............................................................................................ 557

5.1.7 General Programming Recommendations..................................................................572
5.1.8 The IECWIN Tool........................................................................................................ 573
5.2 Controlling the R&S FSVA/FSV Remotely.............................................................. 574
5.2.1 Operation with Windows Remote Desktop .................................................................574
5.2.2 Operation with a VNC Client....................................................................................... 581
5.2.3 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols................................................................... 582
5.2.4 Configuring the GPIB Interface................................................................................... 584
5.2.5 Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection.....................................................................585
5.2.6 How to Configure the LAN Using the LXI Web Browser Interface.............................. 590
5.2.7 Configuring the Network..............................................................................................593
5.3 Remote Control – Commands..................................................................................596
5.3.1 Notation.......................................................................................................................597
5.3.2 Common Commands.................................................................................................. 599
5.3.3 Remote Control – Description of Analyzer Commands...............................................604
5.3.4 Remote Control – Description of Measurement-Independant Commands................. 906
5.3.5 GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E.................... 966
5.3.6 Reference: Command Set of Emulated PSA Models..................................................996
5.4 Remote Control – Programming Examples.......................................................... 1000
5.4.1 Service Request........................................................................................................1002
5.4.2 Using Marker and Delta Marker................................................................................ 1010
5.4.3 Limit Lines and Limit Test......................................................................................... 1012
5.4.4 Measuring the Channel and Adjacent Channel Power............................................. 1014
5.4.5 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement.......................................................................... 1017
5.4.6 Time Domain Power Measurement...........................................................................1018
5.4.7 Fast Power Measurement on Power Ramps............................................................ 1019
5.4.8 Fast Level Measurement Using Frequency Lists...................................................... 1022
5.4.9 Level Correction of Transducers............................................................................... 1024
5.4.10 Measuring the Magnitude and Phase of a Signal..................................................... 1025
5.4.11 Reading and Writing Files......................................................................................... 1027
5.4.12 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement...................................................................1028
5.4.13 Spurious Emissions Measurement............................................................................1032

Remote Control - Basics
5.4.14 Averaging I/Q Data....................................................................................................1035

5.4.15 Using IQ Gating.........................................................................................................1036
5.4.16 Usage of Four Spectrum Instances...........................................................................1041
5.1 Remote Control - Basics

This chapter provides basic information on operating an instrument via remote control.
The computer that is used for remote operation is called "controller" here.
For hints and tricks on remote control of spectrum analyzers see the Rohde & Schwarz
Application Note 1EF62.
5.1.1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
The instrument supports different interfaces for remote control. The following table
gives an overview.

Table 5-1: Remote control interfaces and protocols
Interface Protocols, VISA*) Remarks

address string
Local Area Protocols: A LAN connector is located on the rear panel of the instrument.
Network ● HiSLIP High-Speed
The interface is based on TCP/IP and supports various proto-
(LAN) LAN Instrument
cols.
Protocol (IVI-6.1)
TCPIP:: For a description of the protocols refer to:
host address:: ● HiSLIP Protocol
hislip0[:: ● "VXI-11 Protocol" on page 540
INSTR] ● Socket Communication
● VXI-11 ● "RSIB Protocol" on page 541
● socket communi- ● "Telnet Protocol" on page 542
cation (Raw Ether-
net, simple Telnet)
TCPIP::
host address[::
LAN device name]:
:<port>::SOCKET
Library: VISA or
socketcontroller
● RSIB
● simple telnet (Raw
Ethernet)
VISA*) address string:
TCPIP::host
address[::LAN device
name][::INSTR]
GPIB (IEC/ VISA*) address string: A GPIB bus interface according to the IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.1
IEEE Bus standard is located on the rear panel of the instrument.
GPIB::primary
Interface)
address[::INSTR] For a description of the interface refer to Chapter 5.1.1.4,
"GPIB Interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 Bus Interface)",
(no secondary address)
on page 542.
*)VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate
with instruments. A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control using the indica-
ted interfaces (see also Chapter 5.1.1.1, "VISA Libraries", on page 538).
Within this interface description, the term GPIB is used as a synonym for the IEC/IEEE
bus interface.
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)

SCPI commands - messages - are used for remote control. Commands that are not
taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules. The instrument supports
the SCPI version 1999. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims
at the standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and the status reg-
isters. The tutorial "Automatic Measurement Control - A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE
488.2" from John M. Pieper (R&S order number 0002.3536.00) offers detailed informa-
tion on concepts and definitions of SCPI.
The requirements that the SCPI standard places on command syntax, error handling
and configuration of the status registers are explained in detail in the following sec-

tions. Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers. The
tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers.
5.1.1.1 VISA Libraries
VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to
communicate with instruments. The I/O channel (LAN or TCP/IP, USB, GPIB,...) is
selected at initialization time by means of the channel–specific address string ("VISA
resource string") indicated in Table 5-1, or by an appropriately defined VISA alias
(short name). A VISA installation is a prerequisite for remote control using the VXI-11,
raw socket, RSIB or the newer HiSLIP protocol. The necessary VISA library is availa-
ble as a separate product. For details contact your local R&S sales representative.
For more information on VISA refer to the user documentation.
5.1.1.2 Messages
The messages transferred on the data lines are divided into the following categories:
● Interface messages
Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the
attention line being active (LOW). They are used to communicate between the con-
troller and the instrument. Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that
have GPIB bus functionality. For details see the sections for the required interface.
● Instrument messages
Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces, if not indica-
ted otherwise in the description. Structure and syntax of the instrument messages
are described in Chapter 5.1.4, "SCPI Command Structure", on page 547. A
detailed description of all messages available for the instrument is provided in the
chapter "Remote Control Commands".
There are different types of instrument messages, depending on the direction they
are sent:
– Commands
– Instrument responses
Commands
Commands (program messages) are messages the controller sends to the instrument.
They operate the instrument functions and request information. The commands are
subdivided according to two criteria:
● According to the effect they have on the instrument:
– Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instru-
ment or setting the frequency.
– Queries cause data to be provided for remote control, e.g. for identification of
the instrument or polling a parameter value. Queries are formed by directly
appending a question mark to the command header.
● According to their definition in standards:

– Common commands: their function and syntax are precisely defined in stan-
dard IEEE 488.2. They are employed identically on all instruments (if imple-
mented). They refer to functions such as management of the standardized sta-
tus registers, reset and self-test.
– Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of
the instrument such as frequency settings. Many of these commands have also
been standardized by the SCPI committee. These commands are marked as
"SCPI confirmed" in the command reference chapters. Commands without this
SCPI label are device-specific; however, their syntax follows SCPI rules as per-
mitted by the standard.
Instrument responses
Instrument responses (response messages and service requests) are messages the
instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can contain measurement
results, instrument settings and information on the instrument status.
5.1.1.3 LAN Interface
To be integrated in a LAN, the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface, consisting

of a connector, a network interface card and protocols. The network card can be oper-
ated with a 10 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802.3 or a 100 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802.3u inter-
face. For remote control via a network, the PC and the instrument must be connected
via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP/IP network protocol. They are
connected using a commercial RJ45 cable (shielded or unshielded twisted pair cate-
gory 5). The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are precon-
figured on the instrument. Software for instrument control and the VISA program library
must be installed on the controller.
VISA library
Instrument access via VXI-11 or RSIB protocols is usually achieved from high level
programming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer. VISA encap-
sulates the low level VXI, RSIB or even GPIB function calls and thus makes the trans-
port interface transparent for the user. See Chapter 5.1.1.1, "VISA Libraries",
on page 538 for details.
IP address
Only the IP address or a valid DNS host name is required to set up the connection.
The host address is part of the "VISA resource string" used by the programs to identify
and control the instrument.
The VISA resource string has the form:
TCPIP::host address[::LAN device name][::INSTR]
or
TCPIP::host address::port::SOCKET
where:

● TCPIP designates the network protocol used

● host address is the IP address or host name of the device
● LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a sub-instru-
ment;
– inst0 selects the VXI-11 protocol (default)
– hislip0 selects the newer HiSLIP protocol
● INSTR indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
● port determines the used port number
● SOCKET indicates the raw network socket resource class
Example:
● Instrument has the IP address 192.1.2.3; the valid resource string using VXI-11
protocol is:
TCPIP::192.1.2.3::INSTR
● The instrument name is RSFSV; the valid resource string is:
TCPIP::RSFSV::INSTR
● A raw socket connection can be established using:
TCPIP::192.1.2.3::5025::SOCKET
● The DNS host name name is FSV-123456; the valid resource string using HiSLIP
is:
TCPIP::FSV-123456::hislip0
Identifying instruments in a network

If several instruments are connected to the network, each instrument has its own IP
address and associated resource string. The controller identifies these instruments by
means of the resource string.
For details on configuring the LAN connection, see "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Con-
nection" in the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide.
VXI-11 Protocol
The VXI-11 standard is based on the ONC RPC (Open Network Computing Remote
Procedure Call) protocol which in turn relies on TCP/IP as the network/transport layer.
The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured.
TCP/IP ensures connection-oriented communication, where the order of the
exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified. With this proto-
col, messages cannot be lost.
HiSLIP Protocol
The HiSLIP (High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol) is the successor protocol for
VXI-11 for TCP-based instruments specified by the IVI foundation. The protocol uses
two TCP sockets for a single connection - one for fast data transfer, the other for non-
sequential control commands (e.g. Device Clear or SRQ).
HiSLIP has the following characteristics:

● High performance as with raw socket network connections

● Compatible IEEE 488.2 support for Message Exchange Protocol, Device Clear,
Serial Poll, Remote/Local, Trigger, and Service Request
● Uses a single IANA registered port (4880), which simplifies the configuration of fire-
walls
● Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locking
mechanisms
● Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks
Using VXI-11, each operation is blocked until a VXI-11 device handshake returns.
However, using HiSLIP, data is sent to the device using the "fire and forget" method
with immediate return. Thus, a successful return of a VISA operation such as
viWrite() does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the reques-
ted command, but is delivered to the TCP/IP buffers.
For more information see also the application note:

1MA208: Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP
Socket Communication
An alternative way for remote control of the software is to establish a simple network
communication using sockets. The socket communication, also referred to as "Raw
Ethernet communication", does not necessarily require a VISA installation on the
remote controller side. It is available by default on all operating systems.
The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built-in telnet pro-
gram. The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communi-
cation with the software on a command-by-command basis. For more convenience and
to enable automation by means of programs, user-defined sockets can be program-
med.
Socket connections are established on a specially defined port. The socket address is
a combination of the IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of
the port configured for remote-control. All R&S FSVA/FSV use port number 5025 for
this purpose. The port is configured for communication on a command-to-command
basis and for remote control from a program.
RSIB Protocol
The R&S defined RSIB protocol uses the TCP/IP protocol for communication with the
instrument. Remote control over RSIB is done on a message level basis using the
SCPI command set of the instrument. The RSIB protocol allows you to control the
instrument for example via Visual C++- and Visual Basic programs, via the Windows
applications Word and Excel, as well as via National Instruments LabView, LabWind-
ows/CVI, Agilent VEE and others. The control applications run on an external computer
in the network.

RSIB Interface Functions

The library functions are adapted to the interface functions of National Instruments for
GPIB programming. The functions supported by the libraries are listed in the following
table.
Function Description
RSDLLibfind() Provides a handle for access to a device.
RSDLLibwrt() Sends a zero-terminated string to a device.
RSDLLilwrt() Sends a certain number of bytes to a device.
RSDLLibwrtf() Sends the contents of a file to a device.
RSDLLibrd() Reads data from a device into a string.
RSDLLilrd() Reads a certain number of bytes from a device.
RSDLLibrdf() Reads data from a device into a file.
RSDLLibtmo() Sets timeout for RSIB functions.
RSDLLibsre() Switches a device to the local or remote state.
RSDLLibloc() Temporarily switches a device to the local state.
RSDLLibeot() Enables/disables the END message for write operations.
RSDLLibrsp() Performs a serial poll and provides the status byte.
RSDLLibonl() Sets the device online/offline.
RSDLLTestSrq() Checks whether a device has generated an SRQ.
RSDLLWaitSrq() Waits until a device generates an SRQ.
RSDLLSwapBytes Swaps the byte sequence for binary numericdisplay (only required for
non-Intel platforms).
Telnet Protocol
As an alternative to remote control the instrument can use a simple telnet protocol (port
5025). Unlike using the VXI-11 protocol, no VISA installation is necessary on the
remote controller side. This protocol is sometimes also referred to as "socket communi-
cation" or "Raw Ethernet mode". To control the instrument, only a Telnet program is
required. The Telnet program is part of every operating system.
5.1.1.4 GPIB Interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 Bus Interface)
To be able to control the instrument via the GPIB bus, the instrument and the controller
must be linked by a GPIB bus cable. A GPIB bus card, the card drivers and the pro-
gram libraries for the programming language used must be provided in the controller.
The controller must address the instrument with the GPIB bus address (see "GPIB
Instrument Address" on page 545).
Notes and Conditions

In connection with the GPIB interface, note the following:

● Up to 15 instruments can be connected

● The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m or 2 m times the number
of devices, whichever is less; the cable lenth between two instruments should not
exceed 2 m.
● A wired "OR"-connection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel.
● Any connected IEC-bus cables should be terminated by an instrument or controller.
GPIB Interface Messages

Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the atten-
tion line (ATN) being active (LOW). They are used for communication between the
controller and the instrument and can only be sent by a computer which has the func-
tion of a GPIB bus controller. GPIB interface messages can be further subdivided into:
● Universal commands: act on all instruments connected to the GPIB bus without
previous addressing
● Addressed commands: only act on instruments previously addressed as listeners
The following figure provides an overview of the available communication lines used by
the GPIB interface.

Figure 5-1: Communication lines used by the GPIB interface

Universal Commands
Universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex. They affect all
instruments connected to the bus and do not require addressing.
Command Effect on the instrument
DCL (Device Clear) Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the com-
mand processing software to a defined initial state. Does not change the
instrument settings.
IFC (Interface Clear) *) Resets the interfaces to the default setting.
LLO (Local Lockout) The "Local" softkey is disabled. Manual operation is no longer available
until GTL is executed.
SPE (Serial Poll Enable) Ready for serial poll.
SPD (Serial Poll Disable) End of serial poll.
PPU (Parallel Poll Unconfig- End of the parallel-poll state.

ure)
*) IFC is not a real universal command, it is sent via a separate line; however, it also affects all instruments
connected to the bus and does not require addressing
Addressed Commands
Addressed commands are encoded in the range 00 through 0F hex. They only affect
instruments addressed as listeners.
Command Effect on the instrument
GET (Group Execute Trigger) Triggers a previously active instrument function (e.g. a sweep).
The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at
the external trigger signal input.
GTL (Go to Local) Transition to the "local" state (manual control).
REN (Remote Enable) Transition to the "remote" state (remote control).

Transition to the "remote" state (remote control). (Not really an
addressed command, uses a separate line.)
PPC (Parallel Poll Configure) Configures the instrument for parallel poll.
SDC (Selected Device Clear) Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the
command processing software to a defined initial state. Does not
change the instrument setting.
GPIB Instrument Address

In order to operate the instrument via remote control, it must be addressed using the
GPIB address. The remote control address is factory-set to 20, but it can be changed if
it does not fit in the network environment. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30
are allowed. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings.
Setting the GPIB address

1. On the R&S FSVA/FSV, press the SETUP key.

3. Press the "GPIB" softkey.

The submenu for setting the parameters of the remote control interface is dis-
played.
4. Press the "GPIB Address" softkey.

The edit dialog box for the GPIB address is displayed.
5. Enter a value between 0 and 30.
Remote command: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18
5.1.2 Starting a Remote Control Session
When you switch on the instrument, it is always in manual operation state ("local"
state) and can be operated via the front panel.
Starting remote control

1. Send an addressed command (GTR - Go to Remote) from a controller to the instru-
ment.
The instrument is switched to remote control ("remote" state). Operation via the
front panel is disabled. Only the "Local" softkey is displayed to return to manual
operation. The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual
state via the instrument or via remote control interfaces. Switching from manual
operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the other instrument set-
tings.
2. During program execution, send the SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON command to

activate the display of results.
The changes in the device settings and the recorded measurement values are dis-
played on the instrument screen.
3. To obtain optimum performance during remote control, send the

SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF command to hide the display of results and dia-
grams again (default setting in remote control).
4. To prevent unintentional return to manual operation, disable the keys of the instru-
ment using the universal command LLO.
Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then. This function is
only available for the GPIB interface.
5. To enable the keys of the R&S FSVA/FSV again, switch the instrument to local
mode (GTL - Go to Local), i.e. deactivate the REN line of the remote control inter-
face.

If the instrument is operated exclusively in remote control, it is recommended that you

switch on the power-save mode for the display. For more details on this mode refer to
the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide.
5.1.3 Returning to Manual Operation
Before you switch back to manual operation, all remote command processing must be
completed. Otherwise, the instrument will switch back to remote control immediately.
► Press the "Local" softkey or the PRESET key, or use the following GPIB command:
status = viGpibControlREN(vi, VI_GPIB_REN_ADDRESS_GTL)
If you select the "Local" softkey while a self-alignment or a self-test is still running
(which was started remotely), the instrument only returns to the manual operation state
when the alignment or test is completed.
5.1.4 SCPI Command Structure
SCPI commands consist of a header and, in most cases, one or more parameters. The
header and the parameters are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to
32 decimal, e.g. blank). The headers may consist of several mnemonics (keywords).
Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header.
The commands can be either device-specific or device-independent (common com-
mands). Common and device-specific commands differ in their syntax.
5.1.4.1 Syntax for Common Commands
Common (= device-independent) commands consist of a header preceded by an aster-

isk (*), and possibly one or more parameters.
Table 5-2: Examples of common commands
*RST RESET Resets the instrument.
*ESE EVENT STATUS ENABLE Sets the bits of the event status enable registers.
*ESR? EVENT STATUS QUERY Queries the contents of the event status register.
*IDN? IDENTIFICATION QUERY Queries the instrument identification string.

5.1.4.2 Syntax for Device-Specific Commands
Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the
instrument. For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following
commands for this section:
● DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
● FORMat:READings:DATA <type>[,<length>]
● HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <Boolean>
● HCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue>
● HCOPy[:IMMediate]
● HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
● HCOPy:ITEM:LABel <string>
● HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
● HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
● HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe <numeric value>
● MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
● SENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
● SENSe:FREQuency:STOP <numeric value>
● SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
● Long and short form..............................................................................................548

● Numeric Suffixes................................................................................................... 548
● Optional Mnemonics............................................................................................. 549
Long and short form

The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form. The short form is marked by
upper case letters, the long form corresponds to the complete word. Either the short
form or the long form can be entered; other abbreviations are not permitted.
Example:
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP:DEV:COL ON.
Case-insensitivity
Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the
manual, the instrument itself is case-insensitive.
Numeric Suffixes
If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object, e.g. specific channels
or sources, the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command.
Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets (<1...4>, <n>, ) and are replaced
by a single value in the command. Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the
suffix 1.

Example:
Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2
This command refers to the quadrant 2.
Different numbering in remote control

For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec-
tion used in manual operation. SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1. Suffix
1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified.
Some standards define a fixed numbering, starting with 0. If the numbering differs in
manual operation and remote control, it is indicated for the corresponding command.
Optional Mnemonics
Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or
omitted. These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description. The
instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard. Some
commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics.
Example:
Definition: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
Command: HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes

Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the
effect of the command.
Example:
Definition:DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
Command: DISP:MAX ON refers to window 1.
In order to refer to a window other than 1, you must include the optional WINDow
parameter with the suffix for the required window.
DISP:WIND2:MAX ON refers to window 2.
5.1.4.3 SCPI Parameters
Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The

parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9,
11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank).
The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are
specified in the command description.
Allowed parameters are:

● Numeric Values.....................................................................................................550
● Special Numeric Values........................................................................................ 550
● Boolean Parameters............................................................................................. 551
● Text Parameters....................................................................................................551
● Character Strings.................................................................................................. 551
● Block Data.............................................................................................................552
Numeric Values
Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent.
Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The man-
tissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie inside the value range
-32000 to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E" or "e". Entry of the exponent
alone is not allowed.
Example:
SENS:FREQ:STOP 1500000 = SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5E6
Units
For physical quantities, the unit can be entered. If the unit is missing, the basic unit is
used. Allowed unit prefixes are:
● G (giga)
● MA (mega), MOHM, MHZ
● K (kilo)
● M (milli)
● U (micro)
● N (nano)
Example:
SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9
Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent. According to SCPI, this unit
is represented by the PCT string.
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:SCAL 90PCT
Special Numeric Values

The following mnemonics are special numeric values. In the response to a query, the
numeric value is provided.
● MIN and MAX: denote the minimum and maximum value.
● DEF: denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This value
conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command.
● UP and DOWN: increases or reduces the numeric value by one step. The step
width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which
can be set via UP and DOWN.

● INF and NINF: INFinity and negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values
9.9E37 or -9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument respon-
ses.
● NAN: Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a
instrument response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of
zero by zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of miss-
ing values.
Example:
Setting command: SENSe:LIST:FREQ MAXimum
Query: SENS:LIST:FREQ?
Response: 3.5E9
Queries for special numeric values

The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be queried by
adding the corresponding mnemonic after the quotation mark.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQ? MAXimum
Returns the maximum numeric value as a result.
Boolean Parameters
Boolean parameters represent two states. The "ON" state (logically true) is represen-
ted by "ON" or a numeric value 1. The "OFF" state (logically untrue) is represented by
"OFF" or the numeric value 0. The numeric values are provided as the response for a
query.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
Text Parameters
Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics, i.e. they can be entered
using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the
header by a white space. In the response to a query, the short form of the text is provi-
ded.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
Character Strings
Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (' or ").

Example:
HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1"
HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1'
Block Data
Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data.
For example, a command using a block data parameter has the following structure:
FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx
The ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many
of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example the 4 follow-
ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. During the trans-
mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are
transmitted.
#0 specifies a data block of indefinite length. The use of the indefinite format requires a
NL^END message to terminate the data block. This format is useful when the length of
the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation
of the data into blocks of definite length.
5.1.4.4 Overview of Syntax Elements
The following tables provide an overview of the syntax elements and special charac-
ters.
Table 5-3: Syntax elements
: The colon separates the mnemonics of a command.
; The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.
, The comma separates several parameters of a command.
? The question mark forms a query.
* The asterisk marks a common command.
'' Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it (both single and double quotation marks are
possible).
"
# The hash symbol introduces binary, octal, hexadecimal and block data.
● Binary: #B10110
● Octal: #O7612
● Hexa: #HF3A7
● Block: #21312
A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates the header from the
parameters.

Table 5-4: Special characters
| Parameters
A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The
effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used.
Example:
Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation
Mnemonics
A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands. These mnemonics are
indicated in the same line; they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these mnemonics
needs to be included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of
which of the mnemonics is used.
Example:
DefinitionSENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
The two following commands with identical meaning can be created:
SENS:BAND:RES 1
SENS:BWID:RES 1
[] Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted.
Example: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
{} Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times, or omitted.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
The following are valid commands:
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20,30,40
5.1.4.5 Structure of a Command Line
A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by one of

the following:
● <New Line>
● <New Line> with EOI
● EOI together with the last data byte
Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";".
Example:
MMEM:COPY "Test1","MeasurementXY";:HCOP:ITEM ALL
This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the MMEM
system, the second command belongs to the HCOP system. If the next command
belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.

Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;:HCOP:IMM
This command line contains two commands. Both commands are part of the HCOP
command system, i.e. they have one level in common.
If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels
in common, the command line can be abbreviated. When abbreviating the command
line, the second command begins with the level below HCOP. The colon after the sem-
icolon is omitted. The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;IMM
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL
HCOP:IMM
A new command line always begins with the complete path.
5.1.4.6 Responses to Queries
A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is
formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to
SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard
IEEE 488.2.
● The requested parameter is transmitted without a header.
Example: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?, Response: LAND
● Maximum values, minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a
special text parameter are returned as numeric values.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX, Response: 3.5E9
● Numeric values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the
basic units or to the units set using the Unit command. The response 3.5E9 in
the previous example stands for 3.5 GHz.
● Truth values (Boolean values) are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
● Text (character data) is returned in a short form.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
● Invalid numerical results
In some cases, particularly when a result consists of multiple numeric values, inva-
lid values are returned as 9.91E37 (not a number).

5.1.5 Command Sequence and Synchronization
IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands:

● A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command
starts executing. Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented
as sequential commands.
● An overlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing
before the next command starts executing. Usually, overlapping commands take
longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed. If
overlapping commands do have to be executed in a defined order, e.g. in order to
avoid wrong measurement results, they must be serviced sequentially. This is
called synchronization between the controller and the instrument.
Setting commands within one command line, even though they may be implemented
as sequential commands, are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have
been received. In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a cer-
tain order, each command must be sent in a separate command line.
Example: Commands and queries in one message

The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect
the queried value is not predictable.
The following commands always return the specified result:
:FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR?
Result:
1000000000 (1 GHz)
Whereas the result for the following commands is not specified by SCPI:
:FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000
The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instru-
ment might defer executing the individual commands until a program message termi-
nator is received. The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands
as they are received.
As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages.

Example: Overlapping command with *OPC

The instrument implements INITiate[:IMMediate] as an overlapped command.
Assuming that INITiate[:IMMediate] takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending
the following command sequence results in initiating a sweep and, after some time,
setting the OPC bit in the ESR:
INIT; *OPC.
Sending the following commands still initiates a sweep:
INIT; *OPC; *CLS
However, since the operation is still pending when the instrument executes *CLS, forc-
ing it into the "Operation Complete Command Idle" State (OCIS), *OPC is effectively
skipped. The OPC bit is not set until the instrument executes another *OPC command.
The following list includes the commands for which a synchronization via *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI is mandatory:
Command Purpose
INIT start measurement
INIT:CONM continue measurement
CALC:MARK:FUNC:ZOOM zoom frequency range around marker 1
CALC:STAT:SCAL:AUTO ONCE optimize level settings for signal statistic measurement functions
[SENS:]POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV optimize level settings for adjacent channel power measure-

ments
5.1.5.1 Preventing Overlapping Execution
To prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the commands *OPC,

*OPC? or *WAI can be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be
carried out after the hardware has been set. The controller can be forced to wait for the
corresponding action to occur.
Table 5-5: Synchronization using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI
Com- Action Programming the controller

mand
*OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR ● Setting bit 0 in the ESE
after all previous commands have been exe- ● Setting bit 5 in the SRE
cuted. ● Waiting for service request (SRQ)
*OPC? Stops command processing until 1 is Send *OPC? directly after the command
returned. This occurs when all pending opera- whose processing must be terminated before
tions are completed. other commands can be executed.
*WAI Stops further command processing until all Send *WAI directly after the command whose
commands sent before *WAI have been exe- processing must be terminated before other
cuted. commands are executed.
Command synchronization using *WAI or *OPC? is a good choice if the overlapped

command takes only little time to process. The two synchronization commands simply

block overlapped execution of the command. Append the synchronization command to

the overlapping command, for example:
SINGle; *OPC?
For time consuming overlapped commands, you can allow the controller or the instru-
ment to do other useful work while waiting for command execution. Use one of the fol-
lowing methods:
*OPC with a service request

1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1
2. Set bit no. 5 in the SRE: *SRE 32 to enable ESB service request.
3. Send the overlapped command with *OPC .
4. Wait for a service request.

The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
*OPC? with a service request

1. Set bit no. 4 in the SRE: *SRE 16 to enable MAV service request.
2. Send the overlapped command with *OPC?.
3. Wait for a service request.

The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
Event status register (ESE)

1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1
2. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI.
3. Poll the operation complete state periodically (with a timer) using the sequence:
*OPC; *ESR?
A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
5.1.6 Status Reporting System
The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the
instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status
registers and in the error queue. Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface
(STATus... commands).
5.1.6.1 Hierarchy of Status Registers
As shown in the following figure, the status information is of hierarchical structure.

15 not used 15 not used

14 14 15 not used
& = lo gic A ND 13 13 14
= logic OR 12 12 13
of all bits 11 11 12
10 Range completed 10 11
9 Scan results available 9 10
8 HCOPy in progress 8 9
7 7 8 I/Q data acquisition error
6 6 ALT3 … 11 LOWer/UPPer FAIL 7
5 Waiting for TRIgger 5 ALT2 LOWer FAIL 6
4 MEASuring 4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL 5
3 SWEeping 3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL 4
2 2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL 3
1 1 ADJ LOWer FAIL 2
0 CALibrating 0 ADJ UPPer FAIL 1
0
SRQ STAT us:OPERation STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit
STATus:QUES:SYNC
-&- 7
6 RQS/MSS
-&- 5 ESB
14 14
-&- 4 MAV
-&- 13 13
3
-&- 12 12
2
11 11
1
10 10
0 15 not used 9 9
14 Digital I/Q 8
SRE STB 8
13 7 LMARgin 8 FAIL 7 LIMit 8 FAIL
12 ACPLimit 6 LMARgin 7 FAIL 6 LIMit 7 FAIL
11 SYNC 5 LMARgin 6 FAIL 5 LIMit 6 FAIL
10 LMARgin 4 LMARgin 5 FAIL 4 LIMit 5 FAIL
9 LIMit 3 LMARgin 4 FAIL 3 LIMit 4 FAIL
8 CALibration (= UNC AL) 2 LMARgin 3 FAIL 2 LIMit 3 FAIL
-&- 7 1 LMARgin 2 FAIL 1 LIMit 2 FAIL
6 0 LMARgin 1 FAIL
-&- 0 LIMit 1 FAIL
5 FR EQuency
-&-
4 TEMPe rature
-&-
3 POW er
-&- STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin <1|2>
2
-&- 1
0 STAT us:QUEStionable:LIMit <1|2>

PPE 14 14
STATus:QUEStionable
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
IST flag
9 9
-&- 7 Power on 8 EXTernalREFerence 8
User Request 7 7
-&- 6
6 6
-&- 5 Command Error
-&- 4 Execution Error 5 5
3 Device Dependent Error 4 4
-&-
2 Query Error 3 3
-&-
2 2 IF_OVerload
-&- 1 Request Control
1 LO UNLocked 1 UNDerload
-&- 0 Operation Complete
0 OVEN COLD 0 OVERload
Error/event Output
queue buffer ESE ESR
bla ST AT us:QU EStionabl e: FREQ uency STATus:QUEStionable:POWer
Figure 5-2: Overview of status registers in the R&S FSV
● STB, SRE
The STatus Byte (STB) register and its associated mask register Service Request
Enable (SRE) form the highest level of the status reporting system. The STB pro-
vides a rough overview of the instrument status, collecting the information of the
lower-level registers.
● ESR, SCPI registers
The STB receives its information from the following registers:

– The Event Status Register (ESR) with the associated mask register standard
Event Status Enable (ESE)
– The STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable registers which are
defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument
● IST, PPE
The IST flag ("Individual STatus"), like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument
status in a single bit. The PPE fulfills the same function for the IST flag as the SRE
for the service request.
● Output buffer
The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It
is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in
the STB and thus is represented in the overview.
All status registers have the same internal structure.
SRE, ESE
The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the
STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle
part of the ESR.
5.1.6.2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register
Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts. Each part has a width of 16 bits and
has different functions. The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each
hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts. Bit 15 (the
most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts
can be processed by the controller as positive integers.
Figure 5-3: The status-register model
Description of the five status register parts

The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions:

● CONDition
The CONDition part is written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the
next lower register. Its contents reflect the current instrument status. This register
part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents are not affected
by reading.
● PTRansition / NTRansition
The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition
part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.
The Positive-TRansition part acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides whether
the EVENt bit is set to 1.
– PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
– PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by
reading.
The Negative-TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether
the EVENt bit is set to 1.
– NTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
– NTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by
reading.
● EVENt
The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading, it
is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events passed on by the
transition filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be
read by the user. Reading the register clears it. This part is often equated with the
entire register.
● ENABle
The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the
sum bit (see below). Each bit of the EVENt part is "ANDed" with the associated
ENABle bit (symbol '&'). The results of all logical operations of this part are passed
on to the sum bit via an "OR" function (symbol '+').
ENABle bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
ENABle bit = 1: if the associated EVENt bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as well.
This part can be written into and read by the user as required. Its contents are not
affected by reading.
Sum bit
The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result
is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event
can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy.

5.1.6.3 Contents of the Status Registers
In the following sections, the contents of the status registers are described in more
detail.
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)

The STatus Byte (STB) is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough over-
view of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis-
ters. A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status
byte.
The STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and
assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy.
The STB is read using the command *STB? or a serial poll.
The STatus Byte (STB) is linked to the Service Request Enable (SRE) register.
Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is
set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a service
request (SRQ) is generated. The SRE can be set using the command *SRE and read
using the command *SRE?.
Table 5-6: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte
Bit No. Meaning
0...1 Not used
2 Error Queue not empty

The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each
entry of the error queue generates a service request. Thus an error can be recognized and
specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error mes-
sage. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems
involved with remote control.
3 QUEStionable status register summary bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be speci-
fied in greater detail by querying the STATus:QUEStionable status register.
4 MAV bit (message available)

The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read. This bit can be
used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller.
5 ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set
and enabled in the event status enable register. Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which
can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register.

Bit No. Meaning
6 MSS bit (master status summary bit)

The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits
of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.
7 STATus:OPERation status register summary bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The
type of action can be determined by querying the STATus:OPERation status register.
IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)

As with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It
can be read by means of a parallel poll (see "Parallel Poll" on page 570) or using the
command *IST?.
The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to
the IST flag. The bits of the STB are "ANDed" with the corresponding bits of the PPE,
with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE. The IST flag results from the
"ORing" of all results. The PPE can be set using commands *PRE and read using com-
mand *PRE?.
Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)
The Event Status Register (ESR) is the source for the registers on the highest levels
and is similar to the EVENt part of a SCPI register. It is defined by IEEE 488.2. You
can read out the ESR with *ESR?.
The corresponding ENABle part of the ESR is the Event Status Enable mask register
(ESE). The ESE is directly linked to the ESR. You can control the ESE with *ESE.
Table 5-7: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register
Bit No. Meaning
0 Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been
executed.
1 Unused
2 Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a
query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument
instead. The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.
3 Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs.
The R&S FSVA/FSV adds a number to the error queue. The number is either in the range
between -300 and -399 or greater than 0. If the number is positive, it indicates the error type in
greater detail.
4 Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other
reasons. An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in
greater detail, is entered into the error queue.

Bit No. Meaning
5 Command Error
This bit is set if a remote command is undefined or has a incorrect syntax.
The R&S FSVA/FSV adds a number to the error queue. The number is in the range between
-100 and -200 and indicates the error type in greater detail.
6 User Request
This bit is set when you press the "Local" softkey.
7 Power On (supply voltage on)

This bit is set when you turn on the instrument.
STATus:OPERation Register
The STATus:OPERation register contains information on current activities of the
R&S FSVA/FSV. It also contains information on activities that have been executed
since the last read out.
You can read out the register with STATus:OPERation:CONDition or STATus:
OPERation[:EVENt].
Table 5-8: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:OPERation register
Bit No. Meaning
0 CALibrating
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration.
1-2 Not used
3 SWEeping
Sweep is being performed; identical to bit 4
4 MEASuring
Measurement is being performed; identical to bit 3
5 Waiting for TRIgger

Instrument is ready to trigger and waiting for trigger signal
6-7 Not used
8 HardCOPy in progress
This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.
9 Not used
10 Stop after Range

This bit is set when a range in the sweep list has been completed if "Stop after Range" has
been activated.
11-14 Not used
15 This bit is always 0.
STATus:QUEStionable Register
The STATus:QUEStionable register contains information on instrument states that do
not meet the specifications.

You can read out the register with STAT:QUES:COND or STAT:QUES:EVEN.

Table 5-9: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register
Bit No. Meaning
0-2 Unused
3 POWer
This bit is set if the measured power level is questionable.
The STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register provides more information on the error type.
4 TEMPerature
This bit is set if the temperature is questionable.
5 FREQuency
This bit is set if there is anything wrong with the frequency of the local oscillator or the reference
frequency.
The STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register provides more information on the error type.
6-7 Unused
8 CALibration
This bit is set if the R&S FSVA/FSV is unaligned ("UNCAL" display)
9 LIMit (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit value is violated.
The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register provides more information on the error type.
10 LMARgin (device-specific)
This bit is set if a margin is violated.
The STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register provides more information on the error type.
11 SYNC (device-specific)
This bit is set if the R&S FSVA/FSV is not synchronized to the signal that is applied.
The R&S FSVA/FSV is not synchronized if
● it cannot synchronize to midamble during a measurement or premeasurement
● it cannot find a burst during a measurement or premeasurement
● the results deviate too much from the expected value during premeasurements
12 ACPLimit (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit during ACLR measurements is violated.
The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register provides more information on the error type.
13 Not used
14 Digital I/Q (device-specific)

This bit is set if a connection error occurs at the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17
option), see "STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ Register" on page 565
The STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ Register provides more information on the error type.
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register contains information about the results of
a limit check during ACLR measurements.

You can read out the register withSTATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?

or STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?
Table 5-10: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register
Bit No. Meaning
0 ADJ UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel
1 ADJ LOWer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel.
2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel.
3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel.
4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel.
5 ALT2 LOWer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel.
6 ALT3 … 11 LOWer/UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in one of the lower or upper alternate channels 3 … 11.
7 to 14 Unused
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ Register
This register contains information about the state of the digital I/Q input and output.
This register is available with option R&S FSV-B17.
The status of the STATus:QUESTionable:DIQ register is indicated in bit 14 of the
"STATus:QUESTionable" register.
You can read out the state of the register with STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:
CONDition? on page 865 and STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ[:EVENt]?
on page 865.
Bit No. Meaning
0 Digital I/Q Input Device connected

This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the R&S Digital I/Q Interface of
the analyzer.
1 Digital I/Q Input Connection Protocol in progress

This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital baseband data signal
source (e.g. R&S SMW, R&S Ex-I/Q-Box) is established.
2 Digital I/Q Input Connection Protocol error

This bit is set if an error occurred during establishing of the connect between analyzer and
digital I/Q data signal source (e.g. R&S SMW, R&S Ex-I/Q-Box) is established.
3-5 not used

Bit No. Meaning
6 Digital I/Q Input FIFO Overload

This bit is set if the input transfer rate is too high. The R&S FSVA/FSV can process a max-
imum transfer rate of 128MHz.
7 not used
8 Digital I/Q Output Device connected

This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital I/Q Output.
9 Digital I/Q Output Connection Protocol in progress

This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital I/Q data signal sink (e.g.
R&S SMW, R&S Ex-I/Q-Box) is established.
10 Digital I/Q Output Connection Protocol error

This bit is set if an error occurred while the connection between analyzer and digital I/Q
data signal sink (e.g. R&S SMW, R&S Ex-I/Q-Box) is established.
11-14 not used
15 This bit is always set to 0.
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register contains information about the condi-
tion of the local oscillator and the reference frequency.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-11: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register
Bit No. Meaning
0 OVEN COLD
This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature. "OCXO"
is displayed.
1 LO UNLocked
This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks. "LOUNL" is displayed.
2 to 7 Unused
8 EXTernalREFerence
This bit is set if you have selected an external reference oscillator but did not connect a useable
external reference source.
In that case the synthesizer can not lock. The frequency in all probability is not accurate.
9 to 14 Unused
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register contains information about the results of a
limit check when you are working with limit lines.
The number of LIMit registers depends on the number of measurement windows avail-
able in any operating mode.

You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:

CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:CONDition?.
Table 5-12: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register
Bit No. Meaning
0 LIMit 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated.
1 LIMit 2 FAIL
2 LIMit 3 FAIL
3 LIMit 4 FAIL
4 LIMit 5 FAIL
5 LIMit 6 FAIL
6 LIMit 7 FAIL
7 LIMit 8 FAIL
8 to 14 Unused
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register
This register contains information about the observance of limit margins.
It can be read using the commands
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition? and
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-13: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register
Bit No. Meaning
0 LMARgin 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.
1 LMARgin 2 FAIL
2 LMARgin 3 FAIL
3 LMARgin 4 FAIL

Bit No. Meaning
4 LMARgin 5 FAIL
5 LMARgin 6 FAIL
6 LMARgin 7 FAIL
7 LMARgin 8 FAIL
8 to 14 Not used
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register
The STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register contains information about possible over-
load situations that may occur during operation of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? or
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
Table 5-14: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register
Bit No. Meaning
0 OVERload
This bit is set if an overload occurs at the RF input.
The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the enhancement label "OVLD".
1 UNDerload
This bit is set if an underload occurs at the RF input.
The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the enhancement label "UNLD".
2 IF_OVerload
This bit is set if an overload occurs in the IF path.
The R&S FSVA/FSV displays the enhancement label "IFOVL".
3 to 14 Unused
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC Register
This register contains information about the state of the I/Q data acquisition. This regis-
ter is used with option Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSV-B17).
The status of the STATus:QUESTionable:SYNC register is indicated in bit 11 of the
STATus:QUESTionable register.
You can read out the state of the register with STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:
CONDition? on page 872 and STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?
on page 872.

Bit No. Meaning
0-7 not used
8 I/Q data acquisition error

This bit is set if an error occurs during I/Q data acquisition because the input sample rates
or number of samples between the signal source and the R&S FSVA/FSV do not match.
9-14 not used
15 This bit is always set to 0.
5.1.6.4 Application of the Status Reporting System
The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several
devices in a measuring system. To do this and react appropriately, the controller must
receive and evaluate the information of all devices. The following standard methods
are used:
● Service request (SRQ) initiated by the instrument
● Serial poll of all devices in the bus system, initiated by the controller in order to
find out who sent a SRQ and why
● Parallel poll of all devices
● Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands
● Query of the error queue
Service Request
Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the
controller. Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which
the control program can react appropriately. As evident from Figure 5-2, an SRQ is
always initiated if one or several of bits 2, 3, 4, 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and
enabled in the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information of a further register,
the error queue or the output buffer. The ENABle parts of the status registers can be
set such that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ. In order to
make use of the possibilities of the service request effectively, all bits should be set to
"1" in enable registers SRE and ESE.
Use of the command *OPC to generate an SRQ at the end of a sweep

1. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*ESE 1") 'Set bit 0 in the ESE (Operation
Complete)
2. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*SRE 32") 'Set bit 5 in the SRE (ESB)
3. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*INIT;*OPC") ' Generate an SRQ after

operation complete
After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.

The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each
controller program should cause the instrument to initiate a service request if errors
occur. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
A detailed example for a service request routine can be found in Chapter 5.4.1, "Ser-
vice Request", on page 1002.
Serial Poll
In a serial poll, just as with command *STB, the status byte of an instrument is queried.
However, the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster.
The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard pos-
sibility for different instruments to poll the status byte. The method also works for
instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.
The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instru-
ments connected to the controller.
Parallel Poll
In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller
using a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to
set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical "0" or "1".
In addition to the SRE register, which determines the conditions under which an SRQ
is generated, there is a Parallel Poll Enable register (PPE) which is ANDed with the
STB bit by bit, considering bit 6 as well. This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit,
considering bit 6 as well. The results are ORed, the result is possibly inverted and then
sent as a response to the parallel poll of the controller. The result can also be queried
without parallel poll using the command *IST?.
The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using the command PPC. This
command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response
is to be inverted. The parallel poll itself is executed using PPE.
The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments
connected to the controller has sent a service request. To this effect, SRE and PPE
must be set to the same value.
Query of an instrument status

Each part of any status register can be read using queries. There are two types of
commands:
● The common commands *ESR?, *IDN?, *IST?, *STB? query the higher-level
registers.
● The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers
(STATus:QUEStionable...)
The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the
queried register. This number is evaluated by the controller program.
Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on
the cause of the SRQ.

Decimal representation of a bit pattern

The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits, the SCPI registers 16 bits. The contents of
a status register are specified and transferred as a single decimal number. To make
this possible, each bit is assigned a weighted value. The decimal number is calculated
as the sum of the weighted values of all bits in the register that are set to 1.
Example:
The decimal value 40 = 32 + 8 indicates that bits no. 3 and 5 in the status register (e.g.
the QUEStionable status summary bit and the ESB bit in the STatus Byte ) are set.
Error Queue
Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of
the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the
Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?. Each call of
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? provides one entry from the error queue. If no error mes-
sages are stored there any more, the instrument responds with 0, "No error".
The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the
entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Espe-
cially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regu-
larly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as
well.
5.1.6.5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System
The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status
reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except *RST and
SYSTem:PRESet, influence the functional instrument settings. In particular, DCL does
not change the instrument settings.
Table 5-15: Resetting the status reporting system
Event Switching on supply DCL, *RST or STA- *CLS

voltage SDC SYS- Tus:PRE-
Tem:PRE- Set
Power-On-Status- (Device
Set
Clear Clear,
Selected
Device
Effect 0 1
Clear)
Clear STB, ESR - yes - - - yes
Clear SRE, ESE - yes - - - -
Clear PPE - yes - - - -

Event Switching on supply DCL, *RST or STA- *CLS

voltage SDC SYS- Tus:PRE-
Tem:PRE- Set
Power-On-Status- (Device
Set
Clear Clear,
Selected
Device
Effect 0 1
Clear)
Clear EVENt parts of the regis- - yes - - - yes

ters
Clear ENABle parts of all - yes - - yes -

OPERation and QUEStionable
registers;
Fill ENABle parts of all other
registers with "1".
Fill PTRansition parts with "1"; - yes - - yes -

Clear NTRansition parts
Clear error queue yes yes - - - yes
Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1) 1) 1)
Clear command processing yes yes yes - - -

and input buffer
1) The first command in a command line that immediately follows a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINA-
TOR> clears the output buffer.
5.1.7 General Programming Recommendations
Initial instrument status before changing settings

Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience. In con-
trast, the priority of remote control is the "predictability" of the instrument status. Thus,
when a command attempts to define incompatible settings, the command is ignored
and the instrument status remains unchanged, i.e. other settings are not automatically
adapted. Therefore, control programs should always define an initial instrument status
(e.g. using the *RST command) and then implement the required settings.
Command sequence
As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages. Other-
wise, the result of the query may vary depending on which operation is performed first
(see also Preventing Overlapping Execution).
Reacting to malfunctions
The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its
own. Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service
request in case of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service
request.

Error queues
The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller pro-
gram as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status regis-
ters. Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be
queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are
recorded there as well.
5.1.8 The IECWIN Tool
The R&S FSVA/FSV is delivered with IECWIN installed, an auxiliary tool provided free
of charge by R&S. IECWIN is a program to send SCPI commands to a measuring
instrument either interactively or from a command script.
The R&S IECWIN32 tool is provided free of charge. The functionality may change in a
future version without notice.
IECWIN offers the following features:

● Connection to instrument via several interfaces/protocols (GPIB, VISA, named pipe
(if IECWIN is run on the instrument itself), RSIB)
● Interactive command entry
● Browsing available commands on the instrument
● Error checking following every command
● Execution of command scripts
● Storing binary data to a file
● Reading binary data from a file
● Generation of a log file
For command scripts, IECWIN offers the following features:
● Synchronization with the instrument on every command
● Checking expected result for query commands (as string or numeric value)
● Checking for expected errors codes
● Optional pause on error
● Nested command scripts
● Single step mode
● Conditional execution, based on the *IDN and *OPT strings
You can use the IECWIN to try out the programming examples provided in the
R&S FSVA/FSV User Manuals.
Starting IECWIN
IECWIN is available from the Windows "Start" menu on the R&S FSVA/FSV, or by exe-
cuting the following file:

Controlling the R&S FSVA/FSV Remotely
C:\Program Files\Rohde-Schwarz\FSVA\<version>\iecwin32.exe
You can also copy the program to any Windows PC or laptop. Simply copy the
iecwin32.exe, iecwin.chm and rsib32.dll files from the location above to the
same folder on the target computer.
When the tool is started, a "Connection settings" dialog box is displayed. Define the
connection from the computer the IECWIN tool is installed on to the R&S FSVA/FSV
you want to control. If you are using the tool directly on the R&S FSVA/FSV, you can
use an NT Pipe (COM Parser) connection, which requires no further configuration. For
help on setting up other connection types, check the tool's online help (by clicking the
"Help" button in the dialog box).
The IECWIN offers an online help with extensive information on how to work with the
tool.
5.2 Controlling the R&S FSVA/FSV Remotely

In addition to working with the R&S FSVA/FSV interactively, located directly at the
instrument, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC.
Various methods for remote control are supported:
● Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network (see Chap-
ter 5.2.1, "Operation with Windows Remote Desktop ", on page 574)
● Using Virtual Network Computing (VNC, see Chapter 5.2.2, "Operation with a VNC
Client", on page 581)
● Connecting the instrument to a (LAN) network (see Chapter 5.2.5, "Setting Up a
Network (LAN) Connection", on page 585)
For details on remote control interfaces see Chapter 5.2.3, "Remote Control Interfaces
and Protocols", on page 582
● Operation with Windows Remote Desktop ...........................................................574
● Operation with a VNC Client................................................................................. 581
● Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols............................................................. 582
● Configuring the GPIB Interface............................................................................. 584
● Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection...............................................................585
● How to Configure the LAN Using the LXI Web Browser Interface........................ 590
● Configuring the Network........................................................................................593
5.2.1 Operation with Windows Remote Desktop
In production test and measurement, a common requirement is central monitoring of

the T&M instruments for remote maintenance and remote diagnostics. Equipped with
the Windows Remote Desktop software, the R&S FSVA/FSV ideally meets require-

ments for use in production. (The computer that is used for remote operation is called
"controller" here.)
● Access to the control functions via a virtual front panel (soft front panel)
● Printout of measurement results directly from the controller
● Storage of measured data on the controller's hard disk
The R&S FSVA/FSV is connected via a LAN, in which case the Windows operating
system also supports a connection via a modem. This section describes the configura-
tion of the R&S FSVA/FSV and the Remote Desktop Client of the controller. Details on
how to set up a modem connection are described in the Windows documentation.
5.2.1.1 Configuring the R&S FSVA/FSV for Remote Operation
To avoid problems, use a fixed IP address.

When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address is assigned each time the instrument
is restarted. This address must first be determined on the instrument itself. Thus, using
a DHCP server is not suitable for remote operation of the R&S FSVA/FSV via Remote
Desktop.
With the factory settings, the default "instrument" user can connect to the
R&S FSVA/FSV with the Remote Desktop program of the controller immediately. No
further configuration is required. However, if the connection fails or other users need to
connect, this section provides basic instructions on setting up the Remote Desktop for
the R&S FSVA/FSV.
1. Press the "Windows" key on the external keyboard or the CTRL + ESC key combi-
nation on your keyboard to access the operating system.
2. In the Windows "Start" menu, select "Settings > System".
3. Search for "remote access".
4. Select "Allow remote access to your computer".
5. Define which users are to be given access to the R&S FSVA/FSV via Remote
Desktop.
Note: The user account under which configuration is carried out is automatically
enabled for Remote Desktop.

a) Select the "Select Users" button.

b) Select the users or create new user accounts as described in Chapter 5.2.7.2,
"Creating Users", on page 594.
c) Select "OK" to confirm the settings.
6. The R&S FSVA/FSV is now ready for connection setup with the Remote Desktop
program of the controller.
5.2.1.2 Configuring the Controller
Remote Desktop Client

The Windows Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be
accessed via "Start > All Applications > Windows Accessories > Remote Desktop Con-
nection".
2. From the "Start" menu, select "All Programs > Accessories > Remote Desktop
Connection".
The "Remote Desktop Connection" dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the "Options >>" button.

The dialog box is expanded to display the configuration data.

4. Open the "Experience" tab.

The settings on this tab are used to select and optimize the connection speed.
5. In the list, select the appropriate connection (for example: LAN (10 Mbps or
higher)).
Depending on your selection (and how powerful the connection is), the options are
activated or deactivated.
6. To improve the performance, you can deactivate the "Desktop background", "Show
contents of window while dragging" and "Menu and window animation" options.
7. Open the "Local Resources" tab for enabling printers, local drives and serial inter-
faces.
8. If you will need to access drives of the controller from the R&S FSVA/FSV (e.g. in
order to store settings or to copy files from the controller to the R&S FSVA/FSV),
select "More", then enable the "Drives" option.

Windows will then map drives of the controller to the corresponding network drives.
9. To use printers connected to the controller while accessing them from the
R&S FSVA/FSV, activate the "Printers" option. Do not change the remaining set-
tings.
10. Open the "Display" tab.

The options for configuring the R&S FSVA/FSV screen display are displayed.
11. Under "Remote desktop size", you can set the size of the R&S FSVA/FSV window
on the desktop of the controller.
12. Under "Colors", do not change the settings.
13. Set the "Display the connection bar when I use the full screen" option:

● If activated, a bar showing the network address of the R&S FSVA/FSV will
appear at the top edge of the screen. You can use this bar to reduce, minimize
or close the window.
● If deactivated, the only way you can return to the controller desktop from the
R&S FSVA/FSV screen in full screen mode is to select "Disconnect" from the
"Start" menu.
5.2.1.3 Starting and Terminating Remote Operation
Setting up a connection to the R&S FSVA/FSV

1. In the "Remote Desktop Connection" dialog box (see Chapter 5.2.1, "Operation
with Windows Remote Desktop ", on page 574), open the "General" tab.
2. In the "Computer" field, enter the IP address of the R&S FSVA/FSV.

In the "User name" field, enter instrument to log in as an administrator, or Normal
User to log in as a standard user.
In the "Password" field, enter 894129.
3. To save the connection configuration for later use:

a) Select the "Save As" button.
The "Save As" dialog box is displayed.
b) Enter the name for the connection information (*.RDP).
4. To load an existing connection configuration:

a) Select the "Open" button.
The "Open" dialog box is displayed.
b) Select the *.RDP file.
5. Select the "Connect" button.

The connection is set up.
6. If the "Drives" option is activated on the "Local Resources" tab, a warning is dis-
played indicating that the drives are enabled for access from the R&S FSVA/FSV.
Select "OK" to confirm the warning.
7. After a few moments, the R&S FSVA/FSV screen is displayed.

If a dark screen appears or a dark square appears in the upper left-hand corner of
the screen, you must restart the R&S FSVA/FSV in order to see the modified
screen resolution.
● Press the key combination ALT + F4.

● The R&S FSVA/FSV firmware is shut down, which may take a few
seconds.
● On the desktop, double-tap the "Analyzer" icon.

The firmware restarts and then automatically opens the "Soft Front Panel", i.e. the
user interface on which all front panel controls and the rotary knob are mapped to
buttons.
8. To deactivate or activate the "Soft Front Panel", press the F6 key.

After the connection is established, the R&S FSVA/FSV screen is displayed in the
"Remote Desktop" application window.
You can operate all keys and softkeys using the mouse. The rotary knob is simula-
ted using the knob buttons.
The Windows "Start" menu can be made available by expanding the "Remote
Desktop" window to full size.
During the connection with the controller, the login entry is displayed on the
R&S FSVA/FSV screen.
Terminating Remote Desktop control

The connection can be terminated by the controller or by a user at the R&S FSVA/
FSV:
► ● On the controller, close the "Remote Desktop" window.
The connection to the R&S FSVA/FSV is terminated (any time is possible).
● On the R&S FSVA/FSV, a user logs on.
The connection to the controller is terminated as a result. A message is dis-
played on the controller display indicating that another user has assumed con-
trol of the instrument.
Restoring the connection to the R&S FSVA/FSV
Follow the instructions above for setting up a connection to the R&S FSVA/FSV. If the
connection is terminated and then restored, the R&S FSVA/FSV remains in the same
state.

5.2.1.4 Deactivating the R&S FSVA/FSV via Remote Operation
1. Click the R&S FSVA/FSV soft front panel and close the application with the key
combination ALT + F4.
2. Click the desktop and press the key combination ALT + F4 to shut down the
R&S FSVA/FSV.
A safety query is displayed to warn you that the instrument cannot be reactivated
via remote operation and asks you whether you want to continue the shutdown
process.
3. Respond to the safety query with "Yes".

The connection with the controller is terminated and the R&S FSVA/FSV is shut
down.
5.2.2 Operation with a VNC Client
Virtual Network Computing (VNC) allows you to control the R&S FSVA/FSV (the VNC
server) from a remote computer (the VNC client), for example to monitor the instru-
ments in a production line. The handling of a VNC system is similar to using the Win-
dows Remote Desktop, but VNC has some advantages compared to the Remote
Desktop.
● You can view the contents of the instrument display on more than one client
● VNC clients are available for many operating systems. Thus, a VNC is independent
of the platform you are using.
● You can still control the instrument itself when a remote connection has been
established, and see what is happening on both the instrument display and the cli-
ent. With the display running, you can also change settings both on the instrument
and with the client simultaneously. (Using the Remote Desktop turns off the display
and viewing the display contents is only possible on the controlling computer.)
● The complete mini soft front panel is available on the client ("Alt-M" opens the mini
soft front panel).
All R&S FSVA/FSV instruments as of firmware version 3.0 support a VNC and are
delivered with a version of the TightVNC software. On the client side, you can use a
web browser or a VNC client to access the instrument.
Using a web browser

If you are using a web browser (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer), enter the IP
address of the instrument and the port you are using for the connection into the
address bar to establish a connection (for example "192.0.2.0:5800").
The browser then opens an interface that allows you to control the instrument after you
have entered the password.
The default port is 5800 and the default password is 894129, but you can change this
on the VNC software that comes with the instrument if required.

Note that using a browser requires you to install Java in order to run properly.
Using a VNC client

Alternatively, you can install a VNC client on your computer (for example a program
like TightVNC) and use that to access the instrument. In that case, start the client and
enter the IP address of the instrument to establish a connection.
5.2.3 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
The instrument supports different interfaces and protocols for remote control. The fol-
lowing table gives an overview.
Table 5-16: Remote control interfaces and protocols
Interface Protocols, VISA*) address string Remarks
Local Area ● HiSLIP High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol (IVI-6.1) The interface is based on TCP/IP and
Network TCPIP::host address::hislip0[::INSTR] supports various protocols.
(LAN) ● VXI-11
TCPIP::host address::inst0[::INSTR] For a description of the protocols refer
to:
Library: VISA
VXI-11 Protocol
HiSLIP Protocol
*) VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments. A VISA
installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control using the indicated interfaces.
5.2.3.1 LAN Interface
For remote control via a network, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the
LAN interface to a common network with TCP/IP network protocol. They are connected
using a commercial RJ45 cable (shielded or unshielded twisted pair category 5). The
TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured on the
instrument. Software for instrument control and the VISA program library must be
installed on the controller.
VISA library
IP address
Only the IP address or a valid DNS host name is required to set up the connection.
The host address is part of the "VISA resource string" used by the programs to identify
and control the instrument.
The VISA resource string has the form:
TCPIP::host address[::LAN device name][::INSTR]
where:
● TCPIP designates the network protocol used
● host address is the IP address or host name of the device

● LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a sub-instru-
ment;
– inst0 selects the VXI-11 protocol (default)
– hislip0 selects the newer HiSLIP protocol
● INSTR indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
Example:
● Instrument has the IP address 192.1.2.3; the valid resource string using VXI-11
protocol is:
TCPIP::192.1.2.3::INSTR
Identifying instruments in a network

If several instruments are connected to the network, each instrument has its own IP
address and associated resource string. The controller identifies these instruments by
means of the resource string.
● VXI-11 Protocol..................................................................................................... 583

● HiSLIP Protocol.....................................................................................................583
VXI-11 Protocol
The VXI-11 standard is based on the ONC RPC (Open Network Computing Remote
Procedure Call) protocol which in turn relies on TCP/IP as the network/transport layer.
The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured.
TCP/IP ensures connection-oriented communication, where the order of the
exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified. With this proto-
col, messages cannot be lost.
HiSLIP Protocol
The HiSLIP (High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol) is the successor protocol for
VXI-11 for TCP-based instruments specified by the IVI foundation. The protocol uses
two TCP sockets for a single connection - one for fast data transfer, the other for non-
sequential control commands (e.g. Device Clear or SRQ).
HiSLIP has the following characteristics:
● High performance as with raw socket network connections
● Compatible IEEE 488.2 support for Message Exchange Protocol, Device Clear,
Serial Poll, Remote/Local, Trigger, and Service Request
● Uses a single IANA registered port (4880), which simplifies the configuration of fire-
walls
● Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locking
mechanisms
● Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks

Using VXI-11, each operation is blocked until a VXI-11 device handshake returns.
However, using HiSLIP, data is sent to the device using the "fire and forget" method
with immediate return. Thus, a successful return of a VISA operation such as
viWrite() does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the reques-
ted command, but is delivered to the TCP/IP buffers.
For more information see also the application note:

1MA208: Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP
5.2.4 Configuring the GPIB Interface
A GPIB interface is integrated on the rear panel of the instrument. You can set the
GPIB address and the ID response string. The GPIB language is set as SCPI by
default and cannot be changed for the R&S FSVA/FSV.
For details on the GPIB interface see "GPIB interface" on page 21).
Displaying the GPIB submenu

3. Press the "GPIB" softkey.

The submenu for setting the parameters of the remote control interface is dis-
played.
Setting the GPIB address

► In the "GPIB" menu, press the "GPIB Address" softkey.
The edit dialog box for the GPIB address is displayed. The setting range is from 0
to 30. If SCPI is selected as the GPIB language, the default address is 20.
Remote command:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 20
Setting the default ID response string

► In the "GPIB" menu, press the "ID String Factory" softkey to select the default
response to the *IDN? command.
Setting a user-defined ID response string

► In the "GPIB" menu, press the "ID String User" softkey to enter a user-defined
response to the *IDN? command. The maximum length of the output string is 36
characters.

5.2.5 Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection
A LAN connection is the prerequisite for all network operations. The LAN connection
settings can be configured directly in the Windows operating system, or with LXI (LAN
eXtension for Instruments).
The R&S FSVA/FSV is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an
Ethernet LAN (local area network). Provided the network administrator has assigned
you the appropriate rights and adapted the Windows firewall configuration, you can use
the interface, for example:
● To transfer data between a controlling device and the test device, e.g. to run a
remote control program.
See chapter "Remote Control".
● To access or control the measurement from a remote computer using the "Remote
Desktop" application (or a similar tool)
● To connect external network devices (e.g. printers)
● To transfer data from a remote computer and back, e.g. using network folders
This section describes how to configure the LAN interface. It includes the following top-
ics:
● Chapter 5.2.5.1, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network", on page 585
● Chapter 5.2.5.2, "Assigning the IP Address", on page 586
Note that only user accounts with administrator rights can configure LAN networks.
LXI
The R&S FSVA/FSV supports the LXI core features. LXI gives you direct access to the
LAN settings described below.
For further information on the LXI interface, refer to the "LXI Configuration".
5.2.5.1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network
There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument:

● A non-dedicated network (Ethernet) connection from the instrument to an existing
network made with an ordinary RJ-45 network cable. The instrument is assigned
an IP address and can coexist with a computer and with other hosts on the same
network.
● A dedicated network connection (Point-to-point connection) between the instru-
ment and a single computer made with a (crossover) RJ-45 network cable. The
computer must be equipped with a network adapter and is directly connected to the
instrument. The use of hubs, switches, or gateways is not required, however, data
transfer is still performed using the TCP/IP protocol. You must assign an IP
address to the instrument and the computer, see Chapter 5.2.5.2, "Assigning the IP
Address", on page 586.
Note: As the R&S FSVA/FSV uses a 1 GBit LAN, a crossover cable is not neces-
sary (due to Auto-MDI(X) functionality).

Risk of network failure

Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks:
● Connecting the instrument to the network
● Configuring the network
● Changing IP addresses
● Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
► To establish a non-dedicated network connection, connect a commercial RJ-45

cable to one of the LAN ports.
To establish a dedicated connection, connect a (crossover) RJ-45 cable between
the instrument and a single PC.
If the instrument is connected to the LAN, Windows automatically detects the network
connection and activates the required drivers.
The network card can be operated with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802.3u interface.
5.2.5.2 Assigning the IP Address
Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instru-
ment can be obtained in different ways.
● If the network supports dynamic TCP/IP configuration using the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), all address information can be assigned automati-
cally.
● If the network does not support DHCP, or if the instrument is set to use alternate
TCP/IP configuration, the addresses must be set manually.
By default, the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and
obtain all address information automatically. This means that it is safe to establish a
physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.
Risk of network errors

Connection errors can affect the entire network. If your network does not support
DHCP, or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP/IP configuration, you must assign
valid address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN. Contact your
network administrator to obtain a valid IP address.
Assigning the IP address on the instrument


3. Press the "Network Address" softkey.

The submenu is displayed.
4. Toggle the "DHCP On/Off" softkey to the required mode.

If DHCP is "Off", you must enter the IP address manually, as described in the fol-
lowing steps.
Note: When DHCP is changed from "On" to "Off", the previously set IP address
and subnet mask are retrieved.
If DHCP is "On", the IP address of the DHCP server is obtained automatically. The
configuration is saved, and you are prompted to restart the instrument. You can
skip the remaining steps.
Note: When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address may be assigned each time
the instrument is restarted. This address must first be determined on the instrument
itself. Thus, when using a DHCP server, it is recommended that you use the per-
manent computer name, which determines the address via the DNS server (see
Chapter 5.2.5.3, "Using Computer Names", on page 589).
5. Press the "IP Address" softkey and enter the IP address, for example 192.0.2.0.
The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Every block con-
tains a maximum of 3 numbers.
6. Press the "Subnet Mask" softkey and enter the subnet mask, for example
255.255.255.0. The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by
dots. Every block contains a maximum of 3 numbers.
If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask, the message "out of
range" is displayed in the status line. The "Edit" dialog box remains open, and you
can start again. If the settings are correct, the configuration is saved, and you are
prompted to restart the instrument.
7. Confirm the displayed message ("Yes" button) to restart the instrument.
Using a DNS server to determine the IP address

If a DNS server is configured on the R&S FSVA/FSV, the server can determine the
current IP address for the connection using the permanent computer name.
1. Obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS
servers on your network.
3. Select "Start > Settings > Network & Internet > Ethernet > Network and Sharing
Center > Connections: Ethernet".

4. In the "Ethernet Status" dialog box, select the "Properties" button.

The items used by the LAN connection are displayed.

5. Tap the entry named "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" to highlight it.
6. Select the "Properties" button.
7. On the "General" tab, select "Use the following DNS server addresses" and enter
your own DNS addresses.
For more information, refer to the Windows operating system help.
5.2.5.3 Using Computer Names
In a LAN that uses a DNS server (Domain Name System server), each PC or instru-
ment connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name
instead of the IP address. The DNS server translates the host name to the IP address.
This is especially useful when a DHCP server is used, as a new IP address may be
assigned each time the instrument is restarted.
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be
changed.
The default instrument name is a non-case-sensitive string with the following syntax:

<Type><variant>-<serial_number>
The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument. It is the third part
of the device ID printed on the bar code sticker:
For example, FSV4-123456
To change the computer name

1. Press the SETUP key and select "General setup" > "Computer name".
The current computer name is displayed here.
2. Enter the new computer name.
3. Confirm the entry.
5.2.5.4 Changing the Windows Firewall Settings
A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access

to it through a network. Rohde & Schwarz highly recommends the use of the firewall on
your instrument. Rohde & Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall
enabled and preconfigured in such a way that all ports and connections for remote
control are enabled.
For more details on firewall configuration, see the following Rohde & Schwarz White
Paper:
● 1EF96: Malware Protection Windows 10
Note that changing firewall settings requires administrator rights.
5.2.6 How to Configure the LAN Using the LXI Web Browser Interface
The instrument's LXI browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant brows-
ers.
► In the web browser, open the http://<instrument-hostname> or http://

<instrument-ip-address> page, e.g. http://10.113.10.203.
The default password to change LAN configurations is LxiWebIfc.
The "Instrument Home Page" (welcome page) opens.

The instrument home page displays the device information required by the LXI stan-
dard including the VISA resource string in read-only format.
► Press the "Device Indicator" button on the "Instrument Home Page" to activate or
deactivate the LXI status icon on the status bar of the R&S FSVA/FSV. A green
LXI status symbol indicates that a LAN connection has been established; a red
symbol indicates an error, for example, that no LAN cable is connected. When a
device is connecting to the instrument, the LXI logo blinks. The "Device Indicator"
setting is not password-protected.
The most important control elements in the navigation pane of the browser interface
are the following:
● "LAN Configuration" opens the menu with configuration pages.
● "Status" displays information about the LXI status of the instrument.
● "Help > Glossary" opens a document with a glossary of terms related to the LXI
standard.

5.2.6.1 LAN Configuration
The LAN configuration consists of three parts:

● "IP configuration" provides all mandatory LAN parameters.
● "Advanced LAN Configuration" provides LAN settings that are not declared manda-
tory by the LXI standard.
● "Ping Client" provides the ping utility to verify the connection between the instru-
ment and other devices.
IP Configuration
The "LAN Configuration > IP configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN
parameters and allows their modification.
The "TCP/IP Mode" configuration field controls how the IP address for the instrument
gets assigned (see also Chapter 5.2.5.2, "Assigning the IP Address", on page 586).
For the manual configuration mode, the static IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway are used to configure the LAN. The automatic configuration mode uses DHCP
server or Dynamic Link Local Addressing (Automatic IP) to obtain the instrument IP
address.
Changing the LAN configuration is password-protected. The default password is Lxi-

WebIfc (notice upper and lower case characters).
Advanced LAN Configuration

The "LAN Configuration > Advanced LAN Configuration" parameters are used as fol-
lows:
● The "Negotiation" configuration field provides different Ethernet speed and duplex
mode settings. In general, the "Auto Detect" mode is sufficient.
● "ICMP Ping" must be enabled to use the ping utility.
● "VXI-11" is the protocol that is used to detect the instrument in the LAN. According
to the standard, LXI devices must use VXI-11 to provide a detection mechanism;
other additional detection mechanisms are permitted.
● mDNS and DNS-SD are two additional protocols: Multicast DNS and DNS Service
Discovery. They are used for device communication in zero configuration networks
working without DNS and DHCP
Ping Client
Ping is a utility that verifies the connection between the LXI-compliant instrument and
another device. The ping command uses the ICMP echo request and echo reply pack-
ets to determine whether the LAN connection is functional. Ping is useful for diagnos-
ing IP network or router failures. The ping utility is not password-protected.
To initiate a ping between the LXI-compliant instrument and a second connected
device:

1. Enable "ICMP Ping" on the "Advanced LAN Configuration" page (enabled after an
LCI).
2. Enter the IP address of the second device without the ping command and with-
out any further parameters into the "Destination Address" field (e.g.
10.113.10.203).
3. Select "Submit".
5.2.7 Configuring the Network
After network support has been installed, data can be exchanged between the instru-
ment and other computers, and network printers can be used.
Network operation is only possible if you are authorized to access network resources.
Typical resources are file directories of other computers or even central printers.
Authorization is assigned by the network or server administrator.
Connection to networks
Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network, consult
your network administrator, particularly for large LAN installations. Errors may affect
the entire network.
Never connect your analyzer to a network unprotected against virus infection because
this may cause damage to the instrument software.
To integrate the instrument into your network, you can change the following system
properties:
● Computer name
● Domain
● Workgroup
Operation on the network includes the following administrative tasks:
● Operating the Instrument Without a Network........................................................ 593
● Creating Users...................................................................................................... 594
● Changing the User Password............................................................................... 594
● Mapping Network Drives....................................................................................... 595
● Sharing Directories (only with Microsoft Networks)...............................................596
5.2.7.1 Operating the Instrument Without a Network
To operate the instrument without a network connection either temporarily or perma-

nently, no special measures are necessary. Windows automatically detects the inter-
ruption of the network connection and does not set up the connection when the instru-
ment is switched on.

If you are not prompted to enter the user name and password, see "Automatic Login
Function" on page 45.
5.2.7.2 Creating Users
After the software for the network has been installed, the instrument issues an error
message the next time it is switched on because there is no user named "instrument"
(= user ID for Windows automatic login) in the network. Thus, a matching user must be
created in Windows and in the network, the password must be adapted to the network
password, and the automatic login mechanism must then be deactivated.
The network administrator is responsible for creating new users in the network.
2. Select "Start > Settings > Accounts > Other users".
3. Select "Add someone else to this PC".
4. In the "Microsoft account" dialog box, enter the new user name and password.
5. Select "OK".
6. Select "Finish".
The new user is created.
5.2.7.3 Changing the User Password
After the new user has been created on the instrument, the password must be adapted
to the network password.
2. Press CTRL + ALT + DELETE, then select "Change a password".
3. Enter the user account name.
4. Enter the old password.
5. Enter the new password in the upper text line and repeat it in the following line.
6. Press ENTER.
The new password is now active.
Logging on to the Network

At the same time you log on to the operating system, you are automatically logged on
to the network (see "Automatic Login Function" on page 45). As a prerequisite, the
user name and the password must be identical under Windows and on the network.

5.2.7.4 Mapping Network Drives
1. Press the SAVE/ RCL key on the front panel of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
2. Press the "File Manager" softkey.
4. Press the "Network Drive" softkey.

The "Map Network Drive" dialog box is displayed.
5. Press the "Drive" list to open the network drive list and select the drive you want to
map.
Alternatively:
● Press the "Map Network Drive" softkey to set the focus on the "Drive" list.
● Press ENTER to open the network drive list and select the drive you want to
map using the arrow keys.
6. To have the connection set up automatically each time the instrument is started, in
the "Map Network Drive" dialog box, activate the "Reconnect at logon" option.
7. To connect using a different user name, activate the "Connect using a different
user name" option.
The "Map Network Drive" dialog box is extended by the "User name" and "Pass-
word" fields.
8. Enter your user name and password.
9. Confirm with "OK".

The drive is displayed in the Explorer.

Remote Control – Commands
Note: Only networks that you authorized to access are connected.
Disconnecting network drives

1. Press the SAVE/ RCL key on the front panel of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
2. Press the "File Manager" softkey.
4. Press the "Network Drive" softkey.
5. Press the "Disconnect Network Drive" softkey.

The "Disconnect Network Drive" dialog box is displayed.
6. In the "Drive" list, select the drive you want to disconnect.
7. Confirm with "OK".
5.2.7.5 Sharing Directories (only with Microsoft Networks)
Sharing directories makes data available for other users. This is only possible in Micro-
soft networks. Sharing is a property of a file or directory.
2. Open the "Windows Explorer".
3. Select the desired folder with the right mouse button.
4. In the context menu, select "Share with > Specific people".
5. Select the users on your network you want to allow access to the directory to.
6. Select "Share" to confirm the settings.
7. Select "Done" to close the dialog box.

The drive is shared and can be accessed by the selected users.
5.3 Remote Control – Commands

This chapter describes all remote control commands for the "Spectrum" mode (Ana-
lyzer) functions, and the basic measurment-mode independant functions of the
R&S FSVA/FSV in detail.
Each subsystem starts with a list of commands, which provides quick access to all
commands of the subsystem. Be aware, that for one subsystem more than one SCPI
command lists can exist, depending on the functionality (analyzer and basic functions,
and possibly firmware-option specific functions). For details on the notation refer to
Chapter 5.3.1, "Notation", on page 597.

Remote commands of the base unit firmware

● Chapter 5.3.3, "Remote Control – Description of Analyzer Commands",
on page 604
● Chapter 5.3.4, "Remote Control – Description of Measurement-Independant Com-
mands", on page 906
5.3.1 Notation
In the following sections, all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed
and then described in detail, arranged according to the command subsystems. The
notation is adapted to the SCPI standard. The SCPI conformity information is included
in the individual description of the commands.
Individual Description
The individual description contains the complete notation of the command. An example
for each command, the *RST value and the SCPI information are included as well.
The options and operating modes for which a command can be used are indicated by
the following abbreviations:
Abbreviation Description
A spectrum analysis
A-F spectrum analysis – span > 0 only (frequency mode)
A-T spectrum analysis – zero span only (time mode)
ADEMOD analog demodulation (option R&S FSV-K7)
BT Bluetooth (option R&S FSV-K8)
CDMA CDMA 2000 base station measurements (option R&S FSV-K82)
EVDO 1xEV-DO base station analysis (option R&S FSV-K84)
GSM GSM/Edge measurements (option R&S FSV-K10)
IQ IQ Analyzer mode
OFDM WiMAX IEEE 802.16 OFDM measurements (option R&S FSV-K93)
OFDMA/WiBro WiMAX IEEE 802.16e OFDMA/WiBro measurements (option R&S FSV-K93)
NF Noise Figure measurements (R&S FSV-K30)
PHN Phase Noise measurements (R&S FSV-K40)
PSM Power Sensor measurements (option R&S FSV-K9)
SFM Stereo FM measurements (optionR&S FSV-K7S)
SPECM Spectogram mode (option R&S FSV-K14)
TDS TD-SCDMA base station / UE measurements (option R&S FSV-K76/K77)
VSA Vector Signal Analysis (option R&S FSV-K70)

WCDMA 3GPP Base Station measurements (option R&S FSV-K72), 3GPP UE measure-
ments (option R&S FSV-K73)
WLAN WLAN TX measurements (option R&S FSV-K91)
The spectrum analysis mode is implemented in the basic unit. For the other modes, the
corresponding options are required.
Upper/Lower Case Notation

Upper/lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a
command in the description. The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper
and lower case letters.
Special Characters
| A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands. These keywords
are indicated in the same line; they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these key-
words needs to be included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is inde-
pendent of which of the keywords is used.
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:CW|:FIXed
The two following commands with identical meaning can be created. They set the fre-
quency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz:
SENSe:FREQuency:CW 1E3
SENSe:FREQuency:FIXed 1E3
A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of
"or". The effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used.
Example: Selection of the parameters for the command
[SENSe<1…4>:]AVERage<1…4>:TYPE VIDeo | LINear
[] Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header. The full command
length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards.
Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as
well.
{} Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command, either not at all, once or
several times.
Description of Parameters
Due to the standardization, the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always
of the same syntactical elements. SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions,
which are used in the tables of commands. In the tables, these established definitions
are indicated in angled brackets (<…>) and is briefly explained in the following.

For details see Chapter 5.1.4.3, "SCPI Parameters", on page 549.
<Boolean>
This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states, "on" and "off". The "off"
state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0, the "on"
state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero. Parameter queries are
always returned the numeric value 0 or 1.
<numeric_value> <num>
These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set
using specific keywords (character data). The following keywords given below are per-
mitted:
● MAXimum: This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value.
● MINimum: This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value.
● DEFault: This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value.
● UP: This keyword increments the parameter value.
● DOWN: This keyword decrements the parameter value.
The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be queried by
adding the corresponding keywords to the command. They must be entered following
the quotation mark.
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer? MAXimum
Returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result.
<arbitrary block program data>

This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary
data block.
5.3.2 Common Commands
Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These
commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devi-
ces. The headers of these commands consist of "*" followed by three letters. Many
common commands are related to the Status Reporting System.
Available common commands:
*CAL?...........................................................................................................................600
*CLS.............................................................................................................................600
*ESE.............................................................................................................................600
*ESR?...........................................................................................................................600
*IDN?............................................................................................................................601
*IST?............................................................................................................................ 601
*OPC............................................................................................................................ 601

*OPT?...........................................................................................................................602
*PCB............................................................................................................................ 602
*PRE............................................................................................................................ 602
*PSC............................................................................................................................ 602
*RST.............................................................................................................................603
*SRE............................................................................................................................ 603
*STB?...........................................................................................................................603
*TRG............................................................................................................................ 603
*TST?........................................................................................................................... 604
*WAI.............................................................................................................................604
*CAL?
Calibration query
Initiates a calibration of the instrument and subsequently queries the calibration status.
Responses > 0 indicate errors.
Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the
alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state
after the alignment is completed.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Self Alignment" on page 145
*CLS
Clear status
Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of
the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not
alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
Usage: Setting only
*ESE <Value>
Event status enable
Sets the event status enable register to the specified value. The query returns the con-
tents of the event status enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value> Range: 0 to 255
*ESR?
Event status read
Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently
sets the register to zero.

Return values:
<Contents> Range: 0 to 255
Usage: Query only
*IDN? <Format>
Identification
Returns the instrument identification.
Query parameters:
<Format> LEGacy | NEW
LEGacy
"Rohde&Schwarz,<device type>,<serial number>/
<model>,<firmware version>"
NEW
"Rohde&Schwarz,<device type>,<part number>/<serial num-
ber>,<firmware version>"
Example: Legacy format:
Rohde&Schwarz,R&S FSV-7,101768/007,1.05
New format:
Rohde&Schwarz,R&S
FSV-7,1307.9002K07/101768,1.05
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "*IDN Format Leg./New" on page 152
See "Versions+Options" on page 158
*IST?
Individual status query
Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form. The IST flag is the status bit
which is sent during a parallel poll.
Return values:
<ISTflag> 0|1
Usage: Query only
*OPC
Operation complete
Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu-
ted. This bit can be used to initiate a service request. The query form writes a "1" into
the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed. This is
used for command synchronization.

*OPT?
Option identification query
Queries the options included in the instrument. For a list of all available options and
their description refer to the data sheet.
Return values:
<Options> The query returns a list of all installed and activated options,
separated by commas, where:
B<number> describes hardware options
K<number> describes software options
For PSA89600 emulation, the option is indicated as "B7J" for the
*OPT? query ("B7J, 140" if SYST:PSA:WID is activated).
(See SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband on page 963.)
Note that B99 indicates the R&S FSVA models (as opposed to
the R&S FSV models).
Example: B4,B5,B6,B7,B8,B10,B22,B30,B31,K7,K9
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Versions+Options" on page 158
*PCB <Address>
Pass control back
Indicates the controller address to which remote control is returned after termination of
the triggered action.
Setting parameters:
<Address> Range: 0 to 30
Usage: Setting only
*PRE <Value>
Parallel poll register enable
Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value. The query returns the contents
of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value> Range: 0 to 255
*PSC <Action>
Power on status clear
Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when
the instrument is switched on. Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru-
ment is switched on, if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured. The
query reads out the contents of the "power-on-status-clear" flag.

Parameters:
<Action> 0|1
0
The contents of the status registers are preserved.
1
Resets the status registers.
*RST
Reset
Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the
description of commands.
The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet.
Note that the factory set default values can be modified to user-defined settings (see
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 934). For more details on default values see Chap-
ter 4.2.1, "Initializing the Configuration – PRESET Key", on page 183.
Usage: Setting only
*SRE <Contents>
Service request enable
Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. This command deter-
mines under which conditions a service request is triggered.
Parameters:
<Contents> Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form.
Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) is always 0.
Range: 0 to 255
*STB?
Status byte query
Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
Usage: Query only
*TRG
Trigger
Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event. In particular, *TRG generates a manual
trigger signal. This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger
subsystem.
*TRG corresponds to the INITiate:IMMediate command. For details, see the
"Remote Control - Description of Analyzer Commands", "TRIGger Subsystem".

Usage: Event
*TST?
Self-test query
Initiates self-tests of the instrument and returns an error code
Note: If you start a self-test remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the test is
still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is
completed. In this case, the self-test cannot be aborted.
Return values:
<ErrorCode> integer > 0 (in decimal format)
An error occurred.
(For details see the Service Manual supplied with the instru-
ment).
0
No errors occurred.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Selftest" on page 162
*WAI
Wait to continue
Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have
been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and
*OPC).
Usage: Event
5.3.3 Remote Control – Description of Analyzer Commands
In this section all remote control commands for "Spectrum" mode functions are descri-
bed in detail. For details on commands that are independant of a particular measure-
ment mode refer to Chapter 5.3.4, "Remote Control – Description of Measurement-
Independant Commands", on page 906.
Subsystems of the analyzer

● ABORt Subsystem................................................................................................ 605
● CALCulate Subsystem.......................................................................................... 605
● CALibration:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9)......................... 736
● DISPlay Subsystem.............................................................................................. 736
● DISPlay Commands for Spectrograms................................................................. 745
● FETCh:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9).................................747
● FORMat Subsytem................................................................................................747
● INITiate Subsystem...............................................................................................748
● INPut Subsystem.................................................................................................. 751

● INSTrument Subsystem........................................................................................ 758

● MMEMory Subsystem........................................................................................... 761
● OUTPut Subsystem.............................................................................................. 764
● PROBe subsystem................................................................................................766
● READ:PMETer Subsystem................................................................................... 768
● SENSe Subsystem................................................................................................768
● SOURce Subsystem............................................................................................. 853
● STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem.......................................................................863
● SYSTem Subsystem............................................................................................. 873
● TRACe Subsystem................................................................................................879
● TRIGger Subsystem..............................................................................................897
● UNIT Subsystem................................................................................................... 903
● Formats for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary Format..........................905
5.3.3.1 ABORt Subsystem
The ABORt subsystem contains the commands for aborting triggered actions. An
action can be triggered again immediately after being aborted. All commands trigger
events, and therefore they have no *RST value.
ABORt
This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system.
Example: ABOR;INIT:IMM
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Meas Start/Stop" on page 325
5.3.3.2 CALCulate Subsystem
The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data, trans-
forming and carrying out corrections. These functions are carried out subsequent to
data acquisition, i.e. following the SENSe subsystem.
Some applications offer up to four measurement windows. For those, the suffix <n> for
CALCulate selects the measurement window. For all other applications, the suffix is
irrelevant.
● CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem...................................................................606
● CALCulate:DELTamarker:SGRam subsystem..................................................... 619
● CALCulate:DLINe Subsystem...............................................................................625
● CALCulate:ESPectrum Subsystem.......................................................................626
● CALCulate:FLINe Subsystem............................................................................... 627
● CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem................................................................................. 628
● CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower Subsystem................................................................. 633
● CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol Subsystem.................................................................. 641
● CALCulate:LIMit:ESPectrum subsystem...............................................................644
● CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer Subsystem.....................................................................648

● CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer Subsystem......................................................................651
● CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem........................................................................... 655
● CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion Subsystem...........................................................669
● CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:HARMonics Subsystem.......................................686
● CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer Subsystem..............................................690
● CALCulate:MARKer:SGRam subsystem.............................................................. 697
● Predefined CP/ACLR Standards...........................................................................703
● CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack Subsystem.............................................704
● CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary Subsystem..........................................706
● CALCulate:MATH Subsystem...............................................................................719
● CALCulate:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9)...........................721
● CALCulate:PSEarch|PEAKsearch Subsystem..................................................... 722
● CALCulate:SGRam Subsystem............................................................................ 724
● CALCulate:STATistics Subsystem........................................................................728
● CALCulate:THReshold Subsystem....................................................................... 733
● CALCulate:TLINe Subsystem............................................................................... 734
● CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem.................................................................................735
● Other commands in the Calculate subsystem.......................................................735
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem
The CALCulate:DELTamarker subsystem controls the delta marker functions of the
instrument.
Commands of the CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe].......................................................................607
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF.......................................................................... 607
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE............................................ 607
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?..........................................608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN............................................. 608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe]..........................................608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe].............................................. 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK].................... 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X............................................ 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y............................................ 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet................................ 611
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe]........................................... 611
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO.............................................. 612
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?........................................... 612
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK........................................................................... 612
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE.........................................................................613
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]........................................................ 613
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT...........................................................614
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT.......................................................... 614
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt..........................................................614
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]......................................................... 615
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT............................................................615
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt...........................................................616
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT........................................................... 616
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREF......................................................................... 617

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe........................................................................ 617
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X................................................................................ 617
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative?.................................................................618
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?...............................................................................618
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns delta markers on and off.
If the corresponding marker was a normal marker, it is turned into a delta marker.
No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1.
Suffix: .
<n> Selects the measurement window.
<m> Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT1 ON
Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode.
Manual operation: See "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker
Norm/Delta" on page 250
See "Marker Wizard" on page 251
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF
This command turns all active delta markers off.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:DELT:AOFF
Switches off all delta markers.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the results for a band power delta marker are dis-
played.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant

Parameters:
<Mode> POWer
Result is displayed as a power in dBm.
DENSity
Result is displayed as a density in dBm/Hz.
*RST: POW
Example: CALC:DELT:BPOW:MODE DENS
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?
This command queries the results of the band power measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Return values:
<Power> Signal power over the delta marker bandwidth.
Example: Activate the delta band power marker:
CALC:DELT:BPOW:STAT ON
Select the density mode for the result:
CALC:DELT:BPOW:MODE DENS
Query the result:
CALC:DELT:BPOW:RES?
Response:
20dBm/Hz
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN 
This command defines the bandwidth around the delta marker position. The span is
indicated by lines in the diagram.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
 Numeric value that defines the span in Hz.
The maximum span depends on the marker position and
R&S FSVA/FSV model.
*RST: 5% of current span
Example: CALC:DELT:BPOW:SPAN 20
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] <State>
This command turns delta markers for band power measurements on and off.

If neccessary, the command also turns on a reference marker.

For details see Chapter 4.3.3.8, "Performing Band Power Measurements",
on page 269.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
When switched to on, if no marker is active yet, marker 1 is acti-
vated. Otherwise, the currently active marker is used as a delta
band power marker (all other marker functions for this marker
are deactivated).
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:BPOW:STAT ON
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] <State>
This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off.
Marker 1 is activated previously and a peak search is performed, if necessary. If
marker 1 is activated, its position becomes the reference point for the measurement.
The reference point can then be modified with the CALCulate<n>:
DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X commands and CALCulate<n>:
DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y independently of the position of
marker 1 and of a trace. It applies to all delta markers as long as the function is active.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX ON
Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all
delta markers.
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHZ
Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz.
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y 30 DBM
Sets the reference level to +30 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Ref. Fixed On/Off" on page 260
This command moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power.

When measuring the phase noise, the command defines a new reference point level
for delta marker 2.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:MAX
Sets the reference point level for delta markers to the peak of
the selected trace.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Peak Search" on page 259
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X <Reference>
This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point.
The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram.
When measuring the phase noise, the command defines the frequency reference for
delta marker 2.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Reference> Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the refer-
ence.
For frequency domain measurements, it is a frequency in Hz.
For time domain measurements, it is a point in time in s.
*RST: Fixed reference: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHz
Manual operation: See "Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero
span)" on page 259
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y <RefPointLevel>
This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point.
The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram.
When measuring the phase noise, the command defines the level reference for delta
marker 2.
Suffix: .

Parameters:
<RefPointLevel> Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference.
The unit and value range is variable.
*RST: Fixed reference: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y -10dBm
Sets the reference point level for delta markers to -10 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Ref Point Level" on page 259
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines a level offset for the fixed delta marker reference point.
When measuring the phase noise, the command defines an additional level offset for
delta marker 2.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Offset> Level offset that is added to the display of all delta markers.
*RST: 0 dB
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFS 10dB
Sets the level offset for the measurement with fixed reference
value or the phase-noise measurement to 10 dB.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and
off.
The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in
the measurement.
The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a
fixed reference. If necessary, the command turns on the reference marker
A fixed reference point can be modified with the CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:
FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X and CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:
FIXed:RPOint:Y commands independent of the position of marker 1 and of a trace.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Note: marker 2 is always the deltamarker for phase noise mea-
surement results.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO ON
Switches on the phase-noise measurement with all delta mark-
ers.
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHZ
CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y 30 DBM
Sets the reference level to +30 dBm
Manual operation: See "Phase Noise On/Off" on page 259
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO <State>
This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the
end of a sweep on and off.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:AUTO ON
Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in
a phase-noise measurement.
Manual operation: See "Ph. Noise Auto Peak Search" on page 259
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?
This command queries the result of the phase noise measurement.
If necessary, the command activates the measurement first..
Suffix: .
<m> 2
Marker 2 is always the deltamarker for phase noise measure-
ments.
Example: CALC:DELT2:FUNC:PNO:RES?
Outputs the result of phase-noise measurement of the delta-
marker 2.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Phase Noise On/Off" on page 259
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK <State>
This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1.

If you change the horizontal position of the marker, so does the delta marker.
Suffix: .
<m> 1
irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DELT:LINK ON
Manual operation: See "Link Mkr1 and Delta1" on page 253
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the delta marker mode.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Delta marker position in absolute terms.
RELative
Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker.
*RST: REL
Example: CALC:DELT:MODE ABS
Absolute delta marker position.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum. If necessary,
the corresponding delta marker is activated first.
In "Spectrogram" mode, this command positions the specified delta marker on the cur-
rent peak level of the x-axis. The search is performed within the current frame. It does
not change the position of the deltamarker on the y-axis.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:DELT3:MAX
Sets delta marker 3 to the maximum value of the associated
trace.
Manual operation: See "Peak" on page 272
See "Marker Search Type" on page 276

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left
of the current value (i.e. descending X values). The corresponding delta marker is acti-
vated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
In "Spectrogram" mode, this command positions the specified delta marker on the next
peak level of the x-axis. The search includes only the data to the left of the current
marker position in the current frame. It does not change the position of the deltamarker
on the y-axis.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:DELT:MAX:LEFT
Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the
left of the current value.
Manual operation: See "Next Mode" on page 274
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum. The cor-
responding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
peak level of the x-axis. The search includes the data in both directions of the current
marker position in the current frame. It does not change the position of the delta
marker on the y-axis.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:DELT2:MAX:NEXT
Sets delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum value.
Manual operation: See "Next Peak" on page 272
See "Next Mode" on page 274
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the
right of the current value (i.e. ascending X values). The corresponding delta marker is
activated first, if necessary.

peak level of the x-axis. The search includes only the data to the right of the current
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:DELT:MAX:RIGH
Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the
right of the current value.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current trace minimum. The corre-
sponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
In "Spectrogram" mode, this command positions the specified delta marker on the cur-
rent minimum level of the x-axis. The search is performed within a specific frame. It
does not change the position of the deltamarker on the y-axis.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:DELT3:MIN
Sets delta marker 3 to the minimum value of the associated
trace.
Manual operation: See "Min" on page 272
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left
of the current value (i.e. descending X values). The corresponding delta marker is acti-
minimum level of the x-axis. The search includes only the data to the left of the current

Suffix: .
Example: CALC:DELT:MIN:LEFT
Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum to the left of the
current value.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right
of the current value (i.e. ascending X values). The corresponding delta marker is acti-
minimum level of the x-axis. The search includes only the data to the right of the cur-
rent marker position in the current frame. It does not change the position of the delta
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:DELT:MIN:RIGH
Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum value to the
right of the current value.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum. The corre-
sponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
minimum level of the x-axis. The search includes the data in both directions of the cur-
rent marker position in the current frame. It does not change the position of the delta
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:DELT2:MIN:NEXT
Sets delta marker 2 to the next higher minimum value.

Manual operation: See "Next Min" on page 273

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREF <RefMarkerNo>
This command defines the reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1.
The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<RefMarkerNo> 1 ... 16
Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference.
FIXed
Selects the fixed reference as the reference.
Example: CALC:DELT3:MREF 2
Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker
2.
Manual operation: See "Marker Wizard" on page 251
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on.
The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than "Blank".
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<TraceNumber> 1 ... 6
Trace number the marker is positioned on.
Example: CALC:DELT3:TRAC 2
Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2.
Manual operation: See "Marker to Trace" on page 251
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X <Position>
This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x-axis.
The position is an absolute value.
You can enter a relative value, if you activate relative entry first with CALCulate<n>:
DELTamarker<m>:MODE.

If fixed reference is active, the position is relative to the fixed reference

(CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] is ON). A query
always returns the absolute position.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Position> 0 to maximum frequency or sweep time
Example: CALC:DELT:X?
Outputs the absolute frequency/time of delta marker 1.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative?
This command queries the x-value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or
to the reference position (for CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:STAT ON). The command acti-
vates the corresponding delta marker, if necessary.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:DELT3:X:REL?
Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or
relative to the reference position.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?
This command queries the measured value of a delta marker. The corresponding delta
marker is activated, if necessary. The output is always a relative value referred to
marker 1 or to the reference position (reference fixed active).
To obtain a correct query result, a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep
end must be performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the
y value. This is only possible in single sweep mode.
Depending on the unit defined with CALC:UNIT:POW or on the activated measuring
functions, the query result is output in the units below:

Table 5-17: Base unit
Parameter, measuring function or result display Output unit
DBM | DBPW | DBUV | DBMV | DBUA dB (lin/log)
WATT | VOLT | AMPere dB (lin), % (log)
statistics function (APD or CCDF) on dimensionless output
Suffix: .
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
CALC:DELT2 ON
Switches on delta marker 2.
CALC:DELT2:Y?
Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate:DELTamarker:SGRam subsystem
The following commands control the deltamarkers when you are using the spectro-
gram.
The spectrogram is available if option R&S FSV-K14 is installed.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe........................................................... 619
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea............................................................620
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK].......................................621
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]........................................621
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe........................................ 622
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow......................................... 622
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT...........................................623
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK].........................................623
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe..........................................623
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow.......................................... 624
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT............................................624
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]..........................................625
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe <Frame> | <Time>

This command positions the delta marker on a particular frame. The frame is relative to
the position of marker 1.
The command is available for the spectrogram.

Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Selects the measurement window.
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Frame> | <Time> <Frame> (if time stamp is off)
Defines the distance of the deltamarker in frames and in relation
to the position of marker 1.
<time> (if time stamp is on)
Defines the distance of the deltamarker in seconds and in rela-
tion to the position of marker 1. The reference is the time stamp
of marker 1.
Example: CALC:DELT4:SGR:FRAM -20
Sets fourth deltamarker 20 frames below marker 1.
CALC:DELT4:SGR:FRAM 2 s
Sets fourth deltamarker 2 seconds above the position of marker
1.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea <SearchArea>
This command defines the deltamarker search area.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<SearchArea> VISible
Performs a search in the visible frames.
Note that VISible is ignored if Spectrogram is not visible for any
reason (e.g. if the Spectrum Analyzer is in full screen mode or
display update is inactive).
MEMory
Performs a search over all frames in the memory.
*RST: VISible
Example: CALC:DELT:SGR:SAR MEM
Manual operation: See "Marker Search Area" on page 276

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified delta marker on the current peak level of the
spectrogram. The possible position depends on the deltamarker search area.
For more information, see CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea
on page 620.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:SAR VIS
CALC:DELT2:SGR:XY:MAX
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the peak level in the
visible Spectrogram.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Marker Search Type" on page 276
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified delta marker on the current minimum level of the
spectrogram. The possible position depends on the deltamarker search area.
For more information, see CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea
on page 620.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT3:SGR:SAR VIS
CALC:DELT3:SGR:XY:MIN
Activates and positions delta marker 3 on the minimum level in
the visible Spectrogram.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe
This command positions the specified delta marker on the next peak level of the verti-
cal axis. The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does
not change the horizontal position of the delta marker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the peak level of the y-
axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX:ABOV
Positions delta marker 2 on the next higher level found in the
diagram area above the current marker position.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow
cal axis. The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does
not change the horizontal position of the delta marker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX:BEL
Positions delta marker 2 on the next higher level found in the
diagram area below the current marker position.
Usage: Event

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT
cal axis. The search includes frames above and below the current marker position. It
does not change the horizontal position of the delta marker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX:NEXT
Positions delta marker 2 on the next higher level.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified delta marker on the current peak level of the ver-
tical axis. The search is performed over all frames. It does not change the horizontal
position of the deltamarker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
axis.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe
This command positions the specified delta marker on the next minimum level of the
vertical axis. The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It

Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MIN
Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the minimum level of
the y-axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MIN:ABOV
Positions delta marker 2 on the next minimum level found in the
diagram area above the current marker position.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow
vertical axis. The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
the y-axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX:BEL
Positions delta marker 2 on the next minimum level found in the
diagram area below the current marker position.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT
vertical axis. The search includes frames above and below the current marker position.
It does not change the horizontal position of the delta marker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4

<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
the y-axis.
CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MIN:NEXT
Positions delta marker 2 on the next minimum level.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified delta marker on the current minimum level of the
vertical axis. The search is performed over all captured frames. It does not change the
horizontal position of the delta marker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
the y-axis.
Usage: Event
CALCulate:DLINe Subsystem
The CALCulate:DLINe subsystem defines the position of the display lines.
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k>................................................................................................625
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k>:STATe.....................................................................................626
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k> <Position>
This command defines the (vertical) position of a display line.
Suffix: .
<k> 1|2
Selects the display line.

Parameters:
<Position> The value range is variable.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
*RST: (state is OFF)
Example: CALC:DLIN -20dBm
Manual operation: See "Display Line 1 / Display Line 2" on page 389
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k>:STATe <State>
This command turns a display line on and off.
Suffix: .
<k> 1|2
Selects the display line.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:DLIN2:STAT OFF
Manual operation: See "Display Line 1 / Display Line 2" on page 389
CALCulate:ESPectrum Subsystem
The CALCulate:ESPectrum subsystem contains the remote commands for Spectrum
Emission Mask (SEM) measurements. Both groups of commands (PSEarch and
PEAKsearch) perform the same functions.
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:[IMMediate].......................................... 626
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:AUTO.................................................. 626
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:MARGin...............................................627
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:PSHow................................................ 627
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:[IMMediate]
This command starts the list evaluation.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:AUTO <State>
This command activates or deactivates the list evaluation.

Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the list evaluation.
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:MARGin <Margin>
This command sets the margin used for the limit check/peak search.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Margin> -200 to 200 dB
*RST: 200 dB
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:MARG 100
Sets the margin to 100 dB.
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:PSHow <State>
This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:PSH ON
Marks all peaks with blue squares.
Manual operation: See "Show Peaks" on page 322
CALCulate:FLINe Subsystem
The CALCulate:FLINe subsystem defines the position of the frequency lines.
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k>................................................................................................627
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k>:STATe.....................................................................................628
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k> <Frequency>
This command defines the position of a frequency line.
Suffix: .

<k> 1|2
Selects the frequency line.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Range: 0 Hz to fmax
*RST: (STATe to OFF)
Example: CALC:FLIN2 120MHz
Manual operation: See "Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 " on page 390
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k>:STATe <State>
This command turns a frequency line on and off.
Suffix: .
<k> 1|2
Selects the frequency line.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:FLIN2:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 " on page 390
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit subsystem contains commands for the limit lines and the corre-
sponding limit checks. Limit lines can be defined as upper or lower limit lines. The indi-
vidual Y values of the limit lines correspond to the values of the x-axis (CONTrol). The
number of X and Y values must be identical. For details on limit lines refer to Chap-
ter 4.3.7, "Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key", on page 385.
Further information
● Chapter 5.4.3, "Limit Lines and Limit Test", on page 1012
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACTive?.................................................................................... 629
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CLEar[:IMMediate]......................................................................629
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COMMent.................................................................................. 629
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COPY........................................................................................629
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete...................................................................................... 630
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?........................................................................................ 630
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:NAME....................................................................................... 631
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe.......................................................................................632
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT......................................................................................... 632
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:TRACe...................................................................................... 632

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACTive?
This command queries the names of all active limit lines.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
Return values:
<LimitLines> String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabeti-
cal order.
Example: CALC:LIM:ACT?
Queries the names of all active limit lines.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command deletes the result of the current limit check for all limit lines in all win-
dows.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
Example: CALC:LIM:CLE
Deletes the result of the limit check.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for the selected limit line in all windows.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the comment. The maximum number of char-
acters the string may contain is 40.
Example: CALC:LIM5:COMM 'Upper limit for spectrum'
Defines the comment for limit line 5.
Manual operation: See "Edit Comment" on page 387
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COPY <Line>
This command copies a limit line.

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Line> 1 to 8
number of the new limit line
<name>
String containing the name of the limit line.
Example: CALC:LIM1:COPY 2
Copies limit line 1 to line 2.
CALC:LIM1:COPY 'FM2'
Copies limit line 1 to a new line named FM2.
Manual operation: See "Copy to" on page 388
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete
This command deletes a limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: CALC:LIM1:DEL
Deletes limit line 1.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Delete" on page 389
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?
This command queries the result of a limit check.
Note that for SEM measurements, the limit line suffix <k> is irrelevant, as only one spe-
cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> limit line
For option WLAN TX Measurements, R&S FSV-K91/91n, see
table below

Return values:
<Result> 0
PASS
1
FAIL
Example: INIT;*WAI
Starts a new sweep and waits for its end.
CALC:LIM3:FAIL?
Queries the result of the check for limit line 3.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Limit Check 1-4" on page 319
See "Limit Check 1-4" on page 350
For option WLAN TX Measurements, R&S FSV-K91/91n, the numeric suffix <k> speci-
fies the limit lines as follows:
Suffix Limit
1 to 2 These indexes are not used
3 ETSI Spectrum Mask limit line
4 Spectrum Flatness (Upper) limit line
5 Spectrum Flatness (Lower) limit line
6 IEEE Spectrum Mask limit line
7 PVT Rising Edge max limit
8 PVT Rising Edge mean limit
9 PVT Falling Edge max limit
10 PVT Falling Edge mean limit
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:NAME <Name>
This command selects a limit line that already exists or defines a name for a new limit
line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8 (NF: 1...6)
Selects the limit line.
Parameters:
<Name> String containing the limit line name.
*RST: REM1 to REM8 for lines 1 to 8
Example: CALC:LIM1:NAME 'FM1'
Assigns the name FM1 to limit line 1.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe <State>
This command turns the limit check on and off.
To query the limit check result, use CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM:STAT ON
Switches on the limit check for limit line 1.
Manual operation: See "Select Traces to check" on page 387
See "Deselect All" on page 387
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT <Unit>
This command defines the unit of a limit line.
Upon selection of the unit DB the limit line is automatically switched to the relative
mode. For units different from DB the limit line is automatically switched to absolute
mode.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Unit> DBM | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA |
AMPere | DB | DBUV_M | DBUA_M | DEG | RAD | S | HZ |
PCT | (unitless)
If you select dB as the limit line unit, the command automatically
turns the limit line into a relative limit line.
In spectrum mode, units deg, rad, s, Hz and PCT are unavaila-
ble.
*RST: DBM
Example: CALC:LIM4:UNIT DBUV
Sets the unit of limit line 4 to dBµV.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command links a limit line to one or more traces.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

Parameters:
<TraceNumber> Range: 1 to 6
*RST: 1
Example: CALC:LIM2:TRAC 3
Assigns limit line 2 to trace 3.
Manual operation: See "Select Traces to check" on page 387
CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower subsystem defines the limit check for adjacent channel
power measurement.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe]...................................................................... 633
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]....................................................634
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe.........................................634
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute..................................................... 635
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe.......................................... 635
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult........................................................ 636
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<channel>[:RELative].................................... 637
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>[:RELative]:STATe........................ 638
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute.....................................638
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute:STATe..........................639
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:RESult?...................................... 640
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] <State>
This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent-channel power mea-
surements. The commands CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:
RELative]:STATe or CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ALTernate<Channel>[:RELative]:STATe must be used in addition to specify
whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper/lower adjacent channel or for
the alternate adjacent channels.
Suffix: .
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on the ACLR limit check.
Manual operation: See "Limit Checking" on page 299
See "Relative Limit" on page 300
See "Absolute Limit" on page 300

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] <LowerLimit>,
<UpperLimit>
This command defines the relative limit of the upper/lower adjacent channel for adja-
cent-channel power measurements. The reference value for the relative limit value is
the measured channel power.
It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon
as it is below the absolute limit value defined with the CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:
ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute command. This mechanism allows automatic check-
ing of the absolute basic values of adjacent-channel power as defined in mobile radio
standards.
Suffix: .
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<LowerLimit>, 0 to 100dB; the value for the lower limit must be lower than the
<UpperLimit> value for the upper limit
*RST: 0 dB
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB
Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper
adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe <State>
This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent chan-
nel when adjacent-channel power measurement is performed. Before this command,
the limit check must be activated using CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:
STATe].
The result can be queried with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:
RESult. Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on
the limit check and the result query, since otherwise no correct results are available.
Suffix: .
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF


CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and
upper adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on globally the limit check for the channel/adjacent
channel measurement.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON
Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent
channels.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON
Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent
channels.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?
Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute <LowerLimit>,
<UpperLimit>
This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower/upper adjacent channel
during adjacent-channel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power).
Note that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below
the relative limit value defined with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ACHannel[:RELative]. This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute
basic values of adjacent-channel power as defined in mobile radio standards.
Suffix: .
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<LowerLimit>, first value: -200DBM to 200DBM; limit for the lower and the
<UpperLimit> upper adjacent channel
*RST: -200DBM
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe <State>
This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent-chan-
nel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power) is performed. Before the com-
mand, the limit check for the channel/adjacent-channel measurement must be globally
switched on using CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe].

The result can be queried with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:

RESult. It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between
switching on the limit check and the result query, since otherwise no correct results are
available.
Suffix: .
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on globally the limit check for the channel/adjacent-
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:REL:STAT ON
Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent
channels.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON
Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent
channels.
INIT;*WAI
Manual operation: See "Absolute Limit" on page 300
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult
This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper/lower adjacent chan-
nel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed.
If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off, the command pro-
duces a query error.
Suffix: .
<k> irrelevant
Return values:
Result The result is returned in the form <result>, <result> where
<result> = PASSED | FAILED, and where the first returned value
denotes the lower, the second denotes the upper adjacent chan-
nel.


upper adjacent channel to -35 dB.
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON
Switches on the limit check for the adjacent channels.
INIT;*WAI
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<channel>[:RELative] <LowerLimit>,
<UpperLimit>
This command defines the limit for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent chan-
nel power measurements. The reference value for the relative limit value is the mea-
sured channel power.
Note that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below
the absolute limit defined with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute. This mechanism allows automatic checking of
the absolute basic values of adjacent-channel power as defined in mobile radio stand-
ards.
Suffix: .
<k> irrelevant
<Channel> 1...11
the alternate channel
Parameters:
<LowerLimit>, first value: 0 to 100dB; limit for the lower and the upper alternate
<UpperLimit> adjacent channel
*RST: 0 DB
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB, 30DB
second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel
power.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>[:RELative]:STATe
<State>
This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent
channel power measurements. Before the command, the limit check must be activated
using CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe].
The result can be queried with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ALTernate<channel>[:RELative]. Note that a complete measurement must be
performed between switching on the limit check and the result query, since otherwise
no correct results are obtained.
Suffix: .
<k> irrelevant
<Channel> 1...11
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
power.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
upper second alternate adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:STAT ON
Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the lower
and upper second alternate adjacent channel.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS:STAT ON
Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the lower and
upper second alternate adjacent channel.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:RES?
Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent
channels.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute <LowerLimit>,
<UpperLimit>
This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower/upper alternate adjacent-
channel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power).

Note that the absolute limit value for the limit check has no effect as soon as it is below
the relative limit value defined with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ACHannel[:RELative]. This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute
basic values defined in mobile radio standards for the power in adjacent channels.
Suffix: .
<k> irrelevant
<Channel> 1...11
Parameters:
<LowerLimit>, first value: -200DBM to 200DBM; limit for the lower and the
<UpperLimit> upper alternate adjacent channel
*RST: -200DBM
Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute:STATe
<State>
This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adja-
cent-channel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power).
Before the command, the limit check must be globally switched on for the channel/
adjacent-channel power with the CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe]
command.
The result can be queried with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:
ALTernate<channel>[:RELative]. Note that a complete measurement must be
performed between switching on the limit check and the result query, since otherwise
no correct results are available.
Suffix: .
<k> irrelevant
<Channel> 1...11
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF


power.
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the lower
and upper second alternative adjacent channels.
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS:STAT ON
Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the lower and
upper second alternative adjacent channels.
INIT;*WAI
channels.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:RESult?
This command queries the result of the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels
for adjacent channel power measurements.
If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off, the command pro-
duces a query error.
Suffix: .
<k> irrelevant
<Channel> 1...11
Parameters:
The result is returned in the form <result>, <result> where
<result> = PASSED | FAILED and where the first (second)
returned value denotes the lower (upper) alternate adjacent
channel.


power.
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Switches on the limit check for the lower and upper second adja-
cent channel.
INIT;*WAI
channels.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol subsystem defines the x-axis (CONTrol axis).
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA].........................................................................641
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:DOMain....................................................................... 642
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:MODE......................................................................... 642
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:OFFSet........................................................................642
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:SHIFt...........................................................................643
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:SPACing...................................................................... 643
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints>
This command defines the horizontal definition points of a lower limit line.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<LimitLinePoints> Variable number of x-axis values.
Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as
the number of vertical values set with CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<k>:LOWer[:DATA] or CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:
UPPer[:DATA]. If not, the R&S FSVA/FSV either adds missing
values or ignores surplus values.
The unit is Hz or s, depending on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:
CONTrol:DOMain.
*RST: - (CALC:LIM is set to OFF)

Example: CALC:LIM2:CONT 1 MHz,30 MHz,100 MHz,300 MHz,1

GHz
Defines 5 reference values for the x-axis of limit line 2.
CALC:LIM2:CONT?
Outputs the reference values for the x-axis of limit line 2 separa-
ted by a comma.
Manual operation: See "Edit Value" on page 388
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:DOMain <SpanSetting>
This command selects the domain of the limit line.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<SpanSetting> FREQuency | TIME
*RST: FREQuency
Example: CALC:LIM2:CONT:DOM TIME
Defines zero span for the x-axis of limit line 2.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the horizontal limit line scaling.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Limit line is defined by absolute physical values (Hz or s).
RELative
Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre-
quency (frequency domain) or the left diagram border (time
domain).
*RST: ABSolute
Example: CALC:LIM2:CONT:MODE REL
Defines the x-axis of limit line 2 as relatively scaled.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete limit line.

Compared to shifting the limit line, an offset does not actually change the limit line defi-
nition points.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<Offset> Numeric value that defines the offset.
The unit of the offset depends on the scale of the x-axis.
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:LIM2:CONT:OFFS 100us
Sets the X offset for limit line 2 (defined in zero span) to 100µs.
Manual operation: See "X Offset" on page 389
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:SHIFt <Distance>
This command moves a complete limit line horizontally.
Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition
points by the value you define.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Distance> Numeric value that defines the distance of the shift.
The unit depends on the scale of the x-axis.
Example: CALC:LIM2:CONT:SHIF 50KHZ
Shifts all reference values of limit line 2 by 50 kHz.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:SPACing <InterpolMode>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines
from frequency points.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<InterpolMode> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LIN
Example: CALC:LIM:CONT:SPAC LIN

CALCulate:LIMit:ESPectrum subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit:ESPectrum subsystem defines the limit check for the Spec-
trum Emission Mask.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:LIMits.......................................................................644
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:MODE......................................................................644
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>[:EXCLusive]......................................645
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:COUNt............................................. 645
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:LIMit[:STATe]....................................646
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MAXimum........................................ 646
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MINimum..........................................647
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:RESTore.................................................................. 647
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:VALue......................................................................647
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:LIMits <Limits>
This command sets or queries up to 4 power classes in one step.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Limits> 1–3 numeric values between -200 and 200, separated by com-
mas
-200, <0-3 numeric values between -200 and 200, in ascending
order, separated by commas>, 200
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:LIM -50,50,70
Defines the following power classes:
<-200, -50>
<-50, 50>
<50, 70>
<70, 200>
Query:
CALC:LIM:ESP:LIM?
Response:
-200,-50,50,70,200
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:MODE <Mode>
This command activates or deactivates the automatic selection of the limit line in the
Spectrum Emission Mask measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window
<k> irrelevant

Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO | MANUAL
AUTO
The limit line depends on the measured channel power.
MANUAL
One of the three specified limit lines is set. The selection is
made with the "CALCulate:LIMit:ESPectrum subsystem"
on page 644 command.
*RST: AUTO
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:MODE AUTO
Activates automatic selection of the limit line.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>[:EXCLusive] <State>
This command sets the power classes used in the spectrum emission mask measure-
ment. It is only possible to use power classes for which limits are defined. Also, either
only one power class at a time or all power classes together can be selected.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
<Class> 1...4
the power class to be evaluated
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL1 ON
Activates the first defined power class.
Manual operation: See "Used Power Classes" on page 324
See "Add/Remove" on page 325
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:COUNt <NoPowerClasses>
This command sets the number of power classes to be defined.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
<Class> irrelevant
Parameters:
<NoPowerClasses> 1 to 4
*RST: 1
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUN 2
Two power classes can be defined.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:LIMit[:STATe] <State>
This command defines which limits are evaluated in the measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
<Class> 1...4
Parameters:
<State> ABSolute | RELative | AND | OR
ABSolute
Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values
RELative
Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values
AND
Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values. A
negative result is returned if both limits fail.
OR
Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values. A
negative result is returned if at least one limit failed.
*RST: REL
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:LIM ABS
Manual operation: See "Used Power Classes" on page 324
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MAXimum <Level>
This command sets the upper limit level for one power class. The unit is dBm. The limit
always ends at + 200 dBm, i.e. the upper limit of the last power class can not be set. If
more than one power class is in use, the upper limit must equal the lower limit of the
next power class.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
<Class> 1...4
Parameters:
<Level> <numeric value>
*RST: +200
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL1:MAX -40 dBm
Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to -40
dBm.
Manual operation: See "PMin/PMax" on page 325

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MINimum <Level>
This command sets the minimum lower level limit for one power class. The unit is dBm.
The limit always start at – 200 dBm, i.e. the first lower limit can not be set. If more than
one power class is in use, the lower limit must equal the upper limit of the previous
power class.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> irrelevant
<Class> 1...4
Parameters:
<Level> <numeric_value>
*RST: -200 for class1, otherwise +200
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL2:MIN -40 dBm
Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to -40
dBm.
Manual operation: See "PMin/PMax" on page 325
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:RESTore
This command restores the predefined limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask
measurement. All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the fac-
tory-set values are restored.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window
<k> irrelevant
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:REST
Resets the limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask to the
default setting.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:VALue <Power>
This command activates the manual limit line selection and specifies the expected
power as a value. Depending on the entered value, one of the predefined limit lines is
selected.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window
<k> irrelevant

Parameters:
<Power> 33 | 28 | 0
33
P ≥ 33
28
28 < P < 33
0
P < 28
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:VAL 33
Activates manual selection of the limit line and selects the limit
line for P = 33.
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer subsystem defines the lower limit line.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer[:DATA]........................................................................... 648
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MARGin......................................................................... 649
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MODE............................................................................649
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:OFFSet.......................................................................... 649
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SHIFt............................................................................. 650
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SPACing........................................................................ 650
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:STATe............................................................................651
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:THReshold..................................................................... 651
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints>
This command defines the vertical definition points of a lower limit line.
If the measured values are smaller than the LOWer limit line, the limit check is violated.
The units DEG, RAD, S, HZ, PCT are not available in the "Spectrum" mode.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA]. If not, the R&S FSVA/FSV
either adds missing values or ignores surplus values.
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT.
*RST: (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)

Example: CALC:LIM2:LOW -30,-40,-10,-40,-30

Defines 5 lower limit values for limit line 2 in the preset unit.
CALC:LIM2:LOW?
Outputs the lower limit values of limit line 2 separated by a
comma.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations
are still tolerated.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<Margin> Numeric value that defines the margin.
In spectrum mode, the unit is always dB.
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:LIM:LOW:MARG 10dB
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the vertical limit line scaling.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Limit line is defined by absolute physical values. The unit is vari-
able.
RELative
Limit line is defined by values relative to the reference level (dB).
*RST: ABSolute
Example: CALC:LIM:LOW:MODE REL
Defines the y-axis of limit line 2 as relative scaled.
Manual operation: See "Edit Name" on page 387
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete lower limit line.

nition points.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:LIM2:LOW:OFFS 3dB
Shifts limit line 2 by 3 dB upwards.
Manual operation: See "Y Offset" on page 389
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SHIFt <Distance>
This command moves a complete lower limit line vertically.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT
on page 632.
Example: CALC:LIM3:LOW:SHIF 20DB
Shifts all Y values of limit line 3 by 20 dB.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SPACing <InterpolType>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the lower limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<InterpolType> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LIN
Example: CALC:LIM:LOW:SPAC LIN

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:STATe <State>
This command turns a lower limit line on and off.
Before you can use this command, you have to select a limit line with
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:NAME.
The limit check is activated separately with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe. The
result of the limit check can be queried with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM4:LOW:STAT ON
Switches on limit line 4 (lower limit).
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:THReshold <Threshold>
This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines.
The R&S FSVA/FSV uses the threshold for the limit check, if the limit line violates the
threshold.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<Threshold> Numeric value that defines the threshold.
*RST: -200 dBm
Example: CALC:LIM2:LOW:THR -35DBM
Defines an absolute threshold value for limit line 2.
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer subsystem defines the upper limit line.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer[:DATA]............................................................................652
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MARGin.......................................................................... 652
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MODE.............................................................................653
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:OFFSet........................................................................... 653
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SHIFt.............................................................................. 653

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SPACing......................................................................... 654
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:STATe............................................................................ 654
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:THReshold...................................................................... 654
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints>
This command defines the vertical definition points of an upper limit line.
If the measured values exceed the UPPer limit line, the limit is violated.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA]. If not, the R&S FSVA/FSV
either adds missing values or ignores surplus values.
*RST: (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP -10,0,0,-10,-5
Defines 5 upper limit values for limit line 2 in the preset unit.
CALC:LIM2:UPP?
Outputs the upper limit values for limit line 2 separated by a
comma.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MARGin <Margin>
This command defines an area around a upper limit line where limit check violations
are still tolerated.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<Margin> Numeric value that defines the margin.
In spectrum mode, the unit is always dB.
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP:MARG 10dB
Defines the margin of limit line 2 to 10 dB below the limit value.

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the vertical limit line scaling.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
Limit line is defined by absolute physical values. The unit is vari-
able.
RELative
Limit line is defined by values relative to the reference level (dB).
*RST: ABSolute
Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP:MODE REL
Defines the y-axis of limit line 2 as relative scaled.
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line.
nition points.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP:OFFS 3dB
Shifts limit line 2 by 3 dB upwards.
Manual operation: See "Y Offset" on page 389
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SHIFt <Value>
This command moves a complete upper limit line vertically.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8

Parameters:
The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT
on page 632.
Example: CALC:LIM3:UPP:SHIF 20
Shifts all Y values of limit line 3 by 20 limit line units, e.g. dB.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SPACing <InterpolType>
This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the upper limit line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<InterpolType> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LIN
Example: CALC:LIM:UPP:SPAC LIN
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:STATe <State>
This command turns a lower limit line on and off.
Before you can use this command, you have to select a limit line with
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:NAME.
The limit check is activated separately with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe. The
result of the limit check can be queried with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:LIM4:UPP:STAT ON
Switches on limit line 4 (upper limit).
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:THReshold <Threshold>
This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines.

The R&S FSVA/FSV uses the threshold for the limit check, if the limit line violates the
threshold.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<k> 1...8
Parameters:
<Threshold> Numeric value that defines the threshold.
*RST: -200 dBm
Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP:THR -35DBM
Defines an absolute threshold value for limit line 2.
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
The CALCulate:MARKer subsystem checks the marker functions of the instrument.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe]...............................................................................656
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF..................................................................................656
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt................................................................................ 656
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?............................................................657
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution............................................................... 658
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LINK................................................................................... 658
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude.......................................................................... 658
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]................................................................ 659
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO..................................................................659
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT...................................................................660
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT.................................................................. 660
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt..................................................................661
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................................. 661
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO...................................................................662
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT....................................................................662
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT................................................................... 663
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt...................................................................663
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion.........................................................................664
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SEARch.............................................................................. 664
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe................................................................................665
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X........................................................................................ 665
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]................................................................666
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT....................................................................666
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT..................................................................667
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM.................................................................. 667
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe.............................................................................. 668
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?.......................................................................................668
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent.......................................................................... 669

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns markers on and off.
If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker, it is turned
into a normal marker.
Suffix: .
<m> depends on mode
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK3 ON
Switches on marker 3 or switches to marker mode.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF
This command all markers off, including delta markers and marker measurement func-
tions.
Suffix: .
<m> depends on mode
irrelevant
Example: CALC:MARK:AOFF
Switches off all markers.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "All Marker Off" on page 252
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt <State>
This command turns the frequency counter at the marker position for marker 1 on and
off.
The count result is queried with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?.
The frequency counter works for one marker only. If you perform a frequency count
with another marker, the R&S FSVA/FSV deactivates the frequency count of the first
marker.
for single sweeps.

Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CALC:MARK ON
Switches on marker 1.
CALC:MARK:COUN ON
Switches on the frequency counter for marker 1.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ?
Outputs the measured value.
Manual operation: See "Signal Count" on page 258
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?
This command queries the result of the frequency counter for marker 1.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Return values:
<Frequency> Frequency at the marker position.
CALC:MARK ON
CALC:MARK:COUN ON
Activates the frequency counter for marker 1.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ?
Outputs the measured value of marker 1.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Signal Count" on page 258

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution <Resolution>
This command specifies the resolution of the frequency counter (marker 1).
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Resolution> 0.001 | 0.01 | 0.1 | 1 | 10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 Hz
*RST: 0.1 Hz
Example: CALC:MARK:COUN:RES 1kHz
Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 kHz.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LINK <DisplayType>
Links the markers in all displays of the specified type.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window
<m> 1...16
marker
Parameters:
<DisplayType> TIME | SPECtrum | BOTH | NONE
TIME
Links the markers in all time domain diagrams
SPECtrum
Links the markers in all AF Spectrum displays
BOTH
Links the markers both in the time domain diagrams and in the
AF Spectrum displays
NONE
Markers are not linked.
*RST: NONE
Example: CALC1:MARK1:LINK TIME
Links the marker 1 in all time domain diagrams in screen A.
Mode: ADEMOD
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude <State>
This command turns the local oscillator suppression during a peak search on or off.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: CALC:MARK:LOEX ON
Manual operation: See "Exclude LO" on page 274
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker on the current trace maximum.
The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to the marker mode.
If no maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values < peak
excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
In "Spectrogram" mode, this command positions the specified marker on the current
peak level of the x-axis. The search is performed within the current frame. It does not
change the position of the marker on the y-axis.
Suffix: .
<m> depends on mode
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:MAX
Positions marker 2 to the maximum value of the trace.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO <State>
This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and
off. The command performs the peak search after each sweep.
An automatic peak search may be used during adjustments of a device under test to
keep track of the actual peak marker position and level.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

Example: CALC:MARK:MAX:AUTO ON
Activates the automatic peak search function for marker 1 at the
end of each particular sweep.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak" on page 273
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the
current position (i.e. in descending X values).
If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent val-
ues < peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
In "Spectrogram" mode, this command positions the specified marker on the next peak
level of the x-axis. The search includes only the data to the left of the current marker
position in the current frame. It does not change the position of the marker on the y-
axis.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:MARK2:MAX:LEFT
Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the left
of the current value.
Usage: Event
See "Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction" on page 275
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the marker to the next smaller trace maximum.
level of the x-axis. The search includes the data in both directions of the current marker
position in the current frame. It does not change the position of the marker on the y-
axis.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:MARK2:MAX:NEXT
Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value.
Usage: Event

Manual operation: See "Next Peak" on page 272

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of
the current value (i.e. in ascending X values).
level of the x-axis. The search includes only the data to the right of the current marker
position in the current frame. It does not change the position of the delta marker on the
y-axis.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:MARK2:MAX:RIGH
Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the right
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker on the current trace minimum.
The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to marker mode, if necessary.
If no minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values < peak
minimum level of the x-axis. The search is performed within the current frame. It does
not change the position of the marker on the y-axis / frames.
Suffix: .
<m> depends on mode
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:MIN
Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace.
Usage: Event

Manual operation: See "Min" on page 272

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO <State>
This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and
off. The command performs the peak search after each sweep.
An automatic peak search may be used during adjustments of a device under test to
keep track of the actual peak marker position and level.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:MIN:AUTO ON
Activates the automatic minimum value search function for
marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep.
Manual operation: See "Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak" on page 273
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the
current value (i.e. in descending X direction).
In "Spectrogram" mode, this command positions the specified marker on the next mini-
mum level of the x-axis. The search includes only the data to the left of the current
marker position in the current frame. It does not change the position of the marker on
the y-axis.
Suffix: .
CALC:MARK2:MIN:LEFT
Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the left
Usage: Event


CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions ae marker to the next higher trace minimum.
In "Spectrogram" mode, this command positions the specified marker on the next mini-
mum level of the x-axis. The search includes the data in both directions of the current
marker position in the current frame. It does not change the position of the marker on
the y-axis.
Suffix: .
CALC:MARK2:MIN:NEXT
Positions marker 2 to the next higher maximum value.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Next Min" on page 273
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the
current value (i.e. in ascending X direction).
peak level of the x-axis. The search is performed within the current frame. It does not
change the position of the marker on the y-axis.
Suffix: .
CALC:MARK2:MIN:RIGH
Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the right
Usage: Event


CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion <Excursion>
This command defines the peak excursion
The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak
search.
The unit depends on the selected operating mode and measurement.
Mode/Display mode Unit
Spectrum dB
ADEMOD, RF display dB
ADEMOD, AM display PCT
ADEMOD, FM display kHz
ADEMOD, PM display RAD
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Excursion> The peak excursion is the distance to a trace maximum that
must be attained before a new maximum is recognized, or the
distance to a trace minimum that must be attained before a new
minimum is recognized
*RST: 6dB in "Spectrum" mode and RF displays; 5 PCT in
AM displays, 50 kHz in FM displays, (0.5 RAD in
PM displays
Example: CALC:MARK:PEXC 10dB
Defines peak excursion 10 dB.
Manual operation: See "Peak Excursion" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SEARch <MarkRealImag>
This command selects the trace type a marker search is performed on.
Suffix: .

Parameters:
<MarkRealImag> REAL
Marker search functions are performed on the real trace of the
"I/Q" measurement.
IMAG
Marker search functions are performed on the imaginary trace of
the "I/Q" measurement.
MAGN
Marker search functions are performed on the magnitude of the I
and Q data.
*RST: REAL
Example: CALC4:MARK:SEAR IMAG
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe <Trace>
This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on.
The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than "Blank".
If necessary, the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment.
Suffix: .
<m> depends on mode
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Trace> 1 ... 6
Trace number the marker is positioned on.
Example: CALC:MARK3:TRAC 2
Assigns marker 3 to trace 2.
Manual operation: See "Marker to Trace" on page 251
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X <Position>
This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the x-axis.
If marker 2, 3 or 4 is selected and used as delta marker, it is switched to marker mode.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Position> Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x-axis.
The unit is either Hz (frequency domain) or s (time domain) or
dB (statistics).
Range: The range depends on the current x-axis range.

Example: CALC:MARK2:X 1.7MHz

Positions marker 2 to frequency 1.7 MHz.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State>
This command turns marker search limits on and off.
If the power measurement in zero span is active, this command limits the evaluation
range on the trace.
Suffix: .
<m> marker
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
Switches on search limitation.
Manual operation: See "Search Limits" on page 273
See "Search Lim Off" on page 274
See "Limits (On/Off)" on page 355
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT <Limit>
This command sets the left limit of the marker search range.
range to the trace.
Note: The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is
switched on (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]).
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Limit> The value range depends on the span or sweep time.
The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for
time domain measurements.
Range: 0 to MAX
*RST: left diagram border
Switches the search limit function on.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 10MHz
Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz.

Manual operation: See "Left Limit" on page 263

See "Left Limit" on page 356
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT <Limit>
This command sets the right limit of the marker search range.
range to the trace.
switched on ( CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]).
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Limit> The value range depends on the span or sweep time.
The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for
time domain measurements.
Range: 0 to MAX
*RST: left diagram border
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 20MHz
Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Right Limit" on page 264
See "Right Limit" on page 356
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM <State>
This command sets the limits of the marker search range to the zoom area.
switched on (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:ZOOM ON
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 20MHz
Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Use Zoom Limits" on page 274

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe <StepSize>
This command defines the step size of the rotary knob for marker or delta marker value
changes. It only takes effect in manual operation.
The marker step size is unavailable for statistical measurements.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<StepSize> STANdard
step size corresponds to space between two pixels
POINts
step size corresponds to space between two measured values
(number of measured values is defined via the
[SENSe<n>:]SWEep:POINts command, see [SENSe:
]SWEep:POINts on page 850)
*RST: POINts
Example: CALC:MARK:X:SSIZ STAN
Sets the measured value step size.
Manual operation: See "Stepsize Standard" on page 252
See "Stepsize Sweep Points" on page 253
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?
This command queries the measured value of a marker.
The corresponding marker is activated before or switched to marker mode, if neces-
sary.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Return values:
<Result> The measured value of the selected marker is returned.
The unit is variable and depends on the one you have currently
set.
In I/Q Analyzer mode, if the result display configuration "Real/
Imag (I/Q)" is selected, this query returns the Real (I) value of
the marker first, then the Imag (Q) value.


CALC:MARK2 ON
Switches marker 2.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK2:Y?
Outputs the measured value of marker 2.
In I/Q Analyzer mode, for "Real/Imag (I/Q)", for example:
1.852719887E-011,0
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent <Probability>
This command positions the selected marker to the given probability.
If you use the command in combination with a delta marker, that delta marker is turned
Note: The command is only available for CCDF measurements. You can query the
associated level value with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Probability> Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
Example: CALC1:MARK:Y:PERC 95PCT
Positions marker 1 to a probability of 95 %.
Manual operation: See "Percent Marker" on page 366
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion Subsystem
The CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion subsystem checks the marker functions in the
instrument.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE.................................................... 670
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?..................................................670
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN.....................................................671
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe]..................................................671
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer................................................................672
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep................................................................. 672
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous................................... 672
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff..........................................673
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect............................................673

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe].......................................... 674
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks[:IMMediate].............................................. 674
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel:STATe.......................... 675
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?...................................................675
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE................................................ 676
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SEAR:AUTO............................................ 676
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT...................................................... 676
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STAT.......................................................677
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X............................................................. 677
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y?........................................................... 678
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult?...................................................678
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE............................... 679
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe]...................................................679
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown............................................................ 680
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?........................................ 681
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:QFACtor...............................................681
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?............................................... 682
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe................................................. 682
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?..................................................683
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe].....................................................683
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult.......................................................684
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence........................................................... 684
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult?......................................................... 685
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE...................................... 685
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe]......................................................... 685
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:ZOOM..................................................................686
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the results for a band power marker are displayed.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> POWer
Result is displayed as a power in dBm.
DENSity
Result is displayed as a density in dBm/Hz.
*RST: POW
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS
Manual operation: See "Power" on page 265
See "Density" on page 265
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?
This command queries the results of the band power measurement.

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Return values:
<Power> Signal power over the marker bandwidth.
Example: Activate the band power marker:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON
Select the density mode for the result:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS
Query the result:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:RES?
Response:
20dBm/Hz
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Power" on page 265
See "Density" on page 265
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN 
This command defines the bandwidth around the marker position.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
 Numeric value that defines the span in Hz.
The maximum span depends on the marker position and
R&S FSVA/FSV model.
*RST: 5% of current span
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:SPAN 20
Manual operation: See "Span" on page 265
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] <State>
This command turns markers for band power measurements on and off.
If necessary, the command also turns on a marker. If a marker is already on, the cur-
rently active marker is used as the band power marker (all other marker functions for
this marker are deactivated).
For details see Chapter 4.3.3.8, "Performing Band Power Measurements",
on page 269.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Band Power On/Off" on page 265
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer
This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:MARK2:FUNC:CENT
Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2.
Manual operation: See "Center =Mkr Freq (span > 0)" on page 272
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep
This command matches the center frequency step size to the current marker fre-
quency.
The command turns delta markers into normal markers.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:MARK3:FUNC:CST
Sets the center frequency to the same value as the frequency of
marker 3.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous <State>
This command turns continuous demodulation of the signal at the marker position in
the frequency domain on and off.
Thus acoustic monitoring of the signals can be performed.
In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on.
This command is only available if the R&S FSVA/FSV option B3 (Audio Demodulator)
is installed.

Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC2:MARK3:FUNC:DEM:CONT ON
Switches on the continuous ' demodulation.
Manual operation: See "Continuous Demod (span > 0)" on page 261
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff <Duration>
This command defines for how long the the signal at the marker position is demodula-
ted.
is installed.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Duration> Range: 10 ms to 1000 s
*RST: Marker demodulation = OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:HOLD 3s
Manual operation: See "Mkr Stop Time" on page 261
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect <DemodMode>
This command selects the demodulation mode for the audio demodulator.
is installed.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<DemodMode> AM | FM
*RST: AM
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM
Manual operation: See "AM" on page 261
See "FM" on page 261

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the audio demodulator on and off when the measurement rea-
ches a marker position.
In the frequency domain, the hold time can be defined at the corresponding marker
position with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff.
In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on.
is installed.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK3:FUNC:DEM ON
Switches on the demodulation for marker 3.
Manual operation: See "Mkr Demod On/Off" on page 261
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks[:IMMediate] <NoMaxima>
This command initiates a peak search.
The results can be queried with:
● Position of a peak on the x-axis: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
FPEaks:X
● Position of a peak on the y-axis: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
FPEaks:Y?
● Number of peaks in the list: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:
COUNt?
The order the results are returned in is selected with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT.
The trace the peaks search is performed on is selected with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:TRACe.
Number of found maxima
The number of maxima found depends on the waveform and value set for the Peak
Excursion parameter (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion), however, a
maximum number of 200 maxima are determined. Only the signals which exceed their
surrounding values at least by the value indicated by the peak excursion parameter are
recognized as maxima. Therefore, the number of maxima found is not automatically
the same as the number of maxima desired.

Suffix: .
Parameters:
<NoMaxima> Range: 1 to 200
Switches to single sweep mode
INIT;*WAI
Starts measurement and synchronizes to end
CALC:MARK:TRAC 1
Sets marker 1 to trace 1
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT X
Sets the sort mode to increasing X values
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3;*WAI
Searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1 and synchronizes to
end
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN?
Queries the number of maxima found
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:Y?
Queries the level of maxima found
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:X?
Queries the frequencies (span <> 0) or time (span = 0) of max-
ima found.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel:STATe <State>
This command turns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off.
The labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:ANN:LAB:STAT OFF
Removes the peak labels from the diagram
Manual operation: See "Marker Number" on page 264
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?
This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak
search.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant


Return values:
<NumberOfPeaks>
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3
Searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Marker Peak List" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE <MaxNoPeaks>
This command defines the maximum number of peaks the marker peak list may con-
tain.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<MaxNoPeaks> Maximum number of peaks to be determined.
*RST: 50
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:LIST:SIZE 10
The marker peak list will contain a maximum of 10 peaks.
Manual operation: See "Max Peak Count" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SEAR:AUTO <State>
This command turns the marker peak search on and off.
This command is retained for compatibility with R&S FSP only. Use CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STAT instead.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SEAR:AUTO ON
Activates marker peak search
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT <SortMode>
This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned.

Suffix: .
Parameters:
<SortMode> X
Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x-axis.
Y
Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y-axis.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT Y
Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values
Manual operation: See "Sort Mode Freq/Lvl" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STAT <State>
This command turns a peak search on and off.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:STAT ON
Activates marker peak search
Manual operation: See "Peak List On/Off" on page 263
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X
This command queries the position of the peaks on the x-axis.
The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT on page 676.
The number of peaks on the number that has been set with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?.
Suffix: .
Return values:
<PeakPosition> Position of the peaks on the x-axis. The unit depends on the
measurement.

CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:X?
Queries the frequencies (span <> 0) or. time (span = 0) of the
maxima found
107.5E6,153.8E6,187.9E6
frequencies in increasing order
2.05E-3,2.37E-3, 3.71e-3
times in increasing order
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y?
This command queries the position of the peaks on the y-axis.
The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT on page 676.
The number of peaks on the number that has been set with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?.
Suffix: .
Return values:
<PeakPosition> Position of the peaks on the y-axis. The unit depends on the
measurement.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3
CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:Y?
Queries the levels of the maxima found
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult?
This command queries the results of the AM modulation depth measurement..

for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
CALC:MARK:X 10MHZ
Sets the reference marker (marker 1) to the carrier signal at 10
MHz.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON
Switches on the modulation depth measurement.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:RES?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "AM Mod Depth" on page 283
See "AM Mod Depth" on page 380
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE
This command initiates a search for the signals required for the AM depth measure-
ment.
Note that the command does not perform a new measurement, but looks for the sig-
nals on the current trace.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:SEAR ONCE
Executes the search of an AM modulated signal at the currently
available trace.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Search Signals" on page 381
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the AM Modulation Depth measurement on and off.
To work correctly, the measurement requires an AM modulated signal.
If necessary, the command positions marker 1 on the signal with the highest level.

The level value of marker 1 is regarded as the carrier level. On activating the function,
marker 2 and marker 3 are automatically set as delta markers symmetrically to the car-
rier to the adjacent maxima of the trace.
If the position of delta marker 2 is changed, delta marker 3 is moved symmetrically with
respect to the reference marker (marker 1). If the position of delta marker 3 is changed,
fine adjustment can be performed independently of delta marker 2.
The power at the marker positions is calculated from the measured levels.
The AM modulation depth is calculated from the ratio of power values at the reference
marker and the delta markers. If the two AM sidebands differ in power, the average
value of the two power values is used for calculating the AM modulation depth.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:X 10MHZ
Sets the reference marker (marker 1) to the carrier signal at 10
MHz.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON
Switches on the modulation depth measurement.
CALC:DELT2:X 10KHZ
Sets delta markers 2 and 3 to the signals at 10 kHz from the car-
rier signal.
CALC:DELT3:X 9.999KHZ
Corrects the position of delta marker 3 relative to delta marker 2.
Manual operation: See "AM Mod Depth" on page 283
See "AM Mod Depth" on page 380
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <Distance>
This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker.
The temporary markers T1 and T2 are positioned n dB below the active reference
marker. The frequency and time position of these markers can be queried with
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? and
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?. The bandwidth between
the markers can be queried with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:
RESult?.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant

Parameters:
<Distance> Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in
dB.
*RST: 6dB
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3dB
Sets the level spacing to 3 dB.
Manual operation: See "n dB down" on page 262
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?
This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x-axis when mea-
suring in the frequency domain.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Return values:
<Frequency> <frequency 1>
absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference
marker in Hz
<frequency 2>
absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the refer-
ence marker in Hz
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON
Switches on the n dB down function.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ?
Outputs the frequencies of the temporary markers.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:QFACtor
This command queries the Q factor (quality) of n dB down measurements.
Suffix: .


INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:QFAC?
Queries the Q factor of the measured bandwidth.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?
This command queries the distance of the n dB down markers from each other.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Distance> The result depends on the span.
In case of frequency domain measurements, the command
returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in
Hz. In case of time domain measurements, the command
returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in
seconds.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe <State>
This command turns the n dB Down marker function on and off.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON
Switches on the "N dB Down" function.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?
This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x-axis when mea-
suring in the time domain.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Return values:
<Time> <time 1>
absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the ref-
erence marker in seconds
<time 2>
absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the right of the
reference marker in seconds
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:TIME?
Outputs the time values of the temporary markers.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the noise measurement for all markers on or off.
If on, the R&S FSVA/FSV measures the noise power density at the marker position.
The result can be queried with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:
RESult.

Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON
Switches on the noise measurement.
Manual operation: See "Noise Meas On/Off" on page 258
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult
This command queries the result of the noise measurement.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
CALC:MARK2 ON
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON
Switches on noise measurement.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK2:NOIS:RES?
Outputs the noise result of marker 2.
Manual operation: See "Noise Meas On/Off" on page 258
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence
This command sets the reference level to the power measured by a marker.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:MARK2:FUNC:REF
Sets the reference level to the level of marker 2.
Manual operation: See "Ref Lvl =Mkr Lvl" on page 272

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult?
This command queries the results for the third order intercept point measurement.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Return values:
<TOI> Third order intercept point.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON
Switches the intercept measurement.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "TOI" on page 283
See "TOI" on page 379
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE
This command initiates a search for signals in the current trace to determine the third
intercept point.
No new measurement is performed. Only the currently available trace selected for the
TOI measurement is used.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:SEAR ONCE
Executes the search for 2 signals and their intermodulation prod-
uct at the currently available trace.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Search Signals" on page 379
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe] <State>
This command initiates a measurement to determine the third intercept point.

A two-tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the RF input of the instru-
ment. Marker 1 and marker 2 (both normal markers) are set to the maximum of the two
signals. Delta marker 3 and delta marker 4 are positioned to the intermodulation prod-
ucts. The delta markers can be modified separately afterwards with CALCulate<n>:
DELTamarker<m>:X.
The third-order intercept is calculated from the level spacing between the normal mark-
ers and the delta markers.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON
Switches on the measurement of the third-order intercept.
Manual operation: See "TOI" on page 283
See "TOI" on page 379
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:ZOOM <Range>
This command defines the range to be zoomed around marker 1. Marker 1 is activated
first, if necessary.
The subsequent frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the frequency
of the signal is counted. This frequency becomes the new center frequency, and the
zoomed span is set.
Note that you should perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end
of the measurement. This is only possible for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Range> <numeric_value>
CALC:MARK:FUNC:ZOOM 1kHz;*WAI
Activates zooming and waits for its end.
Manual operation: See "Marker Zoom (span > 0)" on page 253
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:HARMonics Subsystem
The CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics subsystem contains the com-
mands to define the settings for harmonics measurement.

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO............................... 687
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion?........................................ 687
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST?.................................................688
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics...................................... 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet..............................................689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe]............................................. 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO <State>
This command selects the resolution bandwidth of the harmonic in respect to the band-
width of the first harmonic.
For details refer to "Harmonic RBW Auto" on page 385.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
OFF
identical
ON
a multiple
*RST: ON
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:BAND:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the automatic bandwidth enlargement.
Manual operation: See "Harmonic RBW Auto" on page 385
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion?
This command queries the total harmonic distortion of the signal.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
TOTal
Return values:
<Result> <Distortion_%>,<Distortion_dB>
Pair of values, one showing the THD in %, one in dB.


CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:NHARM 3
Sets the number of harmonics to be measured to 3.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM ON
Activates the harmonic distortion measurement.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:DIST? TOT
Returns the total distortion in % and dB.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Harmonic Distortion" on page 283
See "Harmonic Distortion" on page 384
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST?
This command queries the position of the harmonics.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Harmonics> Returns one value for every harmonic.
The first value is the absolute power of the first harmonic. The
unit is variable. The other values are power levels relative to the
first harmonic. The unit for these is dB.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:NHARM 3
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM ON
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:LIST?
Returns the values for the 3 measured harmonics.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics <NoHarmonics>
This command sets the number of harmonics to be measured.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<NoHarmonics> Range: 1 to 26
*RST: 10
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:NHARM 3
Manual operation: See "No. of Harmonics" on page 385
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet
This command initiates a measurement to determine the ideal configuration for the har-
monic distortion measurement.
The method depends on the span.
● Frequency domain (span > 0)
Frequency and level of the first harmonic are determined and used for the mea-
surement list.
● Time domain (span = 0)
The level of the first harmonic is determined. The frequency remains unchanged.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:PRES
Optimizes the device settings for the harmonic measurement.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Adjust Settings" on page 385
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the harmonic distortion measurement on and off.
Note the following:
● If you perform the measurement in the frequency domain, the search range for the
frequency of the first harmonic, whose power is determined, is defined by the last
span.
● If you perform the measurement in the time domain, the current center frequency is
used as the frequency of the first harmonic. Thus, the frequency search is

bypassed. The first harmonic frequency is set by a specific center frequency in

zero span before the harmonic measurement is started.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM ON
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer Subsystem
The CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWER subsystem contains the commands
for control of power measurement.
Further information
● "Predefined CP/ACLR Standards" on page 703
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:MODE...................................................... 690
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet.................................................... 691
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?.................................................... 692
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ.............................................. 695
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect..................................................... 695
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe].................................................... 696
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:CATalog?................................. 697
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:DELete..................................... 697
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:SAVE....................................... 697
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:MODE <Mode>
This commands defines the method by which the channel power values are calculated
from the current trace in the window specified by the suffix <n>.
Suffix: .

Parameters:
<Mode> WRITe | MAXHold
WRITe
The channel power and the adjacent channel powers are calcu-
lated directly from the current trace
MAXHold
The power values are calculated from the current trace and
compared with the previous power value using a maximum algo-
rithm.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:MODE MAXH
Sets the Maxhold channel power mode.
Manual operation: See "Clear/Write" on page 301
See "Max Hold" on page 301
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet <Standard> |
<UserStandard>
This command selects the power measurement setting for a standard and switches on
the corresponding measurement, if required.
The configuration for a standard comprises of the parameters weighting filter, channel
bandwidth and spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, as well as detector and sweep
time.
The settings for standards IS95A and C differ as far as the calculation method of chan-
nel spacings is concerned. For IS95A and J-STD008 the spacing is calculated from the
center of the main channel to the center of the corresponding adjacent channel, for
IS95C from the center of the main channel to the nearest border of the adjacent chan-
nel.
Suffix: .
Setting parameters:
<Standard> Note that predefined standards go without quotes, while user
standards have to be in quotes ('user standard').
<Predefined standard>
Predefind standard according to table in "Predefined CP/ACLR
Standards" on page 703.
'<string>'
User-defined standard with <string> being the name of the user
standard.

Return values:
<Standard> <Predefined standard> | USER | NONE
<Predefined standard>
Predefind standard according to table in "Predefined CP/ACLR
Standards" on page 703.
USER
User-defined standard is set
NONE
not yet defined
with <string> being the name of a user standard. Note that pre-
defined standards go without quotes, while user standards have
to be in quotes ('user standard').
For further details refer to "Predefined CP/ACLR Standards"
on page 703.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES TETRA
Selects the standard setting for TETRA
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES 'my_aclr_standard'
Selects the user standard my_aclr_standard
Manual operation: See "CP/ACLR Standard" on page 295
See "Load" on page 303
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? <ResultType>
This command queries the result of the performed power measurement in the window
specified by the suffix <n>. If necessary, the measurement is switched on prior to the
query.
The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe:POWer
subsystem.
To obtain a correct result, a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the
sweep must be performed before a query is output. Synchronization is possible only in
the single sweep mode.
Suffix: .

Parameters:
<ResultType> ACPower | AOBW | CN | CN0 | CPOWer | PPOWer |
MCACpower | OBANdwidth | OBWidth | BANDwidth
ACPower
Adjacent-channel power measurement
Results are output in the following sequence, separated by com-
mas:
Power of transmission channel
Power of lower adjacent channel
Power of upper adjacent channel
Power of lower alternate channel 1
Power of upper alternate channel 1
The number of measured values returned depends on the num-
ber of adjacent/alternate channels selected with [SENSe:
]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs.
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE "LOG"), the power is output in
the currently selected level unit; with linear scaling (RANGE "LIN
dB" or "LIN %"), the power is output in W. If [SENSe:]POWer:
ACHannel:MODE is set to "REL", the adjacent/alternate-channel
power is output in dB.
AOBW (AllOccupiedBandWidth)
Returns the occupied bandwidth, as well as the position and
level of the temporary markers T1 and T2 used to calculate the
occupied bandwidth.
The syntax of the result is:
<Occupied bandwidth>,<T1 x-value>,<T1 y-value>,<T2 x-
value>,<T2 y-value>
CN
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio
The carrier-to-noise ratio in dB is returned.
CN0
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio referenced to 1 Hz band-
width.
The carrier-to-noise ratio in dB/Hz is returned.
CPOWer
Channel power measurement
In a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, the query returns
the power result for the reference range, if this power reference
type is selected.
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the channel power is
output in the currently selected level unit; with linear scaling
(RANGE LIN dB or LIN %), the channel power is output in W.
PPOWer
Power of the highest peak

In a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, the query returns

the power result for the reference range, if this power reference
type is selected.
MCACpower
Channel/adjacent-channel power measurement with several car-
rier signals
Results are output in the following sequence, separated by com-
mas:
Power of carrier signal 1 to 18s in ascending order
Total power of all carrier signals
Power of lower adjacent channel
Power of upper adjacent channel
The number of measured values returned depends on the num-
ber of carrier signals and adjacent/alternate channels selected
with [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt and
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs.
If only one carrier signal is measured, the total value of all carrier
signals is not output.
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the power is output in
dBm; with linear scaling (RANGE LIN dB or LIN %), the power is
output in W. If [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE is set to
"REL", the adjacent/alternate-channel power is output in dB.
OBANdwidth | OBWidth
Measurement of occupied bandwidth
The occupied bandwidth in Hz is returned.
Example: For an example of channel/adjacent-channel power mea-
surement see Chapter 5.4.4, "Measuring the Channel and
Adjacent Channel Power", on page 1014.
Example of occupied bandwidth measurement
POW:BAND 90PCT
Defines 90 % as the percentage of the power to be contained in
the bandwidth range to be measured.
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches over to single sweep mode.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW
Queries the occupied bandwidth measured.
Manual operation: See "Ch Power ACLR" on page 281
See "OBW (span > 0)" on page 282
See "Ch Power ACLR" on page 294
See "C/N" on page 309
See "C/No" on page 309
See "OBW" on page 313

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ <State>
This command switches the query response of the power measurement results
between output of absolute values and output referred to the measurement bandwith.
The measurement results are output with the CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? command.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
Results output: channel power density in dBm/Hz
OFF
Results output: channel power is displayed in dBm
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES:PHZ ON
Output of results referred to the channel bandwidth.
For details on a complete measurement example refer to
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?
on page 692.
Manual operation: See "Chan Pwr/Hz" on page 300
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect <MeasType>
This command selects – and switches on – the specified power measurement type in
the window specified by the suffix <n>.
The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe:POWer
subsystem.
Note: If CPOWer is selected, the number of adjacent channels ( [SENSe:]POWer:
ACHannel:ACPairs) is set to 0. If ACPower is selected, the number of adjacent
channels is set to 1, unless adjacent-channel power measurement is switched on
already.
The channel/adjacent-channel power measurement is performed for the trace selected
with [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe.
The occupied bandwidth measurement is performed for the trace on which marker 1 is
positioned. To select another trace for the measurement, marker 1 is to be positioned
on the desired trace by means of CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.
Suffix: .

Parameters:
<MeasType> ACPower | CPOWer | MCACpower | OBANdwidth | OBWidth |
CN | CNO
ACPower
Adjacent-channel power measurement with a single carrier sig-
nal
CPOWer
Channel power measurement with a single carrier signal (equiv-
alent to adjacent-channel power measurement with "NO. OF
ADJ CHAN" = 0)
MCACpower
Channel/adjacent-channel power measurement with several car-
rier signals
OBANdwidth | OBWidth
Measurement of occupied bandwidth
CN
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio
CN0
Measurement of carrier-to-noise ratio referenced to 1 Hz band-
width
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP
Switches on adjacent-channel power measurement.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] <State>
This command switches off the power measurement in the window specified by the
suffix <n>.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF
Switches off the power measurement.
Usage: Event


CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:CATalog?
This command queries all available standards, including user standards.
The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:STAN:CAT?
Queries the available standards.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Load" on page 303
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:DELete <Standard>
This command deletes an ACLR standard.
Parameters:
<Standard> Name of the standard you want to delete.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:STAN:DEL 'CDMA2000'
Deletes the CDMA2000 standard.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:SAVE <Standard>
This command saves a cutomized ACLR standard.
Parameters:
<Standard> Specifies the name of the user standard.
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:STAN:SAVE 'CDMA2000'
Saves the user standard with the name CDMA2000.
Manual operation: See "Save" on page 303
CALCulate:MARKer:SGRam subsystem
The following commands control the markers when you are using the spectrogram.
The spectrogram is available if option R&S FSV-K14 is installed.

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe................................................................... 698
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea....................................................................698
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]...............................................699
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................699
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe................................................ 700
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow................................................. 700
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT...................................................701
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK].................................................701
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe................................................. 701
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow.................................................. 702
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT....................................................702
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]..................................................703
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe <Frame> | <Time>

This command positions the marker on a particular frame.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Frame> | <Time> <Frame> (if time stamp is off)
Defines the frame to place the marker on. The range is {0...num-
ber of recorded frames-1}
Defines the distance of the marker in seconds to the last mea-
sured frame (frame 0).
Example: CALC:MARK:SGR:FRAM -20
Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:FRAM 2 s
Sets second marker on the frame 2 seconds ago.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea <SearchArea>
This command defines the marker search area.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.

Parameters:
<SearchArea> VISible
Performs a search in the visible frames.
Note that VISible is ignored if Spectrogram is not visible for any
reason (e.g. if the Spectrum Analyzer is in full screen mode or
display update is inactive).
MEMory
*RST: VISible
Example: CALC:DELT:SGR:SAR MEM
Manual operation: See "Marker Search Area" on page 276
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified marker on the current peak level of the spectro-
gram. The possible position depends on the marker search area.
For more information, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea on page 698.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:SAR VIS
CALC:MARK2:SGR:XY:MAX
Activates and positions marker 2 on the peak level in the visible
Spectrogram.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified marker on the current minimum level of the
spectrogram. The possible position depends on the marker search area.
For more information, seeCALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea on page 698 .
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.

Example: CALC:MARK3:SGR:SAR VIS

CALC:MARK3:SGR:XY:MIN
Activates and positions marker 3 on the minimum level in the
visible Spectrogram.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe
This command positions the specified marker on the next peak level of the vertical
axis. The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not
change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX
Activates and positions marker 2 on the peak level of the y-axis.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX:ABV
Positions marker 2 on the next higher level found in the diagram
area above the current marker position.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow
axis. The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX:BEL
Positions marker 2 on the next higher level found in the diagram
area below the current marker position.

Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT
axis. The search includes frames above and below the current marker position. It does
not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX:NEXT
Positions marker 2 on the next higher level.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified marker on the current peak level of the vertical
axis. The search is performed over all frames. It does not change the horizontal posi-
tion of the marker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe
This command positions the specified marker on the next minimum level of the vertical
axis. The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not


Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MIN
Activates and positions marker 2 on the minimum level of the y-
axis.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MIN:ABOV
Positions marker 2 on the next minimum level found in the dia-
gram area above the current marker position.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow
axis. The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
axis.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX:BEL
Positions marker 2 on the next minimum level found in the dia-
gram area below the current marker position.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT
axis. The search includes frames above and below the current marker position. It does
not change the horizontal position of the marker.

Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
axis.
CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MIN:NEXT
Positions marker 2 on the next minimum level.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the specified marker on the current minimum level of the verti-
cal axis. The search is performed over all captured frames. It does not change the hori-
zontal position of the delta marker.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
<m> 1...16
Selects the marker.
axis.
Usage: Event
Predefined CP/ACLR Standards
Parameter Standard
W-CDMA 3GPP FWD W-CDMA 3.84 MHz forward
W-CDMA 3GPP REV W-CDMA 3.84 MHz reverse
CDMA IS95A FWD CDMA IS95A forward
CDMA IS95A REV CDMA IS95A reverse
CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD CDMA IS95C Class 0 forward
CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV CDMA IS95C Class 0 reverse
CDMA J-STD008 FWD CDMA J-STD008 forward

Parameter Standard
CDMA J-STD008 REV CDMA J-STD008 reverse
CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD CDMA IS95C Class 1 forward
CDMA IS95C Class 1 REV CDMA IS95C Class 1 reverse
CDMA 2000 CDMA 2000
TD SCDMA FWD TD-SCDMA forward
TD SCDMA REV TD-SCDMA reverse
WLAN 802.11A WLAN 802.11A
WLAN 802.11B WLAN 802.11B
WiMAX WiMAX
WIBRO WIBRO
RFID 14443 RFID 14443
EUTRa EUTRA/LTE Square
REUTra EUTRA/LTE Square/RRC
TETRA TETRA
PDC PDC
PHS PHS
CDPD CDPD
GSM GSM
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack Subsystem
The CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack subsystem defines the settings of the
signal track.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth|BWIDth.................................. 704
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold...............................................705
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe.................................................... 705
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe]................................................... 706
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth|BWIDth <Bandwidth>
This command defines the bandwidth around the center frequency that is included in
the signal tracking process.
Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command
(CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe]).
Suffix: .

Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 10 Hz to MAX (span)
*RST: (= span/10 on activating the function)
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:BAND 1 MHZ
Sets the search bandwidth to 1 MHz.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:BWID 1 MHZ
Alternative command for the same function.
Manual operation: See "Track BW (span > 0)" on page 189
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold <Level>
This command defines a threshold above which the signal is tracked.
Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command
(CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe]).
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Level> Range: -130 dBm to 30 dBm
*RST: -120 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:THR -50DBM
Sets the threshold for signal tracking to -50 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Track Threshold (span > 0)" on page 189
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command defines the trace on which the signal is tracked.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<TraceNumber> Range: 1 to 6
*RST: 1
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR:TRAC 3
Defines trace 3 as the trace for signal tracking.
Manual operation: See "Select Trace (span > 0)" on page 189

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] <State>
This command turns signal tracking on and off.
When signal tracking is on, the R&S FSVA/FSV determines the maximum signal after
each frequency sweep. The center frequency is then set to the frequency of this signal.
Thus, the center frequency follows the frequency when you measure drifting signals.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR ON
Switches on the signal track function.
Manual operation: See "Track On/Off (span > 0)" on page 189
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary Subsystem
This subsystem contains the control commands for the power functions in zero span.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MSUMmary?........................................................ 707
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF................................................... 708
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage..............................................708
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?.......................709
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?.......................... 710
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?...................................... 710
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]...................................... 711
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MODE.................................................. 711
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd................................................. 711
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?...................... 712
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?..........................712
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?..................................... 713
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe]..................................... 713
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE........................714
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?......................... 714
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?.............................715
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?........................................ 715
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe]........................................ 716
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:AVERage:RESult?................716
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:PHOLd:RESult?................... 717
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult?...............................718
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe]...............................718
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe]................................................ 719

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MSUMmary?
The commands of this subsystem are used to determine the power of a sequence of
signal pulses that have the same interval in the window specified by the suffix <n>, as
for example the slots of a GSM signal typically do. The number of pulses to be mea-
sured as well as the measurement time and the period can be set. To define the posi-
tion of the first pulse in the trace, a suitable offset can be entered.
The evaluation is performed on the measurement data of a previously recorded trace.
The data recorded during the set measurement time is combined to a measured value
for each pulse according to the detector specified and the indicated number of results
is output as a list.
Trace 1 is always used by the function.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<time offset of first pulse>, <measurement time>, <period>, < #
of pulses to measure>

Example: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -10dBm

Sets the reference level to 10 dB
INP:ATT 30 dB
Sets the input attenuation to 30 dB
FREQ:CENT 935.2MHz;SPAN 0 Hz
Sets the receive frequency to 935.2 MHz and the span to 0 Hz
BAND:RES 1 MHz;VID 3 MHz
Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz and the video bandwidth
to 3 MHz
DET RMS
Sets the RMS detector
TRIG:SOUR VID;LEV:VID 50 PCT
Selects the trigger source VIDeo and sets the level of the video
trigger source to 50 PCT
SWE:TIME 50 ms
Sets the sweep time to 50 ms
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement with synchronization
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MSUM? 50US,450US,576.9US,8
Queries 8 bursts with an offset of 50 µs, a test time of 450 µs
and a period of 576.9 µs
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF
This command turns all time domain power measurements off.
Suffix: .
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AOFF
Switches off the functions for power measurement in zero span.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage <State>
This command turns averaging for the active power measurement in zero span on and
off.
Averaging is reset by switching it off and on again.
The number of results required for the calculation of average is defined with [SENSe:
]AVERage<n>:COUNt.
for single sweeps.

Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON
Switches on the calculation of average.
AVER:COUN 200
Sets the measurement counter to 200.
INIT;*WAI
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average mean time domain power. The query is only possi-
ble if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Return values:
<MeanPower> Mean power of the signal during the measurement time.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON
Switches on the function.
Switches on the average value calculation.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:AVER:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum mean time domain power. The query is only pos-
sible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Return values:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON
Switches on the peak value measurement.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:PHOL:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?
This command queries the mean time domain power.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Return values:
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES?
Outputs the result.

Usage: Query only

Manual operation: See "Mean" on page 355
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the measurement of the mean time domain power on and off.
Note: The measurement is performed on the trace marker 1 is positioned. In order to
evaluate another trace, marker 1 must be positioned on another trace with
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON
Manual operation: See "Mean" on page 355
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MODE <Mode>
This command selects absolute or relative power measurement in zero span.
The reference power for relative measurement is defined with CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE. If the reference power
is not defined, the value 0 dBm is used.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute | RELative
*RST: ABSolute
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MODE REL
Switches the power measurement in zero span to relative.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd <State>
This command turns the peak hold function for the active power measurement in zero
span on and off.
If on, the measurement results show only the maximum power that has been mea-
sured for each sweep point.
The peak hold function is reset by switching it off and on again.

Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average positive peak time domain power. The query is
only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Return values:
<PeakPower> Peak power of the signal during the measurement time.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:AVER:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum positive peak time domain power. The query is
only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
for single sweeps.

Suffix: .
Return values:
Switches on the measurement of the peak value.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:PHOL:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?
This command queries the positive peak time domain power.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Return values:
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the measurement of the positive peak time domain power on and
off.


Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE
This command sets the currently measured average value (CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]) and RMS value
(CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe]) as reference
values for relative measurements in zero span.
If the measurement of RMS value and average is not activated, the reference value 0
dBm is used.
If the function CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage or
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd is switched on, the cur-
rent value is the accumulated measurement value at the time considered.
Suffix: .
<m> irrelevant
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:REF:AUTO ONCE
Takes the currently measured power as reference value for the
relative power measurement in zero span.
Usage: Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average RMS time domain power. The query is only possi-
ble if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .


Return values:
<RMSPower> RMS power of the signal during the measurement time.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON
Switches on the average value calculation.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:AVER:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum RMS time domain power. The query is only pos-
sible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Return values:
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:PHOL:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?
This command queries the RMS time domain power.

for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Return values:
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "RMS" on page 355
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the measurement of the RMS time domain power on and off.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUM:RMS ON
Manual operation: See "RMS" on page 355
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the average standard deviation of the time domain power. The
query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.

for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Return values:
<StandardDeviation> Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:SDEV:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the maximum standard deviation of the time domain power.
The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Return values:
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:PHOL:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult?
This command queries the standard deviation of the time domain power.
for single sweeps.
Suffix: .
Return values:
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:RES?
Outputs the result.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Std Dev" on page 355
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the measurement of the standard deviation of the time domain
power on and off.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON
Switches on the measurement of the standard deviation.
Manual operation: See "Std Dev" on page 355

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] <State>
This command turns time domain power measurements on and off. This measurement
in only available in zero span.
Thus one or several measurements can be first selected and then switched on and off
together using this command.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Time Domain Power (zero span)" on page 282
See "Time Domain Power" on page 355
CALCulate:MATH Subsystem
The CALCulate:MATH subsystem allows data from the SENSe-subsystem to be pro-
cessed in numeric expressions.
CALCulate<n>:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine]....................................................................719
CALCulate<n>:MATH:POSition....................................................................................... 720
CALCulate<n>:MATH:STATe.......................................................................................... 720
CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE.......................................................................................... 720
CALCulate<n>:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine] <Expression>
This command defines the mathematical expression for relating traces to trace1.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Expression> (TRACe1-TRACe2) | (TRACe1-TRACe3) | (TRACe1-TRACe4) |
(TRACe1-TRACe5) | (TRACe1-TRACe6)
(TRACe1-TRACe2)
Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1.
(TRACe1-TRACe3)
(TRACe1-TRACe4)
(TRACe1-TRACe5)
(TRACe1-TRACe6)

Example: CALC1:MATH (TRACe1 – TRACe2)

Selects the subtraction of trace 2 from trace 1.
Manual operation: See "Trace Math" on page 227
CALCulate<n>:MATH:POSition <Position>
This command defines the position of the result of the trace mathematics. The indica-
tion is in % of the screen height, with 100 % corresponding to the upper diagram bor-
der.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Position> -100PCT to 200PCT
*RST: 50PCT
Example: CALC:MATH:POS 50PCT
Sets the position to the horizontal diagram center.
Manual operation: See "Trace Math Position" on page 228
CALCulate<n>:MATH:STATe <State>
This command switches the mathematical relation of traces on or off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:MATH:STAT ON
Switches on the trace mathematics.
Manual operation: See "Trace Math" on page 227
See "Trace Math Off" on page 228
CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE <Method>
This command selects the method for the trace math calculations.
For details see "Trace Math Mode" on page 227.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Method> LINear | LOGarithmic | POWer
*RST: LOG

Example: CALC:MATH:MODE LIN

Selects linear averaging for trace math calculations.
Manual operation: See "Lin" on page 227
See "Log" on page 227
See "Power" on page 227
CALCulate:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9)

This subsystem controls the instrument settings for power sensor measurements. It is
only available if the R&S FSV-K9 Power Sensor option is installed.
on page 508.
CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]........................................................... 721
CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO ONCE....................................... 721
CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative:STATe....................................................................722
CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude] <Value>
This command sets the reference value for relative measurements for the selected
power sensor.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<Value> -200 to 200
*RST: 0
Example: CALC:PMET2:REL -30
Sets the reference value for relative measurements to -30 dBm
for power sensor 2.
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Reference Value" on page 519
CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO ONCE
This command takes the current measurement value as reference value for relative
measurements for the selected power sensor.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
 1...4
Power sensor index

Example: CALC:PMET2:REL:AUTO ONCE

Takes the current measurement value as reference value for rel-
ative measurements for power sensor 2.
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Meas -> Ref" on page 518
CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative:STATe <State>
This command switches between relative and absolute display of the measured power
for the selected power sensor.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:PMET2:REL:STAT ON
Activates the relative display of the measured value for power
sensor 2.
Mode: PSM
CALCulate:PSEarch|PEAKsearch Subsystem
The CALCulate:PSEarch|PEAKsearch subsystem contains the remote commands for
Spurious Emissions measurements. Both groups of commands (PSEarch and PEAK-
search) perform the same functions.
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate]............................................................ 722
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:AUTO.................................................................... 723
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin................................................................. 723
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:PSHow.................................................................. 723
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges........................................................... 724
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate]
This command switches the spurious limit check off.
If you want to read out the values peak values including the delta to a limit, you have to
switch on the limit again.
This command is only for FSP compatibility, and not necessary to use on the
R&S FSVA/FSV.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

Example: CALC:PSE
Starts to determine the list.
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:AUTO <State>
This command activates or deactivates the list evaluation.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the list evaluation.
Manual operation: See "List Evaluation (On/Off)" on page 322
See "List Evaluation (On/Off)" on page 352
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin <Margin>
This command sets the margin used for the limit check/peak search.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Margin> -200 to 200 dB
*RST: 200 dB
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:MARG 100
Sets the margin to 100 dB.
Manual operation: See "Margin" on page 322
See "Margin" on page 352
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:PSHow
This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:PSH ON
Marks all peaks with blue squares.
Manual operation: See "Show Peaks" on page 352

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges <NumberPeaks>
This command sets the number of peaks per range that are stored in the list. Once the
selected number of peaks has been reached, the peak search is stopped in the current
range and continued in the next range.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<NumberPeaks> 1 to 50
*RST: 25
Example: CALC:PSE:SUBR 10
Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list.
Manual operation: See "Peaks per Range" on page 352
CALCulate:SGRam Subsystem
These commands are only available if the "Spectrogram" measurements option
R&S FSV-K14 is installed.
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate].......................................................................724
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:COLor........................................................................................ 724
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CONT.........................................................................................725
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:COUNt........................................................................... 725
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect........................................................................... 726
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth...................................................................................... 726
CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe]......................................................................................727
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe]........................................................................ 727
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA?.......................................................................... 728
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command resets the Spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Example: CALC:SGR:CLE
Resets the result display and clears the memory.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Spectrogram Clear" on page 218
See "Clear Spectrogram" on page 526
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:COLor <Color>
This command selects the color scheme of the spectrogram result display.

This command is available for R&S FSV-K14 only. To define the color scheme in the
spectrogram of the realtime analyzer, use DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor[:
STYLe] on page 746.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<Color> COLor
RGB colors
RADar
black - green - white
GRAYscale
black and white
*RST: COLor
Example: CALC:SGR:COL GRAY
Selects black and white color scheme.
Manual operation: See "Color Mapping" on page 526
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CONT <State>
This command determines whether the results of the last measurement are deleted
before starting a new measurement in single sweep mode.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Selects single sweep mode.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the sweep and waits for the end of the sweep.
CALC:SGR:CONT ON
Repeats the single sweep measurement without deleting the
results of the last measurement.
Manual operation: See "Continue Frame (On Off)" on page 217
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:COUNt <Frames>
This command sets the number of frames to be recorded in a single sweep.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4

Parameters:
<Frames> The maximum number of frames depends on
the .CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth on page 726
Range: 1 to depends on history depth
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Selects single sweep mode.
CALC:SGR:FRAM:COUN 200
Sets the number of frames to 200.
Manual operation: See "Frame Count" on page 218
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect <Frame>
This command selects a specific frame for further analysis. The command is available
only if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has ended.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<Frame> <frame_number> (if time stamp is off)
Selects the frame. The range is {0...number of recorded
frames-1}
Time distance in seconds. It selects the frame that is x seconds
away from frame 0.
Stop the continuous sweep.
CALC:SGR:FRAM:SEL -25
Selects frame number -25.
Manual operation: See "Select Frame" on page 217
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth <HistoryDepth>
This command sets the number of frames to be stored in the R&S FSVA/FSV's mem-
ory.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4

Parameters:
<HistoryDepth> The maximum number of frames depends on the number of
sweep points.
Range: 781 to 20000
Increment: 1
*RST: 3000
Example: CALC:SGR:HDEP 1500
Sets the history depth to 1500.
Manual operation: See "Frame Count" on page 218
See "History Depth" on page 525
CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the spectrogram result display on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:SGR ON
Activates the Spectrogram result display.
Manual operation: See "Spectrogram (On Off)" on page 525
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe] <State>
This command activates and deactivates the time stamp.
If the time stamp is active, some commands do not address frames as numbers, but as
(relative) time values:
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe on page 619
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe on page 698
● CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect on page 726
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:SGR:TST ON
Activates the time stamp.
Manual operation: See "Time Stamp (On Off)" on page 526

CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA? <Mode>
This command queries the time stamp of the frames.
All available frame results are returned via the TRACe<n>[:DATA]? command.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Query parameters:
<Mode> CURRent
Returns the time stamp of the current frame.
ALL
Returns the time stamps of all frames. The result are sorted in
descending order, beginning with the current frame.
Return values:
<TimeStamp> The return values consist of four values for each frame.
The first value is the date of the measurement in seconds that
have passed since 01.01.1970 in seconds. For a better resolu-
tion the second value shows the additional milliseconds. This
value is also displayed on screen.
These numbers are appropiate for relative uses, but you can
also calculate the absolute date and time as displayed on the
screen.
The third and fourth value are reserved for future uses.
If the Spectrogram is empty, the command returns '0,0,0,0'
Example: CALC:SGR:TST ON
Activates the time stamp.
CALC:SGR:TST:DATA? ALL
Returns the time stamp of all frames sorted in a descending
order.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate:STATistics Subsystem
The CALCulate:STATistics subsystem controls the statistical measurement func-
tions in the instrument.
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe].......................................................................... 729
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe]........................................................................ 729
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<Trace>......................................................................729
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples.............................................................................. 730
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet.................................................................................. 730
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<Trace>........................................................................731
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE............................................................... 731
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe.................................................................... 732
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel.....................................................................732

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer..................................................................... 732
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT........................................................................ 733
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer...................................................................... 733
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe] <State>
This command switches on or off the measurement of amplitude distribution (APD). On
activating this function, the CCDF measurement is switched off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:STAT:APD ON
Switches on the APD measurement.
Manual operation: See "APD" on page 282
See "APD" on page 360
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] <State>
This command switches on or off the measurement of the complementary cumulative
distribution function (CCDF). On activating this function, the APD measurement is
switched off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:STAT:CCDF ON
Switches on the CCDF measurement.
Manual operation: See "CCDF" on page 283
See "CCDF" on page 365
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<Trace> <Probability>
This command queries the results of the complementary cumulative distribution func-
tion (CCDF) for the specified probability (corresponding to the "Percent Marker" in the
display, see "Percent Marker" on page 366).The suffix of X defines the trace number.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<Trace> 1...6
trace

Parameters:
<Probability> P0_01: Level value for 0.01 % probability
P0_1: Level value for 0.1 % probability
P1: Level value for 1 % probability
P10: Level value for 10 % probability
Example: CALC:STAT:CCDF:X1? P10
Returns the level values that are over 10 % above the mean
value.
Manual operation: See "CCDF" on page 365
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples <NoMeasPoints>
This command sets the number of measurement points to be acquired for the statisti-
cal measurement functions.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<NoMeasPoints> 100 to 1E9
*RST: 100000
Example: CALC:STAT:NSAM 500
Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500.
Manual operation: See "# of Samples" on page 361
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet
This command resets the scaling of the X and Y axes in a statistical measurement.
The following values are set:
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: CALC:STAT:PRES
Resets the scaling for statistical functions
Manual operation: See "Default Settings" on page 363

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<Trace> <ResultType>
This command reads out the results of statistical measurements of a recorded trace.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<Trace> 1...6
trace
Parameters:
<ResultType> MEAN | PEAK | CFACtor | ALL
MEAN
Average (=RMS) power in dBm measured during the measure-
ment time.
PEAK
Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time.
CFACtor
Determined CREST factor (= ratio of peak power to average
power) in dB.
ALL
Results of all three measurements mentioned before, separated
by commas: <mean power>,<peak power>,<crest factor>
The required result is selected via the following parameters:
Example: CALC:STAT:RES2? ALL
Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2. Example of
answer string: 5.56,19.25,13.69 i.e. mean power: 5.56 dBm,
peak power 19.25 dBm, CREST factor 13.69 dB
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE
This command optimizes the level setting of the instrument depending on the mea-
sured peak power, in order to obtain maximum instrument sensitivity.
To obtain maximum resolution, the level range is set as a function of the measured
spacing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and
of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement. In
addition, the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted.
Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with *WAI, *OPC or *OPC? to the
end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:AUTO ONCE;*WAI
Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements.

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe <Value>
This command defines the level range for the x-axis of the measurement diagram. The
setting is identical to the level range setting defined with the DISPlay[:
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] command.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> 10dB to 200dB
*RST: 100dB
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RANG 20dB
Manual operation: See "x-Axis Range" on page 361
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel <Value>
This command defines the reference level for the x-axis of the measurement diagram.
The setting is identical to the reference level setting using the DISPlay[:
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel command.
With the reference level offset <> 0 the indicated value range of the reference level is
modified by the offset.
The unit depends on the setting performed with CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> -120dBm to 20dBm
*RST: -20dBm
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RLEV -60dBm
Manual operation: See "x-Axis Ref Level" on page 361
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer <Value>
This command defines the lower limit for the y-axis of the diagram in statistical mea-
surements. Since probabilities are specified on the y-axis, the entered numeric values
are dimensionless.
Suffix: .
<n> selects the screen
Parameters:
<Value> 1E-9 to 0.1
*RST: 1E-6
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:LOW 0.001
Manual operation: See "y-Axis Min Value" on page 363

CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT <Unit>
This command defines the scaling type of the y-axis.
Suffix: .
<n> selects the screen
Parameters:
<Unit> PCT | ABS
*RST: ABS
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UNIT PCT
Sets the percentage scale.
Manual operation: See "y-Unit % / Abs" on page 363
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer <Value>
This command defines the upper limit for the y-axis of the diagram in statistical mea-
surements. Since probabilities are specified on the y-axis, the entered numeric values
are dimensionless.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> 1E-8 to 1.0
*RST: 1.0
Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UPP 0.01
Manual operation: See "y-Axis Max Value" on page 363
CALCulate:THReshold Subsystem
The CALCulate:THReshold subsystem controls the threshold value for the maximum/
minimum search of markers.
CALCulate<n>:THReshold..............................................................................................733
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe................................................................................... 734
CALCulate<n>:THReshold <Threshold>
This command defines a threshold value for the marker peak search.
A threshold line is automatically turned on.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Threshold> The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.

Example: CALC:THR -82DBM

Sets the threshold value to -82 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Threshold" on page 264
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe <State>
This command turns the threshold line for the marker peak search on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:THR:STAT ON
Switches on the threshold line.
Manual operation: See "Threshold" on page 264
See "Search Lim Off" on page 274
CALCulate:TLINe Subsystem
The CALCulate:TLINe subsystem defines the position of the time lines.
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line>........................................................................................... 734
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line>:STATe................................................................................ 734
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line> <Time>
This command defines the position of a time line.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<Line> 1|2
Selects the time line.
Parameters:
<Time> Range: 0 to 30000000000
Default unit: s
Example: CALC:TLIN 10ms
Manual operation: See "Time Line 1 / Time Line 2" on page 390
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line>:STATe <State>
This command turns a time line on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

<Line> 1|2
Selects the time line.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CALC:TLIN2:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Time Line 1 / Time Line 2" on page 390
CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem
The CALCulate:UNIT subsystem defines the units for the parameters that can be set
and the measurement results.
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer <Unit>
This command selects the unit of the y-axis.
The unit applies to all measurement windows.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Unit> DBM | V | A | W | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT |
DBUA | AMPere
*RST: dBm
Example: CALC:UNIT:POW DBM
Sets the power unit to dBm.
Manual operation: See "Unit" on page 195
Other commands in the Calculate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:FORMat <Format>
This command defines the display type of the IQ data.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Format> RIMag
IQ data
MAGNitude
Magnitude
FREQuency
Spectrum
VECTor
IQ-Vector

Manual operation: See "I/Q Analyzer" on page 412

See "Display Config" on page 417
5.3.3.3 CALibration:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9)
The CALibration:PMETer Subsystem determines the error correction data for measure-
ments in the power meter mode. It is only available if the R&S FSV-K9 Power Sensor
option is installed.
on page 508.
CALibration:PMETer:ZERO:AUTO ONCE................................................................... 736
CALibration:PMETer:ZERO:AUTO ONCE
This command starts zeroing of the selected power sensor.
Note: Before starting the zeroing process disconnect all signals from the input of the
power sensor.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Example: CAL:PMET2:ZERO:AUTO ONCE;*WAI
Starts zeroing the power sensor 2 and delays the execution of
further commands until zeroing is concluded.
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Zeroing Power Sensor" on page 517
5.3.3.4 DISPlay Subsystem
The DISPLay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual and graphic
information as well as of measurement data on the display.
Some applications offer up to four measurement windows. For those, the suffix <1....4>
for WINDow selects the measurement window. For all other applications, the suffix is
irrelevant.
DISPlay:MTABle............................................................................................................ 737
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SIZE................................................................ 737
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SELect.............................................................738
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe].......................................................................738
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE.........................................................................739
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous....................................................740
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing.................................................................. 740
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing.................................................................. 741
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]................................................................... 741
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE.........................................................742

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel....................................................... 742
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet........................................... 743
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition................................................... 743
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue...................................................... 744
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:ZOOM:AREA............................................................................... 744
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:ZOOM:STATe..............................................................................745
DISPlay:MTABle <DisplayMode>
This command turns the marker table on and off.
Parameters:
<DisplayMode> ON
Marker table is displayed.
OFF
Marker table is not displayed.
AUTO
Marker table is only displayed if 2 or more markers are active.
*RST: AUTO
Example: To activate the table display:
DISP:MTAB ON
To query the current state of the marker table display:
DISP:MTAB?
Manual operation: See "Marker Table" on page 252
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SIZE <Size>
This command configures the measurement display.
Suffix: .
<n> 1|2
window;
Channel and adjacent-channel power measurements: Only "1" is
allowed as a suffix for the window.
Spectrum Emission Mask and Spurious Emissions measure-
ments:
selects the window that is displayed in full size (if no suffix is
defined, "1" is used):
1: diagram/result list
2: marker table
<m> 1|2
selects the item in the window to be displayed in full size:
1: diagram
2: result list

Parameters:
<Size> LARGe | SMALl
LARGe
Channel and adjacent-channel power measurements: diagram
in full screen.
Spectrum Emission Mask and Spurious Emissions measure-
ments: diagram or list in full screen, depending on the value of
the suffix.
SMALl
split screen (diagram and list and table)
*RST: SMALl
Example: DISP:SIZE LARG
Displays the measurement diagram in full screen size.
DISP:WIND1:SUBW2:SIZE LARG
Displays the result list in full screen size.
DISP:WIND2:SIZE LARG
Displays the marker table in full screen size.
Mode: all
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SELect
This command selects which window (screen) is active for applications with more than
one measurement window. For measurements with additional subwindows (e.g. SEM,
ACLR), the subwindow can also be selected.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure-
ment window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
<m> 1...2
1: graphic
2: table
For applications that do not have subwindows, the suffix <m> is
irrelevant.
Parameters:
*RST: 1
Example: DISP:WIND1:SEL
Sets the window 1 active.
DISP:WIND1:SUBW2:SEL
Sets the focus on the table of window 1.
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] <State>
This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace. The other
measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background.

Suffix: .
<n> window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure-
<t> trace
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON for TRACe1, OFF for TRACe2 to 6
Example: DISP:TRAC3 ON
Manual operation: See "Blank" on page 222
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE <Mode>
This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces. WRITE cor-
responds to the Clr/Write mode of manual operation. The trace is switched off (=
BLANK in manual operation) with DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe].
The number of measurements for AVERage, MAXHold and MINHold is defined with
the [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt or [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt commands. It should
be noted that synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is
only possible in single sweep mode.
If calculation of average values is active, selection between logarithmic and linear aver-
aging is possible. For more detail see [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 773.
Suffix: .
<t> trace
Parameters:
<Mode> WRITe | VIEW | AVERage | MAXHold | MINHold | BLANk
*RST: WRITe for TRACe1, STATe OFF for
TRACe2/3/4/5/6
For details on trace modes refer to Chapter 4.2.8.4, "Trace
Mode Overview", on page 231.
Switching to single sweep mode.
SWE:COUN 16
Sets the number of measurements to 16.
DISP:TRAC3:MODE MAXH
Switches on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps.

Manual operation: See "Clear Write" on page 220

See "Max Hold" on page 221
See "Min Hold" on page 221
See "Average" on page 221
See "View" on page 221
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous <State>
This command defines whether traces in Min Hold, Max Hold and Average mode (see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 739) are reset after a parameter
is changed.
Normally, the measurement is started anew after parameter changes, before the mea-
surement results are evaluated (e.g. using a marker). In all cases that require a new
measurement after parameter changes, the trace is reset automatically to avoid false
results (e.g. with span changes). For applications that require no reset after parameter
changes, the automatic reset can be switched off.
Suffix: .
<t> trace
Parameters:
<State> ON
The automatic reset is switched off.
OFF
After certain parameter changes the traces are reset.
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:WIND:TRAC3:MODE:HCON ON
Switches off the reset function.
Manual operation: See "Hold/Cont" on page 222
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing <ScalingType>
This command toggles between linear and logarithmic display of the x-axis.
Suffix: .
<t> irrelevant

Parameters:
<ScalingType> LOGarithmic | LINear
LOGarithmic
Selects logarithmic scaling.
LINear
Selects linear scaling.
*RST: LINear
Example: DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG
Mode: A, ADEMOD
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing <ScalingType>
This command selects the scaling of the y-axis.
Suffix: .
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<ScalingType> LOGarithmic
Logarithmic scaling.
LINear
Linear scaling in %.
LDB
Linear scaling in dB.
*RST: LOGarithmic
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN
Select a linear scale.
Manual operation: See "Range Log 100 dB" on page 193
See "Range Log 50 dB" on page 194
See "Range Log Manual" on page 194
See "Range Linear %" on page 195
See "Range Lin. Unit" on page 195
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] <Range>
This command defines the display range of the y-axis with logarithmic scaling.
The command works only for a logarithmic scaling. You can select the scaling with
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing on page 741.
Suffix: .

<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Range> Range: 10 to 200
*RST: 100
Default unit: dB
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y 110dB
Manual operation: See "Range Log 100 dB" on page 193
See "Range Log Manual" on page 194
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the type of scaling of the y-axis.
When SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate is turned off, this command has no immediate
effect on the screen.
Suffix: .
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute
absolute scaling of the y-axis
RELative
relative scaling of the y-axis
*RST: ABS
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:MODE REL
Manual operation: See "Grid Abs/Rel " on page 198
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <ReferenceLevel>
This command defines the reference level.
With the reference level offset ≠ 0, the value range of the reference level is modified by
the offset.
The unit depends on the setting defined with CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant.
<t> irrelevant

Parameters:
<ReferenceLevel> The unit is variable.
Range: see datasheet
*RST: -10dBm
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV -60dBm
Manual operation: See "Ref Level" on page 193
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <Value>
This command defines a reference level offset.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant.
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> Range: -200 to 200
*RST: 0
Default unit: dB
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS -10dB
Manual operation: See "Ref Level Offset" on page 197
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition <Position>
This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid..
When using a tracking generator (only with option R&S FSV-B9 or -B10, requires
active normalization), and in Bluetooth mode (option R&S FSV-K8) this command
defines the position of the reference value for all windows.
Suffix: .
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Position> 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border, 100% corre-
sponds to the upper display border.
Range: 0 to 100
*RST: Spectrum mode: 100 PCT, with tracking generator
or time display: 50 PCT
Default unit: PCT
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:RPOS 50PCT
Manual operation: See "Ref Level Position" on page 197
See "Reference Value Position" on page 447

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue <Value>
The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid.
When using a tracking generator, this command requires active normalization.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> *RST: 0 dB, coupled to reference level
Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL -20dBm
Defines a reference position of -20 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Reference Level" on page 415
See "Reference Value" on page 447
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:ZOOM:AREA <x1>, <y1>, <x2>, <y2>

This command defines the zoom area.
Before you can define a zoom area, you first have to turn the zoom on.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<x1>,<y1>, Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define
<x2>,<y2> the zoom area.
The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The
upper right corner is the end point of the system.
Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
Example: DISP:ZOOM ON
Activates the zoom mode.
DISP:ZOOM:AREA 5,30,20,100
Enlarges the display of the measurement results in the area
defined by the coordinates (5,30) and (20,100).

DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:ZOOM:STATe <State>
This command turns the zoom on and off.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:ZOOM ON
Activates the zoom mode.
5.3.3.5 DISPlay Commands for Spectrograms
This chapter describes commands required in the optional Spectrogram Mode

(R&S FSV-K14).
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:DEFault....................................................................... 745
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:LOWer.........................................................................745
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe........................................................................ 746
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:UPPer..........................................................................746
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe]....................................................................... 746
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:DEFault
This command sets the color settings for the spectrogram result display to its default
state.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Set to Default" on page 531
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:LOWer <Percentage>
This command sets the lower percentage boundary of the spectrogram.
Parameters:
<Percentage> Statistical frequency percentage.
Range: 0 to 66
*RST: 0
Default unit: %
Example: DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:LOW 10
Sets the start of the color map to 10%.
See "Start" on page 530

DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe <Shape>
This command defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram
result display.
Parameters:
<Shape> Shape of the color curve.
Range: -1 to 1
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Shape" on page 531
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:UPPer <Percentage>
This command sets the upper percentage boundary of the spectrogram.
Parameters:
<Percentage> Statistical frequency percentage.
Range: 0 to 66
*RST: 0
Default unit: %
Example: DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:UPP 95
Sets the start of the color map to 95%.
See "Stop" on page 531
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe] <ColorScheme>
This command sets the color scheme for the spectrogram.
Parameters:
<ColorScheme> HOT
Uses a color range from blue to red. Blue colors indicate low lev-
els, red colors indicate high ones.
COLD
Uses a color range from red to blue. Red colors indicate low lev-
els, blue colors indicate high ones.
RADar
Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with
shades of green in between. Dark colors indicate low levels, light
colors indicate high ones.
GRAYscale
Shows the results in shades of gray. Dark gray indicates low lev-
els, light gray indicates high ones.
*RST: HOT
Example: DISP:WIND:SGR:COL GRAY
Changes the color scheme of the spectrogram to black and
white.

Manual operation: See "Hot/Cold/Radar/Grayscale" on page 531
5.3.3.6 FETCh:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9)
The FETCh:PMETer subsystem contains commands to read measurement results of

power sensor measurements without starting the measurement itself. It is only availa-
ble if the R&S FSV-K9 Power Sensor option is installed.
on page 508.
FETCh<n>:PMETer?................................................................................................ 747
FETCh<n>:PMETer?
This command reads the result of the power sensor measurement for the selected
power sensor. These results are also displayed in the marker table.
If no measurement has been performed, this command will lead to a query error.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
 1...4
Power sensor index
Example: FETC:PMET2?
Reads the result of the power sensor measurement for the
power sensor 2.
Usage: Query only
Mode: PSM
5.3.3.7 FORMat Subsytem
The FORMat subsystem specifies the data format of the data transmitted from and to
the instrument.
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator........................................................................................ 747
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes............................................................................................. 748
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator <Separator>
This command defines which decimal separator (decimal point or comma) is to be
used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format. Different languages
of evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) can thus be supported.
Parameters:
<Separator> POINt | COMMA
*RST: (factory setting is POINt; *RST does not affect set-
ting)

Example: FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN

Sets the decimal point as separator.
Manual operation: See "ASCII Trace Export" on page 167
See "Decim Sep" on page 168
See "ASCII File Export" on page 264
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes <Selection>
This command selects the data to be included in a data export file.
Parameters:
<Selection> ALL
Selects all active traces for export to an ASCII file.
The <trace> parameter for the MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe
command is ignored.
SINGle
Only a single trace is selected for export, namely the one speci-
fied by the MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe command.
*RST: SINGle
5.3.3.8 INITiate Subsystem
The INITiate subsystem is used to control the init-measurement function.

INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]..................................................................................................748
INITiate<n>:CONMeas................................................................................................... 749
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous................................................................................................749
INITiate<n>:DISPlay.......................................................................................................750
INITiate<n>:ESPectrum.................................................................................................. 750
INITiate<n>:SPURious................................................................................................... 751
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]
The command initiates a new measurement sequence.
With sweep count > 0 or average count > 0, this means a restart of the indicated num-
ber of measurements. With trace functions MAXHold, MINHold and AVERage, the pre-
vious results are reset on restarting the measurement.
In single sweep mode, you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI. In continuous sweep mode, synchronization to the end of the mea-
surement is not possible. Thus, it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep
mode in remote control, as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a sin-
gle sweep end synchronization.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant


DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER
Switches on trace averaging.
SWE:COUN 20
Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps.
INIT;*WAI
Mode: all
INITiate<n>:CONMeas
This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode.
The measurement is restarted at the first sweep point.
As opposed to INITiate<n>[:IMMediate], this command does not reset traces in
maxhold, minhold or average mode. Therefore it can be used to continue measure-
ments using max hold or averaging functions.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER
Switches on trace averaging.
SWE:COUN 20
Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps.
INIT;*WAI
INIT:CONM;*WAI
Continues the measurement (next 20 sequences) and waits for
the end.
Manual operation: See "Continue Single Sweep" on page 214
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous <State>
This command determines whether the trigger system is continuously initiated (contin-
uous) or performs single measurements (single).
The sweep is started immediately.
In the "Spectrum" mode, this setting refers to the sweep sequence (switching between
continuous/single sweep).

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Switches the sequence to single sweep.
INIT:CONT ON
Switches the sequence to continuous sweep.
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Continuous Sweep" on page 214
See "Single Sweep" on page 214
INITiate<n>:DISPlay <State>
This command turns the display during a single sweep measurement on or off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
INIT:DISP OFF
Sets the display behavior to OFF
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement with display switched off.
INITiate<n>:ESPectrum
This command starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: INIT:ESP
Starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement.
Manual operation: See "Meas Start/Stop" on page 325

INITiate<n>:SPURious
This command initiates a Spurious Emissions measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: INIT:SPUR
Starts a Spurious Emissions measurement.
Usage: Event
5.3.3.9 INPut Subsystem
The INPut subsystem controls the input characteristics of the RF inputs of the instru-
ment.
INPut:ATTenuation.........................................................................................................751
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO...............................................................................................752
INPut:COUPling.............................................................................................................752
INPut:DIQ:CDEVice....................................................................................................... 752
INPut:DIQ:RANGe:COUPling.......................................................................................... 754
INPut:DIQ:RANGe[:UPPer]............................................................................................. 754
INPut:DIQ:RANGe[:UPPer]:UNIT.....................................................................................754
INPut:DIQ:SRATe.......................................................................................................... 755
INPut:EATT................................................................................................................... 755
INPut:EATT:AUTO......................................................................................................... 756
INPut:EATT:STATe........................................................................................................ 756
INPut:FILTer:YIG[:STATe].............................................................................................. 756
INPut:GAIN:STATe ....................................................................................................... 757
INPut:IMPedance...........................................................................................................757
INPut:SELect.................................................................................................................757
INPut:UPORt?............................................................................................................... 758
INPut:UPORt:STATe...................................................................................................... 758
INPut:ATTenuation <Value>
This command programs the input attenuator. To protect the input mixer against dam-
age from overloads, the setting 0 dB can be obtained by entering numerals, not by
using the DOWN command.
accordingly.
In the default state with "Spectrum" mode, the attenuation set on the step attenuator is
coupled to the reference level of the instrument. If the attenuation is programmed
directly, the coupling to the reference level is switched off.
This function is not available if the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17) is active.

Parameters:
<Value> *RST: 10 dB (AUTO is set to ON)
Example: INP:ATT 30dB
Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 30 dB and switches off
the coupling to the reference level.
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "RF Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual" on page 196
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level (state
ON) or switches the input attenuation to manual entry (state OFF).
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: INP:ATT:AUTO ON
Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference
level.
Manual operation: See "RF Atten Auto/Mech Att Auto" on page 196
INPut:COUPling <CouplingType>
Parameters:
<CouplingType> AC | DC
*RST: AC
Example: INP:COUP DC
Manual operation: See "Input (AC/DC)" on page 198
INPut:DIQ:CDEVice
This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband
input from the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S FSV-B17).
For details see the section "Interface Status Information" for the R&S Digital I/Q Inter-
face (R&S FSV-B17) in the description of the base unit.

Return values:
<ConnState> Defines whether a device is connected or not.
0
No device is connected.
1
A device is connected.
<DeviceName> Device ID of the connected device
<SerialNumber> Serial number of the connected device
<PortName> Port name used by the connected device
<SampleRate> Maximum or currently used sampling rate of the connected
device in Hz (depends on the used connection protocol version;
indicated by <SampleRateType> parameter)
<MaxTransferRate> Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz
<ConnProtState> State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the
connected device.
Not Started
Has to be Started
Started
Passed
Failed
Done
<PRBSTestState> State of the PRBS test.
Not Started
Has to be Started
Started
Passed
Failed
Done
<SampleRateType> 0
Maximum sampling rate is displayed
1
Current sampling rate is displayed
<Placeholder> for future use; currently "0"
Example: INP:DIQ:CDEV?
Result:
1,SMU200A,103634,Out
A,70000000,100000000,Passed,Not Started,0,0
Mode: IQ, VSA, EVDO, CDMA, WCDMA, GSM, ADEMOD, TDS
Manual operation: See "Connected Device" on page 399
See "Digital IQ Info" on page 402

INPut:DIQ:RANGe:COUPling <State>
If enabled, the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat-
ically if the fullscale level changes.
This command is only available if the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option
R&S FSV-B17) is installed.
For details see the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17) description of the base
unit.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: INP:DIQ:RANG:COUP OFF
Manual operation: See "Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level" on page 400
See "Auto Level" on page 415
INPut:DIQ:RANGe[:UPPer] <Level>
Defines or queries the "Full Scale Level", i.e. the level that should correspond to an I/Q
sample with the magnitude "1".
It can be defined either in dBm or Volt (see "Full Scale Level" on page 400).
For details see Chapter 4.7.5, "Interface Status Information", on page 483.
Parameters:
Range: 70.711 nV to 7.071 V
*RST: 1V
Example: INP:DIQ:RANG 1V
Mode: A, IQ, NF, TDS, VSA, CDMA, EVDO, WCDMA, ADEMOD,
GSM, OFDM, OFDMA/WiBro, WLAN
Manual operation: See "Full Scale Level" on page 400
INPut:DIQ:RANGe[:UPPer]:UNIT <Unit>
Defines the unit of the full scale level (see "Level Unit" on page 400). The availability of
units depends on the measurement application you are using.

unit.
Parameters:
<Level> V | dBm | dBpW | W | dBmV | dBuV | dBuA | A
*RST: Volt
Example: INP:DIQ:RANG:UNIT A
Manual operation: See "Level Unit" on page 400
INPut:DIQ:SRATe <SampleRate>
This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the R&S
Digital I/Q Interface (see "Input Sample Rate" on page 399).
Note: the final user sample rate of the R&S FSVA/FSV may differ and is defined using
TRAC:IQ:SRAT (see TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe on page 895).
unit.
Parameters:
<SampleRate> Range: 1 Hz to 10 GHz
*RST: 32 MHz
Example: INP:DIQ:SRAT 200 MHz
Manual operation: See "Input Sample Rate" on page 399
INPut:EATT <Attenuation>
This command defines the electronic attenuation.
If necessary, the command also turns the electronic attenuator on.
This command is only available with option R&S FSV-B25, but not if R&S FSV-B17 is
active.
Parameters:
<Attenuation> 0...25
*RST: 0 dB (OFF)

Example: INP1:EATT 10 dB
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "El Atten Mode (Auto/Man)" on page 197
INPut:EATT:AUTO <State>
This command switches the automatic behaviour of the electronic attenuator on or off.
If activated, electronic attenuation is used to reduce the operation of the mechanical
attenuation whenever possible.
active.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: INP1:EATT:AUTO OFF
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "El Atten On/Off" on page 196
See "El Atten Mode (Auto/Man)" on page 197
INPut:EATT:STATe <State>
This command turns the electronic attenuator on or off.
active.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: INP:EATT:STAT ON
Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path.
INPut:FILTer:YIG[:STATe] <State>
If the option R&S FSVA-B11 is installed, the YIG preselector can be bypassed.
This function is only available for R&S FSVA instruments.
If the YIG preselector at the input of the R&S FSVA is removed from the signal path,
you can use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis. However, image-frequency
rejection is no longer ensured.
Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 7 GHz. There-
fore, switching the YIG preselector on and off has no effect if the frequency is below
that value.

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
*RST: 1 (0 for I/Q Analyzer, GSM, VSA measurements)
Example: INP:FILT:YIG OFF
Deactivates the YIG preselector.
Manual operation: See "(Bypassing the )YIG Filter" on page 199
INPut:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command turns the preamplifier on and off. (For the exact amplification value, see
the data sheet).
With option R&S FSV-B22, the preamplifier only has an effect below 7 GHz.
With option R&S FSV-B24, the amplifier applies to the entire frequency range.
This command is not available when using R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17).
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: INP:GAIN:STAT ON
Turns the preamplifier on.
Manual operation: See "Preamp On/Off" on page 195
INPut:IMPedance <Impedance>
This command selects the nominal input impedance.
75 Ω should be selected if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impe-
dance using a 75 Ω adapter of the RAZ type (= 25 Ω in series to the input impedance
of the instrument). The correction value in this case is 1.76 dB = 10 log (75Ω/50Ω).
Parameters:
<Impedance> 50 | 75
*RST: 50 Ω
Example: INP:IMP 75
Manual operation: See "Input 50 Ω/75 Ω " on page 198
INPut:SELect <Source>
This command selects the signal source for measurements.

Parameters:
<Source> RF
Radio Frequency ("RF INPUT" connector)
DIQ
Digital IQ (only available with R&S Digital I/Q Interface, option
R&S FSV-B17)
*RST: RF
Example: INP:SEL RF
Manual operation: See "Input Path" on page 399
INPut:UPORt?
This command queries the control lines of the user ports.
Example: INP:UPOR?
Usage: Query only
INPut:UPORt:STATe <State>
This command selects if the user port control lines are used as a input or as a output.
Parameters:
<State> ON
User port is used as a input.
OFF
User port is used as a output.
*RST: ON
Example: INP:UPOR:STAT ON
5.3.3.10 INSTrument Subsystem
The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text
parameters or fixed numbers.
INSTrument[:SELect] <Mode> | <ChannelName>

This command selects the measurement mode using text parameters.
Note: To select an I/Q Analyzer channel in simple mode, you have to use TRACe<n>:
IQ[:STATe].
Also see
● INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 760
● Remote program example: Chapter 5.4.16, "Usage of Four Spectrum Instances",
on page 1041

Setting parameters:
<Mode> values see Table 5-18
*RST: SANalyzer
Example: INST SAN
Switches the instrument to "Spectrum" mode.
Example: INST 'Spectrum 2'
Selects the second spectrum channel named "Spectrum 2".
Usage: Setting only
SCPI confirmed
Table 5-18: Instrument mode parameters
Mode Text parameter Numeric Option number

(INST:SEL) parameter
(INST:NSEL)
Spectrum SANalyzer 1
IQ Analyzer (eval mode) IQ -
Analog demodulation ADEMod 3 R&S FSV-K7
FM Stereo SFM 7 R&S FSV–K7S
Bluetooth BTOoth 12 R&S FSV-K8
GSM GSM 5 R&S FSV-K10

(Query: MGSM.)
Noise Figure Measurements NOISe 19 R&S FSV-K30
Phase Noise mode PNOise 20 R&S FSV-K40
VSA DDEM 2 R&S FSV-K70
3G FDD BTS mode BWCD 8 R&S FSV-K72
3G FDD UE mode MWCD 9 R&S FSV-K73
TD-SCDMA BTS mode BTDS 17 R&S FSV-K76
TD-SCDMA UE mode MTDS 18 R&S FSV-K77
CDMA2000 BS Analysis BCK2 10 R&S FSV-K82
CDMA2000 MS MC2K 11
1xEV-DO BS Analysis BDO 14 R&S FSV-K84
1xEV-DO MS MDO 15
WLAN TX WLAN 16 R&S FSV-K91/91n
WiMax WiMAX 23 R&S FSV-K93
LTE (uplink and downlink) LTE 100 R&S FSV-K101/K102/K103/K104/

K105

INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] <ChannelType>, <ChannelName>

This command adds an additional spectrum display. You can add up to three additional
spectrum displays.
Also see
● INSTrument[:SELect] on page 758
● INSTrument:DELete on page 760
on page 1041
Parameters:
<ChannelType> SANalyzer
The channel type is always SANalyzer to add a new spectrum
display.
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel you want to delete.
A channel must exist in order to be able delete it.
Example: INST:CRE SAN, 'Spectrum 2'
Adds a second spectrum display.
INSTrument:DELete <ChannelName>
This command deletes a spectrum display.
Also see
● INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 760
on page 1041
Parameters:
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel you want to delete.
A channel must exist in order to be able delete it.
Example: INST:DEL 'Spectrum 4'
Deletes the fourth spectrum display.
INSTrument:NSELect <Mode>
This command selects the operating mode by means of numbers (see Table 5-18).
Parameters:
<Mode> *RST: 1
Example: INST:NSEL 1
Switches the instrument to "Spectrum" mode.
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Mode: all

5.3.3.11 MMEMory Subsystem
The MMEMory (mass memory) subsystem provides commands which allow for access
to the storage media of the instrument and for storing and loading various instrument
settings.
In this section all MMEMory commands for "Spectrum" mode are described in detail.
For details on commands that are independant of a particular measurement mode and
information on the MMemory subsystem in general, see Chapter 5.3.4.7, "MMEMory
Subsystem", on page 928.
MMEMory:LOAD:IQ:STATe............................................................................................ 761
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:STATe.......................................................................................... 761
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:COMM.......................................................................................... 762
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST............................................................................................ 762
MMEMory:STORe<n>:PEAK...........................................................................................762
MMEMory:STORe:SGRam............................................................................................. 762
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPURious.................................................................................... 763
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe.........................................................................................763
MMEMory:LOAD:IQ:STATe 1, <FileName>
This command loads the I/Q data from the specified .iq.tar file.
Note: switch to single sweep mode (INIT:CONT OFF) before importing I/Q data as
otherwise the instrument will continue to measure data and display the current results
rather than the imported data.
Parameters:
<FileName> Complete file name including the path
Example: MMEM:LOAD:IQ:STAT 1, 'C:
\R_S\Instr\user\data.iq.tar'
Loads I/Q data from the specified file.
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "IQ Import" on page 168
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:STATe 1, <FileName>
This command stores the complex I/Q data to the specified .iq.tar file in 32-bit float-
ing point format.
Parameters:
<FileName> Complete file name including the path
Example: MMEM:STOR:IQ:STAT 1, 'C:
Stores I/Q data to the specified file.
Manual operation: See "IQ Export" on page 168

MMEMory:STORe:IQ:COMM <Description>
Defines a description of the export file which is stored with the data and also displayed
in the file selection dialog box for I/Q data import and export.
Parameters:
<Description>
Example: MMEM:STOR:IQ:COMM 'Device test 1b'
Creates a description for the export file.
MMEM:STOR:IQ:STAT 1, 'C:
Stores I/Q data and the comment to the specified file.
Manual operation: See "IQ Export" on page 168
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST <FileName>
This command stores the current list evaluation results in a <file name>.dat file.
The file consists of a data section containing the list evaluation results.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<FileName> <file name>
Example: MMEM:STOR:LIST 'test'
Stores the current list evaluation results in the test.dat file.
Manual operation: See "ASCII File Export" on page 264
See "Save Evaluation List" on page 322
See "Save Evaluation List" on page 352
See "ASCII File Export" on page 352
MMEMory:STORe<n>:PEAK <FileName
This command exports the marker peak list to a *.dat file.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example: MMEM:STOR:PEAK 'test'
Saves the current marker peak list in the file test.dat.
Usage: Event
MMEMory:STORe:SGRam <File>
This command exports the spectrogram data to a ASCII file.

The file contains the data for every frame in the history buffer. The data corresponding
to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that
frame was recorded.
Note that, depending on the size of the history buffer, the process of exporting the data
can take a while.
Parameters:
<File> string containing the file name of the destination file
Example: MMEM:STOR:SGR
Copies the spectrogram data to a file.
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPURious <FileName>
This command exports the marker peak list available for spurious emission measure-
ments to a file.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the path and name of the target file.
Example: MMEM:STOR:SPUR 'test'
Saves the current marker peak list in the file test.dat.
Usage: Event
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe <Trace>, <FileName>

This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for-
mat. The file format is described in Chapter 4.2.8.7, "ASCII File Export Format",
on page 234
The decimal separator (decimal point or comma) for floating-point numerals contained
in the file is defined with the FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator command (see
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 747).
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Trace> 1 to 6
Selected a trace.
<FileName> DOS file name
The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name.
Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions.
Example: MMEM:STOR:TRAC 3,'TEST.ASC'
Stores trace 3 in the file TEST.ASC.

5.3.3.12 OUTPut Subsystem
The OUTPut subsystem controls the output-related features of the instrument.

OUTPut:DIQ..................................................................................................................764
OUTPut:DIQ:CDEVice....................................................................................................764
OUTPut[:STATe]............................................................................................................765
OUTPut:UPORt............................................................................................................. 765
OUTPut:UPORt:STATe.................................................................................................. 766
OUTPut:DIQ <State>
If enabled, the captured IQ data is output to the R&S Digital I/Q Interface in a continu-
ous stream. This function requires the LVDS interface option (R&S FSV-B17).
Digital input and digital output cannot be used simultaneously.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: OUTP:DIQ ON
Mode: ADEMOD, IQ, VSA
Manual operation: See "Digital Output" on page 401
OUTPut:DIQ:CDEVice
This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband
output to the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S FSV-B17).
For details see the R&S Digital I/Q Interface description for the base unit.
Return values:
<ConnState> Defines whether a device is connected or not.
0
No device is connected.
1
A device is connected.
<DeviceName> Device ID of the connected device
<SerialNumber> Serial number of the connected device
<PortName> Port name used by the connected device
<NotUsed> to be ignored
<MaxTransferRate> Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz

<ConnProtState> State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the

connected device.
Not Started
Has to be Started
Started
Passed
Failed
Done
<PRBSTestState> State of the PRBS test.
Not Started
Has to be Started
Started
Passed
Failed
Done
<NotUsed> to be ignored
<Placeholder> for future use; currently "0"
Example: OUTP:DIQ:CDEV?
Result:
1,SMU200A,103634,Out
A,70000000,100000000,Passed,Not Started,0,0
Mode: IQ, VSA
OUTPut[:STATe] <State>
This command switches the selected tracking generator on or off.
The command is available with an (external) tracking generator (options R&S FSV-B9
or -B10).
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: OUTP1 ON
Switches on the external tracking generator 1.
Manual operation: See "Source RF Internal (On/ Off)" on page 445
OUTPut:UPORt <Value>
This command defines the control lines of the user ports.
The assignment of the pin numbers to the bits is as follows:

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Pin N/A N/A 5 3 4 7 6 2
Bits 7 and 6 are not assigned to pins and must always be 0.

The user port is written to with the given binary pattern. If the user port is programmed
to input instead of output (see INPut:UPORt:STATe on page 758), the output value is
temporarily stored.
Parameters:
<Value> #B00000000 to #B00111111
Example: OUTP:UPOR #B00100100
Sets pins 5 and 7 to 5 V.
OUTPut:UPORt:STATe <State>
This command selects if the user port control lines are used as a input or as a output.
This command switches the control line of the user ports between INPut and OUTPut.
The user port is switched to OUTPut with parameter ON, to INPut with OFF.
Parameters:
<State> ON
User port is used as a input.
ON
User port is used as a output.
*RST: ON
Example: OUTP:UPOR:STAT ON
5.3.3.13 PROBe subsystem
With firmware R&S FSVA/FSV 1.61SP2 or newer, active probes are supported (via an
adapter). The following commands activate and configure a connected probe which is
to provide an input signal. They are only available if a probe is connected to the instru-
ment's RF INPUT and USB connectors.
For details see Chapter 4.3.8.2, "Using Active Probes for Input", on page 402.
PROBe:ID:PARTnumber?
This command returns the material part number of the connected probe.
Example: PROB:ID:PART?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Part number" on page 404

PROBe:ID:SRNumber?
This command returns the serial number of the connected probe.
Example: PROB:ID:SRN?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Serial Number" on page 404
PROBe:SETup:MODE <Mode>
This command defines which action is taken when the probe's micro button is pressed.
Parameters:
<Mode> RSINgle
A single sweep is performed.
NOACtion
No action is taken.
*RST: OFF
Example: PROB:SET:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Probe Config" on page 399
See "Micro Button Action" on page 404
PROBe:SETup:NAME?
This command returns the name of the connected probe.
Example: PROB:SET:NAME?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Name" on page 404
PROBe:SETup:STATe?
This command queries whether a probe is connected to the instrument's RF INPUT
and USB connectors and was recognized by the R&S FSVA/FSV.
Example: PROB:SET:STAT ON
Usage: Query only
PROBe[:STATe] <State>
This command activates a connected probe. Use this command to switch off the probe
and measure the digital input without considering the transducer factor of the probe.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

Example: PROB:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Probe Config" on page 399
See "State" on page 404
5.3.3.14 READ:PMETer Subsystem
This subsystem contains commands to start power sensor measurements and to read
the results after the measurement is concluded. It is only available if the R&S FSV-K9
Power Sensor option is installed.
on page 508.
READ<n>:PMETer?..................................................................................................768
READ<n>:PMETer?
This command starts a power sensor measurement and reads the result for the
selected power sensor after the measurement is concluded. These results are also dis-
played in the marker table.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
 1...4
Power sensor index
Example: READ:PMET3?
Starts a measurement and reads the result.
Usage: Query only
Mode: PSM
5.3.3.15 SENSe Subsystem
The SENSe subsystem is organized in several subsystems. The commands of these

subsystems directly control device-specific settings, they do not refer to the signal
characteristics of the measurement signal.
The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the analyzer. In accord-
ance with the SCPI standard, the keyword "SENSe" is optional for this reason, which
means that it is not necessary to include the SENSe node in command sequences.
SENSe:ADJust Subsystem......................................................................................... 769
SENSe:AVERage Subsystem.....................................................................................771
SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem.................................................................................. 773
SENSe:CORRection Subsystem................................................................................ 777
SENSe:DEMod Subsystem.........................................................................................784
SENSe:ESPectrum Subsystem.................................................................................. 785

SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem................................................................................. 797

SENSe:LIST Subsystem............................................................................................. 801
SENSe:LIST:RANGe Subsystem................................................................................807
SENSe:MIXer Subsystem........................................................................................... 815
SENSe:MPOWer Subsystem......................................................................................822
SENSe:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9)................................ 826
SENSe:POWer Subsystem.........................................................................................833
SENSe:SWEep Subsystem........................................................................................ 844
SENSe:[WINDow:]DETector Subsystem.................................................................... 852
SENSe:ADJust Subsystem
The ADJust subsystem controls automatic definition of frequency and level settings.
[SENSe:]ADJust:ALL......................................................................................................769
[SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency.......................................................................................... 769
[SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel................................................................................................... 769
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation...................................................................770
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE........................................................ 770
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer.........................................................770
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer......................................................... 771
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIG...................................................................................771
[SENSe:]ADJust:ALL
This command determines the ideal frequency and level configuration for the current
measurement.
Example: ADJ:ALL
Manual operation: See "Auto All" on page 201
[SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency
This command defines the center frequency and the reference level automatically by
determining the highest level in the frequency span.
Example: ADJ:FREQ
Manual operation: See "Auto Freq" on page 202
[SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel
This command automatically sets the optimal reference level for the current measure-
ment.

You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is
adjusted, see [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer and
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer.
Example: ADJ:LEV
Manual operation: See "Auto Level" on page 202
See "Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0)" on page 351
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation <Duration>
This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the
optimal reference level automatically (for SENS:ADJ:LEV ON).
Parameters:
<Duration> <numeric value> in seconds
Range: 0.001 to 16000.0
*RST: 0.001
Default unit: s
Example: ADJ:CONF:LEV:DUR:5
Manual operation: See "Meas Time Manual" on page 202
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the R&S FSVA/FSV determines the length of the mea-
surement that is performed while determining the ideal reference level.
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO
Automatically determines the measurement length.
MANual
Manual definition of the measurement length.
*RST: AUTO
Example: ADJ:CONF:LEV:DUR:MODE MAN
Specifies manual definition of the measurement duration.
ADJ:CONF:LEV:DUR:5
Specifies the duration manually.
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer <Threshold>
This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the refer-
ence level is automatically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
For more information see [SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel).

Parameters:
<Threshold> Range: 0 to 200
*RST: +1 dB
Default unit: dB
Example: SENS:ADJ:CONF:HYST:LOW 2
Example: For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm, the reference level
will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Lower Level Hysteresis" on page 203
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer <Threshold>
This command defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference
level is automatically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
For more information see [SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel).
Parameters:
<Threshold> Range: 0 to 200
*RST: +1 dB
Default unit: dB
Example: SENS:ADJ:CONF:HYST:UPP 2
For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm, the reference level
will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Upper Level Hysteresis" on page 202
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIG <State>
This command defines the behaviour of the measurement when adjusting a setting
automatically (using SENS:ADJ:LEV ON, for example).
For more information see "Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measure-
ments" on page 201.
Parameters:
<State> ON
The measurement for automatic adjustment waits for the trigger.
OFF
The measurement for automatic adjustment is performed imme-
diately, without waiting for a trigger.
*RST: ON
Example: ADJ:CONF:TRIG OFF
SENSe:AVERage Subsystem
The SENSe:AVERage subsystem calculates the average of the acquired data. A new
test result is obtained from several successive measurements.

There are two types of average calculation: logarithmic and linear. In case of logarith-
mic average calculation (denoted with VIDeo), the average value of the measured log-
arithmic power is calculated and in case of linear average calculation, the linear power
is averaged before the logarithm is applied.
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>[:STATe<Trace>].......................................................................... 772
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt........................................................................................772
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE..........................................................................................773
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>[:STATe<Trace>] <State>
This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off.
Suffix: .
<Trace> 1...6
Selects the trace.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: AVER OFF
Switches off the average calculation for trace 1.
AVER:STAT3 ON
Switches on the average calculation for trace 3.
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt <NoMeasurements>
This command defines the number of measurements which contribute to the average
value.
Note that continuous averaging is performed after the indicated number has been
reached in continuous sweep mode.
In single sweep mode, the sweep is stopped as soon as the indicated number of mea-
surements (sweeps) is reached. Synchronization to the end of the indicated number of
measurements is only possible in single sweep mode.
This command has the same effect as the [SENSe<source>:]SWEep:COUNt com-
mand. In both cases, the number of measurements is defined whether the average cal-
culation is active or not.
The number of measurements applies to all traces in the window.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<NoMeasurements> 0 to 32767
*RST: 0

Example: SWE:CONT OFF

Switching to single sweep mode.
AVER:COUN 16
Sets the number of measurements to 16.
AVER:STAT ON
INIT;*WAI
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE <FunctionType>
This command selects the type of average function.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<FunctionType> VIDeo | LINear | POWer
VIDeo
The logarithmic power values are averaged.
LINear
The power values are averaged before they are converted to
logarithmic values.
POWer
The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to
averaging. After the averaging, the data is converted back into
its original unit.
*RST: VIDeo
Example: AVER:TYPE LIN
Switches to linear average calculation.
Manual operation: See "Lin" on page 225
See "Log" on page 225
See "Power" on page 226
SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem
This subsystem controls the setting of the instruments filter bandwidths. Both groups of
commands (BANDwidth and BWIDth) perform the same functions.
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]....................................................................... 774
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO..............................................................774
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT.................................................................774
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio..............................................................775
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE.............................................................. 775
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo................................................................................ 776
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO.......................................................................776
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio.......................................................................776
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:TYPE....................................................................... 777

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <Bandwidth>
This command defines the resolution bandwidth.
The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet. For details on the
correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to Chapter 4.2.6.3,
A change of the resolution bandwidth automatically turns the coupling to the span off.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> refer to data sheet
*RST: (AUTO is set to ON)
Example: BAND 1 MHz
Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz
Manual operation: See "Res BW Manual" on page 205
See "Res BW" on page 360
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO <State>
This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span.
The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the current frequency span
according to the relationship between frequency span and resolution bandwidth.
The 6 dB bandwidths 200 Hz, 9 kHz and 120 kHz and the channel filters available are
not set by the automatic coupling.
Use [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio to define the ratio
RBW/span.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: BAND:AUTO OFF
Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the
span.
Manual operation: See "Res BW Manual" on page 205
See "Res BW Auto" on page 205
See "Default Coupling" on page 210
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT <FilterMode>
This command defines the filter mode of FFT filters by defining the partial span size.
The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis.
This command is only available for sweep type "FFT".

Parameters:
<FilterMode> AUTO
The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to
obtain the best measurement results.
NARRow
The FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used. This
allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a
reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter.
*RST: AUTO
Example: BAND:TYPE FFT
Select FFT filter.
Example: BAND:FFT NARR
Select narrow partial span for FFT filter.
Manual operation: See "Auto" on page 204
See "Narrow" on page 204
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio <Ratio>
This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth (Hz) and the span
(Hz).
Note that the ratio defined with the remote command (RBW/span) is reciprocal to that
of the manual operation (span/RBW).
Parameters:
<Ratio> Range: 0.0001 to 1
*RST: 0.01
Example: BAND:RAT 0.01
Manual operation: See "Span/RBW Manual" on page 209
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE <FilterType>
This command selects the type of resolution filter.
For detailed information on filters see Chapter 4.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter
Type", on page 211 and Chapter 4.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters",
on page 211.
When changing the filter type, the next larger filter bandwidth is selected if the same
filter bandwidth is not available for the new filter type.
5 Pole filters are not available when using the sweep type "FFT".

Parameters:
<FilterType> NORMal
Gaussian filters
CFILter
channel filters
RRC
RRC filters
P5
5 Pole filters
*RST: NORMal
Example: BAND:TYPE NORM
Manual operation: See "Filter Type" on page 210
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <Bandwidth>
This command defines the video bandwidth. The available video bandwidths are speci-
fied in the data sheet.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> refer to data sheet
*RST: (AUTO is set to ON)
Example: BAND:VID 10 kHz
Manual operation: See "Video BW Manual" on page 206
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO <State>
This command couples and decouples the VBW to the RBW.
Use [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio to define the ratio VBW/RBW.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: BAND:VID:AUTO OFF
Manual operation: See "Video BW Manual" on page 206
See "Video BW Auto" on page 206
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <Ratio>
This command defines the ratio between video bandwidth (Hz) and resolution band-
width (Hz).
Note that the ratio defined with the remote command (VBW/RBW) is reciprocal to that
of the manual operation (RBW/VBW).

Parameters:
<Ratio> Range: 0.01 to 1000
*RST: 3
Example: BAND:VID:RAT 3
Sets the coupling of video bandwidth to video bandwidth =
3*resolution bandwidth
Manual operation: See "RBW/VBW Sine [1/1]" on page 208
See "RBW/VBW Pulse [.1]" on page 209
See "RBW/VBW Noise [10]" on page 209
See "RBW/VBW Manual" on page 209
See "Span/RBW Auto [100]" on page 209
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:TYPE <Mode>
This command selects the position of the video filter in the signal path.
Parameters:
<Mode> LINear
The video filter is applied in front of the logarithmic amplifier.
In linear mode, measurements with a logarithmic level scale
result in flatter falling edges compared to logarithmic mode. The
reason is the conversion of linear power values into logarithmic
level values: if you halve the linear power, the logarithmic level
decreases by 3 dB.
LOGarithmic
The video filter is applied after the logarithmic amplifier.
*RST: LINear
Example: BAND:VID:TYPE LIN
Video filter ahead of the logarithmic amplifier
SENSe:CORRection Subsystem
This subsystem controls calibration and normalization during operation with the track-
ing generator (only with R&S FSVA/FSV option B9 or B10). Furthermore, configuration
of conversion loss tables for external mixers (option B21) is performed using these
commands.
[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]........................................................................ 778
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND....................................................................................778
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog?.............................................................................. 779
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect.................................................................................. 779
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer.................................................................................... 780
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber.............................................................................. 780
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic............................................................................. 780
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs.................................................................................. 781
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS..................................................................................... 781
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent..............................................................................781
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA.................................................................................... 782

[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar................................................................................... 782
[SENSe:]CORRection:EGAin:INPut[:MAGNitude].............................................................. 782
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod....................................................................................... 783
[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall..........................................................................................783
[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe]........................................................................................ 783
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerator................................................................. 784
[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] <MeasType>
This command initiates a reference measurement (calibration). The reference mea-
surement is the basis for the measurement normalization.
To obtain a correct reference measurement, a complete sweep with synchronization to
the end of the sweep must have been carried out. This is only possible in the single
sweep mode.
The command is available if a tracking generator is installed and has been turned on.
Parameters:
<MeasType> THRough
"TRANsmission" mode: calibration with direct connection
between tracking generator and device input
"REFLection" mode: calibration with short circuit at the input
OPEN
only allowed in "REFLection" mode: calibration with open input
Selects single sweep operation
CORR:COLL THR;*WAI
Starts the measurement of reference data using direct connec-
tion between generator and device input and waits for the sweep
end.
Usage: Setting only
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Calibrate Reflection Short" on page 446
See "Calibrate Reflection Open" on page 446
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND <Type>
This command defines the waveguide band in the conversion loss table. Before this
command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 779).
This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed.

Parameters:
<Band> K | A | KA | Q | U | V | E | W | F | D | G | Y | J | USER
Standard waveguide band or user-defined band.
Note: The band formerly referred to as "A" is now named "KA";
the input parameter "A" is still available and refers to the same
band as "KA".
For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands,
see Table 4-21).
*RST: F (90 GHz - 140 GHz)
Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4'
Selects the conversion loss table.
CORR:CVL:BAND KA
Sets the band to KA (26.5 GHz - 40 GHz).
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Band" on page 499
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog?
This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the
C:\r_s\instr\user\cvl\ directory on the instrument.
Example: CORR:CVL:CAT?
Usage: Query only
Mode: all
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect <FileName>
This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name. If
<file_name> is not available, a new conversion loss table is created.
Parameters:
<FileName> '<File name>'
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "New Table" on page 499
See "File Name" on page 499
See "Edit Table" on page 502

[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer <Type>
This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table. Before this com-
mand can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:
]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 779).
Parameters:
<Type> Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters
CORR:CVL:MIX 'FS_Z60'
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Mixer Name" on page 500
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber <SerialNo>
This command defines the serial number of the mixer in the conversion loss table.
Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected
(see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 779).
Parameters:
<SerialNo> Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters
CORR:CVL:MIX '123.4567'
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Mixer S/N" on page 500
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic <HarmOrder>
This command defines the harmonic order used in the conversion loss table. Before
this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 779).
Parameters:
<HarmOrder> <numeric value>
Range: 2 to 65
CORR:CVL:HARM 3
Mode: all

Manual operation: See "Harmonic Order" on page 500
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs <PortNo>
This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table. Before this com-
Parameters:
<PortType> 2|3
*RST: 2
CORR:CVL:PORT 3
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Mixer Type" on page 500
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS <BiasSetting>
This command defines the bias setting in the conversion loss table. Before this com-
Parameters:
<BiasSetting> *RST: 0.0 A
Default unit: A
CORR:CVL:BIAS 3A
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Bias" on page 500
See "Write to <CVL table name>" on page 502
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent <Text>
This command defines a comment in the conversion loss table. Before this command
can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:
Parameters:
<Text>


CORR:CVL:COMM 'Conversion loss table for
FS_Z60'
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Comment" on page 499
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA <Freq>,<Level>
This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables.
The values are entered as a set of frequency/level pairs. A maximum of 50 pairs of fre-
quency/level may be entered. Before this command can be performed, the conversion
loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 779).
Parameters:
<Freq> The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order.
<Level>
CORR:CVL:DATA 1MHZ,-30DB,2MHZ,-40DB
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Position/Value" on page 500
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar
This command deletes the selected conversion loss table. Before this command can
be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:
CORR:CVL:CLE
Usage: Event
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Delete Table" on page 502
[SENSe:]CORRection:EGAin:INPut[:MAGNitude]
This command makes an external gain known to the analyzer, which will take it into
account during the display of measurement results. With this function the gain of an
antenna or of an external preamplifier can be taken into account for the measurement
values.

Parameters:
Range: -200 dB to 200 dB
*RST: 0 dB
Example: CORR:EGA:INP 10DB
Takes 10 dB external gain into account.
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod
This command selects the type of measurement to be performed with the tracking gen-
erator.
Parameters:
REFLection
Selects reflection measurements.
TRANsmission
Selects transmission measurements.
*RST: TRANsmission
Example: CORR:METH TRAN
Sets the type of measurement to "transmission".
Manual operation: See "Calibrate Transmission" on page 446
See "Calibrate Reflection Short" on page 446
See "Calibrate Reflection Open" on page 446
[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall
This command restores the measurement configuration used for calibration.
Example: CORR:REC
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Recall" on page 447
[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] <State>
This command turns correction of measurement results (normalization) on and off.
The command is available after you have defined a reference trace for the selected
measurement type with [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] on page 778.

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: CORR ON
Activates normalization.
Manual operation: See "Normalize" on page 446
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerator <Name>
This command uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor
with up to 625 points. The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and
stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix.trd under c:\r_s\instr\trd.
The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop fre-
quency. The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the commands
of the [SENSe<source>:]CORRection:TRANSducer subsystem (see [SENSe:
]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete on page 944).
This command is only available if the R&S FSVA/FSV option B10 (External Tracking
Generator) is installed and normalization is switched on.
Parameters:
<Name> '<name>
Example: CORR:TRAN:GEN 'SMU01'
Creates the transducer file C:\r_s\instr\trd\SMU01.trd.
Manual operation: See "Save As Trd Factor" on page 447
SENSe:DEMod Subsystem
This subsystem controls demodulation of audible AF signals.
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel.....................................................................................784
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe]................................................................................. 785
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel <Threshold>
This command defines the threshold for selective demodulation. Squelching must be
active for this command to work (see [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe]).
All signals below the threshold are not demodulated.
This command in only available if the R&S FSVA/FSV option B3 (Audio Demodulation)
is installed.
Parameters:
<Threshold> The threshold level as a percentage of the display height.
Range: 0 to 100
*RST: 60

Example: DEM:SQU:LEV 80
Sets the squelch level to 80% of the displayed signal.
Manual operation: See "Squelch Level" on page 262
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] <State>
This command turns selective demodulation at the marker position on and off.
A video trigger is automatically activated with the same level as the squelch level, any
other trigger or gate settings are deactivated.
This command in only available if the R&S FSVA/FSV option B3 (Audio Demodulation)
is installed.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DEM:SQU ON
Signals below the level threshold are not sent to the audio out-
put.
Manual operation: See "Squelch" on page 261
SENSe:ESPectrum Subsystem
The SENSe:ESPectrum subsystem contains the remote commands to configure
Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurements.
The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on-going
sweep operation.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:BWID............................................................................................. 786
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe]......................................................................786
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa....................................................................... 787
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed..................................................................................... 787
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard]........................................................................ 788
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:RESTore............................................................................788
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:STORe.............................................................................. 788
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution].......................................... 788
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo................................................... 789
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:COUNt................................................................... 789
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:DELete...................................................................789
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE...........................................................790
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt................................................790
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP................................................ 791
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation.................................................. 791

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO........................................ 792
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe..................................................792
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INSert.................................................................... 792
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STARt................................ 793
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STOP.................................793
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STARt.................................794
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STOP................................. 794
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:STATe.............................................. 794
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:RLEVel...................................................................795
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME..........................................................795
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO................................................ 796
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer........................................................... 796
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RRANge.........................................................................................797
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe........................................................................................... 797
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:BWID <Bandwidth>
This command defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power (refer-
ence range). This setting takes only effect if channel power is selected as power refer-
ence type (see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe on page 797).
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> minimum span ≤ value ≤ span of reference range
*RST: 3.84 MHz
Example: ESP:RTYP CPOW
Sets the power reference type to channel power.
ESP:BWID 1 MHZ
Sets the Tx bandwidth to 1 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Edit Reference Range" on page 321
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe] <State>
This command activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter. This setting only takes
effect if channel power is selected as power reference type (see [SENSe:
]ESPectrum:RTYPe on page 797).
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
ESP:FILT OFF
Deactivates the use of an RRC filter.

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa <Value>
This command sets the alpha value of the RRC filter. This setting takes only effect if
channel power is selected as power reference type ( [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe
command) and if the RRC filter is activated ( [SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:
RRC][:STATe]command).
Parameters:
<Value> 0 to 1
*RST: 0.22
ESP:FILT ON
Activates the use of an RRC filter.
ESP:FILT:ALPH 0.5
Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter to 0.5.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed <State>
This command activates Fast SEM mode to accelerate spurious emission mask mea-
surements. For details see "Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements"
on page 340.
Note that in Fast SEM mode, the following parameters cannot be changed in all
ranges:
● Filter type, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE
on page 790
● RBW, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution]
on page 788
● VBW, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo
on page 789
● Sweep Time Mode, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:
AUTO on page 796
● Sweep Time, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME
on page 795
● Reference level, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:RLEVel
on page 795
● RF Att Mode, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:
ATTenuation:AUTO on page 792
● Rf Attenuation, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:
ATTenuation on page 791
● Preamp, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe
on page 792

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: ESP:HSP ON
Manual operation: See "Fast SEM" on page 317
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard]
This command selects the specified XML file under C:\r_s\instr\sem_std. If the
file is stored in a subdirectory, include the relative path.
Example: ESP:PRES 'WCDMA\3GPP\DL\PowerClass_31_39.xml'
Selects the PowerClass_31_39.xml XML file in the C:
\R_S\instr\sem_std\WCDMA\3GPP\DL directory.
ESP:PRES?
W-CDMA 3GPP DL (31,39)dBm
The query returns information about the selected standard, the
link direction and the power class. If no standard has been
selected, the query returns None.
Manual operation: See "Load Standard" on page 325
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:RESTore
This command copies the XML files from the C:\R_S\instr\sem_backup folder to
the C:\R_S\instr\sem_std folder. Files of the same name are overwritten.
Example: ESP:PRES:REST
Restores the originally provided XML files.
Manual operation: See "Restore Standard Files" on page 326
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:STORe <FileName>
This command stores the current settings as presettings in the specified XML file under
C:\r_s\instr\sem_backup.
Parameters:
<FileName>
Example: ESP:PRES:STOR
'WCDMA\3GPP\DL\PowerClass_31_39.xml'
Stores the settins in the PowerClass_31_39.xml file in the C:
\R_S\instr\sem_std\WCDMA\3GPP\DL directory.
Manual operation: See "Save As Standard" on page 325
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <Value>
This command sets the RBW value for the specified range.

Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated
(see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed on page 787).
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Value> Refer to the data sheet.
*RST: 30.0 kHz
Example: ESP:RANG2:BAND:RES 5000
Sets the RBW for range 2 to 5 kHz.
Manual operation: See "RBW" on page 318
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo <Value>
This command sets the VBW value for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
*RST: 10.0 MHz
Example: ESP:RANG1:BAND:VID 5000000
Sets the VBW for range 1 to 5 MHz.
Manual operation: See "VBW" on page 318
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:COUNt
This command returns the number of defined ranges.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Example: ESP:RANG:COUNt?
Returns the number of defined ranges.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:DELete
This command deletes the specified range. The range numbers are updated accord-
ingly. The reference range cannot be deleted. A minimum of three ranges is manda-
tory.

Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Example: ESP:RANG4:DEL
Deletes range 4.
Manual operation: See "Delete Range" on page 320
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE <Type>
This command sets the filter type for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Type> NORMal
Gaussian filters
CFILter
channel filters
RRC
RRC filters
PULSe
EMI (6dB) filters
P5
5 Pole filters
*RST: NORM
The available bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data
sheet.
Example: ESP:RANG1:FILT:TYPE RRC
Sets the RRC filter type for range 1.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt <Frequency>
This command sets the start frequency for the specified range.
span. If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges, the mea-
surement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum
span of 20 Hz. The first and last range are adapted to the given span as long as the
minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.
Note the rules for the <Frequency> parameter specified in "Ranges and Range Set-
tings" on page 328.

Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Frequency> numeric value
*RST: -250.0 MHz (range 1), -2.52 MHz (range 2), 2.52
MHz (range 3)
Example: ESP:RANG1:STAR 100000000
Sets the start frequency for range 1 to 100 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Range Start / Range Stop" on page 317
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP <Frequency>
This command sets the stop frequency for the specified range. For further details refer
to the [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt command.
Note the rules for the <Frequency> parameter specified in "Ranges and Range Set-
tings" on page 328.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Frequency> numeric value
*RST: -2.52 MHz (range 1), 2.52 MHz (range 2), 250.0
MHz (range 3)
Example: ESP:RANG3:STOP 10000000
Sets the stop frequency for range 2 to 10 MHz.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation <Value>
This command sets the attenuation for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
*RST: 0 dB
Example: ESP:RANG3:INP:ATT 10
Sets the attenuation of range 3 to 10 dB.
Manual operation: See "RF Attenuator" on page 318

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command activates or deactivates the automatic RF attenuation setting for the
specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: ESP:RANG2:INP:ATT:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the RF attenuation auto mode for range 2.
Manual operation: See "RF Att. Mode" on page 318
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command switches the preamplifier on or off for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: ESP:RANG3:INP:GAIN:STATe ON
Switches the preamplifier for range 3 on or off.
Manual operation: See "Preamp" on page 318
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INSert <Mode>
This command inserts a new range before or after the specified range. The range num-
bers are updated accordingly.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Mode> AFTer | BEFore

Example: ESP:RANG3:INS BEF

Inserts a new range before range 3.
ESP:RANG1:INS AFT
Inserts a new range after range 1.
Manual operation: See "Insert before Range" on page 320
See "Insert after Range" on page 320
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STARt <Level>
This command sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the specified
range. Different from manual operation, this setting is independently of the defined limit
check type.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Level> -400 to in 400 dBm
*RST: 13 dBm
Example: ESP:RANG1:LIM:ABS:STAR 10
Sets an absolute limit of 10 dBm at the start frequency of the
range.
Manual operation: See "Abs Limit Start" on page 319
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STOP <Level>
This command sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the specified
range. Different from manual operation, this setting is independent of the defined limit
check type.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Level> -400 to in 400 dBm
*RST: 13 dBm
Example: ESP:RANG1:LIM:ABS:STOP 20
Sets an absolute limit of 20 dBm at the stop frequency of the
range.
Manual operation: See "Abs Limit Stop" on page 319

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STARt <Limit>
This command sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the specified range.
Different from manual operation, this setting is independent of the defined limit check
type.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Limit> -400 to in 400 dBc
*RST: -50 dBc
Example: ESP:RANG3:LIM:REL:STAR -20
Sets a relative limit of -20 dBc at the start frequency of the
range.
Manual operation: See "Rel Limit Start" on page 320
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STOP <Limit>
This command sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the specified range.
Different from manual operation, this setting is independently of the defined limit check
type.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Limit> -400 to in 400 dBc
*RST: -50 dBc
Example: ESP:RANG3:LIM:REL:STOP 20
Sets a relative limit of 20 dBc at the stop frequency of the range.
Manual operation: See "Rel Limit Stop" on page 320
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:STATe <State>
This command sets the type of limit check for all ranges.
Suffix: .
<range> irrelevant

Parameters:
<State> ABSolute | RELative | AND | OR
ABSolute
Checks only the absolute limits defined.
RELative
Checks only the relative limits. Relative limits are defined as rel-
ative to the measured power in the reference range.
AND
Combines the absolute and relative limit. The limit check fails
when both limits are violated.
OR
Combines the absolute and relative limit. The limit check fails
when one of the limits is violated.
*RST: REL
Example: ESP:RANG3:LIM:STAT AND
Sets for all ranges the combined absolute/relative limit check.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:RLEVel <Value>
This command sets the reference level for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
*RST: -20 dBm
Example: ESP:RANG2:RLEV 0
Sets the reference level of range 2 to 0 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Ref. Level" on page 318
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME <SweepTime>
This command sets the sweep time for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range

Parameters:
<SweepTime> Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to
VBW. For details refer to the data sheet.
*RST: 0.27 s
Example: ESP:RANG1:SWE:TIME 1
Sets the sweep time for range 1 to 1 s.
Manual operation: See "Sweep Time" on page 318
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State>
This command activates or deactivates the automatic sweep time setting for the speci-
fied range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: ESP:RANG3:SWE:TIME:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the sweep time auto mode for range 3.
Manual operation: See "Sweep Time Mode" on page 318
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer <TransducerName>
This command sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a trans-
ducer that fulfills the following conditions:
● The unit is dB.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<TransducerName> 'string' = name of the transducer
Example: ESP:RANG1:TRAN 'test'
Sets the transducer called test for range 1.
Manual operation: See "Transd. Factor" on page 319

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RRANge
This command returns the current position (number) of the reference range.
Example: ESP:RRAN?
Returns the current position (number) of the reference range.
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe <Type>
This command sets the power reference type.
Parameters:
<Type> PEAK | CPOWer
PEAK
CPOWer
Measures the channel power within the reference range (integral
bandwidth method).
*RST: CPOWer
Example: ESP:RTYP PEAK
Sets the peak power reference type.
SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem
The SENSe:FREQuency subsystem defines the frequency axis of the active display.
The frequency axis can either be defined via the start/stop frequency or via the center
frequency and span.
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer.........................................................................................797
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP............................................................................... 798
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO..................................................................... 798
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK....................................................................... 798
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor........................................................... 799
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE...........................................................................................799
[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet......................................................................................... 800
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN............................................................................................800
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL...................................................................................800
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt...........................................................................................800
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP............................................................................................801
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency>
This command defines the center frequency (frequency domain) or measuring fre-
quency (time domain).

Parameters:
<Frequency> Range: 0 to fmax
*RST: fmax/2
Default unit: Hz
fmax is specified in the data sheet. min span is 10 Hz
(SEM and Spurious: min span = 20 Hz)
Example: FREQ:CENT 100 MHz
Manual operation: See "Center" on page 186
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <StepSize>
This command defines the center frequency step size.
Parameters:
<StepSize> Range: 1 to fmax
*RST: 0.1 x 
Default unit: Hz
Example: FREQ:CENT:STEP 120 MHz
Manual operation: See "Manual" on page 188
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO <State>
This command couples the step size of the center frequency to the span (ON) or sets
the value of the center frequency entered via [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer (OFF).
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON
Activates the coupling of the step size to the span.
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK <CouplingType>
This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or
the resolution bandwidth.
Parameters:
<CouplingType> SPAN
Couples the step size to the span. Available for measurements
in the frequency domain.
RBW
Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth. Available for
measurements in the time domain.
OFF
Decouples the step size (manual input).
*RST: SPAN

Example: FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN

Manual operation: See "0.1*Span (span > 0)" on page 186
See "0.1*RBW (span > 0)" on page 186
See "0.5*Span (span > 0)" on page 187
See "x*Span (span > 0)" on page 187
See "x*RBW (span > 0)" on page 187
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor <Factor>
This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to
the span or the resolution bandwidth.
Parameters:
<Factor> Range: 1 to 100
*RST: 10
Default unit: PCT
Example: FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT
Manual operation: See "0.1*Span (span > 0)" on page 186
See "0.5*Span (span > 0)" on page 187
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the frequency mode.
between span > 0 and zero span in the "Spectrum" mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> CW
Selects the time domain (span = 0).
In the time domain, define the measurement frequency with
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer.
FIXed
Selects the time domain (span = 0).
In the time domain, define the measurement frequency with
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer.
SWEep
Selects the frequency domain (span > 0).
In the frequency domain, define the frequency characteristics
with the following commands:
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN
• [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer
*RST: SWEep

Example: FREQ:MODE SWE

Selects the frequency domain.
[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines the frequency offset.
Parameters:
<Offset> Range: -100 GHz to 100 GHz
*RST: 0 Hz
Default unit: Hz
Example: FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ
Manual operation: See "Frequency Offset" on page 188
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN 
This command defines the frequency span.
Parameters:
 min span to fmax
*RST: fmax
Example: FREQ:SPAN 10MHz
Manual operation: See "Span Manual" on page 191
See "Zero Span" on page 192
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
This command sets the frequency span to its maximum.
Example: FREQ:SPAN:FULL
Manual operation: See "Full Span" on page 191
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <Frequency>
This command defines the start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain.
Parameters:
<Frequency> 0 to (fmax - min span)
*RST: 0
Example: FREQ:STAR 20MHz

Manual operation: See "Start" on page 188
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <Frequency>
This command defines the stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain.
Parameters:
<Frequency> min span to fmax
*RST: fmax
Example: FREQ:STOP 2000 MHz
Manual operation: See "Stop" on page 188
SENSe:LIST Subsystem
The commands of this subsystem are used for measuring the power at a list of fre-
quency points with different device settings. The measurement is always performed in
zero span. A new trigger event is required for each test point (exception: trigger "FREE
RUN").
The results are output as a list in the order of the entered frequency points. The num-
ber of results per test point depends on the number of concurrently active measure-
ments (peak/RMS/average). The number of frequencies is limited to 200 entries.
Selection of concurrently active measurements and setting of parameters that are con-
stant for the whole measurement is performed via a configuration command ( [SENSe:
]LIST:POWer:SET). This also includes the setting for trigger and gate parameters.
Settings that are not directly included in commands of this subsystem can be config-
ured by sending the corresponding commands prior to the SENSe:LIST Subsystem
commands.
Please note that changes to the trigger level have to be executed in zero span in order
to take effect for the SENSe:LIST Subsystem commands.
The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on-going
sweep operation.
The following subsystem is included:

"SENSe:LIST:RANGe Subsystem" on page 807
Further information
● "SENSe:LIST Subsystem" on page 801
More details on the SENSe:LIST Subsystem

The following setting parameters can be selected independently for each frequency
point:

● analyzer frequency
● reference level
● resolution filter
● video bandwidth
● measurement time
● detector
The commands of this subsystem can be used in two different ways:
● Instrument setup, measurement and querying of the results in a single command
line. With this method, there is the least delay between the measurement and the
result output. However, it requires the control computer to wait for the response
from the instrument.
● Instrument setup and querying of the result list at the end of the measurement:
With this method, the control computer may be used for other activities while the
measurement is being performed. However, more time is needed for synchroniza-
tion via service request.
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult?........................................................................................802
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence].................................................................................. 803
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET............................................................................................. 806
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:STATe..........................................................................................807
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult?
This command queries the results of the list evaluation.
This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way,
using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measure-
ment.
If there are no results, the command returns an error.
Return values:
<PowerLevel> Power level for each frequency included in the measurement.
The command returns up to 3 power levels for each frequency,
depending on the number of evaluation modes you have turned
on with [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET on page 806.
The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas.
The unit depends on [SENSe:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence].

Example: *ESE 1
*SRE 32
Configuration of the status reporting system for the generation of
an SRQ on operation complete
SENSe:LIST:POWer
935.2 MHz,-20dBm,10dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,
434us,0,
935.4 MHz,-20dBm,10dB,10dB,NORM,30 kHz,100 kHz,
434us,0,
935.6 MHz,-20dBm,10dB,20dB,NORM,30 kHz,100 kHz,
434us,0;
*OPC
Configuring and starting the measurement
...
Further actions of the control computer during measurement
On SRQ:
SENSe:LIST:POWer:RESult?
Response to service request
Usage: Query only
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence]
<Frequency>,<RefLevel>,<RfAtt>,<ElAtt>,<FilterType>,<RBW>,<VBW>,<Meas
Time>,<TriggerLevel>
This command configures and initiates the List Evaluation measurement.
The list can contain up to 200 entries (frequencies). You can define a different instru-
ment setup for each frequency that is in the list.
If you synchronize the measurement with *OPC, the R&S FSVA/FSV produces a ser-
vice request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual
measurements has been performed.
To reduce the setting time, all indicated parameters are set up simultaneously at each
test point.
The measurement is performed in zero span and therefore the span is set to 0 Hz. If
the span > 0 is set, the function is automatically switched off.
The measurement is not compatible with other measurements, especially as far as
marker, adjacent channel power measurement or statistics are concerned. The corre-
sponding commands thus automatically deactivate the function.
The function is only available in REMOTE operation. It is deactivated when switching
the instrument back to LOCAL.
Note that using the command as a query initiates the measurement and returns the
results if all frequencies have been measured. For more information on querying the
results see [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult? on page 802 .
The following parameters are the settings for an individual frequency point. They are
repeated for each frequency point.

Setting parameters:
<Frequency> Defines the receive frequency. Each frequency corresponds to
one list entry.
Range: 0 Hz to fmax
<RefLevel> Defines the reference level for a list entry.
Range: -130 dBm to 30 dBm
Increment: 0.01 dBm
<RfAtt> Defines the RF attenuation for a list entry.
Range: 0 dB to 70 dB (75 dB with option R&S FSV-B25)
Increment: 5 dB (1 dB with option R&S FSV-B25)
<ElAtt> Defines the electronic attenuation for a list entry.
Requires option R&S FSV-B25;
OFF
Turns electronic attenuation off.
<AttenuationLevel>
Numeric value that defines the attenuation level.
Range: 0 dB to 30 dB
Increment: 1 dB
<FilterType> Selects the filter type for a list entry. For more information see
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE
on page 775.
<RBW> Defines the resolution bandwidth for a list entry.
For the range of values refer to "Res BW Manual" on page 205.
Refer to Chapter 4.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type",
on page 211 for possible combinations of filter type and filter
bandwidth for the <filter type> = CFILter and <filter type> =
RRC.
<VBW> Defines the video bandwidth for a list entry.
The value is ignored for <filter type> = "CFILter" or "RRC"
Range: 1 Hz to 10 MHz in 1, 3, 10 steps
<MeasTime> Defines the measurement time for a list entry.
For details refer to "Sweeptime Manual" on page 206.
Range: 1 µs to 16000 s
<TriggerLevel> The trigger level must be 0.
Return values:
<PowerLevel> Power level for each frequency included in the measurement.
The command returns up to 3 power levels for each frequency,
depending on the number of evaluation modes you have turned
on with [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET on page 806.

Example: SENSe:LIST:POWer?
935.2 MHz,0 dBm,10 dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,
440us,0,
935.4 MHz,0dBm,10dB,10dB,NORM,30 kHz,100 kHz,
440us,0,
440us,0
Result list:
-28.3,-30.6,-38.1
Example: SENSe:LIST:POWer:SET ON,ON,ON,IMM,POS,0,0
Activates the power measurement of the peak, RMS and aver-
age values.
SENSe:LIST:POWer?
935.2 MHz,0dBm,10dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,440us,
0,
440us,0,
440us,0
Result list (3 results per frequency point):
-28.3, -29.6, 1.5, -30.6, -31.9, 0.9, -38.1, -40.0, 2.3
Example: SENSe:LIST:POWer
0,
935.4 MHz,0dBm,10dB,10dB,CFIL,30 kHz,100 kHz,
440us,0,
440us,0
Performs a measurement sequence with the settings described
in Table 5-19.
SENSe:LIST:POWer?
0,
440us,0,
440us,0
Performs the same measurement and returns the result list
immediately after the last frequency point.
Table 5-19: Settings for power list example
Step Freq. Ref RF Att el Att Filter RBW VBW Meas TRG
Level type Time Level
[MHz] [dB] [dB]
(reserve
[dBm] [us]
d)
1 935.2 0 10 OFF Normal 1 MHz 3 MHz 440 0
2 935.4 0 10 10 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 0
3 935.6 0 10 20 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 0

[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET
<PeakPower>,<RMSPower>,<AVGPower>,<TriggerSource>,<TriggerSlope>,<T
riggerOffset>,<GateLength>
This command defines global List Evaluation parameters.
These parameters are valid for every frequency you want to measure.
The state of the first three parameters (<PeakPower>, <RMSPower> and <AVG-
Power>) define the number of results for each frequency in the list.
Note that you have to set the trigger level after sending this command.
Parameters:
<PeakPower> ON | OFF
Turns peak power evaluation on and off.
*RST: ON
<RMSPower> ON | OFF
Turns RMS power evaluation on and off.
*RST: OFF
<AVGPower> ON | OFF
Turns average power evaluation on and off.
*RST: OFF
<TriggerSource> IMMediate | EXTernal | VIDeo | IFPower | RFPower
Selects a trigger source.
For more information see "Trg/Gate Source" on page 238.
*RST: IMM
<TriggerSlope> NEGative | POSitive
Selects the trigger slope.
*RST: POS
<TriggerOffset> Defines the trigger delay. The trigger delay is the time between
the detection of the trigger signal and the start of the measure-
ment at the next frequency point.
Range: span = 0 Hz: (-sweep time) to 30 s; span > 10 Hz:
31.25 ns to 30 s
*RST: 0s
<GateLength> Defines the gate length for gated measurements.
Setting 0 seconds turns gated measurements off. Other values
activate the gated trigger function.
To perform gated measurements, the trigger source must be dif-
ferent from IMMediate.
Range: 31.25 ns to 30 s
*RST: 0s
Example: SENSe:LIST:POWer:SET ON,OFF,OFF,EXT,POS,10US,
434US

[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:STATe <State>
This command turns the List Evaluation off.
Parameters:
<State> OFF
Example: SENS:LIST:POW:STAT OFF
SENSe:LIST:RANGe Subsystem
The SENSe:LIST:RANGe Subsystem contains the remote commands to configure
Spurious Emissions measurements.
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution]....................................................807
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo.............................................................808
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BREak............................................................................. 808
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:COUNt.............................................................................808
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DELete............................................................................ 809
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DETector......................................................................... 809
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt......................................................... 809
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP..........................................................810
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE.................................................................... 810
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation............................................................811
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO..................................................811
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe........................................................... 812
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STARt......................................................................812
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STATe..................................................................... 812
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STOP...................................................................... 813
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:POINts.............................................................................813
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:RLEVel............................................................................ 813
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME................................................................... 814
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO..........................................................814
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer.....................................................................814
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <Value>
This command sets the RBW value for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
*RST: 30.0 kHz
Example: LIST:RANG2:BAND:RES 5000
Sets the RBW for range 2 to 5 kHz.
Manual operation: See "RBW" on page 349

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo
This command sets the VBW value for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
*RST: 10.0 MHz
Example: LIST:RANG1:BAND:VID 5000000
Sets the VBW for range 1 to 5 MHz.
Manual operation: See "VBW" on page 349
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BREak <State>
This command configures the sweep behavior.
The suffixes are irrelevant.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON
The R&S FSVA/FSV stops after one range is swept and contin-
ues only if you confirm (a message box is displayed).
OFF
The R&S FSVA/FSV sweeps all ranges in one go.
*RST: OFF
Example: LIST:RANG:BRE ON
Configures a stop after each range.
Manual operation: See "Stop After Sweep" on page 350
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:COUNt
This command returns the number of defined ranges.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Example: LIST:RANG:COUNt?
Returns the number of defined ranges.

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DELete
This command deletes the specified range. The range numbers are updated accord-
ingly. The reference range cannot be deleted. A minimum of three ranges is manda-
tory.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Example: LIST:RANG4:DEL
Deletes range 4.
Manual operation: See "Delete Range" on page 351
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DETector <Detector>
This command sets the detector for the specified range. For details refer to "Detector"
on page 349.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Detector> NEGative | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS | AVERage
NEGative
minimum peak detector
POSitive
peak detector
SAMPle
sample detector
RMS
RMS detector
AVERage
average detector
*RST: RMS
Example: LIST:RANGe3:DET SAMP
Sets the sample detector for range 3.
Manual operation: See "Detector" on page 349
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt <Frequency>
This command sets the start frequency for the specified range.

span. If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges, the mea-
surement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum
span of 20 Hz. The first and last range are adapted to the given span as long as the
minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Frequency> see rules in chapter 4, "Ranges and settings"
*RST: -250.0 MHz (range 1), -2.52 MHz (range 2), 2.52
MHz (range 3)
Example: LIST:RANG1:STAR 100000000
Sets the start frequency for range 1 to 100 MHz.
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP <Frequency>
This command sets the stop frequency for the specified range. See also [SENSe:
]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt on page 809.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Frequency> see rules in chapter 4, "Ranges and settings"
*RST: -2.52 MHz (range 1), 2.52 MHz (range 2), 250.0
MHz (range 3)
Example: LIST:RANG3:STOP 10000000
Sets the stop frequency for range 2 to 10 MHz.
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE <Type>
This command sets the filter type for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range

Parameters:
<Type> NORMal
Gaussian filters
CFILter
channel filters
RRC
RRC filters
PULSe
EMI (6dB) filters
P5
5 Pole filters
*RST: NORM
The available bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data
sheet.
Example: LIST:RANG1:FILT:TYPE RRC
Sets the RRC filter type for range 1.
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation <Value>
This command sets the attenuation for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
*RST: 0 dB
Example: LIST:RANG3:INP:ATT 10
Sets the attenuation of range 3 to 10 dB.
Manual operation: See "RF Attenuator" on page 349
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command activates or deactivates the automatic RF attenuation setting for the
specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: LIST:RANG2:INP:ATT:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the RF attenuation auto mode for range 2.

Manual operation: See "RF Att. Mode" on page 349
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command switches the preamplifier on or off for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: LIST:RANG3:INP:GAIN:STATe ON
Switches the preamplifier for range 3 on or off.
Manual operation: See "Preamp" on page 349
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STARt <Limit>
This command sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the specified
check type.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Limit> -400 to in 400 dBm
*RST: 13 dBm
Example: LIST:RANG1:LIM:ABS:STAR 10
Sets an absolute limit of 10 dBm at the start frequency of the
range.
Manual operation: See "Abs Limit Start" on page 350
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STATe
This command activates or deactivates the limit check for all ranges.
Suffix: .
<range> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: LIST:RANG3:LIM:STAT ON
Activates a limit check for all ranges.

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STOP <Limit>
This command sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the specified
check type.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Limit> -400 to in 400 dBm
*RST: 13 dBm
Example: LIST:RANG1:LIM:STOP 20
Sets an absolute limit of 20 dBm at the stop frequency of the
range.
Manual operation: See "Abs Limit Stop" on page 350
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:POINts <Value>
This command sets the number of sweep points for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<Value> For details on possible values refer to chapter 4, Sweep Points
softkey of the "Sweep" menu.
*RST: 691
Example: LIST:RANG3:POIN 601
Sets 601 sweep points for range 3.
Manual operation: See "Sweep Points" on page 350
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:RLEVel <Value>
This command sets the reference level for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
*RST: -20 dBm
Example: LIST:RANG2:RLEV 0
Sets the reference level of range 2 to 0 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Ref. Level" on page 349

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME
This command sets the sweep time for the specified range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<SweepTime> Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to
VBW. For details refer to the data sheet.
*RST: 0.27 s
Example: LIST:RANG1:SWE:TIME 1
Sets the sweep time for range 1 to 1 s.
Manual operation: See "Sweep Time" on page 349
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO
This command activates or deactivates the automatic sweep time setting for the speci-
fied range.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: LIST:RANG3:SWE:TIME:AUTO OFF
Deactivates the sweep time auto mode for range 3.
Manual operation: See "Sweep Time Mode" on page 349
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer <TransducerName>
This command sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a trans-
ducer that fulfills the following conditions:
● The unit is dB.
Suffix: .
<range> 1...20
range
Parameters:
<TransducerName> 'string' = name of the transducer
Example: SENS:LIST:RANG1:TRAN 'test'
Sets the transducer called "test" for range 1.

Manual operation: See "Transd. Factor" on page 350
SENSe:MIXer Subsystem
The MIXer subsystem controls the external mixer settings. These commands are only
available if the R&S FSV-B21 (Exeternal Mixer) option is installed.
[SENSe:]MIXer[:STATe]..................................................................................................815
[SENSe:]MIXer:BIAS:HIGH............................................................................................. 815
[SENSe:]MIXer:BIAS:LOW..............................................................................................816
[SENSe:]MIXer:RFOVerrange[:STATe]............................................................................ 816
[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:HANDover........................................................................... 817
[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:STARt?................................................................................817
[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:STOP?................................................................................ 817
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND.................................................................................... 817
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet........................................................................818
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe.......................................................................... 818
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue]........................................................................ 818
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic[:LOW]....................................................................................819
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE.....................................................................................819
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOPower................................................................................................819
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:HIGH............................................................................................820
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH................................................................................. 820
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW]................................................................................820
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW]...........................................................................................820
[SENSe:]MIXer:PORTs...................................................................................................821
[SENSe:]MIXer:SIGNal................................................................................................... 821
[SENSe:]MIXer:THReshold............................................................................................. 822
[SENSe:]MIXer[:STATe] <State>
This command activates the external mixer.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: MIX ON
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "External Mixer (On/Off)" on page 495
[SENSe:]MIXer:BIAS:HIGH <BiasSetting>
This command defines the bias current for the high range (see also Chapter 4.8.1.2,
"Bias Current", on page 489).
This command is only available if the external mixer is active (see [SENSe:]MIXer[:
STATe] on page 815).

Parameters:
Default unit: A
Example: MIX ON
Activates the external mixer.
MIX:BIAS:HIGH 2A
Sets the bias for the high range to 2 A.
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Bias Settings" on page 502
[SENSe:]MIXer:BIAS:LOW <BiasSetting>
This command defines the bias current for the low range (see also Chapter 4.8.1.2,
"Bias Current", on page 489).
Parameters:
Default unit: A
Example: MIX ON
MIX:BIAS:LOW 2A
Sets the bias for the low range to 2 A.
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Bias Settings" on page 502
[SENSe:]MIXer:RFOVerrange[:STATe] <State>
This command specifies whether the frequencies beyond the defined band limits are to
be used.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: MIX:RFOV ON
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "RF Overrange" on page 496

[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:HANDover <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to
the next (if two different ranges are selected). The handover frequency for each band
can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
Example: MIX ON
MIX:FREQ:HAND 78.0299GHz
Sets the handover frequency to 78.0299 GHz.
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Handover Freq." on page 496
[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:STARt?
This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts.
Example: MIX:FREQ:STAR?
Queries the start frequency of the band.
Usage: Query only
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "RF Start" on page 496
[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:STOP?
This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops.
Example: MIX:FREQ:STOP?
Queries the stop frequency of the band.
Usage: Query only
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "RF Stop" on page 496
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND <Band>
This command selects the external mixer band. The query returns the currently
selected band.

Parameters:
<Band> A | KA | Q | U | V | E | W | F | D | G | Y | J | USER
Standard waveguide band or user-defined band.
Note: The band formerly referred to as "A" is now named "KA";
the input parameter "A" is still available and refers to the same
band as "KA".
For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands,
see Table 4-21).
*RST: F (90 GHz - 140 GHz)
Example: MIX ON
MIX:HARM:BAND A
Sets the band to A (26.5 GHz - 40 GHz).
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Band" on page 496
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet
This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the standard waveguide
bands.
Example: MIX:HARM:BAND:PRES
Presets the waveguide bands.
Usage: Event
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Preset Band" on page 496
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe <State>
This command specifies whether a second (high) harmonic is to be used to cover the
band's frequency range.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: MIX:HARM:HIGH:STAT ON
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Range 1/2" on page 497
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue] <HarmOrder>
This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high range.

Parameters:
Range: 2 to 100 (USER band); for other bands: see band
definition
Example: MIX:HARM:HIGH 2
Mode: all
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic[:LOW] <HarmOrder>
This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the LOW range.
Parameters:
Range: 2 to 100 (USER band); for other bands: see band
definition
*RST: 2 (for band F)
Example: MIX:HARM 3
Mode: all
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE <OddEven>
This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd, even,
or both.
Parameters:
<OddEven> ODD | EVEN | EODD
*RST: EVEN
Example: MIX:HARM:TYPE ODD
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Harmonic Type" on page 497
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOPower <Level>
This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer's LO port.
Parameters:
Range: 13.0 dBm to 17.0 dBm
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST: 15.5 dBm
Example: MIX:LOP 16.0dBm

Mode: all
Manual operation: See "LO Level" on page 503
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:HIGH <Average>
This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high
range.
Parameters:
<Average> <numeric value>
Range: 0 to 100
*RST: 40.0 dB
Default unit: dB
Example: MIX:LOSS:HIGH 20dB
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Conversion Loss" on page 497
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH <FileName>
This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the
high range.
Parameters:
Example: MIX:LOSS:HIGH 20dB
Mode: all
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW] <FileName>
This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low
range.
Parameters:
Example: MIX:LOSS:TABL mix_1_4
Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4.
Mode: all
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW] <Average>
This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low range.

Parameters:
<Average> <numeric value>
Range: 0 to 100
*RST: 40.0 dB
Default unit: dB
Example: MIX:LOSS 20dB
Mode: all
[SENSe:]MIXer:PORTs <PortType>
This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2-port or 3-port type.
Parameters:
<PortType> 2|3
*RST: 2
Example: MIX:PORT 3
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Mixer Type" on page 497
[SENSe:]MIXer:SIGNal <State>
This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not.
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON | AUTO | ALL
OFF
No automatic signal detection is active.
ON
Automatic signal detection (Signal ID) is active.
AUTO
Automatic signal detection (Auto ID) is active.
ALL
Both automatic signal detection functions (Signal ID+Auto ID)
are active.
*RST: OFF
Example: MIX:SIGN AUTO
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Signal ID (On/Off)" on page 503
See "Auto ID (On/Off)" on page 504

[SENSe:]MIXer:THReshold <Value>
This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep
and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison (see [SENSe:
]MIXer:SIGNal on page 821).
Parameters:
<Value> <numeric value>
Range: 30 dBm to -130 dBm
*RST: 0.0 dBm
Example: MIX:PORT 3
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Auto ID Threshold" on page 505
SENSe:MPOWer Subsystem
The commands of this subsystem are used to determine the mean burst power or peak
burst power for a given number of signal bursts, and for outputting the results in a list.
Since all the settings required for a measurement are combined in a single command,
the measurement speed is considerably higher than when using individual commands.
For measuring the signal bursts, the gated sweep function is used in zero span. The
gate is controlled either by an external trigger signal or by the video signal. An individ-
ual trigger event is required for each burst to be measured. If an external trigger signal
is used, the threshold is fixed to TTL level, while with a video signal the threshold can
be set as desired.
More Details on the SENSe:MPOWer Subsystem

The following graphics shows the relation between trigger time, trigger offset (for
delayed gate opening) and measurement time.
Depending on the settings made, the measurements are performed with the RMS
detector for RMS power or the PEAK detector for peak power. For all these measure-
ments, trace 1 of the selected system is used.

The setting parameters for this measurement are:

● analyzer frequency
● measurement time used for a single burst
● trigger source
● trigger level
● trigger offset
● type of power measurement (PEAK, MEAN)
● number of bursts to be measured
The commands of this subsystem can be used in two different ways:
● Setting up the instrument and at the same time querying the result list: This method
ensures the smallest delay between measurement and the output of the measured
values, but requires the control computer to wait actively for the response of the
instrument.
● Setting up the instrument and querying the result list after synchronization to the
end of measurement: With this method the control computer can be used for other
activities while the instrument is performing the measurement at the cost of addi-
tional time needed for synchronization via service request.
[SENSe:]MPOWer:FTYPe...............................................................................................823
[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult[:LIST]?................................................................................... 823
[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult:MIN?...................................................................................... 824
[SENSe:]MPOWer[:SEQuence]....................................................................................... 824
[SENSe:]MPOWer:FTYPe <FilterType>
This command selects the filter type for pulse power measurements.
Parameters:
<FilterType> NORMal | CFILter | RRC
Example: SENSe:MPOWer:FTYPe CFILter
[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult[:LIST]?
This command queries the results of the pulse power measurement.
This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way,
using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measure-
ment.
Parameters:
<PulsePower> List of pulse powers.
The number of values depends on the number of pulses you
have been measuring.
The unit is dBm.

Example: *ESE 1
*SRE 32
Configuration of status reporting systems for the generation of
SENSe:MPOWer 935.2MHz,1MHz,434us,VIDEO,50PCT,
5us,MEAN,20;*OPC
…
On SRQ:
SENSe:MPOWer:RESult?
Usage: Query only
[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult:MIN?
This command queries the lowest pulse power that has been measured during a pulse
power measurement.
Return values:
<PulsePower> Lowest power level of the pulse power measurement.
The unit is dBm.
Example: *ESE 1
*SRE 32
Configuration of status reporting systems for the generation of
5us,MEAN,20;*OPC
…
On SRQ:
SENSe:MPOWer:RESult:MIN?
Usage: Query only
[SENSe:]MPOWer[:SEQuence] <Frequency>, <RBW>, <MeasTime>,

<TriggerSource>, <TriggerLevel>, <TriggerOffset>, <Detector>, <#OfPulses>
This command configures and initiates the pulse power measurement.
The R&S FSVA/FSV caches all measurement parameters that you can set with this
command. If you use the command repeatedly, the R&S FSVA/FSV only changes
those settings that you have actually changed before initiating the measurement. Thus,
measurement times are kept as low as possible.

If you synchronize the measurement with *OPC, the R&S FSVA/FSV produces a ser-
vice request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual
measurements has been performed.
Note that using the command as a query initiates the measurement and returns the
results if all frequencies have been measured. For more information on querying the
results see .
To reduce the setting time, the setup is performed simultaneously for all selected
parameters.
The query adapts the instrument settings, performs the defined number of measure-
ments and outputs the measurement results list.
This measurement is not compatible with other measurements, especially as far as
marker functions, adjacent-channel measurement or statistics are concerned. The cor-
responding functions are therefore automatically switched off. In return, incompatible
commands automatically deactivate the multi burst power function.
The function is only available in the REMOTE operation. It is deactivated on switching
back to LOCAL.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Defines the pulse frequency.
Range: 0 Hz to fmax
<RBW> Defines the resolution bandwidth.
Range: 10 Hz to 10 MHz in steps of 1, 3, 10
<MeasTime> Defines the measurement time.
Range: 1 µs to 30 s
<TriggerSource> Selects a trigger source.
EXTernal
The trigger signal is fed from the "Ext. Trigger/Gate" input on the
rear of the unit.
VIDeo
The internal video signal is used as trigger signal.
<TriggerLevel> Defines a trigger level.
The trigger level is available for the video trigger. In that case,
the level is a percentage of the diagram height.
In case of an external trigger, the R&S FSVA/FSV uses a fix TTL
level.
Range: 0 PCT to 100 PCT
<TriggerOffset> Defines the trigger delay. The trigger delay is the time between
the detection of the trigger signal and the start of the measure-
ment.
Range: see data sheet

<Detector> Selects the detector and therefore the way the measurement is
evaluated.
MEAN
Calculates the RMS pulse power.
PEAK
Calculates the peak pulse power.
<#OfPulses> Defines the number of pulses included in the measurement.
Range: 1 to 32001
Return values:
<PowerLevel> Pulse power level.
The unit is dBm.
Example: Sample setting:
5us,MEAN,20
Performs a measurement sequence with the following settings:
Frequency = 935.2 MHz,
Resolution bandwidth = 1 MHz
Measurement time = 434 µs
Trigger source = VIDEO
Trigger threshold = 50 %
Trigger offset = 5 µs
Type of measurement = MEAN power
No. of measurements = 20
Sample query:
SENSe:MPOWer? 935.2MHz, 1MHz, 434us, VIDEO,
50PCT, 5us, MEAN, 20
Performs the same measurement and in addition returns the
results list immediately after completion of the last measure-
ment.
Sample result:
18.3,18.6,18.1,18.0,17.9,18.3,18.6,18.1,18.0,17.9,18.3,18.6,18.
1,18.0,17.9,18.3,18.6,18.1,18.0,17.9
SENSe:PMETer Subsystem (Power Sensor, R&S FSV-K9)

This subsystem controls the device settings for power sensor measurements. It is only
available if the R&S FSV-K9 Power Sensor option is installed.
on page 508.
[SENSe:]PMETer[:STATe].........................................................................................827
[SENSe:]PMETer:DCYCle:STATe..............................................................................827
[SENSe:]PMETer:DCYCle:VALue.............................................................................. 828
[SENSe:]PMETer:FREQuency................................................................................... 828
[SENSe:]PMETer:FREQuency:LINK...........................................................................828
[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe.......................................................................................... 829
[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe:AVERage[:STATe]...............................................................829

[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe:AVERage:COUNt................................................................ 830
[SENSe:]PMETer:ROFFset[:STATe]...........................................................................830
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger[:STATe]........................................................................... 831
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:DTIMe..............................................................................831
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:HOLDoff...........................................................................831
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:HYSTeresis...................................................................... 832
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:LEVel...............................................................................832
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:SLOPe.............................................................................833
[SENSe:]PMETer:UPDate[:STATe]............................................................................ 833
[SENSe:]PMETer[:STATe] <State>
This command switches the power sensor measurement for the selected power sensor
on or off.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: PMET1 ON
Switches the power sensor measurements on.
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Power Sensor On/Off" on page 515
See "Select" on page 517
[SENSe:]PMETer:DCYCle:STATe <State>
This command activates the duty cycle correction for the selected power sensor.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: PMET2:DCYC:STAT ON
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Duty Cycle" on page 518

[SENSe:]PMETer:DCYCle:VALue <Percentage>
This command sets the duty cycle for the selected power sensor to a percent value for
the correction of pulse modulated signals. With the correction activated, the sensor cal-
culates the signal pulse power from this value and the mean power.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<Percentage> Range: 0.001 to 99.999
*RST: 99.999
Default unit: %
Example: PMET2:DCYC:STAT ON
Activates the duty cycle correction.
PMET2:DCYC:VAL 0.5
Sets the correction value to 0.5%.
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Duty Cycle" on page 518
[SENSe:]PMETer:FREQuency <Frequency>
This command sets the frequency of the selected power sensor. The limits fmin and fmax
are defined by the power sensor.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<Frequency> fmin ... fmax
*RST: 50 MHz
Example: PMET2:FREQ 1GHZ
Sets the frequency of the power sensor to 1 GHz.
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Frequency Manual" on page 517
[SENSe:]PMETer:FREQuency:LINK <Coupling>
This command sets the frequency coupling of the selected power sensor.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index

Parameters:
<Coupling> CENTer
Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer
MARKer1
couples the frequency to the position of marker 1
OFF
switches the frequency coupling off
*RST: CENT
Example: PMET2:FREQ:LINK CENT
Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Frequency Coupling" on page 518
[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe <Duration>
This command sets the measurement duration of the selected power sensor.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<Duration> SHORt | NORMal | LONG
*RST: NORM
Example: PMET2:MTIM SHOR
Sets a short measurement duration for measurements of station-
ary high power signals for the selected power sensor.
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Meas Time / Average" on page 518
[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe:AVERage[:STATe] <State>
This command activates or deactivates manual averaging for the selected power sen-
sor. The average count is set with the [SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe:AVERage:
COUNt command.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: PMET2:MTIM:AVER ON
Activates manual averaging.
Mode: PSM

Manual operation: See "Meas Time / Average" on page 518
[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe:AVERage:COUNt <NumberReadings>
This command defines the number of readings (averagings) to be performed after a
single sweep has been started for the selected power sensor. This command is only
available if the [SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe:AVERage[:STATe] command is set to
ON.
Results become more stable with extended average, particularly if signals with low
power are measured. This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the
power meter measurement.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<NumberReadings> 0 to 256 in binary steps (1, 2, 4, 8,…)
For average count = 0 or 1, one reading is performed.
Example: PMET2:MTIM:AVER ON
Activates manual averaging.
PMET2:MTIM:AVER:COUN 8
Sets the number of readings to 8.
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Number of Readings" on page 519
[SENSe:]PMETer:ROFFset[:STATe] <State>
This command defines whether the reference level offset set for the analyzer is taken
into account for the measured power or not for the selected power sensor.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<State> ON
Adds the offset defined by the DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:
TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet command to the
measured level.
OFF
Takes no offset into account.
*RST: ON
Example: PMET2:ROFF OFF
Takes no offset into account for the measured power.
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Use Ref Level Offset" on page 519

[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger[:STATe] <State>
This command switches the external power trigger on or off for the selected power
sensor.
For details on configuring an external power trigger and supported power sensors, see
Chapter 4.9.3, "Configuring an External Power Trigger", on page 513.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: PMET2:TRIG ON
Switches the external power trigger on
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "External Power Trigger" on page 519
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:DTIMe <Value>
Defines the time the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to
allow a trigger to start the measurement.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<Value> 0 to 1 s
Increment: 100 ns
*RST: 100 µs
Example: PMET2:TRIG:DTIMe 0.001
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Dropout" on page 520
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:HOLDoff <Value>
Defines the holdoff value in s, which is the time which must pass before triggering, in
case another trigger event happens.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index

Parameters:
<Value> 0 to 1 s
Increment: 100 ns
*RST: 0s
Example: PMET2:TRIG:HOLD 0.1
Sets the holdoff time of the trigger to 100 ms
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Holdoff" on page 520
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:HYSTeresis <Value>
Defines the value for the trigger hysteresis of an external power trigger. The hysteresis
in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to
allow a trigger to start the measurement.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<Value> 3 to 50 dB
Increment: 1 dB
*RST: 0 dB
Example: PMET2:TRIG:HYST 10
Sets the hysteresis of the trigger to 10 dB.
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Hysteresis" on page 520
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:LEVel <Value>
This command sets the power level for the external power trigger for the selected
power sensor.
For details on configuring an external power trigger and supported power sensors, see
Chapter 4.9.3, "Configuring an External Power Trigger", on page 513.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<Value> -20 to +20 dBm
*RST: -10 dBm

Example: PMET2:TRIG:LEV -10 dBm

Sets the level of the trigger
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "External Trigger Level" on page 520
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:SLOPe <Edge>
Defines whether the sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<Edge> POSitive | NEGative
*RST: POS
Example: PMET2:TRIG:SLOP NEG
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Slope" on page 520
[SENSe:]PMETer:UPDate[:STATe] <State>
This command switches the continuous update of the power sensor measurement for
the selected power sensor on or off. If activated, even after a single sweep has been
completed, the data from the power sensor is updated.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: PMET1:UPD ON
The data from power sensor 1 is updated continuously.
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Continuous Value Update" on page 516
SENSe:POWer Subsystem
This subsystem controls the setting of the instruments channel and adjacent channel
power measurements.

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs................................................................................834
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel<channel>]................................835
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel................................................835
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<channel>................................ 835
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel....................................................... 836
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL]...............................................................836
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<channel>........................................836
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<channel>..........................................837
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALL...............................................................837
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel......................................................837
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<channel>...................................... 837
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<channel>........................................ 838
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE.................................................................................. 838
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel...................................................................838
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<channel>................................................... 839
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<channel>.....................................................839
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet................................................................................ 839
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel.................................................................... 840
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE....................................................... 840
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO................................................840
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual............................................. 841
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel]............................................................. 841
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<channel>............................................... 842
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<channel>................................................. 842
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt................................................................843
[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth...............................................................................843
[SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed............................................................................................... 843
[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection........................................................................................ 843
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe.................................................................................................844
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <ChannelPairs>
This command sets the number of adjacent channels (upper and lower channel in
pairs).The figure 0 stands for pure channel power measurement.
Parameters:
<ChannelPairs> 0 to 12
*RST: 1
Example: POW:ACH:ACP 3
Sets the number of adjacent channels to 3, i.e. the adjacent
channel and alternate adjacent channels 1 and 2 are switched
on.
Manual operation: See "# of Adj Chan" on page 295
See "Channel Bandwidth " on page 309

<Bandwidth>
This command sets the channel bandwidth of the specified TX channel in the radio
communication system. The bandwidths of adjacent channels are not influenced by
this modification.
With [SENSe<source>:]POWer:HSPeed set to ON, steep-edged channel filters are
available. For further information on filters refer to Chapter 4.2.6.4, "List of Available
RRC and Channel Filters", on page 211.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> 100 Hz to 40 GHz
*RST: 14 kHz
Example: POW:ACH:BWID:CHAN2 30 kHz
Sets the bandwidth of the TX channel 2 to 30 kHz.
Manual operation: See "Bandwidth" on page 297
See "Channel Bandwidth (span > 0)" on page 313
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel <Bandwidth>
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel of the radio
transmission system. If the bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed, the band-
widths of all alternate adjacent channels are automatically set to the same value.
RRC and Channel Filters", on page 211 .
Parameters:
*RST: 14 kHz
Example: POW:ACH:BWID:ACH 30 kHz
Sets the bandwidth of all adjacent channels to 30 kHz.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<channel>
<Bandwidth>
This command defines the channel bandwidth of the specified alternate adjacent chan-
nels of the radio transmission system. If the channel bandwidth of one alternate adja-
cent channel is changed (e.g. channel 3), the bandwidth of all subsequent alternate
adjacent channels (e.g. 4–11) is automatically set to the same value.
RRC and Channel Filters", on page 211 .

Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
the alternate adjacent channel
Parameters:
*RST: 14 kHz
Example: POW:ACH:BWID:ALT2 30 kHz
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the weighting filter of the adjacent channel.
Parameters:
<Alpha> <numeric value>
*RST: 0,22
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ACH 0,35
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filter" on page 299
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL] <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the weighting filter of all channels.
Parameters:
*RST: 0,22
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ALL 0,35
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<channel> <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the weighting filter of the specified alternate
channel.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
Parameters:
*RST: 0,22
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ALT3 0,35
Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate
channel 3 to 0,35.

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<channel> <Alpha>
This command defines the roll-off factor for the weighting filter of the specified TX
channel.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
the TX channel
Parameters:
*RST: 0,22
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:CHAN3 0,35
Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the TX channel 3
to 0,35.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALL <State>
This command activates the weighting filter for all channels.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: POW:ACH:FILT ON
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel <State>
This command activates the weighting filter for the adjacent channel.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ACH ON
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<channel> <State>
This command activates the weighting filter for the specified alternate channel.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ALT3 ON
Activates the weighting filter for alternate channel 3.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<channel> <State>
This command activates the weighting filter for the specified TX channel.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...18
the TX channel
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:CHA3 ON
Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 3.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE <Mode>
This command switches between absolute and relative adjacent channel measure-
ment. The command is only available with span > 0 and if the number of adjacent
channels is greater than 0.
For the relative measurement the reference value is set to the currently measured
channel power using the command [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:
AUTO ONCE.
Parameters:
<Mode> ABSolute | RELative
ABSolute
absolute adjacent channel measurement
RELative
relative adjacent channel measurement
*RST: RELative
Example: POW:ACH:MODE REL
Sets the adjacent channel measurement mode to relative.
Manual operation: See "ACLR (Abs/Rel)" on page 301
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel <Name>
This command defines a name for the adjacent channel. The name is displayed in the
result diagram and the result table.
Parameters:
<Name> *RST: Adj

Example: POW:ACH:NAME:ACH 'XYZ'

Defines the name of the adjacent channel as 'XYZ'.
Manual operation: See "Names" on page 299
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<channel> <Name>
This command defines a name for the specified alternate channel. The name is dis-
played in the result diagram and the result table.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
Parameters:
<Name> *RST: ALT<1...11>
Example: POW:ACH:NAME:ALT3 'XYZ'
Defines the name of the third alternate channel as 'XYZ'.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<channel> <Name>
This command defines a name for the specified TX channel. The name is displayed in
the result diagram and the result table.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...12
the TX channel
Parameters:
<Name> *RST: TX<1...12>
Example: POW:ACH:NAME:CHAN3 'XYZ'
Defines the name of the third transmission channel as 'XYZ'.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet <Setting>
This command adjusts the frequency span, the measurement bandwidths and the
detector as required for the number of channels, the channel bandwidths and the chan-
nel spacings selected in the active power measurement. If necessary, adjacent-chan-
nel power measurement is switched on prior to the adjustment.
To obtain correct results, a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the
sweep must be performed after the adjustment. Synchronization is possible only in the
single sweep mode.
The result is queried with the CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:
RESult? command.

Parameters:
<Setting> ACPower | CPOWer | MCACpower | OBANdwidth | OBWidth |
CN | CN0
Example: POW:ACH:PRES ACP
Sets the frequency span, the measurement bandwidths and the
detector as required for the ACLR measurement.
INIT:CONT OFF
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP
Queries the result of the adjacent-channel power measurement.
See "Adjust Settings " on page 310
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel
This command adapts the reference level to the measured channel power and – if
required – switches on previously the adjacent channel power measurement. This
ensures that the signal path of the instrument is not overloaded. Since the measure-
ment bandwidth is significantly smaller than the signal bandwidth in channel power
measurements, the signal path can be overloaded although the trace is still signifi-
cantly below the reference level. If the measured channel power equals the reference
level, the signal path is not overloaded.
Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with *WAI, *OPC or *OPC? to the
end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted.
Example: POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV;*WAI
Adapts the reference level to the measured channel power.
Manual operation: See "Adjust Ref Lvl" on page 304
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE
This command sets the reference value to the currently measured channel power for
the relative measurement.
Example: POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE
Manual operation: See "Set CP Reference" on page 302
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO <Channel>
This command activates the automatic selection of a transmission channel to be used
as a reference channel in relative adjacent-channel power measurements.

The transmission channel with the highest power, the transmission channel with the
lowest power, or the transmission channel nearest to the adjacent channels can be
defined as a reference channel.
The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent-channel power
measurements with span > 0 ( CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:
SELect on page 695).
Parameters:
<Channel> MINimum | MAXimum | LHIGhest
MINimum
Transmission channel with the lowest power
MAXimum
Transmission channel with the highest power
LHIGhest
Lowermost transmission channel for the lower adjacent chan-
nels, uppermost transmission channel for the upper adjacent
channels
Example: POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:AUTO MAX
The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a
reference channel.
Manual operation: See "ACLR Reference" on page 297
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual <ChannelNumber>
This command selects a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in
relative adjacent-channel power measurements.
measurements with span > 0 ( CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:
Parameters:
<ChannelNumber> 1 to 18
*RST: 1
Example: POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:MAN 3
Transmission channel 3 is used as a reference channel.
Manual operation: See "ACLR Reference" on page 297
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] <Spacing>
This command defines the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent chan-
nel (ADJ). The modification of the adjacent-channel spacing (ADJ) causes a change in
all higher adjacent-channel spacings (ALT1, ALT2, ...): they are all multiplied by the
same factor (new spacing value/old spacing value).

Parameters:
<Spacing> 100 Hz to 20 GHz
*RST: 14 kHz
Example: POW:ACH:SPAC 33kHz
Sets the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent
channel to 33 kHz, the alternate adjacent channel 1 to 66 kHz,
the alternate adjacent channel 2 to 99 kHz, and so on.
Manual operation: See "Spacing" on page 298
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<channel> <Spacing>
This command defines the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the
TX channel (ALT1, ALT2, ...). A modification of a higher adjacent-channel spacing cau-
ses a change by the same factor (new spacing value/old spacing value) in all higher
adjacent-channel spacings, while the lower adjacent-channel spacings remain
unchanged.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
Parameters:
<Spacing> 100 Hz to 20 GHz
*RST: 40 kHz (ALT1), 60 kHz (ALT2), 80 kHz (ALT3), ...
Example: POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 100 kHz
Sets the spacing between TX channel and alternate adjacent
channel 1 (ALT1) from 40 kHz to 100 kHz. In consequence, the
spacing between the TX channel and all higher alternate adja-
cent channels is increased by the factor 100/40 = 2.5: ALT2 =
150 kHz, ALT3 = 200 kHz, ALT4 = 250 kHz.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<channel> <Spacing>
This command defines the channel spacing for the carrier signals.
Suffix: .
<channel> 1...11
the TX channel
Parameters:
<Spacing> 14 kHz to 20 GHz
*RST: 20 kHz
Example: POW:ACH:SPAC:CHAN 25kHz

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <Number>
This command selects the number of carrier signals.
measurements with span > 0 (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:
Parameters:
<Number> 1 to 18
*RST: 1
Example: POW:ACH:TXCH:COUN 3
Manual operation: See "# of TX Chan" on page 295
[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth <Percentage>
This command defines the percentage of the power with respect to the total power.
This value is the basis for the occupied bandwidth measurement (see [SENSe:
]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 839).
Parameters:
<Percentage> 10 to 99.9PCT
*RST: 99PCT
Example: POW:BWID 95PCT
Manual operation: See "% Power Bandwidth (span > 0)" on page 313
[SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed <State>
This command switches on or off the high-speed channel/adjacent channel power
measurement. The measurement itself is performed in zero span on the center fre-
quencies of the individual channels. The command automatically switches to zero span
and back.
Depending on the selected mobile radio standard, weighting filters with characteristic
or very steep-sided channel filters are used for band limitation.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: POW:HSP ON
Manual operation: See "Fast ACLR (On/Off)" on page 302
[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection <Mode>
This command turns noise cancellation on and off.

If noise cancellation is on, the R&S FSVA/FSV performs a reference measurement to

determine its inherent noise and subtracts the result from the channel power measure-
ment result (first active trace only).
The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolu-
tion bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the correction function is disabled when-
ever one of these parameters is changed. A corresponding message is displayed on
the screen. Noise correction must be turned on again manually after the change.
Parameters:
<Mode> ON
Performs noise correction.
OFF
Performs no noise correction.
AUTO
Performs noise correction.
After a parameter change, noise correction is restarted automati-
cally and a new correction measurement is performed.
*RST: OFF
Example: POW:NCOR ON
Manual operation: See "Noise Correction" on page 198
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command assigns the channel/adjacent channel power measurement to the indi-
cated trace. The corresponding trace must be active, i.e. its state must be different
from blank.
Note:The measurement of the occupied bandwidth (OBW) is performed on the trace
on which marker 1 is positioned. To evaluate another trace, marker 1 must be posi-
tioned to another trace with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.
Parameters:
<TraceNumber> 1 to 6
Example: POW:TRAC 2
Assigns the measurement to trace 2.
Manual operation: See "Select Trace" on page 301
SENSe:SWEep Subsystem
The SENSe:SWEep subsystem controls the sweep parameters.
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt.................................................................................................845
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent?................................................................................ 845
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe................................................................................................ 846
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff................................................................................... 846
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth.................................................................................... 847
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity................................................................................... 847
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce...................................................................................847

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:COMMent................................................................848
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>[:STATe<range>].......................................................848
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:STARt<range>......................................................... 848
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: STOP<range>.........................................................849
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: PERiod...................................................................849
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE....................................................................................... 849
[SENSe:]SWEep:MODE................................................................................................. 850
[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts.................................................................................................850
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME................................................................................................... 851
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO......................................................................................... 851
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE...................................................................................................851
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED?.......................................................................................852
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <NumberSweeps>
This command defines the number of sweeps started with single sweep, which are
used for calculating the average or maximum value. If the values 0 or 1 are set, one
sweep is performed.
Parameters:
<NumberSweeps> 0 to 32767
*RST: 0 (GSM: 200, PHN:1)
Example: SWE:COUN 64
Sets the number of sweeps to 64.
INIT:CONT OFF
INIT;*WAI
Manual operation: See "Sweep Count" on page 216
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent?
This query command returns the current number of started sweeps. A sweep count
value should be set and the device should be in single sweep mode.
Example: SWE:COUNt 64
Sets sweep count to 64
INIT:CONT OFF
INIT
Starts a sweep (without waiting for the sweep end!)
SWE:COUN:CURR?
Queries the number of started sweeps
Usage: Query only

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe <State>
This command switches on/off the sweep control by an external gate signal. If the
external gate is selected the trigger source is automatically switched to EXTernal as
well.
When triggering or gating is activated, the squelch function is automatically disabled
(see "SENSe:DEMod Subsystem" on page 784).
In case of measurement with external gate, the measured values are recorded as long
as the gate is opened. During a sweep the gate can be opened and closed several
times. The synchronization mechanisms with *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI remain com-
pletely unaffected.
The sweep end is detected when the required number of measurement points (691 in
"Spectrum" mode) has been recorded.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SWE:EGAT ON
SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE
Switches on the edge-triggered mode.
SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100US
Sets the gate delay to 100 µs.
SWE:EGAT:LEN 500US
Sets the gate opening time to 500 µs.
INIT;*WAI
Manual operation: See "Gated Trigger" on page 243
See "Gated Trigger (On/Off)" on page 364
See "Gate Ranges" on page 364
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff <DelayTime>
This command defines the delay time between the external gate signal and the contin-
uation of the sweep.
Note: Using gate mode "level" (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE on page 849)
and an IFP trigger (see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901), the
holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span
and IQ mode measurements.
Parameters:
<DelayTime> 0 s to 30 s
*RST: 0s
Example: SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100us
Manual operation: See "Gate Delay" on page 244

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <TimeInterval>
This command defines a gate length.
Parameters:
<TimeInterval> 125 ns to 30 s
*RST: 400μs
Example: SWE:EGAT:LENG 10ms
Manual operation: See "Gate Length (Gate Mode Edge)" on page 244
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity <Polarity>
This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal. The setting applies
both to the edge of an edge-triggered signal and the level of a level-triggered signal.
Parameters:
<Polarity> POSitive | NEGative
*RST: POSitive
Example: SWE:EGAT:POL POS
Manual operation: See "Trg/Gate Polarity" on page 242
See "Trigger Polarity" on page 432
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the signal source for gated measurements.
If an IF power signal is used, the gate is opened as soon as a signal at > -20 dBm is
detected within the IF path bandwidth (10 MHz).
For details see the "Trg/Gate Source" on page 238 softkey.
Parameters:
<Source> EXTernal | IFPower | VIDeo | RFPower | PSEN
*RST: IFPower
Example: SWE:EGAT:SOUR IFP
Switches the gate source to IF power.
Manual operation: See "Trg/Gate Source" on page 238
See "External" on page 238
See "Video" on page 239
See "RF Power" on page 239
See "IF Power/BB Power" on page 239
See "Power Sensor" on page 240
See "Digital IQ" on page 241
See "Gated Trigger" on page 243
See "Gated Trigger (On/Off)" on page 364

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:COMMent <Comment>
Defines a comment for one of the traces for gated triggering.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...6
trace
Parameters:
<Comment>
Example: SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:COMM "SlotA"
Manual operation: See "Gate Ranges" on page 364
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>[:STATe<range>] <State>
This command activates or deactivates tracing for a specific range using gated trigger-
ing.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...6
trace
<range> 1...3
range
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAT1 ON
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:STARt<range> <Value>
This command defines the starting point for the range to be traced using gated trigger-
ing.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...6
trace
<range> 1...3
range
Parameters:
*RST: OFF
Example: SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAR1 3ms
Sets the Starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms.

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: STOP<range> <Value>

This command defines the stopping point for the range to be traced using gated trig-
gering
Suffix: .
<k> 1...6
trace
<range> 1...3
range
Parameters:
*RST: 1 μs
Example: SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STOP1 5ms
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: PERiod <Value>

This command defines the length of the period to be traced using gated triggering.
Suffix: .
<k> 1...6
trace
Parameters:
*RST: 0s
Example: SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:PER 5ms
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE <Type>
This command sets the type of triggering by the external gate signal.
A delay between applying the gate signal and the start of recording measured values
can be defined, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff on page 846.

Parameters:
<Type> LEVel | EDGE
LEVel
The gate is level-triggered:
After detection of the gate signal, the gate remains open until the
gate signal disappears. The gate opening time cannot be
defined with the command [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff.
Note: Using gating with gate mode "level" and an IFP trigger
(see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 901), the
holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep,
FFT sweep, zero span and IQ mode measurements.
EDGE
The gate is edge-triggered:
After detection of the set gate signal edge, the gate remains
open until the gate delay ([SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff)
has expired.
*RST: EDGE
Example: SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE
Manual operation: See "Gate Mode (Lvl/Edge)" on page 244
[SENSe:]SWEep:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the spurious emission and spectrum emission mask measure-
ments.
Parameters:
<Mode> AUTO | ESPectrum | LIST
AUTO
Switches to "Spectrum" measurement mode or stays in the cur-
rent mode if it is not ESP/LIST
ESPectrum
"Spectrum Emission Mask" measurement mode
LIST
"Spurious Emissions" measurement mode
*RST: AUTO
Example: SWE:MODE ESP
Sets the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement mode.
Manual operation: See "Spectrum Emission Mask" on page 282
See "Spurious Emissions" on page 282
See "Spectrum Emission Mask" on page 316
See "Spurious Emissions" on page 348
[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts <NumberPoints>
This command defines the number of measurement points to be collected during one
sweep.

Note: For Spurious Emissions measurements the maximum number of sweep points in
all ranges is limited to 100001.
Parameters:
<NumberPoints> Range: 101 to 32001
*RST: 691
Example: SWE:POIN 150
Manual operation: See "Sweep Points" on page 217
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <Time>
This command defines the sweep time.
The range depends on the frequency span.
If this command is used in "Spectrum" mode, automatic coupling to resolution band-
width and video bandwidth is switched off.
Parameters:
<Time> refer to data sheet
*RST: (automatic)
Example: SWE:TIME 1s
Manual operation: See "Sweeptime Manual" on page 206
See "Sweep Time" on page 302
See "Meas Time" on page 417
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State>
In realtime mode, this command automatically sets the sweep time to 32 ms.
In analyzer mode, this command controls the automatic coupling of the sweep time to
the frequency span and bandwidth settings. If [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME is used, auto-
matic coupling is switched off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: SWE:TIME:AUTO ON
Activates automatic sweep time.
Manual operation: See "Sweeptime Manual" on page 206
See "Sweeptime Auto" on page 207
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE <Type>
This command selects the sweep type.

Parameters:
<Type> SWE
Selects analog frequency sweeps.
AUTO
Automatically selects the sweep type (FFT or analog frequency
sweep).
FFT
Selects FFT sweeps.
*RST: AUTO
Example: SWE:TYPE FFT
Selects FFT sweeps.
Manual operation: See "Sweep" on page 203
See "FFT" on page 203
See "Auto" on page 203
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED?
This command queries the sweep type if you have turned on automatic selection of the
sweep type.
Return values:
<Type> SWE | FFT
SWE
Normal sweep
FFT
FFT mode
*RST: SWE
Example: SWE:TYPE:USED?
Usage: Query only
SENSe:[WINDow:]DETector Subsystem
The SENSe:DETector subsystem controls the acquisition of measurement data via the
selection of the detector for the corresponding trace.
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]..............................................................852
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO.................................................... 853
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion] <Function>
This command selects the detector for the data acquisition in the selected trace.
Suffix: .
<trace> 1...6
Selects the trace.
<trace> 1...6
trace

Parameters:
<Function> APEak | NEGative | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS | AVERage |
QPEak
*RST: APEak
For details on detectors refer to Chapter 4.2.8.6, "Detector Over-
view", on page 233.
Example: DET POS
Sets the detector to "positive peak".
Manual operation: See "Auto Peak" on page 223
See "Positive Peak" on page 223
See "Negative Peak" on page 223
See "Sample" on page 223
See "RMS" on page 223
See "Average" on page 224
See "Quasipeak" on page 224
See "CISPR Average" on page 224
See "RMS Average" on page 224
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO <State>
This command either couples the detector to the current trace setting or turns coupling
off.
Suffix: .
<trace> 1...6
trace
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DET:AUTO OFF
Manual operation: See "Auto Select" on page 222
5.3.3.16 SOURce Subsystem
The SOURce subsystem controls the output signals of the instrument.

● SOURce Subsystem commands...........................................................................853
● SOURce:POWer Subsystem................................................................................ 861
SOURce Subsystem commands

SOURce<n>:AM:STATe................................................................................................. 854
SOURce<n>:DM:STATe................................................................................................. 854
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>[:STATe]..................................................................... 855
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency............................................................... 855
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe]................................... 856
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator............................. 856

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator.................................857
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:OFFSet<m>.............................................857
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:SWEep[:STATe].......................................858
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:POWer[:LEVel]........................................................... 858
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:ROSCillator[:SOURce]................................................ 859
SOURce<n>:FM:DEViation............................................................................................. 860
SOURce<n>:FM:STATe................................................................................................. 860
SOURce<n>:FREQuency:OFFSet................................................................................... 860
SOURce<n>:AM:STATe <State>
This command turns external amplitude modulation of the tracking generator on and
off.
External I/Q modulation is switched off, if active. This command is available with a
tracking generator (option R&S FSV-B9).
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR2:AM:STAT ON
Switches on the external amplitude modulation of the tracking
generator for screen B.
Manual operation: See "External AM" on page 448
See "Modulation OFF" on page 448
SOURce<n>:DM:STATe <State>
This command turns external I/Q modulation of the tracking generator on and off.
External AM and external FM are switched off, if active. This command is available
with a tracking generator (option R&S FSV-B9).
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR2:DM:STAT ON
Switches on the external I/Q modulation of the tracking genera-
tor for screen B.

Manual operation: See "External I/Q" on page 448

See "External IQ" on page 467
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>[:STATe] <State>
This command activates or deactivates the external generator indicated by the suffix
<generator>.
This command is requires the optional External Tracking Generator.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
external generator
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN1:TYPE 'SMP02'
Selects SMP02 as generator 1.
"SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN1:LINK TTL"
Selects GPIB + TTL link as interface.
"SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN1:ADDR 28"
Sets the generator address to 28.
"SOUR:EXT1:FREQ:SWE ON"
Activates the frequency sweep for generator 1.
"SOUR:EXT ON"
Activates the external generator
Manual operation: See "Source RF Internal (On/ Off)" on page 445
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency <Frequency>
This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external tracking generator.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window
<m> 1|2
tracking generator
Parameters:
<Frequency> Source frequency of the external tracking generator.
*RST: RST value
Example: SOUR:EXT2:FREQ 10MHz
Manual operation: See "(Fixed) Generator Frequency" on page 456

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe] <State>
This command couples or decouples the analyzer and generator frequencies.
Suffix: .
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
OFF
The fixed frequency defined using SOURce<n>:
EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency is used as a source fre-
quency.
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR:EXT2:FREQ:COUP ON
Manual operation: See "Source Frequency Coupling" on page 456
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator <Value>
This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency
is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator.
This command is only valid for R&S FSVA/FSV option External Tracking Generator
(R&S FSV-B10).
Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not
exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana-
lyzer:
Numerator
FGenerator  FAnalyzer   FOffset
Deno min ator
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only
Parameters:
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR:EXT:FREQ:NUM 4"
"SOUR:EXT:FREQ:DEN 3"
Sets a multiplication factor of 4/3, i.e. the transmit frequency of
the generator is 4/3 times the analyzer frequency.

Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "Generator Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)"
on page 457
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator <Value>
This command defines the numerator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is
multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator.
(R&S FSV-B10).
Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not
exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana-
lyzer:
Numerator
FGenerator  FAnalyzer   FOffset
Deno min ator
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
Parameters:
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR:EXT:FREQ:NUM 4"
"SOUR:EXT:FREQ:DEN 3"
Sets a multiplication factor of 4/3, i.e. the transmit frequency of
the generator is 4/3 times the analyzer frequency.
Mode: A, NF
on page 457
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:OFFSet<m> <Offset>
This command defines the frequency offset of the selected generator with reference to
the receive frequency.
(R&S FSV-B10).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
<m> 1|2
offset (for Noise Figure measurements (K30) only)
Parameters:
<Offset> <numeric value>, specified in Hz, kHz, MHz or GHz, rounded to
the nearest Hz
*RST: 0 Hz
Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of
the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied
to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer:
For Noise Figure measurements (R&S FSV-K30), the following

formula applies:
Generator Frequency = [(LO + Offset 1) * Factor 1 / Factor 2)] +
Offset 2
Example: SOUR:EXT:FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ
Sets a frequency offset of the generator transmit frequency com-
pared to the analyzer receive frequency of 1 GHz.
Mode: A, NF
on page 457
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:SWEep[:STATe] <State>
This command activates or deactivates the frequency sweep for the selected genera-
tor.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
external generator
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR:EXT1:FREQ:SWE ON
Activates the frequency sweep for external generator 1.
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:POWer[:LEVel] <Level>
This command sets the output power of the selected generator.

(R&S FSV-B10).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
Parameters:
*RST: -20 dBm
Example: SOUR:EXT:POW -30dBm
Sets the generator level to -30 dBm
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "Source Power" on page 457
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] <Source>
This command controls selection of the reference oscillator for the external tracking
generator (requires option R&S FSV-B10).
If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected
to the rear panel of the instrument.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
Parameters:
<Source> INTernal
the internal reference is used
EXTernal
the external reference is used; if none is available, an error flag
is displayed in the status bar
EAUTo
the external reference is used as long as it is available, then the
instrument switches to the internal reference (Spectrum mode
only)
*RST: INT
Example: SOUR:EXT:ROSC EXT
Switches to external reference oscillator
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "Reference" on page 459

SOURce<n>:FM:DEViation <Frequency>
This command defines the maximum frequency deviation at 1 V input voltage at the
FM input of the tracking generator.
This command is available with a tracking generator (option R&S FSV-B9).
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<Frequency> The possible value range is 100 Hz to 10 MHz in steps of 10 Hz.
Range: 100 Hz to 10 MHz
Increment: 10 Hz
*RST: 100 Hz
Example: SOUR1:FM:DEV 1 MHz
Sets the maximum frequency deviation of the tracking generator
for screen A to 1 MHz.
Manual operation: See "External FM" on page 448
SOURce<n>:FM:STATe <State>
This command turns external frequency modulation of the tracking generator on and
off.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR2:FM:STAT ON
Switches on the external frequency modulation of the tracking
generator for screen B.
Manual operation: See "External FM" on page 448
SOURce<n>:FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines a frequency offset of the tracking generator. Frequency-con-
verting DUTs can be measured with this setting.

Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<Offset> Note that the values (start frequency – tracking frequency offset)
and (stop frequency – tracking frequency offset) are both > 1
kHz or both < –1 kHz.
Range: -200 MHz to 200 MHz
*RST: 0 Hz
Example: SOUR:FREQ:OFFS 10MHz
Defines a frequency offset of the tracking generator of 10 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Frequency Offset" on page 455
SOURce:POWer Subsystem
The SOURce:POWer subsystem controls the power of the tracking generator signal
(only with R&S FSVA/FSV option B9 or B10).
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude].......................................................861
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet............................................................. 861
SOURce<n>:POWer:MODE............................................................................................862
SOURce<n>:POWer:STARt............................................................................................ 862
SOURce<n>:POWer:STOP.............................................................................................863
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <Level>
This command defines the output level of the tracking generator.
Parameters:
<Level> Ouput level in dBm. The level range is specified in the data
sheet.
*RST: -20 dBm
Example: SOUR:POW -20dBm
Sets the tracking generator level to -20 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Source Power" on page 445
See "Source Power" on page 454
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines a level offset for the tracking generator level. Thus, for exam-
ple, attenuators or amplifiers at the output of the tracking generator can be taken into
account for the setting.

Parameters:
<Offset> Range: -200 dB to +200 dB
*RST: 0dB
Example: SOUR:POW:OFFS -10dB
Sets the level offset of the tracking generator to – 20 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Power Offset" on page 454
See "Power Offset" on page 457
SOURce<n>:POWer:MODE <Mode>
This command turns the power sweep on and off.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<Mode> FIXed
Power sweep is off.
SWEep
Power sweep is on.
If the power sweep is on, the R&S FSVA/FSV enters the time
domain (span = 0 Hz). During the sweep time, the power at the
internal tracking generator is changed linearly from start power
to stop power. The start and stop power for the power sweep are
displayed in the diagram header ("INT TG <start power>… <stop
power>").
*RST: FIXed
Example: SOUR:POW:MODE SWE
Activates power sweep.
Manual operation: See "Power Sweep (On /Off)" on page 448
SOURce<n>:POWer:STARt <Power>
This command defines the start power of the power sweep.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<Power> Range: -30 dBm to +5 dBm
*RST: 0 dBm
Example: SOUR:POW:STAR -20dBm


Manual operation: See "Power Sweep Start" on page 449
SOURce<n>:POWer:STOP <Power>
This command defines the stop power of the power sweep. The stop value can be
smaller than the start value.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Parameters:
<Power> Range: -30 dBm to +5 dBm
*RST: 0 dBm
Example: SOUR:POW:STOP -20dBm
Manual operation: See "Power Sweep Stop" on page 449
5.3.3.17 STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem
The STATus subsystem contains the commands for the status reporting system (for
details refer to Chapter 5.1.6, "Status Reporting System", on page 557). *RST does not
influence the status registers.
The STATus:QUEStionable subsystem contains information about the observance
of limits during adjacent power measurements, the reference and local oscillator, the
observance of limit lines and limit margins and possible overloads of the unit.
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?.......................................................................864
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?...................................................................864
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle........................................................................ 864
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition.................................................................. 865
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition.................................................................. 865
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:CONDition?.......................................................................... 865
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ[:EVENt]?.............................................................................. 865
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:ENABle................................................................................ 866
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:NTRansition..........................................................................866
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:PTRansition.......................................................................... 866
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?.............................................................. 866
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle.................................................................... 866
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?.................................................................. 867
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition..............................................................867
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition.............................................................. 867
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m> [:EVENt]?......................................................................867
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:CONDition?...................................................................868
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:ENABle........................................................................ 868
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:NTRansition.................................................................. 868
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:PTRansition.................................................................. 869

STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>[:EVENt]?................................................................ 869
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:CONDition?............................................................ 869
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:ENABle.................................................................. 870
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:NTRansition............................................................870
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:PTRansition............................................................871
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?......................................................................... 871
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?..................................................................... 871
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle........................................................................... 871
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition.....................................................................872
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition..................................................................... 872
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?........................................................................... 872
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition?....................................................................... 872
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:ENABle............................................................................. 873
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition.......................................................................873
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition.......................................................................873
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the "EVENt" part of the
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register. Readout deletes the contents of the
"EVENt" part.
Example: STAT:QUES:ACPL?
Usage: Query only
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the "CONDition" part of the
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register (see "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit
Register" on page 564). Readout does not delete the contents of the "CONDition" part.
Example: STAT:QUES:ACPL:COND?
Usage: Query only
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle <BitDefinition>
This command sets the bits of the "ENABle" part of the
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register. The "ENABle" register selectively ena-
bles the individual events of the associated "EVENt" part for the summary bit.
Parameters:
<BitDefinition> 0 to 65535
Example: STAT:QUES:ACPL:ENAB 65535
Mode: all

STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition <BitDefinition>
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the
"CONDition" bit.
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:ACPL:NTR 65535
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the
"CONDition" bit.
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:ACPL:PTR 65535
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register for IQ measurements (see "STATus:QUES-
tionable:DIQ Register" on page 565). Readout does not delete the contents of the
"CONDition" part.
Example: STAT:QUES:DIQ:COND?
Usage: Query only
Mode: IQ
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register for IQ measurements.
Readout deletes the contents of the "EVENt" part.
Example: STAT:QUES:DIQ?
Usage: Query only
Mode: IQ

STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:ENABle <Enable>
Setting parameters:
<Enable> numeric value
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:NTRansition <NTransition>
Setting parameters:
<NTransition> numeric value
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:PTRansition <PTranstion>
Setting parameters:
<PTranstion> numeric value
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register (see "STATus:QUEStionable:FRE-
Quency Register" on page 566). Readout does not delete the contents of the "CONDi-
tion" part.
Example: STAT:QUES:FREQ:COND?
Usage: Query only
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register. The "ENABle" register selectively
enables the individual events of the associated "EVENt" part for the summary bit.
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:FREQ:ENAB 65535
Mode: all

STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register.
Example: STAT:QUES:FREQ?
Usage: Query only
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the
"CONDition" bit.
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:FREQ:NTR 65535
Mode: all, except NF
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the
"CONDition" bit.
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:FREQ:PTR 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m> [:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register. Readout deletes the contents of the
"EVENt" part.
Suffix: .
<m> 1...4
window
For applications that do not have more than one measurement
window, the suffix <1…4> is irrelevant.
Example: STAT:QUES:LIM?
Usage: Query only

Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register (see "STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register"
on page 566).
Readout does not delete the contents of the "CONDition" part.
Suffix: .
<m> 1...4
window
Example: STAT:QUES:LIM:COND?
Usage: Query only
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:ENABle <BitDefinition>
This command sets the bits of the "ENABle" part of the STATus:QUEStionable reg-
ister. The "ENABle" register selectively enables the individual events of the associated
"EVENt" part for the summary bit.
Suffix: .
<m> 1...4
window
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:LIM:ENAB 65535
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:NTRansition <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the "CONDi-
tion" bit.
Suffix: .
<m> 1...4
window
window, the suffix is irrelevant.

Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:LIM:NTR 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:PTRansition <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the "CONDi-
tion" bit.
Suffix: .
<m> 1...4
window
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:LIM:PTR 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register. Readout deletes the contents of the
"EVENt" part.
Suffix: .
<m> 1...4
window
Example: STAT:QUES:LMAR?
Usage: Query only
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register (see "STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin
Register" on page 567). Readout does not delete the contents of the "CONDition" part.

Suffix: .
<m> 1...4
window
Example: STAT:QUES:LMAR:COND?
Usage: Query only
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:ENABle <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register. The "ENABle" register selectively ena-
bles the individual events of the associated "EVENt" part for the summary bit.
Suffix: .
<m> 1...4
window
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:LMAR:ENAB 65535
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:NTRansition <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the
"CONDition" bit.
Suffix: .
<m> 1...4
window
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:LMAR:NTR 65535
Mode: all

STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:PTRansition <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the
"CONDition" bit.
Suffix: .
<m> 1...4
window
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:LMAR:PTR 65535
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register. Readout deletes the contents of the
"EVENt" part.
Example: STAT:QUES:POW?
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register (see "STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Regis-
ter" on page 568). Readout does not delete the contents of the "CONDition" part.
Example: STAT:QUES:POW:COND?
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register. The "ENABle" register selectively enables
the individual events of the associated "EVENt" part for the summary bit.
Parameters:

Example: STAT:QUES:POW:ENAB 65535

Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the "CONDi-
tion" bit.
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUE:POWS:NTR 65535
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the "CONDi-
tion" bit.
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:POW:PTR 65535
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register. For details see the description for the individ-
ual firmware applications.
Example: STAT:QUES:SYNC?
Usage: Query only
Mode: This command is required by the firmware applications only.
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register. For details see the description for the individ-
ual firmware applications.

Readout does not delete the contents of the "CONDition" part.

Example: STAT:QUES:SYNC:COND?
Usage: Query only
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:ENABle <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register. The "ENABle" register selectively enables
the individual events of the associated "EVENt" part for the summary bit.
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:SYNC:ENAB 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the "CONDi-
tion" bit.
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:SYNC:NTR 65535
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition <BitDefinition>
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the "CONDi-
tion" bit.
Parameters:
Example: STAT:QUES:SYNC:PTR 65535
5.3.3.18 SYSTem Subsystem
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:COMMand.......................................................... 874
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:ADDRess..........................874
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:INTerface.................................. 875
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:LINK..........................................875
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:TYPE........................................ 876

SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:DEFine......................................................876
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:CONFigure:AUTO[:STATe]......................... 877
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:COUNt?.................................................... 878
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:ADDRess.........................878
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume............................................................................................ 878
SYSTem:TIME:TSTamp?................................................................................................879
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:COMMand <GPIBAddress>, <Command>

.This command sends a command or query string to the external generator connected
via the GPIB interface.
Generator) is installed.
Parameters:
<GPIBAddress>, <0…30>: GPIB address of the external generator connected via
<Command> the GPIB interface.
<command>: String with the command. Only basic I/O is possi-
ble.
Example: "SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEF:COMM 18,'*RST'"
Resets generator.
"SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEF:COMM 18,'SOURCE:FREQ:CW
2E9'"
Sets generator frequency to 2 GHz.
"SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEF:COMM 18,'SOUR:POW 0'"
Sets generator power to 0dBm.
"SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEF:COMM? 18,'SENS:POW?'"
Queries the generator power.
Mode: A
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:ADDRess
<Number>
Changes the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the external tracking generator.
Suffix: .
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
Parameters:
<Number> Range: 0 to 30
*RST: 28
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEV:GEN1:ADDR 15
Mode: A, NF

SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:INTerface <Type>
Defines the interface used for the connection to the external tracking generator.
Suffix: .
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
Parameters:
<Type> GPIB | TCPip
*RST: GPIB
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN1:INT TCP
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "Interface" on page 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:LINK <Type>
This command selects the link type of the external generator if the GPIB interface is
used.
The difference between the two GPIB operating modes is the execution speed. While,
during GPIB operation, each frequency to be set is transmitted to the generator sepa-
rately, a whole frequency list can be programmed in one go if the TTL interface is also
used. Frequency switching can then be performed per TTL handshake which results in
considerable speed advantages.
Notes: Only one of the two generators can be operated via the TTL interface at a time.
The other generator must be configured via GPIB.
For Noise Figure measurements (K30), TTL synchronization has no effect.
Suffix: .
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator

Parameters:
<Type> GPIB | TTL
GPIB
GPIB connection without TTL synchronization (for all generators
of other manufacturers and some Rohde & Schwarz devices)
TTL
GPIB connection with TTL synchronization (if available; for most
Rohde&Schwarz devices)
*RST: GPIB
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN:LINK TTL
Selects GPIB + TTL interface for generator operation.
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "TTL Synchronization" on page 459
See "Address" on page 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:TYPE <Name>
This command selects the type of external generator. For a list of the available genera-
tor types including the associated interface, see Chapter 4.6.2.1, "Overview of Genera-
tors Supported by the R&S FSVA/FSV", on page 451.
If no external generator type is currently configured, the query returns "NONE".
Suffix: .
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
Parameters:
<Name> Generator name | NONE
*RST: NONE
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN2:TYPE 'SME02'
Selects SME02 as generator 2
Mode: A, NF
Manual operation: See "Type" on page 458
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:DEFine <Placeholder>, <Type>,

<Interface>, <SerialNo>
This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the
selected power sensor index (configuration).
The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the sensor assigned to
the specified index.

Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Setting parameters:
<Placeholder> Currently not evaluated
<SerialNo> Serial number of a connected power sensor
Query parameters:
<Type> The power sensor type, e.g. "NRP-Z81".
<Interface> Currently not evaluated
Return values:
<Placeholder> Currently not used
<Type> Detected power sensor type, e.g. "NRP-Z81".
<Interface> Interface the power sensor is connected to; always "USB"
<SerialNo> Serial number of the power sensor assigned to the specified
index
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET2:DEF '','NRP-Z81','',
'123456'
Assigns the power sensor with the serial number '123456' to the
configuration "Power Sensor 2".
SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET2:DEF?
Queries the sensor assigned to "Power Sensor 2".
Result:
'','NRP-Z81','USB','123456'
The NRP-Z81 power sensor with the serial number '123456' is
assigned to the "Power Sensor 2".
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Power Sensor Assignment" on page 516
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:CONFigure:AUTO[:STATe] <State>
This command defines whether the selected power sensor index is automatically
assigned to a subsequently connected power sensor. See also "Power Sensor Assign-
ment" on page 516.
Suffix: .
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET:CONF:AUTO OFF
Mode: ALL

SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:COUNt?
This command queries the number of power sensors currently connected to the
R&S FSVA/FSV.
Suffix: .
 1...4
irrelevant
Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET:COUN?
Usage: Query only
Mode: ALL
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:ADDRess
<Address>
Configures the TCP/IP address for the external tracking generator 1 or 2.
Suffix: .
<generator> 1|2
tracking generator
Parameters:
<Address> TCP/IP address between 0.0.0.0 and 0.255.255.255
*RST: 0.0.0.0
Example: SYST:COMM:TCP:RDEV:GEN1:ADDR 130.094.122.195
Mode: A
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume <Volume>
This command defines the volume of the built-in loudspeaker for demodulated signals.
The command is available with the audio demodulator (option R&S FSV-B3) and in the
time domain in Spectrum mode.
Parameters:
<Volume> Range: 0 to 1
*RST: 0.5
Example: SYST:SPE:VOL 0
Switches the loudspeaker to mute.

SYSTem:TIME:TSTamp?
This command queries the time and date from the internal real time clock.
Return values:
<TimeStamp>
Example: SYST:TIME:TSTamp?
Usage: Query only
5.3.3.19 TRACe Subsystem
The TRACe subsystem controls access to the instruments internal trace memory.
Some applications offer up to four measurement windows. For those, the suffix <n> for
TRACe selects the measurement window. For all other applications, the suffix is irrele-
vant.
The TRACe subsystem contains the following subsystem:

Some further information on working with IQ data is provided here:
● Chapter 4.5.6, "Working with I/Q Data", on page 438
● "I/Q Gating" on page 896
Commands of the TRACe subsystem.........................................................................879
TRACe:IQ Subsystem.................................................................................................883
I/Q Gating....................................................................................................................896
Commands of the TRACe subsystem
TRACe<n>:COPY <TraceNumber>, <TraceNumber>

This command copies data from one trace to another.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<TraceNumber>, TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6,
<TraceNumber> TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
The first argument is the destination of the data to be copied, the
second argument describes the source.
Example: TRAC:COPY TRACE1,TRACE2
Manual operation: See "Copy Trace" on page 224

TRACe<n>[:DATA]? <ResultType>
This command returns the current trace data or measurement results. In case of sev-
eral result displays, you have to use specific parameters to query the results.
The data format is variable. You can set it with FORMat[:DATA] on page 922. For
more information on data formats see Chapter 5.3.3.22, "Formats for Returned Values:
ASCII Format and Binary Format", on page 905.
For details on saving and recalling data refer to Chapter 5.3.4.7, "MMEMory Subsys-
tem", on page 928.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window; For applications that have only one measurement
screen, the suffix is irrelevant.
Query parameters:
<ResultType> TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6 |
SPECtrogram | SGRam | LIST | SPURious
Selects the type of result to be returned.
TRACE1 | ...| TRACE6
The query returns a list of results with one value for each sweep
point in the currently set level unit.
For details see Table 5-20
LIST
Returns the results of the list evaluation of the Spectrum Emis-
sion Mask and Spurious Emissions measurement (Spectrum
mode only). For a description of the syntax see Table 5-21
below.
SPURious
Returns the peak list of the Spurious Emissions measurement
(Spectrum mode only)
SPECtrogram | SGRam
Returns the complete spectogram trace data (requires
R&S FSV-K14 option).
For details see Table 5-22.
Example: TRAC? TRACE1
Returns the trace data for Trace 1.
Usage: Query only
Mode: A, ADEMOD, BT, NF, PHN, TDS
Manual operation: See "List Evaluation (On/Off)" on page 322
See "List Evaluation (On/Off)" on page 352

Table 5-20: Results for <TRACe...> ResultTypes
The query returns a list of results with one value for each sweep point in the currently set level unit. By
default, the list contains 691 values. The currently used number of sweep points can be determined using
SWE:POIN?, see [SENSe:]SWEep:POINts on page 850.
FORMat REAL,32 is used as format for binary transmission, and FORMat ASCii for ASCII transmission.
For details on formats refer to Chapter 5.3.3.22, "Formats for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary
Format", on page 905.
With the auto peak detector, only positive peak values can be read out.
In IQ Analyzer mode, if the result display configuration "Real/Imag (I/Q)" is selected, this query returns the
I values of each trace point first, then the Q values:
<result>= I1,I2,...,In, Q1,Q2,...,Qn
Table 5-21: Results for <LIST> ResultType
Using the LIST parameter, the query returns the results of the list evaluation of the Spectrum Emission
Mask and Spurious Emissions measurement (Spectrum mode only) with the following syntax:
<no>, <start>, <stop>, <rbw>, <freq>, <power abs>, <power rel>, <delta>, <limit check>, <unused1>,
<unused2>
where:
<no>: peak number
<start>: start frequency of range
<stop>: stop frequency of range
<rbw>: resolution bandwidth of range
<freq>: frequency of peak
<power abs>: absolute power in dBm of peak
<power rel>: relative power in dBc (related to the channel power) of peak
<delta>: distance to the limit line in dB (positive indicates value above the limit, fail)
<limit check>: limit fail (pass = 0, fail =1)
<unused1>: reserved (0.0)
<unused2>: reserved (0.0)
Table 5-22: Results for Spectrogram measurements
For spectrogram measurements, the query returns the complete spectogram trace data (requires
R&S FSV-K14 option). For each frame, the trace data is returned as a comma-separated list in the follow-
ing order:
<TraceDataFrame0>, <TraceDataFrame1>, ...<TraceDataFrameMinX>
where <FrameMinX> is determined by CALC:SGR:FRAM:SEL MIN (see also example below)
The trace data for each frame corresponds to the syntax described for the <TRACe> result type.
To calculate the amount of returned values for <SPECtrogram> results:
CALC:SGR:FRAM:SEL MIN
CALC:SGR:FRAM:SEL? //returns value <FrameMinX>, e.g. -34
SWE:POIN? //returns number of sweep points, e.g. 691
TRACE:DATA? SGR
//returns 34*691 = 25494 comma separated values for the spectrogram

TRACe<n>[:DATA] <Trace>, <Data>

The command transfers trace data from a control computer to the R&S FSVA/FSV.
The transfer of trace data into the R&S FSVA/FSV memory is available only in spec-
trum analyzer mode.
The data format is variable. You can set it with FORMat[:DATA] on page 922. For
more information on data formats see Chapter 5.3.3.22, "Formats for Returned Values:
ASCII Format and Binary Format", on page 905.
For details on saving and recalling data refer to Chapter 5.3.4.7, "MMEMory Subsys-
tem", on page 928.
Suffix: .
<n> Sets the screen number you want to apply the command to.
For applications that have only one measurement screen, the
suffix is irrelevant.
Parameters:
<Trace> TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
Selects the trace you want to write data to.
Setting parameters:
<Data> Defines the data you want to transfer.
Example: TRAC TRACe1, +A$
A$ is a placeholder for the data list in the current format.
Usage: Setting only
Mode: A
TRACe<n>[:DATA]:MEMory? <Trace>,<OffsSwPoint>,<NoOfSwPoints>
This command queries the previously acquired trace data for the specified trace from
the memory. As an offset and number of sweep points to be retrieved can be specified,
the trace data can be retrieved in smaller portions, making the command faster than
the TRAC:DATA? command. This is useful if only specific parts of the trace data are of
interest.
If no parameters are specified with the command, the entire trace data is retrieved; in
this case, the command is identical to TRAC:DATA? TRACE1
For details on the returned values see the TRAC:DATA? <TRACE...> command.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
Query parameters:
<Trace> TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
<OffsSwPoint> The offset in sweep points related to the start of the measure-
ment at which data retrieval is to start.
<NoOfSwPoints> Number of sweep points to be retrieved from the trace.

Example: TRAC:DATA:MEM? TRACE1,25,100

Retrieves 100 sweep points from trace 1, starting at sweep point
25.
Usage: Query only
TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? <TraceNumber>
This command reads the x-values of the selected trace.
Suffix: .
<n> 1...4
window; For applications that have only one measurement
screen, the suffix is irrelevant.
Query parameters:
<TraceNumber> TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6
Trace number
Example: TRACe:DATA:X? TRACE1
Returns the x-values for trace 1.
Usage: Query only
TRACe:IQ Subsystem
The commands of this subsystem are used for acquisition and output of measured IQ
data.
Some further information on working with IQ data is provided here:
● Chapter 4.5.6, "Working with I/Q Data", on page 438
● "I/Q Gating" on page 896
Different remote modes available

In remote control, two different modes for the I/Q analyzer functions are available. A
quick mode for pure data acquisition, and a more sophisticated mode for acquisition
and evaluation. The sophisticated evaluation mode can be enabled by a special com-
mand (see TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL on page 891). In the quick data acquisition mode,
which is activated by default with the TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe] command, the new vis-
ualization functions are not available; however, performance is slightly improved.
The measurement results are output in the form of a list, three different formats can be
selected for this list (TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:FORMat command).
The FORMat command can be used to select between binary output (32 bit IEEE 754
floating-point values) and output in ASCII format.
For details on formats refer to Formats for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary
Format.

Different procedures
The commands of this subsystem can be used in two ways:
● Measurement and result query with one command:
This method causes the least delay between measurement and output of the result
data, but it requires the control computer to wait actively for the response data.
● Setting up the instrument, start of the measurement via INIT and query of the result
list at the end of the measurement:
With this method, the control computer can be used for other activities during the
measurement. However, the additional time needed for synchronization via service
request must be taken into account.
TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe]................................................................................................... 884
TRACe<n>:IQ:AVERage:COUNt..................................................................................... 885
TRACe<n>:IQ:AVERage[:STATe]....................................................................................885
TRACe<n>:IQ:BWIDth....................................................................................................886
TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA...................................................................................................... 886
TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:FORMat......................................................................................... 887
TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:MEMory?....................................................................................... 888
TRACe<n>:IQ:DIQFilter..................................................................................................889
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe.................................................................................................... 890
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:GAP............................................................................................ 890
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:LENGth........................................................................................890
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:NOFgateperiods............................................................................891
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:TYPE...........................................................................................891
TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL.......................................................................................................891
TRACe<n>:IQ:RLENgth..................................................................................................892
TRACe<n>:IQ:SET.........................................................................................................893
TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe.................................................................................................... 895
TRACe<n>:IQ:TPISample?............................................................................................. 895
TRACe:IQ:WBANd[:STATe]............................................................................................ 895
TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe] <State>
This command switches the I/Q data acquisition on or off.
I/Q data acquisition is not compatible with other measurement functions. Therefore, all
other measurement functions are switched off as soon as the I/Q measurement func-
tion is switched on. The trace display is also switched off by this command. Therefore,
all traces are set to "BLANK".
To switch trace display back on, use the TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL command.
Note: to enable the evaluation functions of the IQ Analyzer, you must also execute the
command TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF

Example: TRAC:IQ ON
Switches on I/Q data acquisition
TRACe<n>:IQ:AVERage:COUNt <NumberSets>
This command defines the number of I/Q data sets that are to serve as a basis for
averaging.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<NumberSets> 0 to 32767
*RST: 0
Example: TRAC:IQ ON
Switches on acquisition of I/Q data.
TRAC:IQ:AVER ON
Enables averaging of the I/Q measurement data
TRAC:IQ:AVER:COUN 10
Selects averaging over 10 data sets
TRAC:IQ:DATA?
Starts the measurement and reads out the averaged data.
TRACe<n>:IQ:AVERage[:STATe] <State>
The command enables averaging of the recorded I/Q data, provided that I/Q data
acquisition was previously enabled with TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe] on page 884.
With I/Q data averaging enabled, the maximum amount of I/Q data is limited to 512kS
(524288 complex samples).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: TRAC:IQ ON
Switches on acquisition of I/Q data.
TRAC:IQ:AVER ON
Enables averaging of the I/Q measurement data.
TRAC:IQ:AVER:COUN 10
Selects averaging over 10 data sets.
TRAC:IQ:DATA?
Starts the measurement and reads out the averaged data.

TRACe<n>:IQ:BWIDth
This command queries the flat, usable filter bandwidth of the final I/Q data.
The bandwidth depends on the defined user sample rate and the defined signal source
(RF/Digital IQ), see also Figure 4-37. This value can not be changed by the user.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: TRAC:IQ:BWID?
Manual operation: See "Filter BW" on page 416
See "Maximum Bandwidth" on page 416
TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA
This command starts a measurement with the settings defined via TRACe<n>:IQ:SET
and returns the list of measurement results (I/Q samples) immediately after they are
corrected in terms of frequency response. The number of measurement results
depends on the settings defined with TRACe<n>:IQ:SET, the output format depends
on the settings of the FORMat subsystem. The format of the data list is defined by the
command TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:FORMat.
The command requires all response data to be read out completely before the instru-
ment accepts further commands.
The result values are scaled linearly in Volts and correspond to the voltage at the RF
or digital input of the instrument. The number of the returned values is 2 * the number
of samples.
Note: Using the command with the *RST values for the TRACe<n>:IQ:SET com-
mand, the following minimum buffer sizes for the response data are recommended:
ASCII format: 10 kBytes
Binary format: 2 kBytes
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: TRAC:IQ:STAT ON
Enables acquisition of I/Q data
TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10MHz,32MHz,EXT,POS,0,4096
Measurement configuration:
Sample Rate = 32 MHz
Trigger Source = External
Trigger Slope = Positive
Pretrigger Samples = 0
Number of Samples = 4096
FORMat REAL,32
Selects format of response data
TRAC:IQ:DATA?
Starts measurement and reads results

TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:FORMat <Format>
This command defines the transfer format of the I/Q data.
Figure 5-4: IQ data formats
Note: 512k corresponds to 524288 samples
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Format> COMPatible | IQBLock | IQPair
*RST: IQBL
For maximum performance, the formats "Compatible" or "IQPair"
should be used. Furthermore, for large amounts of data, the
data should be in binary format to improve performance.
For further details on formats refer to Chapter 5.3.3.22, "Formats
for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary Format",
on page 905 .

TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:MEMory? <OffsetSamples>,<NoOfSamples>
This command reads out previously acquired (and frequency response corrected) I/Q
data from the memory. Furthermore, the offset related to the start of measurement and
the number of I/Q samples are given. Thus, a previously acquired data set can be read
out in smaller portions. If no parameters are given, all data is read from the memory.
The maximum amount of available data depends on the settings of the TRACe<n>:
IQ:SET command, the output format on the settings in the FORMat subsystem.
The returned values are scaled linear in unit Volt and correspond to the voltage at the
RF or digital input of the instrument.
The format of the output buffer corresponds to the TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA command.
The command requires all response data to be read out completely before the instru-
ment accepts further commands.
If no I/Q data is available in memory because the corresponding measurement was not
started, the command causes a query error.
Note: For very large data amounts data processing may become very slow and for
record lengths >200 Ms, only the first 200 Ms can be retrieved using the TRACe<n>:
IQ:DATA:MEMory? command. Afterwards, the command may fail.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<OffsetSamples> Offset of the values to be read, in relation to the start of the
acquired data.
Range: 0 to <# of samples> – 1, with <# of samples> being
the value set by the "TRACe:IQ:SET" command
*RST: 0
<NoOfSamples> Number of measurement values to be read.
Range: 1 to <# of samples> - <offset samples> with <# of
samples> being the value set by the
"TRACe:IQ:SET" command
*RST: <# of samples>

Example: TRAC:IQ:STAT ON
Enables acquisition of I/Q data
TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10MHz,32MHz,EXT,POS,100,4096
Measurement configuration:
Sample Rate = 32 MHz
Trigger Source = External
Trigger Slope = Positive
Pretrigger Samples = 100
Number of Samples = 4096
INIT;*WAI
Starts measurement and wait for sync
FORMat REAL,32
Determines output format
To read the results:
TRAC:IQ:DATA:MEM?
Reads all 4096 I/Q data
TRAC:IQ:DATA:MEM? 0,2048
Reads 2048 I/Q data starting at the beginning of data acquisition
Reads 1024 I/Q data from half of the recorded data
Reads 512 I/Q data starting at the trigger point (<Pretrigger
Samples> was 100)
Usage: Query only
TRACe<n>:IQ:DIQFilter <State>
This command is only available when using the Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSV-
B17).
By default, a decimation filter is used during data acquisition to reduce the sample rate
to the value defined using TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe.
If the filter is bypassed, the sample rate is identical to the input sample rate configured
for the Digital I/Q input source (see INPut:DIQ:SRATe on page 755).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
The digital I/Q filter bypass is on, i.e. no filter or resampler is
used during I/Q data acquisition.
OFF
The filter bypass is off, i.e. decimation filter and resampler are
used during I/Q data acquisition.
*RST: OFF
Example: TRAC:IQ:DIQF ON

Mode: IQ
Manual operation: See "No Filter" on page 416
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe <State>
Activates or deactivates the gate function for IQ data measurements. This command is
only valid for TRAC:IQ ON and trigger modes "EXT" and "IFP". The gate trigger is
specified using TRACe<n>:IQ:SET on page 893. For details see "I/Q Gating"
on page 896.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT: ON
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:GAP <Samples>
Defines the interval between several gate periods in samples. For details see "I/Q Gat-
ing" on page 896.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Samples> <numeric value>
Max = MaxPreTriggerSamples * 128 MHz/sample rate
pretrigger samples defined by TRACe<n>:IQ:SET;
sample rate defined by TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe)
Range: 1...Max (samples)
*RST: 100
Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT:GAP 2
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:LENGth <GateLength>
Defines the gate length in samples in edge mode. For details see "I/Q Gating"
on page 896.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

Parameters:
<GateLength> <numeric value>
Max = MaxPreTriggerSamples * 128 MHz/sample rate
pretrigger samples defined by TRACe<n>:IQ:SET;
sample rate defined by TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe)
Range: 1...Max (samples)
*RST: 100
Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT:LENG 2000
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:NOFgateperiods <Number>
Defines the number of gate periods after a trigger signal. For details see "I/Q Gating"
on page 896.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Number> 1...1023
*RST: 1
Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT:NOF 2
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:TYPE <Type>
Specifies the gate trigger type used for data collection. For details see "I/Q Gating"
on page 896.
Note: Using gating with gate mode "level" and an IFP trigger ( TRIGger<n>[:
SEQuence]:SOURce), the holdoff time for the IFP trigger (see TRIGger<n>[:
SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff on page 898) is ignored.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Type> LEVel | EDGE
*RST: EDGE
Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT:TYPE LEV
TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL <State>
This command enables or disables the IQ data evaluation mode and is a prerequisite
for the IQ Analyzer functions.

Before this command can be executed, IQ data acquistion must be enabled (see
TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe] on page 884). This command automatically disables the IQ
data evaluation mode to provide optimum performance for IQ-data acquisition.
If you start the IQ Analyzer manually by selecting the "IQ Analyzer" mode in the
R&S FSVA/FSV, or use the CALCulate<n>:FORMat command, the IQ data evalua-
tion mode is automatically activated.
The maximum number of samples for RF input is 200 MS. For details see Chap-
ter 4.5.6, "Working with I/Q Data", on page 438.
For digital input see Table 4-14.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
all functions of the IQ Analyzer are available
OFF
no traces or marker operations are available; IQ data can only
be captured, but with a better performance than in active IQ data
evaluation mode
*RST: OFF
Example: TRAC:IQ ON
Enables IQ data acquisition
TRAC:IQ:EVAL ON
Enables the IQ data evaluation mode.
TRACe<n>:IQ:RLENgth <NoOfSamples>
This command sets the record length for the acquired I/Q data. Increasing the record
length automatically also increases the measurement time.
Note: Alternatively, you can define the measurement time using the SENS:SWE:TIME
command.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

Parameters:
<NoOfSamples> Number of measurement values to record.
For digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSVB17)
the valid number of samples is described in Table 4-14.
If the I/Q bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 is activa-
ted, the maximum number of samples is described in Chap-
ter 4.5.6.2, "Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth (RF
Input)", on page 440.
Range: 1 ... 209715200(= 200*1024*1024);
*RST: 691
Example: TRAC:IQ:RLEN 256
Manual operation: See "Record Length" on page 417
TRACe<n>:IQ:SET NORM,<Placeholder>, <SampleRate>, <TriggerMode>,

<TriggerSlope>, <PretriggerSamp>, <NumberSamples>
This command defines the settings of the R&S FSVA/FSV hardware for the measure-
ment of I/Q data. This allows setting the sample rate, trigger conditions and the record
length.
If this command is omitted, the current instrument settings are used for the correspond-
ing parameters.
This command switches to IQ mode automatically (see also TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe]
on page 884).
The trigger level can be set using the TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce command.
Note: When using the default settings with the TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA command, the
following minimum buffer sizes for the response data are recommended: ASCII format
10 kBytes, Binary format 2 kBytes.
mode), use the TRACe<n>:IQ:TPISample? on page 895 command.
Parameters:
NORM is not evaluated, but must be inserted
<Placeholder> numeric value
is not evaluated, but must be inserted
<SampleRate> Sample rate of the I/Q data (user sample rate). See Chap-
Input)", on page 440 for possible values.
For digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSVA/
FSVB17) the valid sample rates are described in Table 4-14

<TriggerMode> IMMediate | EXTernal | IFPower | BBPower | PSE

Selection of the trigger source used for the measurement.
For details on trigger sources, see "Trg/Gate Source"
on page 238.
For IMM mode, gating is automatically deactivated.
*RST: IMM
<TriggerSlope> POSitive | NEGative
Used trigger slope.
*RST: POS
<PretriggerSamp> Defines the trigger offset in terms of pretrigger samples. Nega-
tive values correspond to a trigger delay.
This value also defines the interval between the trigger signal
and the gate edge in samples.
Range:
RF input without gating: 0 to (200 MS - 1)
RF input with gating: 0 to [(200 MS * SR/128 MHz)-1]
Digital input: 0 to (MaxNofSamples -1); MaxNofSamples as
defined in Table 4-15
Range: 0 to (MaxPreTriggerSamples * 128 MHz/sample
rate).
*RST: 0
<NumberSamples> Number of measurement values to record (including the pretrig-
ger samples).
For digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17)
the valid number of samples is described in Table 4-14.
If the I/Q bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 is activa-
ted, the maximum number of samples is described in Chap-
Input)", on page 440.
Range: 1 ... 209715200(= 200*1024*1024);
*RST: 128
Example: TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10 MHz,32 MHz,EXT,POS,0,2048
Reads 2048 I/Q-values starting at the trigger point.
sample rate = 32 MHz
trigger = External
slope = Positive
TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10 MHz,4 MHz,EXT,POS,1024,512
Reads 512 I/Q-values from 1024 measurement points before the
trigger point.
sample rate = 4 MHz
trigger = External
slope = Positive
Manual operation: See "Power Sensor" on page 240
See "Record Length" on page 417

TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe <SampleRate>
This command sets the final user sample rate for the acquired I/Q data. Thus, the sam-
ple rate can be modified without affecting the other settings.
Note: The smaller the user sample rate, the smaller the usable I/Q bandwidth, see
TRACe<n>:IQ:BWIDth on page 886.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<SampleRate> Sample rate of the I/Q data (user sample rate). See Chap-
Input)", on page 440 for possible values.
For digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSVA/
FSVB17) the valid sample rates are described in "Sample rates,
bandwidths and other limitations" in the description of the B17
option in the base unit.
*RST: 32 MHz (for R&S FSV40 model 1307.9002K39:
12.5 MHz)
Example: TRAC:IQ:SRAT 4 MHZ
Manual operation: See "Sample Rate" on page 416
TRACe<n>:IQ:TPISample?
This command determines the time offset of the trigger in the sample (trigger position
in sample = TPIS). This value can only be determined in triggered measurements
using external or IFPower triggers, otherwise the value is 0. The value is not user-
definable.
This command is not available if the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S FSV-B17 option) is
active.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: TRAC:IQ:TPIS?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Trigger Offset" on page 242
TRACe:IQ:WBANd[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates the bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160, if installed.
Sample rates higher than 128 MHz can only be achieved using the bandwidth exten-
sion.

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | FORCe160
ON
(Default) The maximum available bandwidth is used for all sam-
ple rates.
If the bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 is installed, it
is activated for bandwidths as of 64 MHz (if no other restrictions
for its use apply, see "Restrictions" on page 440).
Thus, sample rates up to 400 MHz and an I/Q bandwidth up to
160 MHz are possible.
Note that using the bandwidth extension may cause more spuri-
ous effects.
OFF
Deactivates use of the bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-
B160, thus reducing possible spurious effects, while restricting
the analysis bandwidth to 40 MHz.
FORCe160
The bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 is always used
(if no other restrictions for its use apply, see "Restrictions"
on page 440), thus raising the minimum possible sample rate to
32 MHz.
*RST: ON
Manual operation: See "Maximum Bandwidth" on page 416
I/Q Gating
Sometimes in spectrum analysis, measurements are based on a certain length of time
called the gate area. With I/Q gating, you can define the gate area using the gate
length, the distance between the periods and the number of periods. The gate length
and the distance between the capture periods are specified in samples.
I/Q gating is only available using remote commands; manual configuration is not possi-
ble.
Using I/Q gating, the gate area can be defined using the following methods:
● Edge triggered recording
After a trigger signal, the gate period is defined by a gate length and a gate dis-
tance. All data in the gate period is recorded until the required number of samples
has been recorded.

SCPI command: TRACE:IQ:EGATE:TYPE EDGE, see TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:

TYPE on page 891
● Level triggered recording
After a trigger signal, all data is recorded in which the gate signal is set to 1, which
means it has exceeded a level. In this case, the gate signal can be generated by
the IFP trigger, for example: each time the IFP level is exceeded, the IFP trigger
signal is set to 1 and the samples in this area are recorded as gate samples.
The number of complex samples to be recorded prior to the trigger event can be
selected (see TRACe<n>:IQ:SET on page 893) for all available trigger sources,
except for "Free Run".
SCPI command: TRACE:IQ:EGATE:TYPE LEV, see TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:
TYPE on page 891
5.3.3.20 TRIGger Subsystem
The TRIGger subsystem is used to synchronize instrument actions with events. It is

thus possible to control and synchronize the start of a sweep.
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME]........................................................................ 898
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:BBPower:HOLDoff.................................................................... 898
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff..................................................................... 898
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis.................................................................899
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:BBPower........................................................................ 899
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal]...................................................................... 899
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower......................................................................... 900
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower........................................................................ 900
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo............................................................................ 900

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe.....................................................................................901
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce.................................................................................. 901
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval........................................................................903
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] <Delay>
This command defines the length of the trigger delay.
A negative delay time (pretrigger) can be set in zero span only.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Delay> Range: zero span: -sweeptime (see data sheet) to 30 s;
span: 0 to 30 s
*RST: 0s
Example: TRIG:HOLD 500us
Manual operation: See "Trigger Offset" on page 242
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:BBPower:HOLDoff <Value>
This command sets the holding time before the next BB power trigger event (for digital
input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface, R&S FSV-B17).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> *RST: 150 ns
Example: TRIG:SOUR BBP
Sets the baseband power trigger source.
TRIG:BBP:HOLD 200 ns
Sets the holding time to 200 ns.
Mode: all
Manual operation: See "Trigger Holdoff" on page 243
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff <Value>
This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event.
Note: Using gating with gate mode "level" (see TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:TYPE
on page 891) and an IFP trigger (see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower
on page 900), the holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep, FFT
sweep, zero span and IQ mode measurements.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

Parameters:
<Value> *RST: 150 ns
Example: TRIG:SOUR IFP
Sets the IF power trigger source.
TRIG:IFP:HOLD 200 ns
Sets the holding time to 200 ns.
Manual operation: See "Trigger Holdoff" on page 243
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis <Value>
This command sets the limit that the hysteresis value for the IF power trigger has to fall
below in order to trigger the next measurement.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> *RST: 3 dB
Example: TRIG:SOUR IFP
Sets the IF power trigger source.
TRIG:IFP:HYST 10DB
Sets the hysteresis limit value.
Manual operation: See "Trigger Hysteresis" on page 243
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:BBPower <Level>
This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger source (for digital input via
the R&S Digital I/Q Interface, R&S FSV-B17).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Level> Range: -50 dBm to +20 dBm
*RST: -20 DBM
Example: TRIG:LEV:BB -30DBM
Mode: All
Manual operation: See "Trigger Level" on page 432
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] <TriggerLevel>
This command sets the level of the external trigger source in Volt.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

Parameters:
<TriggerLevel> Range: 0.5 V to 3.5 V
*RST: 1.4 V
Example: TRIG:LEV 2V
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower <TriggerLevel>
This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be
exceeded to cause a trigger event. Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is
considered when the trigger level is analyzed. If defined, a reference level offset is also
considered.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<TriggerLevel> *RST: -20 dBm
Example: TRIG:LEV:IFP -30DBM
Manual operation: See "Trg/Gate Level" on page 241
See "Trigger Level" on page 432
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower <TriggerLevel>
This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be
exceeded to cause a trigger event. Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is
considered when the trigger level is analyzed. If defined, a reference level offset is also
considered.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<TriggerLevel> *RST: -20 dBm
Example: TRIG:LEV:RFP -30dBm
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <Value>
This command sets the level of the video trigger source.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> 0 to 100 PCT
*RST: 50 PCT
Example: TRIG:LEV:VID 50PCT
Manual operation: See "Trg/Gate Level" on page 241
See "Trigger Level" on page 432

TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe <Type>
This command selects the slope of the trigger signal. The selected trigger slope
applies to all trigger signal sources.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Type> POSitive | NEGative
*RST: POSitive
Example: TRIG:SLOP NEG
Manual operation: See "Trg/Gate Polarity" on page 242
See "Trigger Polarity" on page 432
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the trigger source.
Note: Using gating with gate mode "level" ( TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:TYPE
on page 891/[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE) and an IFP trigger, the holdoff time for
the IFP trigger (see TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] on page 898) is
ignored for frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span and IQ mode measurements.
When triggering or gating is activated, the squelch function is automatically disabled
(see [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe]).
For details on trigger modes refer to "Trg/Gate Source" on page 238.
For details on trigger modes refer to the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey in the base unit
description.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

Parameters:
<Source> IMMediate
Free Run
EXTern
External trigger
IFPower
Power trigger at the second intermediate frequency
RFPower
Power trigger at the first intermediate frequency
GP0 | GP1 | GP2 | GP3 | GP4 | GP5
Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS
connector. The parameter specifies which general purpose bit (0
to 5) will provide the trigger data.
This trigger mode is available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q
Interface (option R&S FSV-B17) only.
The assignment of the general purpose bits used by the Digital
IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in Table 5-23
(See also Table 4-20).
VIDeo
Video mode is only available in the time domain and only in
Spectrum mode.
BBPower
Baseband power (for digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Inter-
face, R&S FSV-B17)
PSEN
External power sensor (requires R&S FSV-K9 option)
*RST: IMMediate
Example: TRIG:SOUR EXT
Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal
Manual operation: See "Trg/Gate Source" on page 238
See "Free Run" on page 238
See "External" on page 238
See "Video" on page 239
See "RF Power" on page 239
See "IF Power/BB Power" on page 239
See "Power Sensor" on page 240
See "Time" on page 241
See "Digital IQ" on page 241
Bit LVDS pin

Bit LVDS pin
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval <Interval>
This command sets the repetition interval for the time trigger source.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Interval> 2.0 ms to 5000
*RST: 1.0
Example: TRIG:SOUR TIME
Selects the time trigger input for triggering.
TRIG:TIME:RINT 50
The sweep starts every 50 s.
Mode: All
Manual operation: See "Repetition Interval" on page 242
5.3.3.21 UNIT Subsystem
The UNIT subsystem sets the basic unit of the setting parameters.
UNIT<n>:POWer <Unit>
This command selects the default unit.
The unit is the same for al measurementl windows.
Parameters:
<Unit> DBM | V | A | W | DBPW | WATT | DBPT | DBUV | DBMV |
VOLT | DBUA | AMPere
*RST: DBM
Example: UNIT:POW DBUV
Sets the power unit to dBm.
UNIT<n>:PMETer:POWer <Unit>
This command selects the unit for absolute power sensor measurement for the
selected sensor.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<Unit> DBM | WATT | W
*RST: DBM
Example: UNIT:PMET:POW DBM
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Unit / Scale" on page 518
UNIT<n>:PMETer:POWer:RATio <Unit>
This command selects the unit for relative power sensor measurement for the selected
sensor.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
 1...4
Power sensor index
Parameters:
<Unit> DB | PCT
*RST: DB
Example: UNIT:PMET:POW:RAT DB
Mode: PSM
Manual operation: See "Unit / Scale" on page 518
UNIT:THD <Mode>
Selects the unit for THD measurements.
Parameters:
<Mode> DB | PCT
*RST: DB
Example: UNIT:THD PCT
Mode: ADEMOD, SFM

5.3.3.22 Formats for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary Format
ASCII Format (FORMat ASCII)

The command reads out a list of comma separated values (CSV) of the measured val-
ues in floating point format.
Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format. Thus, binary format
is recommended for large amounts of data.
Binary Format (FORMat REAL,32)

The command reads out binary data (Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE
488.2), each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating-Point-
Format.
Depending on the number of samples to be transferred, 2 different kinds of syntax are
used:
For <1010 samples:
The schema of the result string is as follows:
#<NoOfDigits><NoOfDataBytes><value1><value2>…<value n>, with
# Header prefix, 1 byte
<NoOfDigits> Number of digits of the following number of data bytes (= 4 in the example), 1 byte
<NoOfDataBytes> Number of following data bytes in decimal form (= 1024 in the example), 1...9 bytes
<Value> Data values, each one is a 4-byte floating point value
Example:
#41024<value1><value2>…<value 256>
4: the following number of data bytes has 4 digits
1024: 1024 Bytes of following data; float: 4 Bytes / value => 1024 / 4 = 256 values (128
I and 128 Q values)
<value x>: 4 Byte values, must be interpreted as float
For ≧1010 samples:
The schema of the result string is as follows:
#(<NoOfDataBytes>)<value1><value2>…<value n>, with
# Header prefix, 1 byte
( 1 byte
<NoOfDataBytes> number of following data bytes (= 1024 in the example), 10 bytes

) 1 byte
<Value> Data values, each one is a 4-byte floating point value
Example:
#(1677721600)<value 1><value 2> ... <value 419430400>
(1677721600): 1677721600 Bytes of following data; float: 4 Bytes / value ==>
1677721600/ 4 = 419430400 values (200Ms I and 200Ms Q values)
<value x>: 4 Byte values, must be interpreted as float
5.3.4 Remote Control – Description of Measurement-Independant Com-

mands
In this section all remote control commands that are independant of a particular mea-
surement mode are described in detail.
For details on specific "Spectrum" mode commands refer to Chapter 5.3.3, "Remote
Control – Description of Analyzer Commands", on page 604.
5.3.4.1 CALibration Subsystem...............................................................................................906
5.3.4.2 DIAGnostic Subsystem............................................................................................... 908
5.3.4.3 DISPlay Subsystem.................................................................................................... 915
5.3.4.4 CMAP Suffix Assignment............................................................................................ 920
5.3.4.5 FORMat Subsytem......................................................................................................922
5.3.4.6 HCOPy Subsystem..................................................................................................... 922
5.3.4.7 MMEMory Subsystem................................................................................................. 928
5.3.4.8 OUTPut Subsystem (Option Additional Interfaces, B5).............................................. 942
5.3.4.9 SENSe Subsystem......................................................................................................942
SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem..................................................................................946
5.3.4.10 SOURce Subsystem................................................................................................... 947
SOURce:TEMPerature Subsystem.............................................................................947
SOURce:EXTernal Subsystem................................................................................... 948
5.3.4.11 STATus Subsystem.................................................................................................... 948
5.3.4.12 SYSTem Subsystem................................................................................................... 952
5.3.4.1 CALibration Subsystem
The commands of the CALibration subsystem determine the data for system error cor-
rection in the instrument.

CALibration:ABORt........................................................................................................ 907
CALibration[:ALL]?......................................................................................................... 907
CALibration:RESult?.......................................................................................................907
CALibration:STATe........................................................................................................ 908
CALibration:ABORt
This command aborts the current calibration routine.
Example: CAL:ABORt
Aborts calibration.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
CALibration[:ALL]?
This command initiates a calibration routine and queries if calibration was successful.
During the acquisition of correction data the instrument does not accept any remote
control commands.
In order to recognize when the acquisition of correction data is completed, the MAV bit
in the status byte can be used. If the associated bit is set in the Service Request
Enable Register, the instrument generates a service request after the acquisition of
correction data has been completed.
Return values:
<CalibrationState> 0
The command returns a '0' if calibration was successful.
Example: *CLS
Resets the status management.
*SRE 16
Enables MAV bit in the Service Request Enable Register.
*CAL?
Starts the correction data recording, and then a service request
is generated.
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
CALibration:RESult?
This command returns the results collected during calibration.
Return values:
<CalibrationData> String containing the calibration data.

Example: CAL:RES?
would return, e.g.
Total Calibration Status:
PASSED, Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 12/07/2004,
Time: 16:24:54,Runtime: 00.06
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Show Align Results" on page 145
CALibration:STATe <State>
This command includes or excludes calibration data in the actual measurement.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
Example: CAL:STAT OFF
Sets up the instrument to ignore the calibration data.
5.3.4.2 DIAGnostic Subsystem
The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands which support instrument diagnos-
tics for maintenance, service and repair. In accordance with the SCPI standard, all of
these commands are device-specific.
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:BIOSinfo?.................................................................................908
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:HWINfo?.................................................................................. 909
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency.......................................................909
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:MCFRequency.................................................... 910
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:WBFRequency....................................................910
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:WB2Frequency................................................... 910
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect].......................................................................... 911
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:NSOurce.................................................................................. 912
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction................................................................................912
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult?............................................................. 912
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete........................................................913
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE..........................................................913
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:STESt:RESult?......................................................................... 913
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:TEMPerature:FRONt?............................................................... 913
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:VERSinfo?................................................................................914
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:BIOSinfo?
This command queries the CPU board BIOS version.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Return values:
<Version> ASCII string containing the BIOS version, e.g. 47.11.

Example: DIAG:SERV:BIOS?
Returns the BIOS version.
Usage: Query only
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:HWINfo?
This command queries the hardware information.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Return values:
<HardwareInfo> "<component 1>|<serial #>|<order #>|<model>| <hardware
code>|<revision>|<subrevision>",
"<component 2>|<serial #>|<order #>|<model>| <hardware
code>|<revision>|<subrevision>",
...
Table lines are output as string data and are separated by com-
mas. The individual columns of the table are separated from
each other by |.
Example: DIAG:SERV:HWIN?
Queries the hardware information.
"FRONTEND|100001/003|1300.3009|03|01|00|00",
"MOTHERBOARD|123456/002|1300.3080|02|00|00|00",
...
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Hardware Info" on page 158
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency of the calibration signal.
Before you can use the command, you have to feed in a calibration signal with
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 911.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Frequency> Possible frequencies of the calibration signal are fix.
If you define a frequency that is not available, the
R&S FSVA/FSV uses the next available frequency. Example: a
frequency of 20 MHz is rounded up to the next available fre-
quency (21.33 MHz).
*RST: 64 MHz
Example: DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS:CFR 128 MHz
Defines a calibration signal frequency of 128 MHz.

Manual operation: See "Calibration Frequency RF" on page 161
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:MCFRequency <Frequency>
This command sets the calibration frequency for frequencies greater than 7 GHz. This
command only takes effect if a microwave calibration signal is selected for input
(DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 911).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Frequency> <numeric value>
*RST: 7 GHz
Example: DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS:MCFR 7,1 GHz
Manual operation: See "Calibration Frequency MW" on page 161
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:WBFRequency <Frequency>
ter calibration.
This command is only available if the bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160 is
installed.
Before you can use the command, you have to feed in a calibration signal with
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 911.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Frequency> 2 MHz | 4 MHz | 8 MHz | 16 MHz
If you define a frequency that is not available, the
R&S FSVA/FSV uses the next available frequency.
*RST: 16 MHz
Example: DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS:WBFR 8 MHz
Defines a calibration signal frequency of 8 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Calibration Frequency WB" on page 161
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:WB2Frequency <Frequency>
ter calibration.

This function is only available for R&S FSVA instruments. It is independant of the
bandwidth extension option R&S FSV-B160.
Before you can use the command, you have to define the use of a calibration signal
with DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 911.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Frequency> 16 MHz | 32 MHz
*RST: 32 MHz
Example: DIAG:SERV:INP:SEL WB2
DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS:WB2F 16 MHz
Defines an internal wideband calibration signal frequency of 16
MHz.
Manual operation: See "Calibration Frequency WB2" on page 162
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] <Signal>
This command selects the source of the signal.
You can feed in a signal from the RF input or the calibration signal.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Signal> RF
RF input
CALibration
Calibration
MCALibration
Microwave calibration (for R&S FSVA/FSV 13 and 30 only)
WBCal
Broadband signal for calibration of the IF filter.
WB2Cal
Broadband signal for calibration of the IF filter (independantly of
the B160 option).
This option is only available for R&S FSVA instruments.
*RST: RF
Example: DIAG:SERV:INP CAL
Selects the calibration signal as the input signal
Manual operation: See "RF" on page 161
See "Calibration Frequency WB" on page 161
See "Calibration Frequency WB2" on page 162

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:NSOurce <State>
This command switches the 28 V supply of the noise source on the front panel on or
off.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DIAG:SERV:NSO ON
Manual operation: See "Noise Source" on page 398
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction <ServiceFunction>
This command starts a service function.
The service functions are available after you have entered the level 1 or level 2 system
password.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<ServiceFunction> String containing the ID of the service function.
The ID of the service function is made up out of five numbers,
separated by a point.
• function group number
• board number
• function number
• parameter 1 (see the Service Manual)
• parameter 2 (see the Service Manual)
Example: DIAG:SERV:SFUN '2.0.2.12.1'
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Service Function" on page 162
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult?
This command queries the results of the most recent service function you have used.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: DIAG:SERV:SFUN:LAST?
Usage: Query only

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete
This command deletes the results of the most recent service function you have used.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: DIAG:SERV:SFUN:RES:DEL
Usage: Event
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE <FileName>
This command saves the results of the most recent service function you have used in a
file.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the file name.
Example: DIAG:SERV:SFUN:RES:SAVE "C:\diag"
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:STESt:RESult?
This command queries the self test results.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Results> String of data containing the results.
The rows of the self test result table are separated by commas.
Example: DIAG:SERV:STES:RES?
would return, e.g.:
"Total Selftest Status:
PASSED", "Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 09/07/2004 TIME:
16:24:54", "Runtime: 00:06", "...
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Selftest Results" on page 162
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:TEMPerature:FRONt?
This command queries the temperature of the frontend.
Parameters:
<Temperature> Temperature of the frontend.
Example: DIAG:SERV:TEMP:FRON?
Usage: Query only

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:VERSinfo?
This command queries information about the hardware and software components.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Return values:
<Information> String containing the version of hardware and software compo-
nents including the types of licenses for installed firmware
options.
Example: DIAG:SERV:VERS?
Queries the version information.
Response:
Instrument Firmware |1.60
BIOS |5.1.22.3
Image Version |3.0
CPLD |3.0
PCI-FPGA |8.007
Data Sheet Version |01.00
Time Control Management ||active
RF Preamplifier B22| |permanent
Electronic Attenuator B25| |permanent
Frequency Extension 20 Hz B29| |permanent
40 MHz Bandwidth B70| |permanent
Analog Demod K7| |permanent
FM Stereo K7S| |permanent
Bluetooth K8| |permanent
Power Sensor Support K9| |permanent
Spectrogram K14| |permanent
Vector Signal Analysis K70|1.60|permanent
3GPP Base Station K72|1.60|permanent
3GPP Mobile Station K73|1.60|permanent
TD-SCDMA Base Station K76|1.60|permanent
TD-SCDMA Mobile Station K77|1.60|permanent
CDMA2000 Base Station K82|1.60|permanent
CDMA2000 Mobile Station K83|1.60|permanent
1xEV-DO Base Station K84|1.60|permanent
1xEV-DO Mobile Station K85|1.60|permanent
OFDM-VSA K96| |permanent
LTE FDD Downlink K100| |permanent
LTE FDD Uplink K101| |permanent
LTE Downlink MIMO K102| |permanent
LTE TDD Downlink K104| |permanent
LTE TDD Uplink K105| |permanent
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed

5.3.4.3 DISPlay Subsystem
The DISPLay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual and graphic
information as well as of measurement data on the display.
Some applications offer up to four measurement windows. For those, the suffix <1….
4> for WINDow selects the measurement window. For all other applications, the suffix
is irrelevant.
Further Information
● Chapter 5.3.4.4, "CMAP Suffix Assignment", on page 920
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency.....................................................................................915
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:DEFault........................................................................................915
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:HSL............................................................................................. 916
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:PDEFined.....................................................................................916
DISPlay:LOGO.............................................................................................................. 917
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff................................................................................................917
DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe]................................................................................................ 917
DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe].................................................................................................. 918
DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe].................................................................................................918
DISPlay:TBAR[STATe]................................................................................................... 918
DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog?............................................................................................. 918
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect................................................................................................. 918
DISPlay:TOUChscreen:STATe........................................................................................ 919
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT[:DATA]............................................................................... 919
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT:STATe............................................................................... 919
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME...........................................................................................919
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat..............................................................................920
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency <State>
This command switches the x-axis annotation on or off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:ANN:FREQ OFF
Manual operation: See "Annotation (On/Off)" on page 155
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:DEFault <Setting>
This command resets the screen colors of all display items to their default settings.
Suffix: .
<item> irrelevant

Parameters:
<Setting> 1|2
Default settings DEFault1 and DEFault2
Example: DISP:CMAP:DEF2
Selects default setting 2 for setting the colors.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Select Screen Color Set" on page 156
See "Set to Default" on page 157
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:HSL <ColorTable>
This command defines the color table of the instrument.
The set values are not changed by *RST.
Suffix: .
<item> Selects the display item. For more information see Chap-
ter 5.3.4.4, "CMAP Suffix Assignment", on page 920.
Parameters:
<ColorTable> hue | sat | lum
hue
TINT
sat
SATURATION
lum
BRIGHTNESS
The value range is 0 to 1 for all parameters.
Example: DISP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0
Changes the grid color.
Manual operation: See "Screen Colors" on page 156
See "Select Object" on page 156
See "User Defined Colors" on page 157
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:PDEFined <Color>
This command defines the color table of the instrument using predefined color values.
Each suffix of CMAP is assigned to one or several graphical elements which can be
modified by varying the corresponding color setting.
The values set are not changed by *RST.
Suffix: .
<item> Selects the display item. For more information see Chap-
ter 5.3.4.4, "CMAP Suffix Assignment", on page 920.

Parameters:
<Color> BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta |
YELLow | WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe | LGREen |
LCYan | LRED | LMAGenta
Example: DISP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE
Manual operation: See "Predefined Colors" on page 156
DISPlay:LOGO <State>
This command switches the company logo on the screen on or off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:LOGO OFF
Manual operation: See "Print Logo (On/Off)" on page 155
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff <Minutes>
This command sets the holdoff time for the power-save mode of the display. The avail-
able value range is 1 to 60 minutes, the resolution 1 minute. The entry is dimension-
less.
Parameters:
<Minutes> 1 to 60
*RST: 15
Example: DISP:PSAV:HOLD 30
Manual operation: See "Display Pwr Save (On/Off)" on page 158
DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] <State>
This command switches on or off the power-save mode of the display. With the power-
save mode activated the display including backlight is completely switched off after the
elapse of the response time (see DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff command).
This mode is recommended to protect the display, especially if the instrument is oper-
ated exclusively via remote control.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:PSAVe ON
Switches on the power-save mode.
Manual operation: See "Display Pwr Save (On/Off)" on page 158

DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the status bar in the display on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:SBAR OFF
Manual operation: See "Status Bar" on page 155
DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe] <State>
This command turns the softkey bar in the display on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:SKEY OFF
DISPlay:TBAR[STATe] <State>
This command turns the toolbar in the display on or off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:TOOL ON
Manual operation: See "Tool Bar State (On/Off)" on page 154
DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog?
This command queries the available themes for the display.
Example: DISP:THEMe:CAT?
Usage: Query only
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect <Theme>
This command selects a theme for the screen display. The theme defines the colors
used for keys and screen elements, for example.
Parameters:
<Theme> String containing the name of the theme.
*RST: SPL
Example: DISP:THEM:SEL "OceanBlue"
Manual operation: See "Theme Selection" on page 155

DISPlay:TOUChscreen:STATe <State>
This command turns the touch screen functionality on, off, or partially on.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | FRAMe
ON
Touch screen function is active for entire screen
OFF
Touch screen is deactivated for entire screen
FRAMe
Touch screen is deactivated for the diagram area of the screen,
but active for the surrounding Softkeys, toolbars and menus.
*RST: ON
Example: DISP:TOUC:STAT ON
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT[:DATA] <Comment>
This command defines a comment (max. 20 characters) which can be displayed in one
of the measurement windows.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Comment> *RST: (empty)
Example: DISP:WIND:TEXT 'Noise Measurement'
Defines the screen title.
Manual operation: See "Screen Title (On/Off)" on page 155
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT:STATe <State>
This command turns the display of the comment (screen title) on and off.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:TEXT:STAT ON
Switches on the title.
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME <State>
This command turns the display of date and time on and off.

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DISP:TIME ON
Manual operation: See "Screen Title (On/Off)" on page 155
See "Time+Date (On/Off)" on page 155
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat <Format>
This command selects the time and date display format.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Format> US | DE
*RST: DE
Example: DISP:TIME ON
Switches the screen display of date and time on.
DISP:TIME:FORM US
Switches the date and time format to US.
Manual operation: See "Time+Date Format (US/DE)" on page 155
5.3.4.4 CMAP Suffix Assignment
Each suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several graphical elements which can be
modified by varying the corresponding color setting. The following assignment applies:
Suffix Description
CMAP1 Background
CMAP2 Grid
CMAP3 *) Common Text
CMAP4 *) Check Status OK
CMAP5 *) Check Status Error
CMAP6 *) Text Special 1
CMAP7 *) Text Special 2
CMAP8 Trace 1
CMAP9 Trace 2
CMAP10 Trace 3
CMAP11 Marker Info Text

Suffix Description
CMAP12 Limit Lines
CMAP13 Limit and Margin Check – "Pass"
CMAP14 Limit and Margin Check – "Fail"
CMAP15 *) Softkey Text
CMAP16 *) Softkey Background
CMAP17 *) Selected Field Text
CMAP18 *) Selected Field Background
CMAP19 *) Softkey 3D Bright Part
CMAP20 *) Softkey 3D Dark Part
CMAP21 *) Softkey State "On"
CMAP22 *) Softkey State "Dialog open"
CMAP23 *) Softkey Text Disabled
CMAP24 Logo
CMAP25 Trace 4
CMAP26 Grid – Minorlines
CMAP27 Marker
CMAP28 Display Lines
CMAP29 *) Sweepcount – Text
CMAP30 Limit and Margin Check – Text
CMAP31 Limit and Margin Check – \"Margin\"
CMAP32 *) Table Overall – Title Text
CMAP33 *) Table Overall – Title Background
CMAP34 *) Table Overall – Text
CMAP35 *) Table Overall – Background
CMAP36 *) Table Value – Title Text
CMAP37 *) Table Value – Title Background
CMAP38 *) Table Value – Text
CMAP39 *) Table Value – Background
CMAP40 Trace 5
CMAP41 Trace 6
*) these settings can only be defined via the theme, see Chapter 5.3.4.3, "DISPlay
Subsystem", on page 915, and are thus ignored in the SCPI command

5.3.4.5 FORMat Subsytem
The FORMat subsystem specifies the data format of the data transmitted from and to
the instrument.
FORMat[:DATA] <Format>
This command selects the data format for the data transmitted from the
R&S FSVA/FSV to the controlling computer. It is used for the transmission of trace
data. The data format of trace data received by the instrument is automatically recog-
nized, regardless of the format which is programmed.
In the "Spectrum" mode, the format setting REAL, 32 is used for the binary transmis-
sion of trace data.
(See also TRACe<n>[:DATA]? on page 880).
Parameters:
<Format> ASCii
ASCII data are transmitted in plain text, separated by commas.
REAL
REAL data are transmitted as 32-bit IEEE 754 floating-point
numbers in the "definite length block format".
*RST: ASCII
Example: FORM REAL,32
FORM ASC
5.3.4.6 HCOPy Subsystem
The HCOPy subsystem controls the output of display information for documentation
purposes on output devices or files. The instrument allows two independent printer
configurations which can be set separately with the suffix <1|2>.
HCOPy:ABORt.............................................................................................................. 922
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:DEFault.........................................................................................923
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:HSL..............................................................................................923
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:PDEFined..................................................................................... 924
HCOPy:DESTination<1|2>.............................................................................................. 924
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor................................................................................................... 925
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2>.................................................................................... 925
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]............................................................................................... 926
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT......................................................................................926
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL.......................................................................................................... 927
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TABLe:STATe............................................................................. 927
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT..........................................................................................927
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2>..................................................................................... 928
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe<1|2>...................................................................................... 928
HCOPy:ABORt
This command aborts a running hardcopy output.

Example: HCOP:ABOR
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:DEFault <ColorSet>
This command defines the color scheme for print jobs.
Suffix: .
<item> Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined.
For details on the CMAP assignment refer to Chapter 5.3.4.4,
"CMAP Suffix Assignment", on page 920.
Parameters:
<ColorSet> 1|2|3|4
1
current screen colors with the background in white and the grid
in black.
2
optimized color set
3
user defined color set
4
current screen colors without any changes (setting for hardcop-
ies)
Example: HCOP:CMAP:DEF2
Selects the optimized color set for the color settings of a printout
or a hardcopy.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Set to Default" on page 157
See "Select Print Color Set" on page 157
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:HSL
This command selects the color for various screen elements in print jobs.
Suffix: .

Parameters:
hue | sat | lum
hue
tint
sat
saturation
lum
brightness
The value range is 0 to 1 for all parameters.
Example: HCOP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0
Changes the grid color
Manual operation: See "Select Object" on page 156
See "User Defined Colors" on page 157
See "Print Colors" on page 157
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:PDEFined <Color>
This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements in print jobs.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Color> BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta |
YELLow | WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe | LGREen |
LCYan | LRED | LMAGenta
Example: HCOP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE
Manual operation: See "Predefined Colors" on page 156
HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> <Medium>
This command selects the destination of a print job.
The type of instrument is selected with SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:
SELect <1|2>, which automatically selects a default output medium. Therefore
HCOPY:DESTination should always be sent after setting the device type.
The suffix <1|2> selects the printing device.

Parameters:
<Medium> 'MMEM'
Sends the hardcopy to a file.
You can select the file name with MMEMory:NAME
You can select the file format with HCOPy:DEVice:
LANGuage<1|2>.
'SYST:COMM:PRIN'
Sends the hardcopy to the printer.
You can select the printer with SYSTem:COMMunicate:
PRINter:SELect <1|2>.
'SYST:COMM:CLIP'
Sends the hardcopy to the clipboard.
The format should be WEMF.
*RST: SYST:COMM:CLIP
Example: SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL2 'LASER on LPT1'
Selects the printer and output medium for device 2.
HCOP:DEST2 'SYST:COMM:PRIN'
Selects the printer interface as device 2.
Manual operation: See "Device Setup" on page 179
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <State>
This command turns color printing on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
Color output
OFF
Black and white output
*RST: OFF
Example: HCOP:DEV:COL ON
Manual operation: See "Color (On/Off)" on page 158
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> <Format>
This command selects the file format for a print job.

Parameters:
<Format> GDI
Graphics Device Interface:
Default format for the output to a printer configured under Win-
dows. Must be selected for the output to the printer interface.
Can be used for the output to a file. The printer driver configured
under Windows is used in this case and a printer-specific file for-
mat is thus generated.
(see also HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> command)
WMF | EWMF
WINDOWS Metafile and Enhanced Metafile Format:
Data formats for output files which can be integrated in corre-
sponding programs for documentation purposes at a later time.
WMF can only be used for output to a file and EWMF also for
the output to the clipboard.
(see also HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> command)
BMP | JPG | PNG
Data format for output to files only.
Example: HCOP:DEV:LANG WMF
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]
This command initiates a print job.
If you are printing to a file, the file name depends on MMEMory:NAME.
Example: HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP
Selects the data format.
HCOP:DEST 'MMEM'
Directs the hardcopy to a file.
MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\Print.bmp'
Selects the file name. If the file Print.bmp already exists, it is
replaced.
HCOP
Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print.bmp.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "ScreenShot" on page 167
See "Print Screen" on page 179
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT
This command initiates a print job.

If you are printing to a file, the file name depends on MMEMory:NAME. This command
adds a consecutive number to the file name.
Example: HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP
Selects the data format.
HCOP:DEST 'MMEM'
Directs the hardcopy to a file.
MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\Print.bmp'
Selects the file name.
HCOP
Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print.bmp.
HCOP:NEXT
Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print_001.bmp.
HCOP:NEXT
Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print_002.bmp.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Print Screen" on page 179
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
This command includes all screen elements in the printout.
The screen elements include comments, title, time and date.
Example: HCOP:ITEM:ALL
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Print Screen" on page 179
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TABLe:STATe <State>
This command turns printing of the currently active table on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TAB:STAT ON
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT <Comment>
This command defines a comment added to the printout.
Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the comment with a maximum of 100 charcat-
ers. The line feed is by means of the characters @.

Example: HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TEXT 'comment'

Manual operation: See "Comment" on page 180
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> <Orientation>
The command selects the format of the printout.
The command is only available if the output device is a printer (see HCOPy:
DESTination<1|2> on page 924).
Parameters:
<Orientation> LANDscape | PORTrait
*RST: PORT
Example: HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe<1|2> <State>
This command includes or excludes the time and date in the printout.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: HCOP:TDST:STAT OFF
5.3.4.7 MMEMory Subsystem
The MMEMory (mass memory) subsystem provides commands which allow for access
to the storage media of the instrument and for storing and loading various instrument
settings.
The various drives can be addressed via the "mass storage unit specifier" <msus>
using the conventional DOS syntax. The internal hard disk is addressed by "C:". For
details on drives refer to Chapter 4.1.2, "Saving and Recalling Settings Files –
SAVE/RCL Key", on page 163.
The file names <file_name> are indicated as string parameters with the commands
being enclosed in quotation marks. They also comply with DOS conventions.
DOS file names consist of max. 8 ASCII characters and an extension of up to three
characters separated from the file name by a dot "." Both, the dot and the extension
are optional. The dot is not part of the file name. DOS file names do not distinguish
between uppercase and lowercase notation. All letters and digits are permitted as well
as the special characters "_", "^", "$", "~", "!", "#", "%", "&", "-", "{", "}", "(", ")", "@" and

"`". Reserved file names are CLOCK$, CON, AUX, COM1 to COM4, LPT1 to LPT3,
NUL and PRN.
The two characters "*" and "?" have the function of so-called "wildcards", i.e., they are
variables for selection of several files. The question mark "?" replaces exactly one
character, the asterisk means any of the remaining characters in the file name. "*.*"
thus means all files in a directory.
In this section all MMEMory commands that are independant of a particular measure-
ment mode are described in detail. For details on specific "Spectrum" mode commands
refer to Chapter 5.3.3.11, "MMEMory Subsystem", on page 761.
MMEMory:CATalog?...................................................................................................... 929
MMEMory:CATalog:LONG?............................................................................................ 930
MMEMory:CDIRectory....................................................................................................931
MMEMory:CLEar:ALL.....................................................................................................931
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,.............................................................................................931
MMEMory:COMMent......................................................................................................932
MMEMory:COPY........................................................................................................... 932
MMEMory:DATA............................................................................................................ 933
MMEMory:DELete..........................................................................................................933
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO..................................................................................................934
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.................................................................................................934
MMEMory:MDIRectory................................................................................................... 935
MMEMory:MOVE........................................................................................................... 935
MMEMory:MSIS.............................................................................................................936
MMEMory:NAME........................................................................................................... 936
MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect.................................................................................... 937
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP...............................................................................................937
MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives?.............................................................................. 937
MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives?.................................................................................. 938
MMEMory:RDIRectory....................................................................................................938
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL......................................................................................... 938
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault................................................................................... 938
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings..............................................................................939
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL................................................................................939
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE..................................................................................... 939
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam................................................................................... 939
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive].......................................................................940
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL......................................................................940
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe......................................................................................... 940
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe:NEXT................................................................................941
MMEMory:USER<Softkey>............................................................................................. 941
MMEMory:CATalog?
This command reads the indicated directory.

Query parameters:
<Path> <path>
DOS Path name
The path name should be conform to DOS conventions and may
also include the drive name. According to DOS convention, wild-
card characters can be entered in order to query e.g. a list of all
files of a certain type.
Return values:
Result List of file names in the form of strings separated by commas
Example: MMEM:CAT? 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\*.DFL'
Returns all files in C:\R_S\Instr\user with extension ".DFL"
MMEM:CAT? 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\SPOOL?.WMF'
Returns all files in C:\R_S\Instr\user whose names start with
SPOOL, have 6 letters and the extension ".WMF".
SPOOL1.WMF,SPOOL2.WMF,SPOOL3.WMF
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Select File" on page 165
MMEMory:CATalog:LONG?
Corresponds to MMEMory:CATalog? on page 929, but displays extended information
on the files contained in the current or specified directory.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Query parameters:
<Path> <path>
DOS Path name
The path name should be in conformance with DOS conventions
and may also include the drive name.
Following this value, for each file, a string is listed according to
the following syntax:
"<File name>, <suffix>, <Length of file in
bytes>"
Return values:
Result <total number of bytes the directory contains>,"<File name1>,
<suffix1>, <Length of file 2 in bytes>","<File name 2>, <suffix2>,
<Length of file2 in bytes>",...,"<File name n>, <suffix n>,
<Length of file n in bytes>"
The response value consists of a list of strings, separated by
commas. It begins with the total number of bytes the directory
contains. Then the information for each file is returned.
The <suffix> may be:
– ASCii
– BINary
– STAT

Example: MMEM:CAT:LONG? 'C:\R_S\Instr\user

Returns all files in C:\R_S\Instr\user:
1776,3331993600, "autolog.txt,ASC,1520",
"autologin.reg,BIN,144", "no_autologin.reg,BIN,
112"
Query for the current directory:
MMEM:CDIR?
Response:
C:\R_S\Instr\user
MMEM:CAT:LONG?
Returns all files in C:\R_S\Instr\user.
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory>
This command changes the current directory.
Parameters:
<Directory> <directory_name>
<directory_name>
DOS path name
In addition to the path name, the indication of the directory may
contain the drive name. The path name complies with the DOS
conventions.
Example: MMEM:CDIR 'C:\R_S\Instr\user'
Selects the directory C:\R_S\Instr\user.
Manual operation: See "Edit Path" on page 168
MMEMory:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all instrument configuration files in the current directory.
You can select the directory with MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 931. The default
directory is C:\R_S\instr\user.
Example: MMEM:CLE:ALL
Usage: Event
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1, <FileName>
This command deletes the instrument settings file selected by <file_name>. All associ-
ated files on the mass memory storage are cleared.

Parameters:
<FileName> 1,<file_name>
with <file_name> = DOS file name without extension
The file name includes indication of the path and may also
include the drive. The path name complies with DOS conven-
tions.
Example: MMEM:CLE:STAT 1,'TEST'
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Delete File" on page 166
MMEMory:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for the stored settings.
Parameters:
<Comment>
Example: MMEMory:COMMent "ACP measurement with Standard
Tetra from 23.05."
MMEMory::MMEMory:STORe1:STATe 1, "ACP_T"
As a result, in the selection list for recall settings, the comment
"ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from
23.05." is added to the ACP entry.
MMEMory:COPY <FileSource>,<FileDestination>
This command copies the files indicated in <file_source> to the destination directory
indicated with <file_destination> or to the destination file indicated by <file_destination>
if <file_source> is just a file.
Parameters:
<FileSource>,<FileDestination>
<file_source>,<file_destination> = <file_name>
<file_source>,<file_destination> = <file_name>
DOS file name
The indication of the file name may include the path and the
drive name. The file names and path information must be in
accordance with the DOS conventions.
Example: MMEM:COPY 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\SETUP.CFG','E:'
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Copy" on page 169

MMEMory:DATA <FileName>, [<Block>]

This command writes the block data contained in <block> into the file characterized by
<file_name>. The delimiter must be set to EOI to obtain error-free data transfer.
The associated query command reads the indicated file from the mass memory and
transfers it to the remote control computer. It should be noted that the buffer memory of
the control computer should be large enough to store the file. The setting of the delim-
iter is irrelevant in this case.
The command is useful for reading stored settings files or trace data from the instru-
ment or for transferring them to the instrument.
Parameters:
<FileName> '<file name>' (file name in single quotes)
selects the file to be transferred
<Block> binary data block with the following structure: #<digit for the
length of the length information><length information (number of
bytes) for the binary data><binary data>
Example: MMEM:DATA 'TEST01.HCP',#216 This is the file
where:
#2: the next 2 characters are the length indication
16: number of subsequent binary data bytes
This is the file: 16 bytes stored as binary data in the file
TEST01.HCP
MMEM:DATA? 'TEST01.HCP'
Transfers the file TEST01.HCP from the instrument to the con-
trol computer.
MMEMory:DELete <FileName>
This command deletes the indicated files.
Parameters:
<FileName> <file_name> = DOS file name
The indication of the file name contains the path and, optionally,
the drive name. Indication of the path complies with DOS con-
ventions.
Example: MMEM:DEL 'TEST01.HCP'
The file TEST01.HCP is deleted.

MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO <Mode>
This command defines which settings file is automatically loaded after the device is
switched on. The contents of the file are read after switching on the device and used to
define the new device state.
The settings file defined as auto recall set can also be restored by the *RST
Parameters:
<Mode> 1,'FACTORY' | 1,'<file_name>' | with <file_name>
1,'FACTORY'
deactivates the startup recall function
1,'<file_name>'
activates the startup recall function and defines the settings file
to be loaded
with <file_name>
DOS file name with or without extension
include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS con-
ventions.
Example: MMEM:LOAD:AUTO 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST'
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Startup Recall (On/Off)" on page 167
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1, <FileName>
This command restores and activates an instrument configuration stored in a *.dfl file.
Note that files with other formats cannot be loaded with this command.
The contents that are reloaded from the file are defined by the last selection made
either in the "Save/Recall" dialogs (manual operation) or through the
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM] commands (remote operation; the settings are identical in
both cases).
By default, the selection is limited to the user settings ("User Settings" selection in the
dialogs, HWSettings in SCPI). The selection is not reset by PRESET or *RST.
As a consequence, the results of a SCPI script using the MMEMory:LOAD:STATe com-
mand without a previous MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM] command may vary, depending
on previous actions in the GUI or in previous scripts, even if the script starts with the
*RST command.
It is therefore recommended that you use the appropriate MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]
command before using MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.
Parameters:
1

<FileName> DOS file name with or without extension

ventions.
Example: MMEM:SEL:ALL
//Save all items (User Settings, All Traces, All Limit Lines) from
the R&S FSVA/FSV.
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST01'
//Reloads all items
In the "Recall" dialog, select only "User Settings" and "All Limit
Lines".
//Reloads user settings and all limit lines.
*RST
//Reset instrument.
//Selected items are retained. Reloads user settings and all limit
lines.
Restart the instrument (using the ON/OFF key on the front
panel).
// Selected items are set to default. Reloads only the user set-
tings.
Manual operation: See "Save File / Recall File" on page 165
See "Recall" on page 166
MMEMory:MDIRectory <Directory>
This command creates a new directory. The file name includes indication of the path
and may also include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS conventions.
Parameters:
<Directory> <directory_name> = DOS path name
Example: MMEM:MDIR 'C:\R_S\Instr\user'
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "New Folder" on page 168
MMEMory:MOVE <FileSource>,<FileDestination>
This command renames existing files, if <file_destination> contains no path indication.
Otherwise the file is moved to the indicated path and stored under the file name speci-
fied there, if any.

Parameters:
<FileSource>,<FileDestination>
<file_source>,<file_destination> = <file_name> = DOS file name
include the drive. The path name complies with DOS conven-
tions.
Example: MMEM:MOVE 'C:\TEST01.CFG','SETUP.CFG'
Renames TEST01.CFG in SETUP.CFG in directory C:\.
MMEM:MOVE 'C:\TEST01.CFG','C:\R_S\Instr\user
Moves TEST01.CFG from C:\ to C:\R_S\Instr\user.
MMEM:MOVE 'C:\TEST01.CFG','C:
\R_S\Instr\user\SETUP.CFG'
Moves TEST01.CFG from C:\ to C:\R_S\Instr\user and renames
the file in SETUP.CFG.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Rename" on page 169
MMEMory:MSIS <Device>
This command changes to the drive indicated. The drive may be the internal hard disk
C:.
Parameters:
<Device> <device> = A: | C: … Z:
*RST: n.a.
The path name complies with DOS conventions.
Example: MMEM:MSIS 'C:'
Manual operation: See "Edit Path" on page 168
MMEMory:NAME <FileName>
This command defines a destination file for the printout started with the HCOPy[:
IMMediate<1|2>] on page 926 command. In this case the printer output must be
routed to a file as destination.
Parameters:
<FileName> <file_name> = DOS file name
include the drive name. The file name and path information com-
ply with DOS conventions.
Example: MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\PRINT1.BMP'
Selects the file name.
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed

MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect <Drive>
This command disconnects the selected drive.
Parameters:
<Drive>
Example: MMEM:NETW:DISC 'T:'
Disconnects network drive T:
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Disconnect Network Drive" on page 170
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP <Drive>, <HostName> [, <UserName>, <Password>][,

<Reconnect>]
This command maps a drive to a server or server directory of the network.
Note that you have to allow sharing for a server or folder in Microsoft networks first.
Parameters:
<Drive> String containing the drive name or path of the directory you
want to map.
<HostName> String containing the host name of the computer or the IP
address and the share name of the drive.
'<\host name or IP address\share name>'
<UserName> String containing a user name in the network.
The user name is optional.
<Password> String containing the password corresponding to the <User-
Name>.
The password is optional.
<Reconnect> ON | OFF
ON
Reconnects at logon with the same user name.
OFF
Does not reconnect at logon.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Map Network Drive" on page 170
MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives?
This command lists all unused network drive names.
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Example: MMEM:NETW:UNUS?
Lists all unused network drive names.
Usage: Query only

MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives? <ResultType>
This command lists all mapped network drives.
Query parameters:
<ResultType> ON
Lists all mapped network drives including the folder information.
OFF
Lists all mapped network drive names.
*RST: OFF
Example: MMEM:NETW:USED? ON
Lists all mapped network drives including the folder information.
Usage: Query only
MMEMory:RDIRectory <Directory>
This command deletes the indicated directory. The directory name includes indication
of the path and may also include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS
conventions.
Parameters:
<Directory> <directory_name> = DOS path name
Example: MMEM:RDIR 'C:\TEST'
Usage: Event
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
This command includes all data subsets in the list of device settings to be stored/
loaded.
Example: MMEM:SEL:ALL
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Enable all Items" on page 166
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
This command includes the default list in the settings file to be stored/loaded. For
details on hardware settings refer to the MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings
Example: MMEM:SEL:DEFault

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings <State>
This command includes the hardware settings in the settings file to be stored/loaded.
The hardware settings include:
● current configuration of general device parameters (general setup)
● current setting of the measurement hardware including markers
● activated limit lines:
A settings file may include 8 limit lines at maximum. This number includes the activated
limit lines and, if available, the de-activated limit lines last used.
Therefore the combination of the non-activated restored limit lines depends on the
sequence of use with the MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 934 command.
● user-defined color setting
● configuration for the hardcopy output
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example: MMEM:SEL:HWS ON
Manual operation: See "Select Items" on page 165
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL <State>
This command includes all limit lines (activated and de-activated) in the settings file to
be stored/loaded.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
This command excludes all items from the settings file to be stored/loaded.
Example: MMEM:SEL:NONE
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Disable all Items" on page 166
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam <boolean>
This command adds the spectrogram data to the list of data subsets of a save/recall
device setting.

Parameters:
<boolean> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: MEM:SEL:SGR ON
Adds the spectrogram data to the list of data subsets.
Mode: SPECM
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] <State>
This command includes the active traces in the settings file to be stored/loaded. Active
traces are all traces whose state is not blank.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF, i.e. no traces is stored
Example: MMEM:SEL:TRAC ON
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL <State>
This command includes all transducer factors and sets in the settings file to be stored/
loaded.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: MMEM:SEL:TRAN:ALL ON
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe <State>
This command stores the current device settings in a *.dfl file.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> 1,<file_name>
with <file_name>
DOS file name with or without extension
The file name includes the indication of the path and may also
ventions.
Example: MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'Save'
Saves the current device settings in the file Save.dfl.

Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe:NEXT
This command stores the current device settings in a *.dfl file. The file name used in
the last saving process is automatically counted up to the next unused name.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'Save'
Saves the current device settings in the file Save.dfl.
MMEM:STOR:STAT:NEXT
Saves the current device settings in the file Save_001.dfl
MMEM:STOR:STAT:NEXT
Saves the current device settings in the file Save_002.dfl
Usage: Event
MMEMory:USER<Softkey> <Filename>, <Label>

This command defines the settings file to be loaded when the specified user-definable
softkey is selected. The settings file must exist, otherwise an error occurs.
Suffix: .
<Softkey> 1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8
Number of the softkey in the "User" menu.
Parameters:
<Filename> string
This parameter defines the path and file name of the settings to
be loaded.
<Label> string
This parameter defines the label of the user-definable softkey.
*RST: User<Softkey_number>
Example: MMEM:USER1 'C:\MySaveSets\Set1','Set1'
Loads settings file Set1 when the "Set1" softkey in the "User"
menu is selected.
Example: MMEM:USER3 'C:\MySaveSets\Set3',''
Loads settings file Set3 when the "User3" softkey in the "User"
menu is selected.

5.3.4.8 OUTPut Subsystem (Option Additional Interfaces, B5)
The OUTPut subsystem controls the output features of the instrument.

OUTPut:IF[:SOURce]..................................................................................................... 942
OUTPut:TRIGger........................................................................................................... 942
OUTPut:IF[:SOURce] <Source>
This command selects the source of the IF output.
Parameters:
<Source> IF
Outputs the intermediate frequency.
VIDeo
Outputs the video signal (200 mV).
*RST: IF
Example: OUTP:IF VID
Selects the video signal for the IF output connector.
Manual operation: See "Video Output" on page 398
OUTPut:TRIGger <PortLevel>
This command selects level of the Trigger Out port. Thus, you can trigger an additional
device via the external trigger port, for example.
Parameters:
<PortLevel> LOW | HIGH
*RST: LOW
Example: OUTP:TRIG HIGH
Manual operation: See "Trigger Out" on page 399
5.3.4.9 SENSe Subsystem
The SENSe subsystem is organized in several subsystems. The commands of these

subsystems directly control device-specific settings; they do not refer to the signal
characteristics of the measurement signal.
The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the analyzer. In accord-
ance with the SCPI standard, the keyword "SENSe" is optional for this reason, which
means that it is not necessary to include the SENSe node in command sequences.
SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem..................................................................................946
SENSe:CORRection Subsystem
This subsystem controls calibration and normalization.

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe]............................................. 943
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent..................................................................943
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA........................................................................944
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete......................................................................944
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing....................................................................944
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect...................................................................... 945
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe].....................................................................945
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT.........................................................................945
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW........................................................................ 946
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe] <State>
This command turns automatic adjustment of the reference level regarding the trans-
ducer factor characteristics on and off.
Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer factor with
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect.
Parameters:
<State> ON
Automatically adjusts the reference level with respect to the
transducer factor characteristics.
OFF
Manual adjustment of the reference level with respect to the
transducer factor characteristics is necessary.
*RST: OFF
Example: CORR:TRAN:SEL 'FACTOR'
CORR:TRAN:STAT ON
Selects and turns on a transducer factor.
CORR:TRAN:ADJ:RLEV ON
Adjusts the reference level to the characteristics of the trans-
ducer.
Manual operation: See "Ref Level Adjust (Man/Auto)" on page 145
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment for a transducer factor.
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 945.
Parameters:
<Comment> String containing the comment.
*RST: (empty comment)
CORR:TRAN:STAT ON
Selects and turns on a transducer factor.
CORR:TRAN:COMM 'FACTOR FOR ANTENNA'
Defines a comment for the selected transducer factor.

Manual operation: See "Edit" on page 143
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA <Frequency>,<Level>
This command defines the shape of the transducer factor.
A transducer factor may contain up to 625 reference values. Each reference value is a
combination of a frequency and a level value.
Before you can use this command, you have to select a transducer factor with
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 945.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Numeric value in Hz.
The frequency values have to be in ascending order.
<Level> The unit depends on [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:
UNIT on page 945. By default, it is dB.
Example: SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL 'TRAN_1'
Selects the transducer factor
CORR:TRAN:UNIT 'DB'
Selects the unit for the transducer.
CORR:TRAN:DATA 1MHZ,-30,2MHZ,-40
Defines the frequency/level pairs 1 MHz, -30 dB and 2 MHz, -40
dB.
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete
This command deletes a transducer factor.
Example: CORR:TRAN:SEL 'Transducer 1'
CORR:TRAN:DEL
Deletes the selected transducer.
Usage: Event
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing <Scale>
This command selects the scale of the transducer factor.
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 945R&S FSVA/FSV.
Parameters:
<Scale> LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST: LINear


CORR:TRAN:SCAL LOG
Selects a transducer and scales it logarithmically.
Manual operation: See "Interpolation Lin/Log" on page 144
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect <FileName>
This command creates or selects a transducer factor.
Parameters:
<FileName> String containing the name of the transducer factor.
If the name does not exist yet, the R&S FSVA/FSV creates a
transducer factor by that name.
Selects the corresponding transducer factor.
Manual operation: See "Transducer" on page 142
See "Active (On/Off)" on page 142
See "Edit Name" on page 143
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] <State>
This command turns a transducer factor on and off.
You can turn on up to 8 transducer factors at the same time.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CORR:TRAN ON
Turns the transducer factor on.
Manual operation: See "Active (On/Off)" on page 142
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT <Unit>
This command selects the unit of a transducer factor.
Note that the unit of all active transducer factors must be the same or in relative terms
(dB).

Parameters:
<Unit> String containing one of the following units:
DB | DBM | DBMV | DBUV | DBUV/M | DBUA DBUA/M | DBPW |
DBPT
*RST: DB
CORR:TRAN:UNIT 'DBUV'
Selects a transducer based on the unit dBµV.
Manual operation: See "Edit Unit" on page 143
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW <State>
This command includes or excludes a figure of a transducer factor in the diagram.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CORR:TRAN:VIEW ON
Selects and displays a transducer factor.
SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem
This subsystem controls the reference oscillator. The suffix in SENSe is irrelevant for
the commands of this subsystem.
SOURce:EXTernal<1|2>:ROSCillator: EXTernal:FREQuency............................................. 946
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency.....................................................................946
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce........................................................................................ 947
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo?........................................................................... 947
SOURce:EXTernal<1|2>:ROSCillator: EXTernal:FREQuency
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <Frequency>
This command defines the frequency of the external reference oscillator.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Range: 1 MHz to 20 MHz
Example: ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13
Sets the frequency to 13 MHz.
SOUR:EXT:ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13

[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the reference oscillator.
Parameters:
<Source> INTernal
The internal reference is used (10 MHz)
EXTernal
The external reference is used; if none is available, an error flag
is displayed in the status bar
EAUTo
The external reference is used as long as it is available, then the
instrument switches to the internal reference
Example: ROSC:SOUR EXT
Manual operation: See "Reference Int/Ext" on page 141
See "Show Error Flag" on page 142
See "Auto select Reference" on page 142
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo?
This command queries the current reference type in case you have activated an auto-
matic switch to the internal reference if the external reference is missing.
Return values:
<Reference> INT
internal reference
EXT
external reference
Example: SENS:ROSC:SOUR:EAUT?
Queries the currently available reference type.
Usage: Query only
5.3.4.10 SOURce Subsystem
The SOURce subsystem controls the output signals of the instrument.
SOURce:TEMPerature Subsystem
SOURce<n>:TEMPerature:APRobe
This command queries the sensor temperature.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

Parameters:
1 (CPU)
Example: SOUR:TEMP:APR? 1
Queries the temperature of the CPU sensor.
Mode: all
SOURce:EXTernal Subsystem
The SOURce:EXTernal subsystem controls the operation of the unit with option Exter-
nal Generator Control (R&S FSV-B10). The commands are only valid for the selected
window. The suffix <generator> specifies the external generator 1 or 2.
The commands of the SOURce:EXTernal subsystem assume that the addressed gen-
erator was correctly configured with the commands of subsystem
SYSTem:COMMunicate.
If no external generator is selected, if the GPIB or TCP/IP address is not correct, or the
generator is not ready for operation, an error message is displayed ("Ext. Generator
GPIB Handshake Error!" or "Ext. Generator TCPIP Handshake Error!".
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:ROSCillator[:SOURce]................................................ 948
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] <Source>
This command switches between external and internal reference oscillator.
Note: in Spectrum mode, this command defines the reference oscillator for the external
tracking generator, see SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:ROSCillator[:
SOURce] on page 859.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<generator> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Source> INTernal | EXTernal
*RST: INT
Example: SOUR:EXT:ROSC EXT
Switches to external reference oscillator
Mode: all
5.3.4.11 STATus Subsystem
The STATus subsystem contains the commands for the status reporting system (see
the Operating Manual, chapter 5 "Remote Control – Basics"). *RST does not influence
the status registers.

STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]........................................................................................... 949
STATus:OPERation:CONDition....................................................................................... 949
STATus:OPERation:ENABle........................................................................................... 949
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition.....................................................................................949
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition.....................................................................................950
STATus:PRESet............................................................................................................ 950
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition...................................................................................950
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?.....................................................................................951
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle.......................................................................................951
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition.................................................................................951
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition................................................................................ 951
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT?]?.............................................................................................. 952
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]
This command queries the contents of the EVENt part of the STATus:OPERation reg-
ister. The contents of the EVENt part are deleted after readout.
Example: STAT:OPER?
Mode: all
STATus:OPERation:CONDition
This command queries the CONDition part of the STATus:OPERation register (see
the base unit description of status registers in the Remote Control Basics chapter).
Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition part. The value returned
reflects the current hardware status.
Example: STAT:OPER:COND?
Mode: all
STATus:OPERation:ENABle
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:OPERation register.
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt
section for the summary bit in the status byte.
Parameters:
0 to 65535
Example: STAT:OPER:ENAB 65535
Mode: all
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:OPERation register
from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.

Parameters:
0 to 65535
Example: STAT:OPER:PTR 65535
Mode: all
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition
Parameters:
0 to 65535
Example: STAT:OPER:NTR 65535
Mode: all
STATus:PRESet
This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined
value. All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh, i.e. all transitions from 0 to 1 are detec-
ted. All NTRansition parts are set to 0, i.e. a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is
not detected. The ENABle part of the STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable
registers are set to 0, i.e. all events in these registers are not passed on.
Example: STAT:PRES
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition
This command queries the CONDition part of the "STATus:QUEStionable" register.
This part contains the sum bit of the next lower register. This register part can only be
read, but not written into or cleared. Readout does not delete the contents of the CON-
Dition part.
Example: STAT:QUES:COND?
Mode: all

STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt part of the STATus:QUEStionable
register. The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last read-
ing, it is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events passed on by the
transition filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be
read by the user. Reading the register clears it.
Example: STAT:QUES?
Usage: Query only
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable regis-
ter. The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated
EVENt section for the summary bit in the status byte.
Parameters:
0 to 65535
Example: STAT:QUES:ENAB 65535
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable register
Parameters:
0 to 65535
Example: STAT:QUES:PTR 65535
Mode: all
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition
Parameters:
0 to 65535
Example: STAT:QUES:NTR 65535
Mode: all

STATus:QUEue[:NEXT?]?
This command queries the earliest error queue entry and deletes it.
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error
messages defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "No error",
is returned. This command is identical to the SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? command.
Example: STAT:QUES?
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
Mode: all
5.3.4.12 SYSTem Subsystem
This subsystem contains a series of commands for general functions.

SYSTem:APPLication:SRECovery[:STATe]...................................................................... 953
SYSTem:CLOGging....................................................................................................... 953
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess............................................................... 953
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator..........................................................954
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt?........................................................ 954
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]?...................................................... 955
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect <1|2>.................................................................955
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:CONTrol?........................................................................ 955
SYSTem:COMPatible..................................................................................................... 955
SYSTem:DATE..............................................................................................................956
SYSTem:DID?............................................................................................................... 956
SYSTem:DEVice:ID?......................................................................................................956
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel...............................................................................................956
SYSTem:DISPlay:LANGuage..........................................................................................957
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate.............................................................................................. 957
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL............................................................................................ 957
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?................................................................................................... 957
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?................................................................................................958
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate........................................................................................... 958
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt.................................................................................................958
SYSTem:HPCoupling..................................................................................................... 959
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory.............................................................................................959
SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing]............................................................................................. 959
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE.................................................................................................. 960
SYSTem:KLOCk............................................................................................................ 960
SYSTem:LANGuage...................................................................................................... 960
SYSTem:LXI:INFo?........................................................................................................961
SYSTem:LXI:LANReset..................................................................................................961
SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription.............................................................................................961
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword................................................................................................. 962
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable]....................................................................................... 962
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet............................................................................................ 962
SYSTem:PRESet...........................................................................................................962

SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband................................................................................................963
SYSTem:REBoot........................................................................................................... 963
SYSTem:REVision:FACTory........................................................................................... 963
SYSTem:REVision[:STRing]............................................................................................964
SYSTem:RSW...............................................................................................................964
SYSTem:SHUTdown......................................................................................................964
SYSTem:TIME...............................................................................................................964
SYSTem:TWALking....................................................................................................... 965
SYSTem:VERSion?....................................................................................................... 965
SYSTem:APPLication:SRECovery[:STATe] <State>
Controls instrument behavior when switching between measurement applications, e.g.
from "Spectrum" to "Analog Demod" and back.
If activated, the current instrument settings are stored when you switch to a different
application. When you switch back to the previous application, the corresponding
instrument settings are restored. Thus, the settings of the individual applications are
independant of each other.
If deactivated (default), only a few parameters of the current instrument setting are
passed between applications (e.g. center frequency, level settings).
Note that although the default value is "OFF", this parameter is not reset using the
PRESET key. Thus it must be deactivated manually, if necessary.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF (not restored using the "PRESET" function)
Example: SYST:APPL:SREC ON
Manual operation: See "Application Setup Recovery" on page 160
SYSTem:CLOGging <State>
This command turns logging of remote commands on and off.
Parameters:
<State> ON
Writes all remote commands that have been sent to a file.
The destination is C:
\R_S\instr\ScpiLogging\ScpiLog.txt.
OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "I/O Logging (On/Off)" on page 152
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <Address>
This command changes the GPIB address of the unit.

Parameters:
<Address> 0 to 30
*RST: (no influence on this parameter, factory default 20)
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18
Manual operation: See "GPIB Address" on page 148
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator <Terminator>
This command changes the GPIB receive terminator.
According to the standard the terminator in ASCII is <LF> and/or <EOI>. For binary
data transfers (e.g. trace data) from the control computer to the instrument, the binary
code (0AH) used for <LF> might be included in the binary data block, and therefore
should not be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case. This can be avoided by
changing the receive terminator to EOI.
Output of binary data from the instrument to the control computer does not require
such a terminator change.
Parameters:
<Terminator> LFEOI | EOI
*RST: (no influence on this parameter, factory default
LFEOI)
Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI
Manual operation: See "GPIB Terminator LFEOI/EOI" on page 152
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt?
This command queries the name of the first printer (in the list of printers) available
under Windows operating system.
The names of other installed printers can be queried with the SYSTem:COMMunicate:
PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]? command.
If no printer is configured an empty string is output.
Parameters:
*RST: NONE
Example: SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:FIRS?
Usage: Query only

SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]?
This command queries the name of the next printer installed under Windows operating
system. After all available printer names have been output, an empty string enclosed
by quotation marks (") is output for the next query. Further queries are answered by a
query error.
The SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? command should be
sent previously to return to the beginning of the printer list and query the name of the
first printer.
Example: SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM?
Usage: Query only
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect <1|2> <PrinterName>

This command selects one of the printers configured under Windows operating sys-
tem, including the associated output destination.
The specified printer name must be a string (entered in quotes) as returned by the
commands
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? or
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]?
The HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> on page 924 command is used to select an output
medium other than the default one.
Parameters:
<PrinterName> "<printer_name>"
*RST: NONE
Example: SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL "LASER on LPT1"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:CONTrol?
This command outputs the control port for the LAN socket connection. An error indi-
cates that the socket connection is not supported.
Example: SYST:COMM:TCP:CONT?
Usage: Query only
SYSTem:COMPatible <Mode>
Sets the device in a state compatible to previous R&S signal analyzers, e.g. regarding
the number of sweep points.
Parameters:
<Mode> DEFault | FSU | FSP

Example: SYST:COMP FSP

Manual operation: See "Compatibility Mode" on page 148
See "Mode Default" on page 149
See "Mode R&S FSP" on page 149
See "Mode R&S FSU" on page 149
SYSTem:DATE <Date>
This command is used to enter the date for the internal calendar.
The sequence of entry is year, month, day.
Only user accounts with administrator rights can set the date.
Parameters:
<Date> 1980 to 2099, 1 to 12, 1 to 31
Example: SYST:DATE 2000,6,1
Manual operation: See "Time+Date" on page 152
SYSTem:DID?
SYSTem:DEVice:ID?
Returns the unique ID of the R&S FSVA/FSV instrument.
Example: SYST:DEV:ID?
1307.9002K07-100123-aZ
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Versions+Options" on page 158
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel <State>
This command activates or deactivates the display of the front panel keys on the
screen.
With the display activated, the instrument can be operated on the screen using the
mouse by pressing the corresponding buttons.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SYST:DISP:FPAN ON
Manual operation: See "Soft Frontpanel" on page 153

SYSTem:DISPlay:LANGuage <Language>
Changes the language of the graphical user interface (softkeys, dialog boxes, input
settings etc.) to the selected language, if any other than the default are installed.
Parameters:
<Language> string containing the ISO language code
*RST: en
Example: SYST:DISP:LANG 'ru'
Switches to a Russian interface (if installed).
SYST:DISP:LANG 'en'
Switches back to the default English interface.
Manual operation: See "Language" on page 153
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate <State>
In remote control mode, this command switches on or off the instrument display. If
switched on, only the diagrams, traces and display fields are displayed and updated.
The best performance is obtained if the display output is switched off during remote
control.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SYST:DISP:UPD ON
Manual operation: See "Display Update (On/Off)" on page 152
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all entries in the table SYSTEM MESSAGES.
Example: SYST:ERR:CLE:ALL
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Clear All Messages" on page 159
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?
This command reads all system messages and returns a list of comma separated
strings. Each string corresponds to an entry in the table SYSTEM MESSAGES.
If the error list is empty, an empty string " is returned.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Example: SYST:ERR:LIST?
Usage: Query only

Manual operation: See "System Messages" on page 159
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
This command queries the earliest error queue entry and deletes it.
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error
messages defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "No error",
is returned.
Example: STAT:ERR?
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate
This command starts a firmware update using the *.msi files in the selected directory.
The default path is D:\FW_UPDATE. The path is changed via the MMEMory:COMMent
command. To store the update files the MMEMory:DATA command is used.
Only user accounts with administrator rights can perform a firmware update.
Example: SYST:FIRM:UPD 'D:\FW_UPDATE'
Starts the firmware update from directory "D:\FW_UPDATE".
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Firmware Update" on page 160
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt
This command defines the response format to the *IDN? on page 601 command. This
function is intended for re-use of existing control programs together with the
R&S FSVA/FSV.
Parameters:
FSL | LEGacy | NEW
LEGacy
Format is compatible to the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ family
NEW
R&S FSVA/FSV format
FSL
Format is compatible to the R&S FSL family
*RST: not reset!
Example: SYST:FORM:IDEN LEG
Adapts the return value of *IDN? to the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ fam-
ily.
Manual operation: See "*IDN Format Leg./New" on page 152

SYSTem:HPCoupling <CouplingType>
Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for:
● span and resolution bandwidth (Span/RBW) and
● resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth (RBW/VBW)
For FSP (=FSV), the standard parameter coupling of the instrument is used. As a
result, in most cases a shorter sweeptime is used than in case of HP.
This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage
.
Parameters:
<CouplingType> HP | FSP
*RST: FSP
Example: SYSTem:HPC HP
Manual operation: See "Coupling (FSx/HP)" on page 150
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory
Resets the response to the *IDN? query to the default value, e.g. after a user string
was defined using the ID String User softkey.
Example: SYST:IDEN:FACT
*IDN?
Response:
Rohde&Schwarz,R&S FSVA/FSV-7,
1307.9002K07/101768,1.05
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "ID String Factory" on page 148
SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] <String>
Sets the response to the *IDN? query to the defined string, e.g. after the default value
was reset using the ID String Factory softkey.
Parameters:
<String>
Example: Set the response to 'MyDevice':
SYST:IDEN:STR 'MyDevice'
Query the response:
SYST:IDEN:STR?
Response:
MyDevice

Manual operation: See "ID String User" on page 148
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE <Mode>
Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application
needs. This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth < 300 kHz and is
only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage.
Parameters:
<Mode> NORM | PULS
NORM
Optimized for high dynamic range, overload limit is close to ref-
erence level.
PULS
Optimized for pulsed signals, overload limit up to 10 dB above
reference level.
*RST: NORM
Example: SYST:IFG:MODE PULS
Manual operation: See "IF Gain (Norm/Puls)" on page 150
SYSTem:KLOCk <State>
This command activates the local lockout (remote control) or returns to the local mode.
Parameters:
<State> ON
LLO (local lockout)
OFF
GTL (go to local)
*RST: OFF
Example: SYST:KLOK ON
Activates LLO (remote control)
SYSTem:LANGuage <Language>
This command defines the system language. Default is SCPI which defines the stan-
dard remote control behavior of the instrument. The other parameters are to simulate
the corresponding HP analyzer. The parameter "PSA89600" sets the device in a state
in which it can be used for IQ capturing from the 89600 vector signal analyzer soft-
ware.

Parameters:
<Language> "SCPI" | "8560E" | "8561E" | "8562E" | "8563E" | "8564E" |
"8565E" | "8566A" | "8566B" | "8568A" | "8568A_DC" | "8568B" |
"8568B_DC" | "8591E" | "8594E" | "71100C" | "71200C" |
"71209A" | "PSA89600" | "PSA" | "ESA"
*RST: SCPI
Example: SYST:LANG '8560E'
Sets the system language to 8560E to simulate the HP analyzer.
Manual operation: See "GPIB Language" on page 149
Note: If you use "PSA89600", you must switch to an HP language first before return-
ing to SCPI (in remote operation only). For the identical language "PSA", this inter-
mediate step is not necessary.
SYSTem:LXI:INFo?
This query returns the current parameters of the LXI class C.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use LXI functionality.
Return values:
Return values <current version> | <LXI class> | <Computername> |
(example) <MAC adress> | <IP adress> | <Auto MDIX>
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Info" on page 147
SYSTem:LXI:LANReset
This command resets the LAN configuration to the values required by the LXI stan-
dard. In addition, the password is reset to its initial state aas well as the LXI instrument
description.
Example: SYST:LXI:LANR
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "LAN Reset" on page 148
SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription <String>
This command shows the LXI instrument description. Also, the instrument description
can be changed using this command.
Parameters:
<String>
Example: SYST:LXI:MDES

Manual operation: See "Description" on page 147
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword <Password>
This command shows or changes the LXI password.
Parameters:
<Password> <password>
Example: SYST:LXI:PASS
Manual operation: See "Password" on page 147
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] <Password>
This command enables access to the service functions by means of the password.
Parameters:
<Password> <password>
Example: SYST:PASS XXXX
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Password" on page 162
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet
This command resets the service password.
Example: SYST:PASS:RES
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Reset Password" on page 162
SYSTem:PRESet
This command initiates an instrument reset.
The effect of this command corresponds to that of the PRESET key with manual oper-
ation or to the *RST command. For details on preset settings refer to Chapter 4.2.1,
"Initializing the Configuration – PRESET Key", on page 183.
Example: SYST:PRES

SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband <State>
This command defines which option is returned when the *OPT? query is executed,
depending on the state of the wideband option.
It is only available for PSA89600 emulation.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | HIGH
OFF
The option is indicated as "B7J"
ON
The 40 MHz wideband is used.
The option is indicated as "B7J, 140".
HIGH
The 80 MHz wideband is used.
The option is indicated as "B7J, 122".
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Wideband" on page 151
SYSTem:REBoot
This command reboots the instrument, including the operating system.
Usage: Event
SYSTem:REVision:FACTory
Resets the response to the REV? query to the default value, e.g. after a user string
was defined using the SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] command. (REV? query availa-
ble for HP emulation only, see Chapter 5.3.5, "GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE,
8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E", on page 966.)
Example: Define the system language:
SYST:LANG '8563E'
Set the response back to factory setting:
SYS:REV:FACT
Query the revision:
REV?
Response:
920528
Usage: Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "REV String Factory" on page 151

SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] <Name>
Sets the response to the REV? queryto the defined string (HP emulation only, see
Chapter 5.3.5, "GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and
8594E", on page 966).
Parameters:
<Name>
Example: Define the system language:
SYST:LANG '8563E'
Query the revision:
REV?
Response:
920528
Set the response to 'NewRevision':
SYST:REV:STR 'NewRevision'
Query the response:
SYST:REV:STR?
Response:
NewRevision
Manual operation: See "REV String User" on page 151
SYSTem:RSW <State>
Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI/HL HP model commands (for
details on the commands refer to Chapter 5.3.5, "GPIB Commands of HP Models
856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E", on page 966). If the repeated sweep is OFF,
the marker is set without sweeping before.
This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage
.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SYSTem:RSW ON
Manual operation: See "Sweep Repeat (On/Off)" on page 150
SYSTem:SHUTdown
This command shuts down the instrument.
Usage: Event
SYSTem:TIME <Time>
This command sets the internal clock. The sequence of entry is hour, minute, second.

Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to set the time.
Parameters:
<Time> 0 to 23, 0 to 59, 0 to 59
Example: SYST:TIME 12,30,30
Manual operation: See "Time+Date" on page 152
SYSTem:TWALking <Mode>
Defines how remote control programs are evaluated, in particular multiple commands
in one command line.
Note that the default setting is NORM; however, the setting defined by this command is
retained after a PRESET (*RST) operation.
Parameters:
<Mode> NORM
SCPI-conform behaviour
The first command is always referenced to the root node. Sub-
sequent commands, however, are referenced to the same tree
level as the previous command in a message unit.
ENHanced
If subsequent commands are not found on the same tree level
as the previous command, the SCPI parser searches "back-
wards up the tree" of defined SCPI commands. If the command
is found at a higher node, that command is used. Only if the
command is not found anywhere, an error message is returned.
*RST: setting is retained
Example: *RST
:SYSTem:TWALKing ENHanced
:SENSe:SWEep:MODE LIST
INIT:CONT OFF
LIST:RANG4:DEL;RANG3:DEL
//without enhanced tree walking this command would deliver an

error
Manual operation: See "Tree Walking" on page 151
SYSTem:VERSion?
This command queries the number of the SCPI version, which is relevant for the instru-
ment.
Example: SYST:VERS?

Usage: Query only

SCPI confirmed
5.3.5 GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and

8594E
The R&S FSVA/FSV analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of HP
models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A, 8566B, 8568A, 8568B
and 8594E.
Despite the differences in system architecture and device features, the supported com-
mands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of corre-
spondence with the original.
This includes the support of syntax rules for not only newer device families (B and E
models) but for the previous A family as well.
In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R&S FSVA/FSV is suffi-
cient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation.
After the introduction, this section includes the following topics:
● GPIB Languages...................................................................................................966
● Command Set of Models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A/B,
8568A/B, 8591E, 8594E, 71100C, 71200C, and 71209A.....................................968
● Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and 8568A Models
.............................................................................................................................. 992
● Special Behavior of Commands............................................................................993
● Model-Dependent Default Settings....................................................................... 994
● Data Output Formats.............................................................................................995
● Trace Data Output Formats.................................................................................. 995
● Trace Data Input Formats..................................................................................... 996
● GPIB Status Reporting..........................................................................................996
5.3.5.1 GPIB Languages
The R&S FSVA/FSV analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands used
by other devices. Thus it can emulate other devices in order to use existing remote
control programs.
The device model to be emulated is selected manually using the key sequence
"SETUP > General Setup > GPIB > Compatible Mode > GPIB Language". Via the
GPIB interface using the command.
In order to emulate device models that are not part of the selection list of the "GPIB
Language" softkey, you can modify the identification string received in response to the
ID command (key sequence "SETUP > General Setup > GPIB > ID String User").
Thus, any device model whose command set is compatible with one of the supported
device models can be emulated.
In order to emulate device models that are not part of the selection list of the GPIB
"Language" setting, you can modify the identification string received in response to the

ID command ("Identification String" setting). Thus, any device model whose command
set is compatible with one of the supported device models can be emulated.
Supported languages
Language Comment
SCPI
71209A Compatible to 8566A/B
8560E
8561E
8562E
8563E
8564E
8565E
8566B
8568A_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument
8568B Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
8568B_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument
8591E Compatible to 8594E
8594E Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
PSA89600
PSA
ESA
Notes:
● If you select a language other than "SCPI", the GPIB address is set to 18 if it was
20 before.
● The Start/stop frequency, reference level and number of sweep points are adapted
to the selected instrument model.
● When you switch between remote control languages, the following settings or
changes are made:
SCPI:

The instrument performs a PRESET.

8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM; FSEK:
– The instrument performs a PRESET.
– The following instrument settings are changed:
Table 5-24: Instrument settings for emulation of 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM; FSEK
instruments
Model # of Trace Start Freq. Stop Freq. Ref Level Input Coupling
Points
8566A/B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC
8568A/B 1001 0 Hz 1.5 GHz 0 dBm AC
8560E 601 0 Hz 2.9 GHz 0 dBm AC
8561E 601 0 Hz 6.5 GHz 0 dBm AC
8562E 601 0 Hz 13.2 GHz 0 dBm AC
8563E 601 0 Hz 26.5 GHz 0 dBm AC
8564E 601 0 Hz 40 GHz 0 dBm AC
8565E 601 0 Hz 50 GHz 0 dBm AC
8594E 401 0 Hz 3 GHz 0 dBm AC
Note: The stop frequency indicated in the table may be limited to the corresponding
frequency of the R&S FSVA/FSV, if required.
5.3.5.2 Command Set of Models 8560E, 8561E, 8562E, 8563E, 8564E, 8565E, 8566A/B,
8568A/B, 8591E, 8594E, 71100C, 71200C, and 71209A
As with the original units, the R&S FSVA/FSV includes the command set of the A mod-
els in the command set of the B models.
The HP model 8591E is compatible to HP model 8594E, the HP models 71100C,

71200C, and 71209A are compatible to HP models 8566A/B.
Command Supported subset Function Corresp. HP- Status

Models
A1 A1 Clear/Write A HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
A2 A2 Max Hold A HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
A3 A3 View A HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
A4 A4 Blank A HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A


Models
ABORT 1) ABORT Stop previous function HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/HP
8568B/HP
8594E
ADD Add HP 8566B/ available

HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
ADJALL ADJALL Adjust all HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
ADJCRT 2) ADJCRT Adjust CRT HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
ADJIF 2) ADJIF Auto adjust IF HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
AMB AMB ON|OFF Trace A – B -> Trace A HP 856xE/ available

AMB 1|0 HP 8594E
AMB?
AMBPL AMBPL ON|OFF HP 856xE/ available

AMBPL 1|0 HP 8566B/
AMBPL? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
AMPCORDATA AMPCORDATA Amplitude Correction HP 856xE available

<freq>,<amp>,.. Data
AMPCORDATA?
AMPCOR AMPCOR ON|OFF Amplitude Correction HP 856xE available

AMPCOR 1|0
AMPCOR?
AMPCORSIZE AMPCORSIZE? Amplitude Correction HP 856xE available

Data Array Size
AMPCORRCL AMPCORRCL <numeric Amplitude Correction HP 856xE available

value> Recall
AMPCORSAVE AMPCORSAVE Amplitude Correction HP 856xE available

<numeric value> Save


Models
ANNOT ANNOT ON|OFF Annotation HP 856xE/ available

ANNOT 1|0 HP 8566B/
ANNOT? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
APB APB Trace A + B -> Trace A HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
AT AT <numeric_value> DB Attenuation HP 8566A/ available

| DM HP 8568A/
AT DN HP 856xE/
AT UP HP 8566B/
AT AUTO HP 8568B/
AT? HP 8594E
AUNITS AUNITS DBM | DBMV | Amplitude Units HP 856xE/ available

DBUV | HP 8566B/
AUNITS? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
AUTOCPL AUTOCPL Coupling default HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
AXB AXB Exchange trace A and B HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
B1 B1 Clear/Write B HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
B2 B2 Max Hold B HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
B3 B3 View B HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
B4 B4 Blank B HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
BL BL Trace B – Display Line - HP 8566A/ available

> Trace B HP 8568A
BML BML Trace B – Display Line - HP 856xE/ available

> Trace B HP8594E


Models
BTC BTC Transfer Trace B -> C HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
BXC BXC Exchange Trace B and HP 856xE/ available

C HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
BLANK BLANK TRA|TRB|TRC Blank Trace HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
C1 C1 A-B off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
C2 C2 A-B -> A HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
CA CA Couple Attenuation HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
CAL 1) CAL ALL Start analyzer self align- HP 856xE/ available

ment
CAL ON HP 8566B/
CAL OFF HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
CF CF <numeric_value> Center Frequency HP 8566A/ available

HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A/
CF UP HP 856xE/
CF DN HP 8566B/
CF? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
CHANPWR CHANPWR TRA|TRB, Channel Power Mea- HP 856xE/ available

<numeric_value>,? surement HP 8594E
CHPWRBW CHPWRBW Channel Power Band- HP 856xE/ available

<numeric_value> HZ| width HP 8594E
KHZ|MHZ|GHZ
CLRW CLRW TRA|TRB|TRC Clear/Write Trace HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E


Models
CLS 1) CLS Clear all status bits HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
CONTS CONTS HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
COUPLE COUPLE AC|DC Input coupling HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
CR CR Couple RBW HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
CS CS Couple Step Size HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
CT CT Couple SWT HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
CTA Convert to absolute units HP 8566B/ available

HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
CV CV Couple VBW HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
D1 2) D1 Display Size normal HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
DA 2) DA Display address available
DEMOD 1) DEMOD ON|OFF|AM| AF Demodulator HP 856xE/ available

FM HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
DEMODAGC 2) DEMODAGC ON|OFF|1| Demodulation AGC HP 856xE/ available

0 HP 8566B/
DEMODAGC? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
DEMODT DEMODT Demodulation time HP 856xE/ available

<numeric_value> S|MS| HP 8566B/
US|SC
HP 8568B/
DEMODT UP|DN
HP 8594E
DEMODT?


Models
DET DET POS|SMP|NEG Detector HP 856xE/ available

DET? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
DISPOSE 2) ONEOS | TRMATH | available

ONSWP | ALL |
<numeric_value>
DIV Divide HP 8566B/ available

HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
DL DL <numeric_value> Display Line HP 856xE/ available

DB|DM HP 8566B/
DL DN HP 8568B/
DL UP HP 8594E
DL ON
DL OFF
DL?
DLE DLE ON|OFF Display Line enable HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
DONE DONE Done query HP 856xE/ available

DONE? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
DW 2) DW Write to display and available

increment address
E1 E1 Peak Search HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
E2 E2 Marker to Center Freq. HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
E3 E3 Deltamarker Step Size HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
E4 E4 Marker to Ref. Level available available
EDITDONE limit line edit done HP 856xE available
EDITLIML edit limit line HP 856xE available


Models
ERR ERR 250 cal level error Now some FSx errors HP8568A not yet availa-
are mapped to HP HP856xE ble
ERR 300 LO unlock
errors.
ERR 472 cal error digital
filter
ERR 473 cal error ana-
log filter
ERR 552 cal error log
amp
ERR 902 unscale track-
ing generator
ERR 906 oven cold
ERR 117 numeric unit
error
ERR 112 Unrecognized
Command
ERR? ERR? Error queue query HP 856xE/ not yet availa-

ble
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
EX EX Exchange trace A and B HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
FA FA <numeric_value> HZ| Start Frequency HP 8566A/ available

KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A/
FA UP HP 856xE/
FA DN HP 8566B/
FA? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
FB FB <numeric_value> HZ| Stop Frequency HP 8566A/ available

KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A/
FB UP HP 856xE/
FB DN HP 8566B/
FB? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
FDSP Frequency display off 8560E available

8561E
8562E
8563E
8564E
8565E
FOFFSET 1) FOFFSET Frequency Offset HP 856xE/ available

<numeric_value> HZ| HP 8566B/
KHZ|MHZ|GHZ
HP 8568B/
FOFFSET?
HP 8594E


Models
FREF FREF INT|EXT Reference Frequency HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
FS FS Full Span HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
FUNCDEF Define Function Function HP 8594E/ available

must be in one line HP 856xE/
between delimiters @
HP 8566B
GATE 1) GATE ON|OFF HP 856xE/ available

GATE 1|0 HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
GATECTL 1) GATECTL EDGE|LEVEL HP 856xE/ available

GATECTL? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
GD 1) GD <numeric_value> HP 856xE/ available

US|MS|SC HP 8566B/
GD DN HP 8568B/
GD UP HP 8594E
GD?
GL 1) GL <numeric_value> HP 856xE/ available

US|MS|SC HP 8566B/
GL DN HP 8568B/
GL UP
HP 8594E
GL?
GP 1) GP POS|NEG HP 856xE/ available

GP? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
GRAT 2) GRAT Graticule HP 856xE/ available

ON|OFF HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
I1 I1 HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A
I2 I2 HP 8566A/ available
HP 8568A


Models
ID ID Identify HP 8566A/ available

ID? HP 8568A/
HP 856xE/
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
INZ 1) INZ 75 Input Impedance HP 856xE/ available

INZ 50 HP 8566B/
INZ? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
IP IP Instrument preset HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KEYDEF KEYDEF Key definition HP 8566B/ available

HP 856xE/
HP 859xE
KEYEXEC KEYEXEC Key execute HP 8566B available
KS= KS= <numeric_value> Marker Frequency Coun- HP 8566A/ available

ter Resolution
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8568A
KS= DN
KS= UP
KS=?
KS/ KS/ Manual Peaking HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KS( KS( Lock register HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KS) KS) Unlock register HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KS91 KS91 Read Amplitude Error HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSA KSA Amplitude Units in dBm HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSB KSB Amplitude Units in dBmV HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSC KSC Amplitude Units in dBuV HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSD KSD Amplitude Units in V HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSE KSE <numeric_value>| Title mode HP 8566A/ available

<char data>@ HP 8568A


Models
KSG KSG Video Averaging on HP 8566A/ available

KSG ON HP 8568A
KSG <numeric_value>
KSH KSH Video Averaging Off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSK Marker to Next Peak HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSL Marker Noise off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSM Marker Noise on HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSO KSO Deltamarker to span HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSP KSP <numeric_value> HPIB address HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSQ 2) KSQ Band lock off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KST KST Fast Preset HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSV KSV <numeric_value> Frequency Offset HP 8566A/ available

KSV?
KSW KSW Error Correction Routine HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSX KSX Correction Values On HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSY KSY Correction Values Off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSZ KSZ <numeric_value> Reference Value Offset HP 8566A/ available

DB HP 8568A
KSZ?
KSa KSa Normal Detection HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSb KSb Pos Peak Detection HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSd KSd Neg Peak Detection HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A


Models
KSe KSe Sample Detection HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSg CRT beam off available
KSh CRT beam on available
KSj KSj View Trace C HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSk KSk Blank Trace C HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSl KSl Transfer B to C HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSm KSm Graticule off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSn2) KSn Grid on HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSo KSn Character display off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSp KSp Character display on HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSr KSr Create service request HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSt 2) KSt Band lock on HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
KSv 2) KSv Signal ident on HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
L0 L0 Display line off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
LB LB <numeric_value>| Label HP 8566A/ available

<char data>@ HP 8568A
LF LF Low frequency band pre- HP 8566A/ available

set HP 8568A
LIMD limit line delta HP 856xE available
LIMF limit line frequency HP 856xE available
LIMIFAIL limit fail query HP 856xE available
LIMIPURGE purge limit line HP 856xE available
LIMIRCL recall limit line HP 856xE available
LIMIREL relative limit line HP 856xE available


Models
LIMISAV save limit line HP 856xE available
LIMITEST limit line test HP 856xE available
LIML lower limit line value HP 856xE available
LIMM middle limit line value HP 856xE available
LIMTFL flat limit line segment HP 856xE available
LIMTSL slope limit line segment HP 856xE available
LIMU upper limit line value HP 856xE available
LG LG <numeric_value> DB Amplitude Scale Log HP 856xE/ available

| DM HP 8566B/
LG? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
LL 2) LL Plot command HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
LN LN Amplitude Scale Lin HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
M1 M1 Marker Off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
M2 M2 Marker Normal HP 8566A/ available

M2 <numeric_value> HP 8568A
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ
M2 DN
M2 UP
M2?
M3 M3 Delta Marker HP 8566A/ available

M3 <numeric_value> HP 8568A
HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ
M3 DN
M3 UP
M3?
M4 M4 <numeric_value> Marker Zoom HP 8566A/ available

MA MA Marker Amplitude HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
MC0 MC0 Marker Count off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A


Models
MC1 MC1 Marker Count on HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
MDS MDS Measurement data size HP 8566B available
MEAS Measurement status HP 856xE available
MF MF Marker Frequency HP 8566A/ available

MF? HP 8568A/
HP 856xE/
HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MINH1) MINH TRC Minimum Hold HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKA MKA <numeric_value> Marker Amplitude HP 856xE/ available

MKA? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKACT MKACT 1 Select the active marker HP 856xE/ not available

MKACT? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKBW 1) MKBW <numeric_value> N dB Down HP 856xE/ available

MKBW ON HP 8566B/
MKBW OFF HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKD MKD Delta Marker HP 856xE/ available

MKD <numeric_value> HP 8566B/
HZ|KHZ| HP 8568B/
MHZ|GHZ HP 8594E
MKD DN
MKD UP
MKD ON
MKD OFF
MKD?
MKDR MKDR <numeric_value> Delta Marker reverse HP 856xE/ available

HZ|KHZ| HP 8566B/
MHZ|GHZ| HP 8568B/
S|SC|MS|MSEC| HP 8594E
USMKDR?


Models
MKDR? Delta Marker reverse available

query
MKF MKF <numeric_value> Set Marker Frequency HP 856xE/ available

HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ HP 8566B/
MKF? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKFC MKFC ON|OFF Frequency Counter HP 856xE/ available

on/off HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKFCR 1) MKFCR Frequency Counter Res- HP 856xE/ available

<numeric_value> olution HP 8566B/
HZ|KHZ| MHZ|GHZ HP 8568B/
MKFCR DN HP 8594E
MKFCR UP
MKFCR?
MKMIN MKMIN Marker -> Min HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKN MKN Normal Marker HP 856xE/ available

MKN <numeric_value> HP 8566B/
MKN DN HP 8594E
MKN UP
MKN ON
MKN OFF
MKN?
MKNOISE MKNOISE ON|OFF Noise Measurement HP 856xE/ available

MKNOISE 1|0 HP 8566B/
MKNOISE? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKOFF MKOFF Marker off HP 856xE/ available

MKOFF ALL HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKP MKP <numeric_value> Marker position HP 856xE/ available

MKP? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E


Models
MKPK MKPK Marker Search HP 856xE/ available

MKPK HI HP 8566B/
MKPK NH HP 8568B/
MKPK NR HP 8594E
MKPK NL
MKPT MKPT Marker Peak Threshold HP 856xE/ available

MKPT HI HP 8566B/
MKPT NH HP 8568B/
MKPT NR HP 8594E
MKPT NL
MKPX MKPX <numeric_value> Peak Excursion HP 856xE/ available

DB HP 8566B/
MKPX DN HP 8568B/
MKPX UP HP 8594E
MKPX?
MKRL MKRL Ref Level = Marker HP 856xE/ available

Level HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKSP MKSP Deltamarker to span HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKSS MKSS CF Stepsize = Marker HP 856xE/ available

Freq HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKT MKT <numeric_value> MKF = fstart + MKT/ HP 856xE/ available

SWT*Span
S|MS|US|SC HP 8594E
MKT?
MKTRACE MKTRACE TRA|TRB| Marker to Trace HP 856xE/ available

TRC HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MKTRACK MKTRACK ON|OFF Signal Track HP 856xE/ available

MKTRACK 1|0 HP 8566B/
MKTRACK? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E


Models
MKTYPE MKTYPE AMP Marker type HP 856xE/ available

MK TYPE? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
ML Mixer level HP 856xE available
MOV MOV TRA|TRB|TRC, Move Trace Contents HP 856xE/ available

TRA|TRB|T RC HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MPY Multiply HP 8566B/ available

HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
MT0 MT0 Marker Track Off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
MT1 MT1 Marker Track On HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
MXMH MXMH TRA|TRB Maximum Hold HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
NORMALIZE NORMALIZE Normalize trace HP 856xE/ not available

HP 8566B/ available
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
NRL 1) NRL <numeric_value> Normalized Reference HP 856xE/ available

DB | DM Level HP 8566B/
NRL? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
NRPOS NRPOS Normalize position HP 856xE/ available

<numeric_value> HP 8566B/
NRL? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
O1 O1 Format ASCII, Values 0 HP 8566A/ available

to 4095 HP 8568A
O2 O2 Format Binary, HP 8566A/ available

Values 0 to 4095 HP 8568A
O3 O3 Format ASCII HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A


Models
OA OA Output All HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
OL OL <80 characters> Output Learn String HP 8566A/ available

OL? HP 8568A
OT OT Output Trace Annota- HP 8566A/ available

tions HP 8568A
PA PA <numeric_value>, Plot command HP 8566A/ available

<numeric_value HP 8568A
PD PD <numeric_value>, Plot command HP 8566A/ available

<numeric_value HP 8568A
PH_MKF Spot frequency in Hz HP 856xE available
PH_FMIN Min offset frequency to HP 856xE available

be measured
PH_FMAX Max offset frequency to HP 856xE available

be measured
PH_MKA Queries amplitude at the HP 856xE available

spot frequency
PH_DRIFT 0: for stable signals, 1: HP 856xE available

for drifty
PH_RLVL Reference level for the HP 856xE available

log plot
PH_SMTHV Trace smoothing HP 856xE available
PH_VBR Filtering HP 856xE available
PH_RMSPT Amount of data points to HP 856xE available

skip when doing the inte-
gration
PH_RMSFL Lower integration fre- HP 856xE available

quency in Hz
PH_RMSFU Upper integration fre- HP 856xE available

quency in Hz
PH_EXIT Quits phase noise HP 856xE available
PH_F_UDT Updates internal fre- HP 856xE available

quency variables
PH_LMT_L Apply limits to PH_FMIN HP 856xE available

and PH_FMAX
PH_MEAS Generates log frequency HP 856xE available

plot
PH_MKF_D Updates the spot fre- HP 856xE available

quency


Models
PH_RMS Requests the rms phase HP 856xE available

noise
PH_RMSFT Updates internal fre- HP 856xE available

quency variables
PH_RMSX Calculates the rms HP 856xE available

phase noise
PH_SPOTF Executes the spot fre- HP 856xE available

quency measurement
PLOTORG 2) PLOTORG DSP|GRT Plot command HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
PLOTSRC 2) PLOTSRC ANNT|GRT| Plot command HP 856xE/ available

TRB| TRA|ALLDSP|GRT HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
PP PP Preselector Peaking HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
PRINT 1) PRINT Hardcopy HP 856xE/ available

PRINT 1|0 HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
PSDAC 2) PSDAC Preselector DAC value HP 856xE/ available

PSDAC UP|DN HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
PSTATE 2) PSTATE ON|OFF|1|0 Protect State HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
PU PU Pen Up HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
PWRBW PWRBW Power Bandwidth HP 8566B/ available

HP 859x/
HP 856xE
R1 R1 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A

HP 8568A


Models

HP 8568A

HP 8568A
RB RB <numeric_value> Resolution Bandwidth HP 856xE/ available

RB DN HP 8568B/
RB UP HP 8594E
RB AUTO
RB?
RBR RBR <numeric_value> Resolution Bandwidth HP 856xE/ available

Ratio
RBR DN HP 8566B/
RBR UP HP 8568B/
RBR? HP 8594E
RC1…6 RC1…6 Recall Last State HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
RCLS RCLS <numeric_value> Recall State Register HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
RCLT RCLT TRA|TRB, <num- Recall Trace HP856xE/ available

ber> HP8594E
RESET RESET Instrument preset HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
REV REV Firmware revision HP 856xE/ available

REV? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
RL RL <numeric_value> Reference Level HP 856xE/ available

DB|DM HP 8566B/
RL DN HP 8568B/
RL UP HP 8594E
RL?
RLCAL RLCAL Reference Level Calibra- HP 856xE/ available

<numeric_value> tion HP 8566B/
RL? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E


Models
RCLOSCAL RCLOSCAL Recall Open/Short Aver- HP 856xE/ not available

age HP 8594E
RCLTHRU RCLTHRU Recall Thru HP 856xE/ not available

HP 8594E
RLPOS 1) RLPOS Reference Level Position HP 856xE/ available

RLPOS DN HP 8568B/
RLPOS UP HP 8594E
RLPOS?
ROFFSET ROFFSET Reference Level Offset HP 856xE/ available

<numeric_value> DB | HP 8566B/
DM
HP 8568B/
ROFFSET?
HP 8594E
RQS RQS Service Request Bit HP 856xE/ available

mask HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
S1 S1 Continuous Sweep HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
S2 S2 Single Sweep HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
SADD add a limit line segment HP 856xE available
SAVES SAVES Save State Register HP 856xE/ available

HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SAVET SAVET TRA|TRB,<num- Save Trace HP856xE/ available

ber> HP8594E
SDEL delete limit line segment HP 856xE available
SDON limit line segment done HP 856xE available
SEDI edit limit line segment HP 856xE available
SMOOTH SMOOTH TRA|TRB| Smooth Trace HP 856xE/ available

TRC, <number of HP 8566B/
points>
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SNGLS SNGLS Single Sweep HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E


Models
SQUELCH 2) SQUELCH Squelch HP 856xE/ available

DM | DB HP 8568B/
SQUELCH UP|DN HP 8594E
SQUELCH ON|OFF
SP SP <numeric_value> Span HP 8566A/ available

SP DN HP 856xE/
SP UP HP 8566B/
SP? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SRCNORM 1) SRCNORM ON|OFF Source Normalization HP 856xE/ not available

SRCNORM 1|0 HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SRCPOFS 1) SRCPOFS Source Power Offset HP 856xE/ not available

DM
HP 8568B/
SRCPOFS DN
HP 8594E
SRCPOFS UP
SRCPOFS?
SRCPWR 1) SRCPWR Source Power HP 856xE/ not available

DM
HP 8568B/
SRCPWR DN
HP 8594E
SRCPWR UP
SRCPWR ON
SRCPWR OFF
SRCPWR?
SS SS <numeric_value> CF Step Size HP 8566A/ available

SS DN HP 856xE/
SS UP HP 8566B/
SS AUTO HP 8568B/
SS? HP 8594E
ST ST <numeric_value> Sweep Time HP 8566A/ available

US|MS|SC HP 8568A/
ST DN HP 856xE/
ST UP HP 8566B/
ST AUTO HP 8568B/
ST? HP 8594E


Models
STB STB Status byte query HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
STOREOPEN STOREOPEN Store Open HP 856xE/ not available

HP 8594E
STORESHORT STORESHORT Store Short HP 856xE/ not available

HP 8594E
STORETHRU STORETHRU Store Thru HP 856xE/ not available

HP 8594E
SUB Subtract HP 8566B/ available

HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SUM sum of trace amplitudes HP 8566B/ available

HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SV1…6 SV1…6 Save State HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
SWPCPL 2) SWPCPL SA | SR Sweep Couple HP 856xE/ available

SWPCPL? HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
SWPOUT 2) SWPOUT FAV|FAVA| Sweep Output HP 856xE/ available

RAMP HP 8566B/
SWPOUT? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
T0 T0 Threshold off HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
T1 T1 Free Run Trigger HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
T2 2) T2 Line Trigger HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
T3 T3 External Trigger HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
T4 T4 Video Trigger HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
TA TA Transfer A HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A


Models
TACL TACL? Returns instantaneous not available

See TRACe<trace
#>:IMMediate:LEVel? for
full description.
TBCL TBCL?
TCCL TCCL?
TACR TACR? Returns instantaneous not available

See TRACe<trace
#>:IMMediate:LEVel? for
full description.
TBCR TBCR?
TCCR TCCR?
TB TB Transfer B HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
TDF TDF P Trace Data Format HP 856xE/ available

TDF M HP 8566B/
TDF B HP 8568B/
TDF A HP 8594E
TDF I
TH TH <numeric_value> Threshold HP 856xE/ available

DB|DM HP 8566B/
TH DN HP 8568B/
TH UP HP 8594E
TH ON
TH OFF
TH AUTO
TH?
THE THE ON| OFF Threshold Line enable HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TIMEDSP 1) TIMEDSP ON|OFF Time Display HP 856xE/ available

TIMEDSP 1|0 HP 8566B/
TIMEDSP? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TM TM FREE|VID|EXT| Trigger Mode HP 856xE/ available

LINE2) HP 8566B/
TM? HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TM LINE 2) TM LINE Trigger Line HP 8566B available


Models
TRA TRA B Transfer A HP 856xE/ available

TRA A HP 8566B/
TRA I HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TRB TRB B Transfer B HP 856xE/ available

TRB A HP 8566B/
TRB I HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TRSTAT TRSTAT? Trace State Query HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
TS TS Take Sweep HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
UR 2) UR Plot Command HP 8566A/ available

HP 8568A
VARDEF VARDEF Variable definition, HP 8566B/ available

arrays are not supported HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
VAVG VAVG Video Averaging HP 856xE/ available

VAVG TRA|TRB|TRC HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E
VB VB <numeric_value> Video Bandwidth HP 856xE/ available

VB DN HP 8568B/
VB UP HP 8594E
VB AUTO
VB?
VBR 1) VBR <numeric_value> Video Bandwidth Ratio HP 856xE/ available

VBR DN HP 8566B/
VBR UP HP 8568B/
VBR? HP 8594E
VIEW VIEW TRA|TRB|TRC HP 856xE/ available

HP 8566B/
HP 8568B/
HP 8594E


Models
VTL VTL <numeric_value> Video Trigger Level HP 856xE/ not available

DB|DM HP 8594E
VTL DN
VTL UP
VTL?
1) HP 8594E only
2) Command is accepted without error message, but is ignored
5.3.5.3 Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and 8568A Models
The command syntax is very different for models A and B. Different names are
assigned to identical instrument functions, and the command structure likewise differs
considerably between models A and models B.
The command structure for models A is as follows:
<command>::= <command
code>[<SPC>][<data>|<step>][<SPC>][<delimiter>][<command
code>]…<delimiter>
<data>::= <Value>[<SPC>][<units
code>][<SPC>][<delimiter>][<SPC>][<data>]…
<step>::= UP|DN
where
<command code> = see Table "Supported Commands"
<Value> = integer or floating-point numerical value
<units code> = DM | -DM | DB | HZ | KZ | MZ | GZ | MV | UV | SC | MS | US
<delimiter> = <CR> | <LF> | <,> | <;> | <ETX>
<SPC> = 3210
<ETX> = 310
Command sections given in [ ] are optional.

The R&S FSVA/FSV GPIB hardware differs from that used in the HP analyzers. There-
fore, the following constraint exists:
<LF>| <EOI> are still used as delimiters since the GPIB hardware is able to identify
them. The other delimiters are identified and evaluated during syntax analysis.

5.3.5.4 Special Behavior of Commands
Command Known Differences
ABORT Does not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the status byte. An addi-
tional DONE is required for that purpose.
ANNOT Only frequency axis annotation is affected.
AT AT DN/UP: Step size
CAL The CAL commands do not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the sta-
tus byte. An additional DONE command is required for that purpose.
CF Default value, range, step size
CR Default ratio Span/RBW
CT Formula for coupled sweep time
CV Default ratio RBW/VBW
DEMOD requires option R&S FSV-B3
DET DET? returns SAMP instead of SMP on the R&S FSVA/FSV.

DET not automatically set the command complete bit (bit 4) in the status byte. An addi-
tional DONE is required for that purpose.
ERR? Deletes the error bit in the status register but always returns a '0' in response.
FA Default value, range, step size
FB Default value, range, step size
ID Query of instrument type. The instrument type entered with "SETUP > General Setup >
GPIB > ID String User" is returned.
M2 Default value, range, step size
M3 Default value, range, step size
MKACT Only marker 1 is supported as the active marker.
MKBW Default value
MKPT Step size
MKPX Step size
OL? Storage of instrument settings:

80 characters are returned as information on the instrument settings.
The contents of the 80 characters returned does not correspond to the original data con-
tents of the 8566A/8568A family.
OL Readout of instrument settings:

The 80 characters read by means of OL? are accepted as information on the correspond-
ing instrument settings.
The contents of the 80 characters read does not correspond to the original data contents
of the 8566A/8568A family.
RB Default value, range, step size
RL Default value, step size

Command Known Differences
RLPOS Adapts the position of the reference level even if the tracking generator normalization is
not active.
RQS Supported bits:

1 (Units key pressed)
2 (End of Sweep)
3 (Device error)
4 (Command complete)
5 (Illegal command)
SRCNORM Requires option R&S FSV-B9 or R&S FSV-B10
SRCPWR Requires option R&S FSV-B9 or R&S FSV-B10
SP Default value, range, step size
SS Default value, range, step size
ST Default value, range, step size
STB The status bits are mapped as described with command RQS.
Note: Bit 2 and 4 are always set in parallel if "Command Complete" or "End of Sweep" are
recognized. The R&S FSVA/FSV cannot distinguish between these conditions. Addition-
ally these bits are not suitable for synchronization on the end of sweep in continuous
sweep operation.
TA Output of 1001 trace points of trace A in O1 or O3 format.
TB Output of 1001 trace points of trace B in O1 or O3 format.
TH Default value
VB Range
VBR Default value
5.3.5.5 Model-Dependent Default Settings
If the GPIB language is switched over to an 85xx model, the GPIB address is automati-
cally switched over to 18 provided that the default address of the R&S FSVA/FSV (20)
is still set. If a different value is set, this value is maintained. Upon return to SCPI, this
address remains unchanged.
The following table shows the default settings obtained after a change of the GPIB lan-
guage and for the commands IP, KST and RESET:
Points
8566A/B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC
8568A/B 1001 0 Hz 1.5 GHz 0 dBm AC
8560E 601 0 Hz 2.9 GHz 0 dBm AC
8561E 601 0 Hz 6.5 GHz 0 dBm AC

Points
8562E 601 0 Hz 13.2 GHz 0 dBm AC
8563E 601 0 Hz 26.5 GHz 0 dBm AC
8564E 601 0 Hz 40 GHz 0 dBm AC
8565E 601 0 Hz 50 GHz 0 dBm AC
8594E 401 0 Hz 3 GHz 0 dBm AC
Stop frequency
The stop frequency given in the table may be limited to the corresponding frequency
range of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
Command LF sets the stop frequency for 8566A/B to a maximum value of 2 GHz.
Test points (trace points)
The number of trace points is switched over only upon transition to the REMOTE state.
5.3.5.6 Data Output Formats
In the case of the SCPI and IEEE488.2 standards, the output formats for numerical
data are flexible to a large extent. The output format for the HP units, by contrast, is
accurately defined with respect to the number of digits. The memory areas for reading
instrument data have therefore been adapted accordingly in the remote-control pro-
grams for instruments of this series.
Therefore, in response to a query, the R&S FSVA/FSV returns data of the same struc-
ture as that used by the original instruments; this applies in particular to the number of
characters returned.
Two formats are currently supported when trace data is output: Display Units (com-
mand O1) and physical values (command O2, O3 or TDF P). As to the "Display Units"
format, the level data of the R&S FSVA/FSV is converted to match the value range and
the resolution of the 8566/8568 series. Upon transition to the REMOTE state, the
R&S FSVA/FSV is reconfigured such that the number of test points (trace points) cor-
responds to that of the 85xx families (1001 for 8566A/B and 8568A/B, 601 for 8560E to
8565E, 401 for 8594E).
5.3.5.7 Trace Data Output Formats
All formats are supported for trace data output: display units (command O1), display
units in two byte binary data (command O2 or TDF B and MDS W), display units in one
byte binary data (command O4 or TDF B and MDS B) and physical values (commands
O3 or TDF P). With format "display units" the level data is converted into value range
and resolution of the 8566/8568 models. On transition to REMOTE state the number of
trace points are reconfigured in order to be conform to the selected instrument model
(1001 for 8566A/B and 8568 A/B, 601 for 8560E to 8565E, 401 for 8594E).

5.3.5.8 Trace Data Input Formats
Trace data input is only supported for binary date (TDF B, TDF A, TDF I, MDS W, MDS
B).
5.3.5.9 GPIB Status Reporting
The assignment of status bits by commands R1, R2, R3, R4, RQS is supported.
The STB command and the serial poll respond with an 8-bit value with the following
assignment:
Bit enabled by RQS Description
0 not used (value 0)
1 Units key pressed
2 End of Sweep
3 Device Error
4 Command Complete
5 Illegal Command
6 Service Request
7 not used (value 0)
Bits 0 and 7 are not used and always have the value 0.
Please note that the R&S FSVA/FSV reports any key pressed on the front panel rather
than only the unit keys if bit 1 was enabled.
Another difference is the behavior of bit 6 when using the STB? query. On the HP ana-
lyzers this bit monitors the state of the SRQ line on the bus. On the R&S FSVA/FSV
this is not possible. Therefore this bit is set, as soon as one of the bits 1 to 5 is set. It
won't be reset by performing a serial poll.
5.3.6 Reference: Command Set of Emulated PSA Models
The R&S FSVA/FSV analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of
PSA89600 and ESA instruments.
Despite the differences in system architecture and device features, the supported com-
mands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of corre-
spondence with the original.
In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R&S FSVA/FSV is suffi-
cient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation.

Supported 89600 commands
*CAL?
*CLS
*ESE
*ESR?
*IDN?
*IST?
*OPC
*OPT?
*PCB
*PRE
*PSC
*RST
*SRE
*STB?
*TRG
*TST?
*WAI
:CALibration:AUTO OFF|ON|ALERt
:CALibration:TCORrections AUTO|ON|OFF
:CONFigure:WAVeform
:DIAGnostic:EABY ON|OFF
:DIAGnostic:LATCh:VALue <numeric>
:DIAGnostic:LATCh:SELect <string>
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA <string>
:DISPlay:ENABle OFF|ON
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:[SCALe]:PDIVision <numeric>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:[SCALe]:RLEVel <numeric>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:[SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <numeric>
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped
:FORMat[:DATA] ASCii|REAL|UINT|MATLAB,<numeric>
:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON
:INITiate[:IMMediate]
:INSTrument:CATalog?

:INSTrument:NSELect <numeric>
:MMEMory:CATalog? <dir_name>
:MMEMory:COPY <‘file_name1’>,<‘file_name2’>
:MMEMory:DATA <‘file_name’>,<definite_length_block>
:MMEMory:DELete <‘file_name’>
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<‘file_name’>
:MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe 1,<‘file_name’>
:MMEMory:MDIRectory <‘dir_name’>
:MMEMory:MOVE <‘file_name1’>,<‘file_name2’>
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<‘file_name’>
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe <numeric>,<‘file_name’>
:READ:WAVform?
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <numeric>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt <numeric>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP <numeric>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN <numeric>
[:SENSe]:POWer:ATTenuation <numeric>
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <numeric>
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:OUTPut OFF|ON
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal|EXTernal|EAUTo
[:SENSe]:SPECtrum:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal<1|2>|IF|IMMediate
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:ADC:RANGe P6
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:APER?
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:AVERage:TACount <numeric>
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:BWIDth:ACTive?
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:BWIDth:TYPE FLAT|GAUSsian
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:IFGain <numeric>
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:IFPath NARRow|WIDE
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:NCPTrace ON|OFF
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:PDIT ON|OFF
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SRATe <numeric>
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SWEep:TIME <numeric>
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:TRIGger:EOFFset?

[:SENSe]:WAVeform:TRIGger:INTerpolation ON|OFF
[:SENSe]:WAVeform:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal<1|2>|IF|IMMediate
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration[:EVENt]?
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition <number>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]?
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <integer>
:SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day>
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
:SYSTem:KLOCK?
:SYSTem:MESSage <string>
:SYSTem:PRESet

Remote Control – Programming Examples
:SYSTem:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second>
:SYSTem:VERSion?
:TRACe:COPY <src_trace>,<dest_trace>
:TRACe[:DATA] TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6, <definite_length_block> |

<comma_separated_ASCII_data>
:TRACe:MODE WRITe|MAXHold|MINHold|VIEW|BLANk
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTermal:DELay <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTermal:LEVel <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTermal:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:DELay <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:LEVel <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate|VIDeo|EXTernal<1|2>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <numeric>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:FREQuency <freq>
5.4 Remote Control – Programming Examples

In this chapter, more complex programming examples are given. In the
R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide, basic steps in remote control programming are
provided.
The following programming examples have a hierarchical structure, i.e. subsequent
examples are based on previous ones. It is thus possible to compile an operational
program from the modules of the given examples very easily. VISUAL BASIC has been
used as programming language. However, the programs can be translated into other
languages.
In programming languages as C, C++ or programs as MATLAB, NI Interactive Control,

a backslash starts an escape sequence (e.g. "\n" is used to start a new line). In these
programming languages and programs, two backslashes instead of one must be used
in remote commands (for an example refer to the R&S FSVA/FSV Quick Start Guide.)

5.4.1 Service Request........................................................................................................1002

5.4.1.1 Initiate Service Request............................................................................................ 1002
5.4.1.2 Waiting for the Arrival of a Service Request............................................................. 1004
5.4.1.3 Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse................................................. 1005
5.4.1.4 Service Request Routine.......................................................................................... 1006
5.4.1.5 Reading Out the Output Buffer..................................................................................1007
5.4.1.6 Reading Error Messages.......................................................................................... 1007
5.4.1.7 Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers.........................................................................1008
5.4.1.8 Evaluation of Event Status Register..........................................................................1009
5.4.2 Using Marker and Delta Marker................................................................................ 1010
5.4.2.1 Shape Factor Measurement (using n dB down)........................................................1010
5.4.2.2 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point................................................................1011
5.4.2.3 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth........................................................................1012
5.4.3 Limit Lines and Limit Test......................................................................................... 1012
5.4.4 Measuring the Channel and Adjacent Channel Power............................................. 1014
5.4.5 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement.......................................................................... 1017
5.4.6 Time Domain Power Measurement...........................................................................1018
5.4.7 Fast Power Measurement on Power Ramps............................................................ 1019
5.4.7.1 Power Measurement with Multi-Summary Marker.................................................... 1019
5.4.7.2 Multi-Burst Power Measurement...............................................................................1021
5.4.8 Fast Level Measurement Using Frequency Lists...................................................... 1022
5.4.9 Level Correction of Transducers............................................................................... 1024
5.4.10 Measuring the Magnitude and Phase of a Signal..................................................... 1025
5.4.11 Reading and Writing Files......................................................................................... 1027
5.4.11.1 Reading a File from the Instrument...........................................................................1027
5.4.11.2 Creating a File on the Instrument..............................................................................1028
5.4.12 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement...................................................................1028
5.4.12.1 Using Predefined Standard Wibro.............................................................................1029
5.4.12.2 Defining 5 Ranges with all Parameters..................................................................... 1029
5.4.13 Spurious Emissions Measurement............................................................................1032
5.4.14 Averaging I/Q Data....................................................................................................1035
5.4.15 Using IQ Gating.........................................................................................................1036
5.4.16 Usage of Four Spectrum Instances...........................................................................1041

5.4.1 Service Request
The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in

which the relevant bits of the transition and enable registers are set. In addition the ser-
vice request event must be enabled in the VISA session.
5.4.1.1 Initiate Service Request
REM ---- Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case

' of errors -------
PUBLIC SUB SetupSRQ()
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*CLS") 'Reset status reporting system
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*SRE 168") 'Enable service request for
'STAT:OPER, STAT:QUES and ESR
'register
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*ESE 60") 'Set event enable bit for
'command, execution, device-
'dependent and query error
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767")
'Set OPERation enable bit for
'all events
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:OPER:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate OPERation
'Ptransition bits
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:QUES:ENAB 32767")
'Set questionable enable bits
'for all events
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:QUES:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate questionable
'Ptransition bits
CALL viEnableEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE, 0)
'Enable the event for service
'request
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL)
IF (status = VI_SUCCESS) THEN CALL Srq
'If SRQ is recognized =>
'subroutine for evaluation
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
Private mbSession As MessageBasedSession
Sub Main()
Console.WriteLine("Example of initialization _
of the SRQ in the case of errors.")
Dim SRQWaitTimeout = 4000 ' Timeout As Integer for WaitOnEvent
'Opening session
Try
'FSV is alias, instead of use resource string.

'For example on TCP use TCPIP0::192.168.1.2::inst0::INSTR

mbSession = CType(ResourceManager.GetLocalManager().Open("FSV"), _
MessageBasedSession)
mbSession.TerminationCharacterEnabled = True
Try
mbSession.Write("*CLS") 'Reset status reporting system
mbSession.Write("*SRE 168") 'Enable service request for
'STAT:OPER, STAT:QUES and ESR register
mbSession.Write("*ESE 60") 'Set event enable bit for
'command, execution, device-dependent and query error
mbSession.Write("STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767")
'Set OPERation enable bit for all events
mbSession.Write("STAT:OPER:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate OPERation Ptransition bits
mbSession.Write("STAT:QUES:ENAB 32767")
'Set questionable enable bits for all events
mbSession.Write("STAT:QUES:PTR 32767")
'Set appropriate questionable Ptransition bits
Console.WriteLine("Wait on event - Blocking")
mbSession.EnableEvent(MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest, _
EventMechanism.Queue)
'Enable the event for service request
'------------------------------------------------
' Your command plase use here
' mbSession.Write("Your command")
'------------------------------------------------
Dim Status = mbSession.WaitOnEvent( _

MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest, SRQWaitTimeout)
If (Status.EventType() = _
MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest) Then
Console.WriteLine("SRQ is recognized")
'If SRQ is recognized => subroutine for evaluation
Srq()
End If
Catch exp As Exception
Console.WriteLine(exp.Message)
End Try
Catch exp As InvalidCastException
Console.WriteLine("Resource selected must be a message-based session")
End Try
' Close session

mbSession.Dispose()
' Wait for end
Console.WriteLine("Press any key to end")

Console.ReadKey()
End Sub
5.4.1.2 Waiting for the Arrival of a Service Request
There are basically two methods of waiting for the arrival of a service request:
Blocking (user inputs not possible):

This method is appropriate if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an SRQ
is short (shorter than the selected timeout), if no response to user inputs is required
during the waiting time, and if – as the main criterion – the event is absolutely certain to
occur.
Reason:
From the time the viWaitOnEvent() function is called until the occurrence of the expec-
ted event, it does not allow the program to respond to mouse clicks or key entries dur-
ing the waiting time. Moreover, it returns an error if the SRQ event does not occur
within the predefined timeout period.
The method is, therefore, in many cases not suitable for waiting for measurement
results, especially when using triggered measurements.
The following function calls are required:
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL)
'Wait for service request user
'inputs are not possible during
'the waiting time!
IF (status = VI_SUCCESS) THEN CALL Srq
'If SRQ is recognized =>
'--------- Sweep in first Spectrum Tab and query marker --------------------

Dim Status = mbSession.WaitOnEvent( _
MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest, SRQWaitTimeout)
'Wait for service request user inputs are not possible
'during the waiting time!
If (Status.EventType() = MessageBasedSessionEventType.ServiceRequest) Then
'If SRQ is recognized => subroutine for evaluation
Srq()
End If
Non-blocking (user inputs possible):

This method is recommended if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an
SRQ is long (longer than the selected timeout), and user inputs should be possible dur-
ing the waiting time, or if the event is not certain to occur. This method is, therefore, the
preferable choice for waiting for the end of measurements, i.e. the output of results,
especially in the case of triggered measurements.

The method necessitates a waiting loop that checks the status of the SRQ line at regu-
lar intervals and returns control to the operating system during the time the expected
event has not yet occurred. In this way, the system can respond to user inputs (mouse
clicks, key entries) during the waiting time.
It is advisable to employ the Hold() auxiliary function, which returns control to the oper-
ating system for a selectable waiting time (see section Waiting Without Blocking the
Keyboard and Mouse), so enabling user inputs during the waiting time.
result% = 0
For i = 1 To 10 'Abort after max. 10 loop
'iterations
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_TMO_IMMEDIATE, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL)
'Check event queue
If (status = VI_SUCCESS) Then
result% = 1
CALL Srq 'If SRQ is recognized =>
Else
CALL Hold(20) 'Call hold function with
'20 ms 'waiting time. User inputs
'are possible.
Endif
Next i
If result% = 0 Then
Debug.Print "Timeout Error; Program aborted"'Output error message
STOP 'Stop software
Endif
5.4.1.3 Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse
A frequent problem with remote control programs using Visual Basic is to insert waiting
times without blocking the keyboard and the mouse.
If the program is to respond to user inputs also during a waiting time, control over the
program events during this time must be returned to the operating system. In Visual
Basic, this is done by calling the DoEvents function. This function causes keyboard-or
mouse-triggered events to be executed by the associated elements. For example, it
allows the operation of buttons and input fields while the user waits for an instrument
setting to be completed.
The following programming example describes the Hold() function, which returns
control to the operating system for the period of the waiting time selectable in millisec-
onds.
Rem ***********************************************************************
Rem The waiting function below expects the transfer of the desired
Rem waiting time in milliseconds. The keyboard and the mouse remain
Rem operative during the waiting period, thus allowing desired elements
Rem to be controlled
Rem ***********************************************************************

Public Sub Hold(delayTime As Single)

Start = Timer 'Save timer count on calling the
'function
Do While Timer < Start + delayTime/1000 'Check timer count
DoEvents 'Return control to operating
'system to enable control of
'desired elements as long as
'timer has not elapsed
Loop
End Sub
Rem ***********************************************************************
The waiting procedure is activated simply by calling Hold(<Waiting time in

milliseconds>).
5.4.1.4 Service Request Routine
A service request is processed in the service request routine.
The variables userN% and userM% must be pre-assigned usefully!
REM ------------ Service request routine ----------------------------------

Public SUB Srq()
ON ERROR GOTO noDevice 'No user existing
CALL viReadSTB(analyzer, STB%) 'Serial poll, read status byte
IF STB% > 0 THEN 'This instrument has bits set in
'the STB
SRQFOUND% = 1
IF (STB% AND 16) > 0 THEN CALL Outputqueue
IF (STB% AND 4) > 0 THEN CALL ErrorQueueHandler
IF (STB% AND 8) > 0 THEN CALL Questionablestatus
IF (STB% AND 128) > 0 THEN CALL Operationstatus
IF (STB% AND 32) > 0 THEN CALL Esrread
END IF
noDevice:
END SUB 'End of SRQ routine
REM ***********************************************************************
REM ---------- Subroutine for evaluation Service Request Routine ----------
Public Sub Srq()

Try
Dim mySTB As Short = mbSession.ReadStatusByte()
'Serial poll, read status byte
Console.WriteLine("Reading Service Request Routine:" + mySTB.ToString())
If mySTB > 0 Then 'This instrument has bits set in the STB
If (mySTB And 16) > 0 Then Call Outputqueue()
If (mySTB And 4) > 0 Then Call ErrorQueueHandler()

If (mySTB And 8) > 0 Then Call Questionablestatus()

If (mySTB And 128) > 0 Then Call Operationstatus()
If (mySTB And 32) > 0 Then Call Esrread()
End If
End Try
End Sub 'End of SRQ routine
Reading out the status event registers, the output buffer and the error/event queue is
effected in subroutines.
5.4.1.5 Reading Out the Output Buffer
REM -------- Subroutine for the individual STB bits -----------------------

Public SUB Outputqueue() 'Reading the output buffer
result$ = SPACE$(100) 'Make space for response
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
Debug.Print "Contents of Output Queue:"; result$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
REM -------- Subroutine for the output queue -----------------------

Public Sub Outputqueue() 'Reading the output buffer
Try
Dim result As String = mbSession.ReadString()
Console.WriteLine("Contents of Output Queue:" + result)
End Try
End Sub
5.4.1.6 Reading Error Messages
REM -------- Subroutine for reading the error queue -----------------------

Public SUB ErrorQueueHandler()
ERROR$ = SPACE$(100) 'Make space for error variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYSTEM:ERROR?")
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, ERROR$)
Debug.Print "Error Description:"; ERROR$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
REM -------- Subroutine for reading the error queue -----------------------

Sub ErrorQueueHandler()
Dim result As String
Dim hasErr As Boolean = True
Do
mbSession.Write("SYST:ERR?")
result = mbSession.ReadString()

Dim parts As String() = result.Split(",")

If parts(0) = 0 Then
hasErr = False
Console.WriteLine(result)
Else
Console.WriteLine(result)
End If
Loop While hasErr
End Sub
5.4.1.7 Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register ---------

Public SUB Questionablestatus()
Ques$ = SPACE$(20)
'Preallocate blanks to text
'variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?")
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Ques$)
Debug.Print "Questionable Status:"; Ques$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register ------------
Public SUB Operationstatus()
Oper$ = SPACE$(20) 'Preallocate blanks to text
'variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STATus:OPERation:EVENt?")
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Oper$)
Debug.Print "Operation Status:"; Oper$
END SUB
REM ***********************************************************************
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register ---------

Public Sub Questionablestatus()
Dim myQSR As String = Nothing
Try
myQSR = mbSession.Query("STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?") 'Read QSR
Console.WriteLine("Questionable Status:" + myQSR)
End Try
End Sub
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register ------------

Public Sub Operationstatus()
Dim myOSR As String = Nothing
Try
myOSR = mbSession.Query("STATus:OPERation:EVENt?") 'Read OSR
Console.WriteLine("Operation Status:" + myOSR)

End Try
End Sub
5.4.1.8 Evaluation of Event Status Register
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register ------------
Public SUB Esrread()
Esr$ = SPACE$(20) 'Preallocate blanks to text
'variable
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*ESR?") 'Read ESR
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, Esr$)
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 1) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Operation complete"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 2) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Request Control"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 4) > 0
THEN Debug.Print "Query Error"
THEN Debug.Print "Device dependent error"
THEN Debug.Print "Execution Error; Program aborted"'Output error message
STOP 'Stop software
END IF
THEN Debug.Print "Command Error; Program aborted"'Output error message
STOP 'Stop software
END IF
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 64) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "User request"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 128) > 0 THEN Debug.Print "Power on"END SUB
REM **********************************************************************
REM ------ Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register ------------
Public Sub Esrread()
Try
Dim myESR As Short = mbSession.Query("*ESR?") 'Read ESR
If (myESR And 1) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Operation complete")
If (myESR And 2) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Request Control")
If (myESR And 4) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Query Error")
If (myESR And 8) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Device dependent error")
If (myESR And 16) > 0 Then
Console.WriteLine("Execution Error; Program aborted") 'Output error message
Stop 'Stop software
End If
If (myESR And 32) > 0 Then
Console.WriteLine("Command Error; Program aborted") 'Output error message
Stop 'Stop software
End If
If (myESR And 64) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("User request")
If (myESR And 128) > 0 Then Console.WriteLine("Power on")

End Try
End Sub
5.4.2 Using Marker and Delta Marker
5.4.2.1 Shape Factor Measurement (using n dB down)
The n-dB-down function of the R&S FSVA/FSV is used twice to determine the shape
factor of a filter (ratio of bandwidths at 60 dB and 3 dB below the filter maximum).
The following example is again based on a signal with a level of -30 dBm at 100 MHz.
The shape factor is determined for the 30 kHz resolution bandwidth. The default setting
of the R&S FSVA/FSV is used for measurements (SetupInstrument).
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ShapeFactor()
result$ = Space$(100)
'--------- R&S FSV default setting ----------------------------------------
CALL SetupInstrument 'Default setting
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep
'--------- Set frequency ---------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:SPAN 1 MHz")
'Span
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "BAND:RES 30 kHz")
'Resolution bandwidth
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
'--------- Measure 60 dB value ---------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:PEXC 6 DB")
'Peak excursion
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:STAT ON")
'Marker1 on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:TRAC 1")
'Assign marker1 to trace1
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:MAX") 'Set marker1 to 100 MHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 45 dB")
'Read out bandwidth measured at
'45 dB
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?")
result60 = Val(result$)
'--------- Measure 3 dB down value-----------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3 dB")
'Read out bandwidth measured at
'3 dB
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?")
result3 = Val(result$)
'--------- Read out shape factor--------------------------------------------

Print "Shapefaktor 60 dB/3 dB:";result60/result3

END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.2.2 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point
The third order intercept point (TOI) is the (virtual) level of two adjacent useful signals
at which the intermodulation products of third order have the same level as the useful
signals.
The intermodulation product at fS2 is obtained by mixing the first harmonic of the useful
signal PN2 with signal PN1, the intermodulation product at fS1 by mixing the first har-
monic of the useful signal PN1 with signal PN2.
fs1 = 2 × fn1 – fn2 (1)
fs2 = 2 × fn2 – fn1 (2)
The following example is based on two adjacent signals with a level of -30 dBm at 100
MHz and 110 MHz. The intermodulation products lie at 90 MHz and 120 MHz accord-
ing to the above formula. The frequency is set so that the examined mixture products
are displayed in the diagram. Otherwise, the default setting of the R&S FSVA/FSV is
used for measurements (SetupInstrument).
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub TOI()
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Set status registers
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*RST") 'Reset instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD ON")
'ON: display on'OFF: off
'--------- Set frequency ---------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:STARt 85 MHz;STOP 125 MHz")
'Span
'--------- Set level -------------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -20 dBm")
'Reference level
'--------- TOI measurement -------------------------------------------------
'Peak excursion
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON")
'Switch on TOI measurement
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES?")
'and read out results
'--------- Read out result ------------------------------------------------
Print "TOI [dBm]:";result$

END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.2.3 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth
The example below is based on an AM-modulated signal at 100 MHz with the following
characteristics:
Carrier signal level -30 dBm
AF frequency 100 kHz
Modulation depth 50 %
The default setting of the analyzer for measurements can be used for the measure-
ments described below (SetupInstrument).
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub AMMod()
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "BAND:RES 30 kHz") 'Set appropriate RBW
'--------- Peak search -----------------------------------------------------
'Peak excursion
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:STAT ON")
'Marker 1 on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:TRAC 1")
'Assign marker1 to trace1
'--------- Measure modulation depth -----------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:MAX;FUNC:MDEP ON")
'Marker to Peak;
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:RES?")
'Measure mod. depth
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$) 'Read out result
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
Print "AM Mod Depth [%]:";result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.3 Limit Lines and Limit Test
The example below shows the definition and use of a new limit line 5 for trace 1 with
the following characteristics:
● Upper limit line
● Absolute x-axis in the frequency range
● 7 reference values:

– 120 MHz/-70 dB,

– 126 MHz/-40 dB,
– 127 MHz/-40 dB,
– 128 MHz/-10 dB,
– 129 MHz/-40 dB,
– 130 MHz/-40 dB,
– 136 MHz/-70 dB
● Relative y-axis with unit dB
● Absolute threshold at –75 dBm
● No margin
The signal of the integrated calibration source (128 MHz, -30 dBm) is used to check
the limit test.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub LimitLine()
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQUENCY:CENTER 128 MHz;Span 10 MHz")
'Span
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "Diag:Serv:Inp Cal")
'Cal signal on
'--------- Definition of limit lines ---------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:NAME 'TEST1'")
'Define name
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:COMM 'Upper limit'")
'Define comment
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:TRAC 1")
'Assign trace
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:CONT:DOM FREQ")
'Define x-axis range
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:CONT:MODE ABS")
'Define x-axis scaling
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:UNIT DB")
'Define y-axis unit
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:UPP:MODE REL")
'Define y-axis scaling
'--------- Definition of data points and threshold -------------------------
xlimit$ = "CALC:LIM5:CONT 120 MHZ,126 MHZ,127 MHZ,128 MHZ,129 MHZ,130 MHz,136 MHz"
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, xlimit$) 'Set values for x-axis
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:UPP -70,-40,-40,-20,-40,-40,-70")
'Set values for y-axis
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:UPP:THR -75 DBM")
'Set y threshold (only
'possible for relative
'y-axis)
'--------- Definition of margin or x/y offset-----------------------------
'A margin or an x/y offset can be defined here.

'----------- Activate and evaluate the limit line -------------

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:UPP:STAT ON")
'Activate line 5
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:STAT ON")
'Activate limit check
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM5:FAIL?")
'Query result of limit check
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$) 'Result: 1 (= FAIL)
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
Print "Limit Result Line 5: ";result$
'------ Evaluate limit line by means of status register -------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "*CLS") 'Reset status register
'--------- Measure ---------------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*OPC") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL viEnableEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE, 0)
Status = viWaitOnEvent(analyzer, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, VI_NULL, VI_NULL)
IF (status = VI_SUCCESS) THEN CALL Srq 'If SRQ is recognized =>
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
IF (status% = 1) THEN
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "STAT:QUES:LIM1:COND?")
'Read out STAT:QUES:LIMit
'register
IF ((Val(result$) And 16) <> 0) THEN
Print "Limit5 failed"ELSE
Print "Limit5 passed"END IF
END IF
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.4 Measuring the Channel and Adjacent Channel Power
In the following example, the channel and adjacent channel power is first measured on
a signal with a level of 0 dBm at 800 MHz to IS95. Then the channel and adjacent
channel power is measured on a GSM signal at 935.2 MHz with fast ACP measure-
ment (FAST ACP).
In addition, the limit test is activated.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ACP()
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Set status register
'ON: display on

'OFF: off
'--------- Set frequency ---------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:CENT 800 MHz")
'Set frequency
'--------- Set level -------------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 10 dBm")
'Reference level
'--------- Example 1: Configure CP/ACP for CDMA----------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP")
'ACP measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES F8CDMA")
'Select CDMA800 FWD
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:ACP 2")
'Select 2 adjacent channels
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:PRES ACP")
'Optimize settings
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV")
'Optimize reference level
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:MODE ABS")
'Absolute measurement
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:HSP ON")
'Fast ACP measurement
'--------- Perform measurement and query results --------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP")
'Query result CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$)
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
Print "Result (CP, ACP low, ACP up, Alt low, Alt up):"Print result$
'--------- Example 2: Configure CP/ACP manually for GSM--------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:CENT 935.2 MHz")
'Set frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP")
'ACP measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:ACP 1")
'1 adjacent channel
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:BAND 200 KHZ")
'Channel bandw. 200 kHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:BAND:ACH 200 KHZ")
'Adjacent channel band-
'width 200 kHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC 200 KHZ")
'Channel spacing 200 kHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:PRES ACP")
'Optimize settings
'Optimize reference level
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:MODE ABS")
'Absolute measurement
'--------- Start measurement and query result ------------------------------


CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP")
'Query result
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
Print "Result (CP, ACP low, ACP up):"Print result$
'--------- Active limit check ----------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30 DB, 30 DB")
'Set relative limit
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35 DBM,-35 DBM")
'Set absolute limit
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON")
'Rel. limit check on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON")
'Abs. limit check on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP ON")
'Limit check on
'--------- Start measurement and query result ------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?")
'--------- Read out result -------------------------------------------------
Print "Result Limit Check:";result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
Example of channel/adjacent-channel power measurement

POW:ACH:ACP 3
Sets the number of adjacent/alternate channels to 3.
POW:ACH:BAND 30 KHZ
Sets the bandwidth of the transmission channel to 30 kHz.
POW:ACH:BAND:ACH 40 KHZ
Sets the bandwidth of each adjacent channel to 40 kHz.
POW:ACH:BAND:ALT1 50 KHZ
Sets the bandwidth of each alternate channel to 50 kHz.
POW:ACH:BAND:ALT2 60 KHZ
Sets the bandwidth of alternate channel 2 to 60 kHz.
POW:ACH:SPAC 30 KHZ
Sets the spacing between the transmission channel and the adjacent channel to 30
kHz, the spacing between the transmission channel and alternate channel 1 to 60 kHz,
and the spacing between the transmission channel and alternate channel 2 to 90 kHz.

POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 100 KHZ

Sets the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the TX channel. For
details refer to [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<channel>
on page 842.
POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT2 140 KHZ
Sets the spacing between the transmission channel and alternate channel 2 to 140
kHz.
POW:ACH:MODE ABS
Switches on absolute power measurement.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP
Switches on the adjacent-channel power measurement.
INIT:CONT OFF
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP
Queries the result of adjacent-channel power measurement.
POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE
Defines the measured channel power as the reference value for relative power mea-
surements.
If the channel power only is to be measured, all commands relating to adjacent/alter-
nate channel bandwidth and channel spacings are omitted. The number of adjacent/
alternate channels is set to 0 with [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs
on page 834.
5.4.5 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement
In the following example, the bandwidth is to be found in which 95 % of the power of a

GSM signal is contained. Signal frequency is 935.2 MHz; channel bandwidth is 200
kHz.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub OBW()
'ON: display on
'OFF: off

'--------- Configure R&S FSV for OBW for GSM------------------------------

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:CENT 935.2 MHz")
'Set frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL OBW")
'OBW measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:BAND 200 KHZ")
'Channel bandw. 200 kHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:BWID 95PCT")
'Percentage of power
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:ACH:PRES OBW")
'Set frequency and optimize reference level
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENS:POW:NCOR OFF")
'Noise correction
'OFF: switch off
'ON: switch on
'--------- Perform measurement and query results ---------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW")
'Query result
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.6 Time Domain Power Measurement
In the following example, the mean carrier power of a signal with 300 kHz bandwidth at
100 MHz is to be determined. In addition, the peak power, the rms value and the stan-
dard deviation are measured. To do this, the time-domain-power measurement func-
tions are used.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub TimeDomainPower()
'ON: display on
'OFF: off
'--------- Configure R&S FSV for time domain power measurement ------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:CENT 100 MHz;SPAN 0Hz")
'Set frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "BAND:RES 300 kHz")
'Resolution bandwidth
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SWE:TIME 200US") 'Sweep time
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON")

'Peak measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON")
'Mean measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON")
'RMS measurement on
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON")
'Standard deviation on
'------------------- Perform measurement and query results ----------------
'Query results:
query$ = "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?;" 'Peak measurement
query$ = query$ + ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES?;"'Mean measurement
query$ = query$ + ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES?;"'RMS measurement
query$ = query$ + ":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:RES?"'Standard deviation
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, query$)
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.7 Fast Power Measurement on Power Ramps
A frequent task in mobile radio tests is measurement of a DUT at various power control
levels at the highest possible speed. The R&S FSVA/FSV offers two test functions for
this task, which can be used depending on the signal characteristics.
In the following, the two methods are presented by means of two examples.
5.4.7.1 Power Measurement with Multi-Summary Marker
The multi-summary marker function is suitable for measuring the power of a sequence
of pulses with the following characteristics:
● The pulses occur at identical time intervals, which is typical of GSM transmission in
slots, for example.
● The level of the first signal is reliably above threshold.
● The subsequent pulses may have any levels.
● The function uses the first pulse as a trigger signal. The power of the subsequent
pulses is determined exclusively via the timing pattern selected for the pulse
sequence. The function is, therefore, suitable for adjustments where the DUT out-
put power varies considerably and is not reliably above the trigger threshold.
● The measurement accuracy is determined by the ratio of pulse duration to total
measurement time; this should not be below 1:50.
● The function always uses TRACE 1.

Figure 5-5: Block diagram illustrating signal processing in analyzer
In the example below, a GSM pulse sequence of 8 pulses is measured with an offset of
50 ms of the first pulse, 450 ms measurement time/pulse and 576.9 ms pulse period.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub MultiSumMarker()
'--------- R&S FSV default setting---------------------------------------
CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep mode
'ON: switch display on
'OFF: switch display off
'--------- Configure R&S FSV for power measurement in time domain ---------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FREQ:CENT 935.2 MHz;SPAN 0Hz")
'Frequency setting
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 10 dBm")
'Set reference level to 10 dB
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INP:ATT 30 dB") 'Set input attenuation to 30 dB
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "BAND:RES 1 MHz;VID 3 MHz")
'Bandwidth setting
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "DET RMS") 'Select RMS detector
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRIG:SOUR VID") 'Trigger source: video
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRIG:LEV:VID 50 PCT")
'Trigger threshold: 50 %
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SWE:TIME 50ms") 'Sweep time ≥ 1 frame
'--------- Perform measurement and query results --------------------------
'Query results:
cmd$ = "CALC:MARK:FUNC:MSUM?"cmd$ = cmd$ + "50US," 'Offset of first pulse
cmd$ = cmd$ + "450US," 'Measurement time
cmd$ = cmd$ + "576.9US," 'Pulse period
cmd$ = cmd$ + "8" 'Number of bursts
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, cmd$)
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$) 'Read results

Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.7.2 Multi-Burst Power Measurement
The multi-burst power measurement function is suitable for measuring the power of a
sequence of pulses with the following characteristics:
● The pulses occur at variable time intervals.
● The levels of all pulses of the sequence are reliably above the trigger threshold, or
an external trigger signal is used.
● The function requires one trigger event per pulse. This means that if the video trig-
ger or the IF power trigger is used, the levels of all pulses must be above the trig-
ger threshold.
● The function is, therefore, particularly suitable for re-measuring DUTs already
adjusted and whose output power is within the specified range. The measurement
is optimized for minimum overhead relative to the actual measurement time.
Figure 5-6: Block diagram illustrating signal processing in analyzer
Either the root-mean-square power or the peak power is measured, depending on

whether the RMS detector or the PEAK detector is selected. The function always uses
TRACE 1.
The following parameters are to be set for this measurement:
● Analyzer frequency
● Resolution bandwidth
● Measurement time per single pulse
● Trigger source
● Trigger threshold
● Trigger offset
● Type of power measurement (PEAK, MEAN)

● Number of pulses to be measured

During the measurement, each pulse is mapped into a pixel of the screen, i.e. any
change of the trace can be detected only at the left-hand edge of the screen. Maximum
measurement speed is as usual achieved with the display switched off.
In the example below, a GSM pulse sequence of 8 pulses is measured with 5 ms trig-
ger offset, 434 ms measurement time/pulse, video trigger with 50 % trigger threshold,
and peak detection:
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub MultiBurstPower()
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD OFF")
'OFF: display off
'--------- Perform measurement and query results ---------------------
cmd$ = "MPOW? "cmd$ = cmd$ + "935.2 MHZ," 'Center frequency
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1 MHZ," 'Resolution bandwidth
cmd$ = cmd$ + "434US," 'Measurement time
cmd$ = cmd$ + "VID," 'Trigger source
cmd$ = cmd$ + "50PCT," 'Trigger threshold
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1US," 'Trigger offset
cmd$ = cmd$ + "PEAK," 'Peak detector
cmd$ = cmd$ + "8" 'Number of bursts
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$) 'Read results
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.8 Fast Level Measurement Using Frequency Lists
A typical task for the R&S FSVA/FSV is power measurement at a number of frequency
points, e.g. at multiples of the fundamental (harmonics measurement), or at frequen-
cies defined by a mobile radio standard (e.g. spectrum due to transients at ± 200 kHz,
± 400 kHz, etc about the carrier frequency of a GSM signal). In many cases, different
level and/or bandwidth settings are required for the different frequency points to match
the channel spacing and meet the requirements of dynamic range.
Especially for this application, the R&S FSVA/FSV offers a number of remote-control
functions (commands available in SENSe:LIST subsystem) that allow level measure-
ment based on a frequency list with different instrument settings assigned to different
frequencies. Not only the frequency list can be programmed, but also the measure-
ment types (PEAK, RMS, AVG) to be performed simultaneously can be selected.
The example below describes a harmonics measurement on a dual-band amplifier.
The harmonics level in general decreases as the frequency increases. To boost mea-

surement sensitivity, therefore, the reference level is lowered by 10 dB from the third
harmonic.
The following settings are used:
Reference level: 10.00 dBm up to first harmonic, 0 dBm from 2nd harmonic
RF attenuation: 20 dB
Electronic attenuation: 0 dB (OFF)
Filter type: NORMal
RBW: 1 MHz
VBW: 3 MHz
Measurement time: 300 ms
Trigger delay: 100 ms
Trigger: video, 45 %
Frequency Type
935.2 MHz GSM 900 fundamental
1805.2 MHz GSM 1800 fundamental
1870.4 MHz GSM 900 2nd harmonic
2805.6 MHz GSM 900 3rd harmonic
3610.4 MHz GSM 1800 2nd harmonic
3740.8 MHz GSM 900 4th harmonic
5815.6 MHz GSM 1800 3rd Harmonic
The frequencies are selected in ascending order to minimize system-inherent waiting

times resulting from frequency changes.
At each frequency point the peak power and the rms power are measured. The peak
power and the rms power values are stored alternately in the results memory.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub FrequencyList()
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:DISP:UPD OFF") 'Display off
'---------Configure R&S FSV for power measurement based on frequency list -
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRIG:LEV:IFP -20 dBm")
'Set IF power trigger level
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "LIST:POWer:SET ON,ON,OFF,IFP,POS,100us,0")
'--------- Perform measurement and query results ---------------------------

cmd$ = "LIST:POWer?"cmd$ = cmd$ + "935.2 MHZ, 10 dBm, 20 dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,

300 us, 0, "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1805.2 MHZ, 10 dBm, 20 dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,300 us, 0, "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "3610.4 MHz, 10 dBm,20 dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,300 us, 0, "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "3740.8 MHz, 0 dBm, 20 dB, OFF, NORM, 1 MHz,3 MHz,300 us, 0, "
cmd$ = cmd$ + "5815.6 MHz, 0 dBm, 20 dB, OFF, NORM, 1 MHz, 3 MHz, 300 us, 0"
Print result$
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.9 Level Correction of Transducers
In more complex test systems, the frequency response of the test setup must be taken
into account in all power measurements to avoid any measurement errors being intro-
duced from sources other than the DUT.
The R&S FSVA/FSV offers the possibility of defining a frequency-dependent attenua-
tion correction factor (transducer factor).
In the example below, a factor with the following characteristics is defined:
Name: Transtest
Unit: dB
Scaling: lin
Comment: simulated cable correction
Frequency Level
10 MHz 0 dB
100 MHz 3 dB
1 GHz 7 dB
3 GHz 10 dB
The factor is defined and can be activated as required.

REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub TransducerFactor()
'--------- Define transducer factor ---------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CORR:TRAN:SEL 'TRANSTEST'")
'Define "Transtest"'transducer factor
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CORR:TRAN:UNIT 'DB'")
'Unit 'dB'
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CORR:TRAN:SCAL LIN")
'Linear frequency-axis
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CORR:TRAN:COMM 'Simulated cable correction'")

cmd$ = "CORR:TRAN:DATA" 'Enter frequency and level

cmd$ = cmd$ + "10 MHz, 0," 'values. Level values without
cmd$ = cmd$ + "100 MHz, 3," 'unit!
cmd$ = cmd$ + "1GHz, 7,"cmd$ = cmd$ + "3GHz, 10"
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer,cmd$) 'Enter frequency and level values
'--------- Activate transducer ---------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "CORR:TRAN:STAT ON")
'Activate transducer factor
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.10 Measuring the Magnitude and Phase of a Signal
Due to the R&S FSVA/FSV's internal architecture, it is capable of measuring and out-
putting the magnitude and phase of a signal in addition to its power values. This opens
up a variety of possibilities for more in-depth analysis (FFT, demodulation, etc).
I/Q data is stored in memory areas each containing 512 k words. Hardware triggering
controls the memory.
The following example shows the steps necessary to collect data at a predefined sam-
pling rate and read it from the I/Q memory.
1. Data is output in the form of voltage values referred to the analyzer input. Data can
be read in binary or ASCII format.
● In binary format, the length information carried in the message header is evalu-
ated and used for calculating the x-axis values.
● In ASCII format, only a list of voltage values is output.
2. Binary data is read in three steps:
3. The number of digits carrying the length information is read.
4. The length information itself is read.
5. The trace data is read.
This procedure is necessary with programming languages like Visual Basic which sup-
port only structures of identical data types (arrays), whereas the binary data format
uses different data types in the header and the data section.
The arrays for measured data are dimensioned in such a way that they can accommo-
date the I/Q data of the R&S FSVA/FSV (2 × 512 k).
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ReadIQData()
'--------- Create variables -----------------------------------------------
Dim IData(131072) As Single 'Buffer for floating-point
'I data (= 512*1024 bytes)
Dim QData(131072) As Single 'Buffer for floating-point

'Q data (= 512*1024 bytes)

'Note:
'Visual Basic cannot read in
'data volumes larger than
'512 k words!
Dim digits As Byte 'No. of digits as length
Dim IQBytes As Long 'Length of trace data in bytes
Dim IQValues As Long 'No. of meas. values in buffer
Dim retCount As Integer 'Return count from read
asciiResult$ = Space$(6553600) 'Buffer for ASCII I/Q data
'(= 25*2*1024 bytes)
result$ = Space$(100) 'Buffer for simple results
'--------- Default setting ---------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:STAT ON")
'Activate I/Q data
'acquisition mode; must be
'done before TRAC:IQ:SET !
'Select number of test points
'(= 512 * 1024 – 512) at
'RBW 10 MHz, 'sample rate 32 MHz,
'trigger free run, pos. trigger
'edge and 0 s trigger delay.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10 MHz,32 MHz,IMM,POS,0,130560")
'--------- Read-out in binary format----------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FORMAT REAL,32")
'Set binary format
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:DATA?")
'Measure + read out I/Q data
CALL viRead(analyzer, result$, 2, retCount)
'Read and store length for
digits = Val(Mid$(result$, 2, 1)) 'number of digits
result$ = Space$(100) 'Re-initialize buffer
CALL viRead(analyzer, result$, digits, retCount)
'Read and store length
IQBytes = Val(Left$(result$, digits))
IQBytes = IQBytes/2 'Divide no. per buffer in half
CALL viRead(analyzer, IData(0), IQBytes, retCount)
'Read I data in buffer
CALL viRead(analyzer, QData(0), IQBytes, retCount)
'Read Q data in buffer
CALL viRead(analyzer, result$, 1, retCount)
'Read in end character <NL>
'--------- Output of binary data as frequency/level pair -----------------
IQValues = IQBytes/4 'Single Precision = 4 Bytes
For i = 0 To IQValues – 1
Print "I-Value["; i; "] = "; IData(i)
Print "Q-Value["; i; "] = "; QData(i)
Next i
'--------- Read-out in ASCII format ----------------------------------------

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "FORMAT ASCII") 'Set ASCII format

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:DATA?")
'Re-measure and read out
'I/Q data
CALL InstrRead(analyzer, asciiResult$)
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:STAT OFF")
'Stop I/Q data aquisition
'mode if no further
'measurements are to be
'done
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.11 Reading and Writing Files
5.4.11.1 Reading a File from the Instrument
In the following example, the TEST1.R&S FSVA/FSV.DFL file stored under

C:\R_S\Instr\user is read from the instrument and stored in the controller.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub ReadFile()
'--------- Generate variables ----------------------------------------------
Dim digits As Byte 'Number of digits of
'length information
Dim fileBytes As Long 'Length of file with trace data
'in bytes
'--------- Default setting of status register ------------------------------
'--------- Read out file ---------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "MMEM:DATA? 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST1.R&S FSV.DFL'")
'Select file
CALL ilrd(analyzer, result$, 2) 'Read and store number of
digits = Val(Mid$(result$, 2, 1)) 'digits of length information
CALL ilrd(analyzer, result$, digits) 'Read and store length
fileBytes = Val(Left$(result$, digits)) 'information
FileBuffer$ = Space$(fileBytes) 'Buffer for file
CALL ilrd(analyzer, FileBuffer, fileBytes)
'Read file into buffer
CALL ilrd(analyzer, result$, 1) 'Read terminator <NL>
'--------- Store file to controller ---------------------------------------
Open "TEST1.R&S FSV.DFL" For Output As #1
Print #1, FileBuffer; '; to avoid linefeed at
'end of file
Close #1

END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.11.2 Creating a File on the Instrument
In the following example, the TEST1.R&S FSVA/FSV.DFL file available on

the controller is stored in the instrument under C:
\R_S\Instr\user\DUPLICAT.R&S FSVA/FSV.DFL.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub WriteFile()
'--------- Generate variables ----------------------------------------------
FileBuffer$ = Space$(100000) 'Buffer for file
Dim digits As Long 'Number of digits of
'length information
Dim fileBytes As Long 'Length of file in bytes
fileSize$ = Space$(100) 'Length of file as a string
'--------- Default setting of status register ------------------------------
'--------- Prepare the definite length block data --------------------------
fileBytes = FileLen("H:\work\vb\TEST1.R&S FSV.DFL")
'Determine length of file
fileSize$ = Str$(fileBytes)
digits = Len(fileSize$) – 1 'Determine number of digits of
fileSize$ = Right$(fileSize$, digits) 'length information
FileBuffer$ = "#" + Right$(Str$(digits), 1) + fileSize$
'Store length information in
'file buffer
'--------- Read file from controller ---------------------------------------
Open "H:\work\vb\TEST1.R&S FSV.DFL" For Binary As #1
FileBuffer$ = FileBuffer$ + Left$(Input(fileBytes, #1), fileBytes)
Close #1
'--------- Write file ------------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI") 'Set receive
'terminator on the
'instrument
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "MMEM:DATA
'DUPLICAT.R&S FSV.DFL', " + FileBuffer$)
'Select file
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.12 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement
You can configure Spectrum Emission Mask measurements via XML files provided for
different standards or by defining ranges and parameters. For both ways an example is
given.

5.4.12.1 Using Predefined Standard Wibro
In the following example, the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement is configured

using a predefined standard XML file.
REM ************************************************************************
'--------- General settings of the instrument ------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") 'Switch to single sweep
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:IMM;*WAI") 'Make sure no sweep is running
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:MODE ESPectrum")
'Set measurement mode
Rem After preset 3 ranges are available where the middle one is
Rem the reference range for calculating the TX power
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:FREQuency:CENTer 2.2 GHz")
'Center frequency 2.2 GHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:DETector1 RMS")
'Set RMS detector
'--------- Setting up the gated trigger ------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe ON")
'Switch on the external gate mode
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXTernal")
'Set enternal gate source
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff 0s")
'Set delay time to 0 s
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 200 US")
'Set time interval
'--------- Setting the standard --------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:ESPectrum:PRESet:STANdard
'WIBRO\DL\PowerClass_29_40.xml'")
'Set WiBro standard
'--------- Measuring -------------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep, wait for sweep
'end
'--------- Reading out results ---------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":TRACe1:DATA? LIST")
'Query list results
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?")
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.12.2 Defining 5 Ranges with all Parameters
In the following example, the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement is configured by

defining ranges and parameters.
REM ************************************************************************


CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:IMM;*WAI") 'Make sure no sweep is running
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:MODE ESPectrum")
'Set measurement mode
Rem After preset 3 ranges are available where the middle one is
Rem the reference range for calculating the TX power
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:FREQuency:CENTer 2.2GHz")
'Center frequency 2.2 GHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:DETector1 RMS")
'Set RMS detector
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":TRIGger1:SEQuence:SOURce IMMediate")
'Trigger setup
'--------- Setting up the gated trigger ------------------------------------
Rem If a free run trigger is not appropriate a gated trigger can
Rem the be set up (just comment in the following lines).
Rem CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe ON")
Rem Switch on the external gate mode
Rem CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXTernal")
Rem Set enternal gate source
Rem CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff 0s")
Rem Set delay time to 0 s
Rem CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 200 US")
Rem Set time interval
'--------- Setting the span ------------------------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:FREQuency:SPAN 8 MHZ")
'Set the span to 8 MHz
'--------- Inserting new ranges --------------------------------------------
Rem Enlarge number of ranges to 5 by adding one at the end
Rem and one at the beginnig. This ensures that the reference range
Rem remains in the middle
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:INSert AFTer")
'Insert a range after range 2
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:INSert BEFore")
'Insert a range before range 1
'--------- Defining the limit check for all ranges -------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:STATe AND")
'Set check for absolute and 'relative limit
'--------- Defining the reference range settings ---------------------------
Rem The bandwith of the reference range limits the minimum span
Rem of the reference range definition later in the script.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RTYPe CPOWer")
'Set power reference type
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:BWID 2 MHZ")
'Set bandwidth
'--------- Defining the settings of range 1 --------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:FREQuency:STARt -4 MHz")
'Set the start frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:FREQuency:STOP -2 MHz")
'Set the stop frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:BANDwidth:RESolution 1 MHZ")

'Set the resolution bandwidth

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:FILTer:TYPE CFILter")
'Set the channel filters
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:BANDwidth:VIDeo 3 MHZ")
'Set the video bandwidth to 3 MHz
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:SWEep:TIME 20 ms")
'Set the sweep time to 20 ms
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:RLEVel 5 DBM")
'Set the reference level to 5 dBm
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:INPut:ATTenuation 20 DB")
'Set the attenuation to 20 dB
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:LIMit:ABSolute:STARt -50")
'Set an absolute limit of -50 dBm
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:LIMit:ABSolute:STOP -50")
'Set an absolute limit of -50 dBm
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:LIMit:RELative:STARt -70")
'Set a relative limit of -70 dBc
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe1:LIMit:RELative:STOP -60")
'Set a relative limit of -60 dBc
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:FREQuency:STOP -1 MHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:BANDwidth:RESolution
100 kHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:FILTer:TYPE NORM")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:BANDwidth:VIDeo 300 kHZ")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:LIMit:ABSolute:STARt
-40")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe2:LIMit:RELative:STARt
-60")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:FREQuency:STOP 1 MHz")
30 kHZ")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:LIMit:ABSolute:STARt 200")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:LIMit:ABSolute:STOP 200")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:LIMit:RELative:STARt 200")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:LIMit:RELative:STOP 200")

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:FREQuency:STARt 1 MHz")

100 kHz")
-40")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe4:LIMit:RELative:STARt
-40")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:FREQuency:STARt 2 MHz")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:BANDwidth:RESolution 1 MHZ")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:FILTer:TYPE CFILter")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:BANDwidth:VIDeo 3 MHZ")
-50")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe5:LIMit:RELative:STARt -60")
'--------- Measuring -------------------------------------------------------
'end
'Query list results
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.13 Spurious Emissions Measurement
In the following example, the Spurious Emissions measurement is configured by defin-

ing ranges and parameters.
REM ************************************************************************
Rem After preset 4 ranges are available. Range settings can be questioned

Rem independent from the set measurement mode.

'--------- Deleting all ranges ---------------------------------------------
Rem Delete all ranges to prepare for setting up a new measurement
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe4:DELete")
'Delete range 4
'--------- Defining the start frequency for all ranges ---------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FREQuency:STARt 1000000")
Rem Setting the start frequency of range 1 will create the ranges and
Rem every other range value will be set to the default value.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe:COUNT?")
'Queries the number of defined
'ranges
'--------- Querying the parameters of range 1 ------------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FREQuency:STARt?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FREQuency:STOP?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FILTer:TYPE?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BANDwidth:RESolution?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BANDwidth:VIDeo?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:SWEep:TIME:AUTO?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:DETector?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:RLEVel?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:INPut:GAIN:STATe?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BREak?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:TRANsducer?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:SWEep:TIME?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:INPut:ATTenuation?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:POINts?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STARt?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STOP?")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STATe?")
'--------- Changing into the Spurious Emissions measurement mode -----------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:SWEEP:MODE LIST")
Rem In continuous sweep mode, editing the ranges is not allowed.
Rem You have to stop the measurement first.
Rem In single sweep mode, you can edit the ranges at the end of the sweep.
'--------- Single sweep version --------------------------------------------
'Change the start frequency
'end
'--------- Continuous sweep version ----------------------------------------

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "INIT:CONT ON") 'Switch to continuous sweep

CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "ABORt") 'Stop the measurement
'Change the start frequency
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":INITiate1:SPURious") 'Restart the measurement
'--------- Defining the range settings in single sweep mode ----------------
'end
Rem Edit one range at a time. Make sure to edit the ranges in a correct
Rem order to prevent limit violations. Ranges cannot overlap.
Rem The best way is to start with range 1.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FREQuency:STOP 550000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:FILTer:TYPE NORM")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BANDwidth:RESolution 3000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BANDwidth:VIDeo 10000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:DETector RMS")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:RLEVel -10")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO ON")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:POINts 8001")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:INPut:GAIN:STATe OFF")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:BREak OFF")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STARt -20")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STOP -20")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STATe ON")
Rem Proceed with range 2.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:FILTer:TYPE CFILter")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:BANDwidth:RESolution 5000000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:DETector POS")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:RLEVel -20")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:INPut:ATTenuation 0")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe2:INPut:GAIN:STATe ON")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe3:FILTer:TYPE RRC")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe4:FILTer:TYPE PULSe")


'--------- Defining the limit check for all ranges -------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "SENSe1:LIST:RANGe1:LIMit:STATe ON")
'Activate the limit check
'--------- Setting the span to include all ranges --------------------------
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:FREQuency:STARt 500000")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":SENSe1:FREQuency:STOP 6000000000")
'--------- Measuring -------------------------------------------------------
'end
'Query list results
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":CALCulate1:PSEarch[:IMMediate]")
'Deactivate limit line and
'just look for peaks
Rem Or set margin to 200 in order to find all peaks
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, ":TRACe1:DATA? SPUR")
'Query just the peaks
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.14 Averaging I/Q Data
The R&S FSVA/FSV has averaging capability also for I/Q measurements, i.e. I/Q data
can be averaged over several test runs. This is subject to the following conditions:
● An external trigger signal must be available for data measurement, and the trigger
signal must be phase-locked to the signal measured.
● The same reference-frequency signal must be used for the DUT and the
R&S FSVA/FSV.
● Internal I/Q data averaging is supported up to 512 k I/Q samples.
If all of the above conditions are fulfilled, no phase shift will occur between consecutive
test runs. Phase shift may falsify the measured average so that in extreme cases a
value of 0 is obtained.
The default setting of the instrument for data measurement without averaging has to be
changed as follows:
REM ************************************************************************
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:STAT ON")
'Activate I/Q data acquisition
'mode; this must be
'done before TRAC:IQ:SET!
'Select max. number of test points (= 512 * 1024) at 10 MHz RBW,

'32 MHz sampling rate, external

'trigger, pos. trigger edge and
'0 s trigger delay.
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10 MHz,32 MHz,EXT,POS,0,524288")
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:AVER ON") 'Switch on I/Q averaging
CALL InstrWrite (analyzer, "TRAC:IQ:AVER:COUN 10") 'Set 10 test runs
'--------- Read data in binary format --------------------------------------
…
REM ************************************************************************
5.4.15 Using IQ Gating
IQ gating refers to recording IQ samples in certain time intervals – the gate areas.
There are different modes to define the gate areas:
● Edge triggered recording
● Level triggered recording
For more information, see "IQ Gating" in the "Remote Commands" chapter under
"Trace:IQ" subsystem.
Measurement example: Level mode

With IQ gating in level mode, the area in which the gate signal is active is recorded. In
this example, the gate signal is generated by the IFP trigger. The Figure 5-7 shows the
signal (triggered externally) in IQ mode. The following sample program records the sig-
nal in level mode with an external trigger.
Figure 5-7: Signal to be recorded in IQ mode
Used values
sample rate: 32 MHz
number of IQ samples: 128000
trigger mode: IFP

Program
:TRACe1:IQ ON
Trace:iq:set NORM,0,32000000,IFP,POS,0,128000
:TRIGger1:SEQuence:LEVel:IFPower -20
:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe ON
:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:TYPE LEVel
Result
In Figure 5-8, the recorded signal using IQ gating in level mode is displayed. Edges are
only visible around the IFP trigger point, otherwise only the signal level is recorded.
Figure 5-8: Recorded signal using IQ gating in level mode
Measurement example: Edge mode

In edge mode, the gate area is defined by:
● delay (pretrigger samples)
● length
● number of periods
● gap between the periods
The gate starting point can be defined using an IFP or external trigger.
The Figure 5-9 shows the signal to be recorded in IQ mode.

Figure 5-9: Signal to be recorded in IQ mode
Example 1: Signal only

The following sample program records the signal in edge mode and displays only the
signal, without gaps and noise.
Used values
sample rate: 32 MHz
delay = 11020 samples
length =15500 samples
trigger mode: EXT
Program
:TRACe1:IQ ON
Trace:iq:set NORM,0,32000000,EXT,POS, 11020,128000
:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe ON
:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:TYPE EDGE
:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:LENGth 15500

Result
Figure 5-10: Result: signal only (no gaps, no noise)
Example 2: Noise only

The following sample program records the signal in edge mode and displays only the
noise.
Used values
sample rate: 32 MHz
delay = 0 samples
length =9000 samples
trigger mode: EXT
Program
:TRACe1:IQ ON
Trace:iq:set NORM,0,32000000,EXT,POS, 0,128000
:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe ON

Result
Figure 5-11: Result: noise only
Measurement example: Periodic signal intervals in edge mode

The gate area can also be defined by a number of gate periods and the distance
between two periods (gap). In this example, a power ramp is recorded, triggered by the
IFP on the highest edge (see Figure 5-12). As a result, only the levels of the individual
ramp areas of the first 3 periods are displayed (see Figure 5-13).
Figure 5-12: Periodic signal recording in edge mode
Used values:
sample rate: 3,2 MHz
trigger mode: IFP

length: 28800
number of periods: 3
gap: 3800 samples
Program
:TRACe1:IQ ON
trace:iq:set NORM,0,3200000,IFP,POS,0,228000
:TRIGger1:SEQuence:LEVel:IFPower -20
:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe ON
:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:NOF 3
:TRACe1:IQ:EGATe:GAP 3800
Result
Figure 5-13: Result: periodic power ramp levels
5.4.16 Usage of Four Spectrum Instances
As of R&S FSVA/FSV firmware version 1.50, you can open up to four tabs for spec-
trum mode with the softkey "New Spectrum" in the "MODE" menu. The following
remote example shows how to set up four tabs with four different measurements on a
WCDMA signal.
REM ************************************************************************
Public Sub 4SpectrumTabs()
'--------- R&S FSV default setting -----------------------------------------

CALL SetupStatusReg 'Set status registers

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*RST") 'Reset instrument

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep
'--------- Setup the first Spectrum tab (Spectrum Overview Measurement) ----
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RLEV 10 dBm")'Reference level
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:STARt 100MHz;STOP 6 GHz") 'Span
'--------- Setup the Spectrum 2 Tab (ACLR measurement) ---------------------

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INST:CRE SAN,'Spectrum 2'") 'Create Tab 2
'--- After creation the tab is in standard preset setup ---

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:CENT 2.1175GHz") 'different CF
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP") 'select ACLR meas
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES FW3Gppcdma")
'select WCDMA BTS standard
'--------- Setup the Spectrum 3 Tab (OBW measurement) ----------------------

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL OBW") 'select OBW meas
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES FW3Gppcdma")
' select WCDMA BTS standard
'--------- Setup the Spectrum 4 Tab (CCDF measurement) ----------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer," CALC:STAT:CCDF ON") 'select CCDF meas
'--------- Sweep in first Spectrum Tab and query marker --------------------

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INST:SEL SAN") 'Select Tab 1
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK1:MAX") 'Marker to peak
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK1:X?") 'Query Marker x value
CALL InstrRead(analyzer,result$)
Print "Spectrum 1 Marker x [Hz]: ";result$
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK1:Y?") 'Query Marker y value
Print "Spectrum 1 Marker y [dBm]: ";result$
'--------- Sweep in Spectrum 2 Tab and query ACLR results ------------------
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer," INST:SEL 'Spectrum 2'") 'Select Tab 2
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? ACP")'Query ACLR results
Print "Spectrum 2 ACRL results : ";result$
'--------- Sweep in Spectrum 3 Tab and query OBW results ------------------



CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW")'Query OBW results
Print "Spectrum 3 OBW results : ";result$
'--------- Sweep in Spectrum 4 Tab and query CCDF results -----------------

CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:STAT:RES1? ALL")'Query CCDF results
Print "Spectrum 4 CCDF results : ";result$
'--------- Now the sweep part can be redone without the need of ------------
'--------- doing the setup of all 4 measurements again. .------------
END SUB
REM ************************************************************************

R&S® FSVA/FSV Maintenance
Cleaning
6 Maintenance
The following chapter contains information on the maintenance of the R&S FSVA/FSV.
The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance. What is necessary is essen-
tially the cleaning of the instrument. However, it is recommended to check the rated
data from time to time.
Follow the instructions in the service manual and the safety instructions when
exchanging modules or ordering spares. The order no. for spare parts is included in
the service manual. The service manual includes further information particularly on
troubleshooting, repair, exchange of modules (including battery exchange, adjustment
of the OCXO oscillator) and alignment.
The address of our support center and a list of all Rohde & Schwarz service centers
can be found at the beginning of this manual.
6.1 Cleaning
Risk of electric shock

If moisture enters the casing, for example if you clean the instrument using a moist
cloth, contact with the instrument can lead to electric shock. Before cleaning the instru-
ment other than with a dry cloth, make sure that the instrument is switched off and dis-
connected from all power supplies.
Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents

Cleaning agents contain substances such as solvents (thinners, acetone, etc.), acids,
bases, or other substances. Solvents can damage the front panel labeling, plastic
parts, or screens, for example.
Never use cleaning agents to clean the outside of the instrument. Use a soft, dry, lint-
free dust cloth instead.
Risk of instrument damage due to obstructed fans

If the instrument is operated in dusty areas, the fans become obstructed by dust or
other particles over time. Check and clean the fans regularly to ensure that they always
operate properly. If the instrument is run with obstructed fans for a longer period, the
instrument overheats, which can disturb the operation and even cause damage.

R&S® FSVA/FSV Maintenance
List of Available Power Cables
1. Clean the outside of the instrument using a soft, dry, lint-free dust cloth.
2. Check and clean the fans regularly to ensure that they always operate properly.
3. Clean the touchscreen as follows:

a) Apply a small amount of standard screen cleaner to a soft cloth.
b) Wipe the screen gently with the moist, but not wet, cloth.
c) If necessary, remove any excess moisture with a dry, soft cloth.
6.2 Storing and Packing

The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data sheet. If the
instrument is to be stored for a longer period of time, it must be protected against dust.
Repack the instrument as it was originally packed when transporting or shipping. The
two protective foam plastic parts prevent the control elements and connectors from
being damaged. The antistatic packing foil avoids any undesired electrostatic charging
to occur.
If you do not use the original packaging, provide for sufficient padding to prevent the
instrument from slipping inside the package. Wrap antistatic packing foil around the
instrument to protect it from electrostatic charging.
6.3 List of Available Power Cables

Table 6-1: List of power cables available
Stock No. Earthed-contact connector Preferably used in
DS 006.7013.00 BS1363: 1967' complying with Great Britain

IEC 83: 1975 standard B2
DS 006.7020.00 Type 12 complying with SEV-reg- Switzerland

ulation 1011.1059, standard sheet
S 24 507
DS 006.7036.00 Type 498/13 complying with USA/Canada

US-regulation UL 498, or with IEC
83
DS 006.7107.00 Type SAA3 10 A, 250 V, Australia

complying with AS C112-1964
Ap.
DS 0025.2365.00 DIN 49 441, 10 A, 250 V, angular Europe (except Switzerland)
DS 0099.1456.00 DIN 49 441, 10 A, 250 V, straight

R&S® FSVA/FSV Error Messages
7 Error Messages
Error messages are entered in the error/event queue of the status reporting system in
the remote control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem:ERRor?. The
answer format of R&S FSVA/FSV to the command is as follows:
<error code>, "<error text with queue query>;
<remote control command concerned>"
The indication of the remote control command with prefixed semicolon is optional.
Example:
The command "TEST:COMMAND" generates the following answer to the query SYS-
Tem:ERRor?
-113,"Undefined header;TEST:COMMAND"
There are two types of error messages:
● Error messages defined by SCPI are marked by negative error codes. These mes-
sages are defined and described in the SCPI standard and not listet here.
● Device-specific error messages use positive error codes. These messages are lis-
ted below.
The right-hand column in the following tables contains the error text in bold which is
entered in the error/event queue and can be read out by means of query
SYSTem:ERRor?. A short explanation of the error cause is given. The left-hand col-
umn contains the associated error code.
Additionally, option-specific warnings and error messages displayed in the status bar
are explained.
Table 7-1: Device-specific error messages
Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation
1052 Frontend LO is Unlocked

This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails in the RF
front-end.
1060 Trigger-Block Gate Delay Error- gate length < Gate Delay
This message is displayed when the gate signal length is not sufficient for the pull-in delay
with a predefined gate delay.
1064 Tracking LO is Unlocked

This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails on the
tracking generator module.
2028 Hardcopy not possible during measurement sequence

This message is displayed when a printout is started during scan sequences that cannot
be interrupted. Such sequences are for example:
● Recording the system error correction data (alignment)
● Instrument self test
In such cases synchronization to the end of the scan sequence should be performed prior
to starting the printout.

R&S® FSVA/FSV Error Messages
Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation
2033 Printer Not Available

This message is displayed when the selected printer is not included in the list of available
output devices. A possible cause is that the required printer driver is missing or incorrectly
installed.
2034 CPU Temperature is too high

This message is displayed when the temperature of the processor exceeds 70 °C.

R&S® FSVA/FSV List of Commands
List of Commands
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion].........................................................................................852
[SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO..............................................................................853
[SENSe:]ADJust:ALL..................................................................................................................................... 769
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer................................................................................... 770
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer....................................................................................771
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation.............................................................................................. 770
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE.................................................................................. 770
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIG................................................................................................................771
[SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency........................................................................................................................ 769
[SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel..................................................................................................................................769
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt......................................................................................................................772
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE........................................................................................................................773
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>[:STATe<Trace>].......................................................................................................772
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo............................................................................................................. 776
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO.................................................................................................. 776
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio.................................................................................................. 776
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:TYPE................................................................................................... 777
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]................................................................................................... 774
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO........................................................................................ 774
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT............................................................................................774
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio........................................................................................ 775
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE......................................................................................... 775
[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire].................................................................................................... 778
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND................................................................................................................. 778
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS...................................................................................................................781
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog?........................................................................................................... 779
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar.................................................................................................................782
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent...........................................................................................................781
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA................................................................................................................. 782
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic..........................................................................................................780
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer................................................................................................................. 780
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs............................................................................................................... 781
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect............................................................................................................... 779
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber........................................................................................................... 780
[SENSe:]CORRection:EGAin:INPut[:MAGNitude]......................................................................................... 782
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod.....................................................................................................................783
[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall........................................................................................................................783
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe]...................................................................... 943
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent............................................................................................. 943
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA....................................................................................................944
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete................................................................................................. 944
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerator............................................................................................ 784
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing............................................................................................... 944
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect..................................................................................................945
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT..................................................................................................... 945
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW.................................................................................................... 946
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe]................................................................................................ 945

[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe]......................................................................................................................783
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel.................................................................................................................. 784
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe]...............................................................................................................785
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:BWID............................................................................................................................786
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa................................................................................................... 787
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe]................................................................................................. 786
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed...................................................................................................................787
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:RESTore........................................................................................................ 788
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:STORe........................................................................................................... 788
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard].................................................................................................... 788
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo.............................................................................789
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution]...................................................................788
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:COUNt...............................................................................................789
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:DELete.............................................................................................. 789
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE..................................................................................... 790
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation............................................................................791
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO.................................................................792
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe........................................................................... 792
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INSert................................................................................................ 792
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STARt........................................................793
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:ABSolute:STOP.........................................................793
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STARt........................................................ 794
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STOP......................................................... 794
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:STATe....................................................................... 794
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:RLEVel.............................................................................................. 795
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME.................................................................................... 795
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO......................................................................... 796
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer......................................................................................796
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt......................................................................... 790
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP..........................................................................791
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RRANge.......................................................................................................................797
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:RTYPe......................................................................................................................... 797
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer.......................................................................................................................797
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP............................................................................................................ 798
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO................................................................................................. 798
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK................................................................................................... 798
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor......................................................................................799
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE.........................................................................................................................799
[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet....................................................................................................................... 800
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN..........................................................................................................................800
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL................................................................................................................ 800
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt.........................................................................................................................800
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP..........................................................................................................................801
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult?......................................................................................................................802
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:SET............................................................................................................................806
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer:STATe........................................................................................................................807
[SENSe:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence]............................................................................................................... 803
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo....................................................................................... 808
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution]............................................................................. 807
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BREak..........................................................................................................808

[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:COUNt......................................................................................................... 808
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DELete.........................................................................................................809
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DETector......................................................................................................809
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE................................................................................................810
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation...................................................................................... 811
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO........................................................................... 811
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe......................................................................................812
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STARt................................................................................................. 812
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STATe.................................................................................................812
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STOP.................................................................................................. 813
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:POINts......................................................................................................... 813
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:RLEVel.........................................................................................................813
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME............................................................................................... 814
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO.................................................................................... 814
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer................................................................................................ 814
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt....................................................................................809
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP.................................................................................... 810
[SENSe:]MIXer:BIAS:HIGH........................................................................................................................... 815
[SENSe:]MIXer:BIAS:LOW............................................................................................................................ 816
[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:HANDover........................................................................................................817
[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:STARt?............................................................................................................ 817
[SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:STOP?............................................................................................................. 817
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND................................................................................................................. 817
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet....................................................................................................818
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe...................................................................................................... 818
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue].....................................................................................................818
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE.................................................................................................................. 819
[SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic[:LOW]................................................................................................................. 819
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOPower...............................................................................................................................819
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:HIGH.......................................................................................................................... 820
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH.............................................................................................................. 820
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW].............................................................................................................820
[SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW].........................................................................................................................820
[SENSe:]MIXer:PORTs..................................................................................................................................821
[SENSe:]MIXer:RFOVerrange[:STATe]......................................................................................................... 816
[SENSe:]MIXer:SIGNal..................................................................................................................................821
[SENSe:]MIXer:THReshold............................................................................................................................822
[SENSe:]MIXer[:STATe]................................................................................................................................ 815
[SENSe:]MPOWer:FTYPe............................................................................................................................. 823
[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult:MIN?....................................................................................................................824
[SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult[:LIST]?.................................................................................................................823
[SENSe:]MPOWer[:SEQuence]..................................................................................................................... 824
[SENSe:]PMETer:DCYCle:STATe...........................................................................................................827
[SENSe:]PMETer:DCYCle:VALue...........................................................................................................828
[SENSe:]PMETer:FREQuency................................................................................................................ 828
[SENSe:]PMETer:FREQuency:LINK....................................................................................................... 828
[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe.........................................................................................................................829
[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe:AVERage:COUNt........................................................................................... 830
[SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe:AVERage[:STATe]..........................................................................................829
[SENSe:]PMETer:ROFFset[:STATe]....................................................................................................... 830

[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:DTIMe.......................................................................................................... 831
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:HOLDoff....................................................................................................... 831
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:HYSTeresis..................................................................................................832
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:LEVel........................................................................................................... 832
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:SLOPe......................................................................................................... 833
[SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger[:STATe]........................................................................................................831
[SENSe:]PMETer:UPDate[:STATe]......................................................................................................... 833
[SENSe:]PMETer[:STATe].......................................................................................................................827
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs.............................................................................................................834
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel.........................................................................835
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<channel>........................................................835
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel<channel>]....................................................... 835
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel..................................................................................836
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<channel>................................................................ 836
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<channel>.................................................................. 837
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL]..........................................................................................836
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel................................................................................837
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALL..........................................................................................837
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<channel>...............................................................837
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<channel>................................................................ 838
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE............................................................................................................... 838
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel.............................................................................................. 838
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<channel>............................................................................. 839
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<channel>...............................................................................839
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet............................................................................................................. 839
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel................................................................................................ 840
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE................................................................................. 840
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO......................................................................... 840
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual...................................................................... 841
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<channel>.........................................................................842
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<channel>...........................................................................842
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel]........................................................................................ 841
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt...........................................................................................843
[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth............................................................................................................843
[SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed..............................................................................................................................843
[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection...................................................................................................................... 843
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe................................................................................................................................844
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency.................................................................................................946
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce...................................................................................................................... 947
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce:EAUTo?....................................................................................................... 947
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt............................................................................................................................... 845
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent?............................................................................................................. 845
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe............................................................................................................................... 846
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff................................................................................................................ 846
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth................................................................................................................. 847
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity................................................................................................................ 847
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce................................................................................................................ 847
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: PERiod.............................................................................................. 849
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: STOP<range>................................................................................... 849
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:COMMent........................................................................................... 848

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:STARt<range>................................................................................... 848
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>[:STATe<range>].................................................................................848
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE.....................................................................................................................849
[SENSe:]SWEep:MODE................................................................................................................................ 850
[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts............................................................................................................................... 850
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME.................................................................................................................................. 851
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO....................................................................................................................... 851
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE..................................................................................................................................851
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED?.....................................................................................................................852
*CAL?.............................................................................................................................................................600
*CLS...............................................................................................................................................................600
*ESE.............................................................................................................................................................. 600
*ESR?............................................................................................................................................................ 600
*IDN?............................................................................................................................................................. 601
*IST?..............................................................................................................................................................601
*OPC..............................................................................................................................................................601
*OPT?............................................................................................................................................................ 602
*PCB.............................................................................................................................................................. 602
*PRE.............................................................................................................................................................. 602
*PSC.............................................................................................................................................................. 602
*RST.............................................................................................................................................................. 603
*SRE.............................................................................................................................................................. 603
*STB?.............................................................................................................................................................603
*TRG..............................................................................................................................................................603
*TST?.............................................................................................................................................................604
*WAI...............................................................................................................................................................604
ABORt............................................................................................................................................................605
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF...................................................................................................... 607
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE..................................................................... 607
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?...................................................................608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN...................................................................... 608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe]...................................................................608
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK]...........................................609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X..................................................................... 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y..................................................................... 610
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet........................................................611
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe]....................................................................... 609
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO........................................................................612
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?.................................................................... 612
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe].................................................................... 611
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK........................................................................................................612
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT..................................................................................... 614
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT.....................................................................................614
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt.................................................................................... 614
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]...................................................................................613
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT.......................................................................................615
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT......................................................................................616
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt..................................................................................... 616
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]....................................................................................615
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE..................................................................................................... 613

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREF......................................................................................................617
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:FRAMe......................................................................................619
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:SARea.......................................................................................620
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]............................................................... 621
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]................................................................ 621
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe................................................................. 622
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow..................................................................622
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT................................................................... 623
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK]................................................................. 623
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe.................................................................. 623
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow...................................................................624
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT.....................................................................624
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]...................................................................625
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe.................................................................................................... 617
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X............................................................................................................. 617
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative?............................................................................................618
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?........................................................................................................... 618
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe]...................................................................................................607
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k>.............................................................................................................................. 625
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k>:STATe..................................................................................................................626
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:[IMMediate]...................................................................626
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:AUTO............................................................................626
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:MARGin........................................................................ 627
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:PSHow..........................................................................627
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k>...............................................................................................................................627
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k>:STATe.................................................................................................................. 628
CALCulate<n>:FORMat.................................................................................................................................735
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute............................................................................... 635
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe...................................................................635
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult...................................................................................636
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]............................................................................. 634
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe................................................................. 634
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute.............................................................638
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute:STATe.................................................639
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:RESult?...............................................................640
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<channel>[:RELative]............................................................ 637
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>[:RELative]:STATe............................................... 638
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe].................................................................................................. 633
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACTive?..................................................................................................................629
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CLEar[:IMMediate]..................................................................................................629
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COMMent............................................................................................................... 629
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:DOMain................................................................................................... 642
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:MODE......................................................................................................642
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:OFFSet....................................................................................................642
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:SHIFt....................................................................................................... 643
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:SPACing..................................................................................................643
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA].....................................................................................................641
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COPY..................................................................................................................... 629
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete....................................................................................................................630
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:LIMits...................................................................................................644

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:MODE..................................................................................................644
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:COUNt...................................................................... 645
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:LIMit[:STATe]............................................................646
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MAXimum................................................................. 646
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MINimum.................................................................. 647
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>[:EXCLusive]..............................................................645
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:RESTore..............................................................................................647
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:VALue..................................................................................................647
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?......................................................................................................................630
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MARGin......................................................................................................649
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MODE........................................................................................................ 649
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:OFFSet.......................................................................................................649
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SHIFt.......................................................................................................... 650
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SPACing.....................................................................................................650
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:STATe........................................................................................................ 651
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:THReshold................................................................................................. 651
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer[:DATA]........................................................................................................648
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:NAME..................................................................................................................... 631
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe.................................................................................................................... 632
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:TRACe....................................................................................................................632
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT....................................................................................................................... 632
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MARGin...................................................................................................... 652
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MODE......................................................................................................... 653
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:OFFSet....................................................................................................... 653
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SHIFt...........................................................................................................653
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SPACing..................................................................................................... 654
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:STATe.........................................................................................................654
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:THReshold..................................................................................................654
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer[:DATA]........................................................................................................ 652
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF............................................................................................................... 656
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt............................................................................................................. 656
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?...................................................................................... 657
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution.......................................................................................... 658
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE..............................................................................670
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?........................................................................... 670
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN...............................................................................671
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe]........................................................................... 671
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer...........................................................................................672
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep.............................................................................................672
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous........................................................... 672
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff.................................................................. 673
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect.....................................................................673
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe]................................................................... 674
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel:STATe................................................. 675
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?.............................................................................675
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE..........................................................................676
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SEAR:AUTO..................................................................... 676
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT................................................................................ 676
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STAT................................................................................. 677
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X........................................................................................677

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:Y?......................................................................................678
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks[:IMMediate]....................................................................... 674
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO...................................................... 687
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion?.................................................................687
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST?.......................................................................... 688
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics.............................................................. 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet....................................................................... 689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe].......................................................................689
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult?............................................................................ 678
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE....................................................... 679
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe]............................................................................ 679
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MSUMmary?...................................................................................707
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown....................................................................................... 680
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?................................................................ 681
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:QFACtor........................................................................681
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?.........................................................................682
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe...........................................................................682
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME?........................................................................... 683
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult.................................................................................684
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe]...............................................................................683
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:MODE................................................................................ 690
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet.............................................................................. 691
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ........................................................................695
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?..............................................................................692
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect............................................................................... 695
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:CATalog?......................................................... 697
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:DELete............................................................. 697
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:SAVE................................................................697
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe]..............................................................................696
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence......................................................................................684
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth|BWIDth.......................................................... 704
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold........................................................................ 705
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe.............................................................................. 705
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe].............................................................................706
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF............................................................................. 708
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage....................................................................... 708
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?............................................. 709
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?................................................. 710
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?.............................................................. 710
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe].............................................................. 711
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MODE............................................................................ 711
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd........................................................................... 711
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?.............................................712
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?.................................................712
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?..............................................................713
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe]..............................................................713
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE.............................................. 714
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?................................................714
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?....................................................715
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?.................................................................715

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe].................................................................716
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:AVERage:RESult?..................................... 716
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:PHOLd:RESult?......................................... 717
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult?...................................................... 718
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe]...................................................... 718
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe]..........................................................................719
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult?....................................................................................685
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE.............................................................. 685
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe]....................................................................................685
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:ZOOM............................................................................................. 686
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LINK.................................................................................................................658
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude...................................................................................................... 658
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO............................................................................................. 659
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT.............................................................................................. 660
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT............................................................................................. 660
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt............................................................................................. 661
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]........................................................................................... 659
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO.............................................................................................. 662
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT............................................................................................... 662
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT...............................................................................................663
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt.............................................................................................. 663
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK].............................................................................................661
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion.....................................................................................................664
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SEARch...........................................................................................................664
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:FRAMe...............................................................................................698
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea............................................................................................... 698
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MAXimum[:PEAK]........................................................................699
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK]......................................................................... 699
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe..........................................................................700
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow.......................................................................... 700
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:NEXT............................................................................ 701
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK].......................................................................... 701
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe........................................................................... 701
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow............................................................................702
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT............................................................................. 702
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK]........................................................................... 703
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe.............................................................................................................665
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X...................................................................................................................... 665
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT............................................................................................... 666
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT............................................................................................. 667
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM............................................................................................. 667
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]........................................................................................... 666
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe........................................................................................................... 668
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent...................................................................................................... 669
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?.................................................................................................................... 668
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe]........................................................................................................... 656
CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE........................................................................................................................ 720
CALCulate<n>:MATH:POSition.....................................................................................................................720
CALCulate<n>:MATH:STATe........................................................................................................................720
CALCulate<n>:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine]............................................................................................... 719

CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:AUTO................................................................................................723
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin............................................................................................ 723
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:PSHow..............................................................................................723
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges...................................................................................... 724
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate]....................................................................................... 722
CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative:STATe............................................................................................... 722
CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]......................................................................................721
CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO ONCE............................................................... 721
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate]...................................................................................................724
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:COLor......................................................................................................................724
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CONT...................................................................................................................... 725
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:COUNt........................................................................................................725
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect........................................................................................................726
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth....................................................................................................................726
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp:DATA?...................................................................................................... 728
CALCulate<n>:SGRam:TSTamp[:STATe].....................................................................................................727
CALCulate<n>:SGRam[:STATe]................................................................................................................... 727
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe].......................................................................................................729
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<Trace>................................................................................................. 729
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe].................................................................................................... 729
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples........................................................................................................... 730
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet............................................................................................................... 730
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<Trace>....................................................................................................731
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE.......................................................................................... 731
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe................................................................................................ 732
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel................................................................................................ 732
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer................................................................................................. 732
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT.................................................................................................... 733
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer..................................................................................................733
CALCulate<n>:THReshold............................................................................................................................ 733
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe................................................................................................................ 734
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line>..........................................................................................................................734
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line>:STATe............................................................................................................. 734
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer......................................................................................................................... 735
CALibration:ABORt........................................................................................................................................907
CALibration:PMETer:ZERO:AUTO ONCE.............................................................................................. 736
CALibration:RESult?......................................................................................................................................907
CALibration:STATe........................................................................................................................................908
CALibration[:ALL]?.........................................................................................................................................907
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:BIOSinfo?..............................................................................................................908
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:HWINfo?................................................................................................................909
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency.................................................................................909
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:MCFRequency..............................................................................910
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:WB2Frequency............................................................................. 910
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:WBFRequency..............................................................................910
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect].......................................................................................................911
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:NSOurce............................................................................................................... 912
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction.............................................................................................................912
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult?........................................................................................ 912
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete..................................................................................913

DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE.................................................................................... 913
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:STESt:RESult?......................................................................................................913
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:TEMPerature:FRONt?...........................................................................................913
DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:VERSinfo?.............................................................................................................914
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency..................................................................................................................915
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:DEFault......................................................................................................................915
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:HSL............................................................................................................................916
DISPlay:CMAP<item>:PDEFined.................................................................................................................. 916
DISPlay:LOGO...............................................................................................................................................917
DISPlay:MTABle............................................................................................................................................ 737
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff.............................................................................................................................. 917
DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe]............................................................................................................................... 917
DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe].................................................................................................................................918
DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe]............................................................................................................................... 918
DISPlay:TBAR[STATe].................................................................................................................................. 918
DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog?............................................................................................................................918
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect................................................................................................................................ 918
DISPlay:TOUChscreen:STATe......................................................................................................................919
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:DEFault................................................................................................... 745
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:LOWer..................................................................................................... 745
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:SHAPe.....................................................................................................746
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:UPPer......................................................................................................746
DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe]................................................................................................... 746
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT:STATe............................................................................................................ 919
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT[:DATA]............................................................................................................919
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME......................................................................................................................... 919
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat.......................................................................................................... 920
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE.....................................................................................................739
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous..............................................................................740
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing..............................................................................................740
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing..............................................................................................741
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]...............................................................................................741
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE................................................................................... 742
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel..................................................................................742
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet.................................................................... 743
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition............................................................................. 743
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue................................................................................ 744
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe].................................................................................................. 738
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:ZOOM:AREA............................................................................................................ 744
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:ZOOM:STATe...........................................................................................................745
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SELect........................................................................................738
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<m>]:SIZE........................................................................................... 737
FETCh<n>:PMETer?...............................................................................................................................747
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator...................................................................................................................... 747
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes............................................................................................................................748
FORMat[:DATA].............................................................................................................................................922
HCOPy:ABORt...............................................................................................................................................922
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:DEFault...................................................................................................................... 923
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:HSL............................................................................................................................ 923
HCOPy:CMAP<item>:PDEFined................................................................................................................... 924

HCOPy:DESTination<1|2>............................................................................................................................ 924
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor.................................................................................................................................. 925
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2>..................................................................................................................925
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL..........................................................................................................................................927
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TABLe:STATe..........................................................................................................927
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT........................................................................................................................927
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2>.................................................................................................................. 928
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe<1|2>.................................................................................................................... 928
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]..............................................................................................................................926
HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT................................................................................................................... 926
INITiate<n>:CONMeas.................................................................................................................................. 749
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous.............................................................................................................................. 749
INITiate<n>:DISPlay...................................................................................................................................... 750
INITiate<n>:ESPectrum.................................................................................................................................750
INITiate<n>:SPURious...................................................................................................................................751
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]................................................................................................................................ 748
INPut:ATTenuation........................................................................................................................................ 751
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO............................................................................................................................. 752
INPut:COUPling.............................................................................................................................................752
INPut:DIQ:CDEVice.......................................................................................................................................752
INPut:DIQ:RANGe:COUPling........................................................................................................................ 754
INPut:DIQ:RANGe[:UPPer]............................................................................................................................754
INPut:DIQ:RANGe[:UPPer]:UNIT.................................................................................................................. 754
INPut:DIQ:SRATe..........................................................................................................................................755
INPut:EATT....................................................................................................................................................755
INPut:EATT:AUTO.........................................................................................................................................756
INPut:EATT:STATe........................................................................................................................................756
INPut:FILTer:YIG[:STATe]............................................................................................................................. 756
INPut:GAIN:STATe .......................................................................................................................................757
INPut:IMPedance...........................................................................................................................................757
INPut:SELect................................................................................................................................................. 757
INPut:UPORt:STATe..................................................................................................................................... 758
INPut:UPORt?................................................................................................................................................758
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW]...........................................................................................................................760
INSTrument:DELete.......................................................................................................................................760
INSTrument:NSELect.................................................................................................................................... 760
INSTrument[:SELect].....................................................................................................................................758
MMEMory:CATalog:LONG?.......................................................................................................................... 930
MMEMory:CATalog?......................................................................................................................................929
MMEMory:CDIRectory................................................................................................................................... 931
MMEMory:CLEar:ALL....................................................................................................................................931
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,........................................................................................................................... 931
MMEMory:COMMent..................................................................................................................................... 932
MMEMory:COPY........................................................................................................................................... 932
MMEMory:DATA............................................................................................................................................933
MMEMory:DELete..........................................................................................................................................933
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO.................................................................................................................................934
MMEMory:LOAD:IQ:STATe...........................................................................................................................761
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe................................................................................................................................934
MMEMory:MDIRectory...................................................................................................................................935

MMEMory:MOVE...........................................................................................................................................935
MMEMory:MSIS.............................................................................................................................................936
MMEMory:NAME........................................................................................................................................... 936
MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect..................................................................................................................937
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP............................................................................................................................. 937
MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives?........................................................................................................... 937
MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives?............................................................................................................... 938
MMEMory:RDIRectory................................................................................................................................... 938
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL....................................................................................................................... 938
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault................................................................................................................ 938
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings.......................................................................................................... 939
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL.............................................................................................................939
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE................................................................................................................... 939
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam.................................................................................................................939
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive]...................................................................................................940
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL................................................................................................. 940
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:COMM........................................................................................................................ 762
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:STATe.........................................................................................................................761
MMEMory:STORe:SGRam............................................................................................................................762
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST...........................................................................................................................762
MMEMory:STORe<n>:PEAK.........................................................................................................................762
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPURious..................................................................................................................763
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe....................................................................................................................... 940
MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe:NEXT.............................................................................................................941
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe.......................................................................................................................763
MMEMory:USER<Softkey>........................................................................................................................... 941
OUTPut:DIQ...................................................................................................................................................764
OUTPut:DIQ:CDEVice...................................................................................................................................764
OUTPut:IF[:SOURce].....................................................................................................................................942
OUTPut:TRIGger........................................................................................................................................... 942
OUTPut:UPORt..............................................................................................................................................765
OUTPut:UPORt:STATe................................................................................................................................. 766
OUTPut[:STATe]............................................................................................................................................765
PROBe:ID:PARTnumber?............................................................................................................................. 766
PROBe:ID:SRNumber?................................................................................................................................. 767
PROBe:SETup:MODE...................................................................................................................................767
PROBe:SETup:NAME?................................................................................................................................. 767
PROBe:SETup:STATe?.................................................................................................................................767
PROBe[:STATe].............................................................................................................................................767
READ<n>:PMETer?................................................................................................................................ 768
SOURce:EXTernal<1|2>:ROSCillator: EXTernal:FREQuency...................................................................... 946
SOURce<n>:AM:STATe................................................................................................................................854
SOURce<n>:DM:STATe................................................................................................................................854
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency.......................................................................................... 855
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe]........................................................... 856
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:OFFSet<m>......................................................................857
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:SWEep[:STATe]............................................................... 858
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator.................................................... 856
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator........................................................ 857
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:POWer[:LEVel]......................................................................................858

SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:ROSCillator[:SOURce]..........................................................................859
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:ROSCillator[:SOURce]..........................................................................948
SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>[:STATe].................................................................................................855
SOURce<n>:FM:DEViation........................................................................................................................... 860
SOURce<n>:FM:STATe................................................................................................................................ 860
SOURce<n>:FREQuency:OFFSet................................................................................................................ 860
SOURce<n>:POWer:MODE.......................................................................................................................... 862
SOURce<n>:POWer:STARt.......................................................................................................................... 862
SOURce<n>:POWer:STOP........................................................................................................................... 863
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet........................................................................................861
SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude].................................................................................861
SOURce<n>:TEMPerature:APRobe..............................................................................................................947
STATus:OPERation:CONDition.....................................................................................................................949
STATus:OPERation:ENABle......................................................................................................................... 949
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition.................................................................................................................. 950
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition.................................................................................................................. 949
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]......................................................................................................................... 949
STATus:PRESet............................................................................................................................................ 950
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?.............................................................................................. 864
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle.....................................................................................................864
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition............................................................................................. 865
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition..............................................................................................865
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?.................................................................................................. 864
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition................................................................................................................ 950
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:CONDition?.......................................................................................................865
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:ENABle............................................................................................................. 866
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:NTRansition...................................................................................................... 866
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ:PTRansition...................................................................................................... 866
STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ[:EVENt]?........................................................................................................... 865
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle.....................................................................................................................951
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?......................................................................................... 866
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle................................................................................................ 866
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition.........................................................................................867
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition......................................................................................... 867
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?..............................................................................................867
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m> [:EVENt]?................................................................................................. 867
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:CONDition?.............................................................................................. 868
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:ENABle.....................................................................................................868
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:NTRansition............................................................................................. 868
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<m>:PTRansition..............................................................................................869
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:CONDition?....................................................................................... 869
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:ENABle..............................................................................................870
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:NTRansition...................................................................................... 870
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>:PTRansition.......................................................................................871
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<m>[:EVENt]?........................................................................................... 869
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition............................................................................................................. 951
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?................................................................................................. 871
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle........................................................................................................871
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition.................................................................................................872
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition.................................................................................................872

STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?......................................................................................................871
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition..............................................................................................................951
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition?................................................................................................... 872
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:ENABle..........................................................................................................873
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition.................................................................................................. 873
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition...................................................................................................873
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?....................................................................................................... 872
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?.................................................................................................................. 951
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT?]?.............................................................................................................................952
SYSTem:APPLication:SRECovery[:STATe].................................................................................................. 953
SYSTem:CLOGging.......................................................................................................................................953
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:COMMand..................................................................................... 874
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:ADDRess.................................................874
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess.......................................................................................... 953
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator.................................................................................... 954
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt?...................................................................................954
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]?................................................................................ 955
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect <1|2>............................................................................................ 955
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:INTerface.......................................................... 875
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:LINK.................................................................. 875
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:TYPE.................................................................876
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:CONFigure:AUTO[:STATe]................................................ 877
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:COUNt?.............................................................................. 878
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:DEFine................................................................................876
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:CONTrol?.................................................................................................... 955
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:ADDRess............................................... 878
SYSTem:COMPatible.................................................................................................................................... 955
SYSTem:DATE..............................................................................................................................................956
SYSTem:DEVice:ID?.....................................................................................................................................956
SYSTem:DID?............................................................................................................................................... 956
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel............................................................................................................................. 956
SYSTem:DISPlay:LANGuage........................................................................................................................957
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate.............................................................................................................................957
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL.......................................................................................................................... 957
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?.................................................................................................................................. 957
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?.............................................................................................................................. 958
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate......................................................................................................................... 958
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt............................................................................................................................... 958
SYSTem:HPCoupling.................................................................................................................................... 959
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory........................................................................................................................... 959
SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing]........................................................................................................................... 959
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE................................................................................................................................. 960
SYSTem:KLOCk............................................................................................................................................960
SYSTem:LANGuage......................................................................................................................................960
SYSTem:LXI:INFo?....................................................................................................................................... 961
SYSTem:LXI:LANReset.................................................................................................................................961
SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription........................................................................................................................... 961
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword................................................................................................................................962
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet...........................................................................................................................962
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable].....................................................................................................................962

SYSTem:PRESet...........................................................................................................................................962
SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband.............................................................................................................................. 963
SYSTem:REBoot........................................................................................................................................... 963
SYSTem:REVision:FACTory......................................................................................................................... 963
SYSTem:REVision[:STRing]..........................................................................................................................964
SYSTem:RSW............................................................................................................................................... 964
SYSTem:SHUTdown..................................................................................................................................... 964
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume.......................................................................................................................... 878
SYSTem:TIME...............................................................................................................................................964
SYSTem:TIME:TSTamp?.............................................................................................................................. 879
SYSTem:TWALking.......................................................................................................................................965
SYSTem:VERSion?.......................................................................................................................................965
TRACe:IQ:WBANd[:STATe].......................................................................................................................... 895
TRACe<n>:COPY..........................................................................................................................................879
TRACe<n>:IQ:AVERage:COUNt...................................................................................................................885
TRACe<n>:IQ:AVERage[:STATe]................................................................................................................. 885
TRACe<n>:IQ:BWIDth...................................................................................................................................886
TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA......................................................................................................................................886
TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:FORMat....................................................................................................................... 887
TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:MEMory?..................................................................................................................... 888
TRACe<n>:IQ:DIQFilter.................................................................................................................................889
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe................................................................................................................................... 890
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:GAP...........................................................................................................................890
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:LENGth......................................................................................................................890
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:NOFgateperiods........................................................................................................ 891
TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:TYPE.........................................................................................................................891
TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL......................................................................................................................................891
TRACe<n>:IQ:RLENgth.................................................................................................................................892
TRACe<n>:IQ:SET........................................................................................................................................ 893
TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe....................................................................................................................................895
TRACe<n>:IQ:TPISample?........................................................................................................................... 895
TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe]..................................................................................................................................884
TRACe<n>[:DATA]........................................................................................................................................ 882
TRACe<n>[:DATA]:MEMory?........................................................................................................................ 882
TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X?...................................................................................................................................883
TRACe<n>[:DATA]?...................................................................................................................................... 880
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:BBPower:HOLDoff................................................................................................898
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME].................................................................................................... 898
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff................................................................................................. 898
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis............................................................................................ 899
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:BBPower....................................................................................................899
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower......................................................................................................900
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower.................................................................................................... 900
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo.........................................................................................................900
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal]..................................................................................................899
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe..................................................................................................................901
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce............................................................................................................... 901
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval....................................................................................................903
UNIT:THD...................................................................................................................................................... 904
UNIT<n>:PMETer:POWer....................................................................................................................... 903

UNIT<n>:PMETer:POWer:RATio............................................................................................................ 904
UNIT<n>:POWer............................................................................................................................................903

R&S® FSVA/FSV Index
Index
Symbols Analog Demodulation mode (K7) .................................... 407
Analysis
*OPC ............................................................................... 556 Bandwidth, definition ................................................. 440
*OPC? ............................................................................. 556 Annotation ....................................................................... 155
*RST ................................................................................ 572 AP (trace information) ....................................................... 53
*WAI ................................................................................ 556 Application cards ............................................................... 10
1xEV-DO BTS mode (K84) ............................................. 409 Application notes ............................................................... 10
3G FDD BTS mode (K72) ............................................... 408 APX
9.91E37 tracking generator ............................................. 460, 468
Remote control ......................................................... 554 AQT (hardware setting) ..................................................... 52
75 Ω (enhancement label) ................................................. 52 Arrow Keys ........................................................................ 61
ASCII Trace export .................................................. 234, 531
A Att (hardware setting) ........................................................ 51
attenuation
AC supply fuse .................................................................. 28 (option B25) ...................................................... 197, 426
ACLR Attenuation
absolute limit ............................................................. 300 (option B25) ...................................................... 196, 425
adjacent channel name (remote control) .................. 838 Automatic .......................................................... 196, 425
alternate channel name (remote control) .................. 839 Manual ...................................................... 196, 425, 751
Channel Bandwidth ................................................... 297 Option B25 ........................................................ 196, 425
channel name (remote control) ................................. 839 Audio demodulation
channel names ......................................................... 299 volume (remote control) ............................................ 878
Channel Spacing ...................................................... 298 Auto adjustment
limit check ................................................................. 299 triggered measurement ............................................. 771
Limit Checking .......................................................... 299 Auto ID
number of channels .................................................. 295 External Mixer (B21, remote control) ........................ 821
reference ................................................................... 297 External Mixer (B21) ................................................. 491
relative limit ............................................................... 300 Softkey ...................................................................... 504
Weighting Filter ......................................................... 299 Auto ID Threshold
ACLR User Standard ...................................................... 303 External Mixer (B21, remote control) ........................ 822
Delete ....................................................................... 303 Softkey ...................................................................... 505
Load .......................................................................... 303 Auto level
Save .......................................................................... 303 Hysteresis ......................................................... 202, 203
Acquisition time Auto Level
Statistics ................................................................... 357 Baseband Digital ....................................................... 415
ACT Auto Peak detector ..........................................................233
Statistics ................................................................... 357 AUTO SET key ................................................................ 200
Active probes Automatic loading
Activating .................................................................. 399 Settings ..................................................................... 104
Configuring ............................................................... 404 AUX PORT
Connecting ................................................................ 403 Connector ................................................................... 22
State ......................................................................... 404 AV (trace information) ....................................................... 53
Using ......................................................................... 402 Average detector ............................................................. 233
Administrator rights ........................................................... 47 Average trace mode ................................................ 221, 231
Aligning averaging
Touchscreen ............................................................... 37 continuous sweep ..................................................... 232
Alignment single sweep ............................................................. 232
Results ...................................................................... 145 sweep count .............................................................. 232
Touch screen ............................................................ 146
Alphanumeric parameters ................................................. 65 B
AM demodulation ............................................................ 261
AM modulation ........................................................ 448, 467 Band
depth ......................................................................... 380 Conversion Loss Table (B21) ................................... 499
Depth ........................................................................ 283 External Mixer (B21, remote control) ................ 817, 818
AM Modulation depth External Mixer (B21) ................................................. 496
Measurement ............................................................ 380 Band Power
Results ...................................................................... 380 remote control ................................................... 608, 671
Amplitude softkey ...................................................... 265, 437, 438
electronic attenuation ................................................ 200 Bandwidth
Menu ......................................................................... 192 Extension .................................................................. 416
option B25 ................................................................. 200 Extension options ..................................................... 442
Amplitude distribution ...................................................... 356 Maximum .................................................................. 416
AMPT key ........................................................................ 192 Maximum usable ....................................................... 440

Menu ......................................................................... 204 Color mapping

Occupied ................................................................... 310 Color curve ............................................................... 531
Resolution ......................................................... 205, 245 Color range ....................................................... 530, 531
Video ......................................................................... 206 Color scheme ............................................................ 531
Bandwidth extension Color Mapping ................................................................. 526
Option B160 .............................................................. 439 Color printout ...................................................................157
Restrictions for use ................................................... 440 Color scheme
Baseband power Spectrogram ............................................................. 531
Trigger mode .................................................... 239, 430 Color settings
Bias Default ...................................................................... 156
Conversion Loss Table (B21) ................................... 500 Color setup dialog box .................................................... 156
External Mixer (B21, remote control) ................ 815, 816 Colors
external mixers (B21) ................................................ 489 Screen ........................................................................ 38
Bias Settings Comma ............................................................................ 552
Conversion Loss Table (B21) ................................... 502 Command sequence
Softkey ...................................................................... 502 recommendation ....................................................... 572
Blank trace mode .................................................... 222, 232 Remote ..................................................................... 604
Block data ....................................................................... 552 Commands ...................................................................... 538
Bluetooth mode (K8) ....................................................... 407 Brackets .................................................................... 552
Boolean parameters ........................................................ 551 Colon ........................................................................ 552
Brackets .......................................................................... 552 Comma ..................................................................... 552
Brochures .......................................................................... 10 Command line structure ............................................ 553
BW key ............................................................................ 204 Common ................................................................... 538
Description ................................................................ 597
C Double dagger .......................................................... 552
GBIP, addressed ...................................................... 545
CA (trace information) ....................................................... 53 GBIP, universal ......................................................... 545
calibration Instrument control ..................................................... 538
reflection measurement ............................................ 461 Overlapping .............................................................. 555
tracking generator ..................................................... 460 Question mark .......................................................... 552
transmission measurement ............................... 446, 461 Quotation mark ......................................................... 552
Calibration SCPI confirmed ......................................................... 538
Remote ..................................................................... 600 Sequential ................................................................. 555
Canceling entry ................................................................. 59 Syntax elements ....................................................... 552
Case-sensitivity Tracking .................................................................... 152
SCPI ......................................................................... 548 Vertical stroke ........................................................... 552
CDMA2000 BTS mode (K82) .......................................... 408 White space .............................................................. 552
CDMA2000 MS mode (K83) ........................................... 408 CommandS
Center frequency ............................................................. 186 Programming examples .......................................... 1000
Step size ................................................................... 186 Common commands
channel Syntax ....................................................................... 547
bandwidth ......................................................... 297, 313 Compatible mode (hardware setting) ................................ 51
number ...................................................................... 295 Computer name
spacing ..................................................................... 298 Changing .................................................................. 589
Channel ............................................................................. 50 Concluding entry ............................................................... 59
Bandwidth ......................................................... 309, 421 CONDition ....................................................................... 560
Channel bar Connector
Information .................................................................. 52 AC power supply ......................................................... 20
Channel Power AF output .................................................................... 17
Configuring ............................................................... 289 AUX PORT ................................................................. 22
Fast ACLR ................................................................ 285 EXT TRIGGER / GATE IN .......................................... 21
Measurement Repeatability ...................................... 285 External mixer ............................................................. 18
Measurements .......................................................... 283 GPIB interface ............................................................ 21
Methods .................................................................... 284 IF/VIDEO .................................................................... 21
Performing ................................................................ 289 LAN ............................................................................. 21
Results ...................................................................... 288 MONITOR (VGA) ........................................................ 21
Characters Noise source control ................................................... 16
Special ...................................................................... 598 OCXO ................................................................. 22, 141
Cleaning ........................................................................ 1044 Power Sensor ............................................................. 17
Clear status Probe power ............................................................... 16
Remote ..................................................................... 600 REF IN ........................................................................ 21
Clear Write trace mode ........................................... 220, 231 REF OUT .................................................................... 21
CLRWR (trace information) ............................................... 54 RF Input 50Ω .............................................................. 16
CNT (marker functions) ............................................. 54, 255 Tracking generator ...................................................... 17
Colon ............................................................................... 552 TRIGGER OUTPUT .................................................... 21
Color curve ...................................................................... 528 Ultra high precision reference ..................................... 23
USB ...................................................................... 16, 22

Connectors RMS Average ........................................................... 224

Front panel .................................................................. 16 Sample ...................................................................... 223
Continuous sweep ...........................................................214 Device ID ......................................................................... 158
Continuous Value Update Device-specific commands ............................................. 538
Softkey ...................................................................... 516 DHCP .............................................................................. 586
Controller ......................................................................... 536 DHCP server
Conversion Loss LAN configuration ..................................................... 589
External Mixer (B21, remote control) ........................ 820 Diagram area
Conversion Loss tables ........................................... 499, 502 Enhancement labels ................................................... 52
Available (remote control) ......................................... 779 Hardware settings ....................................................... 51
Band (remote control) ............................................... 778 Status display ............................................................. 55
Bias (remote control) ................................................ 781 Trace information ........................................................ 53
Configuring (B21) ...................................................... 499 diagram header
Deleting (remote control) .......................................... 782 tracking generator ..................................................... 468
External Mixer (B21, remote control) ........................ 820 Diagram title .................................................................... 155
External Mixer (B21) ................................................. 497 Dialog boxes
External mixers (B21) ............................................... 490 Working with ............................................................... 64
Harmonic order (remote control) ............................... 780 Dig Out (hardware setting) ................................................ 52
mixer type (remote control) ....................................... 781 DigIConf
Selecting (remote control) ......................................... 779 Softkey ...................................................... 401, 414, 482
Correction Digital Baseband Info
inherent noise ........................................... 198, 304, 427 Remote control ......................................................... 764
coupling Digital Baseband Interface (B17) ...................................... 23
default settings .......................................................... 210 Status registers ......................................................... 568
Coupling Digital IQ ................................................................. 241, 431
Resolution bandwidth ............................................... 205 Digital IQ data
Sweep time ....................................................... 207, 215 device ....................................................... 399, 413, 480
Video bandwidth ....................................................... 206 Digital IQ Info
create folder .................................................................... 169 Remote control ......................................................... 752
Softkey ...................................................... 402, 420, 481
D Digital Output
Enabling .................................................... 401, 419, 481
Data acquisition Softkey ...................................................... 401, 419, 481
Errors ........................................................................ 568 Display
Data Acquisition Date .......................................................................... 155
Softkey ...................................................................... 415 Enlarging ..................................................................... 73
Data sheets ....................................................................... 10 maximized ........................................................... 70, 737
Date .................................................................................155 Power-save mode ..................................................... 158
Setting ......................................................................... 36 split ..................................................................... 70, 737
DBW (hardware setting) .................................................... 52 Split screen ................................................................. 70
DC power supply Table ........................................................................... 70
Option B30 .................................................................. 28 Time .......................................................................... 155
DCL ................................................................................. 545 Update Rate ................................................................ 77
DEF ................................................................................. 550 Display Config
Default color settings ....................................................... 156 Softkey ...................................................................... 417
default scalings of x- and y-axis .............................. 363, 369 Display lines ............................................................ 389, 390
Default values display range
Remote ..................................................................... 603 level .................. 193, 194, 361, 362, 367, 368, 422, 423
definition of transducer factors ...................................... 1024 Display range
delay Frequency ................................................................. 186
gate signal ................................................................ 244 display settings
Delta markers .................................................................. 249 Softkey Bar State (remote control) ........................... 918
Density Status Bar State (remote control) ............................. 918
remote control ................................... 607, 608, 670, 671 DNS server
softkey .............................................................. 265, 438 LAN configuration ..................................................... 589
detector Double dagger .................................................................552
overview .................................................................... 233 DOWN ............................................................................. 550
Detector Dynamic range
Auto Peak ................................................................. 223 Intermodulation-free .................................................. 377
Autoselect ................................................................. 222 Measuring ................................................................. 382
Average .................................................................... 224
CISPR Average ........................................................ 224 E
Negative Peak .......................................................... 223
Positive Peak ............................................................ 223 Edit dialog box ...................................................................64
Quasi Peak ............................................................... 224 Edit Limit Line dialog box ........................................ 393, 396
RMS .......................................................................... 223

Electronic attenuator External Mixer Config

option B25 ................................................................. 200 Softkey ...................................................................... 495
setting ....................................................................... 200 external noise source ...................................................... 398
Electronic input attenuation external trigger ........................................................ 238, 429
FSV-B25 ................................................................... 755
Electrostatic discharge ...................................................... 24 F
ENABle ............................................................................560
Enable registers Fast ACLR ....................................................................... 285
Remote ..................................................................... 602 FFT Filter Mode
Enhancement labels ..........................................................52 Auto .......................................................... 204, 208, 216
Entry Narrow ...................................................... 204, 208, 216
Canceling .................................................................... 59 softkey ...................................................... 203, 208, 216
Concluding .................................................................. 59 file
error messages copying ..................................................................... 169
device-specific ........................................................ 1046 deleting ..................................................................... 169
Error messages ............................................................. 1046 renaming ................................................................... 169
Error queue ..................................................................... 561 File Manager dialog box .................................................. 168
Error queues Filter
recommendations ..................................................... 573 Digital I/Q (remote control) ........................................ 889
Errors Filter bandwidth
Data acquisition ........................................................ 568 Baseband Digital ....................................................... 416
ESD ................................................................................... 24 Digital I/Q (remote control) ........................................ 886
ESE (Event Status Enable register ) ............................... 562 Filter types
ESR (Event Status Register) ................................... 558, 562 5-Pole ....................................................................... 211
EVENt ............................................................................. 560 EMI (6dB) .................................................................. 211
Event status enable register (ESE) Normal (3dB) ............................................................ 211
Remote ..................................................................... 600 RRC .......................................................................... 211
Event Status Enable register (ESE) ................................ 562 Filters
Event status register (ESR) Baseband Digital ....................................................... 416
Remote ..................................................................... 600 I/Q data ..................................................................... 416
Event Status Register (ESR) ........................................... 562 Overview ................................................................... 211
EX-IQ-BOX .............................................. 400, 413, 472, 481 Selecting ................................................................... 211
DigIConf .................................................... 401, 414, 482 Types ........................................................................ 211
Export Firmware
I/Q data (remote) ...................................................... 761 Options ....................................................................... 48
export format ........................................................... 234, 531 Update ........................................................................ 47
Exporting Version ...................................................................... 158
I/Q data (remote) ...................................................... 762 fixed reference ................................................................ 260
EXREF (status display) ..................................................... 56 FM demodulation ............................................................ 261
Ext ..................................................................................... 55 FM modulation ........................................................ 448, 467
EXT TRIGGER FM Stereo mode (K7S) ................................................... 407
Connector ................................................................... 21 Focus
External mixer Changing .................................................................... 70
Connector ................................................................... 18 folder
External Mixer (B21) ....................................................... 487 renaming ................................................................... 169
activating (remote control) ................................ 815, 816 FREQ key ........................................................................ 185
Band ......................................................................... 496 frequency
band settings .................................................... 496, 817 line ............................................................................ 391
Band settings ............................................................ 496 offset ......................................................................... 188
Bias current ............................................................... 489 start ........................................................................... 188
configuration ............................................................. 495 stop ........................................................................... 188
Conversion Loss ....................................................... 497 Frequency
Conversion Loss Tables ........................... 490, 499, 502 Axis ........................................................................... 185
General information .................................................. 488 Center ....................................................................... 186
Handover frequency ................................................. 496 Display ...................................................................... 155
Harmonic Order ........................................................ 497 Lines ......................................................................... 390
Harmonic Type ......................................................... 497 Reference ................................................................... 36
Measurement example ............................................. 505 tracking generator ..................................................... 456
Preset Band .............................................................. 496 Frequency Denominator
Range ....................................................................... 497 tracking generator ..................................................... 457
remote control ................................................... 777, 815 Frequency Max.
RF Overrange ........................................................... 496 tracking generator ............................................. 455, 460
RF Start .................................................................... 496 Frequency menu ............................................................. 185
RF Stop ..................................................................... 496 Frequency Min.
softkey ...................................................................... 399 tracking generator ............................................. 455, 460
Softkey .............................................................. 189, 495 Frequency Numerator
Type .......................................................................... 497 tracking generator ..................................................... 457

Frequency Offset Harmonic Type

tracking generator ............................................. 455, 457 External Mixer (B21, remote control) ........................ 819
FRQ External Mixer (B21) ................................................. 497
tracking generator ..................................................... 468 Harmonics
Frq (enhancement label) ................................................... 53 External Mixer (B21, remote control) ................ 818, 819
Full Scale Level Measurement .................................................... 283, 384
Digital I/Q Interface (remote control) ......................... 754 HiSLIP ............................................................................. 582
Digital IQ ................................................... 400, 413, 480 Protocol ............................................................. 540, 583
Full screen Resource string ................................................. 539, 582
see Display, maximized .............................................. 70 HOME key ....................................................................... 410
Full screen level HP emulation ...................................................................966
External Mixer (B21) ................................................. 491 Hysteresis
Fuse .................................................................................. 28 Lower (Auto level) ..................................................... 203
FXD (marker functions) ............................................. 54, 255 Upper (Auto level) ..................................................... 202
G I
GAT (enhancement label) ................................................. 52 I/Q Analyzer .................................................................... 410
gate Softkey ...................................................................... 412
delay ......................................................................... 244 I/Q Analyzer mode .......................................................... 407
length ........................................................................ 244 I/Q data
ranges ....................................................................... 371 Export (remote control) ..................................... 761, 762
Gate Import (remote control) ............................................. 761
External/internal ........................................................ 243 Maximum bandwidth ................................................. 440
MODE <mode> ......................................................... 244 Sample rate .............................................................. 440
GATE IN trigger point in sample (TPIS) ................................... 895
Connector ................................................................... 21 I/Q data acquisition ....................................................... 1025
gated statistics I/Q Gating
configuration ............................................................. 371 edge triggered ........................................................... 896
configuration example ............................................... 373 level triggered ........................................................... 896
example .................................................................... 373 I/Q modulation ......................................................... 448, 467
gated trigger .................................................................... 371 I/Q-Vector
generator type I/Q Analyzer .............................................................. 417
tracking generator ..................................................... 458 Icons
GET ................................................................................. 545 Toolbar ........................................................................ 57
Getting started ..................................................................... 9 ID String User .................................................................. 966
GPIB Identification
Address ..................................................................... 545 Remote ..................................................................... 601
Characteristics .......................................................... 542 IEC/IEEE bus
interface messages ................................................... 543 Command description ............................................... 597
Remote control interface ........................................... 536 IECWIN ........................................................................... 573
tracking generator ..................................................... 459 IF power
GPIB bus control Trigger mode .................................................... 239, 430
Remote ..................................................................... 602 IF WIDE OUTPUT
GPIB interface Connector ................................................................. 416
Configuring ............................................................... 584 IF/VIDEO
Connector ................................................................... 21 Connector ................................................................... 21
GPIB Language ...............................................................966 IFC .................................................................................. 545
GSM/EDGE Analyzer mode (K10) .................................. 407 IFOVL
GTL ................................................................................. 545 tracking generator ............................................. 460, 468
IFOVL (status display) ....................................................... 56
H Impedance
Input .................................................................. 198, 427
Handover frequency Importing
External Mixer (B21, remote control) ........................ 817 I/Q data (remote) ...................................................... 761
External Mixer (B21) ................................................. 496 INF .................................................................................. 550
Hardware information dialog box .................................... 158 Inherent noise
Hardware settings correction .................................................. 198, 304, 427
Display ........................................................................ 51 initial configuration .......................................................... 184
Harmonic Distortion Input sample rate
Measurement ............................................................ 381 Digital IQ ................................................... 399, 413, 480
Results ...................................................................... 384 Input sample rate (ISR)
Harmonic order Definition ................................................................... 440
Conversion Loss Table (B21) ................................... 500 Input/Output menu .......................................................... 397
External Mixer (B21) ................................................. 497 Instrument messages ...................................................... 538
Interface functions
RSIB ......................................................................... 542

Interface messages ......................................................... 538 UNDO ......................................................................... 61

Interfaces Unit ............................................................................. 59
GPIB ......................................................................... 542 UPARROW ................................................................. 61
LAN ........................................................................... 582 Keyboard
intermodulation product ................................................... 374 On-screen ................................................................... 59
Interrupt ........................................................................... 569 Keys
Invalid results SPLIT/MAXIMIZE key ................................................. 70
Remote control ......................................................... 554 Keywords
IP address ............................................................... 539, 582 see Mnemonics ......................................................... 547
Changing .................................................................. 586
IP configuration L
LXI ............................................................................ 592
IQ data labels
remote control ........................................................... 883 tracking generator ..................................................... 468
IQ Export LAN
Softkey ...................................................................... 168 Configuration ............................................................ 585
IQ Import Configuring ............................................................... 590
Softkey ...................................................................... 168 Connector ................................................................... 21
IST ...................................................................................558 Interface ............................................................ 539, 582
IST flag ............................................................................ 562 IP address ......................................................... 539, 582
Remote ..................................................................... 601 Remote control interface ................................... 536, 582
RSIB protocol ............................................................ 541
K VISA .................................................................. 539, 582
VXI protocol ...................................................... 540, 583
key Language
AMPT ........................................................................ 192 Changing ............................................................ 35, 153
AUTO SET ................................................................ 200 level
BW ............................................................................ 204 axis ................................................................... 195, 424
DISPLAY ................................................................... 919 display range .... 193, 194, 361, 362, 367, 368, 422, 423
ESC .......................................................................... 629 range ................. 193, 194, 361, 362, 367, 368, 422, 423
LINES ....................................................................... 385 trigger ........................................................................ 241
MEAS ........................................................................ 281 Level
MEAS CONFIG ......................................................... 385 Reference ......................................................... 193, 422
MKR .......................................................................... 250 Softkey ...................................................................... 415
MKR FUNC ....................................................... 256, 257 Level Unit
MKR-> .......................................................................271 Digital I/Q Interface (remote control) ......................... 754
MODE (remote control) ..................................... 758, 760 Digital IQ ................................................... 400, 413, 480
PEAK SEARCH ........................................................ 256 limit
PRESET ........................................................... 183, 962 ACLR measurement ................................................. 300
PRINT ....................................................................... 178 Limit
RUN CONT ............................................................... 405 Evaluation range ....................................................... 355
RUN SINGLE ............................................................ 405 limit check
SAVE/RCL ................................................................ 163 ACLR measurement ................................................. 299
SETUP ...................................................................... 138 limit line ........................................................................... 391
SPAN ........................................................................ 191 scaling ....................................................................... 394
SWEEP ..................................................................... 213 shift ........................................................................... 396
TRACE ...................................................................... 219 span setting .............................................................. 394
TRIG ......................................................................... 237 Limit lines
USER ........................................................................ 181 Copying ..................................................................... 388
Key Deleting ..................................................................... 389
Alphanumeric .............................................................. 59 Editing ............................................................... 388, 396
BACK .......................................................................... 59 New ........................................................................... 387
Decimal point .............................................................. 59 Offset ........................................................................ 389
DNARROW ................................................................. 61 Recalling ................................................................... 163
ENTER ........................................................................ 59 Saving ....................................................................... 163
ESC/CANCEL ............................................................. 59 Spurious Emissions .................................................. 345
FREQ ........................................................................ 185 Time Domain Power measurement .......................... 354
GHz/dBm .................................................................... 59 line
HOME ................................................................. 62, 410 frequency .................................................................. 391
Hz/-dB ......................................................................... 59 limit ........................................................................... 391
kHz/dB ........................................................................ 59 threshold ................................................... 264, 273, 437
LEFTARROW ............................................................. 61 time ........................................................................... 391
MKR .......................................................................... 249 Lines
MODE ....................................................................... 405 display ....................................................................... 390
REDO ......................................................................... 61 Frequency (Frequency Line 1, 2) .............................. 390
RIGHTARROW ........................................................... 61 Menu ......................................................................... 386
Sign ............................................................................. 59 Time (Time Line 1, 2) ................................................ 390

LINES key ....................................................................... 385 Max Peak Count

LLO ................................................................................. 545 softkey .............................................................. 263, 436
LO exclude ...................................................................... 274 MAXH (trace information) .................................................. 54
LO level maximum search ............................................................. 272
External Mixer (B21, remote control) ........................ 819 maximum value ............................................................... 355
LO Level MC-ACLR ........................................................................ 294
Softkey ...................................................................... 503 Mean power (GSM burst) ................................................ 355
Loading MEAS CONFIG key ........................................................ 385
Instrument configuration ........................................... 104 MEAS key ....................................................................... 281
Measurement data .................................................... 104 Meas Time
local menu ....................................................................... 177 Baseband Digital ....................................................... 417
Login measurement
Operating system ........................................................ 44 functions ................................................................... 248
Logo ................................................................................ 155 parameters ................................................................ 182
LOUNL (status display) ..................................................... 56 reflection ................................................................... 462
Lower Level Hysteresis transmission .............................................................. 462
Softkey ...................................................................... 203 measurement accuracy
Lower-case (commands) ................................................. 598 tracking generator ..................................................... 460
LTE mode (K100/K101/K104/K105) ................................ 409 Measurement data
LVDS connector Loading ..................................................................... 104
B17 ........................................................................... 486 Storing ...................................................................... 104
LVL measurement example
tracking generator ..................................................... 468 amplitude distribution ................................................ 132
LXI harmonics ................................................................. 107
Browser interface ...................................................... 590 high-sensitivity harmonics ......................................... 384
LAN configuration ..................................................... 592 intermodulation ......................................................... 374
Ping ........................................................................... 592 modulated signals ..................................................... 125
noise ......................................................................... 118
M signals in the vicinity of noise ................................... 113
spectra of complex signals ....................................... 109
Magnitude test setup .................................................................. 106
I/Q Analyzer .............................................................. 417 Measurement example
maintenance ..................................................................1044 AF of AM-modulated signal ........................................ 90
Malfunctions AF of FM-modulated signal ......................................... 99
reacting ..................................................................... 572 AM modulation ............................................................ 89
manual operation ............................................................ 177 First and second harmonic ......................................... 82
changing to ............................................................... 177 Level and frequency ................................................... 78
marker Power of burst signals ................................................ 92
center frequency to ................................................... 272 Separating signals ...................................................... 85
peak .......................................................................... 272 Signal frequency using frequency counter .................. 80
reference level to ...................................................... 272 Signal-to-noise ratio .................................................... 96
search limit ................................................................ 273 Measurement menu ........................................................ 281
Marker Measurement modes
Zoom ......................................................................... 253 1xEV-DO BTS (K84) ................................................. 409
Marker Function menu .................................................... 257 3G FDD BTS (K72) ................................................... 408
Marker menu ................................................................... 250 Analog Demodulation (K7) ........................................ 407
Marker Number Bluetooth (K8) ........................................................... 407
softkey .............................................................. 264, 437 CDMA2000 BTS (K82) ............................................. 408
Marker Peak List CDMA2000 MS (K83) ............................................... 408
Activating/Deactivating ..................................... 263, 436 Changing .................................................................. 405
Configuring ....................................................... 263, 435 Displaying main menus ............................................. 410
Number display ................................................. 264, 437 FM Stereo (K7S) ....................................................... 407
Number of entries ............................................. 263, 436 GSM/EDGE Analyzer (K10) ...................................... 407
Marker Search Area I/Q Analyzer .............................................................. 407
Softkey ...................................................................... 276 LTE (K100/K101/K104/K105) ................................... 409
Marker Search Type Noise Figure (K30) .................................................... 407
Softkey ...................................................................... 276 Phase Noise (K40) .................................................... 408
Marker To menu .............................................................. 271 Power Sensor (K9) ................................................... 405
Marker Wizard Spectrogram (K14) ................................................... 405
softkey ...................................................................... 251 Spectrum .................................................................. 406
Markers ........................................................................... 249 TDS BTS ................................................................... 408
Field .......................................................................... 249 TDS UE ..................................................................... 408
Set to trace ....................................................... 251, 272 Vector Signal Analysis (K70) .................................... 408
Signal track ............................................................... 189 WiMAX/WiBro (K92/92) ............................................ 409
MAX ................................................................................ 550 WLAN (K91) .............................................................. 409
Max Hold trace mode .............................................. 221, 231

menu N
Auto Set .................................................................... 201
Input/Output .............................................................. 397 n dB down
Marker ....................................................................... 250 marker function ................................................. 262, 435
Marker Function ........................................................ 257 NAN .................................................................................550
Marker To ................................................................. 271 NAN (not a number)
Phase Noise ............................................................. 259 Remote control ......................................................... 554
Power Sensor (K9) ........................................... 510, 515 NCor (enhancement label) ................................................ 53
Print .......................................................................... 178 Negative Peak detector ................................................... 233
SAVE/RCL ................................................................ 164 Network ........................................................................... 593
Span ......................................................................... 191 Changing user passwords ........................................ 594
Sweep ....................................................................... 213 Connecting drives ..................................................... 595
Trace ......................................................................... 219 Creating users .......................................................... 594
Trigger .............................................................. 237, 428 Disconnecting drives ................................................. 595
User .......................................................................... 181 Setting up .................................................................. 574
Menu Sharing directories .................................................... 596
Amplitude .................................................................. 192 Next Mode X
Bandwidth ................................................................. 204 Softkey ...................................................................... 275
Frequency ................................................................. 185 Next Mode Y
Lines ......................................................................... 386 Softkey ...................................................................... 275
Meas ......................................................................... 281 NINF ................................................................................ 550
Setup ........................................................................ 139 NOI (marker functions) .............................................. 54, 255
Messages noise
Commands ............................................................... 538 correction .................................................. 198, 304, 427
Instrument ................................................................. 538 source, external ........................................................ 398
Instrument responses ............................................... 539 Noise Figure mode (K30) ................................................ 407
Interface .................................................................... 538 Noise source control
MI (trace information) ........................................................ 53 Connector ................................................................... 16
MIN .................................................................................. 550 NOR
Min Hold trace mode ............................................... 221, 231 tracking generator ............................................. 460, 468
MINH (trace information) ................................................... 54 normalization ........................................................... 446, 462
Mini Front Panel ................................................................ 70 tracking generator ..................................................... 468
minimum search .............................................................. 272 NTRansition .................................................................... 560
Mixer settings Numeric parameters .................................................. 65, 550
Conversion Loss Table (B21) ................................... 500 Numeric values
Mixer Type Special ...................................................................... 550
External Mixer (B21) ......................................... 497, 821
MKR FUNC key ....................................................... 256, 257 O
MKR key .................................................................. 249, 250
MKR-> key ...................................................................... 271 OBW
Mnemonics ...................................................................... 547 Multi-carrier signal .................................................... 311
Optional .................................................................... 549 Search limits ............................................................. 311
MOD (marker functions) ............................................ 54, 255 Occupied bandwidth ........................................................ 310
mode OCXO ................................................................................ 32
trigger ................................................................ 238, 428 Connector ................................................................... 22
Mode Internal reference ...................................................... 141
see also Measurement modes .................................. 405 offset
Mode (hardware setting) ................................................... 52 frequency .................................................................. 188
MODE key ....................................................................... 405 gate signal ................................................................ 244
Modulation reference level .................................................. 197, 426
Depth ................................................................ 283, 380 Offset
Modulation depth .............................................................380 Limit line .................................................................... 389
Modulation index ............................................................. 380 Trigger .............................................................. 242, 432
Modulation mode (hardware setting) ................................. 52 Offset (hardware setting) ................................................... 51
MONITOR (VGA) On-screen keyboard .......................................................... 59
Connector ................................................................... 21 Online help
More Working with ................................................................. 7
Softkey ........................................................................ 62 Operating system .............................................................. 43
More Traces Login ........................................................................... 44
softkey ...................................................................... 224 service packs .............................................................. 44
Multi-carrier Operation complete
ACLR ........................................................................ 294 Remote ..................................................................... 601
multi-carrier ACLR measurement .................................... 284 Options
Multiple signals measurement ........................................... 85 Activating .................................................................... 48
Additional Interfaces (B5) ......................................... 508
B30 ............................................................................. 28
B160 ......................................................................... 416

B160 (Bandwidth extension) ..................................... 439 Power

Bandwidth extension ......................................... 416, 442 Mean ......................................................................... 355
FSV-B25 ................................................... 196, 425, 755 remote control ................................... 607, 608, 670, 671
Identification (remote) ............................................... 602 Remote control ......................................................... 608
Installed .................................................................... 158 softkey .............................................................. 265, 438
Licenses ...................................................................... 48 power cables ................................................................. 1045
Power Sensor (K9) ................................................... 508 Power Classes
RF Preamplifier (B22) ............................... 195, 415, 424 SEM .......................................................................... 324
Output Power Max.
Sample rate, definition .............................................. 440 tracking generator ............................................. 455, 460
Output buffer ................................................................... 558 power measurement ....................................................... 280
OVEN (status display) ....................................................... 56 trace .......................................................................... 301
Overlapping commands .................................................. 555 zero span .................................................................. 353
Preventing ................................................................. 556 Power measurement
overload Occupied bandwidth ................................................. 310
tracking generator ..................................................... 460 Power Min.
Overwrite mode ....................................................... 220, 231 tracking generator ............................................. 455, 460
OVLD Power Offset
tracking generator ............................................. 460, 468 tracking generator ............................................. 454, 457
OVLD (status display) ....................................................... 56 Power Sensor
assignment ............................................................... 516
P configuration ............................................................. 516
Configuration ............................................................ 517
Pa (enhancement label) .................................................... 52 Continuous Value Update ......................................... 516
packing .......................................................................... 1045 Continuous Value Update (remote control) .............. 833
Parallel poll register enable Dropout ..................................................................... 520
Remote ..................................................................... 602 Duty Cycle ................................................................ 518
Parameters Duty Cycle (remote control, K9) ........................ 827, 828
Block data ................................................................. 552 External Power Trigger ............................................. 519
Boolean ..................................................................... 551 External Trigger Level ............................................... 520
Entering ...................................................................... 65 Frequency ................................................................. 517
Numeric values ......................................................... 550 Frequency Coupling .................................................. 518
SCPI ......................................................................... 549 Frequency Coupling (remote control, K9) ................. 828
Special numeric values ............................................. 550 Frequency Manual (remote control, K9) ................... 828
String ........................................................................ 551 Holdoff ...................................................................... 520
Text ........................................................................... 551 Hysteresis ................................................................. 520
Passwords Meas Time / Average ................................................ 518
Changing .................................................................. 594 Meas Time/Average (remote control, K9) ................. 829
path ................................................................................. 165 menu (K9) ................................................................. 510
Peak List On/Off Number of Readings ................................................. 519
softkey .............................................................. 263, 436 Number of Readings (remote control, K9) ................ 830
Peak search Ref Level Offset ........................................................ 519
Area (spectrograms) ................................................. 276 Reference from measurement .................................. 518
Mode ......................................................................... 275 Reference Value ....................................................... 519
Mode (spectrograms) ................................................ 275 Selecting ................................................................... 517
Type (spectrograms) ................................................. 276 Slope ......................................................................... 520
PEAK SEARCH key ........................................................ 256 Trigger (remote control) ............................ 831, 832, 833
PEAKSEARCH ................................................................ 272 Trigger Level (remote control) .................................. 832
Persistence spectrum Trigger mode .................................................... 240, 430
color curve ................................................................ 528 Unit / Scale ............................................................... 518
Color mapping .......................................................... 526 Use Ref Lev Offset (remote control, K9) ................... 830
Ph. Noise Auto Peak Search Zeroing ...................................................................... 517
remote control ........................................................... 612 Power Sensor (K9)
Phase Noise mode (K40) ................................................ 408 menu ......................................................................... 515
PHN (marker functions) ............................................. 54, 255 results ....................................................................... 510
Ping ................................................................................. 592 Power Sensor Assignment
PK (trace information) ....................................................... 53 softkey ...................................................................... 516
polarity Power Sensor Config
external trigger .......................................................... 432 softkey ...................................................................... 516
external trigger/gate .................................................. 242 Power Sensor Support (K9) ............................................ 405
trigger edge ....................................................... 242, 432 Power Sensors
Ports Configuring ............................................................... 513
External Mixer (B21, remote control) ........................ 821 Connecting ................................................................ 513
User .......................................................................... 765 Power Sensors (K9) ........................................................ 508
Positive Peak detector .................................................... 233 Power supply
power Connector ................................................................... 20
bandwidth percentage .............................................. 313 Switching on ............................................................... 32

power sweep R&S Support

tracking generator ..................................................... 448 softkey ...................................................... 401, 414, 482
Power Trigger RA (trace information) ....................................................... 54
Parameters ............................................................... 514 Rackmounting ................................................................... 27
PPC ................................................................................. 545 RBW (hardware setting) .................................................... 51
PPE ................................................................................. 558 Ready for trigger
PPE register .................................................................... 562 Status register ........................................................... 563
PPU ................................................................................. 545 Real/Imag (I/Q)
pre-trigger ................................................................ 242, 432 I/Q Analyzer .............................................................. 417
Preamplifier (B22) ........................................... 195, 415, 424 Realtime mode
preset instrument ............................................................ 183 color curve ................................................................ 528
PRESET key ................................................................... 183 Color mapping .......................................................... 526
print Rebooting
screen ....................................................................... 179 remote control ........................................................... 963
PRINT key ....................................................................... 178 Recall dialog box ..................................................... 166, 170
Print menu ....................................................................... 178 Recalling
Printers Settings ..................................................................... 170
Selecting ..................................................................... 41 Recommendations
Printers and Faxes window ............................................. 180 remote control programming ..................................... 572
Probe power Record Length
Connector ................................................................... 16 Baseband Digital ....................................................... 417
Probes Ref (hardware setting) ....................................................... 51
Activating .................................................................. 399 REF IN
Active ........................................................................ 402 Connector ................................................................... 21
Configuration (Softkey) ............................................. 399 REF OUT
programming examples Connector ................................................................... 21
averaging I/Q data .................................................. 1035 reference
channel power measurement ................................. 1014 fixed .......................................................................... 260
I/Q data ................................................................... 1025 level to marker level .................................................. 272
level measurement ................................................. 1022 tracking generator ..................................................... 459
limit lines and limit test ............................................ 1012 value (channel power) .............................................. 302
occupied bandwidth measurement ......................... 1017 Reference
power ramp measurement ...................................... 1019 External ............................................................... 36, 141
reading files ............................................................ 1027 Internal ................................................................ 36, 141
Spectrum Emission Mask measurement ................ 1028 Reference frequency
Spurious Emissions measurement ......................... 1032 OCXO ......................................................................... 22
time domain power measurement .......................... 1018 OCXO (option B4) ..................................................... 141
transducers ............................................................. 1024 Ultra high precision (option B14) ........................ 23, 141
writing files .............................................................. 1028 reference level
Programming examples channel power .......................................................... 304
Service request ....................................................... 1002 offset ................................................................. 197, 426
Protocol to marker level .......................................................... 272
RSIB ......................................................................... 541 Reference level ....................................................... 193, 422
VXI .................................................................... 540, 583 Reference Level
PSA emulation ................................................................ 996 Baseband Digital ....................................................... 415
PSA89600 Digital IQ ................................................... 400, 413, 481
Wideband .................................................................. 151 reference point
PTRansition ..................................................................... 560 frequency .......................................................... 259, 260
level .................................................................. 259, 260
Q peak search ...................................................... 259, 260
time ................................................................... 259, 260
QP (trace information) ....................................................... 53 reflection measurement ................................................... 462
Queries .................................................................... 538, 554 calibration ................................................................. 461
Status ........................................................................ 570 Registers ......................................................................... 558
Question mark ......................................................... 552, 554 Release notes ................................................................... 10
Quotation mark ................................................................ 552 remote ............................................................................. 891
remote control
R changing to ............................................................... 177
Remote control
R&S DigIConf .................................................................. 472 Basics ....................................................................... 536
R&S Digital I/Q Interface (B17) ...... 401, 402, 419, 420, 469, Configuration ............................................................ 574
481, 752, 764 Deactivating the instrument ...................................... 581
Applications .............................................................. 470 Ending session ......................................................... 579
Description ................................................................ 486 GPIB address ........................................................... 545
settings (remote control) ........................................... 893 Improving performance ............................................... 77
R&S EX-IQ-BOX ............................................................. 486 Interfaces .......................................................... 536, 582
Programming examples .......................................... 1000

Protocols ........................................................... 536, 582 SCPI

Setting up a connection ............................................ 579 Conformity information .............................................. 597
Starting ..................................................................... 546 Parameters ............................................................... 549
Stopping .................................................................... 547 Syntax ....................................................................... 547
VNC .......................................................................... 581 Version ...................................................................... 537
Remote operation SCPI confirmed commands ............................................ 538
Setting up .................................................................. 574 Screen
Repetition interval Colors ......................................................................... 38
Time trigger ....................................................... 242, 433 SDC ................................................................................. 545
reset search
switch on or off .......................................................... 222 minimum ................................................................... 272
Reset values peak .......................................................................... 272
Remote ..................................................................... 603 range ......................................................................... 273
Resolution bandwidth .............................................. 205, 245 Search
Result Frequency Start Bandwidth ................................................................. 189
tracking generator ............................................. 455, 458 Search limits
Result Frequency Stop OBW ......................................................................... 311
tracking generator ............................................. 455, 458 Search Mode
REV string factory Softkey ...................................................................... 275
Softkey ...................................................................... 151 Search Settings
REV string user softkey (B17) ............................................................. 433
Softkey ...................................................................... 151 Select Limit Line dialog box ............................................ 396
RF Input Select screen color set dialog box .................................. 156
Active probes ............................................................ 402 Self test ........................................................................... 162
RF Overrange Self-test
External Mixer (B21, remote control) ........................ 816 Remote ..................................................................... 604
External Mixer (B21) ................................................. 496 SEM
RF Power trigger ..................................................... 239, 429 Results ...................................................................... 326
RF Preamplifier (B22) ..................................... 195, 415, 424 sensitivity
RM (trace information) ...................................................... 53 APD measurement ........................... 364, 365, 370, 371
RMS CCDF measurement ......................... 364, 365, 370, 371
VBW .................................................................. 206, 234 Sequential commands ..................................................... 555
RMS detector .................................................................. 233 Service manual ................................................................... 9
RMS value ....................................................................... 355 Service packs .................................................................... 44
Rotary knob ....................................................................... 61 Service request (SRQ) ............................................ 561, 569
RSIB Service request enable register (SRE) ............................ 561
interface functions ..................................................... 542 Remote ..................................................................... 603
protocol ..................................................................... 541 Setting commands .......................................................... 538
RUN CONT key ............................................................... 405 Settings
RUN SINGLE key ............................................................ 405 Automatic loading ..................................................... 104
RX Settings Loading ..................................................................... 104
softkey ...................................................... 400, 414, 482 Recalling ................................................................... 170
Saving ....................................................................... 170
S Storing ...................................................................... 103
setup
SA (trace information) ....................................................... 53 general ...................................................................... 146
Safety instructions ............................................................. 10 SETUP key ...................................................................... 138
Sample detector .............................................................. 233 Setup menu ..................................................................... 139
sample number ....................................................... 361, 366 Sgl (enhancement label) ................................................... 52
Sample rate shutdown
Definition ................................................................... 440 remote control ........................................................... 964
Digital I/Q Interface (remote control) ......................... 755 signal count ............................................................. 258, 434
Digital IQ ................................................... 399, 413, 480 Signal ID
Maximum .................................................................. 440 External Mixer (B21, remote control) ........................ 821
Sample Rate Softkey ...................................................................... 503
I/Q Analyzer .............................................................. 416 Signal Source
Samples I/Q Analyzer .............................................. 399, 413, 480
Statistics ................................................................... 357 Remote control ......................................................... 757
Save dialog box .......................................................165, 170 Softkey ...................................................... 399, 412, 480
SAVE/RCL key ................................................................ 163 Signal tracking .................................................................189
SAVE/RCL menu ............................................................ 164 Search bandwidth ..................................................... 189
Saving Sinusoidal signal measurements ...................................... 78
Results ...................................................................... 170 Harmonics ................................................................... 82
scalar reflection measurement ........................................ 462 Soft Front Panel ................................................................ 70
scaling mini ............................................................................. 70
level axis ........................................................... 198, 427
x- and y-axis (signal statistic) ............................ 361, 367

softkey ..................................................................... 301, 314 Channel Bandwidth (remote control) ........................ 835
- ......................................................... 364, 365, 370, 371 Channel Settings ...................................................... 296
(remote control) ................................................ 855, 858 Channel Spacing (remote control) .................... 841, 842
# of Adj Chan ............................................................ 295 Clear All Messages (remote control) ................ 957, 958
# of Adj Chan (remote control) .................................. 834 Clear/Write ................................................................ 301
# of Samples ..................................................... 361, 366 Color (On/Off) ........................................................... 180
# of Samples (remote control) .................................. 730 Color On/Off (remote control) ................................... 925
# of TX Chan ............................................................. 295 Colors ....................................................................... 179
# of TX Chan (remote control) .................................. 843 Comment .................................................................. 180
% Power Bandwidth .................................................. 313 Cont Demod (remote control) ................................... 672
% Power Bandwidth (remote control) ....................... 843 Cont Meas (remote control) ...................................... 748
= Center .................................................................... 187 Continue Single Sweep (remote control) .......... 748, 749
= Marker ....................................................................188 Continuous Sweep (remote control) ......................... 748
0.1 * RBW ................................................................. 186 Copy ......................................................................... 169
0.1 * RBW (remote control) ............................... 798, 799 Copy (remote control) ............................................... 932
0.1 * Span ................................................................. 186 Copy to (remote control) ........................................... 629
0.1 * Span (remote control) ............................... 798, 799 Copy Trace ............................................................... 224
0.1*Demod BW (K7) ................................................. 186 Copy Trace (remote control) ..................................... 879
0.5 * RBW ................................................................. 187 Corr Data On/Off (remote control) .................... 907, 908
0.5 * RBW (remote control) ............................... 798, 799 Coupling (FSx/HP)(remote control) .......................... 959
0.5 * Span ................................................................. 187 Coupling Ratio .......................................................... 208
0.5 * Span (remote control) ............................... 798, 799 CP, ACP, MC-ACLR (remote control) ............... 692, 695
0.5*Demod BW (K7) ................................................. 187 CP/ACLR Config ....................................................... 295
ACLR Abs/Rel ........................................................... 301 CP/ACLR Standard ................................................... 295
ACLR Abs/Rel (remote control) ................................ 838 Current File List (1/2) ................................................ 169
ACLR Ref Setting (remote control) ........................... 840 Cut ............................................................................ 169
ACLR Ref Spacing (remote control) ......................... 841 Date .......................................................................... 169
Active On/Off (remote control) .................................. 945 dBm .................................................................. 195, 424
Adjust Ref Level ........................................................ 304 dBmV ................................................................ 195, 424
Adjust Ref Level (remote control) ............................. 840 dBpW ................................................................ 195, 424
Adjust Ref Lvl ............................................................ 313 dBμA ................................................................. 195, 424
Adjust Settings (remote control) ....................... 731, 839 dBμV ................................................................. 195, 424
All Functions off ................................................ 282, 283 Decim Sep ........................ 168, 226, 264, 323, 353, 437
All Functions off (remote control) .............................. 708 Default Coupling ....................................................... 210
All Marker Off ............................................................ 252 Default Settings ................................................ 363, 369
AM (remote control) .................................................. 673 Default Settings (remote control) ...................... 730, 732
Ampere ............................................................. 195, 424 Delete ....................................................................... 169
APD (remote control) ........................................ 729, 731 Delete (remote control) ..................... 630, 933, 938, 944
Application Setup Recovery(remote control) ............ 953 Delete File ................................................................. 166
ASCII File Export ...................................... 264, 322, 437 Delete File (remote control) ...................................... 931
ASCII File Export (remote control) ............................ 762 Delete Range .................................................... 320, 351
ASCII Trace Export ........................................... 167, 226 Delete Range (remote control) ................................. 789
ASCII Trace Export (remote control) ........................ 763 Density .............................................................. 265, 438
Auto (remote control) ................................................ 851 Description ................................................................ 961
Auto All ..................................................................... 201 Detector Auto Select (remote control) ...................... 853
Auto Max Peak ......................................................... 273 Detector Manual Select (remote control) .................. 852
Auto Max Peak (remote control) ............................... 659 Deviation Lin/Log (remote control) ............................ 741
Auto Min Peak .......................................................... 273 Device (1/2) .............................................................. 179
Auto Min Peak (remote control) ................................ 662 Device 1/2 (remote control) ...................................... 936
Average Mode (remote control) ................................ 773 Device Setup ............................................................ 179
Band Power ...................................................... 265, 437 Device Setup (remote control) .. 924, 925, 928, 954, 955
Band Power On/Off ........................................... 265, 438 Disable all Items ....................................................... 166
C/N (remote control) ......................................... 692, 695 Disable all Items (remote control) ............................. 939
C/No (remote control) ....................................... 692, 695 Disconnect Network Drive ........................................ 170
Calibrate Reflection Open ......................................... 446 Disconnect Network Drive (remote control) .............. 937
Calibrate Reflection Short ......................................... 446 Display Line 1 (remote control) ......................... 625, 626
Calibrate Transmission ............................................. 446 Display Line 2 (remote control) ......................... 625, 626
Calibration Frequency MW ....................................... 910 Edit (remote control) ........ 629, 632, 642, 643, 652, 653,
Calibration Frequency RF ......................................... 909 654, 943
Calibration Frequency WB ........................................ 910 Edit ACLR Limit (remote control) ..... 634, 635, 637, 638,
CCDF (remote control) ..................................... 729, 731 639
Center =Mkr Freq ......................................................272 Edit Comment ........................................................... 165
Center =Mkr Freq (remote control) ........................... 672 Edit File Name .......................................................... 165
CF Stepsize (remote control) .................................... 798 Edit Name (remote control) ....................................... 945
Chan Pwr/Hz ............................................................. 300 Edit Path ................................................................... 168
Chan Pwr/Hz (remote control) .................................. 695 Edit Path (remote control) ......................... 931, 932, 936
Channel Bandwidth ................................................... 313 Edit Power Classes ................................................... 324

Edit Reference Range ...................................... 321, 323 Lin ..................................................................... 225, 227
Edit Reference Range (remote control) .... 786, 787, 797 Link AF Spectrum Marker (remote control) ............... 658
Edit Unit (remote control) .......................................... 945 Link Mkr1 and Delta1 ................................................ 253
Edit Values (remote control) ..................................... 944 Link Mrk1 and Delta1 (remote control) ..................... 612
El Atten Mode (Auto/Man) ................................ 197, 426 Link Time Marker (remote control) ............................ 658
Enable all Items ........................................................ 166 List Evaluation .......................................................... 322
Enable all Items (remote control) .............................. 938 List Evaluation On/Off ............................................... 322
Exclude LO (remote control) ..................................... 658 List Evaluation On/Off (remote control) .................... 626
Export ....................................................................... 167 Load Standard .......................................................... 325
Extension .................................................................. 169 Local ......................................................................... 178
External ............................................................. 238, 429 Log ............................................................................ 227
External AM ...................................................... 448, 467 Manual ...................................................................... 188
External AM (remote control) .................................... 854 Manual (remote control) ............................................ 798
External FM ...................................................... 448, 467 Map Network Drive ................................................... 170
External FM (remote control) .................................... 860 Map Network Drive (remote control) ................. 937, 938
External I/Q ............................................................... 448 Margin ....................................................................... 322
External IQ (remote control) ..................................... 854 Margin (remote control) ............................................ 627
Fast ACLR On/Off ..................................................... 302 Marker 1 (remote control) ......................................... 607
Fast ACLR On/Off (remote control) .......................... 843 Marker 1 to 4 (remote control) .......... 617, 618, 656, 665
File Lists (1/2) ........................................................... 169 Marker 1-16 .............................................. 250, 379, 381
File Manager ............................................................. 168 Marker 1, Marker 2 …16 ........................... 250, 379, 381
Filter Type ................................................................. 210 Marker 2 (remote control) ......................................... 607
Filter Type (remote control) .............................. 774, 775 Marker 3 (remote control) ......................................... 607
Firmware Update (remote control) ............................ 958 Marker 4 (remote control) ......................................... 607
FM (remote control) .................................................. 673 Marker List (remote control) ...................................... 674
Free Run ........................................................... 238, 428 Marker Norm/Delta ................................... 250, 379, 381
Freq Axis (Lin/Log) (remote control) ......................... 740 Marker Norm/Delta (remote control) ......................... 607
Frequency Line 1 (remote control) .................... 627, 628 Marker Stepsize ........................................................ 252
Frequency Line 2 (remote control) .................... 627, 628 Marker Stepsize (remote control) ............................. 668
Frequency Offset ...................................................... 188 Marker Table (Off/On/Aut) (remote control) .............. 737
Full Span (remote control) ........................................ 800 Marker Table (On/Off) ............................................... 252
Gate Delay (remote control) ..................................... 846 Marker to Trace (remote control) .............................. 617
Gate Length (remote control) .................................... 847 Marker Wizard .......................................................... 251
Gate Mode Lvl/Edge (remote control) ............... 849, 852 Marker Zoom (remote control) .................................. 686
Gate Ranges ..................................................... 364, 370 Max Hold ................................................................... 301
Gate Ranges (remote control) .......................... 848, 849 Mean (remote control) ...................................... 710, 711
Gated Trigger (On/Off) ...................................... 364, 370 Meas Start/Stop ........................................................ 325
Gated Trigger (remote control) ......................... 846, 847 Meas Start/Stop (remote control) ...................... 750, 751
GPIB Address (remote control) ................................. 953 Meas Time Auto ................................................ 202, 770
GPIB Language (remote control) .............................. 960 Meas Time Manual ........................................... 202, 770
GPIB Terminator LFEOI/EOI (remote control) .......... 954 Meas to Ref (remote control, K9) .............................. 721
Grid Abs/Rel ..................................................... 198, 427 Min ............................................................................ 272
Grid Abs/Rel (remote control) ................................... 742 Min (remote control) .......................................... 615, 661
Hardware Info (remote control) ................................. 909 Mkr Demod On/Off (remote control) ......................... 674
Hold/Cont .................................................................. 222 Mkr List On/Off (remote control) ............................... 674
ID String Factory (remote control) .................... 959, 963 Mkr Stop Time (remote control) ................................ 673
ID String User (remote control) ................................. 959 Modulation ................................................................ 447
IF Gain (Norm/Puls)(remote control) ........................ 960 Modulation OFF ........................................................ 448
IF Output IF/Video (remote control) .......................... 942 More Markers ............................................................ 251
Import ........................................................................ 168 n dB down ......................................................... 262, 435
Info ............................................................................ 961 n dB down (remote control) .............. 680, 681, 682, 683
Input 50 Ω/75 Ω (remote control) .............................. 757 Name ........................................................................ 169
Input RF/Cal/TG (remote control) ............................. 911 Name (remote control) .............................................. 631
Insert after Range ............................................. 320, 351 Network Drive ........................................................... 170
Insert after Range (remote control) ........................... 792 New (remote control) 629, 632, 642, 643, 652, 653, 654
Insert before Range .......................................... 320, 351 New Folder ............................................................... 168
Insert before Range (remote control) ........................ 792 New Folder (remote control) ..................................... 935
Install Printer ............................................................. 180 Next Min .................................................................... 273
Installed Options (remote control) ............................. 908 Next Min (remote control) ......................... 616, 662, 663
Interpolation Lin/Log (remote control) ....................... 944 Next Mode </abs/> ................................................... 274
LAN Reset ................................................................ 961 Next Peak ................................................................. 272
Last Span .................................................................. 192 Next Peak (remote control) ...... 614, 615, 616, 660, 661,
Left Limit ................................................... 263, 273, 436 662, 663
Left Limit (remote control) ......................................... 666 Noise Correction ....................................... 198, 304, 427
Limit Chk On/Off (remote control) ............. 633, 636, 640 Noise Meas On/Off ................................................... 258
Limit Line Select dialog box (remote control) .... 651, 654 Noise Meas On/Off (remote control) ................. 683, 684
Limits On/Off (remote control) .................................. 666 Noise Source ............................................................ 398

Noise Src On/Off (remote control) ............................ 912 Ref Level Position (remote control) .......................... 743
Normalize .................................................................. 446 Ref Lvl =Mkr Lvl ........................................................ 272
NORMALIZE ............................................................. 462 Ref Lvl =Mkr Lvl (remote control) ..............................684
OBW (remote control) ............................................... 695 Ref Point Frequency ......................................... 259, 260
Password .................................................................. 962 Ref Point Frequency (remote control) ....................... 610
Password (remote control) ........................................ 962 Ref Point Level ................................................. 259, 260
Paste ......................................................................... 169 Ref Point Level (remote control) ............................... 610
Peak .......................................................................... 272 Ref Point Time (remote control) ................................ 610
Peak (remote control) ............................... 613, 659, 713 Ref Value (remote control) ........................................ 744
Peak Excursion ......................................... 263, 276, 436 Ref Value Position (remote control) .......................... 743
Peak Excursion (remote control) .............................. 664 Reference Fixed On/Off ............................................ 260
Peak Search ..................................................... 259, 260 Reference Int/Ext (remote control) .... 859, 946, 947, 948
Peak Search (remote control) ... 609, 674, 675, 677, 678 Reference Position (remote control) ......................... 743
Percent Marker ................................................. 366, 729 Reference Value ....................................................... 447
Percent Marker (remote control) ............................... 669 Reference Value (remote control, K9) ...................... 721
Ph Noise On/Off (remote control) ............. 609, 611, 612 Reference Value Position ......................................... 447
Ph Noise/Ref Fixed (remote control) ................ 609, 611 Rename .................................................................... 169
Phase Noise ............................................................. 259 Rename (remote control) .......................................... 935
Phase Noise Auto Peak Search ............................... 259 Res BW ............................................................. 360, 366
Phase Noise On/Off .................................................. 259 Res BW (remote control) .......................................... 774
Power ................................................ 226, 227, 265, 438 Res BW Auto (remote control) .......................... 774, 775
Power Mode .............................................................. 301 Res BW Manual (remote control) ............................. 774
Power Mode (remote control) ................................... 690 Restore Standard Files ............................................. 326
Power Sensor ........................................................... 397 Right Limit ................................................. 264, 273, 436
Power Sensor Assign ............................................... 877 Right Limit (remote control) ...................................... 667
Power Sensor Assignment ....................................... 516 RMS (remote control) ....................................... 715, 716
Power Sensor Config ................................................ 516 Save .......................................................................... 165
Power Sensor On/Off (K9) ........................................ 515 Save As Standard ..................................................... 325
Power Sensor On/Off (remote control, K9) ............... 827 Save As Standard (remote control) .......................... 788
Power Sweep ............................................................ 448 Save As Trd Factor ................................................... 447
Power Sweep (On /Off) ............................................. 448 Save Evaluation List ................................................. 322
Power Sweep (On/Off) (remote control) ................... 862 Save Evaluation List (remote control) ....................... 762
Power Sweep Start ........................................... 449, 862 Save File ................................................................... 165
Power Sweep Start (remote control) ......................... 862 Save File (remote control) ................................ 940, 941
Power Sweep Stop ................................................... 449 Scaling .............................................................. 361, 367
Power Sweep Stop (remote control) ......................... 863 Screen Colors (remote control) ................................. 923
Predefined Colors ..................................................... 180 ScreenShot ............................................................... 167
Predefined Colors (remote control) ........................... 924 Search Lim Off .......................................................... 274
Print Screen .............................................................. 179 Search Lim Off (remote control) ....................... 666, 734
Print Screen (remote control) .................... 926, 927, 936 Search Limits ............................................................ 273
R&S Support ............................................. 401, 414, 482 Search Limits (remote control) .................................. 666
Range ............................................................... 193, 422 Select 1 2 3 4 (remote control) ................................. 656
Range Lin. Unit ................................. 195, 363, 369, 424 Select Dataset .......................................................... 167
Range Lin. Unit (remote control) ....................... 740, 741 Select Directory (remote control) .............................. 945
Range Linear % ................................ 195, 363, 368, 424 Select File ................................................................. 165
Range Linear % (remote control) ...................... 740, 741 Select Items .............................................................. 165
Range Log (remote control) ...................................... 741 Select Items (remote control) ............................ 939, 940
Range Log 1 dB ................................ 194, 362, 368, 423 Select Marker (No) .................... 258, 260, 265, 434, 438
Range Log 5 dB ................................ 194, 362, 368, 423 Select Object ............................................................ 180
Range Log 10 dB .............................. 194, 362, 367, 423 Select Path ............................................................... 165
Range Log 50 dB .............................. 194, 361, 367, 422 Select Print Color Set ............................................... 180
Range Log 100 dB ............................ 193, 361, 367, 422 Select Print Color Set (remote control) ..................... 923
Range Log Manual ........................... 194, 362, 368, 423 Select Trace .............................................................. 301
RBW/VBW Manual ................................................... 209 Select Trace (remote control) ........................... 705, 844
RBW/VBW Noise [10] ............................................... 209 Select Traces to check (remote control) ................... 632
RBW/VBW Pulse [.1] ................................................ 209 Self Align (remote control) ........................................ 907
RBW/VBW Sine [1/3] ................................................ 208 Selftest Results (remote control) .............................. 913
Recall ................................................................ 166, 447 Service Function (remote control) ..................... 912, 913
Recall (remote control) ............................................. 788 Set CP Reference ..................................................... 302
Recall File ................................................................. 165 Set Standard (remote control) .................................. 788
Recall File (remote control) ....................................... 934 Set to Default ............................................................ 180
Ref Fixed .................................................................. 260 Set to Default (remote control) .................................. 923
Ref Level (remote control) ........................................ 732 Settings ..................................................................... 202
Ref Level Adjust Man/Auto (remote control) ............. 943 Shift X Limit Line (remote control) ............................ 643
Ref Level Offset ................................................ 197, 426 Shift Y Limit Line (remote control) ............................ 653
Ref Level Offset (remote control) .............................. 743 Show Align Results (remote control) ........................ 907
Ref Level Position ............................................. 197, 426 Show Peaks .............................................................. 322

Show Peaks (remote control) ................................... 627 Track On/Off (remote control) ................................... 706
Sig Count .......................................................... 258, 434 Track Threshold (remote control) ............................. 705
Sig Count On/Off (remote control) .................... 656, 657 Tracking Generator ................................................... 397
Signal Track (remote control) ................................... 706 Trg/Gate Level .......................................................... 241
Single Meas (remote control) .................................... 748 Trg/Gate Level (remote control) ................................ 900
Single Sweep (remote control) ................................. 748 Trg/Gate Polarity Pos/Neg ........................................ 242
Size ........................................................................... 169 Trg/Gate Polarity Pos/Neg (remote control) ..... 847, 901
Soft Frontpanel (remote control) ............................... 956 Trg/Gate Source (remote control) ............. 847, 899, 900
Sort Mode ................................................................. 169 Trigger Holdoff (remote control) ................................ 898
Sort Mode Freq/Lvl (remote control) ................. 676, 677 Trigger Out (Low/High)(remote control) .................... 942
Source Cal ................................................................ 446 Trigger Polarity ......................................................... 432
Source Config ........................................................... 449 Unit ................................................................... 195, 424
Source Power ........................................................... 445 Unit (remote control) ......................................... 735, 903
Source Power (remote control) ......................... 858, 861 Unit/Scale (remote control, K9) ................. 722, 903, 904
Source RF (On/ Off) .................................................. 445 Update Path (remote control) ................................... 958
Source RF (On/Off) (remote control) ........................ 765 Use Zoom Limits ....................................................... 274
Span ................................................................. 265, 438 Use Zoom Limits (remote control) ............................ 667
Span Manual ............................................................. 191 User Defined Colors ................................................. 180
Span Manual (remote control) .................................. 800 User Defined Colors (remote control) ....................... 923
Span/RBW Auto [50] ................................................. 209 User Pref Setup ........................................................ 181
Span/RBW Manual ................................................... 209 Value (remote control) .............................. 641, 648, 652
Start .......................................................................... 188 Versions + Options (remote control) ......................... 914
Start (remote control) ................................................ 800 Versions+Options (remote control) ........................... 956
Start Frequency (remote control) .............................. 800 Video ................................................................. 239, 429
Startup Recall ........................................................... 166 Video BW Auto (remote control) ............................... 776
Startup Recall (On/Off) ............................................. 167 Video BW Manual (remote control) ........................... 776
Startup Recall On/Off(remote control) ...................... 934 Video Output ............................................................. 398
Std Dev (remote control) ........................................... 718 Volt .................................................................... 195, 424
Stepsize Standard .................................................... 252 Watt .................................................................. 195, 424
Stepsize Standard (remote control) .......................... 668 Weight ADJ (On/Off) (remote control) ...................... 837
Stepsize Sweep Points ............................................. 253 Weight TX (On/Off) (remote control) ................. 837, 838
Stepsize Sweep Points (remote control) ................... 668 Weighting Filter (remote control) ...................... 836, 837
Stop .......................................................................... 188 X * RBW .................................................................... 187
Stop (remote control) ................................................ 801 X * RBW (remote control) ................................. 798, 799
Stop Frequency (remote control) .............................. 801 X * Span .................................................................... 187
Sweep Count ............................................................ 216 X * Span (remote control) ................................. 798, 799
Sweep List (remote control) ..... 788, 789, 790, 791, 792, x Offset (remote control) ........................................... 642
793, 794, 795, 796, 807, 808, 809, 810, 811, 812, 813, x-Axis Range .................................................... 361, 367
814 x-Axis Range (remote control) .................................. 732
Sweep Points ............................................................ 217 x-Axis Ref Level ................................................ 361, 367
Sweep Points (remote control) ................................. 850 x-Axis Ref Level (remote control) ............................. 732
Sweep Rep (On/Off)(remote control) ........................ 964 x*Demod BW (K7) .................................................... 187
Sweep Time ...................................................... 245, 302 y Offset (remote control) ........................................... 653
Sweeptime Auto (remote control) ............................. 851 y-Axis Max Value .............................................. 363, 369
System Messages (remote control) .................. 957, 958 y-Axis Max Value (remote control) ............................ 733
T1-T2 ->T1 ................................................................ 227 y-Axis Min Value ............................................... 363, 369
T1-T3 ->T1 ................................................................ 227 y-Unit %/Abs ..................................................... 363, 369
T1-T4 ->T1 ................................................................ 227 y-Unit %/Abs (remote control) ................................... 733
T1-T5 ->T1 ................................................................ 227 Zero (remote control, K9) .......................................... 736
T1-T6 ->T1 ................................................................ 227 Zero Span ................................................................. 192
THD Unit %/DB (remote control) .............................. 904 Zero Span (remote control) ....................................... 800
Threshold .................................................. 264, 273, 437 Softkey .............................................................................. 62
Threshold (remote control) ............................... 733, 734 *IDN format legacy .................................................... 152
Time Domain Power (remote control) ....................... 719 = Marker (remote control) ......................................... 672
Time Line 1 (remote control) ..................................... 734 Active (On/Off) .......................................................... 142
Time Line 2 (remote control) ..................................... 734 Adjust Settings .......................................... 310, 385, 421
Time+Date (remote control) ...................... 955, 956, 964 Adjust X-Axis .................................................... 351, 353
Trace 1 2 3 4 5 6 (remote control) ............................ 738 Alignment .................................................................. 145
Trace Math ................................................................ 227 AM ............................................................................ 261
Trace Math (remote control) ............................. 719, 720 AM Mod Depth .................................................. 283, 380
Trace Math Mode ...................................................... 227 AM Mod Depth (remote control) ....................... 678, 679
Trace Math Mode (remote control) ........................... 720 Annotation (On/Off) ................................................... 155
Trace Math Off .......................................................... 228 Annotation On/Off (remote control) ................... 915, 918
Trace Math Position .................................................. 228 APD .................................................................. 282, 360
Trace Mode (remote control) ... 708, 709, 710, 711, 712, Application setup recovery ........................................ 160
714, 715, 716, 717, 742 ASCII File Export ...................................................... 352
Track BW (remote control) ........................................ 704 AUTO ........................................................ 203, 208, 216

Auto Freq .................................................................. 202 Edit Margin ................................................................ 388

Auto Level ................................................................. 202 Edit name .................................................................. 143
Auto select reference ................................................ 142 Edit Name ................................................................. 387
Average ............................................................ 221, 231 Edit unit ..................................................................... 143
Average Mode .......................................................... 225 Edit Value ................................................................. 388
Band Power (remote control) ............................ 608, 671 Edit values ................................................................ 143
BB Power .......................................................... 239, 430 EL Atten (remote control) .......................................... 756
BB Power Retrigger Holdoff (remote control) ........... 898 EL Atten Mode (Auto/Man) (remote control) ..... 755, 756
Blank ................................................................. 222, 232 El Atten On/Off .................................................. 196, 425
C/N .................................................................... 309, 420 EX-IQ-BOX ............................................... 400, 413, 481
C/N (remote control) ................................................. 696 Exclude LO ............................................................... 274
C/N, C/No ................................................. 281, 309, 420 Export (remote control) ..................................... 761, 762
C/No .................................................................. 309, 420 FFT ........................................................... 203, 207, 216
C/No (remote control) ............................................... 696 FFT Filter Mode ........................................ 203, 208, 216
Calibrate Reflection Open (remote control) ...... 778, 783 Firmware update ....................................................... 160
Calibrate Reflection Short (remote control) .............. 783 FM ............................................................................. 261
Calibrate Transmission (remote control) ................... 783 Frequency Line 1 ...................................................... 390
Calibration frequency MW ........................................ 161 Frequency Line 2 ...................................................... 390
Calibration frequency RF .......................................... 161 Frequency Offset (remote control) ............................ 800
CCDF ................................................................ 283, 365 Full Span ................................................................... 191
Center ....................................................................... 186 Gate Delay ................................................................ 244
Center (remote control) ............................................. 797 Gate Length .............................................................. 244
CF Stepsize .............................................................. 186 Gate Mode Lvl/Edge ................................................. 244
Ch Power ACLR ............................................... 281, 294 Gate Settings ............................................................ 243
Channel Bandwidth ........................................... 309, 421 Gated Trigger ............................................................ 243
Clear all messages ................................................... 159 General setup ........................................................... 146
Clear Write ........................................................ 220, 231 GPIB ......................................................................... 148
Close Sweep List .............................................. 320, 351 GPIB address ........................................................... 148
Color (On/Off) ................................................... 156, 158 GPIB language ......................................................... 149
Color Mapping .......................................................... 526 GPIB terminator LFEOI/EOI ..................................... 152
Colors ....................................................................... 156 Handle missing Ext. ref ............................................. 141
Compatibility mode ................................................... 148 Hardware info ........................................................... 158
Computer name ........................................................ 146 Harmonic Distortion .......................................... 283, 384
Configure monitor ..................................................... 153 Harmonic RBW Auto ................................................. 385
Cont Demod .............................................................. 261 Harmonic Sweep Time ............................................. 385
Cont Meas (remote control) ...................................... 749 I/O logging (On/Off) .................................................. 152
Continue Single Sweep ............................................ 214 ID string factory ......................................................... 148
Continuous Sweep .................................................... 214 ID string user ............................................................ 148
Continuous Sweep (remote control) ......................... 749 IF gain (Norm/Puls) ................................................... 150
Copy to ............................................................. 144, 388 IF Power ........................................................... 239, 430
Coupling (FSx/HP) .................................................... 150 IF Power Retrigger Holdoff (remote control) ............. 898
CP, ACP, MC-ACLR (remote control) ....................... 696 IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis (remote control) ....... 899
CP/ACLR Standard (remote control) ........................ 691 Import (remote control) ............................................. 761
Decim Sep (remote control) ...................................... 747 Info (LXI) ................................................................... 147
Default Colors 1 (remote control) .............................. 915 Input (AC/DC) ........................................... 198, 398, 427
Default Colors 2 (remote control) .............................. 915 Input (AC/DC)(remote control) .................................. 752
Delete ............................................................... 144, 389 Input 50 Ω/75 Ω ............................................... 198, 427
Delete (ACLR User Standard) .................................. 303 Input source .............................................................. 161
Delete value .............................................................. 144 Insert value ............................................................... 143
Delete Value ............................................................. 388 Insert Value ............................................................... 388
Density (remote control) ................... 607, 608, 670, 671 Install option .............................................................. 160
Description ................................................................ 147 Install option by XML ................................................ 160
Deselect all ............................................................... 387 Interpolation Lin/Log ................................................. 144
Details On/Off ........................................................... 352 IP address ................................................................. 146
DHCP (On/Off) .......................................................... 147 IQ Export ................................................................... 168
DigIConf .................................................... 401, 414, 482 IQ Import ................................................................... 168
Digital IQ ........................................................... 241, 431 LAN reset .................................................................. 148
Display Line 1 ........................................................... 389 Language .................................................................. 153
Display Line 2 ........................................................... 389 Left Limit ................................................................... 356
Display lines .............................................................. 389 Limits On/Off ............................................................. 355
Display pwr save ....................................................... 158 List Evaluation .......................................................... 351
Display Pwr Save (remote control) ........................... 917 List Evaluation On/Off ............................................... 352
Display setup ............................................................ 154 Load (ACLR User Standard) ..................................... 303
Display update (On/Off) ............................................ 152 Log ............................................................................ 225
Edit .................................................................... 143, 388 Logo (On/Off) ............................................................ 155
Edit (remote control) ................................. 649, 650, 651 Logo On/Off (remote control) .................................... 917
Edit Comment ........................................................... 387 LXI ............................................................................ 147

Margin ....................................................................... 352 Screen Colors (remote control) ................................. 916

Marker 1 to 4 (remote control) .......................... 618, 668 Screen title ................................................................ 155
Marker Demod .......................................................... 260 Screen Title (remote control) .................................... 919
Marker Number ................................................. 264, 437 Search Signals .................................................. 379, 381
Marker Number (remote control) .............................. 675 Select 1 2 3 4 (remote control) ................................. 668
Marker Peak List ............................................... 263, 435 Select color set ................................................. 156, 157
Marker to Trace ................................................ 251, 272 Select directory ......................................................... 145
Marker to Trace (remote control) .............................. 665 Select object ............................................................. 156
Marker Zoom ............................................................ 253 Select Trace .............................................................. 189
Max Hold ........................................................... 221, 231 Select Traces to check ............................................. 387
Max Peak Count ............................................... 263, 436 Self-Alignment .......................................................... 145
May Peak Size (remote control) ............................... 676 Selftest ...................................................................... 162
Mean ......................................................................... 355 Selftest results .......................................................... 162
Meas Start/Stop ........................................................ 353 Service ...................................................................... 161
Mech Atten Auto ............................................... 196, 425 Service function ........................................................ 162
Mech Atten Auto (remote control) ............................. 752 Set to default ............................................................. 157
Mech Atten Manual ........................................... 196, 425 Set to Default (remote control) .................................. 915
Mech Atten Manual (remote control) ........................ 751 Shift Y Limit Line (remote control) ............................ 650
Min Hold ............................................................ 221, 231 Show align results ..................................................... 145
Mkr Demod On/Off .................................................... 261 Show error flag ......................................................... 142
Mkr Stop Time .......................................................... 261 Show Peaks .............................................................. 352
Mode default ............................................................. 149 Signal Track .............................................................. 188
Mode R&S FSP ........................................................ 149 Single Meas (remote control) .................................... 749
Mode R&S FSU ........................................................ 149 Single Sweep ............................................................ 214
Network address ....................................................... 146 Single Sweep (remote control) ................................. 749
New ................................................................... 144, 387 Soft frontpanel .......................................................... 153
New (remote control) ................................ 649, 650, 651 Sort Mode Freq/Lvl ........................................... 263, 436
New Spectrum (remote control) ................................ 760 Spectrum Emission Mask ................................. 282, 316
No. of Harmonics ...................................................... 385 Spurious Emissions .......................................... 282, 348
Normalize (remote control) ....................................... 783 Squelch ..................................................................... 261
OBW ................................................................. 282, 313 Squelch (remote control) .................................. 784, 785
OBW (remote control) ............................................... 696 Squelch Level ........................................................... 262
Option licenses ......................................................... 160 Std Dev ..................................................................... 355
Other LAN settings ................................................... 146 Subnet mask ............................................................. 147
Password .......................................................... 147, 162 Sweep ....................................................... 203, 207, 216
Peak .......................................................................... 355 Sweep Count (remote control) .................................. 845
Peak List (remote control) ......................................... 676 Sweep List ........................................................ 316, 348
Peak List On/Off ............................................... 263, 436 Sweep repeat (On/Off) .............................................. 150
Peaks per Range ...................................................... 352 Sweep Time (remote control) ................................... 851
Power (remote control) ..................... 607, 608, 670, 671 Sweep Type .............................................. 203, 207, 215
Preamp On/Off .......................................... 195, 415, 424 Sweeptime Auto ................................................ 207, 215
Preamp On/Off (remote control) ............................... 757 Sweeptime Manual ........................................... 206, 214
Predefined colors ...................................................... 156 Sweeptime Manual (remote control) ......................... 851
Predefined Colors (remote control) ........................... 916 System info ............................................................... 158
Print colors ................................................................ 157 System messages .................................................... 159
Recall (remote control) ............................................. 783 Theme selection ....................................................... 155
Ref Level ........................................................... 193, 422 Time Domain Power ......................................... 282, 355
Ref Level (remote control) ........................................ 742 Time Line 1 ............................................................... 390
Ref level adjust (Man/Auto) ...................................... 145 Time Line 2 ............................................................... 390
Reference Int/Ext ...................................................... 141 Time+date ................................................................. 152
Res BW Auto ............................................................ 205 Time+date (On/Off) ................................................... 155
Res BW Manual ................................................ 205, 245 Time+date format ......................................................155
Reset password ........................................................ 162 Time+Date Format (remote control) ......................... 920
RF ............................................................................. 161 Time+Date On/Off (remote control) .......................... 919
RF Atten Auto ................................................... 196, 425 TOI .................................................................... 283, 379
RF Atten Auto (remote control) ................................. 752 TOI (remote control) ................................................. 685
RF Atten Manual ............................................... 196, 425 Tool bar state (On/Off) .............................................. 154
RF Atten Manual (remote control) ............................ 751 Tool Bar State On/Off (remote control) ..................... 918
RF Power .......................................................... 239, 429 Touch screen alignment ........................................... 146
Right Limit ................................................................. 356 Trace 1 ...................................................................... 220
RMS .......................................................................... 355 Trace 2 ...................................................................... 220
Save (ACLR User Standard) .................................... 303 Trace 3 ...................................................................... 220
Save (remote control) ............................................... 763 Trace 4 ...................................................................... 220
Save As Trd Factor (remote control) ........................ 784 Trace 5 ...................................................................... 220
Save Evaluation List ................................................. 352 Trace 6 ...................................................................... 220
Save factor ................................................................ 144 Trace Mode (remote control) .................................... 739
Save Limit Line ......................................................... 388 Track BW .................................................................. 189

Track On/Off ............................................................. 189 SPLIT/MAXIMIZE

Track Threshold ........................................................ 189 Key ...................................................................... 70, 737
Transducer ................................................................ 142 Spurious Emissions
Trg/Gate Source ............................................... 238, 428 Limit lines .................................................................. 345
Trg/Gate Source (remote control) ............. 899, 900, 901 Measurements .......................................................... 342
Trigger Holdoff .................................................. 243, 433 Results ...................................................................... 344
Trigger Hysteresis ............................................. 243, 433 Softkey ...................................................................... 282
Trigger Offset .................................................... 242, 432 Squelch
Trigger Out ................................................................ 399 Remote control ................................................. 784, 785
User Standard ........................................................... 303 Softkey ...................................................................... 261
User-Defined colors .................................................. 157 Squelch Level
Versions+options ...................................................... 158 Softkey ...................................................................... 262
Video BW Auto ......................................................... 206 SRE ................................................................................. 558
Video BW Manual ..................................................... 206 SRE (service request enable register) ............................ 561
View .................................................................. 221, 232 SRQ (service request) ............................................. 561, 569
X Offset ..................................................................... 389 Stand-alone operation ..................................................... 593
Y Offset ..................................................................... 389 start frequency ................................................................ 188
y Offset (remote control) ........................................... 649 statistic measurements
Softkeys gated trigger .............................................................. 371
Autoselect ................................................................. 222 Status
Continuous Value Update ......................................... 516 Queries ..................................................................... 570
Detector Auto Peak ................................................... 223 Status bar
Detector Average ...................................................... 224 Hiding/restoring ......................................................... 155
Detector CISPR Average .......................................... 224 Status byte
Detector Manual Select ............................................ 222 Remote ............................................................. 600, 603
Detector Negative Peak ............................................ 223 Status byte (STB) ............................................................ 561
Detector Positive Peak ............................................. 223 Status display .................................................................... 55
Detector Quasi Peak ................................................. 224 Status registers ............................................................... 558
Detector RMS ........................................................... 223 CONDition ................................................................. 560
Detector RMS Average ............................................. 224 ENABle ..................................................................... 560
Detector Sample ....................................................... 223 EVENt ....................................................................... 560
Firmware Update ........................................................ 47 model ........................................................................ 559
Lower Level Hysteresis ............................................. 203 NTRansition .............................................................. 560
Marker Search Area .................................................. 276 parts .......................................................................... 559
Marker Search Type ................................................. 276 PTRansition .............................................................. 560
More ............................................................................ 62 STATus:OPERation .................................................. 563
Next Mode X ............................................................. 275 STATus:QUEStionable ............................................. 563
Next Mode Y ............................................................. 275 STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit ............................. 564
Power Sensor ................................................... 240, 430 STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency ....................... 566
Probe Config ............................................................. 399 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit .................................... 566
Search Mode ............................................................ 275 STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin ............................. 567
Up ............................................................................... 62 STATus:QUEStionable:POWer ................................ 568
Upper Level Hysteresis ............................................. 202 STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC .................................. 568
Source Power Status reporting system .................................................. 557
tracking generator ............................................. 454, 457 Application ................................................................ 569
Span Common commands ................................................. 599
softkey .............................................................. 265, 438 STB ................................................................................. 558
SPAN key ........................................................................ 191 Step size
Span menu ...................................................................... 191 Center frequency ...................................................... 186
SPD ................................................................................. 545 stop frequency .................................................................188
SPE ................................................................................. 545 storing ........................................................................... 1045
Speaker Storing
remote control ........................................................... 878 Instrument configuration ........................................... 103
Special characters ........................................................... 598 Measurement data .................................................... 104
Spectrogram String in remote commands ............................................ 551
color curve ................................................................ 528 Suffixes ........................................................................... 548
Color mapping .......................................................... 526 supply voltage, external noise source ............................. 398
Color scheme ............................................................ 531 sweep
Displaying ................................................................. 521 count ......................................................................... 216
Menu ......................................................................... 525 Free Run ........................................................... 238, 428
Spectrogram mode (K14) ................................................ 521 gated ......................................................................... 245
Spectrum Emission Mask Sweep
Measurements .......................................................... 314 Continue single sweep .............................................. 214
Power Classes .......................................................... 324 Continuous ................................................................ 214
Softkey .............................................................. 282, 316 Gated ........................................................................ 243
Spectrum mode ............................................................... 406 Single ........................................................................ 214
Time .................................................................. 206, 214

SWEEP key ..................................................................... 213 Trace

sweep list Clear Write ........................................................ 220, 231
Fast SEM (remote control) ........................................ 787 Signal tracking .......................................................... 189
Sweep List Trace information
Symmetrical .............................................................. 321 Detector type .............................................................. 53
Sweep menu ................................................................... 213 Trace number ............................................................. 53
Sweep status TRACE key ..................................................................... 219
Status register ........................................................... 563 Trace menu ..................................................................... 219
Sweep time Trace mode ..................................................................... 220
Coupling ............................................................ 207, 215 Average ............................................................ 221, 231
Statistics ................................................................... 357 Blank ................................................................. 222, 232
SWT (hardware setting) .................................................... 51 Clear Write ........................................................ 220, 231
Syntax elements Max Hold ........................................................... 221, 231
SCPI ......................................................................... 552 Min Hold ............................................................ 221, 231
System messages dialog box ......................................... 159 View .................................................................. 221, 232
TRACe:IQ subsystem ..................................................... 883
T Traces
Loading ..................................................................... 104
TCP/IP Storing ...................................................................... 104
tracking generator ..................................................... 459 tracking generator
TCP/IP address configuration (remote control) ................... 874, 875, 878
tracking generator ..................................................... 459 display ....................................................................... 468
Tdf (enhancement label) ................................................... 52 error messages ......................................................... 468
TDS BTS mode ............................................................... 408 Power Offset (remote control) ................................... 861
TDS UE mode ................................................................. 408 power sweep ............................................................. 448
Test reverse sweep .......................................................... 448
Self test ..................................................................... 162 selecting ............................................................ 454, 456
Text paramters in remote commands ............................. 551 TTL Synchronization (remote control) ...................... 875
Themes Tracking generator
Display ........................................................................ 76 Connector ................................................................... 17
threshold Tracking Generator
line ............................................................ 264, 273, 437 Denominator (remote control) ................................... 856
Threshold Frequency Offset (remote control) .................... 857, 860
Signal tracking .......................................................... 189 Numerator (remote control) ...................................... 857
Time ................................................................................ 155 Tracking Generators
Setting ......................................................................... 36 remote control ........................................................... 777
softkey .............................................................. 241, 431 transducer ....................................................................... 142
Time Domain Power Transducer
Restricting range ....................................................... 354 Activating .................................................................. 142
Results ...................................................................... 353 Transducers
time line ........................................................................... 391 Recalling ................................................................... 163
Time line .......................................................................... 390 Saving ....................................................................... 163
Time trigger transmission measurement
Repetition interval ............................................. 242, 433 calibration ................................................................. 461
timestamp tracking generator ..................................................... 462
instrument (remote control) ....................................... 879 Tree walking
Title Softkey ...................................................................... 151
Diagram .................................................................... 155 TRG (enhancement label) ................................................. 52
Toggling TRIG key ......................................................................... 237
Span values ................................................................ 59 trigger
TOI external ............................................................. 238, 429
Measurement ............................................................ 374 level .......................................................................... 241
Results ...................................................................... 378 slope ................................................................. 242, 432
TOI (marker functions) .............................................. 54, 255 Trigger
Toolbar Event (remote) .......................................................... 603
Icon ............................................................................. 57 External gate ............................................................. 243
Toggle ......................................................................... 57 Gated sweep ............................................................. 244
Touch screen Holdoff .............................................................. 243, 433
Alignment .................................................................. 146 Hysteresis ......................................................... 243, 433
Touchscreen Level ......................................................................... 432
Aligning ....................................................................... 37 Offset ................................................................ 242, 432
Display ........................................................................ 15 Status register ........................................................... 563
TPIS Trigger menu ........................................................... 237, 428
I/Q data ..................................................................... 895 trigger mode ............................................................ 238, 428
trace External ............................................................. 238, 429
power measurement ................................................. 301 Free Run ........................................................... 238, 428
Video ................................................................. 239, 429

Trigger mode Waiting for trigger

BB power .......................................................... 239, 430 Status register ........................................................... 563
Digital IQ ........................................................... 241, 431 Web browser
IF power ............................................................ 239, 430 Configuration interface .............................................. 590
RF power .......................................................... 239, 429 weighting filter ................................................................. 299
TRIGGER OUTPUT White papers ..................................................................... 10
Connector ................................................................... 21 White space .................................................................... 552
Triggers Wideband
Power Sensor ........................................................... 514 PSA89600 ................................................................. 151
TRK (marker functions) ............................................. 54, 255 WiMAX mode (K92/92) ................................................... 409
TTL synchronization Windows 10 .......................................................................43
tracking generator ..................................................... 459 Access ........................................................................ 46
TX Settings WLAN mode (K91) .......................................................... 409
EX-IQ-BOX ............................................... 400, 414, 482
Y
U
Y-Axis Max
Ultra high precision reference ......................................... 141 I/Q Analyzer .............................................................. 422
Connector ................................................................... 23 YIG filter
UNCAL (status display) ..................................................... 56 see YIG preselector .................................................. 199
Up YIG preselector
Softkey ........................................................................ 62 Activating/Deactivating ..................................... 199, 756
UP ................................................................................... 550
Update rate Z
Display ........................................................................ 77
Updates ............................................................................. 47 zero span ........................................................................ 192
Upper Level Hysteresis Zero span measurements ................................................. 91
Softkey ...................................................................... 202 zeroing (K9) .....................................................................512
Upper-case (commands) ................................................. 598 zoom
Usable I/Q bandwidth area (remote control) ................................................ 744
Definition ................................................................... 440 remote control ........................................................... 745
USB Zoom ............................................................................... 253
Connector ................................................................... 22 Amplitude .......................................................... 221, 232
User account ..................................................................... 47
USER key ........................................................................ 181
Remote ..................................................................... 941
User ports
Remote control ......................................................... 765
User sample rate
Definition ................................................................... 440
user-defined menu .......................................................... 181
V
VBW
RMS detector .................................................... 206, 234
VBW (hardware setting) .................................................... 51
Vector Signal Analysis mode (K70) ................................. 408
Versions/Options dialog box ........................................... 158
Vertical stroke ................................................................. 552
Video bandwidth ..............................................................206
video triggering ........................................................239, 429
View Filter ....................................................................... 393
View trace mode ..................................................... 221, 232
Virus protection ................................................................. 44
VISA ................................................................ 537, 539, 582
Libraries .................................................................... 538
Resource string ......................................... 538, 539, 582
VNC ................................................................................. 581
Volume
remote control ........................................................... 878
VXI protocol .............................................................540, 583
W
Wait
Remote ..................................................................... 604

FSV30 Spectrum Analyzer Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FSV30 Spectrum Analyzer Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FSV30 Spectrum Analyzer Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

R&S® FSVA/FSV

Signal and Spectrum Analyzer

In addition to the base unit, the following options are described:

© 2017 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

4 Instrument Functions........................................................................ 135

Operating Manual 1176.7510.02 ─ 10 3

4.9 Instrument Functions - Power Sensor (R&S FSV-K9)........................................... 508

5 Remote Control.................................................................................. 534

7 Error Messages................................................................................ 1046

Operating Manual 1176.7510.02 ─ 10 4

1.1 For Your Safety

1.2 Notes for Users of R&S FSV 1307.9002Kxx Models

Operating Manual 1176.7510.02 ─ 10 5

1.3 Conventions Used in the Documentation

1.3.1 Typographical Conventions

The following text markers are used throughout this documentation:

KEYS Key names are written in capital letters.

Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.

"References" References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota-

1.3.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions

1.3.3 Notes on Screenshots

Operating Manual 1176.7510.02 ─ 10 6

1.4 How to Use the Help System

Calling context-sensitive and general help

Contents of the help dialog box

Navigating in the table of contents

Navigating in the help topics

Searching for a topic

1. Change to the "Index" tab.

Operating Manual 1176.7510.02 ─ 10 7

3. Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key.

5. Press the ENTER key to display the help topic.

Changing the zoom

1. Change to the "Zoom" tab.

Closing the help window

► Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel.

Operating Manual 1176.7510.02 ─ 10 8

2.1 Quick Start Guide

2.2 Operating Manuals and Help

2.3 Service Manual

Operating Manual 1176.7510.02 ─ 10 9

2.4 Instrument Security Procedures

2.5 Basic Safety Instructions

2.6 Data Sheets and Brochures

2.7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment

2.8 Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers,

Operating Manual 1176.7510.02 ─ 10 10

3.1 Front and Rear Panel View

3.1.1 Front Panel View

Figure 3-1: Front panel view of an R&S FSVA

No. Description See

Operating Manual 1176.7510.02 ─ 10 11

No. Description See

3 ON/OFF switch Chapter 3.2.1.8, "Switching the Instrument On and Off",

9 Marker functions Chapter 3.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",

10 Measurement configuration Chapter 3.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",

11 Measurement start Chapter 3.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel",

13 Rotary knob Chapter 3.4.2.5, "Rotary Knob", on page 61

14 Arrow keys Chapter 3.4.2.6, "Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys",

15 Undo/redo functions Chapter 3.4.2.6, "Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys",